Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
0
User Guide
Edition
This edition applies to SynerGEE Electric 5.0 and to subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise
indicated in new editions.
Trademarks
SynerGEE is a registered trademark and Stoner Software is a trademark of GL Noble Denton, Inc. All brands
and product names are trademarks of the respective owner.
Restricted rights, warranties, and liabilities
The software discussed in this document is provided under a Software License Agreement and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license.
All warranties given by GL Noble Denton, Inc. concerning GL Noble Denton asset software are set forth in the
Software License Agreement between GL Noble Denton, Inc. and the licensee.
GL Noble Denton assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. We reserve the
right to change our software and documentation without notice.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions defined as Rights
specified in the license as set forth in subdivisions (a) and (b) of the DFARS clause 227.7202-3 entitled
Rights in Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation.
Copyright notice
2013 GL Noble Denton, Inc.
600 Bent Creek Blvd., Suite 100
Mechanicsburg, PA 17050 USA
+1 717 724 1900
www.gl-group.com/electric
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction
The SynerGEE Approach to Device Models ................................................................................... 51
SynerGEE Documentation .............................................................................................................. 52
Terms Cross-Reference .................................................................................................................. 53
SynerGEE Licensing ....................................................................................................................... 54
Multiple Sessions and Network Installations ................................................................................... 55
Viewing SynerGEE Version Information .......................................................................................... 55
Technical Support ........................................................................................................................... 56
User Guide
Table of Contents
Microsoft Access data format (server/DBMS) ........................................................................... 72
Binary data format (EDM) ......................................................................................................... 72
MiddleLink data format .............................................................................................................. 72
History of the MiddleLink format .......................................................................................... 72
Architecture of MiddleLink data ........................................................................................... 73
Additional notes on the MiddleLink data format ................................................................... 73
MultiSpeak data format ............................................................................................................. 74
Oracle and SQL Server data format .......................................................................................... 74
PI Server ................................................................................................................................... 74
MySQL ...................................................................................................................................... 74
SynerGEE XML data format ...................................................................................................... 75
Data Source Aliases (DSAs) ........................................................................................................... 75
Why DSAs? ............................................................................................................................... 76
DSA data types ......................................................................................................................... 76
Managing DSAs ........................................................................................................................ 76
Editing a DSA ...................................................................................................................... 77
Creating DSAs .......................................................................................................................... 79
Creating DSAs with custom content .......................................................................................... 80
Validating DSAs ......................................................................................................................... 80
Sharing DSAs with other users ................................................................................................. 81
Saving DSAs ............................................................................................................................. 81
Deleting DSAs ........................................................................................................................... 81
Subsets ........................................................................................................................................... 82
Getting started with subsets ...................................................................................................... 82
Subset types ............................................................................................................................. 83
Saving a subset ......................................................................................................................... 84
Loading a subset ....................................................................................................................... 84
Creating and editing subsets outside of SynerGEE (schemas) ................................................ 85
About subset tables ................................................................................................................... 85
Subsets and multiple years ....................................................................................................... 85
Subsets with special functions ................................................................................................ 85
Source node flow subset ..................................................................................................... 86
Versions .......................................................................................................................................... 86
To manage (including delete) versions ..................................................................................... 86
Sample version workflow .......................................................................................................... 87
Version processing .................................................................................................................... 87
Partials ............................................................................................................................................ 89
Why partials are different than normal MiddleLink imports ..................................................... 89
How partials work ...................................................................................................................... 90
A word of caution when using partials ....................................................................................... 90
User Guide
Table of Contents
Cases .............................................................................................................................................. 91
Sample case file (text-based recipe format) .............................................................................. 91
Sample script file (Python format) ............................................................................................. 93
Specifying which script type to use with cases .......................................................................... 95
Creating a case ......................................................................................................................... 95
Editing a case ............................................................................................................................ 96
Running a case ......................................................................................................................... 97
Deleting a case ......................................................................................................................... 98
Data mart ........................................................................................................................................ 98
Gathering data mart data .......................................................................................................... 98
Unit Tests ........................................................................................................................................ 99
Importing GIS Data Using MiddleLink ........................................................................................... 100
Benefits of GIS extraction ....................................................................................................... 101
Note to MiddleLink 3.4 users Building models from GIS data .............................................. 101
General steps for a SynerGEE-MiddleLink import .................................................................. 102
Running a MiddleLink data import (model build) ..................................................................... 103
The MiddleLink data source Building a model from a GIS ................................................... 103
MiddleLink 3.4 data source ................................................................................................ 103
MiddleLink data source (new MiddleLink) ......................................................................... 104
Setting options for a MiddleLink data import ........................................................................... 106
Detailed processing during a MiddleLink data import .............................................................. 106
Topology concerns and restrictions ................................................................................... 107
Node identification From/To versus Source/Load ........................................................... 107
Literal handling of empty records MiddleLink data import .............................................. 107
Feeder and subtran sources MiddleLink data import ..................................................... 108
Method 1 Feeder or subtran references a node in the data source .......................... 108
Method 2 Feeder or subtran does not reference a valid node .................................. 108
Capacitors MiddleLink data import ................................................................................. 109
Protective device conversion MiddleLink data import ..................................................... 109
Conversion during a MiddleLink 3.4 import ................................................................. 109
Conversion during a MiddleLink import (new MiddleLink) ........................................... 109
Section spacing lookup MiddleLink data import ............................................................. 110
Switch conversion MiddleLink data import ..................................................................... 110
General rules, messages, and warnings MiddleLink data import ................................... 110
Browser file MiddleLink data import .................................................................................111
Automating MiddleLink model builds ....................................................................................... 112
Overview of MiddleLink automation tools .......................................................................... 112
General steps for MiddleLink automation .......................................................................... 112
Sample recipe for MiddleLink automation ......................................................................... 113
Sample command line for MiddleLink automation ............................................................. 114
User Guide
Table of Contents
Using an Enterprise Database System ......................................................................................... 114
Advantages of an enterprise system ....................................................................................... 115
Setting up an enterprise database system .............................................................................. 115
Using an enterprise system ..................................................................................................... 116
Creating enterprise model DSAs ....................................................................................... 116
Oracle connections for Enterprise databases .............................................................. 117
SQL Server connections for Enterprise databases ...................................................... 118
Creating a new model in an enterprise database .............................................................. 119
Loading and saving feeders in an enterprise system ........................................................ 119
To load feeders from an enterprise database model ................................................... 120
To save feeders back to an existing model .................................................................. 120
Deleting feeders and models in the enterprise database .................................................. 121
To delete feeders from an enterprise model ................................................................ 121
To delete an entire enterprise model ........................................................................... 121
Feeder locks and lock IDs ....................................................................................................... 121
Model locks for Enterprise databases ..................................................................................... 122
Note to database administrators regarding Enterprise databases .......................................... 123
Word of caution regarding enterprise databases and data integrity ........................................ 123
Enterprise models and analysis .............................................................................................. 123
Enterprise database schema .................................................................................................. 123
Importing Real-Time Data ............................................................................................................. 124
PI Historian .............................................................................................................................. 124
PI Messaging script ........................................................................................................... 125
Tag value report ................................................................................................................. 126
DBMS Real-Time Data ............................................................................................................ 127
Automating messaging scripts ................................................................................................ 129
Gallery ........................................................................................................................................... 129
To save the current model to the gallery ................................................................................ 130
To load a model from the gallery ............................................................................................ 130
To delete a gallery model ....................................................................................................... 131
To rename a gallery model ..................................................................................................... 131
Backing Up SynerGEE Data ......................................................................................................... 131
To configure automatic backups ............................................................................................. 131
To manually back up your SynerGEE data ............................................................................ 132
To restore data from the SynerGEE backup file ..................................................................... 132
Working Directly with Database Files ............................................................................................ 132
Data Source Editor .................................................................................................................. 132
Joiner ...................................................................................................................................... 133
Steps for using the joiner ................................................................................................... 134
Joiner data sources and DSAs .......................................................................................... 134
User Guide
Table of Contents
Using SynerGEE
Understanding the SynerGEE Environment ................................................................................. 142
SynerGEE windows ................................................................................................................ 142
Model explorer ........................................................................................................................ 143
Model tab ........................................................................................................................... 143
Warehouse tab .................................................................................................................. 144
Facilities tab ....................................................................................................................... 144
Query tab ........................................................................................................................... 145
Feeders tab ....................................................................................................................... 145
Legend tab ......................................................................................................................... 145
Toolbox tab ........................................................................................................................ 145
Ribbon bar ............................................................................................................................... 146
Quick access toolbar ............................................................................................................... 146
To edit buttons in the quick access toolbar ........................................................................ 147
To change the location of the quick access toolbar ........................................................... 147
Status bar ................................................................................................................................ 148
Function key shortcuts ............................................................................................................ 149
Custom keyboard shortcuts .................................................................................................... 149
Context (right-click) menus ..................................................................................................... 150
Editing data columns ............................................................................................................... 150
Using the SynerGEE Editor .......................................................................................................... 151
Producing the editor ................................................................................................................ 155
Viewing data calculations in the SynerGEE editor .................................................................. 156
Viewing results in the SynerGEE editor .................................................................................. 156
Loading Models ............................................................................................................................. 156
Selecting Feeders ......................................................................................................................... 157
Using the Select Feeders and Substation Transformers editor ............................................... 157
Selecting feeders from the SynerGEE ribbon bar ................................................................... 159
Selecting feeders from the map context menu ........................................................................ 160
Setting a feeder or subtran to be automatically selected when you load a model .................. 161
Using Feeder Sets ........................................................................................................................ 161
User Guide
Table of Contents
Setting Preferences ...................................................................................................................... 162
Setting SynerGEE preferences ............................................................................................... 163
Setting units of measurement ................................................................................................. 165
Setting database preferences ................................................................................................. 167
Defining file paths .................................................................................................................... 167
Setting data mining preferences ............................................................................................. 169
Setting values for conductor spacing and height above ground ............................................. 169
Managing load categories ....................................................................................................... 170
Setting feature locks ................................................................................................................ 171
Finding Model Data ....................................................................................................................... 171
Undoing and Redoing Model Edits ............................................................................................... 172
Tagging Sections and Facilities ..................................................................................................... 172
Using the Query Set ...................................................................................................................... 173
Creating a query set from the SynerGEE map display ............................................................ 174
To add sections to the query set ........................................................................................ 174
To add sections to the query set using spatial query mode ............................................... 174
To modify sections in the query set using the query path tool ........................................... 175
To remove a section from the query set ............................................................................ 176
To clear the query set ........................................................................................................ 176
Creating a query set using the Query Wizard ......................................................................... 176
Using the Multiple Editor ............................................................................................................... 177
Printing .......................................................................................................................................... 178
Rap Sheets ................................................................................................................................... 179
Details rap sheet ..................................................................................................................... 179
Voltage Plot rap sheet ............................................................................................................. 180
Arc Flashover rap sheet .......................................................................................................... 181
Fault rap sheet ........................................................................................................................ 182
Organizer ...................................................................................................................................... 183
Launching SynerGEE from the Command Line ............................................................................ 184
Units in SynerGEE ........................................................................................................................ 185
Basic unit concepts ................................................................................................................. 186
Automatic conversion and the importance of internal units ............................................... 186
Units conversion and control tables ................................................................................... 187
Rules for conversion during a save ................................................................................... 188
Generic names for length increments SUL, MUL, and LUL ................................................. 188
Tips for working with units ....................................................................................................... 189
Settings Groups and Settings Files ............................................................................................... 189
Managing settings groups in SynerGEE ................................................................................. 190
To manage settings groups ............................................................................................... 190
To restore startup default settings to factory settings ........................................................ 191
User Guide
Table of Contents
User Guide
10
Table of Contents
Adding a mobile item ............................................................................................................... 230
Editing a mobile item ............................................................................................................... 230
Deleting a mobile item ............................................................................................................. 230
Legend .......................................................................................................................................... 231
Views ............................................................................................................................................ 231
Background Images ...................................................................................................................... 232
Schematic View ............................................................................................................................ 233
Using schematic templates ..................................................................................................... 234
Creating a schematic template .......................................................................................... 234
Editing a schematic template ............................................................................................. 235
Renaming a schematic template ....................................................................................... 236
Copying a schematic template .......................................................................................... 236
Deleting a schematic template .......................................................................................... 236
Creating a schematic .............................................................................................................. 237
Opening a schematic .............................................................................................................. 238
Working in the schematic ........................................................................................................ 238
Editing device and section data in the schematic view ........................................................... 238
Editing the schematic grid ....................................................................................................... 239
Geography View ........................................................................................................................... 239
Setting up the Geography view ............................................................................................... 239
Viewing a model in the Geography view ................................................................................. 241
Using the Geography view window ......................................................................................... 241
Synchronizing the Geography view and the Map view ............................................................ 241
Changing the basemap layer .................................................................................................. 242
Show Manager .............................................................................................................................. 242
Building a Model
Modeling Feeders and Subtrans ................................................................................................... 245
Converting a node into a feeder or a substation node ............................................................ 246
Editing a feeder or subtran node ............................................................................................. 247
Editing general data for a feeder or subtran node ............................................................. 248
Editing voltage levels and source impedance for a feeder/subtran node .......................... 249
Editing node data for a feeder/subtran node ..................................................................... 250
Editing failure rates and the location link for a feeder/subtran node .................................. 251
Viewing analysis results for a feeder/subtran node ........................................................... 251
About feeder and subtran demands ........................................................................................ 252
Subtran details ........................................................................................................................ 252
Modeling Loads ............................................................................................................................. 253
Loops and Wandering Laterals ..................................................................................................... 253
Modeling loops ........................................................................................................................ 254
Loop tie switches ..................................................................................................................... 255
User Guide
Table of Contents
11
Modeling Sections
The SynerGEE Section Model ...................................................................................................... 258
Modeling Sections ......................................................................................................................... 258
Adding a section ...................................................................................................................... 259
Moving a section ..................................................................................................................... 260
Connecting and disconnecting sections .................................................................................. 260
Splitting a section .................................................................................................................... 261
Reconductoring and rephasing sections ................................................................................. 261
To change section conductors ........................................................................................... 262
To add a new phase .......................................................................................................... 262
To change section phasing ................................................................................................ 262
Changing a section ID ............................................................................................................. 262
Deleting a section .................................................................................................................... 263
About force-unfed sections ..................................................................................................... 263
Working with Nodes ...................................................................................................................... 264
Viewing nodes in the map display ........................................................................................... 264
Creating a node ....................................................................................................................... 265
Editing a node ......................................................................................................................... 265
Changing a node ID ................................................................................................................ 265
Moving a node ......................................................................................................................... 266
Converting nodes to other device types .................................................................................. 266
Deleting a node ....................................................................................................................... 266
Reducing the number of nodes ............................................................................................... 267
Setting up a node reduction ............................................................................................... 267
Performing a node reduction ............................................................................................. 270
Node reduction methodology ............................................................................................. 271
Removing nodes .......................................................................................................... 271
Eliminating a node completely ............................................................................... 272
Replacing a node with a vertex .............................................................................. 272
Detailed operation .................................................................................................. 273
Node reduction rules .............................................................................................. 273
Node reduction example ........................................................................................ 275
Removing vertices ....................................................................................................... 276
Breaking loops with elbows ......................................................................................... 277
Load handling .............................................................................................................. 277
Working with Graphic Points ......................................................................................................... 278
Adding a graphic point ............................................................................................................ 278
User Guide
12
Table of Contents
Moving a graphic point ............................................................................................................ 278
Deleting a graphic point .......................................................................................................... 279
Adding Sections ............................................................................................................................ 279
Editing Sections ............................................................................................................................ 279
Editing general data for a section ............................................................................................ 280
Editing construction data for a section .................................................................................... 281
Editing additional general settings for a section ...................................................................... 283
Adding distributed loads to a section ...................................................................................... 284
Adding spot loads to a section ................................................................................................ 287
Setting up projects for a section .............................................................................................. 289
Editing projects using the Section editor ........................................................................... 290
Editing projects using the Project worksheet ..................................................................... 292
Editing projects using the Projects Manager ..................................................................... 293
Adding distribution transformers to a section .......................................................................... 295
To edit distribution transformers using the Section editor .................................................. 296
To edit distribution transformers using the DTran worksheet ............................................ 297
Adding a distributed generator to a section ............................................................................. 298
Assigning zones to sections .................................................................................................... 301
Editing graphic points for a section ......................................................................................... 303
Viewing analysis results for a section ...................................................................................... 304
Conductors .................................................................................................................................... 304
Creating a conductor type ....................................................................................................... 305
Editing a conductor type .......................................................................................................... 305
Deleting a conductor type ....................................................................................................... 308
Sorting conductor types .......................................................................................................... 308
Use of conductor data ............................................................................................................. 309
Conductor spacing options ...................................................................................................... 310
Conductor Configuration and Positions ........................................................................................ 310
Simple impedance ................................................................................................................... 310
Conductor/equivalent spacing ................................................................................................. 311
Configuration types (detailed spacing) .................................................................................... 311
About configuration types .................................................................................................. 311
Creating a configuration type ............................................................................................. 311
Editing a configuration type ............................................................................................... 312
Determining coordinates for configuration types ............................................................... 312
Usage of configurations ..................................................................................................... 314
Configuration application examples ................................................................................... 314
Conductor Damage Curves .......................................................................................................... 316
Modeling Devices
Creating and Editing Devices ........................................................................................................ 317
User Guide
Table of Contents
13
User Guide
14
Table of Contents
Viewing analysis results for a capacitor ....................................................................... 341
Deleting a capacitor ........................................................................................................... 342
Motor Analysis and Capacitors ............................................................................................... 342
Placement Analysis ................................................................................................................. 342
Fuses ............................................................................................................................................ 342
Adding a fuse .......................................................................................................................... 342
Editing a fuse .......................................................................................................................... 343
Editing general data for a fuse ........................................................................................... 343
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a fuse .............. 345
Viewing analysis results for a fuse .................................................................................... 346
Deleting a fuse ........................................................................................................................ 346
Fuse time and amp multipliers ................................................................................................ 346
Fuse time multiplier factor ................................................................................................. 346
Fuse amp multiplier factor ................................................................................................. 347
Fuse defaults and uprating ................................................................................................ 347
Generators .................................................................................................................................... 347
Managing generator types in the equipment warehouse ........................................................ 348
Creating a generator type .................................................................................................. 348
Editing a generator type .................................................................................................... 349
Deleting a generator type .................................................................................................. 351
Managing generators in the model .......................................................................................... 351
Adding a generator ............................................................................................................ 352
Editing a generator ............................................................................................................ 352
Editing general data for a generator ............................................................................ 352
Editing machine data and energize/retire years for a generator .................................. 355
Viewing analysis results for a generator ...................................................................... 355
Deleting a generator .......................................................................................................... 356
Scheduled, distributed generation ........................................................................................... 356
Additional notes on generators ............................................................................................... 356
Meters ........................................................................................................................................... 356
Managing meters in the model ................................................................................................ 357
Adding a meter .................................................................................................................. 357
Editing a meter .................................................................................................................. 357
Editing general data for a meter .................................................................................. 358
Setting up demands for a meter .................................................................................. 359
Specifying reliability targets for a meter ....................................................................... 362
Assigning default customer zones to a meter .............................................................. 363
Viewing analysis results for a meter ............................................................................ 363
Deleting a meter ................................................................................................................ 364
Meters and reliability studies ................................................................................................... 364
User Guide
Table of Contents
15
User Guide
16
Table of Contents
Managing regulators in the model ........................................................................................... 386
Adding a regulator ............................................................................................................. 387
Editing a regulator ............................................................................................................. 387
Editing general data for a regulator ............................................................................. 387
Editing line-drop compensation data for a regulator .................................................... 388
Editing reverse mode, first-house, and tap limiter data for a regulator ........................ 390
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a regulator . 392
Viewing analysis results for a regulator ....................................................................... 392
Deleting a regulator ........................................................................................................... 393
Sectionalizers ................................................................................................................................ 393
Adding a sectionalizer ............................................................................................................. 393
Editing a sectionalizer ............................................................................................................. 394
Editing general data for a sectionalizer ............................................................................. 394
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a sectionalizer . 395
Viewing analysis results for a sectionalizer ....................................................................... 396
Deleting a sectionalizer ........................................................................................................... 397
Switches ........................................................................................................................................ 397
Switch configuration and connectivity ..................................................................................... 398
Special switch types and functions ......................................................................................... 400
Managing switch types in the equipment warehouse .............................................................. 400
Creating a switch type ....................................................................................................... 401
Editing a switch type .......................................................................................................... 401
Deleting a switch type ........................................................................................................ 402
Managing switches in the model ............................................................................................. 402
Adding a switch ................................................................................................................. 402
Editing a switch .................................................................................................................. 402
Editing general data for a switch .................................................................................. 403
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a switch ..... 406
Viewing analysis results for a switch ........................................................................... 407
Deleting a switch ............................................................................................................... 407
Modeling auto-transfer switches ............................................................................................. 407
Pad-mounted gear and elbows ............................................................................................... 408
Elbows ............................................................................................................................... 408
Pad-mounted switch gear .................................................................................................. 408
Converting a node to pad-mounted switch gear .......................................................... 409
Editing pad-mounted switch gear ................................................................................ 410
Switch plans ............................................................................................................................ 411
Creating a switch plan ....................................................................................................... 411
Editing a switch plan .......................................................................................................... 411
Deleting a switch plan ........................................................................................................ 413
User Guide
Table of Contents
17
SynerGEE Analyses
Setting Up an Analysis .................................................................................................................. 433
Setting a section for analysis .................................................................................................. 434
Selecting the analysis year and time of day ............................................................................ 434
Setting model and analysis options ......................................................................................... 436
Defining exception load limits ............................................................................................ 437
Setting up general model options ...................................................................................... 438
Setting up general analysis options ................................................................................... 441
Enabling automatic fixes during an analysis ...................................................................... 442
Setting up multi-year analysis options ............................................................................... 442
Setting up model costs ...................................................................................................... 443
Setting analysis output options ............................................................................................... 444
Selecting which attributes are available in the Results Viewer .......................................... 445
Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab ................................................ 445
User Guide
18
Table of Contents
Setting analysis cost options ................................................................................................... 446
Cost files ............................................................................................................................ 447
Cost file format ............................................................................................................. 447
Creating a cost file ....................................................................................................... 448
Editing a cost file .......................................................................................................... 448
Selecting a cost file for analysis ................................................................................... 448
Global costs ....................................................................................................................... 449
Performing an Analysis ................................................................................................................. 449
Re-running an analysis ........................................................................................................... 449
Viewing Analysis Results .............................................................................................................. 449
Suggestions for viewing analysis results ................................................................................. 450
Using the Results Viewer ........................................................................................................ 451
Using the Broadcaster ............................................................................................................. 451
Importing and exporting analysis results ................................................................................. 452
Important information on results handling ......................................................................... 453
Getting started with results import/export .......................................................................... 453
Setting up DSAs for results import and export .................................................................. 454
Exporting results ................................................................................................................ 455
Importing results ................................................................................................................ 455
Reporting on results .......................................................................................................... 456
Enterprise databases and results import/export ................................................................ 456
SynerGEE Reports ....................................................................................................................... 456
Generating analysis reports .................................................................................................... 457
Configuring report options ....................................................................................................... 459
Adding notes to reports ........................................................................................................... 460
Printing reports ........................................................................................................................ 460
Options, errors, and warnings in reports ................................................................................. 460
Dockable reports ..................................................................................................................... 462
Enabling dockable reports ................................................................................................. 462
Docking analysis reports ................................................................................................... 463
Using the auto-hide feature ............................................................................................... 466
Grid-style reports ..................................................................................................................... 467
Editing the appearance of a grid-style report ..................................................................... 468
To edit and save a chapter report template ................................................................. 469
To edit and save a master report template .................................................................. 469
To restore a chapter report template to the master template defaults ......................... 470
To restore the master report template to the original SynerGEE defaults ................... 470
Managing the content of a grid-style report ....................................................................... 470
Coloring report data in the SynerGEE map display ........................................................... 472
Using grid-style reports to generate a scatter-plot graph .................................................. 473
User Guide
Table of Contents
19
User Guide
20
Table of Contents
Radial model loads .................................................................................................................. 495
Network model loads ............................................................................................................... 496
Load %I, %Z, %PQ ....................................................................................................................... 496
To assign I, Z, PQ percentages to loads ................................................................................ 496
I,Z,PQ load model details ........................................................................................................ 497
Constant real and reactive power load model ................................................................... 498
Constant current load model ............................................................................................. 498
Constant impedance load model ....................................................................................... 499
Current/voltage relationship Loads ................................................................................. 499
Power/voltage relationship Loads ................................................................................... 500
The combination load model ............................................................................................. 501
Example calculations with different I, Z, PQ components ................................................. 501
Sample I, Z, PQ values ........................................................................................................... 502
Capacity Factors ........................................................................................................................... 502
Large Customers and Distributed Generation .............................................................................. 503
Adding a large customer to the model .................................................................................... 503
Editing a large customer ......................................................................................................... 504
Editing general data for a large customer .......................................................................... 504
Editing load data for a large customer ............................................................................... 506
Editing generation data for a large customer ..................................................................... 508
Viewing analysis results for a large customer ................................................................... 510
Customer load curves and large customers (scheduling) ....................................................... 511
Projects (Load) .............................................................................................................................. 511
Effect of projects on the model ................................................................................................ 512
Adding, editing, and managing projects .................................................................................. 512
Load-Flow Analysis ....................................................................................................................... 512
Overview of SynerGEE load-flow technology .......................................................................... 513
The radial load-flow foundation ......................................................................................... 513
The radial load-flow engine ............................................................................................... 514
The SynerGEE load-flow advantage ................................................................................. 515
Summary of SynerGEE load-flow benefits ........................................................................ 515
Radial load-flow ....................................................................................................................... 516
Performing a radial load-flow analysis ............................................................................... 516
By-phase versus balanced load-flow analysis ................................................................... 516
Radial load-flow with loops ...................................................................................................... 517
About load-flow with loops ................................................................................................. 517
Example Load-flow with loops .................................................................................. 517
Invalid tie switches and load-flow ................................................................................ 520
Radial load-flow with wandering laterals ................................................................................. 520
About wandering laterals and tie switches ........................................................................ 520
User Guide
Table of Contents
21
Capacity
Optimal Switching Analysis ........................................................................................................... 529
Optimal switching analysis operation ...................................................................................... 529
OSP application speed ............................................................................................................ 530
Setting up an optimal switching analysis ................................................................................. 530
Performing an optimal switching analysis ............................................................................... 532
Throw-Over Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 533
Auto-Transfer Switch Analysis ...................................................................................................... 533
Automatic Feeder Switching (AFS) Analysis ................................................................................ 534
Substation Bus Transformer Analysis ........................................................................................... 534
Contingency Analysis .................................................................................................................... 535
Contingency analysis methods ............................................................................................... 535
Fast pickup method ........................................................................................................... 536
Optimized pickup method .................................................................................................. 536
Load Transfer method ....................................................................................................... 537
Setting up a contingency analysis ........................................................................................... 537
Selecting the contingency analysis method ....................................................................... 537
Setting up a Fast Pickup contingency analysis ................................................................. 538
Setting up a Load Transfer contingency analysis .............................................................. 540
Setting up an Optimized Pickup contingency analysis ...................................................... 542
Performing a contingency analysis ......................................................................................... 546
Isolating sections ..................................................................................................................... 546
Examples of contingency outage types ................................................................................... 546
User Guide
22
Table of Contents
Planning
Load Allocation Analysis ............................................................................................................... 549
When to run load allocation ..................................................................................................... 550
About load allocation demands and meters ............................................................................ 550
Suggested approaches to load allocation ............................................................................... 551
Demands format for load allocation ........................................................................................ 551
Regulator and capacitor options during load allocation .......................................................... 551
Load allocation calculations with customer load curves .......................................................... 552
Other load allocation considerations ....................................................................................... 552
Setting up a load allocation analysis ....................................................................................... 552
Performing a load allocation analysis ...................................................................................... 555
Forecasting Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 556
Setting up a forecasting analysis ............................................................................................ 557
Selecting a forecasting agent .................................................................................................. 560
Performing a forecasting analysis ........................................................................................... 561
Capacitor Placement Analysis ...................................................................................................... 562
Setting up a Capacitor Placement analysis ............................................................................. 562
Performing a Capacitor Placement analysis ........................................................................... 563
Phase Balancing and Load Balancing Improvement .................................................................... 565
Phase Balancing Improvement Analysis ................................................................................. 566
Setting up a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis ....................................................... 566
Performing a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis ...................................................... 567
Load balancing improvement .................................................................................................. 569
Setting up a Load Balancing Improvement analysis .......................................................... 569
Performing a Load Balancing Improvement analysis ........................................................ 570
Design Evaluation ......................................................................................................................... 572
Selecting an optimal conductor ............................................................................................... 572
Conductor evaluation processing ...................................................................................... 572
Tips for using conductor selection ..................................................................................... 573
Setting up a conductor selection evaluation ...................................................................... 573
Performing a conductor selection evaluation ..................................................................... 574
Determining an optimal regulator position ............................................................................... 574
Regulator position processing ........................................................................................... 574
Setting up a regulator position evaluation ......................................................................... 575
Performing a regulator position evaluation ........................................................................ 575
Viewing the results of a regulator position evaluation ....................................................... 575
Multi-Model Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 576
Setting up a multi-model analysis ........................................................................................... 576
Identifying data sources for a multi-model analysis ........................................................... 577
Selecting analysis types and years for a multi-model analysis .......................................... 577
User Guide
Table of Contents
23
Protection
User Guide
24
Table of Contents
Protective Devices ........................................................................................................................ 599
Data management and protective devices .............................................................................. 599
Switchable protective devices ................................................................................................. 600
Protective device details ......................................................................................................... 600
Transformer curves ........................................................................................................... 600
Classic protective devices ................................................................................................. 600
Managing classic protective device types in the equipment warehouse ..................... 601
Creative a classic protective device type ............................................................... 601
Editing a classic protective device type ................................................................. 601
Deleting a classic protective device type ............................................................... 602
Managing classic protective devices in the model ....................................................... 602
Adding a classic protective device ......................................................................... 602
Editing a classic protective device ......................................................................... 602
Editing general data for a classic protective device ......................................... 603
Viewing analysis results for a classic protective device ................................... 603
Deleting a classic protective device ....................................................................... 604
Time Versus Current Coordination (TCC) Graph .......................................................................... 604
Opening the TCC view ............................................................................................................ 604
Using the TCC explorer ........................................................................................................... 605
Plotting curves on the TCC ..................................................................................................... 605
Panning and zooming in the TCC ........................................................................................... 606
Changing TCC view display properties ................................................................................... 606
Editing curves in the TCC display ...................................................................................... 606
Editing reference shifting in the TCC display ..................................................................... 609
Editing the graph in the TCC display ................................................................................. 609
Editing the grid in the TCC display .................................................................................... 610
Editing print settings for the TCC display .......................................................................... 610
Breakers, relays, and the TCC ................................................................................................ 610
Adding notes, time lines, amp lines, and arc flashover to the TCC ......................................... 610
To add a note to the TCC .................................................................................................. 610
To add a time line, amp, or diagonal line to the TCC ......................................................... 611
To add arc flashover values to the TCC ............................................................................ 611
To move a note in the TCC ................................................................................................ 611
To move an amp or time line in the TCC ........................................................................... 611
To delete a note, time line, or amp line from the TCC ....................................................... 611
Using TCC graph measuring tools .......................................................................................... 611
Plotting conductor damage curves on the TCC ...................................................................... 612
Saving and loading TCC views as TCC sets ........................................................................... 612
To create and save a TCC set ........................................................................................... 612
To open (redisplay) a TCC set ........................................................................................... 612
User Guide
Table of Contents
25
User Guide
26
Table of Contents
Exceptions ............................................................................................................................... 645
Model requirements ................................................................................................................ 645
Setting up an arc flashover analysis ....................................................................................... 645
Configuring settings for an arc flashover analysis ............................................................. 645
Selection of PPE rating for clothing ............................................................................. 646
Editing working distances .................................................................................................. 646
Creating an arc flashover label .......................................................................................... 647
Performing an arc flashover analysis ...................................................................................... 648
Fault Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 648
Fault analysis types ................................................................................................................. 648
Fault analysis ..................................................................................................................... 648
Pre-fault load current and fault analysis ...................................................................... 649
Fault flow analysis ............................................................................................................. 649
Pre-fault load current and fault flow analysis ............................................................... 649
Fault voltage analysis ........................................................................................................ 649
Including generators during fault analysis ............................................................................... 650
Setting up a fault analysis ....................................................................................................... 650
Performing a fault analysis ...................................................................................................... 652
Fault analysis with wandering laterals ..................................................................................... 652
Fault Sequence Analysis .............................................................................................................. 653
Setting up a fault sequence analysis ....................................................................................... 653
Performing a fault sequence analysis ..................................................................................... 654
Fault Location Analysis ................................................................................................................. 654
Fault events ............................................................................................................................. 655
Adding a fault event ........................................................................................................... 655
Editing a fault event ........................................................................................................... 655
Deleting a fault event ......................................................................................................... 656
Setting up a fault location analysis .......................................................................................... 656
Performing a fault location analysis ........................................................................................ 658
Protection Scheme Report ............................................................................................................ 658
Reliability
Reliability ....................................................................................................................................... 661
About Reliability and SynerGEE ............................................................................................. 661
Importance of reliability ...................................................................................................... 662
The SynerGEE approach to reliability ............................................................................... 662
Reliability study challenges ............................................................................................... 662
Setting up a Reliability Analysis .............................................................................................. 662
Setting up basic reliability analysis options ....................................................................... 663
Setting up additional reliability analysis options ................................................................ 665
Setting up scalars for a reliability analysis ......................................................................... 666
User Guide
Table of Contents
27
User Guide
28
Table of Contents
Reliability analysis assumptions ........................................................................................ 688
Isolating/switching/pickup example Reliability analysis .................................................. 688
Harmonic ....................................................................................................................................... 689
Harmonic Analysis .................................................................................................................. 689
Setting up a harmonic analysis .......................................................................................... 689
Creating and editing harmonic curves ......................................................................... 690
Creating a harmonic curve ..................................................................................... 690
Editing a harmonic curve ....................................................................................... 690
Deleting a harmonic curve ..................................................................................... 692
Assigning a harmonic curve to a large customer ......................................................... 692
Designating sections for harmonic monitoring ............................................................. 693
Configuring options for a harmonic analysis ................................................................ 693
Performing a harmonic analysis ........................................................................................ 694
Viewing the Harmonic load-flow report .............................................................................. 694
Viewing the impedance frequency scan report .................................................................. 695
Unfused Tap Analysis ................................................................................................................... 696
Device Risk Ranking Analysis ...................................................................................................... 696
Reliability Event Management Wizard .......................................................................................... 697
Scripts
Recipe Scripts ............................................................................................................................... 700
Recipe syntax .......................................................................................................................... 700
Recipe script example ............................................................................................................. 701
Model Forge Scripts ...................................................................................................................... 702
Running the Model Forge wizard ............................................................................................ 703
Viewing the Model Forge schema ........................................................................................... 703
Model Forge Script example ................................................................................................... 703
Python Scripts ............................................................................................................................... 705
Creating a Python script .......................................................................................................... 706
Opening a Python script in the default Python editor .............................................................. 706
Writing a Python script ............................................................................................................ 707
Copying a Python script .......................................................................................................... 708
Renaming a Python script ....................................................................................................... 709
Deleting a Python script .......................................................................................................... 709
Running a Python script .......................................................................................................... 709
Python scripts examples ......................................................................................................... 710
Python script example Reporting model data ................................................................. 710
Python script example Startup script .............................................................................. 711
Python script example Performing a fault analysis ......................................................... 712
Python script example Updating neutrals ....................................................................... 714
Startup Scripts .............................................................................................................................. 715
User Guide
Table of Contents
29
User Guide
30
Table of Contents
Running a process .................................................................................................................. 737
User Guide
Table of Contents
31
SynerGEE Cable
General Steps for SynerGEE Cable Analysis ............................................................................... 785
Modeling Cables ........................................................................................................................... 786
Overview of cable conductor data ........................................................................................... 786
Types of cable conductors ...................................................................................................... 787
Simple impedance cable model ......................................................................................... 787
Separate neutral cable model ............................................................................................ 787
User Guide
32
Table of Contents
Concentric neutral cable model ......................................................................................... 787
Tape shield conductor model ............................................................................................. 788
Three-core cable model ..................................................................................................... 789
Applying conductor types to sections ...................................................................................... 789
Creating a Duct Bank .................................................................................................................... 790
Editing Duct Banks ........................................................................................................................ 790
Editing a duct bank using the Duct Bank editor ...................................................................... 790
Editing general data for a duct bank .................................................................................. 791
Editing circuits for a duct bank ........................................................................................... 792
Editing a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view .............................................................. 793
Opening the Cable Duct Bank view ................................................................................... 794
Working in the Cable Duct Bank view ............................................................................... 795
Zooming the duct bank view .............................................................................................. 796
Duct bank view display properties ..................................................................................... 796
A word on direct buried cables in the duct bank view ........................................................ 796
Troubleshooting calculation errors shown in the duct bank legend ................................... 797
Duct bank ampacity report ................................................................................................. 797
Applying Duct Banks to Sections .................................................................................................. 797
Duct Bank Evaluation .................................................................................................................... 798
Setting up a duct bank evaluation ........................................................................................... 798
Performing a duct bank evaluation .......................................................................................... 799
About section derating ............................................................................................................ 800
Detailed Cable Studies Using Scripts ........................................................................................... 800
Time-Related Features
Load Growth ................................................................................................................................. 801
Enabling load growth rates ...................................................................................................... 802
Specifying growth rates ........................................................................................................... 804
Growth curves ......................................................................................................................... 804
Creating a growth curve .................................................................................................... 805
Editing a growth curve ....................................................................................................... 805
Configuring SynerGEE to use growth curves .................................................................... 806
Applying a growth curve to a section ................................................................................. 806
Deleting a growth curve ..................................................................................................... 806
Using growth curves in a multi-year environment .............................................................. 807
Using growth curves in a single-year environment ............................................................ 808
Customer Load Curves/Time-of-Day Analysis .............................................................................. 808
Load curve benefits ................................................................................................................. 809
Getting started with load curves/time-of-day ........................................................................... 809
Customer classes .................................................................................................................... 810
Creating a customer class ................................................................................................. 810
User Guide
Table of Contents
33
Weather
An Overview of Weather Modeling in SynerGEE .......................................................................... 823
Defining Weather Conditions ........................................................................................................ 824
Modeling weather based on set weather conditions ............................................................... 825
Modeling weather using weather profiles ................................................................................ 825
Creating a weather profile ................................................................................................. 826
Editing a weather profile .................................................................................................... 826
Configuring a model to use weather profiles ..................................................................... 827
Deleting a weather profile .................................................................................................. 828
Adjusting Loads Based on Weather Conditions ............................................................................ 828
To enable global-based weather load modeling ..................................................................... 829
To enable class-based weather load modeling ...................................................................... 830
To disable weather load modeling .......................................................................................... 831
Configuring Seasonal Weather Modeling ...................................................................................... 831
Setting the season (summer or winter) for a SynerGEE model .............................................. 831
Setting up conductors to use seasonal ratings ....................................................................... 832
User Guide
34
Table of Contents
Setting up regulators to use seasonal ratings ......................................................................... 832
Setting up transformers to use seasonal ratings ..................................................................... 833
Performing a Summer/Winter analysis .................................................................................... 833
Using Weather Zones to Model Variations in Cloud Cover ........................................................... 834
Creating a weather zone ......................................................................................................... 834
Editing a weather zone ............................................................................................................ 834
Assigning a weather zone to a section .................................................................................... 835
Deleting a weather zone ......................................................................................................... 835
Economics
Managing Cost Zones ................................................................................................................... 851
Creating a cost zone ............................................................................................................... 851
Editing a cost zone .................................................................................................................. 852
Assigning a cost zone to a section .......................................................................................... 853
Deleting a cost zone ................................................................................................................ 853
User Guide
Table of Contents
35
User Guide
36
Table of Contents
3105 Coloring by sections with bad phasing ........................................................................ 876
3106 Coloring within two ranges .......................................................................................... 876
3107 Coloring by the product of two result parameters ........................................................ 877
3108 Coloring by the quotient of two result parameters ....................................................... 878
3109 Coloring by section prefix ............................................................................................ 878
3110 Applying display style .................................................................................................. 879
3111 Coloring sections fed from wandering lateral ............................................................... 879
3112 Coloring sections fed from a loop ................................................................................ 879
3113 Applying a Geobackground ......................................................................................... 880
3114 Coloring sections by the delta/ground status of lines .................................................. 880
Analysis Recipe Commands ......................................................................................................... 881
3200 Running an analysis .................................................................................................... 882
3201 Running a Model Cleanup script ................................................................................. 882
3203 Running an Outage Import script ................................................................................ 883
3204 Exporting an SVG file .................................................................................................. 883
3205 Exporting a Model Viewer file ...................................................................................... 884
3206 Running a CMM script ................................................................................................. 884
3207 Running another recipe ............................................................................................... 884
3208 Exporting the most recent report ................................................................................. 885
3210 Setting the analysis year ............................................................................................. 886
3211 Running a report script ................................................................................................ 886
3212 Loading and saving an application settings group ...................................................... 886
3230 Setting the growth option ............................................................................................ 887
3231 Setting a single load multiplier as the growth option ................................................... 887
3232 Setting different load multipliers as the growth option ................................................. 888
3233 Setting the time of day ................................................................................................ 888
3250 Setting fault levels in the fault location application ...................................................... 889
3251 Specifying fault types in the fault location application ................................................. 889
Model Modification Recipe Commands ........................................................................................ 890
3300 Setting a custom result for all sections in memory ...................................................... 890
3301 Setting a custom result for a single section in the model ............................................ 891
3302 Setting the open/closed status for a device ................................................................ 891
3303 Setting the open/closed status for an elbow ............................................................... 892
Results Handling Recipe Commands ........................................................................................... 892
3400 Exporting a results set to a database .......................................................................... 893
Selection Recipe Commands ........................................................................................................ 893
3500 Selecting a section ...................................................................................................... 894
3501 Opening the Section editor for the selected section .................................................... 894
3502 Tracing the selected section to its source and adding the results to the query set ..... 894
3503 Clearing the query set ................................................................................................. 895
User Guide
Table of Contents
37
3504 Selecting the section with a highest or lowest result ................................................... 895
3505 Selecting a feeder or subtran ...................................................................................... 895
3506 De-selecting a feeder or subtran ................................................................................. 895
3507 Selecting all feeders and subtrans .............................................................................. 896
3508 De-selecting all feeders and subtrans ......................................................................... 896
3509 Zooming to a selected section .................................................................................... 896
3510 De-selecting feeders with low metering ....................................................................... 896
3511 Adding sections identified by substring to the query set .............................................. 896
3512 Setting a section for analysis ...................................................................................... 898
Selection Recipe Example ...................................................................................................... 898
List Recipe Commands ................................................................................................................. 898
3550 Creating a list .............................................................................................................. 899
3551 Destroying a list ........................................................................................................... 899
3552 Clearing a list .............................................................................................................. 899
3553 Adding an item to list ................................................................................................... 899
3554 Removing an item from list .......................................................................................... 900
3555 Loading a list from a file .............................................................................................. 900
Licensing Recipe Commands ....................................................................................................... 900
3600 Checking out a module ............................................................................................... 901
3601 Checking in a module .................................................................................................. 902
Messaging Script Recipe Commands ........................................................................................... 902
3650 Running a messaging script ........................................................................................ 902
3651 Running a messaging script with a prompt ................................................................. 903
Recipe Parameter Reference ....................................................................................................... 903
Colors for recipes .................................................................................................................... 903
Results for recipes .................................................................................................................. 904
Analysis types for recipes ....................................................................................................... 905
User Guide
38
Table of Contents
FaultLoc.SetFaultAmps ........................................................................................................... 912
File Commands ............................................................................................................................. 912
File.WriteLine .......................................................................................................................... 913
Recipe Control Commands ........................................................................................................... 913
Recipe.Start ............................................................................................................................ 914
Recipe.StartAutomated ........................................................................................................... 914
Recipe.End .............................................................................................................................. 914
Load Allocation Commands .......................................................................................................... 914
LoadAlloc.Run ......................................................................................................................... 915
Load Flow Commands .................................................................................................................. 915
LoadFlow.Run ......................................................................................................................... 915
List Commands ............................................................................................................................. 915
ScriptList.Create ...................................................................................................................... 916
ScriptList.Destroy .................................................................................................................... 916
ScriptList.Empty ...................................................................................................................... 916
ScriptList.AddItem ................................................................................................................... 917
ScriptList.RemoveItem ............................................................................................................ 917
ScriptList.LoadFromFile .......................................................................................................... 917
Map Commands ............................................................................................................................ 917
Map.ZoomNetwork .................................................................................................................. 917
Model Forge Commands .............................................................................................................. 918
ModelForge.RunProcess ........................................................................................................ 918
DataHammer.SigedMidway ..................................................................................................... 918
Model I/O Commands ................................................................................................................... 918
DSA.Create ............................................................................................................................. 919
DSA.Delete ............................................................................................................................. 921
DSA.DropModel ...................................................................................................................... 921
DSA.DropSubstation ............................................................................................................... 922
DSA.DeleteFeeder .................................................................................................................. 922
DSA.DeleteFeederList ............................................................................................................ 922
DSA.ExecStoredProc .............................................................................................................. 923
DSA.LoadFeeders ................................................................................................................... 924
DSA.LoadSubBySection ......................................................................................................... 925
DSA.LoadModelBySub ........................................................................................................... 925
DSA.LoadWarehouse .............................................................................................................. 926
DSA.ResultsSetSave .............................................................................................................. 926
DSA.SaveFeeders .................................................................................................................. 926
DSA.TestConnection ............................................................................................................... 927
DSA.ExportLastReport ............................................................................................................ 927
DSA.ExportLastReport2 .......................................................................................................... 928
User Guide
Table of Contents
39
User Guide
40
Table of Contents
Settings.LoadXML ................................................................................................................... 943
SQL Commands ........................................................................................................................... 943
SQL.RunFromFile ................................................................................................................... 944
Throw-Over Commands ................................................................................................................ 944
ThrowOver.Run ....................................................................................................................... 945
Warehouse Commands ................................................................................................................ 945
Warehouse.Drop ..................................................................................................................... 945
User Guide
Table of Contents
41
User Guide
42
Table of Contents
Distribution Transformers .............................................................................................................. 987
DTR_101 Creating/editing a distribution transformer ........................................................... 988
DTR_102 Editing the kVA for a distribution transformer ....................................................... 988
DTR_103 Editing the X,Y coordinates for a distribution transformer .................................... 989
DTR_104 Editing the demand kVA for a distribution transformer ......................................... 989
DTR_105 Editing the number of customers for a distribution transformer ........................... 990
DTR_106 Editing the connection phase for a distribution transformer ................................. 990
DTR_107 Editing the demand kVA, number of customers, and connection phase for a
distribution transformer ........................................................................................................... 991
Facilities ........................................................................................................................................ 991
FAC_110 Editing the location link, AMS link, and note text for a facility ............................... 992
FAC_111 Editing the location link for a facility ...................................................................... 992
FAC_112 Editing the AMS link for a facility .......................................................................... 993
FAC_113 Editing the note text for a facility ........................................................................... 993
Feeders ......................................................................................................................................... 993
FDR_101 Converting a node to a feeder ............................................................................. 994
FDR_102 Editing minimum and maximum source impedance values for a feeder .............. 994
FDR_103 Editing the balanced voltage level for a feeder .................................................... 995
FDR_104 Editing positive sequence and zero sequence values for a feeder ...................... 996
FDR_105 Editing the note text for a feeder .......................................................................... 996
FDR_106 Editing the continuous amp rating and emergency amp rating for a feeder ........ 997
FDR_107 Setting the color for a feeder ............................................................................... 997
FDR_108 Setting the voltage and angle for phase 1 of a feeder ......................................... 998
FDR_109 Setting the voltage and angle for phase 2 of a feeder ......................................... 998
FDR_110 Setting the voltage and angle for phase 3 of a feeder ......................................... 998
FDR_111 Setting the region ID for a feeder ......................................................................... 999
FDR_112 Editing maximum source impedance values for a feeder .................................... 999
Fuses .......................................................................................................................................... 1000
FUS_101 Adding a fuse to a section .................................................................................. 1000
FUS_102 Editing the manufacturer, model, and amp and volt ratings for a fuse ............... 1001
FUS_103 Specifying the location of a fuse ........................................................................ 1001
FUS_104 Editing the connection phase for a fuse ............................................................. 1002
Generators .................................................................................................................................. 1002
GEN_101 Editing a generator ............................................................................................ 1002
GEN_102 Creating/editing a generator .............................................................................. 1003
GEN_103 Selecting a generator type and connection phase ............................................ 1003
GEN_104 Turning a generator on or off ............................................................................. 1004
GEN_105 Creating/editing a generator .............................................................................. 1004
Large Customers ........................................................................................................................ 1004
LGC_101 Editing a large customer .................................................................................... 1005
User Guide
Table of Contents
43
User Guide
44
Table of Contents
MET_105 Creating/editing a meter .................................................................................... 1027
MET_106 Specifying the location of a meter ..................................................................... 1028
MET_107 Specifying whether to use demands on a meter ................................................ 1028
MET_108 Editing continuous and emergency current ratings for a meter ......................... 1029
MET_109 Editing kW values for a meter ............................................................................ 1029
MET_110 Editing kvar values for a meter .......................................................................... 1030
MET_111 Editing amp values for a meter .......................................................................... 1031
MET_112 Editing % pf values for a meter .......................................................................... 1032
MET_113 Enabling or disabling the Use with Color By Meter feature ................................ 1033
MET_114 Enabling or disabling the Use with Color By Meter feature and selecting the feature
color ...................................................................................................................................... 1033
MET_115 Editing the note text for a meter ......................................................................... 1034
MET_116 Opening or closing a meter ................................................................................ 1035
Nodes .......................................................................................................................................... 1035
NOD_101 Editing the X,Y coordinates for a node .............................................................. 1035
NOD_102 Editing the description for a node ...................................................................... 1036
Projects ....................................................................................................................................... 1036
PRO_101 Editing a project ................................................................................................. 1036
PRO_102 Editing the energize and retire years for a project ............................................. 1037
PRO_103 Editing the total KW and kvar for a project ........................................................ 1038
Reclosers .................................................................................................................................... 1038
REC_101 Editing a recloser ............................................................................................... 1040
REC_102 Creating/editing a recloser ................................................................................. 1040
REC_103 Specifying the manufacturer name and model name for a recloser .................. 1041
REC_104 Editing the amp rating and interrupt rating for a recloser ................................... 1041
REC_105 Editing the mechanical response type for a recloser ......................................... 1042
REC_106 Editing the single phase operation status for a recloser .................................... 1042
REC_107 Editing fast phase settings for a recloser ........................................................... 1043
REC_108 Editing slow phase settings for a recloser ......................................................... 1044
REC_109 Editing the fast phase pickup amps for a recloser ............................................. 1045
REC_110 Editing the fast phase minimum response value for a recloser ......................... 1045
REC_111 Editing the phase source side fuse K factor and phase load side fuse K factor for a
recloser ................................................................................................................................. 1046
REC_112 Editing the disable ground status for a recloser ................................................. 1046
REC_113 Editing fast ground settings for a recloser .......................................................... 1047
REC_114 Editing slow ground settings for a recloser ........................................................ 1048
REC_115 Editing the fast ground pickup amps for a recloser ............................................ 1049
REC_116 Editing the fast ground minimum response for a recloser .................................. 1049
REC_117 Editing the ground source side fuse K factor and load side fuse K factor for a
recloser ................................................................................................................................. 1050
REC_118 Specifying the location of a recloser .................................................................. 1050
User Guide
Table of Contents
45
REC_119 Specifying a manufacturer name, model name, and mechanical response type for a
recloser ................................................................................................................................. 1051
REC_120 Editing the interrupt rating for a recloser ............................................................ 1052
REC_121 Editing the fast phase cutoff and fast ground cutoff for a recloser ..................... 1052
REC_122 Editing the slow phase cutoff and slow ground cutoff for a recloser .................. 1053
REC_123 Editing the slow phase and slow ground pickup amps for a recloser ................ 1053
REC_124 Editing fast phase values for a recloser ............................................................. 1054
REC_125 Editing slow phase values a recloser ................................................................. 1055
REC_126 Editing the fast phase and slow phase pickup amps for a recloser ................... 1055
REC_127 Editing fast ground values for a recloser ........................................................... 1056
REC_128 Editing slow ground values for a recloser .......................................................... 1057
REC_129 Editing the fast ground and slow ground pickup amps for a recloser ................ 1057
REC_130 Editing the phasing for a recloser ...................................................................... 1058
REC_131 Editing the bypass status for a recloser ............................................................. 1058
REC_132 Editing the fast phase pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a recloser
1059
REC_133 Editing fast phase options for a recloser ........................................................... 1060
REC_134 Editing the slow phase pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a recloser
1061
REC_135 Editing slow phase options for a recloser .......................................................... 1062
REC_136 Editing the fast ground pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a recloser
1063
REC_137 Editing fast ground options for a recloser .......................................................... 1064
REC_138 Editing the slow ground pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a
recloser ................................................................................................................................. 1065
REC_139 Editing slow ground options for a recloser ......................................................... 1066
REC_140 Setting the transfer scheme and operating mode for a recloser ........................ 1067
REC_141 Editing the disabled ground option for a recloser .............................................. 1068
REC_142 Editing the fast phase cutoff and fast ground cutoff for a recloser ..................... 1068
REC_143 Editing the slow phase cutoff and slow ground cutoff for a recloser .................. 1069
REC_144 Editing the transfer scheme type, transfer scheme delay, and operating mode for a
recloser ................................................................................................................................. 1069
REC_145 Editing the amp rating for a recloser .................................................................. 1070
Regulators ................................................................................................................................... 1070
REG_101 Editing a regulator ............................................................................................. 1071
REG_102 Editing a regulator ............................................................................................. 1071
REG_103 Creating/editing a regulator ............................................................................... 1071
REG_104 Editing the reverse mode and reverse threshold for a regulator ....................... 1073
REG_105 Editing the connection type, gang operated status, and gang metering phase for a
regulator ................................................................................................................................ 1074
REG_106 Editing forward mode values for a regulator ...................................................... 1075
User Guide
46
Table of Contents
REG_107 Editing the reverse mode and reverse threshold for a regulator ....................... 1076
REG_108 Editing reverse mode values for a regulator ...................................................... 1077
REG_109 Editing first house values for a regulator ........................................................... 1078
REG_110 Editing tap limit values for a regulator ................................................................ 1078
REG_111 Editing the tap direction and tap operation for a regulator ................................. 1079
REG_112 Specifying the location of a regulator ................................................................. 1079
REG_113 Turning a regulator on or off .............................................................................. 1080
REG_114 Editing the gang metering phase for a regulator ................................................ 1080
REG_115 Editing forward mode values for a regulator ...................................................... 1081
REG_116 Setting the energize year and retire year for a regulator ................................... 1082
REM ............................................................................................................................................ 1082
REM_201 .............................................................................................................................. 1082
Sectionalizers .............................................................................................................................. 1083
SZR_101 Editing a sectionalizer ........................................................................................ 1083
SZR_102 Creating/editing a sectionalizer .......................................................................... 1083
SZR_103 Editing the actuating current, number of counts, and location for a sectionalizer ......
1084
SZR_104 Specifying the location of a sectionalizer ........................................................... 1085
SZR_105 Editing the amp rating, actuating current, and number of counts for a sectionalizer .
1085
SZR_106 Editing the connection phase for a sectionalizer ................................................ 1086
Sections ...................................................................................................................................... 1086
SEC_101 Adding a section ................................................................................................ 1087
SEC_104 Editing the phasing, connection type, and length (in feet) for a section ............. 1087
SEC_105 Adding a graphic point to a section .................................................................... 1088
SEC_108 Editing the conductor types for a section ........................................................... 1088
SEC_109 Editing the description for a section ................................................................... 1089
SEC_110 Editing the conductor types for a section ........................................................... 1089
SEC_111 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections
distributed load ...................................................................................................................... 1090
SEC_112 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections spot
load ....................................................................................................................................... 1090
SEC_114 Editing the construction model for a section ...................................................... 1091
SEC_115 Editing equivalent spacing and height values for a section ................................ 1091
SEC_116 Editing the detailed spacing configuration type for a section ............................. 1092
SEC_117 Setting the transposition phasing order for a section ......................................... 1092
SEC_118 Configuring elbows on a section ........................................................................ 1093
SEC_119 Editing the phasing, connection type, and length (in meters) for a section ........ 1094
SEC_120 Setting the mitigation zone for a section ............................................................ 1094
SEC_121 Setting a section as a contingency section ........................................................ 1095
SEC_122 Setting the exposure zone for a section ............................................................ 1095
User Guide
Table of Contents
47
SEC_123 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections
distributed load ...................................................................................................................... 1096
SEC_124 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections spot
load ....................................................................................................................................... 1096
Sources ....................................................................................................................................... 1096
SRC_101 Editing source impedance values for a source .................................................. 1097
SRC_102 Editing the location link and note text for a source ............................................ 1097
Switches ...................................................................................................................................... 1097
SWT_101 Editing a switch ................................................................................................. 1098
SWT_102 Creating/editing a switch ................................................................................... 1098
SWT_103 Specifying the location of a switch .................................................................... 1099
SWT_104 Setting the operation from analysis status for a switch ..................................... 1099
SWT_105 Setting the energize year and retire year for a switch ....................................... 1100
Substations ................................................................................................................................. 1100
STN_101 Converting a node to a substation ..................................................................... 1101
STN_102 Editing minimum and maximum source impedance values for a substation ...... 1101
STN_103 Editing source impedance values for a substation ............................................. 1102
STN_104 Editing the note text for a substation .................................................................. 1102
STN_105 Editing the AMS link for a substation ................................................................. 1103
STN_106 Setting the region ID for a substation ................................................................. 1103
STN_107 Editing maximum source impedance values for a substation ............................ 1103
Transformers ............................................................................................................................... 1104
TRN_101 Editing a transformer ......................................................................................... 1104
TRN_102 Creating/editing a transformer ........................................................................... 1105
TRN_103 Editing the high-side and low-side connection types for a transformer .............. 1105
TRN_104 Creating/editing a transformer ........................................................................... 1107
TRN_105 Specifying the location of a transformer ............................................................. 1108
TRN_106 Editing the gang operated status, gang metering phase, and tap control for a
transformer ............................................................................................................................ 1109
TRN_107 Editing forward mode values for a transformer ...................................................1110
TRN_108 Editing first house values for a transformer ........................................................1111
TRN_109 Editing tap limit values for a transformer .............................................................1111
TRN_110 Editing the tap setting for a transformer ..............................................................1112
TRN_111 Editing high-side and low-side connection types for a transformer .....................1112
TRN_112 Editing the low-side ground reactance for a transformer ....................................1114
TRN_113 Overriding impedance and reactance values for a transformer ..........................1115
User Guide
48
Table of Contents
4004 Setting the load connection to line-line for any section without a neutral ....................... 1122
4005 Adjusting the phasing of a section to match the adjacent sections ................................. 1122
4006 Setting phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral spacing on sections ................................ 1122
4007 Deleting all loop tie switches ........................................................................................... 1123
4008 Deleting all wandering lateral tie switches ...................................................................... 1124
4009 Deleting all classic protective devices ............................................................................. 1124
4010 Copying switch statuses from one year to another ......................................................... 1124
4011 Growing meter demands using the feeder multiplier ....................................................... 1125
4012 Fixing phasing in force unfed areas ................................................................................ 1126
4013 Copying the switchable device status from one year to other years ............................... 1127
4014 Copying meter device demands from one year to other years ....................................... 1128
4015 Resetting feeder colors ................................................................................................... 1129
4016 Moving load from unfed phases to fed phases ............................................................... 1129
4017 Replacing invalid conductors .......................................................................................... 1130
4018 Growing a meters demands using a percent growth rate .............................................. 1131
4019 Resetting meter colors .................................................................................................... 1132
4020 Converting classic fuses ................................................................................................. 1132
4021 Converting classic reclosers ........................................................................................... 1133
4022 Converting classic breakers ............................................................................................ 1133
4023 Converting classic sectionalizers .................................................................................... 1134
4024 Converting existing fuses ................................................................................................ 1134
4025 Converting existing reclosers .......................................................................................... 1135
4026 Converting existing relays ............................................................................................... 1136
4030 Combining close nodes ................................................................................................... 1137
4031 Eliminating close vertices ................................................................................................ 1137
4032 Eliminating duplicate open switchable devices ............................................................... 1138
4033 Eliminating zero-length sections that do not have open devices .................................... 1138
4034 Eliminating exposure zones with no failures ................................................................... 1139
4035 Rephasing one-phase laterals ........................................................................................ 1139
4036 Eliminating duplicate closed switchable devices ............................................................. 1140
4037 Using wandering laterals to feed forced unfed areas ...................................................... 1140
4038 Breaking up forced-unfed sections into one-phase lines ................................................ 1141
4039 Picking up lost neutrals ................................................................................................... 1141
4040 Opening switches to clear loops ..................................................................................... 1142
4050 Setting the value of a field ............................................................................................... 1142
4051 Setting the value of a field if its current value matches a specified value ....................... 1143
4052 Setting the value of a field if its current value is less than a specified amount ............... 1143
4053 Setting the value of a field if its current value is greater than a specified amount .......... 1144
4054 Setting the value of a field if its current value is missing or zero .................................... 1145
4055 Setting the value of a warehouse ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse .... 1146
User Guide
Table of Contents
49
4056 Setting the value of a zone ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse .............. 1147
4057 Setting the value of a protection database field if the current value is not in the protection
database ..................................................................................................................................... 1148
4058 Setting the value of a field if its current value matches another field .............................. 1149
4059 Setting the value of a field if its current value includes a specified value ....................... 1150
4060 Settings the value of a field if its current value matches a specified value, and a second field
matches a second specified value .............................................................................................. 1150
4061 Setting the neutral conductor to same as phase ............................................................. 1151
4062 Replacing invalid conductors with the next valid upstream conductor ............................ 1153
4070 Growing loads across multiple years using a specified growth rate ............................... 1153
4071 Growing loads across multiple years using the section growth rates ............................. 1155
4072 Growing loads across multiple years using the section growth curves ........................... 1156
4073 Growing loads across multiple years using the feeder multiplier .................................... 1157
4074 Copying loads across multiple years .............................................................................. 1159
4075 Deleting loads for unenergized years ............................................................................. 1160
4076 Multiplying loads in multiple years .................................................................................. 1160
4077 Growing meter demands across multiple years .............................................................. 1161
4078 Copying phasing and conductor settings across multiple years ..................................... 1162
4081 Deleting kVA for distributed loads for the current year .................................................... 1163
4082 Deleting kWh for distributed loads for the current year ................................................... 1164
4083 Deleting the customer count for distributed loads for the current year ........................... 1164
4084 Deleting kW and kVAR for spot loads for the current year .............................................. 1165
4099 Special code ................................................................................................................... 1165
4101 Suppressing the model cleanup report ........................................................................... 1165
4104 Suppressing the confirmation message to apply fixes .................................................... 1165
4105 Confirming whether to run the script ............................................................................... 1165
4106 Applying the script to the query set only ......................................................................... 1166
4110 Correcting the orientation of regulators and transformers ............................................... 1166
User Guide
50
User Guide
Table of Contents
CHAPTER
1
Introduction
SynerGEE Electric is a software package developed by GL Noble Denton that simulates, analyzes, and
plans power distribution feeders, networks, and substations. The package is a modular collection of tools built
on a by-phase simulation engine. The simulation engine is an object-oriented design that consists of highly
detailed models for power system devices such as lines, transformer banks, regulator banks, switched
capacitors, and active generators. The models are built to reflect the actual construction of real power system
equipment. The usability and capability of SynerGEE demonstrates the level of commitment involved in
producing quality analysis software.
SynerGEE is user-friendly. The distribution system models can be constructed quickly and are easy to
maintain. The tools, utilities, and features were designed to get feeders modeled quickly and accurately. Data
requirements are clearly marked in dialog boxes and are kept to a minimum so that the models can be
specified with basic nameplate parameters.
The device models and calculations used within SynerGEE conform to the methods accepted and depended
upon by the power engineering community. GL Noble Denton relies on books, manuals, and technical papers
describing algorithms that have been tested and well-proven. Furthermore, GL Noble Denton is advancing
distribution analysis technology in many areas such as device modeling, Delta-modeling, by-phase looped
load-flow and fault analysis, and generator simulation.
SynerGEE supports an enhanced load model that allows the apportionment of loads into three
classifications. This model provides a better tool for you to create more accurate representations of a
distribution system by having control over the way that loads respond to their voltage level. Loads can be
connected between phases and to ground. A variety of tools is supplied to allocate loads and simulate
growth.
More than 850 engineers and technicians at utilities around the world use SynerGEE Electric. SynerGEE
demonstrates GL Noble Dentons commitment to provide the most accurate, reliable, and easy-to-use
software designed to meet your engineering and operational needs.
User Guide
52
Introduction
terminals. When the load-flow applies voltages or demand current to a device like a regulator, that device
handles its own internal workings.
For example, the regulator model is constructed internally like a real voltage regulator. Models exist for the
autotransformer, the load tap-changer, the tap controller, and the line-drop compensator. These components
are all wired together within the software like a real step voltage regulator is built at the factory. The
regulator is able to look at its terminal conditions and its settings and possibly raise or lower a tap. The
regulator model ratchets up and down during the load-flow like a real regulator in a distribution system.
By building realistic device models, GL Noble Denton produces more effective software and provides a more
realistic tool. The SynerGEE approach decouples the engineering analysis routines from the device models.
This allows a more focused concentration on analysis results, rather than specific device models. For
example, when GL Noble Denton designed fault voltage analysis, it could concern itself primarily with fault
voltages, rather than the proper LDC modeling when working on the voltage regulator model. NewtonRaphson-based programs cannot make this separation because all equations need to be in the Jacobian to
reach the correct solution.
GL Noble Dentons detailed models are based on manufacturer schematics, and are not limited to passive
admittance values like models in a Newton-Raphson environment. Many SynerGEE users with extensive
models have reported model voltages within one volt of measured values, field regulator taps matching the
SynerGEE values to within one tap, and imbalance within a percent of that predicted by SynerGEE.
SYNERGEE DOCUMENTATION
SynerGEE comes with an extensive documentation set, including the following documents:
SynerGEE Electric User Guide. The User Guide is the complete reference for the SynerGEE user,
containing usage procedures, detailed application operation, electrical theory, and power
mathematics. The User Guide contains the same information as the Online Help but is formatted for
easy reading and printing.
SynerGEE Electric Online Help. The SynerGEE help system is designed to provide quick assistance
while you are using SynerGEE. The Online Help contains the same information as the User Guide
but is formatted for quick on-screen access.
SynerGEE Electric Technical Reference. The Technical Reference provides details on the theory
and methods behind the SynerGEE analyses.
Installation Guide. The Installation Guide is provided in hardcopy format and is also saved on the
root level of the installation DVD. This document provides installation procedures.
System Requirements. The System Requirements document is provided in hardcopy format and is
also saved on the root level of the installation DVD. This document provides the minimum and
recommended components SynerGEE needs to run on a system.
Release Notes. The Release Notes describes the new enhancements, fixes, and updates that are
provided with the current SynerGEE release. The release notes are provided as PDF files and can
be accessed from the SUPPORT tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
Knowledge base articles. Knowledge base articles are issued periodically to address concerns or
questions about the software that are not covered in the main documents. Generally, they may be
obtained by contacting Technical Support.
User Guide
Introduction
53
Product Advisories. From time to time, if a service release is posted or important issues are
discovered with the current version of SynerGEE, a Product Advisory may be issued. Typically,
Product Advisories are downloaded from the Stoner Software user portal (my.stonersoftware.com).
The Technical Communications staff welcomes your feedback on all SynerGEE documentation. Please send
questions or comments to techcomm@gl-group.com.
TERMS CROSS-REFERENCE
For consistency, SynerGEE documentation and the SynerGEE interface use a standard set of terminology.
For example, an electrical path between two nodes is normally referred to as a section, not a line, facility,
or wire. Because your organization may use different terminology, this cross-reference is provided to help
you find what you are looking for in this document.
Term
SynerGEE
equivalent
Additional notes
actual impedance
simple impedance
asset
(none)
circuit
feeder
contour point
vertex
device name
device ID
DPA/G
(none)
failure zone
exposure zone
feeder name
feeder ID
FID (Facility
IDentifier)
ID
directory
folder
graphic node
vertex
intermediate point
vertex
label
annotation or text
label
User Guide
54
Introduction
Term
SynerGEE
equivalent
line
section
load shape
load curve
node name
node ID
power source
feeder or subtran
section name
section ID
short circuit
fault
study
analysis
graphic point
vertex
wire
conductor
Additional notes
SYNERGEE LICENSING
Use of SynerGEE requires a license. A license determines what features of SynerGEE are available to you,
based on your contract with GL Noble Denton. The most basic license available is the planning license, which
provides basic modeling, load-flow, and fault analysis features. More advanced features, such as
contingency analysis, SynerGEE Cable, and SynerGEE Reliability require additional licensing.
Upon startup, SynerGEE will notify you if the license files expiration date is within 30 days of the current date.
While running SynerGEE, you can select which licenses are active at the current time. This feature is
particularly useful within a network licensing system, which maintains licenses on a network server and
issues them on demand. For example, if you had three copies of SynerGEE but only one reliability license,
you would not want a user to have the reliability license active if it was not being used, because this would
prevent another user from accessing SynerGEE Reliability features. For more information on network
licensing, see the Multi-Use Licensing Guide.
If a user attempts to check-out a module that is not available, a message will appear that lists the modules
that are currently unavailable, as well as a list of the users who currently have the module checked out. In
certain instances, SynerGEE will automatically check in a module where it is needed to execute specific
tasks. For more information, see Time Versus Current Coordination (TCC) Graph on page 604 or Importing
GIS Data Using MiddleLink on page 100.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
User Guide
Introduction
55
In the list of module names, select and clear check boxes to activate and deactivate licenses.
Select the Retain current configuration check box to use the current licensing settings the next
time you start SynerGEE. If you clear the check box, only the Planning license will be enabled when
you restart SynerGEE. This feature is provided for network license users to help prevent module
licenses from being unnecessarily checked out.
Take note of the license expiration date at the bottom of the editor. Contact GL Noble Denton is your
SynerGEE license is about to expire.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
User Guide
56
Introduction
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Each SynerGEE license includes comprehensive technical support. Client Services engineers are always
ready to answer your questions, as well as receive any comments you may have about the product. Many of
the features and enhancements included in new versions come from users like you. If you have an idea on
how we could make the product better, GL Noble Denton would like to hear from you.
To get Technical Support contact information, select the SUPPORT tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar and
then, in the Help group, click Email Technical Support. The email feature allows you to attach key files,
including the currently loaded model and warehouse, the current SynerGEE analysis settings, and a
screenshot of the map. You can send any of these items directly to GL Noble Denton Client Services for
review. A version report will be automatically attached to the support email as an *.HTML file.
User Guide
CHAPTER
2
Managing SynerGEE
Data
Distribution system modeling and analysis is complex. The process is inherently data-intensive, and the
accuracy of your analysis results rests solidly on the quality of this data. Therefore, the importance of good
data, and likewise good data management, cannot be overemphasized.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Subsets on page 82
Versions on page 86
Partials on page 89
Cases on page 91
User Guide
58
User Guide
59
Description
Supported formats
Model data
Access (personal)
Enterprise DBs
MiddleLink
Binary (EDM)
XML
Access (personal)
Enterprise DBs
MiddleLink
Binary (EDM)
XML
Access (personal)
Access (personal)
Enterprise DBs
User Guide
60
Description
Supported formats
Partials
MiddleLink
Access (personal)
Enterprise DBs
Custom
Access (personal)
Access (personal)
Enterprise DBs
Enterprise DBs
Enterprise DBs
User Guide
61
Model data
Model data includes the instance data associated with the spatial construction of your model. In other words,
all data for the topology and structure of your model is found in model data. The map of your model is
generated solely from this data.
As an example, model data can include:
Node coordinates
With several data source formats, including Access and binary files, a model data source can include other
data, such as equipment data. For more information, see DSA data types on page 76.
You can browse for a file, but the preferred method is selecting a DSA from the list. If you
do browse manually, a DSA will be created for you. For more information on these
subjects, see Managing DSAs on page 76 and Creating DSAs on page 79.
Regardless of the file format loaded, all data is merged with data currently in memory. A
load action never does a blanket replacement.
After a load, you may need to select feeders before anything is visible on the map. For
more information, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
Unless you check the Load Warehouse option in the wizard, equipment data is never
loaded by this procedure, even if you are loading a binary file that contains equipment data.
To load equipment data, you must do so explicitly. For more information, see To load
equipment data on page 65.
If any errors are detected in the model data, a warning message box will be displayed, describing
the problems that were found. You have the following options from this message box:
-
Copy. Copy the contents of the warning message box to the clipboard, so you can further
investigate the problems or email the warnings to Technical Support.
Commit. Save the model database, including the errors that are listed.
User Guide
62
Produce a comprehensive model by importing data from a variety of sources, including existing
model data and formatted external data, such as SCADA data.
Conduct focused updates from an external data source, such as a GIS, by merging in specific data
only, perhaps formatted as a MiddleLink data source.
Implement an enterprise database management system for your model data, using a format such as
Oracle or SQL Server. For more information, see Using an Enterprise Database System on
page 114.
The depth to which you use this flexibility depends on your needs, resources, and IT support. GL Noble
Denton has extensive experience with customized data management solutions, and can assist you with
planning and implementation of integration projects. For more information, contact GL Noble Denton.
If the target data file is a database, SynerGEE merges the saved data with the data currently in the
database.
If the target data file is a binary file or a flat file such as XML or MiddleLink, the original data file is
completely replaced.
For personal files, you should use extreme caution when dealing with selected feeders; that is, loading and
saving less than the whole model. Small switch changes can have a significant impact on connectivity and
feeder ownership of sections, which presents a strong potential for data corruption during a save. To help
prevent this, SynerGEE clears out any existing feeders from an existing target when saving only selected
feeders. This safeguard is only a small token of assistance, though, as the responsibility for careful data
management rests with you, the user. In general, when working with personal model files, you should load
and save the entire model at once, whenever feasible, to prevent these sorts of issues.
For enterprise databases, checking in and out selected feeders is your only option, because an enterprise
system by nature prevents whole-model operations. SynerGEE enterprise features provide some safeguards
to help prevent data corruption, but again, much of the responsibility rests with you. Anytime you are working
with model data from an enterprise system, you should stay aware of switching actions that may cause
potentially disruptive changes. You can help avoid problems by checking out adjacent feeders along with
those you plan to work on. For more information on enterprise databases, see Using an Enterprise Database
System on page 114.
User Guide
63
If you have a large model, set the Jet engine max open file limit to 20000. Newer versions of the Jet
engine ship with the default set at 9500, which can cause issues with large datasets. Adjusting the
file limit size will eliminate the problems.
Data elements shared by both data sources, but with different field values
User Guide
64
Keep in mind that the tool is only useful if you are comparing a complete dataset with another complete
dataset. Therefore, you should have an entire dataset loaded into memory before making the comparison.
Otherwise a lengthy list of messages for all entities not loaded could be generated.
Data comparison is particularly useful if you extract model data directly from a GIS. In this situation, you may
monitor disparities between your SynerGEE model and the GIS, especially as updates are made to the GIS.
As such, you are able to determine more easily when your SynerGEE model needs to be updated (or reextracted).
In the wizard, select the data source on disk to which you want to make the comparison.
Click Finish.
Tip:
The comparison report lists results from the context of the Access database schema.
However, you can perform comparisons of model data in any format. The Access schema
simply provides a convenient means of identifying specific data items.
Equipment data
Equipment data can be thought of as your virtual warehouse of power system devices and certain property
sets. A record within your equipment data source contains nameplate factory data on a certain device type,
such as ratings and physical construction. In Access, tables in the equipment data source use the prefix Dev.
By keeping equipment data as a separate data type, SynerGEE allows you to reference this data multiple
times by the device instances in your model data. For example, assume that you have a 1200LB13 switch
type in your equipment data. This record contains current and voltage ratings, which is nameplate data that
User Guide
65
will be consistent between all switches of this type. Therefore, instead of repeating the same data for each
instance in your model data, the model data simply contains a reference to the 1200LB13 switch type record
in the equipment data, as applicable. In essence, equipment data allows the maintenance and reuse of
common manufacturer data, freeing up the model data to contain only model-specific configuration
information. For example, in the model data, the switch instance record would contain data on whether the
switch is open or closed.
When performing an analysis, SynerGEE requires the correct equipment data in memory that is, data that
matches the references from the model data. For more information, see References to equipment data on
page 63.
With several data source formats, including Access and binary files, an equipment data source can include
other data, such as model data. For more information, see DSA data types on page 76.
Switch instance editor (model data) and Switch type editor (equipment data)
User Guide
66
Motor torque curves (see Managing motor curve types in the equipment warehouse on page 368)
Although these types of data may not seem related to nameplate equipment data, they are similar in the
context of SynerGEE modeling and data storage. A particular zone, for example, can be reused for multiple
sections in any given model. Therefore, to facilitate the concept of reuse, these items are stored as
equipment data. Do not be confused by where you may see them in the SynerGEE interface, such as which
tab(s) they fall under in the model explorer.
User Guide
67
equipment data file promotes consistency throughout your organization, and allows you to easily promulgate
the data to any user who needs it.
In many cases, you may choose to store copies of equipment data with your model data, for convenience. If
you do so, remember that any changes to equipment data should also be applied to your master equipment
file, if such a file exists. For more information, see DSA data types on page 76.
Protection data
SynerGEE ships with a protection database in Access that contains the extensive SynerGEE protective
device curve library, used for protection coordination studies. In addition, the protection database contains
information necessary to drive the logic in many of the SynerGEE editors. Data merging, editing, and source
file format changes are not applicable to this data set. The data is not editable within the SynerGEE interface,
and it must be in Access format in your SynerGEE documents directory. DSAs are also not applicable to this
type of data.
Because of the essential information it contains, you should generally load the protection database as well
when you load a model and equipment data.
User Guide
68
Device
Expulsion
Fuse
Current Lim.
Fuse
Electronic
Recloser
Hydraulic
Recloser
Electronic
Relay
User Guide
Curve
Name
Manufacturer
Model
Rating
Type
Min Melt
Ex: S&C
Ex: 122
FusExpMelt
Amp
Rating
Max
Clear
Ex: S&C
Ex: 122
FusExpClear
Amp
Rating
Min Melt
Ex: Cooper
Ex: NX
Volt Rat.
FusCurLimMelt
Amp
Rating
Max
Clear
Ex: Cooper
Ex: NX
Volt Rat.
FusCurLimClear
Amp
Rating
Phs
Curve
Ex: Cooper
Ex: Form
4C
RecElecPh
Ex: 101
Grnd
Curve
Ex: Cooper
Ex: Form
4C
RecElecGrnd
Ex: 101
Phs or
Grnd
Ex: Cooper
Ex: Form
4C
RecElecPhOrGr
nd
Ex: 101
Phs
Curve
Ex: Cooper
Ex: V4H
ME
Coil Rat.
RecHydPh
Ex: A
Grnd
Curve
Ex: Cooper
Ex: V4H
ME
Coil Rat.
RecHydGrnd
Ex: A
Phs or
Grnd
Ex: Cooper
Ex: V4H
ME
Coil Rat.
RecHydPhOrGrn
d
Ex: A
Phs
Curve
Ex: GEC
Ex: MCGG
RelElecPh
Family
Grnd
Curve
Ex: GEC
Ex: MCGG
RelElecGrnd
Family
Phs or
Grnd
Ex: GEC
Ex: MCGG
RelElecPhOrGrn
d
Family
Inst
Curve
Ex: GEC
Ex: MCGG
RelElecInst
Ex: 3Is
Manufacturer
Model
Rating
Type
Curve
Name
Phs
Curve
Ex:
Westinghouse
Ex: CO-11
RelMechPh
Time Dial
Grnd
Curve
Ex:
Westinghouse
Ex: CO-11
RelMechGrnd
Time Dial
Phs or
Grnd
Ex:
Westinghouse
Ex: CO-11
RelMechPhOrGr
nd
Time Dial
Inst
Curve
Ex:
Westinghouse
Ex: CO-11
RelMechInst
Inst4
Device
Mechanical
Relay
69
User Guide
70
Part of a rap sheet for a breaker, with some of the associated points in the CurvePoints table
User Guide
PI Server on page 74
MySQL on page 74
71
Query the target database for the maximum text field lengths.
Send a warning message about any truncations to the Conflicts writing to database editor. This
editor gives you the opportunity to accept the conflicts and write the data to the database (which in
this case will result in the truncating data for the exceeded text fields), or cancel the operation and
return to the unsaved model.
When truncating data, string lengths that you established within SynerGEE are not considered. For example,
you could create a node ID that is 100 characters long, but SynerGEE will still truncate according to the target
database, as needed.
In rare circumstances, truncation could result in a loss of uniqueness between identifiers, if the strings differ
only past the point of truncation. If you need longer maximum string lengths, you can use Microsoft Access to
manually extend the fields and then resave the database in SynerGEE.
User Guide
72
User Guide
73
industry, an intermediary standard format was necessary for an off-the-shelf product like MiddleLink to
function.
Beginning with SynerGEE 3.5, the standalone MiddleLink product was discontinued, and MiddleLink import
functionality was incorporated into SynerGEE as a module. This change brought dramatic improvements to
the MiddleLink process, as data could be imported directly into SynerGEE memory, rather than used to
generate a database on disk. In conjunction with the import process, users also had full access to
SynerGEEs powerful data management and merging tools to assist with the model building task.
When the MiddleLink functionality was incorporated into SynerGEE, it provided an opportunity to reevaluate
and reinvent the data format schema. As such, the schema underwent a significant overhaul to facilitate
usability and future expansion. As a result of this overhaul, the MiddleLink format began to demonstrate its
usefulness for other SynerGEE functions, beyond its original purpose of data import. In a short amount of
time, the data format was incorporated into a wide variety of SynerGEE functions, particularly those
associated with scripting. Throughout this expansion, the term MiddleLink has been maintained to describe
the data format, although its meaning has changed significantly since its use with the original standalone
product.
Many of SynerGEEs scripting applications use the MiddleLink format as their language. When used for this
purpose, the initial number generally indicates a command or action, or a set of processing instructions or
other settings for a scripting action. For example, the following record instructs the model cleanup application
to search the entire model and replace all 1/0 ACSR conductors with 336 ACSR:
4002, 1, 1/0 ACSR, 336 ACSR
To help prevent conflicts between the different scripting applications, the schema numbering is unique for
each application. For example, the 4000 series in the overall schema is reserved for model cleanup
commands. Therefore, the 4002 record above has no relevance to MiddleLink model building. If it happened
to appear in a model-build source file, it would be simply ignored. Likewise, if a 200-series model-build record
appeared in a model cleanup script, it would be ignored.
In general, records may appear in any order in a MiddleLink file. For example, during model data import, if
you have a record to place a switch on a section that appears before the section creation record itself,
SynerGEE will adjust to process those records in the correct order. You may, however, find that a logical
ordering of records facilitates organization and efficiency.
User Guide
74
Spacing. Spacing is generally unimportant, although each record should exist on its own line.
Comments. You can make any line in a MiddleLink file a comment by proceeding it with an
apostrophe ('). Commented lines are ignored by SynerGEE.
Syntax errors. In some cases, syntax errors are reported in the respective report following the
import or analysis action. However, many are not, and in some cases, syntax errors cause
SynerGEE to simply ignore a record. You should use care to avoid syntax errors, because you may
have no indication of their presence other than data problems later.
Schema. The entire MiddleLink schema, including data import, model cleanup, and other records, is
available in SynerGEE by selecting the SUPPORT tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar. In the Tools
group, click Schemas and then select the type of schema that you want to view.
Database tables. MiddleLink data can be written to one or more database tables.
PI Server
If you have access to a PI Historian database, DSAs can be linked through the DSA wizard. It is not
necessary to specify the contents of the data source as you would with model data or equipment data, as
SynerGEE will automatically recognize the PI format. For more information, see Importing Real-Time Data
on page 124.
PI system data can be mined in the SQL dashboard. Select PI from the list of supported DSA types and then
select a query from the list, or write it in the dashboard window. For more information, see SQL Dashboard
on page 772.
MySQL
MySQL is a supported database type in SynerGEE. This format can support the same data found in any
typical database type such as Access or Oracle. Like other formats, MySQL can handle most model and
equipment-related tasks.
User Guide
75
External data import. XML can be used as an alternative to the MiddleLink format to bring in model
data from external sources, such as CIS, OMS, and SCADA systems.
Exporting usable data. If you need to export and transport SynerGEE data in a non-database
format, XML may be a good choice.
Saving program settings. Program settings such as growth options, fault location, design
evaluation, check coordination, model options, contingency, and publishing settings are saved in
XML format, in addition to the binary files.
SynerGEE XML files are based on a proprietary schema, rather than a document type definition (DTD). The
SynerGEE XML schema is designed with a simple structure and intuitive tag names so that data is easily
recognized and managed. To view the entire schema within SynerGEE, select the SUPPORT tab in the
SynerGEE ribbon bar. In the Tools group, click Schemas and then select Model > XML.
User Guide
76
Why DSAs?
DSAs represent a step toward making SynerGEE a fully network-intelligent, central management point for
distribution simulation data. DSAs provide a common interface with which you can import, manage, and
export many different types and formats of data, which is important as the flow of data becomes more
complex. As a hypothetical example, suppose you wanted to engineer a system in which GIS, SCADA, and
CIS information is regularly merged into your simulation data, and then SynerGEE analysis results are
exported and merged elsewhere. To achieve this level of integration within SynerGEE, you would need a
standard means of getting data in and out, which the DSA provides.
Even if you have no plans for such integration, DSAs still simplify how you access your data. And, it is
important to note that traditional methods of loading and saving data are still available, if you choose not to
deal with DSAs directly. For example, when loading model data, the Load Feeders/Stations wizard still allows
you to browse for a file and load it directly. SynerGEE will end up creating and using a DSA behind the
scenes, but you do not necessarily need to be concerned with it, if you so choose.
DSAs are important as SynerGEE moves towards greater roles in data management and integration. It is
encouraged that you do actively use them and learn how they work. For more information on network
intelligence and SynerGEE, see Network intelligence and enterprise data flow on page 58.
Managing DSAs
DSAs, including those automatically created by SynerGEE, can be created and edited at any time.
In most cases, during DSA creation you can point to a non-existent file. Afterwards, when you use the DSA to
save data, the file will be created automatically. To point to a currently non-existent file, you can use the
browsing tools to navigate to the future folder of the file and then type the name of the future file in the
applicable file name box. For example, if you plan to save feeders to a new, currently non-existent Access
database, you can create the DSA using a path to the future database and SynerGEE will create it when you
save those feeders.
User Guide
77
The Edit Data Source wizard provides an intuitive means of specifying any required information when you are
creating or editing a DSA.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
Use the Data Sources editor to add, edit, and delete DSAs as desired. While adding and/or editing
DSAs, follow the wizard prompts, and keep in mind the following:
The DSA manager includes a button to clear model locks. For more information about this
button, see Model locks for Enterprise databases on page 122.
The Privileges button generates a report for DBMS-type data sources. The report contains
information about the specified users privileges in the selected database.
If you are creating a DBMS-type data source, a No Model button is included on the Model
Assignment page. Click this button if you want to set up a DSA that has no assigned
model. This feature allows you to set up a warehouse-only DSA, with no associated model.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Editing a DSA
Perform the following procedure to edit an existing DSA. Keep the following notes in mind:
The DSA manager includes a button to clear model locks. For more information about this button,
see Model locks for Enterprise databases on page 122.
The Privileges button generates a report for DBMS-type data sources. The report contains
information about the specified users privileges in the selected database.
If you are creating a DBMS-type data source, a No Model button is included on the Model
Assignment page. Click this button if you want to set up a DSA that has no assigned model. This
feature allows you to set up a warehouse-only DSA, with no associated model.
TO EDIT DSAS
1
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
In the Data Sources editor, select the DSA that you want to edit and then click Edit.
Use the first page of the Edit Data Source wizard to specify general information about the DSA,
including its name and data source format. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
Description
Provider
User Guide
78
Source is read-only
Select this check box to prevent the DSA from being edited using
SynerGEEs Data Source Editor. Note that this check box does
not set any type of read-only status on the file. The DSA can still
be edited by using SynerGEE and by editing the file directly. The
check box only impacts whether data can be edited in the Data
Source Editor.
For more information on using the Data Source Editor, see Data
Source Editor on page 132.
Use the second page of the Edit Data Source wizard to associate a file or database with the DSA.
The following table describes the different options that you can set.
Path
Specify the path to the data source. If desired, you can specify a
file name that does not yet exist on your network. In this case,
the file will be created during the first time you save data to that
DSA. It is not created automatically on your network simply
because you created a DSA for it.
User Name
Password
Test Connection
Click this button to test the connection to the data source. After
testing the connection, SynerGEE will report Success or
Failure in the wizard.
If desired, select this check box and then type SQL commands
that you want to execute immediately after SynerGEE connects
to the specified database. The SQL commands can be used to
perform tasks such as configuring the database or setting the
version.
Use the third page of the Edit Data Source wizard to associate a data type with the DSA. SynerGEE
data types are described in SynerGEE Data Types on page 59.
In some cases, a SynerGEE data type may contain multiple types of data, and even non-SynerGEE
data. For example, an Access database can contain both model data and equipment data, and also
virtually any array of non-SynerGEE related tables. When SynerGEE loads a certain type of data, it
only retrieves data from the tables applicable to the type and ignores the others, provided that the
applicable data still adheres to the proper schema.
If you are creating an enterprise database DSA, use the fourth page of the Edit Data Source wizard
to specify enterprise-related options. For general information on enterprise databases, see Using
an Enterprise Database System on page 114. For specific information on creating enterprise
database DSAs, see Creating enterprise model DSAs on page 116.
User Guide
79
If you are creating a MiddleLink DSA, use the fifth page of the wizard to specify MiddleLink options.
For more information, see Setting options for a MiddleLink data import on page 106.
Use the last page of the Edit Data Source wizard to verify the settings that you configured for the
DSA. If you are satisfied with the settings, click Update to close the Edit Data Source wizard.
Otherwise, click Back to return to previous pages of the wizard and make further edits, as required.
Creating DSAs
DSAs can be created manually using the Data Sources editor, or automatically by loading a model directly
into SynerGEE. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
Use the Add Data Source wizard to configure the new DSA. The options in the Add Data Source are
the same as the Edit Data Source wizard and are described in Editing a DSA on page 77.
User Guide
80
When you are finished configuring the new DSA, click Add to close the Add Data Source wizard.
Validating DSAs
As you use SynerGEE, your list of DSAs can sometimes grow long, and may contain references to obsolete
or invalid files or items. SynerGEEs data source validation tool can help you maintain your list of DSAs by
verifying the accuracy of each one. The Data Source report that is created by this tool will list key information
about your DSAs, including whether each DSA is valid or invalid. An invalid DSA indicates that the file could
be missing or inaccessible, or an enterprise database connection could not be made.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO VALIDATE DSAS
1
User Guide
81
Saving DSAs
When you create, edit, and delete DSAs using the Data Sources editor, those changes are saved to the
SynDataSources.xml file when you exit SynerGEE. However, a Save button is provided in the Data Sources
editor to immediately save the changes that you have made. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO SAVE DSAS
1
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
Click Save.
Deleting DSAs
Perform the following procedure to delete one or more DSAs from SynerGEE.
TO DELETE DSAS
1
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
Do This ...
a
Hold the Ctrl and Shift keys as you select the DSAs
that you want to delete.
User Guide
82
To ...
Do This ...
SUBSETS
A subset, as the name implies, is a subset of model data, often stored in the same data source from which it
originated. The data in a subset represents a collection of related information that can be used to quickly
reconfigure your model, according to the specific subset type.
Subsets can serve any variety of purposes. For example, you might keep load subsets for winter and
summer, rather than keeping two separate models. Or, you might save a series of different switch
configurations as different subsets, allowing you to change configurations quickly for study, rather than
maintaining versions or different models.
Subsets are supported for all database formats, including Access, Oracle, and SQL server.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Identify your subset needs. If you are considering using a subset, you probably have an idea of
what you might need it for. Before using a subset, be sure you understand exactly what data is
included. For more information, see Subset types on page 83.
Create a DSA for the subset(s). Subsets are stored in a database, often the same database from
which you loaded model data. Or, subsets can reside in their own database. In either case,
SynerGEE requires a data source alias (DSA) to communicate data back and forth. If you are
storing subset data in an existing model data source, this process may be as simple as adding the
Subset specification to the existing DSA for that source. For more information, see DSA data
types on page 76.
User Guide
83
Save and load subsets. Using the DSA, you can save and load subsets at will. When saving and
loading subsets, you simply specify a name and type, and the DSA does the rest. For more
information, see To load a subset on page 84.
Subset types
The following table details the types of subsets available. Each subset type is stored as its own data entity
and can be loaded independently of any other subset type. You determine the type of subset to be saved
during the save process. For more information, see To load a subset on page 84.
You should always remain aware of the subset scope. Some subsets save data from the entire model in
memory, while others save data from selected feeders only. When loading a subset, however, the entire
model is updated with any applicable data. Feeder selection is irrelevant when loading a subset.
Subset type
Contents
Capacitors
Selected feeders
Distributed loads
Selected feeders
Distributed and
spot loads
Selected feeders
Elbows
Whole model
Meters
Selected feeders
Mobile items
Whole model
Queried sections
Selected feeders
Source demands
Whole model
Spot loads
Selected feeders
User Guide
84
Subset type
Contents
Switches and
elbows
Whole model
Whole model
Projects
Selected feeders
Large Customers
Selected feeders
Regulators
Selected feeders
Saving a subset
Perform the following procedure to save a subset. Even though subsets are normally represented as
additional tables in an existing data source, you must still have a DSA for them. For example, if you are
saving your subsets to a certain model database, the DSA to that database will not appear in the subset load
and save wizards, unless you have the DSA specifically configured to contain subset data as well. For more
information on creating and editing DSAs, see Managing DSAs on page 76.
Saving a subset acts as an update process, rather than a replacement. For example, saving a switch subset
updates all applicable switches in the current subset, while ignoring any other records.
TO SAVE A SUBSET
1
Loading a subset
Perform the following procedure to load a subset.
TO LOAD A SUBSET
1
User Guide
85
where Type is an acronym for the subset type and SubsetName is the name you gave it. UserName
generally applies only in an enterprise database environment. For example, a distributed load subset called
MySubset would appear in the following local Access table:
SubSet_DLD_MySubset
User Guide
86
Description
The source node flow subset is designed to transfer demands from a fed
system to the feeding system, by the creation of spot loads on the feeding
system. For example, it may be used to simulate the demands of a primary
feeder/subtran system on a subtransmission system, such that the
subtransmission system can be accurately analyzed without the entire primary
system in memory. For more information, see Source node flow subset on
page 86.
VERSIONS
SynerGEE supports the loading and saving of versions, which are stored in a database in separate version
tables. This function allows you to make changes to a model and save just those changes, without having to
do a complete save to a different database. In other words, when you save a version, you save only new
changes to your model. As such, a version can serve as a useful tool for tentative planning and cost analysis.
Versions can be saved in any supported database format. When you load a version, the model is updated
with any applicable data that is found. Therefore, when loading a version, you should have the model in
memory from which you saved the version originally. Otherwise the two datasets may be incompatible.
TO LOAD A VERSION
1
TO SAVE A VERSION
1
User Guide
87
Create a DSA to database MyVersions.mdb. This is the database that will house the versions
library.
Make changes to the base model that you would like to represent the first version.
Save the first version, by selecting MyModel.mdb as the base model to version, and storing the
version in MyVersions.mdb.
Make more changes that represent the second version. If you want to start from the base model
again, first close MyModel.mdb without saving changes and reload it. You can close the model by
selecting the MODEL tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, and in the Model group, clicking New.
Save the second version, like you did with the first one.
Close SynerGEE.
10 Select the MODEL tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, and in the Model group, click New. Do not save
changes. Reload MyModel.mdb, and then the second version.
11 Assuming that the consensus of the meeting is to implement the first version, again close the model
without saving changes and reload MyModel.mdb.
12 Reload the first version.
13 Save the model data to MyModel.mdb to make the first version permanent in the database.
14 Delete or archive the second version.
Version processing
SynerGEE generates versions based on a comparison of the model in memory with a database on disk. Any
differences found are compiled into a version data set and stored in special version instance tables in the
specified database. When you save a version, you give it a name, select the data source for comparison, and
also select the database in which to store the version tables. With this functionality, you could do things such
as the following:
Keep versions in the original model database. You can specify the data source for comparison
and the target for the version tables as the same source file. In this manner, you could store all
versions for a particular model in the same database as the model.
Have a separate versions file, like a version library. Because you can store version tables in any
database, you could keep a library of all versions in a separate file, regardless of what model they
originated from. If you maintain a file such as this, you must always be careful that you load versions
User Guide
88
Model on disk
Memory model
Version
tables
After the version has been saved, the base model can be reloaded, after closing the old model without
saving. At this point, you are back where you started, with a version saved in the target data source. If you
want to keep the version isolated from the base model, be sure not to save the changes to the base model
after saving the version. Otherwise, those changes will be incorporated permanently into the base model, and
your version probably will not have value.
After you create them, versions can be loaded into the model and used for analysis. The records in the
versions tables are simply loaded and added to the model. You can load multiple versions. However, care
should be taken when versions represent changes to the same facilities. If a version contains data that
conflicts with data in memory, conflicting data is not loaded. Again, remember not to save changes to the
base model after loading a version, unless you want that version to become a permanent addition to the base
model.
Model on disk
Version
tables
Memory model
Loading a version
SynerGEE does not manage versions individually once they are loaded. If you try to re-save changes to a
version, SynerGEE will not compare the original version to any changes you have made. Rather, each time a
version is saved, SynerGEE compares the whole model in memory to the stored model again. Therefore, if
you load multiple versions, you will not be able to make changes to one and save those changes back to the
individual version.
In a database, versions are stored in instance tables prefixed with SC_. These version tables are structured
similar to their corresponding regular instance tables, except that each record contains two additional fields:
Code The action type code indicating the type of change made, either A, D, or U for Add, Delete,
or Update, respectively
When the version is loaded, the SC_ tables are read and the appropriate adds, deletes, or updates are made
to the model, based on the name of the version being loaded.
User Guide
89
PARTIALS
Partials are a means to import a customizable subset of data into your model, using data source files in the
MiddleLink format. Partials use the same record set from the MiddleLink schema that you would use to import
model data. In some ways, partials function similarly to the established subset feature, except that they are
customizable and flexible, while established subsets are structured and only operate on a predefined set of
data. For more information on the established subsets feature, see Subsets on page 82.
Partial imports include categories, so a partial can load specific sets of data, such as regulators and fuses.
The categories are saved as MiddleLink records. For example, you could create a partial for fuses which
saves the fuses out of a current model as MiddleLink records. Results are available for: Load-flow, Fault,
Capacity, and Reliability.
Tip:
Partials can be used to import data from any source, such as a GIS, SCADA, or any type of external
system. The only requirement is that the data conforms to the MiddleLink format before import. For
an introduction to the MiddleLink format from a GIS import perspective, see MiddleLink data source
(new MiddleLink) on page 104.
TO LOAD A PARTIAL
1
If this record were in a model data source, SynerGEE could not create the section unless it also found
records to create nodes A and B. However, if imported from a partial data source, SynerGEE could create the
section anyway, provided that nodes A and B already existed in memory. As another example, you could
import a particular device without a record to create the host section, as long as the section already existed.
In other words, partials allow SynerGEE to search the model in memory to resolve required references, while
a model data source must provide all of them internally.
In a general sense, you can consider partials to be an update process, whereas normal model data import
is more like a build process. However, partials do have the capability to build as well. For example, consider
the following MiddleLink record:
401, Sect_01, MySwitch, 600LB13, 0, 0
If you were importing this record as a partial, and the switch did not exist previously, it would be created. If it
did exist, the existing switch record would be updated. If you were doing a general model data import and the
switch already existed, however, this duplicate record would be rejected.
User Guide
90
Temporary model
(for validation, etc.)
Merge
SynerGEE
model
Partials import
Item-by-item
import
MiddleLink
data
SynerGEE
model
If you import this record as part of a model data source, you will get a 600 kvar/phase capacitor with each
import no matter what, because the section and its equipment come as a unit. However, if you import it from
a partial data source, the results are less predictable. If the capacitor does not currently exist, you will get a
600 kvar capacitor as expected. But if it does, you will get 600 kvar/phase added to the existing device, just
as if you had multiple 701 records in a model data source. If the existing capacitor was not named
MyCapacitor, the import will even change the name.
User Guide
91
Therefore, use care when designing a workflow that includes partials. Test them thoroughly and be sure that
they are performing the actions you expect.
CASES
Cases are script files written in either the Python format or the text-based recipe format that are designed to
load a model, warehouse, and protection database, as well as select feeders and perform other tasks as
specified in the script. The basic script can be created automatically from the MODEL tab of the SynerGEE
ribbon bar. Simply configure SynerGEE with the model, warehouse, and protection database that you want to
load, as well as the feeder selection, and then save the case file. SynerGEE will create the script that sets up
the current modeling environment. You can then edit the script to add any additional commands that are
available in the respective scripting language, for example to run an analysis or perform other related tasks.
The case file can be run from the MODEL tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar at any time.
Note that case files are stored by default in your Macros file directory. You can identify and even change the
location of the Macros directory from the Preferences editor, as described in Defining file paths on
page 167.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with case files.
Recipe.Start and Recipe.End. The Recipe.Start and Recipe.End commands are required
commands in the text-based recipe format. These two commands signal to SynerGEE when the
text-based recipe starts and ends.
Model.DropAllFeeders and Warehouse.Drop. The first two commands will clear all data that is
currently in memory, for both feeders and the warehouse. No data will be saved, and you will not be
prompted to save data as you are running the case. Therefore, it is critical that you address any
unsaved data issues before you run any case.
ScriptList.Create and ScriptList.AddItem. The ScriptList commands create a list of values for later
use in the script. Here, the ScriptList.Create command is used to create a list named Feeders, and
the ScriptList.AddItem commands are used to add the names of the feeders in the sample model to
this newly created list. The script list will then be referenced when loading a DSA, which occurs in
the next step.
User Guide
92
DSA.LoadFeeders. The DSA.LoadFeeders command loads the DSA named Access Database
(Sample Model) and then loads the feeder names that have been added to the Feeders list (using
the ScriptList commands described in the previous step).
Map.ZoomArea. The Map.ZoomArea command zooms the SynerGEE map display to the current
extents in the SynerGEE map display.
The following example shows the script case file that is described above. To see the same example saved in
the Python script format, see Sample script file (Python format) on page 93.
Recipe.Start
'Create new model
Model.DropAllFeeders
'Create new warehouse
Warehouse.Drop
'Set feeders to be loaded
ScriptList.Create, Feeders
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Camp - Market
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Camp Hill
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Carlisle Xfmr 1
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Carlisle Xfmr 2
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Cls - Dickinson
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Cls - Louther
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Cls - Pomfret
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, LTFeeder
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, New - Big Spring
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, New - Cove
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, New - Liberty
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, New - Springfield
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Newville 1
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Newville 2
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Ship - South Penn
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Ship - West Martin
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Ship sub 1
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, Ship sub 2
ScriptList.AddItem, Feeders, York - Grantham
'Load feeders
DSA.LoadFeeders, Access Database (Sample Model), Feeders
'Select feeders
Model.DeselectAllFeeders
Model.SelectFeeder, New - Big Spring
Model.SelectFeeder, New - Cove
Model.SelectFeeder, New - Liberty
User Guide
93
Create an initialize the Solver. These initial steps are required for any Python script that is written for
use with SynerGEE.
Load feeders from a specified DSA. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
model that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Model).
Specify which of those feeders will be selected when the model is loaded into SynerGEE.
The following example shows the script case file that is described above. To see the same example saved in
SynerGEEs text-based recipe format, see Sample case file (text-based recipe format) on page 91.
For more information on using Python scripts in SynerGEE, see Python Scripts on page 705.
# Import the Solver enumerated types
import SELib
# Import the module which creates the Solver
from win32com.client import Dispatch
# Import the module for COM exception handling
import pythoncom
try:
# Create the Solver
s = Dispatch("SESolver.StonerElectricSolver")
# Initialize the Solver
s.Init("", "kilowatt")
# Create new model
s.Model().Clear()
s.Model().Connect()
User Guide
94
User Guide
95
By changing this option, you will also change the script type that is used for SynerGEEs startup
script. See Startup Scripts on page 715 for more information.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
Select Use Python for Startup Script and Case Files to use Python scripts with SynerGEEs case
feature.
or
Clear the check box to use recipe scripts with SynerGEEs case feature.
Creating a case
You can use SynerGEE to automatically create a new case script file from the MODEL tab of the SynerGEE
ribbon bar. Based on how you have set your preferences (as described in Specifying which script type to use
with cases on page 95), the new script will be in either the Python format or the SynerGEE recipe format.
The initial script will include commands to clear the current data from memory; load a DSA, warehouse, and
protection database (those that are already loaded in SynerGEE at the time you create the script); select the
currently selected feeders; and zoom to the network boundaries for the selected feeders. All case files are
saved in your Macros file directory with a *.syncase file extension. There is no distinction in the file naming or
file extension between Python files and text-based recipe files.
Once created, you are free to edit the script file to add additional commands (for example, to run a certain
analysis type). For more information on editing a case script, see Editing a case on page 96.
TO CREATE A CASE
1
Prepare the case that you want to create by loading the appropriate DSA, warehouse, and
protection database in SynerGEE, as well as selecting the feeders that you want to work with.
In the MODEL tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the case text box, type the name of the new case
that you want to create.
User Guide
96
Note:
Remember that when you click the Save button for a case, you are only saving the script
case file, which includes commands for actions such as loading a model, warehouse, and
protection database. It is important to note that you are not actually saving the model,
warehouse, or protection database.
If a case file already exists with the specified name, you will be prompted to overwrite the current
file. Click Yes to replace the file, or click No to cancel.
Editing a case
Once you have created a case, you can edit the case as required to add, modify, and remove commands.
Cases are saved in either the SynerGEE text-based recipe format or the Python scripting format, based on
how you have configured your preferences (as described in Specifying which script type to use with cases
on page 95). You can use any commands available in the respective scripting language to modify the case,
as appropriate.
The following procedure describes how to open a case file directly from SynerGEE for the purpose of editing
the case, using either with the Script editor (for text-based recipe scripts) or the Python IDLE editor (for
Python scripts). Take note that all case files are saved in your Macros file directory with a *.syncase file
extension. Therefore, you can also navigate to that file directory and directly edit the file using other file
editing tools. You can also copy the case files to other locations, for example to use the case file with another
SynerGEE installation.
TO EDIT A CASE
1
In the Case group, select the name of the case that you want to edit.
User Guide
97
The script will open in either the SynerGEE script editor or the Python IDLE editor, depending on the
type of script that you have selected to edit. Use the script editor to edit the script as required. For
more information on editing text-based recipes using the SynerGEE script editor, see Using the
Script Editor on page 725. For more information on editing Python scripts, see Python Scripts on
page 705.
Running a case
Perform the following procedure to run a case from SynerGEE. This procedure will likely replace the model in
memory, even if the case loads the same data source that you are already editing. Furthermore, you will not
be prompted to save your model before you run a case. Therefore, make sure you have taken precautions to
save your data, if necessary, before you run a case.
Note that Python scripts can also be run from the Python IDLE editor. For more information, see Running a
Python script on page 709.
TO RUN A CASE
1
In the Case group, select the name of the case that you want to run.
User Guide
98
Deleting a case
Perform the following procedure to delete a case from SynerGEE. This procedure will delete the case file that
is saved (by default) in your Macros file directory. In addition, the case file name will no longer be available
from the Model tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
TO DELETE A CASE
1
In the Case group, select the name of the case that you want to delete.
DATA MART
The SynerGEE data mart is essentially a federation of our clients related data that can be logically grouped
to provide information useful to model building, distribution, and analysis. The resulting engine is a custom
application created through a close collaboration between SynerGEE engineers and the utility engineers. The
more engineers take advantage of building and maintaining the data mart, the more it can grow in its maturity.
User Guide
99
The following figure shows extraction of data directly from the AMS database, known as the model forge
method. DataPrep and MiddleLink files are no longer part of the extraction process or architecture. With the
model forge method, models are built by region instead of by feeder, causing build times to be dramatically
reduced. SynerGEE builds models from the clients data mart, which can include databases from various
locations defined by the client.
UNIT TESTS
Unit tests can be used to test small models for line calculations and load calculations. The small models are
analyzed by hand, and the expected results are made a part of the MiddleLink file that is used to describe the
system. SynerGEE will process the MiddleLink unit test file and generate a report showing which tests
passed and which tests failed.
Unit tests help ensure that SynerGEEs calculations remain accurate and consistent as future updates are
made to the SynerGEE application, architecture, and database. Performing unit tests will reduce costs and
improve the time needed to upgrade to new versions of SynerGEE.
Unit test files must be saved in your SynerGEE Electric Units folder, which by default is in the following
location (Windows 7), where username is your Windows user name:
C:\Users\username\Documents\Stoner Software\SynerGEE Electric\
Units
The Units folder can be changed from the Paths tab on the SynerGEE Preferences editor. For more
information, see Defining file paths on page 167.
User Guide
100
In the Unit Test editor, select the check box for each unit test that you want to perform.
MiddleLink. Any time you see a reference to the MiddleLink schema, this refers to the newer
schema introduced with SynerGEE Electric 3.5. This schema was expanded to accommodate many
additional functions, such as outage and customer data. For general information on this schema,
see MiddleLink data format on page 72.
MiddleLink 3.4. The MiddleLink 3.4 schema refers specifically to the MiddleLink file format that is
used by the last release of the standalone MiddleLink product, version 3.4. This format required a
set of source files to build a model. For compatibility, SynerGEE can still import MiddleLink 3.4 data,
but this functionality will eventually be deprecated. For more information on the MiddleLink 3.4
schema, see MiddleLink 3.4 data source on page 103. If you are or were a MiddleLink 3.4 user,
see Note to MiddleLink 3.4 users Building models from GIS data on page 101.
At a lower level, building a model from GIS data can involve a host of data issues that are unique to your
situation. This User Guide does not attempt to cover every possible data issue that might arise. Rather, it
attempts to present a higher-level overview of the import process, so that you can understand the tools well
enough to customize an extraction/model build system that works for you.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Note to MiddleLink 3.4 users Building models from GIS data on page 101
User Guide
The MiddleLink data source Building a model from a GIS on page 103
101
Significant time and cost savings. By eliminating the manual process of model building, you will
immediately realize a significant reduction in time and expenses.
Consistency throughout the organization. When your SynerGEE models are generated from GIS
data, everyone is looking at the same data.
Regular updates to SynerGEE models. GIS extraction allows you to quickly update your SynerGEE
models automatically when updates are made in the GIS.
Two-way data validation. When you bring GIS-based data into SynerGEE, you can use the import
tools native validation features to find and fix data problems, and later use SynerGEE data
management tools as well. After you correct a problem, the change can be implemented in the GIS
source, providing benefit to all parties. Many organizations find that data import validation by
SynerGEE has played a significant role in improving their GIS data.
To create the data source files used by the import tool, you need a GIS extraction process in place. You can
build this process yourself, adhering to the MiddleLink schema. Or, GL Noble Denton can create a
customized, turnkey extraction process for you, known as DataPrep. The GL Noble Denton approach is
comprehensive and does not end until your models are validated and working in SynerGEE. For more
information on customized DataPrep systems, contact GL Noble Denton. For more information on source
files, see The MiddleLink data source Building a model from a GIS on page 103.
Import directly into SynerGEE. When you build a model with the SynerGEE data import tool, it
opens directly in the SynerGEE map view. You can then use the full suite of SynerGEE tools to
check and validate the model, such as the check data report and load-flow analysis.
User Guide
102
Easy data merging. When the import tool builds a model, it merges the new data with any data
already in memory. As such, you can quickly merge new data with an existing model by simply
loading the existing model before importing the new data.
Consistency with defaults and settings. SynerGEE maintains a set of parameter defaults, as does
the standalone MiddleLink product. Using MiddleLink 3.4, these defaults have to be maintained in
two places, creating the potential for inconsistencies. Using the SynerGEE import tool, defaults
assignment and validation all takes place within the SynerGEE environment, helping to promote
consistency. For more information on defaults, ranges, and validation, see Editing Default Values
for SynerGEE Devices on page 136 and Validating and Cleaning Up Model Data on page 137.
Easier file management. Because the tool builds models directly within SynerGEE, you can manage
the model files afterward using familiar SynerGEE features. This means that once a model is built,
you have all of SynerGEEs powerful data management tools at your fingertips, such as standard
loading and saving, data comparison, versions, the gallery, and much more.
Speed. The combination of a common interface and SynerGEEs powerful engine make model
builds much faster than before. And, because the model is built directly in SynerGEE, the separate
MiddleLink step is eliminated and your time to manage the file is reduced.
The SynerGEE import tool is compatible with previous versions of MiddleLink files, including version 3.4.
However, if you import MiddleLink 3.4 data directly into SynerGEE, you should begin working to switch to the
newer MiddleLink schema, because the older format is no longer under active development and will only
become increasingly obsolete.
Some users, who have source data formatted in the MiddleLink 3.4 format, continue to use the standalone
MiddleLink product to generate models. If you choose this approach, you should be warned that standalone
MiddleLink is no longer in active development. Eventually, operating system evolution will make the
standalone MiddleLink product non-functional. In addition, standalone MiddleLink will never generate a
model any newer than version 3.4. With each successive release of SynerGEE, this version becomes
increasingly obsolete and may eventually cause compatibility issues. If you are still using standalone
MiddleLink 3.4, you should begin the effort to migrate to the newer MiddleLink schema and use SynerGEE to
import the data.
To import features introduced after SynerGEE 3.4, you must a use a newer MiddleLink data source. Once
you upgrade your data source files to the newer format, the source will become incompatible with the
standalone MiddleLink product and you must use SynerGEE to build your models. For more information on
compatibility and the data source, see The MiddleLink data source Building a model from a GIS on
page 103.
User Guide
Extract the data from your GIS and format it as a MiddleLink data source, adhering to the
established schema. For more information on the data source schema, see The MiddleLink data
103
Create a DSA to the MiddleLink data source, configuring your MiddleLink import options as
appropriate. For more information on these options, see Setting options for a MiddleLink data
import on page 106. For more information on DSAs, see Data Source Aliases (DSAs) on page 75.
Import the data source into SynerGEE. For more information, see Running a MiddleLink data
import (model build) on page 103.
In the map view, select feeders as desired to view the model that you imported.
As necessary, run the model cleanup tool without applying any changes, and review the report. For
more information on using the tool, see Model Cleanup Scripts on page 718.
If proposed changes (if any) are acceptable, run model cleanup a second time and implement the
changes.
Run the check data report to track down and resolve any lingering issues. For more information on
this report, see Digest report on page 478.
Xcoord,
446741,
User Guide
104
445168,
445174,
444910,
85368,
85039,
84717,
"1005",
"1016",
"1030",
""
""
""
Each line of this particular file represents an individual node and contains five pieces of data to describe it.
The pieces of data must be separated by commas and ordered precisely, as dictated by the schema. For
example, the X coordinate of a particular node is always found in the second position of its respective line.
This type of CSV format is common to all 3.4 data source files. There are over 20 data source file types that
can be used because each piece of equipment has its own file type, as do items such as nodes, sections,
and loads. However, you are not required to have every single file in a data source to build a model. If one or
more is missing, SynerGEE simply leaves that item(s) out. For example, if you are missing the capacitor
(CAP) file, SynerGEE simply skips capacitors and adds none to the build.
Note that the first line of the sample file above is a comment line, denoted by the initial semi-colon (;).
Comment lines can be added anywhere within a data source file and are not processed. Also, note that the
string fields in the example above are enclosed in quotes. Quotes were required for string fields by the
standalone MiddleLink product. However, when SynerGEE imports version 3.4 data source files, quotes are
optional. SynerGEE can import string data properly with or without quotes and simply ignores any quotes it
finds in the data source.
A version 3.4 data source also requires a MAP file, which is slightly different than the other data source files.
Instead of containing model data, it contains important information about the data source in general, such as
the data source version number. The MAP file is similar to a control file around which the remaining files are
organized. When you perform a data import/model build, you specify the MAP file only, and SynerGEE finds
the remaining data source files based on the MAP file name. For more information on the format of a MAP
files, use the MiddleLink 3.4 schema, accessible by selecting the SUPPORT tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
In the Tools group, click Schemas and then select Legacy > MiddleLink 3.4.
In the Help group, click Schemas and then select Legacy > MiddleLink 3.4.
Code
Field 1
Field 2
Field 3
Field 4
Field 5
Basic switch
data
401
Section
ID (s)
Switch
ID (s)
Switch
type (s)
Near from
node (b)
Is open (b)
Automatic /
Autotransfer
switch
402
Section
ID (s)
Is autotransfer (b)
User Guide
105
Description
Code
Field 1
Field 2
Field 3
Field 4
Field 5
Loop tie
switch
403
Section
ID (s)
Wandering
lateral tie
switch
404
Section
ID (s)
In the data source, for example, you might see the following entries, which would create an auto-transfer
switch:
401, SEC_0110, Switch_32A, 1200LB13, 1, 0
402, SEC_0110
The first line uses code 401 to indicate that a switch should be created on section SEC_0110 named
Switch_32A, on the from-node end of the section, using switch type 1200LB13, and should be closed. The
second line uses code 402 to indicate that the switch on SEC_0110 should be marked as an autotransfer
switch. Because code 402 applies only to switches, and because only one switch can exist on a section, no
further identifying information is needed for this line.
All device types have their own numerical category, based on a multiple of 100. In this example, you can see
that the 400s are reserved for switch data. If you look at the full schema, you will see that node data is in the
100s, section data in the 200s, feeder data in the 300s, and so on. Within categories, each numerical code
groups up to eight pieces of related data items for easier management. Using these codes, you can logically
sort your source as needed to manage your data.
Because data is identified by numerical codes, lines can exist in the source file in any order. Quotation marks
should not be used in the new MiddleLink data source.
The transformation of the MiddleLink data source has occurred for the following reasons:
Easier management. Because all the source data is in one file, it is much easier to manage. In
addition, since it is arranged by number and category, it is easier to sort, identify, and troubleshoot.
Easier to expand. As the data required for SynerGEE has increased over time, the original data
source format became cumbersome to expand and manage. Whenever a new field was introduced,
it had to be appended to the end of an existing record entry, resulting in some very long records in
the source files. With the newer schema and beyond, new features will receive a new numerical
code which can be used as any other, and any codes that no longer apply can be simply ignored.
Keep in mind that the MiddleLink 3.4 format is still compatible with SynerGEE. For more information, see
Note to MiddleLink 3.4 users Building models from GIS data on page 101.
In the Tools group, click Schemas and then select Model > MiddleLink.
User Guide
106
Description
Phasing
Designates the phase letters assigned to phase positions within the data
source. Because only phase letters appear in the data source, SynerGEE
needs to know which actual positions they apply to. After the import, data
source lettering is discarded and phases are lettered according to settings in
your preferences. For more information on setting the phase lettering, see
Setting SynerGEE preferences on page 163.
Calculate Length
Sets SynerGEE to add a neutral phase to any line read from the data source
without a neutral phase.
Voltage Base
Length Multiplier
Multiplier used for section lengths read from the data source. The multiplier
also applies to calculated lengths, if that option is set.
General rules, messages, and warnings MiddleLink data import on page 110
User Guide
107
From/To. In a data source, every section has a literal from-node and to-node. When this
nomenclature is used in the interface, it is referring directly to the nodes as they are listed in the
respective section data record.
Source/Load. When this nomenclature is used, SynerGEE uses actual power flow to determine
which node is which. SynerGEE does not necessarily follow the same direction as the from/to
designations in the data source. Because the source/load concept is less applicable in a meshed
network model, the source/load terminology is only used in the interface when you have your
preferences set to disallow loop creation.
The source/load method is a mostly an interface convenience, using SynerGEEs topology engine to
determine whether a node is a source or load node, shielding you from the added complexity of from-nodes
versus to-nodes. SynerGEE can use this method when working with a full model within the map view, with all
topology tools running. However, SynerGEE MiddleLink must always use the literal from/to node
designations, because the topology engine cannot operate fully on a partial model as it is being built.
Many MiddleLink records use the from/to node terminology to indicate equipment location and orientation.
For example, a 1301 record to create a primary transformer uses node designations to determine the
direction of the high-side winding. When creating your data extraction/model build process, use and
designate from- and to-nodes as they literally appear in your data source, not as they may relate to the actual
power flow in the final model. During a MiddleLink data import, SynerGEE has no concern for whether a node
will ultimately come to represent a source or load node.
Other records that include from/to node data and adhere to this concept include 401, 801, 901, 1001, and
1201.
User Guide
108
This record is intended to supply conductor data for section Section_01, but the conductor fields are blank.
When the section was originally created with a 201 record, SynerGEE applied defaults from SynDefaults.xml,
but this 203 record would come behind and delete that default conductor data.
Although situations such as this may not be common, it remains your responsibility to manage your data in a
fashion that supports your needs. SynerGEE does provide several tools for finding and correcting data
issues, which may be your best approach for ensuring that your final model is what you expected. These
tools include Check Data report on page 137, Editing Default Values for SynerGEE Devices on page 136,
and Model Cleanup Scripts on page 718.
Method 1 Feeder or subtran references a node in the data source on page 108
Method 2 Feeder or subtran does not reference a valid node on page 108
The feeder or subtran references a valid section that is missing only one of its nodes.
User Guide
109
If these two conditions are met, SynerGEE creates the missing node using the coordinates in the feeder or
subtran data, giving it the same ID as the feeder or subtran. Afterward, it creates the feeder or subtran itself,
and the proper feeder/subtran/node relationship exists in the model.
User Guide
110
Message
Description
Syn_01
Syn_02
Syn_03
Syn_04
Syn_05
Syn_06
User Guide
111
Code
Message
Description
Syn_07
Syn_08
Data Type
1.
Text
2.
Text
3.
Real number
4.
Real number
5.
Real number
6.
Real number
7.
Integer
8.
Error message.
Text
User Guide
112
Recipes. Recipes are custom scripts that can perform a variety of tasks within SynerGEE, including
the import of data. For detailed information on recipes, see Recipe Scripts on page 700.
Command line arguments. When you launch SynerGEE from a command line, you can specify
certain arguments that initiate processing tasks after startup. One of these arguments allows you to
run a recipe as soon as SynerGEE starts up. For detailed information on command line arguments,
see Launching SynerGEE from the Command Line on page 184.
Briefly stated, to automate a MiddleLink build, you should create a command line setup which launches a
recipe, which in turn runs a model build process. For a more detailed examination of this process, see
General steps for MiddleLink automation on page 112.
Write and test a recipe that builds the model from your MiddleLink data source and saves the
results.
With DataIO recipe commands, you can fully automate the task of importing and saving feeders.
You should write this recipe and test it fully within SynerGEE before adding it to any automated and/
or unattended process. For an example of this type of recipe, see Sample recipe for MiddleLink
automation on page 113.
User Guide
113
Create and test a command line configuration that launches the model build recipe. For a sample
command line, see Sample command line for MiddleLink automation on page 114.
Implement some sort of scheduled launch for the command line, perhaps nightly at a certain time.
You may use any variety of external tools to schedule a regular application launch, via a command
line. One of the common means is through Windows Scheduler, accessed through the Windows
Control Panel. For more information on Windows Scheduler, see your Windows documentation.
In summary, with this configuration in place, Windows Scheduler will start SynerGEE at the prescribed time,
and command line arguments will launch a recipe that initiates and completes the model build. Note that this
process does not include preparation of the MiddleLink data source itself. Naturally, for a regular model build
to have value, the data source must also be updated regularly from the original source, usually a GIS
database. As data extraction methods vary widely between organizations and networks, this document does
not attempt to address this task. For assistance and ideas, you may consider contacting your IT department
or GL Noble Denton.
With these items, you could write the following recipe to automate building, validating, and saving:
Recipe DataIO
'Load the MiddleLink data, using the DSA "MyMiddleLinkSource"
DIO_04, MyMiddleLinkSource
'Save the completed model to an Access database, using the DSA "MyNewModel"
DIO_05, MyNewModel
End Recipe
Recipe Analysis
'Run model cleanup to correct and supplement data. Skip the reporting.
ANL_02, PostMiddleLinkCleanup, False
'Shut down SynerGEE. Normally, this command would only apply if this
'recipe were run as an unattended process. You probably don't want
'SynerGEE to shut down on you while testing this recipe.
User Guide
114
Depending on your needs, you could further expand this recipe to perform other functions, such as running
analyses. Note that this recipe assumes that you already have DSAs created for your files. You could have
the recipe generate the DSAs automatically as well, although DSA creation is normally a one-time task and
not applicable to a regularly occurring process. For more information on DSAs, see Data Source Aliases
(DSAs) on page 75.
For general information on recipes, see Recipe Scripts on page 700. For detailed information on recipe
command syntax, see Numerical Recipe Commands on page 855.
This command line might be used to launch a recipe such as the one described in Sample recipe for
MiddleLink automation on page 113. You could put this command line anywhere that accepts command
lines, including Windows Scheduler settings and the Run dialog box, accessed by selecting Start > Run from
the Windows desktop.
User Guide
115
Word of caution regarding enterprise databases and data integrity on page 123
Consistency. Because all users are working from the same set of models, all users are looking at the
same data. The chance of two or more versions of the same model being used is greatly reduced.
Data security. When your models are managed by a central enterprise system, they are not subject
to the inadvertent corruption or misplacement that can occur when individual users maintain their
own files. And, since the models normally reside on a network server, they are naturally included in
any network backup systems that your company may have in place.
Better workflow. The SynerGEE enterprise manager only allows one user to work on any given
feeder at a time. Therefore, you do not need to worry about redundancy and inconsistency that can
result when two people are working on the same system at once.
Management of large models. If you have large models with hundreds of feeders, a personal
database may be simply too unwieldy to manage. An enterprise system allows you to work with just
the feeders you need, which minimizes the amount of actual data that you must handle at any given
time.
When you use an enterprise database system, you can still enjoy the traditional flexibility of data
management offered by SynerGEE. Once you check out feeders, the data is in your PCs memory and you
can use it with any SynerGEE data management tool. For example, you can create a new enterprise model,
or you can create a personal data source from it so that you have a backup or a working copy. You can use it
for any sort of data comparison, model merging, or version work. Or, you can use any of SynerGEEs import
and export functions, including XML, subset, and MiddleLink features.
User Guide
116
Set up your enterprise database table space and user permissions. IT personnel generally handle
this process.
Install the appropriate client application on your PC to communicate with the database. Again, IT
personnel can assist with this step.
In SynerGEE, create at least one enterprise model to contain your data. Generally, the number of
models you can maintain in an enterprise environment is only limited by your available disk space.
While creating the model, you will also be ensuring that your connection to the enterprise database
is working. For more information, see Creating a new model in an enterprise database on
page 119.
In SynerGEE, create a DSA to the model. For more information, see Creating enterprise model
DSAs on page 116.
In SynerGEE, save your data to the model with the DSA. If this is a new model, you must first load
the data from somewhere else, such as a local model file. For more information, see Loading and
saving feeders in an enterprise system on page 119.
After this, your model data is saved in the enterprise database system, and the model is ready for multipleuser use.
User Guide
117
Remember that before you can make a connection, the database tables must be set up properly and you
must have the appropriate database client application on your PC. Your database administrator or IT
representative can help with client installation. If you are a database administrator, see Note to database
administrators regarding Enterprise databases on page 123.
When creating a DSA to an enterprise database, note the following:
A DSA points to a specific model within an enterprise database system. Therefore, you must be
sure to pick the appropriate model during DSA creation. If the model does not exist yet, you can
create it within the DSA wizard. Or, you can create it with the DBMS model manager before starting
DSA creation. For more information, see Creating a new model in an enterprise database on
page 119.
Be sure to enter server information correctly. An IT representative may be able to assist with server
naming and user permissions.
The Test Connection button in the DSA wizard is a good means of testing for a solid connection.
The feeders themselves are not relevant to the DSA, only the model. The particular feeders are
chosen during load and save actions.
For an overview of DSAs, see Data Source Aliases (DSAs) on page 75. For specific steps on creating a
DSA, see Editing a DSA on page 77.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Edit Data Source wizard, showing connection information to an Oracle table space
User Guide
118
Also, if your SQL Server setup supports Windows Authentication, you can leave the User Name and
Password blank, whether or not you have specified a particular database. For example:
User Guide
119
Windows Authentication uses your Windows login information to connect, and must be set up at the database
level by a database administrator.
Once a model is created, you can save data to it, and all users can begin to check feeders in and out. Refer
to the following procedures for more information.
TO CREATE A NEW ENTERPRISE MODEL WITH THE EDIT DATA SOURCE WIZARD
Follow the directions provided in Creating DSAs on page 79 and Editing a DSA on page 77 to create or
edit an enterprise database DSA. On the fourth page of the wizard, type the name of the new model and then
click the Create New Model button to create and reserve the model name within the assigned table space.
The new model will be added to the list of models that are provided on this page.
Use the DBMS Login editor to enter the required connection information, and then click OK.
In the Model to Manage wizard, select the Create option. Type a Model ID and Description, and
then click the Create button.
User Guide
120
In the Load Feeders/Stations wizard, follow the instructions in the wizard to load the desired
feeders, noting the following:
-
If you want to save the feeders back later, be sure to set the wizard to lock them in your
name. This will appear as an option in the feeder selection page. For more information on
locks, see Feeder locks and lock IDs on page 121.
Following the load, the feeders may be unselected and thus do not appear on the screen. If
so, you can select them and do work as usual. For more information on selecting feeders,
see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
Remember that once the feeders are in memory, you can save them to a local file if you
want a backup or a working copy.
In the Save Model wizard, select a model from the list and follow the instructions in the wizard,
noting the following:
User Guide
In the enterprise database, you must have feeders locked in your name to save back to
them. If you did not lock them when you loaded them, you can still set the lock manually
and redo the save later. Click Cancel to exit the wizard and see Feeder locks and lock IDs
on page 121.
If you save a feeder that does not currently exist in the model, it will be added.
Any unfed sections in memory are assigned to a feeder based on a topology trace and
proximity.
121
Use the DBMS Login editor to enter the required connection information, and then click OK.
Select the model that you want to delete feeders from and then click Next.
On the next page of the wizard, select the feeders that you want to delete from the list of available
choices and then click Delete.
Use the DBMS Login editor to enter the required connection information, and then click OK.
Select the model that you want to delete from the list of available models and then click Delete.
User Guide
122
Use the DBMS Login editor to enter the required connection information, and then click OK.
In the Model to Manage wizard, select the model that contains the feeders to be locked or unlocked.
Click Next.
On the next page of the wizard, select the feeders to be locked or unlocked from the list of available
choices.
User Guide
123
Create a user account to own the data, with Connect and Resources roles.
Ensure that users have Oracle installed with the OLE/DB driver.
Additional steps may be required, depending on your system and organizational protocol. For more
information on preparing the database, contact GL Noble Denton Technical Support.
User Guide
124
Use the DBMS Login editor to enter the required connection information, and then click OK.
In the Model to Manage wizard, select the Create option. Type a Model ID and Description, and
then select the Generate SQL report, do not create tables check box.
Click the Create button. Because you selected the Generate SQL report, do not create tables
option, SynerGEE will generate a report that lists the queries that are used to create tables in a
report. This report will include the required indices for the enterprise database schema.
PI Historian
Messaging scripts are used to connect to a PI Historian database through a PI OleDb driver configured on
the current machine. Once connected to the database, SynerGEE retrieves values for the tags specified in
the script. The values are then associated with parameters for various facilities within the SynerGEE model.
The script can also be configured to have SynerGEE write calculated values into the historian. This results in
tags with calculated values or virtual SCADA points.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
125
PI Messaging script
A Messaging script is used to specify connection information as well as the desired relationships between
tags in the PI system and parameters within SynerGEE facilities. The 15205 record is used to connect to a PI
Historian data source through ADO.
15205, Server, Username, Password
Description
15210
Capacitor on / off
15215
15220
Metered kW
15221
Metered amps
15222
Metered kvar
15223
Metered pf
15225
15230
15240
15241
15242
Feeder volts
15243
Feeder kV
15250
Records 15220, 15221, 15222, 15223, and 15242 are equipped with an optional multiplication factor. This
allows you to scale the value between the PI Historian and SynerGEE.
The 15207 record generates a validation report for all tags in the script file. If this record is used, SynerGEE
will not read data from the PI system. It will only validate the tags.
The following is an example of a working script:
' ***** Start of code sample
'Log into the Pi server
15205,localhost,piadmin,
'Indicate connection succeeded
15206
User Guide
126
Notice that this script is writing calculated voltage values back into the PI Historian with the 15250 record.
The following script commands are general to all of SynerGEEs messaging platforms.
These commands can be mixed into a messaging script to support user interaction.
User Guide
127
SynerGEE matches tags in the tables that contain real time data to appropriate facilities.
Tags in the DBMS are mapped to SynerGEE facilities with the following records:
Script Record Number
Description
15102
15104
Retrieves values
15106
User Guide
128
Description
15107
15108
15114
15120
Sets metered kW
15122
When the 15108 command is used, SynerGEE will issue a report that lists tags found in the database with the
latest read and read value, as well as limit violations. Tags in the DBMS are associated with the model using
records that are typically structured as follows:
FacilityID, Phase, TagID, Min, Max, Multiplier
The Min and Max values are used to check for violations against the unmultiplied value. The multiplied value
is applied to the model.
The 15104 command retrieves values from the DBMS. The query must contain these columns:
SynDate The field holding the tag that SynerGEE will use to associate the date and time.
SynValue The field holding the tag that SynerGEE will use to associate sections.
SynTag The field holding value that SynerGEE will use to set up the model.
The query can return other fields; however, these must be a subset of these fields.
Below is a sample working model of the script:
**Specify DSA holding the real-time reads
15102,My SCADA
**Query to gather the reads. The query must have these fields in its return
** SynTag -- Field holding the tag that SynerGEE will use to associate
sections
** SynValue -- Field holding value that SynerGEE will use to set up the
model
**
**
15104,select timeline.DateTimeLocal as SynDate, param.name as SynTag,
timeline.value as SynValue from timeline, param, device where
timeline.paramid = param.id and timeline.deviceid = device.id and
device.Active = true order by timeline.DateTimeLocal desc;
**Put up prompt for connection status
15107
**Tag validation report
15108
**Prompt for date/time
User Guide
129
15106
**Metered kW values
** Section ID, phase, tag, multiplier
15120,79520,5,EJT42010.KWTOT,2e2,2e4,1.0
15122,79520,5,EJT42010.KVARTOT,-5e3,5e4,1.0
15120,79521,5,OXD42010.KWTOT,2e2,2e4,1.0
15122,79521,5,OXD42010.KVARTOT,2e2,2e4,1.0
**Metered kV values
**Source ID, phase, tag, multiplier 13.8 -> 120
15114,Ship sub 1,4,OAP42010.VPROM,11e3,15e3,0.00869565
15114,Ship sub 2,4,SFo42015.VPROM,11e3,15e3,0.00869565
Messaging scripts can be run at any time from the MACROS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar. SynerGEE can
also be configured to run a Messaging script on a scheduled basis. For more information, see Automating
messaging scripts on page 129.
In the Other Scripts group, next to Type, select Messaging. A list of all current scripts will appear in
the Script options list.
Next to Scripts, select the name of the script that you want to run.
Select the check box next to Intervals and then enter the time lapse in seconds for the script run.
GALLERY
The SynerGEE gallery is a repository where you can store frequently used models. Any currently loaded
model can be saved to the gallery. When you load a model from the gallery, it will replace all model data that
is currently in memory no merging of model data will take place. After you load a model from the gallery,
you can save it back to the gallery or save it to any supported SynerGEE format, just like you would save a
regular SynerGEE model.
User Guide
130
In the Gallery Save editor, under Model Save, type the name of the model as you want to save it in
the gallery.
or
In the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery model that you want to replace.
Use the option buttons at the bottom of the editor to select whether you want to save All feeders/
subtrans to the gallery model, or only the Selected feeders/subtrans (that is, only those feeders
that are in the current selection set, as defined by the Select Feeders and Substation Transformers
editor).
Click Save.
In the Gallery Load editor, in the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery model that you
want to load.
Click Load.
User Guide
131
In the Gallery Manager, in the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery model that you
want to delete, and then click Delete.
or
Click Delete All to delete all models from the gallery.
In the Gallery Manager, in the list of gallery models, select the name of the gallery model that you
want to rename, and then click Rename.
In the Rename Gallery Model editor, type the new name for the gallery model and then click OK.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
User Guide
132
Click Enable Backup to enable SynerGEEs automatic backup feature. You can also configure the
backup interval (the default value is 60 minutes) and specify whether SynerGEE will prompt you
before backing up your files.
In the Model group, click Backup and then select Load. Click Yes to confirm the action. The
recovered data will replace the model that is currently in memory.
Data Source editor. The Data Source editor is a native database editor that you launch from within
SynerGEE. It allows you to directly view and edit the tables and fields of any model, equipment, or
customer database. All edits are saved directly to the source file on your network, just like if you
were working in a dedicated database application such as Access.
Joiner. The joiner is a special database table editor that allows you to match external data with
current memory data, using section ID associations. The joiner does not edit model data in memory.
It is a viewer/editor for external database tables, which can contain any type of data, provided that
they have a SectionId column.
User Guide
133
for SynerGEE to recognize it in the Data Source editor. For more information on working with DSAs, see
Data Source Aliases (DSAs) on page 75.
You should also note that individual DSAs, and even all DSAs, can be locked out from editing via the Data
Source editor. You can still view data from the data source file, and you will be able to edit the data elsewhere
in SynerGEE, but you will not be able to edit the data by specifically using the Data Source editor. To lock out
an individual DSA from editing, select the Source is read-only check box on the first page of the Edit Data
Source wizard. To lock out all DSAs from editing, select the Read-Only Data Source Editor option in the
Feature Locks tab of the Preferences editor.
Use the Select Data Source editor to select the Source Type for the database that you want to view
(Model, Equipment, and Customer) and also to select a Source, which corresponds to a DSA that
has been configured for use with SynerGEE. Only DSAs for the selected Source Type will be made
available for selection.
Click OK to accept your selections and close the Select Data Source editor.
Use the Database Editor window to edit the data source as required. As is common with database
applications, all edits you make in the Data Source editor are automatically written to the source file,
as soon as you move to another record. There is no undo. When you are finished, simply close the
Database Editor window to end the editing session.
Joiner
The joiner is a special database table editor that allows you to match external data with current memory data,
using section ID associations. The joiner does not edit model data in memory. It is a viewer/editor for external
database tables, which can contain any type of data, provided that they have a SectionId column.
To use the joiner, the following requirements must be met:
The external database table you want to associate must have a SectionId column.
When you launch the joiner, you must have established a section query set that matches the set of
model data you want to associate.
The external data must be in a supported format, such as Access, Oracle, or SQL Server.
When the joiner runs, it looks for section IDs in the external database that match section IDs in the current
query set. For any records that match, the entire external record is displayed in SynerGEE for viewing and
editing.
The joiner is different from other database editors because it allows you to access data that has a specific
relationship to your model. To clarify the role and usage of the joiner, you should review Steps for using the
joiner on page 134.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
134
Determine and locate the external database table you wish to edit.
In SynerGEE, create a query set that represents the section IDs you want to match with the external
data.
Click Join.
When the joiner runs, it brings in all records whose SectionId field matches a section ID in the query
set. You can view and edit this data as needed.
The joiner can join with any database format that SynerGEE supports, including Access, Oracle,
and SQL Server. Therefore, the DSA must accurately represent the source file format.
On the second page of the Edit Data Source wizard, you must specify a path to the database that
contains the desired table.
On the third page of the Edit Data Source wizard, you must select Custom as the data type and
then type the name of the specific table in the Table field. This table name must be spelled correctly,
although case is not important.
For additional information on working with DSAs, see Data Source Aliases (DSAs) on page 75.
User Guide
135
To prevent this type of data loss, you should run SynerGEEs check/repair schema function to update older
databases before saving data back to them. Check/repair schema performs a complete schema update,
ensuring that the database is prepared to receive all applicable data. The check/repair schema can be run on
both model data and equipment data.
It should be noted that all new databases created by SynerGEE have the latest schema, regardless of where
the data was originally imported from. Therefore, check/repair schema does not apply to new databases.
To check and repair a database schema: In the Model group, click Check Schema.
or
To check and repair an equipment schema: In the Warehouse group, click Check Schema.
On the first page of the Check and Repair Schema wizard, select the data source that you want to
check and repair. Click Next to continue.
Tips:
Click the Go To button to edit the selected DSA using the Edit Data Source wizard.
Go To button
Click the Browse button to directly select a SynerGEE model file without using a DSA.
Browse button
On the second page of the wizard, select the check boxes for each data correction category that you
want to check and repair. Only selected categories will be checked and repaired, as required.
The following data correction categories are available:
-
User Guide
136
Click Finish. SynerGEE will display a second editor showing the results of its findings. Click
Commit to commit the changes to the data source, or click Cancel to abort the repair.
When new sections are modeled that are not connected to existing sections.
When new equipment is modeled that is created from a general equipment type in the equipment
warehouse (including breakers, fuses, motors, reclosers, and sectionalizers)
You can edit the default values directly from SynerGEE, using the MODEL tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
Click on the Defaults button to open a list of the devices that you can edit. Then, click on any device name to
open a special version of the standard SynerGEE editor for that device. You can then proceed to edit the
default values for that device. If a field is disabled, such as the X and Y coordinates for a feeder, that values
is not a default that can be saved. Any other field, however, can be edited, and the changes will be saved the
next time you exit SynerGEE.
In the Edit group, click Defaults and then select the name of the device that you want to edit.
Use the SynerGEE editor to edit default values for any option that is enabled. For descriptions of the
individual fields, press F1 to open the Online Help topic for the device and editor tab that you are
viewing. If an option is disabled, then it is not a default that can be saved to the SynDefaults.xml file.
Note that any changes you make will not be saved to the SynDefaults.xml file until after you exit
SynerGEE.
User Guide
137
Check data report. The check data report evaluates your model data and reports on any
discrepancies found. The analysis of your data is comprehensive and can provide valuable
information on the quality of your data. The check data report evaluates all model data in memory
and uses a non-customizable rule base. For more information, see Check Data report on
page 137.
Model cleanup scripts. Model cleanup scripts can be written to correct specific data issues. Cleanup
scripts follow the MiddleLink format. For more information, see Model cleanup scripts on page 138.
Model Inspector. The Model Inspector is a collection of reports that are designed to find problems
demonstrated by the model or with model data. For more information, see Model Inspector on
page 139.
Errors. Errors are problems that are severe enough to prevent certain analyses from running.
Warnings. Warnings are problems that may affect the accuracy of analyses, but probably will not
prohibit you from performing an analysis.
Fixes. Fixes are temporary fixes that SynerGEE would assign if an analysis were run with the model
in its current condition. These fixes are for reference use only. They are not actually applied to the
model in memory or on disk during the check data process.
Messages. Messages provide information that you should be aware of, but will not necessarily affect
the accuracy of analyses.
Refer to the following procedure for information on viewing the Check Data report.
User Guide
138
Use the subheadings on the left side of the Digest window to select from the following subreports:
Totals
Problems
Perform any of the following tasks to further work with the data in the report.
To ...
Do This ...
View the Problems section of the Check Data report. On the right
side of the report, click Show: All and then select the specific
problem category that you want to view. When Show: All is
selected, all problem categories are displayed in the report.
View the Problems section of the Check Data report and then
select the row that contains the device you want to edit. On the
right side of the report, click Edit.
View the Problems section of the Check Data report and then
select the row that contains the device you want to view. On the
right side of the report, click Map Zoom.
User Guide
139
Model Inspector
The Model Inspector is a collection of reports that are designed to find problems demonstrated by the model
or with model data. The Model Inspector includes the reports listed below. Each report can be individually
enabled or disabled in the Reports tab of the Model Inspection Options editor. In addition, the asterisk ( * )
character in the report names below denotes a configurable value in the Settings tab of the Model Inspection
Options editor. The values shown in the report name below are the default values that are set up by the
SynerGEE installation.
Show nodes that are 50* ft apart (one node fed and one unfed)
List sections where the phasing specified on the section is different than the phasing that is
propagated through the section from the substation, feeders, and transformers.
In the Model QA group, click the text label Model Inspector and select Settings.
In the Model Inspection Options editor, select the Reports tab. Use the Reports tab to select which
reports you want to generate with the Model Inspector. The following reports are available. Note that
the asterisk ( * ) character in the report names below denotes a value that can be edited in the
Settings tab of the Model Inspection Options editor, as described in step 4 of this procedure. The
values shown in the report name below are the default values that are set up by the SynerGEE
installation.
-
Show nodes that are 50* ft apart (one node fed and one unfed) *
User Guide
140
Select the Settings tab. Use the Settings tab to enter values that configure the data parameters for
specific Model Inspector reports. Refer to the following table for more information on these options.
Distance between
close nodes
Specify the distance between nodes that will be reported in the Show
nodes that are X ft. apart report. The default value is 50 feet.
Select this check box to only evaluate fed / unfed node combinations
in the Show nodes that are X ft apart report. In other words, if two
fed nodes are within X feet apart, they will not be reported; likewise, if
two unfed nodes are within X feet apart, they will also not be reported.
If this check box is cleared, then all nodes and all node combinations
will be considered.
Specify the loading level range that will be considered in the Report
loading levels report. The default range is 50% to 100%.
Specify the low voltage value that will be evaluated in the Check for
voltages report. The default value is 115 v.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Before you run the Model Inspector, make sure you have used the Model Inspection Options editor
to select which reports you want the Model Inspector to generate, and also to configure specific data
parameters that will be considered in the report, if desired. For more information, see Setting up the
Model Inspector on page 139.
In the Model QA group, click the Model Inspector icon. Your results will appear in a new SynerGEE
tab.
User Guide
CHAPTER
3
Using SynerGEE
To successfully model and analyze your distribution system, you need to fully understand how to use
SynerGEE. SynerGEE is designed to be intuitive and user-friendly, and a thorough knowledge of its powerful
and convenient interface will significantly increase productivity. From little shortcuts to big time-savers, you
should take some time to learn about the features provided to optimize your SynerGEE usage.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
142
Using SynerGEE
SynerGEE windows
SynerGEE allows you to view the map, reports, and many other windows all at the same time. Some
windows, such as the map window and the Organizer, can only be opened once. Other windows can be
opened multiple times. For example, you can open multiple report windows to view different reports at the
same time. If you close the map window and all windows associated with the model, the model will be closed.
Take note that some tabs in the SynerGEE ribbon bar will change based on the window you are viewing. In
general, ribbon bar tabs that are window-specific are located at the right-end of the ribbon bar. The majority of
ribbon bar tabs are common to all window types, and those are at the left-end of the ribbon bar.
TO RENAME A WINDOW
In the tab for the SynerGEE window, double-click on the window name and then type a new name. Renamed
windows are a temporary change. If you close the window and then open it again, the original window name
will be restored.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
3
143
To exit full screen mode, press Esc or click the Exit button.
Model explorer
The model explorer organizes your model data in a tabbed area to the left of the map display, providing you
with quick and easy access to the feeders, sections, and devices in your model. The model explorer also
provides access to your equipment warehouse and to the legend for your SynerGEE map display.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on the different tabs that are included in the model
explorer.
Model tab
The Model tab in the SynerGEE model explorer provides access to all sections, nodes, and devices in the
model, including feeder and subtran sources. The upper half of the Model tab is a tree view that lists object
categories, such as Network, Facilities, and Zones. The lower half of the Model tab lists specific objects in the
selected category, plus pertinent information for each listed object. For example, switches include the
sections ID, open/closed status, and switch type. Regulators, meanwhile, lists the regulator status (on or off),
amp rating, and notes, if attached.
You can double-click any object name in the Model tab to open the editor for that object. You can also rightclick on the object name to open a context menu with a variety of editing and navigational options.
The following list includes the major categories that are included in the Model tab:
Network. The Network category includes lists of the feeders, nodes, sections, and subtrans in the
active feeders in your model.
Facilities. The Facilities category includes lists of all of the devices in the active feeders in your
model. If no devices of a particular type exist in the active feeders, then that device type will not be
listed in the Facilities category.
Locations/Groups. The Locations/Groups category includes lists of the labels, switch plans, and
TCC sets in the active feeders in your model.
Section Lists. The Sections Lists category includes lists of sections that share common properties,
such as contingency sections, sections with automatic switches, and sections with notes. Devices
with notes and devices with links are also included in the Section Lists category. If no sections exist
in the active feeders in the model that meet the criteria for a specific category, then that list will be
empty.
User Guide
144
Using SynerGEE
Facility Lists. The Facility List category includes lists of facilities with any exceptions or with loading
exceptions only. If no facilities exist in the active feeders in the model that meet the criteria for a
specific category, then that list will be empty.
Warehouse tab
The Warehouse tab in the SynerGEE model explorer is a tree view that lists all equipment types that are
available for modeling, according to the equipment data that is currently in memory. You can quickly add a
device anywhere on the model by dragging an equipment type from the Warehouse tab and dropping it onto
a section or to another appropriate area in the SynerGEE map display. You can also double-click on any
equipment type name to open the editor for that item.
You may notice that some equipment type categories, including fuses, reclosers, sectionalizers, breakers,
and protective devices, are listed in the Warehouse tab as General items. This is because these items are
defined entirely by instance data and do not reference a device type in the equipment dataset. Capacitors are
also defined entirely by instance data, although they appear to have types in the Warehouse tab. These
types are not actual equipment types, though, and have no corresponding record in the equipment dataset.
They are intended only as a more convenient way of modeling a certain size capacitor, without having to
enter kvar values following each drag and drop operation. Therefore, although they appear in the Warehouse
tab, capacitor types actually only represent pre-populated instance data.
For more information on modeling equipment in SynerGEE, see Modeling Devices on page 317.
Facilities tab
The Facilities tab in the SynerGEE model explorer lists various categories of facilities and devices in a
hierarchical view, organized by feeders and sections. The options list at the top of the tab can be used to
select the facility category that you want to view. The following categories are available:
Conductors
Devices
Fault Devices
Fused Taps
Phasing
Protective Devices
Switches
Once you select a category, you can expand and collapse the feeder and section names in the Facilities tab
to see all devices of the selected type. The right-click menu includes many options that you can use to work
with a device, including zooming or panning to its location in the map display, toggling its Query status, and
opening the device editor.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
145
Query tab
The Query tab in the SynerGEE model explorer provides access to the query set, which is a temporary group
of sections that you want to work with in SynerGEE. Multiple edits, for example, can only be performed on
sections or devices associated with the sections that are included in the query set. In addition, some
SynerGEE analyses can be run only on sections in the query set, including the fault analysis and the network
fault analysis.
For more information on the creating and using query sets, see Using the Query Set on page 173.
Feeders tab
The Feeders tab in the SynerGEE model explorer displays a topological tree view of any feeders that are
currently selected in the model as well as all of the sections that are associated with those feeders. The
sections in the Feeders tab are grouped in order starting with the feeder source and cascading downstream
throughout the feeder. Devices are not included in the Feeders tab.
You can double-click any object name in the Feeders tab to open the editor for that object. You can also rightclick on the object name to open a context menu with a variety of editing and navigational options.
Legend tab
The Legend tab in the SynerGEE model explorer displays a detailed legend for the SynerGEE map display.
The legend shows the current color and line options that are being used by the map, as well as the device
type symbols and the coordinates for the area that is currently visible in the SynerGEE map display. The
same legend you see in the Legend tab is included when you print the SynerGEE map display.
For more information on the SynerGEE map display legend, see Legend on page 231.
Toolbox tab
The Toolbox tab in the SynerGEE model explorer provides access to a several tools that allow you to focus
on specific aspects of your model and their effect on the model as a whole. The following tools are included in
the Toolbox tab:
Switch Manager. The Switch Manager allows you to see certain switch pairs in the selected feeders
as well as general information about the feeders, such as connected kVA, power factor, and low
volts. Using the Switch Manager, you can toggle the status of any switch pair and run a quick loadflow analysis to see the results. Only switches that can transfer load from one selected feeder to
another are listed. Therefore, you must have more than one feeder selected for the tool to have
value.
For more information, see Switch Manager on page 763.
Feeder Overview. The Feeder Overview provides a tree list that gives general, balanced information
about selected feeders, including minimum and maximum voltages, maximum loading, and some
basic equipment information. The Feeder Overview is designed to give you an overall view of your
feeders and provide quick access to some basic editing functions.
For more information, see Feeder Overview on page 764.
User Guide
146
Using SynerGEE
Capacitor Manager. The Capacitor Manager displays all capacitors in the selected feeders as well
as general information about the feeders, such as connected kVA, power factor, and low volts.
Using the Capacitor Manager, you can toggle the on/off status of any capacitor and run a quick loadflow analysis to see the results.
For more information, see Capacitor Manager on page 765.
Load Center Manager. The Load Center Manager allows you to pinpoint an area of your map and
determine the amount of load within that area. This is an excellent means to determine the
placement of a substation or feeder.
For more information, see Load Center Manager on page 765.
Ribbon bar
The ribbon bar, which runs along the top of the SynerGEE window, provides quick access to all of
SynerGEE's commands. The ribbon bar is a replacement for menu paths and toolbar buttons. Groups of
related functions are first organized by tabs in the ribbon bar and then organized into functional groups.
Many ribbon bar tabs are always visible in SynerGEE, no matter which type of window you are viewing. Other
ribbon bar tabs are only available with specific window types. When you are viewing the map display, for
example, several ribbon bar tabs are available for building models, navigating in the map display, and editing
display settings. The report window, meanwhile, has a tab that is dedicated to report-related tasks, such as
printing and saving report data. All window types have at least one dedicated tab, including the Organizer,
TCC, Chart window, and Script editor.
Unlike toolbars, the ribbon bar cannot be customized. However, you can double-click on any tab in the
SynerGEE ribbon bar to minimize the ribbon bar, so that only the tab names are visible. When minimized, the
ribbon bar will appear when you click on any tab name, and it will be hidden again after you click on a button
in the ribbon bar or click in the main SynerGEE window. Double-click again on any tab in the ribbon bar to
maximize the ribbon bar.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
147
Click the down arrow at the right end of the quick access toolbar and select More Commands.
Use the Customize editor to add and remove commands from the quick access toolbar. The
following table describes the different tasks that you can perform.
To ...
Add a command to the quick
access toolbar
Do This ...
a
Click Add.
Click Remove.
Click Reset.
User Guide
148
Using SynerGEE
Status bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the SynerGEE application. The status bar provides key information
about the model you are editing and in some cases even lets you change options that are being used in your
model.
The default fields that are shown in the status bar are as follows. Note that you can right-click on the status
bar to remove any of these fields, if desired.
Status area. The status area, located at the left end of the status bar, updates dynamically as you
move the mouse around SynerGEE. If the mouse is over empty space in the SynerGEE map
display, the geographical coordinates of the current mouse location is shown. If the mouse is over a
section or device in the mouse display, the name of that section or device as well as key information
is shown. If the mouse is over a table-style report, the table cell of the current mouse location is
shown.
Data source and warehouse. The names of the current model data source and equipment
warehouse data source are shown near the middle of the status bar.
Model characteristic and application setting codes. The status bar displays two sets of status codes
enclosed in brackets (for example, < Z > and < DY >). The first status code shows model
characteristics, and the second status code shows application settings. The meaning of these codes
is discussed at the end of this help topic.
Time and weather data. Time and weather data is shown near the right end of the status bar. This
data updates each time an analysis is run. The time and weather data shown in the status bar
includes the Time of Day Adjustment (specified in the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather
Options editor), the Seasonal Rating (specified in the Exceptions tab of the Model and Analysis
Options editor), and the current temperature.
Growth group. The growth group is shown at the right end of the status bar. Clicking on the current
growth group will open an options list that you can use to select a new growth group. For more
information on working with growth groups, see Enabling load growth rates on page 802.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
149
G Growth is activated.
Action
F1
Opens the Online Help file. In most cases, a help topic will display that corresponds to
the currently displayed editor.
F2
F3
Toggles the map details. This will show or hide the device symbols.
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Click the down arrow at the right end of the quick access toolbar and select More Commands.
User Guide
150
Using SynerGEE
3
Unassign a keyboard
shortcut
Do This ...
a
Click Assign.
Click Remove.
Click Close to accept your changes and close the Customize Keyboard editor.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
151
SynerGEE sessions. The model explorer, report results, Digest report, and Organizer are just some of the
SynerGEE window types that can be organized, sorted, and filtered using these methods.
< or > will filter for items greater or less than the given value.
!= will filter for items that do not equal the given value.
User Guide
152
Using SynerGEE
The following subsections describe some key features of the SynerGEE editor.
Tabs
In SynerGEE Electric, tabs are positioned on the left side of the editor. Each tab provides access to a
related group of settings. The following example shows a portion of the Switch editor, which has three tabs:
Switch, Rates, and Results. The Switch tab is the selected tab.
Tabs that are positioned along the side of the editor provide several advantages over the traditional format
of placing tabs along the top of the editor. For example, if you are a long-time user of SynerGEE, you may
recall how tab names historically used a smaller font and were often abbreviated, and sometimes in a rather
awkward manner, just to provide enough room to fit the required tabs. Side tabs enhance usability by allowing
full tab names to be used and by providing an easier method to change from one tab to another. The User
Guide continues to use the term tab to refer to all tabs, whether they appear along the side or the top of an
editor.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
153
Navigation buttons
Five navigation buttons, located in the upper left-corner of the SynerGEE editor, allow you to easily browse to
previously viewed editors and zoom to the location of an object in the SynerGEE map display. Refer to the
following table for more information on each button.
Previous and Next
Click the Previous and Next buttons to browse through recently viewed
SynerGEE editors. You can navigate to any object that you viewed since you
most recently opened the editor. Once you close the editor, the navigation
history is reset.
History
Click the History button to quickly jump to any recently viewed SynerGEE
editor. You can jump to any object that you viewed since you most recently
opened the editor. Once you close the editor, the navigation history is reset.
History button
User Guide
154
Using SynerGEE
Lock
Click the Lock button to lock the SynerGEE editor so that it will only show the
current model object. This feature is useful if you want to leave a specific
model object open in the SynerGEE editor and then click around in the map
display without opening a new object in the SynerGEE editor with each model
object that you select.
When the editor is in locked mode, the navigational buttons will be hidden so
that you cannot navigate to other recently viewed editors. Also, if you close the
editor while it is in locked mode and you then attempt to open the editor for a
different object in your model, the locked model object will display instead.
You must click the Lock button again to unlock the editor before you can
open the editor for other objects in your model.
Locate
Click the Locate button to zoom the SynerGEE map display to the location of
the object that you are currently viewing in the editor. If you are viewing an
equipment type editor, the Locate button will zoom on successive clicks to the
locations of each section where the equipment type is used. If the equipment
type is not used in the currently selected feeders, then the Locate button will
do nothing. If the equipment type is not used anywhere in the model, then the
Locate button will not be present in the equipment type editor.
Locate button
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
155
Click the Roll-up button to minimize the editor so that just the title bar is
displayed. You can use this feature to see more of the screen while not
completely closing the editor.
Roll-up button
Auto-Hide
When the Auto-Hide feature is disabled, the SynerGEE editor will remain open
when you click the Apply button. When the Auto-Hide feature is disabled, the
button appears as follows:
When the Auto-Hide feature is enabled, the SynerGEE editor will close when
you click the Apply button. The button will appear as shown below. Click the
button to toggle the Auto-Hide feature on and off.
Double-click on the object anywhere in the TCC Explorer or the TCC graph.
User Guide
156
Using SynerGEE
LOADING MODELS
Because SynerGEE provides extensive data source types and flexible merging capabilities, loading models
and other data into SynerGEE may involve some consideration beforehand. The procedures and theory for
loading and merging data are covered in detail in Managing SynerGEE Data on page 57.
If you are an enterprise database user, the concept of loading models is somewhat different than opening
local files, because you must connect to the server database and check out feeders. For more information
on enterprise database systems, see Using an Enterprise Database System on page 114.
If you want to remove the current model and load an entirely new model, you should first click the New button
in the MODEL tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar. This action removes all current model data from memory, with
the exception of equipment data.
You can also set SynerGEE to automatically open a particular model and/or equipment data source upon
startup, using the Startup recipe. In addition, you can specify which feeders, if any, you would like to be
automatically selected. For more information, see Startup Scripts on page 715.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
157
SELECTING FEEDERS
Once a model is loaded into memory, you need to decide which feeders you would like to have selected.
Feeder selection affects which feeders are displayed on the map, and in some cases, which feeders are
affected by an analysis. It does not alter which feeders are in memory.
Feeder selection is global; it is not specific to any particular map or TCC view. For example, you can have
multiple TCC views displaying different curves, but you cannot have unique feeder selection sets. In a TCC
window, feeder selection determines which feeders and associated devices are available to plot.
How the map display responds to feeder selection is based in part on your map settings. In the Style tab of
the Map Settings editor, you can select a View mode that determines what feeders are displayed, based on
your feeder selection. For example, you can view the selected feeder only, or you can view all feeders but
apply special coloring (gray by default) to the unselected feeders. You can also view regional feeders and
adjacent feeders in the same manner. For more information, see Configuring the map display style on
page 201.
Refer to the procedures listed below for more information on selecting feeders in SynerGEE.
Using the Select Feeders and Substation Transformers editor on page 157
Setting a feeder or subtran to be automatically selected when you load a model on page 161
User Guide
158
Using SynerGEE
TO SELECT FEEDERS USING THE SELECT FEEDERS AND SUBSTATION TRANSFORMERS EDITOR
1
In the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the MODEL tab and in the Settings group, select Select
Feeders.
or
Press F2 on your keyboard.
In the Select Feeders and Substation Transformers editor, select the check box for each feeder and
substation transformer you want to be selected. The following table describes additional tasks that
you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Use the Ctrl and Shift keys or click the Highlight All button to
highlight the feeders and substation transformers that you want
to select, and then click the Select button.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
159
To ...
Do This ...
Use the Ctrl and Shift keys or click the Highlight All button to
highlight the feeders and substation transformers that you want
to clear, and then click the Clear button.
Click in the filter area for the data column you want to filter. Type
the text to filter for, and then click the Filter button. Delete the text
you typed and click the Filter button again to remove the filter.
In the Settings group, next to the Select Feeders button, use the following buttons to select and
clear feeders and substation transformers in your model.
Button
Description
Select Window
Select only the feeders that are currently visible in the SynerGEE
map window. All other feeders will be deselected.
User Guide
160
Using SynerGEE
Button
Description
Select Region
Select Adjacents
Toggle Subs
Select Last
Select All
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
161
In the model explorer or the SynerGEE map display, locate the feeder that you want to deselect.
Right-click on a device that is included in the feeder and select Select Only This Feeder.
In the model explorer or the SynerGEE map display, locate the feeder that you want to deselect.
Right-click on a device that is included in the feeder and select Toggle Feeder Selection.
You can also create recipes that perform automated feeder selection. In particular, if you
have your startup recipe set to load model data, you might include commands to select
certain feeders as well. For more information, see Recipe Scripts on page 700 and
Startup Scripts on page 715.
Configure SynerGEE to select the feeders that you want to save in the feeder set. For more
information on selecting feeder sets, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
User Guide
162
Using SynerGEE
3
In the Favorites group, next to Feeder Sets, type a name for the new feeder set that you are
creating.
In the Favorites group, next to Feeder Sets, use the options list to select the name of the feeder set
you want to load. SynerGEE will automatically select the feeders in the selected feeder set.
Configure SynerGEE to select the feeders that you want to save in the feeder set. For more
information on selecting feeder sets, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
In the Favorites group, next to Feeder Sets, use the options list to select the name of the feeder set
that you want to replace.
In the Favorites group, next to Feeder Sets, use the options list to select the name of the feeder set
you want to delete.
SETTING PREFERENCES
SynerGEE allows you to customize the overall environment with a series of Preference settings. These
settings include items such as the unit system, phase designations, and the voltage base.
It is very important that you set your preferences correctly for accurate SynerGEE performance. Your
preferences are global they are not specific to any particular model. Also, your preferences are stored
automatically and applied each time you start SynerGEE. Preferences do not change between SynerGEE
sessions, unless you intentionally change them.
TO SET PREFERENCES
1
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
On the left side of the Preferences editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
preference settings. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
-
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
163
-
Setting values for conductor spacing and height above ground on page 169
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
In the Preferences editor, select the SynerGEE tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
User
Company
Company name, as read from your license file. This field cannot
be edited.
Specify the default project name, which will appear in the title of
all reports.
Lock Name
Specify the user name that will be used when you check out
feeders from an enterprise database. SynerGEEs locking
feature prevents other users from saving data to the same
feeders that you are editing. For more information on feeder
locks and lock names, see Feeder locks and lock IDs on
page 121.
User Guide
164
Using SynerGEE
Select this check box to allow loop creation without using any
topological workarounds, such as loop tie switches. For more
information on modeling loops, see Loops and Wandering
Laterals on page 253.
Select this check box to use the Python script format with
SynerGEEs startup script and case files.
or
Clear the check box to use recipe scripts with SynerGEEs
startup script and case files.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
165
Zoom Percentage
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
In the Preferences editor, select the Units tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Unit System
Metric
English (KFt)
English (Miles)
Phase Designations
Voltage Base
Year Descriptions
Enable multi-year
modeling
User Guide
166
Using SynerGEE
Frequency
PT Secondary
60 Hz
50 Hz
120V
100V
Load Density
User Guide
Positive
Negative
kW / Square MI
kW / Acre
Using SynerGEE
3
167
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
In the Preferences editor, select the Database tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Format for new databases
Specify the Access file format that will be used for any new
databases that you create. Existing databases will be maintained
in their current file format.
The following options are available:
Documents folder
C:\Users\[UserName]\
My Documents\Stoner Software\
SynerGEE Electric
User Guide
168
Using SynerGEE
Directory type
Installation folder
C:\Program Files\
SynerGEE Electric 5.0\
The default path for each specific file type is shown below, where [DocumentsDirectory] and
[InstallationDirectory] refer to the respective paths as listed above.
File Type
Default Path
Calcs (calculations)
[DocumentsDirectory]\Calcs
CMM
[DocumentsDirectory]\Scripts
Events
[DocumentsDirectory]\Scripts
Gallery
[DocumentsDirectory]\Gallery
Layers
[InstallationDirectory]\GeoLayers
Macros
[DocumentsDirectory]\Macros
Output
[DocumentsDirectory]\Output
Projections
[InstallationDirectory]\GeoProjections
Protection Lab
[DocumentsDirectory]\Protection Lab
Schematic Templates
[DocumentsDirectory]\Schematics
Scripts
[DocumentsDirectory]\Scripts
Settings
[DocumentsDirectory]\Settings
Unit
[DocumentsDirectory]\Unit
What Ifs
[DocumentsDirectory]\Scripts
In the Preferences editor, you can use the Paths tab to change the target folders for the various types of files
that SynerGEE uses. These values are stored in your system registry, so you can store unique settings for
each Windows login profile, as applicable.
From the Paths tab, you can define a specific location for each individual file type, or you can define a new
location for all files types. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Paths tab of the
Preferences editor.
a
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select
Preferences.
Using SynerGEE
169
For each listed path category, type the full path to be used to save all files of the selected file type, or
click the Browse button and navigate to the desired directory.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Paths tab of the
Preferences editor.
a
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select
Preferences.
At the bottom of the Paths tab, select Set root folder for all subfolders.
In the text box at the bottom of the editor, type the full path to be used as the root folder for all
SynerGEE files types, or click the Browse button and navigate to the desired directory. Once you
select a target folder, SynerGEE will prompt you to create subfolders in that directory to save each
of the related file types.
Note that SynerGEE will not transfer files from your default file locations to the new file locations. If
you wish to continue to have access to your current files, you must manually copy the files from the
old path location to the new one.
User Guide
170
Using SynerGEE
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
To add a value, click the appropriate Insert button and then type the new value.
or
To delete a value, select the value that you want to delete and then click the appropriate Delete
button.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
In the Preferences editor, select the Categories tab. The following table describes the different
tasks that you can perform.
User Guide
To ...
Do This ...
Select the row for the category that you want to edit. At the
bottom of the Preferences tab, type a new name and select a
new color for the category.
Select the row for the category that you want to delete. At the
bottom of the Preferences tab, clear the category name or
replace it with an asterisk (*).
Using SynerGEE
171
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
Use the check boxes in the features list to specify which SynerGEE features will be locked out.
Selected features will be locked, while cleared features will remain available for editing.
Click OK to accept the changes and close the Preferences editor. You must restart SynerGEE
before your changes will take effect.
Type the object name or partial object name that you want to find. The results list will update
automatically with each character that you type. If desired, you can use the following symbols to
further filter the find results:
-
< or > will filter for items greater or less than the given value.
!= will filter for items that do not equal the given value.
To narrow the search to a specific object type or a group of object types, right-click on the search
text and then select the check box for each object type that you want to search. Available categories
include Devices, Equipment, Feeders, Nodes, Sections, and Text Labels. All categories are
selected by default.
User Guide
172
Using SynerGEE
4
To see more details about a specific item in the results list, click on the result name. The object will
be highlighted in the model explorer, and the map display will zoom to the location of the object. You
can then use standard model explorer or mapping tools to edit the object or to perform other tasks.
Click anywhere outside the search results list to close the search window.
SynerGEE stores up to 100 previous actions in a stack which is undone or redone sequentially. The stack is
emptied when certain operations are performed, including (but not limited to) the following:
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
173
Tagging is a temporary condition. Once you close your model or exit SynerGEE, the list of tagged facilities
will be cleared. While you are working in the current session, you can also use the SynerGEE ribbon bar or
the appropriate right-click menu to remove tags for one or all tagged sections and facilities.
Refer to the following procedures for more information.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, right-click on the facility or section that you want to
tag.
Select Tag.
If no facilities have been tagged in the model, then the Tagged group will not appear.
Click Next Tag. The SynerGEE map display will zoom to the location of each tagged facility each
time you click the Next Tag button.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, right-click on the facility or section that you want to
un-tag.
The list of tagged facilities will also be cleared each time you exit SynerGEE or close the
current model.
When using the multiple editor, only sections that are included in the query set, or devices that are
on the sections in the query set, will be edited.
User Guide
174
Using SynerGEE
Some SynerGEE analyses work on queried sections only, including the fault analysis, network fault
analysis, and the optimal conductor selection tool in the Design Evaluation analysis. The Joiner is
another SynerGEE tool that only works with the Query set.
When using scripts, some script commands can be used to apply edits to the query set only. For
example, the 4106 command can be used to apply a Model Cleanup script to the query set only. In
addition, several individual model cleanup scripts commands, including 4013, 4014, 4074, and 4078
can be applied individually to either model cleanup scripts or to the entire model.
When using annotation on the SynerGEE map display, you can configure the annotation to only be
shown for sections in the query set, or for devices that are on the queried sections. This option can
be selected in the Text tab of the Map Settings editor.
The Query tab of the model explorer shows which sections are currently included in the query set. In addition,
sections in the query set appear in a different color on the map, according to your map display settings. The
default color for queried sections is gray, but you can change this color from the Color tab in the Map Settings
editor.
SynerGEE provides several different methods for adding sections to the query set. Each method provides a
different process of selecting sections, and you can combine these methods to set up the query set according
to your needs. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Creating a query set from the SynerGEE map display on page 174
To add sections to the query set using spatial query mode on page 174
To modify sections in the query set using the query path tool on page 175
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the section that you want to add to the query set.
Select Toggle Query. The section will be added to the query set, which you can view from the
Query tab in the model explorer. If the section is already in the query set, this command will remove
it.
In the Query group, click the Query button. The cursor changes to include a plus sign and a
question mark.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
175
Tip:
3
Once in the Spatial Query mode, use the following mouse and key combinations to add sections to
the query set:
-
Click and drag a box over a region of the map. All sections inside of or touching the box are
added to the query set. (Note that this click-and-drag process will delete the existing query
set and replace it with a new one.)
Click on an individual section to add it. (Note that this single-click option will delete the
existing query set and replace it with a new one.)
Press Ctrl and click to add multiple sections to the existing query set.
Press Shift and click on a section to add that section and all sections downstream,
including all branches, to the existing query set.
Press Ctrl+Shift and click on a section to add that section and all sections on a direct path
back to the feeder (or subtran) source to the existing query set.
Click in any empty space in the SynerGEE map display to clear the query set.
TO MODIFY SECTIONS IN THE QUERY SET USING THE QUERY PATH TOOL
1
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the section that you want to work with using the Query
Path tool.
Use the Query Path editor to set up the condition for your query. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Query Set
Select whether you want to use the current query set or clear the
query set and replace it with a new one.
Action
Select the action that you want to perform when modifying the
query set.
Sections
Select which sections you want to use to modify the query set.
Click Finish to accept your settings and modify the query set accordingly.
User Guide
176
Using SynerGEE
Right-click on the section in the Query tab of the model explorer or in the SynerGEE map display.
You can also press Ctrl+Q on the keyboard to clear the query set.
On the first page of the Query Wizard, select what data type you want to query. Available choices
are as follows:
-
Section Parameters
Equipment
Results
Zone
On the second page of the wizard, specify the criteria by which you want to query your data. The
options on this page will vary depending on what you selected on the first page of the wizard. For
example, if you selected Zone on the first page, then on the second page you can select a specific
zone type to query Customer, Exposure, Mitigation, or Growth.
On the third page of the wizard, select which portion of the model you are querying. Available
choices are as follows:
User Guide
Selected Feeders
Whole Model
On the fourth page of the wizard, select how you want to apply the queried results. Available choices
are as follows:
-
Using SynerGEE
177
-
On the last page of the wizard, review the sections that will be used to create or modify the query
set. You can remove individual sections from the query set at this point by right-clicking on a query
set name and selecting Remove.
Click Finish to complete the query and close the Query Wizard. The query set, as reflected on the
Query tab of the model explorer, will be updated according to the choices that you made.
Instead of clicking Finish, you can also click Launch Multiple Editor on the last page of the wizard.
This will also accept the new query set and also launch SynerGEEs Multiple Editor.
To exit the Query Wizard without committing any changes, click Cancel.
Build a query set that includes the sections and equipment that you want to edit. For more
information, see Using the Query Set on page 173.
In the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the TOOLS tab. Then, in the Model group, select
Multiple Editor.
or
In the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the BUILD tab. Then, in the Query group, select
Multiple Editor.
Along the top of the Multiple Editor, click the category button for the SynerGEE data category that
you want to edit. Available choices include Devices, Loads, General, Sections, and Zones.
Along the left side of the Multiple Editor, select the subcategory that you want to edit. For example, if
you clicked the Devices button along the top of the editor, select from the subcategories to edit
Capacitors, Generators, Motors, Regulators, Switches, or Transformers.
On the right side of the editor, select the specific edit that you want to make for the selected category
and subcategory type. You can also do the following:
-
Click the >> button to open a panel at the bottom of the Multiple Editor that shows list of the
proposed changes, based on the selections you made in the Multiple Editor and the
sections that you have added to the query set. Right-click on any proposed change and
select Exclude from Multiple Edit to remove that change from the multiple edit. Rightclick again and select Restore All Excluded Items to return the list to its original settings.
User Guide
178
Using SynerGEE
Click the Back up model button to save a copy of your currently loaded model and
warehouse before applying changes.
Click Save a report of the listed changes button to save the proposed changes to a
report file. You can also click this button after the changes have been completed by clicking
the Finish button.
When the list of proposed changes is satisfactory, click OK or Apply to complete the edit.
PRINTING
You can print any SynerGEE view, including the map, charts, and TCC graphs. You can also view a print
preview before printing, to get an idea of what the output will look like. Note that print preview is not always
100% reliable, especially with HTML reports. This is due to the variations between file formats and printer
types, of which SynerGEE, like any software product, is unable to fully accommodate.
Before printing a SynerGEE view, you should make sure that your page setup options reflect the type of
printout you want. Page setup options control overall appearance features, including margins and font styles.
You can also configure page setup options for specific SynerGEE view types, including the map display,
report and chart windows, the Organizer, and the TCC.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on using the Page Setup editor.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon. Hover the mouse over Print, and
then select Page Setup.
On the left side of the Page Setup editor, select from the following tab names to edit page setup
options for all SynerGEE printouts:
User Guide
Margins
Options
Specifies whether you want to include the project name, current date/time,
title lines, and logo in your reports.
Font Sizes
Sets font sizes for the various text categories that may appear on the
printout.
In addition, select from the following tab names to edit page setup options for printouts of specific
SynerGEE views.
Map
Sets the title, legend, and other options for map display printouts.
TCC
Chart
Cable
Sets the title text for Cable Duct Bank view printouts.
Using SynerGEE
179
Report
Sets the title text, alignment, and other options for any SynerGEE report
printouts.
Joiner
Sets the title text, alignment, and other options for Joiner view printouts.
Projects
Feeders
Sets the title text for printing the Feeder view in the model explorer.
Organizer
DTrans
Click OK to accept your changes and close the Page Setup editor.
In the Report Export dialog box, select the check box next to the name of each chapter that you
want to print.
Click Finish.
Use the Print dialog box to set additional printing options, and then click OK to print the selected
report chapters.
RAP SHEETS
Rap sheets provide simple, brief information on specific devices or sections in the model. You can open the
Rap Sheet editor from the TOOLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar. However, in most cases you will want to
display a rap sheet directly from a specific device or section. You can do this by right-clicking on the device or
section name and selecting the desired rap sheet type from the resulting context menu. Each rap sheet (with
the exception of Voltage Plots) is added to the list area in the Rap Sheet editor. You can use the Rap Sheet
editor to zoom to a selected device or section, remove a single rap sheet from the list, or clear all rap sheets
from the list. You can also open a selected rap sheet in WordPad.
The topics listed below provide more information on the different rap sheets that are available in SynerGEE.
User Guide
180
Using SynerGEE
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
181
User Guide
182
Using SynerGEE
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
183
ORGANIZER
The Organizer provides access to all of the data in your model and all of SynerGEEs functions without the
graphic overhead of a map display. The Organizer is essentially an alternate way to work with your model,
allowing you to view more data at one time, thus saving you time as you view attributes and edit model
properties.
All SynerGEE users have access to the Organizer, but users with an especially large model and database
may find it most helpful when running more complex analyses that tend to take longer to generate. All ribbon
bar tabs and analysis options can be used in the exact same way as the map view. You can double-click on
any device name in the Organizer window to open the associated device editor. Organizer columns can be
sorted and filtered to show only the data that you need to see.
The Organizer includes three subtabs that are located to the left side of the Organizer window:
Model Wide. The Model Wide tab allows you to view all feeders and equipment in your model,
regardless of whether they are selected. You can view a summary of your model data by selecting
the Model wide metrics and Settings branches of the Model Wide tabs tree view. Specific details
can be viewed by selecting the Network, Paths, Facilities, Section Lists, Facility Lists, and Zones
branches.
Selection. The Selection tab shows the feeders and equipment that are currently selected in the
standard model. Specific details can be viewed by selecting the Network, Facilities, Section Lists,
Paths, and Facility Lists branches.
Issues. The Issues tab shows potential data problems in your model. Specific details can be viewed
by selecting the Issues, Connectivity, Bad Types, Loads, and Exceptions branches.
In addition, you can open additional Organizer tabs within the main Organizer view, in case you want to
toggle quickly between different views of the data in your model. These Organizer tabs are located along the
right side of the Organizer view. You can add tabs and remove tabs by clicking the respective buttons in the
SynerGEE ribbon bar.
In the upper-left corner of the Organizer window, click the light bulb icon to toggle analysis reports
on and off. When the light bulb is "on" (yellow), reports will be generated. When the bulb is "off"
(white), reports will not be generated.
Also, click the up and down arrows above the year indicator to change the analysis year.
On the left side of the Organizer window, select the Model Wide, Selection, and Issues subtabs,
and then associated options in the Organizer tree view, to view different categories of data in your
model.
User Guide
184
Using SynerGEE
5
Use the right-click menu to access shortcuts for interacting with the devices and sections in your
model. The following table describes many of the options that are available.
Right-Click Option
Description
Delete
Pan To
Zoom To
Zoom Feeder
Toggle Query
Edit
Opens the SynerGEE editor for the device or section. (You can also
double-click a device or section name to open the SynerGEE editor.)
Turn On/Off
Open/Close Device
Add to TCC
Link
Open the location link that is associated with a device. (If no location
link is set up for the device, the Link option will be disabled.)
Change ID
Charts/Reports
Open in Excel
Command lines are used in a variety of places within the Windows environment. One common way of
accessing a command line is by selecting Start > Run from the Windows desktop. Or, you can create a batch
file that contains multiple command lines and run the file at regular intervals.
When launching SynerGEE from a command line, you can also use certain autostart commands to perform
specialized functions. For example, you can load a specified database automatically, or you can have
SynerGEE automatically run a specified recipe after loading the database.
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
185
All SynerGEE autostart commands begin with a hyphen, followed by a single letter and then any additional
parameters that SynerGEE might need. The following autostart commands are available. Several examples
of these commands are provided after the table.
Command
Description
-m path
Loads a model database, where path is the path name of the model database file.
If the path contains any spaces, you must enclose the entire path in quotes.
-e path
Loads an equipment database, where path is the path name of the equipment
database file. If the path contains any spaces, you must enclose the entire path in
quotes.
-p path
Loads a protection database, where path is the path name of the protection
database file. If the path contains any spaces, you must enclose the entire path in
quotes.
-r name
Runs a recipe, where name is the recipe name. If the name contains any spaces,
you must enclose it in quotes.
UNITS IN SYNERGEE
With normal usage, units handling in SynerGEE is automatic, with seamless conversion from data sources to
the interface and back. Supporting both the English and metric systems, SynerGEE can easily convert
between different systems as necessary and provide the results in the system you prefer.
In some cases, though, you may encounter a situation in which you need to understand the details of units
handling, especially if you are building or manipulating a data source outside of SynerGEE. For external data
management purposes, units handling is very flexible, but requires a strong knowledge of SynerGEEs
processes and architecture for units.
The topics listed below provide detailed information on how SynerGEE reads, writes, and converts units. If
you perform work directly in your SynerGEE data sources, you should have an understanding of these
concepts, even if you do not work with units explicitly.
User Guide
186
Using SynerGEE
Generic names for length increments SUL, MUL, and LUL on page 188
In the interface. In the Preferences editor, you can select the units system that you use in
SynerGEE. This preference setting affects most of the editors, wizards, and reports that are
included in the SynerGEE interface. For more information on setting this option, see Setting units of
measurement on page 165.
In a data source. Each data source also has its own global units setting, which allows SynerGEE to
determine the units system within that entire data source. In Access, this setting is found in the
SAI_Control and SAI_Equ_Control tables. For detailed information on the control tables, see Units
conversion and control tables on page 187.
All units displayed within the SynerGEE interface will use the same system, just as all data included in any
given data source must use the same system. The two units systems, however, do not need to be the same.
SynerGEE will automatically convert between the two different units systems when you load and save
SynerGEE data.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Data source
on disk
Converter
(using SAI_Control
table settings)
SynerGEE
internal units
Converter
(using preferences
settings)
SynerGEE
user interface
(editors, etc.)
In the diagram, you can see that two distinct conversion processes take place during normal SynerGEE
usage:
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
187
The conversion from the data source units to internal units. This occurs when data is loaded (and
also when data is saved).
The conversion from internal units to user-preference units. This occurs any time data must be
displayed in an editor or a report (and also when you are required to enter data in SynerGEE).
The independence of internal units makes SynerGEE very flexible for converting between different units
systems. As soon as data is loaded, it is converted to internal units. All internal data uses the same internal
system regardless of the original source units, meaning that SynerGEE can load and merge data from any
combination of sources using different systems. In fact, after loading the data, the original source units are
largely irrelevant until SynerGEE saves data back to the source, at which time the appropriate conversion
occurs again. Through this process, you could merge an English kFeet data source with a metric data
source, and display the data in the interface in English miles, without compromising any data integrity.
Afterwards, you could save the merged data to any system you prefer, especially if you create a new data
source.
Metric data
source
Converter
SynerGEE
internal units
English kFt
data source
Converter
SynerGEE interface
(displaying English
miles)
Converter
SAI_Control Control table for a model data source. When model data is loaded or saved, this table
is read. If a new model data source is created, this table is created within it.
SAI_Equ_Control Control table for an equipment data source. When equipment data is loaded or
saved, this table is read. If a new equipment data source is created, this table is created within it.
Generally, all of your data sources should use the same system, and this is especially true if you store both
model data and equipment data in the same database. Both tables store the length units system in the
LengthUnits field, which can be one of the following values:
Once a data source is written, it is very important that you do not alter this field within the control table.
Changing this field does not cause SynerGEE to automatically convert any values. Instead, it causes
User Guide
188
Using SynerGEE
SynerGEE to run the wrong converter on the existing data, causing unpredictable results. If you did manually
alter the control table, you would also need to manually convert every piece of length data accordingly.
SynerGEE has no tools to automatically convert the units within an existing data source. To perform a
source-wide conversion, you must load the entire source, set your preferences to the desired system, and
then save the data to a new source. The units system in the new source will reflect your preference settings.
These generic descriptions allow important standardizations within SynerGEE, including a common, intuitive
data source schema for all units systems. As an example, in the InstSection table in Access, you can find the
following field:
SectionLength_MUL
This name, with the generic quantity suffix, was chosen for this field because:
SectionLength does not indicate the unit, which is important for a user attempting to directly
populate this value
Therefore, in the data source schema and certain other places, SynerGEE uses the SUL, MUL, and LUL
convention exclusively to keep the core functionality generic and localizable.
The following table details the actual units applicable to the three generic quantities, per system:
English (miles)
English (kFeet)
Metric
SUL
inches
inches
centimeters
MUL
feet
feet
meters
LUL
miles
kilometers
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
189
Remember that in a data source, SynerGEE expects units as specified in the control table. For example, if a
field specifically calls for SUL units, and the control table specifies Metric, SynerGEE will assume the value to
be in centimeters. For more information on control tables, see Units conversion and control tables on
page 187.
You can change the units system in your preferences at any time, and data shown in the editors and
on the map updates instantly and automatically. However, analysis reports are static and do not
change. If you change your units after generating a needed report, you should run the analysis
again to regenerate the report.
On the map, SynerGEE uses an X and Y coordinate system in feet or meters, depending on the
units system in your preferences. Likewise, when background images are imported, they must
include coordinate data so that SynerGEE can properly position them. Therefore, you should be
sure that the image coordinates match the units system of SynerGEE. If they do not, images will
likely be improperly positioned. This consideration is especially important if you import background
landbase maps for the purposes of tracing your distribution system.
Application settings. Application settings include all settings that are associated with SynerGEE
analyses and other applications. For example, all of your fault analysis settings are part of an
application settings group.
Map settings. Map settings include all settings that are associated with the map display, except for
background images. These settings include coloring options, flow arrow display, annotations, and
zoom settings.
Feature Lock. A feature lock settings file saves your current feature lock configuration, as set in the
Preferences editor. Feature locks prevent changes from being made to specific aspects of
SynerGEE, by disabling the ability to edit selected features.
Settings files provide the convenience of reconfiguring significant parts of SynerGEE with a single, simple
operation. Settings groups also provide the ability to share settings within your organization, by sharing the
settings files.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
190
Using SynerGEE
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Settings.
Use the options in the Settings Manager to perform the following tasks.
To ...
Create a new settings group
User Guide
Do This ...
a
In the settings group text box, type the name of the new
settings group that you want to create.
Click Load.
Using SynerGEE
191
To ...
Do This ...
Click Save.
Click Delete.
Delete the defaults files that correspond to the settings groups you want to restore. For example, if
you are trying to restore your map settings, you should delete Default.DispSet. For more information
on defaults files and their locations, see Settings files details on page 191.
Start SynerGEE. Because the default settings group from step 2 does not exist, SynerGEE will use
internal factory defaults to configure the applicable settings.
Shut down SynerGEE again. In doing so, SynerGEE will now create the missing defaults file(s)
using the current SynerGEE settings, which also happen to be the default factory settings.
Settings group
*.AppSet
Application settings
*.AppSet_xml
User Guide
192
Using SynerGEE
File extension
Settings group
*.DispSet
*.GbTileSet
*.FeatureLock
SynerGEE always maintains default files for each settings group in your Settings file directory. These default
files are named Default.AppSet, Default.DispSet, Default.GbTileSet, and Default.FeatureLock. The default
files are read during startup to retrieve initial settings. These files are never written to automatically, so your
startup defaults will not change unless you manually change them. If you delete a defaults file, SynerGEE will
regenerate it with current settings during the next shutdown. You can use this method to restore the defaults
file to the original SynerGEE settings, should you happen to overwrite your Defaults file by mistake. For more
information, see To restore startup default settings to factory settings on page 191.
Settings files can be shared with other SynerGEE users to help maintain organizational consistency. To
share a settings file, copy and paste it from your Settings file directory to another users Settings file directory.
For more information on editing path locations, see Defining file paths on page 167.
In the Edit group, select the text Bulk Editor and then select the type of load that you want to edit.
Available choices are as follows:
User Guide
Capacitors
Large Customers
Spot Loads
The Bulk Editor lists all of the applicable load values for each section or device of the selected type
in your model. You can perform several tasks directly from the Bulk Editor, including the following:
-
Open the SynerGEE editor for a section or device. In the Description column, click the
name of any section or device to open the applicable SynerGEE editor.
Edit loads for the section or device. Select any cell in the Bulk Editor and then type a new
value for the selected load. If both the SynerGEE editor and the Bulk Editor are open at the
same time, you will see your edits applied automatically as you edit loads in either editor.
Filter the list of sections or devices. Click in the filter area and type the text to filter for, and
then click the Filter button. Delete the text you typed and click the Filter button again to
remove the filter. The filter field is not case-sensitive.
Using SynerGEE
193
Several special characters are available for use with the SynerGEE filter. For example, < or
> will filter for items greater or less than the given value. In addition, != will filter for items
that do not equal the given value. And, * is a wildcard filter that will filter for results that
contain the given syntax anywhere in its name or value.
-
Apply custom coloring to the values in the Bulk Editor. Use the grid at the top of the
SynerGEE editor to create custom rules to color load values that are greater than, less
than, or equal to a specified value.
Clear the SynerGEE registry. Select this option to clear all settings related to SynerGEE Electric
from your computers registry. Note that SynerGEE will automatically shut down as a part of this
process. You must make sure that you manually save any unsaved model data before you perform
this procedure.
Set the maximum number of locks in an Access database. When saving a large model to Access,
locks are placed on records while they are read from or written to the database. If the number of
locks exceeds the default maximum value of 9,500, a message box will display and the model will
not be saved. Select this option to edit the registry to change the maximum number of locks to
100,000, which is sufficient to save a large SynerGEE model.
Click Finish. Note that if you select the Clear SynerGEE settings from the registry option,
SynerGEE will immediately shut down, after which you can start a new SynerGEE session.
User Guide
194
User Guide
Using SynerGEE
CHAPTER
4
Working with the
Map Display
The SynerGEE map provides a geospatial representation of your model. The map is based on the geography
and scale of your system, as defined in your model data.
The SynerGEE map provides many more features than traditional maps, including the following:
Extensive control over symbology, coloring, and line styles based on many different possible
parameters, including construction characteristics and analysis results.
A comprehensive set of navigational and zooming features, including the ability to bookmark
specific areas with views and points of interest.
Quick editing of model data, by allowing you to produce an editor by double-clicking on any object in
the map display.
A thorough understanding of the map, especially coloring and annotation features, will improve your
productivity with SynerGEE. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
196
Changing the zoom direction of the mouse scroll wheel on page 200
Zooming
Zooming enlarges and reduces the scale of your map display, allowing you to focus on a small area of the
model or view the entire map at one time. As you zoom in and out of the map display, certain features in the
map may change based on your SynerGEE settings. For example, in the Zoom tab of the Map Settings
editor, you can specify the scale at which selected map display symbols are displayed. This allows you to
reduce map clutter when you are zoomed out from your model, but see detail when you have zoomed in to
the model.
The following table describes how to perform various zoom operations from the SynerGEE ribbon bar and
also the right-click menu in the SynerGEE map display, as well as by using the buttons on your mouse.
NAVIGATE tab ribbon
bar button
Right-click menu
Description
In
Zoom > In
Out
Rectangle
User Guide
Previous
197
Right-click menu
Description
Go To X,Y
Network Bounds
Map Bounds
Background Bounds
Item in Editor
Magnifier
Panning
Panning allows you to move the map up, down, left, or right to view different areas of your map display. You
can use the mouse or the arrow keys to pan the map display.
In the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the DISPLAY tab. In the Settings group, make sure the Drag
Panning button is selected (highlighted).
Select the BUILD tab. In the General group, select Default or press F5 to enter Default mode.
Click and hold the mouse in the map display, and then drag the mouse to pan to a new location.
Hold Shift and scroll the mouse wheel to pan the map left and right.
Hold Ctrl and scroll the mouse wheel to pan the map up and down.
User Guide
198
Using your keyboard, press the Up, Down, Left, or Right arrow key to pan the map display in the
selected direction.
Tip:
Panning with the keyboard is particularly helpful when you are drawing sections that
extend beyond the current map bounds. You can pan with the keyboard while you are
drawing the section with the mouse.
In the Zoom group, click Clockwise or Counterclockwise, depending on which direction you want
to rotate the map.
Click in the map display to rotate the map in the selected direction. Click again to continue rotating
the map.
Measuring distances
Perform the following procedure to measure the distance between different points in the SynerGEE map
display.
In the General group, click the Map Measure button or press Ctrl+M to enter the map measurement
mode.
Click on the first point in the map display to begin the measurement. A dotted line will appear as you
move the mouse away from the point you clicked. The distance from the starting point to the current
mouse location is displayed in the status bar, in both feet and miles.
User Guide
199
Click the left mouse button to add a vertex point to the measurement. Each time the left mouse
button is clicked, another vertex point will be added. The distance shown in the status bar will be the
sum of your measurements, including the distance in each vertex that you have created.
In the Settings group, click the Allow Node Selection button. When the option is selected
(highlighted), nodes are visible in the map display and can be edited by double-clicking on them.
When the option is not selected (not highlighted), nodes are not visible and the node editor cannot
be opened in this manner.
User Guide
200
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
Under Mouse Roll Wheel Up, select one of the following options to set the direction of the mouse
wheel when you scroll it in the upward direction:
Zoom In. Select this option to zoom in to the map when you scroll the mouse wheel
upward.
Zoom Out. Select this option to zoom out from the map when you scroll the mouse wheel
upward.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on customizing the map display using the Map Settings
editor.
User Guide
201
Open the Map Settings editor by using any of the following methods:
-
In the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the DISPLAY tab. Then, in the Tools group, click
Settings.
On the left side of the Map Settings editor, select from the different tab names to access the
available map display settings. The following procedures describe the different tasks that you can
perform:
-
Adding section and device annotation to the map display on page 207
Customizing section colors and sizes based on analysis results on page 210
Customizing device colors and sizes based on analysis results on page 211
You can also configure background images, as described in Background Images on page 232.
3
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
User Guide
202
Use the options in the Style tab to customize the map display. Refer to the following table for
information on the tasks you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Click Color By and then select the specific coloring scheme that
you want to apply. The active Color By scheme also applies to
any open schematics.
Tips:
User Guide
203
To ...
Do This ...
Click View Mode and then select the specific view mode that you
want to apply. The view mode determines which feeders appear
in the map display. It works in conjunction with the feeder
selection set, as described in Selecting Feeders on page 157.
The following view modes are available:
You can also select the feeder view mode from the DISPLAY tab
of the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
User Guide
204
To ...
Do This ...
User Guide
Show only. Select this check box and then expand the
options list to select specific facility types that you want
to display. Map display symbols for any unselected
device types will be hidden from view in the map.
205
To ...
Do This ...
Use the Arrows option list to select the arrow category that you
want to display. Flow arrows can provide a helpful visual display
of power flow or model topology. For example, select Real
Power Flow to display arrows pointing in the direction of the
power flow on the map. To hide flow arrows, select the No
Arrows option.
In addition, you can use the number box next to the Arrows
options list to specify a size for your flow arrows. The default size
is 20.
You can also select the flow arrow option from the DISPLAY tab
of the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
You can also set the map background color from the
DISPLAY tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the
Background group.
Select the check box in the Text Labels section. Then, click the
Font button to select a font type, style, and size for the annotated
text.
Click the Show feeder boxes check box. Feeder boxes will be
shown with a dotted outline in the map display.
Click the Show selected section check box. The section that is
selected for analysis (as described in Setting a section for
analysis on page 434) will be indicated with a thicker line than
the other sections in the map display.
Tip:
Click the Highlight Queried Area check box. Any sections that
are in the query set will be highlighted in the SynerGEE map
display using SynerGEEs query set color, which by default is
gray. (This color can be changed in the Color tab of the Map
Settings editor.)
Tip:
User Guide
206
To ...
Do This ...
In the Line Styles section, select a style that you want to use to
show the lines in your model, and also the specific line styles for
three different categories within the selected style.
Note that the selected line styles are not affected by the zoom
level.
Specify how unfed items are
shown
Show polygons
Growth areas
Speculative loads
Areas of interest
Next to Show only, click the options list and then select the
check box for each map display symbol that you want to show.
Unchecked items will be hidden in the map display but still be
available for editing (for example, through the model explorer).
You can also select this option from the DISPLAY tab of the
SynerGEE ribbon bar.
User Guide
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
207
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
Use the rest of the settings in the Text tab to set up annotation for selected sections and equipment
types. The following table describes the different tasks you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
User Guide
208
To ...
Do This ...
In the Section and Equipment Font section, click the Font button
to select a font type, style, and size for the annotated text. In
addition, you can select the Use Custom Color check box to
specify a custom color for the annotated text.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
In the Map Settings editor, select Text. Make sure that the Hide All Annotation text box is not
selected.
User Guide
209
Use the rest of the settings in the Show Section Results section to set up section result annotation
for up to three analysis results categories. The following table describes the different tasks you can
perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Select the Specify decimal places check box and then specify a
decimal value from 0 to 4. If you set the value to 0, the section
results data will be rounded to the nearest whole numbers.
Select the Limit result display check box and then specify the
distance interval at which you want results to display.
Select the Restrict to value interval check box and then specify
the minimum and maximum values for the results you want to
display.
Select the Only show Tagged sections check box if you want to
display the analysis results for tagged sections only.
Tagging is a way to temporarily identify key sections and devices
that you want to work with. You can tag a section or facility by
right-clicking on it in the SynerGEE map display or model
explorer and selecting the Tag option. For more information, see
Tagging Sections and Facilities on page 172.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
210
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
Use the options list under Results for Thematic Mapping to select the analysis category that you
want to use to customize the section color and thickness.
Note:
If the options list is empty, then no analysis has been run and thus no results are available
to display.
Refer to the following table for the different tasks that you can perform from the Theme tab.
To ...
Set the analysis results
range (Max to Min) with
automatic intervals
User Guide
Do This ...
a
Click the Apply button. The Min and Max cells will
automatically be populated with the minimum and
maximum values for the selected analysis results type.
The values in the remaining analysis results range cells
will be evenly distributed between the Min and Max
values.
Type the Max and Min values for the range that you
want to display.
211
To ...
Do This ...
Use the Color options lists to select a color for each analysis
results range. If desired, you can click Invert Colors to reverse
the order of the six color choices, or you can click the Default
Colors button to reset the six color options to the default choices
as installed by SynerGEE. The Out-of-Range color is not affected
by these two buttons.
Tip:
You can also set the invert colors mode from the
DISPLAY tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar. In the
Settings group, click the Invert Colors button.
a
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
Select the Color By Device Results check box to enable the Color By Device Results feature, and
to enable the remaining fields in the Facilities tab.
Use the options list under Color By Device Results to select which device results category you
want to use to add color and symbols to the map.
User Guide
212
Refer to the following table for the different tasks that you can perform in the Facilities tab.
To ...
Do This ...
Click the Apply button. The Min and Max cells will
automatically be populated with the minimum and
maximum values for the selected device results type.
The values in the remaining device range cells will be
evenly distributed between the Min and Max values.
Type the Max and Min values for the range that you
want to display.
Use the Color options lists to select a color for each device
range. If desired, you can click Invert Colors to reverse the
order of the four color choices, or you can click the Default
Colors button to reset the four color options to the default
choices as installed by SynerGEE. The Out-of-Range color is not
affected by these two buttons.
Select the appropriate check box in the Symbol Size column and
then set the size value as appropriate.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
213
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
In the Colors for Mapping section, select the mapping category that you want to edit. In the bottom
of the editor, use the options list to select a new color for the selected category.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
In the Device Colors and Symbols section, select the device type that you want to edit and then
perform any of the following tasks:
To ...
Do This ...
Use the Symbol options list to select a new map display symbol.
User Guide
214
To ...
Do This ...
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
Do This ...
a
User Guide
To ...
Enable and disable visibility
levels
215
Do This ...
a
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
To ...
Do This ...
Select the Show Grid check box, and then use the Style and
Color options to configure the grid line style and color.
Next to Text Color, select a color for the grid lines in the map
display.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
216
You can also show and hide the grid from the DISPLAY tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar. In
the Settings group, click the Map Grid button to show and hide the grid, as appropriate.
Exceptions. Special colors for sections that produced exceptions during analysis.
Elbow. Different colors that indicate no elbow on either end of the section, an end is open, or an end
is closed.
Most of the colors used in these color-by schemes are specified in the Color tab in the Map Settings editor.
For example, if you select the Color by: phases scheme, the colors that are used in the map for each phase
are defined in the Color tab. Other colors, such as feeder and zone colors, are specified in the respective
editors. For example, if you are coloring by customer zones, you must open the respective customer zone
editor to change the color for that zone. One exception is in regard to feeders and subtrans. Feeder and
subtrans colors are assigned in the respective device editors, as described in Modeling Feeders and
Subtrans on page 245.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on setting up a coloring scheme.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
Under Color By, select the method by which you want to color. For more information on working
with this option, see Configuring the map display style on page 201.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
217
SynerGEE displays where it would simulate a tie switch during analysis, called an Internal Break. This
functionality allows you to evaluate where SynerGEE would break the loop for analysis purposes. If you
deem an internal break location as inappropriate, you can model a tie switch somewhere else to override this
break point. For more information on tie switches, see Loops and Wandering Laterals on page 253.
When you color by path type, you can also view force-unfed sections in a special color. Force unfed
sections are those to whom propagated phasing is insufficient for specified phasing. For example, a phase
AB section fed by a phase AN section is considered force-unfed. For more information on force-unfed
sections, see About force-unfed sections on page 263.
AREAS OF INTEREST
Areas of interest are two-dimensional geographic entities that you can draw on the SynerGEE map display to
represent areas of speculative or future load, or to simply indicate locations of interest, such as a lake or a
restricted area. Areas of interest are always associated with a particular section. SynerGEE chooses an initial
association based on geography, but you can change the association at any time, as described in
Associating an area of interest with a section on page 223.
If an area of interest represents a speculative load, load-flow-based analyses will consider the speculative
load component as a part of the associated section. The speculative load component is defined in the area of
interest editor.
Likewise, if an area of interest represents a future load, SynerGEEs forecasting analysis will consider the
spot and distribution load components as a part of the associated section. The spot and distribution load
components are also defined in the area of interest editor.
If the area of interest is only being used to represent a geographical area, then the load options are disabled
and the area of interest is not factored into any SynerGEE analysis.
Figure 4-2 shows an example of how an area of interest might appear in the SynerGEE map display.
SynerGEE allows you to edit a number of settings for each area of interest, including the shape, color, and fill
pattern.
User Guide
218
Under Area of Interest, select the name of the area of interest type that you want to create (Growth
Area, Speculative Load, or General) and drag it into the map display. (Note that you can change
the area of interest type after it has been added to the model.)
Without releasing the mouse button, drag the mouse to the section where you want to add the area
of interest. When the cursor changes to a crosshair (Figure 4-3), you can release the mouse button
to add the area of interest. Click Yes to confirm the action.
By default, the new area of interest is created as a simple square, as shown in Figure 4-4.
To edit the shape of the area of interest, you must modify the graphic points or use the right-click
menu to redraw it. For more information, see Reshaping and moving an area of interest on
page 219.
To edit the settings for the area of interest, double-click the area to open the Area of Interest editor.
For more information, see Editing the settings for an area of interest on page 220.
User Guide
219
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the area of interest that you want to edit and then select
Reshape.
Click the left mouse button to create the vertex points that will define the new boundary of the area
of interest.
Press Esc to exit the Reshape mode and return to the Default mode. Note that if you remain in the
Reshape mode, you will effectively begin a new redrawing of the same area of interest each time
you click in the map display.
In the BUILD tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Add Graphic Point, Move Graphic Point,
or Delete Graphic Point buttons, as appropriate.
-
If you are adding a graphic point, click and hold the mouse in the position along the area of
interest where you are adding a graphic point, and then drag the point to the new location.
If you are moving a graphic point, click and hold the mouse over the graphic point that you
want to move, and then drag the point to a new location.
If you are deleting a graphic point, click the mouse over the graphic point that you want to
delete.
Press F5 to exit the Move Device mode and return to the Default mode.
User Guide
220
In the SynerGEE map display, double-click the area of interest to open the Area of Interest editor.
In the Area of Interest editor, select the Area tab. The following table describes the different fields
that you can edit.
User Guide
Description
Type
Specifies the area of interest type. The option that you select here will
enable/disable fields in other tabs in the Area of Interest editor. The
following options are available:
Speculative Load. Speculative Load specifies that loadflow-based analyses will consider the speculative load
component as specified in the Spec. Load tab.
Display
221
Year
Specifies the Energize year and the Retire year for the area of
interest.
Associated section
Identifies the section associated with the area of interest. For more
information on changing the associated section, see Associating an
area of interest with a section on page 223.
Turn Off
Select this option to disable the area of interest for analysis purposes.
The settings in the editor will be retained, but any load and growth
estimates will be ignored during SynerGEE analyses.
Select the Spec Load tab. Use the options in this tab to set the speculative load for the area of
interest. The options in this tab are only enabled if you have selected Speculative Load as the area
of interest type in the Area tab.
Demand Type
Specifies the type of demand (kVA, kWh, or kW) for the speculative
load. Any demand values that you enter will be assigned to the
section associated with the area of interest for any load-flow studies.
Reference
Specifies how the speculative load will be applied to the section. The
following options are available:
Note that load values are applied to the area of interests parent
section only, regardless of how they are ultimately determined. For
this reason, the area of interests section association can be
important. For more information, see Associating an area of interest
with a section on page 223.
User Guide
222
User Guide
Load PF
Specifies the load power factor, which is applied to all demand years.
Area
Demand
Specifies the speculative demand that you expect for each year. The
multi-year values only apply if you are actively using multi-year
modeling and analysis. If you are not, specify your load data in the
first year listed and leave the remaining values at zero.
Select the Dist Growth tab. Use this options in this tab to set distributed growth options for the area
of interest. The options in this tab are only enabled if you have selected Growth Area as the area of
interest type in the Area tab.
To ...
Do This ...
Select Distributed growth and then use the text boxes to specify the
percentage of distributed load growth for each year. As an alternative,
you can select the Growth Curve check box to use a growth curve
from your model to specify that the distributed load growth
percentages are determined by a pre-defined growth curve in your
model. For more information on working with growth curves, see
Growth curves on page 804.
Select Distributed new load and then use the text boxes to specify
the spot load growth for each year.
Select the Spot Growth tab. Use this options in this tab to set spot growth options for the area of
interest. The options in this tab are only enabled if you have selected Growth Area as the area of
interest type in the Area tab.
To ...
Do This ...
Select Spot growth and then use the text boxes to specify the
percentage of spot load growth for each year. As an alternative, you
can select the Growth Curve check box to use a growth curve from
your model to specify that the spot load growth percentages are
determined by a pre-defined growth curve in your model. For more
information on working with growth curves, see Growth curves on
page 804.
Select Spot new load and then use the text boxes to specify the spot
load growth for each year.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
223
Locate the section that you want to associate with an area of interest.
Double-click the area of interest that you want to associate with the section.
In the Area tab of the Area of Interest editor, click Selected Section. Once clicked, the section that
you selected in step 1 and step 2 will be listed under Associated Section.
LOCATION LINKS
Location links allow you to link specific labels and devices to external files and websites. When you activate a
link, the file or website is opened directly within the SynerGEE workspace, either in a window or a dialog box.
Links can be launched via the right-click menu on the particular label or device.
Location links are for general purpose and reference use only. They do not have any interactive capabilities
with your SynerGEE model data.
There are three types of links that you can create:
Links to external files. You can link a map element to certain popular file formats, including DOC,
XLS, JPG, and BMP. When you activate a document link, such as DOC and XLS, the document
opens in the SynerGEE window and can be edited from there. Some image links open the image in
a separate SynerGEE window. You could use this type of link to attach an actual schematic or a
digitized photo to a SynerGEE model element, or you could attach a spreadsheet file that shows
other data, such as maintenance history.
Links to websites. When you activate a website link, SynerGEE connects to the Internet using your
company network and opens that site in a separate SynerGEE window. For example, you could link
a device to its manufacturers homepage for quick access to technical data.
Links to Internet mapping software. With this type of link, you specify an address or latitude and
longitude coordinates for the device, and SynerGEE uses Internet mapping software, such as
User Guide
224
Open the editor for the label or device where you want to create a location link, and find the
Location Link field.
Do This ...
For example:
<FI>C:\Regulators\Schematics\R141.jpg
For example:
<FI>my.stonersoftware.com
User Guide
225
To ...
Do This ...
For example:
<MQ>1170 Harrisburg Pike,Carlisle,PA,17013
<GE>40.259882,-77.03147800000001
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on a label or device where you have created a location link.
Select Link. A separate SynerGEE window opens containing the linked file or website. If the Link
option is disabled on the context menu, either there is no link established for that device, or the link
format is incorrect. For more information on establishing a location link, see Creating a location link
on page 224.
LABELS
Standard and customized labels can be added anywhere in the map display. Each label may contain up to
three lines, including text, analysis results, or a combination of both text and results. You can select from one
of several predefined quick label formats, or you can define your own label format by selecting from more
than 20 results categories for each of the three label lines. Each label line can be assigned an individual
color, and you can select from several other options for each label line, including whether to display units of
measurement and whether to display data by phase or as a total for the results category type.
User Guide
226
A label is always associated with a section, and each section can only have one label associated with it. You
can move the label anywhere you want in the map display, but the label and label data will always be
associated with the parent section, regardless of label location. You start the process of adding a label by
right-clicking on a section and selecting from the Text Label options.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with labels in SynerGEE.
Adding a label
Perform one of the following procedures to add a label to the SynerGEE map display. The predefined quick
labels can be added directly from the right-click menu in the SynerGEE map display, while custom labels
require you to use the Text Label editor to set up the data for your label.
Labels are always associated with sections, and each section can only have one label. If the add label menu
option is disabled for a section, then the section already has a label associated with it.
Label display (on or off) is controlled globally in the Style tab of the Map Settings editor, as described in
Configuring the map display style on page 201. If you add a label but it does not appear in the map display,
then the label display preference is most likely disabled for your model.
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the section where you want to add the label.
Select Text Label and then select the quick label type that you want to add.
SynerGEE assigns the selected label to the section. Once you have added the label, you must use
the Text Label editor to change the label options or select a different quick label type. For more
information, see Editing a label on page 227.
User Guide
227
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the section where you want to add the label.
Editing a label
The Label editor allows you to provide up to three lines of text or analysis results for each label. You can
display data values and units of measurement, and also configure the text color for each line. The label editor
also allows you to specify text justification, a location link, and energize and retire years for the label.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on editing a label. For information on editing the font
type, size, and style for all labels, see Configuring the map display style on page 201.
User Guide
228
TO EDIT A LABEL
1
In the SynerGEE map display, double-click on the label you wish to edit.
Use the options in the Text Label editor to configure the settings for the label. The following table
describes the different tasks that you can perform.
User Guide
To ...
Do This ...
In the Enable column, select the check box next to each label
line that you want to enable. In addition, the following options are
available for each label line:
Color. Use the Color option to select the color for the
associated label line.
229
To ...
Do This ...
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Moving a label
You can move labels in the map display at any time. Unlike moving other objects in the map display, you do
not need to enter Build mode before moving the label, nor do you have to return to Default mode when you
are done moving a label. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO MOVE A LABEL
1
Click the label and drag it to a new location, releasing the mouse button when you are done. Note
that the associated section is highlighted in the map display as you click and drag the label.
Deleting a label
Perform the following procedure to delete a label from your map display. Note that if you delete a section that
has an associated label, the label will also be deleted.
TO DELETE A LABEL
1
In the map display, right-click on the label that you want to delete.
MOBILE ITEMS
Mobile items are unique symbols that you can add to the map display to mark locations of interest in your
model. Mobile items can be placed anywhere in the SynerGEE map display. Unlike labels, mobile items are
not tied to a specific section. When editing a mobile item, you can select from a number of symbol types and
also customize the color and size of the symbol.
Note that mobile items are not saved with your SynerGEE model. They can, however, be saved as a part of a
subset.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
230
Expand Mobile Items and then select General Mobile Item. Drag it onto the map display and drop
it onto the desired location.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the mobile item that you want to edit.
Use the Mobile Item editor to edit the following properties for the mobile item:
-
Description
Symbol
Size
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
If desired, you can also select the Hide check box to hide the mobile item from the SynerGEE map
display. (You can still locate and edit the mobile item from the model explorer.)
3
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the mobile item that you want to delete.
User Guide
231
LEGEND
The Legend tab in the SynerGEE model explorer displays a detailed legend for the SynerGEE map display.
The legend shows the current color and line options that are being used by the map, as well as the device
type symbols and the coordinates for the area that is currently visible in the SynerGEE map display. The
same legend you see in the Legend tab is included when you print the SynerGEE map display.
The Legend window provides another way that you can view the legend for the SynerGEE map display. The
Legend window is a free-floating window that displays the current coloring scheme in the SynerGEE map
display in both pie chart and bar chart form. As you hover the mouse over each area of the chart, the Legend
window will display the name of the corresponding area, the total number of sections in that area, and the
total length in miles for all sections in that area. The size of the area in the respective chart is based on the
total number of miles for all sections in that area.
The Legend window displays automatically when you start SynerGEE. If you close the Legend window, you
can re-open it from the DISPLAY tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
VIEWS
A view is a specified geographical region of the map that you can snap to quickly using the NAVIGATE tab in
the SynerGEE ribbon bar. You can use views to set up frequently visited areas of your map and return to
those areas any time with just a click of the mouse.
Views are stored as model data, and are therefore portable between different data formats. You can create
as many different views of your map as necessary.
Refer to the following procedures for more information on creating, viewing, and deleting views.
TO CREATE A VIEW
1
Pan and zoom the map to the location you want to become a view.
In the Favorites group, next to Views, type a new name for the view you are creating.
TO VIEW A VIEW
1
In the Favorites group, next to Views, select the name of the view that you want to view. If the name
of the view is already showing, click the Go To View button to view the view.
User Guide
232
TO REPLACE A VIEW
1
Pan and zoom the map to the location you want to become a view.
In the Favorites group, next to Views, select the name of the view that you want to replace.
TO DELETE A VIEW
1
In the Favorites group, next to Views, select the name of the view that you want to delete.
BACKGROUND IMAGES
SynerGEE allows you to display raster and vector images in a wide range of popular formats underneath
the map of your model. This feature is useful during the development and maintenance of distribution system
models, especially for those situations when you need to be able to quickly relate your distribution system to
real-world features, or when presenting model results to a general audience.
You can load background images directly from the DISPLAY tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, or you can load
them through the Tiles tab in the Map Settings editor. From this tile library, you can select which images are
displayed at any given time. In addition, you can use a Geobackground settings file to save the current
background image settings for use with future SynerGEE sessions. For more information on working with
settings files, see Settings Groups and Settings Files on page 189.
Your imported background images must conform to a SynerGEE-supported file format. Many image types
require a supplemental file for SynerGEE to display them. For more information on SynerGEE image support,
see Background Image Support on page 1173.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
User Guide
233
Refer to the following table for the actions you can perform to add and remove map display
background images.
To ...
Add a background image to
SynerGEE
Do This ...
a
Click Add.
Remove a background
image from SynerGEE
In the list of background images, select the check box for each
image that you want to show in the SynerGEE map display. Clear
the check box for each image that you want to hide.
a
Click Browse.
Use the Select Tile dialog box to select a new path and
file for the background image, and then click Open.
Click Remove.
SCHEMATIC VIEW
As an alternative to the map view, a schematic provides a means of viewing a simplified version of your
model. Unlike a map, a schematic allows you to be very specific about which model items appear. You can
choose any combination of sections and devices from the model in memory to build a schematic. For
example, you can build a schematic to focus on specific items or analysis results. Then, like a map, you can
place results labels at strategic locations to monitor the desired parameters while running analyses.
Before using schematics, you should note the following:
Geography. Unlike a map, schematics do not have to be geography-based. You can essentially put
any item anywhere. The location of items in a schematic has no effect on the original source model
data.
Many-to-one relationship to model data. Because you choose the facilities that exist on a schematic,
you can create multiple schematics for any model. In fact, you can create any number of schematics
for any set of model data.
User Guide
234
Editing capabilities. Like a map, you can launch device and section editors from the schematic
explorer. When you work in the SynerGEE editor, you are working on actual source model data. Any
data edits you make will be reflected in the original, source model.
Feeder selection. Current feeder selection is shared between maps and schematics. However,
feeder selection in schematics is only applicable to the schematic explorer. Unlike a map, feeder
selection in a schematic does not affect which sections and devices are shown.
Display settings. Certain display settings, such as section coloring and equipment symbology, are
shared between maps and schematics. When you alter these settings, it affects any open maps
and/or schematics simultaneously. Other display settings, such as view modes and flow arrows,
apply to open maps only.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with schematics.
Editing device and section data in the schematic view on page 238
User Guide
235
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Schematic Template
window:
a
On the Templates tab of the Schematic Template explorer, click Add. The Create Schematic
Template editor opens.
In the name area of the Create Schematic Template editor, type the name of the new template that
you want to create. If you type or select the name of an existing template, you will replace the
existing template with a new, blank template.
Click Finish. The new template is added to the list of templates in the Templates tab of the
schematic explorer. See Editing a schematic template on page 235 for information on editing the
template.
To add a line, click the left mouse button in the starting location for the line. Drag the mouse to a
new location and click the left mouse button to add a vertex point, or click the right mouse button to
end the line.
Use the Square tools to add node points to the end of the line.
Use the Vertex and Endpoint tools to add additional vertex points and endpoints to existing lines.
Once you have added items to the Schematic Template, use the Default tool to drag the items to new
locations in the template window. You can also double-click any item to edit its associated properties. Each
item editor has four tabs:
General. Use the General tab to specify the name of the template item. To set up the template item
so it can be bound to a model object, type SID_ before the item name. The item will turn blue in the
template window, which identifies it as an item that can be bound.
Edit. Use the Edit tab to set up editing properties for the item, including whether it can be selected,
moved, rotated, and scaled.
Line. Use the Line tab to specify the color, style, and width of schematic lines.
Position and Size. Use the Position and Size tab to view read-only information on the size and
position of an item in the schematic template.
Fill. Use the Fill tab to set up the foreground and background colors and pattern for labels and
squares.
Text. Use the Text tab to specify the text that is included on text items, including the text alignment.
User Guide
236
Font. Use the Font tab to select the font type, style, and size for the text that is included on text
items.
Labels. Use the Labels tab to configure the orientation of a label on a schematic line.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Schematic Template
window:
a
In the Schematics group, click Template. If the Template option is disabled, then the
Schematic Template window is already open.
From the Templates tab of the Schematic window, select the name of the template that you want to
rename.
Click Rename.
Type a new name for the template and then press Enter.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Schematic Template
window:
a
In the Schematics group, click Template. If the Template option is disabled, then the
Schematic Template window is already open.
From the Templates tab of the Schematic window, select the name of the template that you want to
copy.
Click Copy. A duplicate copy of the template is created and added to the template list.
User Guide
237
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Schematic Template
window:
a
In the Schematics group, click Template. If the Template option is disabled, then the
Schematic Template window is already open.
From the Templates tab of the Schematic window, select the name of the template that you want to
delete.
Click Delete.
Creating a schematic
Perform the following procedure to create a schematic. You must have at least one schematic template
available before you can create a schematic. For more information on schematic templates, see Using
schematic templates on page 234.
TO CREATE A SCHEMATIC
1
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Schematic window:
a
In the Schematics group, click Schematics. If the Schematics option is disabled, then the
Schematic window is already open.
Right-click in the left side of the Schematic window and select New. The Edit Schematic dialog
opens.
Next to Template ID, select a schematic template whose settings will form the basis of the
new schematic.
Next to Feeder ID, select a feeder from your model to associate with the schematic.
Click OK to accept your changes and close the editor. The new schematic appears in the list of
schematics on the left side of the schematic window.
User Guide
238
Opening a schematic
TO OPEN A SCHEMATIC
1
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Schematic window:
a
In the Schematics group, click Schematics. If the Schematics option is disabled, then the
Schematic window is already open.
In the list of schematics on the left side of the window, select the schematic that you want to view
and drag it into the main viewing area on the right side of the window.
If you have not already done so, open the Schematic window and display the schematic that you
want to edit. See Opening a schematic on page 238 for more information.
Items that have been set up for binding in the schematic template are represented by blue colors in
the schematic window. Right-click on a blue item in the schematic window and select Edit Link.
Select a particular item from the list. For example, if you chose Section from the Object Type menu,
a list of sections appears in the list. You can select one to be bound to the object in the schematic.
User Guide
239
In the Grid Properties editor, select Grid Visible to display the grid in the schematic window. You
can also use the Color option to select the color for the grid.
Use the Measurements area to set the width, height, and spacing for the grid.
GEOGRAPHY VIEW
The Geography view window provides a geographic-based view of your model, very similar to what you
would see in an ESRI application. The Geography window matches your model coordinates with real-world
coordinates from a selected projection file, and then displays the model on top of a selected basemap file that
can show geographic information, a road map network, or other such features.
When working in the Geography view, you can perform many of the same functions that you can in the
traditional Map view. You can pan and zoom, and you can double click objects in your model to open the
respective editor. Many (although not all) of the model explorer tabs and ribbon bar buttons function the same
in the Geography view window as they do in the Map view window.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Synchronizing the Geography view and the Map view on page 241
Projection files. Your SynerGEE installation includes definition files for more than 4000 coordinate
systems. You will need to select the projection file that corresponds with the X,Y coordinates in your
model. For example, the projection file that is associated with the default model database that is
provided with SynerGEE is NAD 1927 StatePlane Colorado North FIPS 0501.
By default, SynerGEE looks for projection files in the GeoProjections folder in your SynerGEE
installation directory. However, you can change this folder from the Paths tab of the Preferences
User Guide
240
Basemap layer files. Basemap layer files (*.lyr) can be downloaded at www.arcgis.com. The
basemap layer file configures the kind of basemap that you will view in the SynerGEE Geography
view, such as a street map or a topographic map.
By default, SynerGEE looks for basemap layer files in the GeoLayers folder in your SynerGEE
installation directory. However, you can change this folder from the Paths tab of the Preferences
editor, as described in Defining file paths on page 167.
Double-click anywhere in the map display to open the Map Settings editor.
Use the options in the Geography tab to set up options for viewing models in the Geography view
window. Refer to the following table for more information on the options that you can edit.
User Guide
Specifies the map projection file that is in use with your model.
To change the map projection file, click Select and then navigate
to the map projection file that you want to use.
Default Layer
Select the default basemap layer for the Geography view. The
default layer will be activated if no other layers are active when
you start SynerGEE.
Active Layers
Select the check box for each layer that you want to make active
in the Geography view.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
241
Use the Map Settings editor to select a coordinate file and coordinate system and basemap layer for
use in the Geography view. For more information, see Setting up the Geography view on
page 239.
In the SynerGEE Map view window, right-click and select Geographic View. After a few moments
the Geography view window will open, displaying the model and the selected basemap layer.
User Guide
242
In the View group, click Synch to Map. The Geography view window will reposition itself to match
the current view in the Map view window.
In the Zoom group, click Synch to Geography. The Map view window will reposition itself to match
the current view in the Geography view window.
Double-click anywhere in the Geography view window to open the Map Settings editor.
Under Active Layer, select the check box for the basemap layer that you want to view. Clear the
check box for any basemap layers that you do not want to view.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
SHOW MANAGER
The Show Manager is a SynerGEE tool that you can use to highlight selected types of sections and devices
in the SynerGEE map display. The selected section and facility types will be marked with circle symbols in the
map display, and they will also be listed in the Show Manager. You can use the buttons in the Show Manager
to zoom to a selected section or device, and also to open the respective section or device editor.
The section and device types that you can highlight using the Show Manager include the following:
Generators, large customers, and section distributed generators that are configured for
photovoltaics
Any switches where the current state differs from the normal state
Throwover switches
Automatic switches
Refer to the following procedure for more information on using the Show Manager.
User Guide
243
On the left side of the Show Manager, select the check box for each section or device category that
you want to highlight in the SynerGEE map display. Any sections or devices that meet the criteria in
the selected check boxes will also be listed on the right side of the Show Manager.
Use the list area in the Show Manager to perform the following tasks.
To ...
Do This ...
In the list area, select the section or device that you want to edit
and then click Edit.
In the list area, select the section or device that you want to view
in the SynerGEE map display and then click Zoom.
User Guide
244
User Guide
CHAPTER
5
Building a Model
SynerGEE provides a user-friendly modeling interface designed to make modeling convenient and easy.
Using simple drag-and-drop functionality, SynerGEE allows you to quickly create models that accurately
depict your actual distribution system.
When you model new sections and equipment, SynerGEE assigns default values to certain parameters, such
as section phasing and equipment settings. Some of these default values are customizable and can be
edited directly from SynerGEE, which then saves the values in the Defaults file, named SynDefaults.xml. For
more information, see Editing Default Values for SynerGEE Devices on page 136.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on building a model.
User Guide
246
Building a Model
A feeder or subtran node is created in a model by converting a node, but it is important to note that the node
record is never eliminated, even though the feeder or subtran symbol replaces the node symbol. For
example, in the case of a feeder in Access, a record is created in the InstFeeders table, with the same ID as
the original node, while the node record is also preserved. The two records maintain an association, because
the node record contains important topological information, such as coordinates, that does not get copied to
the new feeder record. The association is based on IDs, so the node and feeder IDs must always remain the
same. As such, when you change the ID of a feeder or subtran, the ID of the original node is changed as well.
In the event that you convert a feeder back to a node, the feeder data is removed, and the node data
remains.
Because feeders are always associated with a node, they must adhere to node naming conventions, which
dictate that all node IDs must be unique.
It is important to keep in mind that although it is called a subtran in SynerGEE, a subtran record does not
contain data on the transformer itself. The actual transformer is handled as a separate device entity, if at all,
as shown in Figure 5-1. The subtran record only contains information such as voltage and source impedance,
much like a feeder record. This configuration allows SynerGEE to analyze high-side protection coordination.
In the SynerGEE map display, locate the node that you want to convert.
Right-click on the node and select either Convert to Feeder or Convert to Substation Node.
or
Perform the following steps to convert the node from the SynerGEE ribbon bar:
User Guide
Building a Model
247
c
Hover the mouse over the node that you want to convert. If the node is eligible to be
converted, the cursor symbol will change from a crosshair to a target symbol. Click the
mouse to complete the action.
In the SynerGEE map display, locate the node that you want to convert.
Hover the mouse over the node that you want to convert. If the node is eligible to be
converted, the cursor symbol will change from a crosshair to a target symbol. Click the
mouse to complete the action.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the feeder or subtran node that you
want to edit.
The Feeder editor and the Subtran editor are very similar and have almost identical options. On the
left side of the editor, select from the different tab names to edit data for the feeder or the subtran
node, respectively. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Editing failure rates and the location link for a feeder/subtran node
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
248
Building a Model
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the feeder or subtran node that you
want to edit.
In the Feeder editor, select the Feeder tab. Or, in the Subtran editor, select the Source tab. The
following table describes the different options that you can set.
Region
Substation
User Guide
Nominal KV
The rated high-side line-to-line voltage for the feeder or subtran at the
connecting bus.
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Connection
Connection type.
Continuous amp rating, for exception reporting only. This value does
not affect load-flow calculations. Exceptions are only reported if this
value is greater than zero.
Building a Model
249
Color
Display on Load
Growth Curve
Sets the growth curve for the feeder or subtran. Select a curve from
the options menu if you check the growth curve box. The curves are
used in Forecasting. See Forecasting Analysis on page 556 for
more information.
Load Multiplier
Hardened feeder
(Feeder editor only)
Select this check box to identify the feeder as a hardened feeder. This
check box is for reference purposes only. It is not used during any
SynerGEE analysis.
Select this check box to identify the feeder as a CVR feeder. When
this check box is selected, a special CVR voltage limit will be used to
monitor for high voltage exceptions for the meter. The CVR voltage
limit is set on the Exceptions tab of the Model and Analysis Options
editor.
Tie to transmission
bus (Subtran editor
only)
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
250
Building a Model
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the feeder or subtran node that you
want to edit.
In the Feeder editor or Subtran editor, select the Volts/Ohms tab. The following table describes the
different tasks that you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the feeder or subtran node that you
want to edit.
In the Feeder editor or Subtran editor, select the Node tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
User Guide
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Building a Model
Incident Sections
251
Lists the names of all sections that are connected to the feeder/
subtran. This list is for informational purposes only and cannot be
edited.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
TO EDIT FAILURE RATES AND THE LOCATION LINK FOR A FEEDER/SUBTRAN NODE
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the feeder or subtran node that you
want to edit.
In the Feeder editor or Subtran editor, select the Rates tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Sustained Failure
Rate
Temporary Failure
Rate
Location Link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
252
Building a Model
Refer to the following procedure for more information on viewing analysis results for a feeder or subtran.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the feeder/subtran node that you
want to edit.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Prior to SynerGEE Electric 3.6, demands were part of feeder and subtran records. Meter devices
have replaced this methodology, allowing you to place metered demand data anywhere in your
system. If you prefer to continue associating demands with feeders and/or subtrans, you can place
meter devices directly downstream from them. When you load a model from a version prior to 3.6,
SynerGEE performs this action automatically with any existing feeder/subtran data.
Subtran details
From a data perspective, a subtran instance is identical to a feeder source. It contains important source data
for fault and load-flow-based studies, including voltage and impedance. A subtran instance, despite the
name, does not contain any actual transformer data. If you wish to include the primary transformer
component in your model, you must add it as a separate device, usually just downstream from the subtran
node. If you do model a transformer, the nominal voltage and impedance in the subtran record should
represent the high-side. Otherwise, source data should represent the transformer low-side.
The primary reason for subtrans, therefore, is topological and categorical convenience. If you have
substations modeled during analysis, SynerGEE will use the subtran data for load-flow propagations and
largely bypass any feeder source data. At the culmination of analyses, the results are categorized and
summarized by feeder, but the model was analyzed as a substation network, not as independent feeders.
Also, modeling of substations and associated devices is necessary if you want to perform high-side
protection coordination with primary transformers.
In general, subtrans and substations may or may not be appropriate for your situation. They do add a
significant layer of complexity to the topology of your model and may make analysis results less intuitive. By
analyzing independent feeders with reliable source data, it may be easier to keep your results concise and
organized, facilitating better planning.
Prior to SynerGEE Electric 3.6, transformer data was merged with the subtran node, hence the legacy name
subtran. In these earlier models, therefore, transformer data was required. If you load a 3.5 or earlier model
into the current version of SynerGEE, SynerGEE automatically separates the transformer data into a
separate transformer instance and adds the device for you. After this conversion, you model should behave
User Guide
Building a Model
253
similarly to the earlier version. Note that the changes from version 3.5 to 3.6 were conducted primarily to
allow high-side protection coordination.
A substation can be added to SynerGEE using the Substation Wizard. Refer to the following procedure for
more information.
On the first page of the Substation Wizard, next to Sub Node ID, type a name for the new substation
node. Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the feeders for the new substation. Click Next to continue.
On the last page of the wizard, select the device types for the substation and then click Finish. The
new substation is added to SynerGEE.
MODELING LOADS
Loads are usually modeled using a combination of options in the Section editor and also the settings for the
Load Allocation analysis. Load modeling can be an involved process. For detailed information, see Loads
and Load Analyses on page 493.
Basic loop. A basic loop is generally a simple loop without any phase changes. Figure 5-2 shows an
example of a basic loop.
User Guide
254
Building a Model
Wandering lateral. A wandering lateral is generally a single- or two-phase branch that leaves a
three-phase trunk, serves some load, and then rejoins the trunk downstream to serve further load.
Figure 5-3 shows an example of two wandering laterals.
Meshed network. A meshed network model is a densely looped configuration that has little or no
radial qualities at all, such as those found in some urban feeders. Figure 5-4 shows an example of a
meshed network.
SynerGEE can model all three of these loops types. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Modeling loops
You must set up your SynerGEE preferences to allow you to model loops. Otherwise, SynerGEE will
recognize when you are creating a looped situation and prevent you from doing so. In addition, SynerGEE
will not let you close a switch that would form a loop.
After selecting the Allow Loop Creation option, it is up to your discretion to determine what types of loops you
need. In general, if you can maintain a radial model with isolated loops, it is preferable to use radial analyses
and avoid network analyses designed for densely meshed models.
Always keep in mind that certain analysis types, such as the contingency analysis, cannot operate on looped
systems. Prior to SynerGEE 3.6, this situation was overcome by the concept of loop tie switches, which is
described in Loop tie switches on page 255. However, loop tie switches are no longer the recommended
User Guide
Building a Model
255
approach to loop creation and you should make other provisions if you intend to run analyses that do not
support loops.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
Draw a section that would form the loop, but leave one end unconnected.
Add any switch from the warehouse to the section, open it, and designate it as a tie switch.
Connect the open end of the section, forming the loop, with the connectivity broken by the open tie
switch.
In this manner, you could maintain a radial model according to map topologically, while SynerGEE could
simulate loops by considering tie switches as closed during loop-supporting analyses.
While loop tie switches are still supported, you are encouraged to avoid them if possible. SynerGEE now
automatically recognizes looped situations and performs calculations properly. During an analysis, when a
loop or wandering lateral is detected without a tie switch, SynerGEE automatically creates an internal break
and performs identical calculations at that point. This functionality can help keep your model less cluttered.
For more information on analysis and internal breaks, see Analysis considerations for loops and wandering
laterals on page 256.
Tip:
SynerGEE has a special coloring scheme for identifying loops and internal break points. For more
information, see Coloring by path type on page 216.
For more information on designating a switch as a tie switch, see Editing a switch on page 402. For more
information on switches in general, see Modeling Devices on page 317.
Model the sections in your loop, as described in Modeling Sections on page 258. Leave one
section disconnected to break connectivity.
Drag any switch from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and place it on the disconnected
section, next to the disconnected node.
Double-click the switch to open the Switch editor, and then do the following:
a
User Guide
256
Building a Model
d
4
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Use the Reconnect Section tool, as described in Connecting and disconnecting sections on
page 260, to complete the loop.
Model the sections in your wandering lateral, as described in Modeling Sections on page 258.
Leave the last section disconnected from the trunk to break connectivity.
Drag any switch from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and place it on the disconnected
section, next to the disconnected node.
Double-click the switch to open the Switch editor, and then do the following:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Use the Reconnect Section tool, as described in Connecting and disconnecting sections on
page 260, to rejoin the lateral with the trunk to complete the loop.
SynerGEE has a special coloring scheme for identifying loops and internal break points. For more
information, see Coloring by path type on page 216.
If you have loops in your model, whether directly modeled or by using tie switches, they will be automatically
considered by any applicable analysis. That is, all tie switches are automatically considered closed if the
analysis supports loops. In SynerGEE 3.5 and earlier, you had to specify whether tie switches should be
considered closed or not. This option has been retired, and all switches are now automatically considered
closed as applicable during analysis.
User Guide
CHAPTER
6
Modeling Sections
SynerGEE has been designed to provide an outstanding line model without complicated data requirements. It
captures the effects of electric and magnetic field coupling by using the full set of Carsons equations, and its
methods incorporate the work of Carson, Wagner and Evans, and Kersting.
SynerGEEs by-phase impedance and admittance calculations and reduction techniques can handle coupling
between conductors, and between conductors and the earth. SynerGEE considers one-, two-, and threephase lines with and without a neutral return, and can handle bare overhead lines as well as cables.
Like most device models in SynerGEE, the spatial characteristics of a line model are defined in a section
instance contained in your model data (InstSection table, in Access). Each section record should also
reference one or more conductor types in your equipment data source, which define its electrical
characteristics (DevConductors table). In addition, if a section is configured to use detailed spacing, it also
references a configuration type in the equipment data source (DevConfig table, in Access).
Conductor data
(DevConductors
table, in Access)
Spacing data
(DefConfig table, in
Access)
Spatial data
(InstSection table, in
Access)
Section line
model
Figure 6-1 Data flow for building the electrical model of a section
This chapter of the documentation discusses the process of section modeling and contains detailed
information on impedance and admittance calculations. Information on SynerGEE Cable, the duct bank
modeling and amperage derating module, is contained in SynerGEE Cable on page 785.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
258
Modeling Sections
Figure 6-2 Section broken into areas where devices may be placed
This diagram demonstrates some important concepts related to devices and switches:
A section always lies between two nodes. Switches have no effect on the relationship between a
section and its nodes.
With respect to other devices, switches are always located closest to nodes.
MODELING SECTIONS
Sections are the basic building blocks of the distribution system model. A section represents an electrical
path between two end points (nodes), and can use vertices to form the geographic path of the line. Each
section is composed of an overhead or underground conductor segment and perhaps a group of devices
and/or loads. There are no limits to the length of a section, or to the number of sections in a system.
When a section is added, the section length is calculated based on the map views current unit of
measurement setting. If the new section connects to an existing section, the new section inherits a number of
attributes from the existing section, including the phase configuration, conductor type, phase spacing, load
User Guide
Modeling Sections
259
connection value, and equivalent height above ground. SynerGEE sets the neutral conductor to same as
phase rather than to the same conductor as the phase conductor.
Section IDs within a model must be unique. SynerGEE produces a default ID for new sections, based on
preferences that you can set in the SynerGEE tab of the Preferences editor. Your choices are to have
SynerGEE attempt to follow existing ID patterns, or to have SynerGEE generate random unique IDs. In either
case, SynerGEE first searches the model in memory to ensure that the default ID is unique. However, if you
are using an enterprise database system, you may not have the entire model in memory and this validation
process will be incomplete. Since unique IDs are critical, you should set your preferences to generate
random IDs if you are modeling sections on feeders that were checked out from an enterprise model. For
more information on setting the section ID preference, see Setting SynerGEE preferences on page 163. For
more information on enterprise databases, see Using an Enterprise Database System on page 114.
Once you have at least one section modeled, you can convert a node into a source and create a feeder or
subtran. For more information on converting a node to a source, see Converting a node into a feeder or a
substation node on page 246.
Refer to the sections listed below for more information on modeling with sections.
Adding a section
New sections are added to your model by entering the Add section mode and clicking on the node and
vertex positions that define the new section. Refer to the following procedure for more information on adding
a section to your model.
TO ADD A SECTION
1
If the Add Section button is disabled, zoom in to your model until the button becomes
enabled.
Click once in the map display to begin drawing the new section. You can start the section by clicking
in any empty space in the map, or by clicking on an existing node if you want to attach the new
section to an existing section in your model.
Move the mouse in the desired direction for the new section. As you move the mouse, you can do
any of the following:
User Guide
260
Modeling Sections
-
Hold the Ctrl key as you drag the mouse to force vertical or horizontal lines.
Press the arrow keys on the keyboard to pan to different areas of the map display, as
needed.
Press Esc to cancel the current section and return to the Add Section mode.
Click the right mouse button to end the new section. You can end the new section in any empty
space in the map, or you can end the section on top of an existing node in your model. SynerGEE
will prevent you from creating any type of section that is not allowed, such as a loop.
In the Enter section ID dialog box, click OK to accept the section name that has been created by
SynerGEE, or type a new name for the section and then click OK.
Press F5 to return to Default mode. You will probably want to edit the new section you have created.
For more information, see Editing Sections on page 279.
Moving a section
You can move a section by moving the nodes and vertices associated with the section. For more information
on moving nodes, see Moving a node on page 266. For more information on moving vertices, see Moving
a graphic point on page 278.
If the Reconnect Section button is disabled, zoom in to your model until the button
becomes enabled.
In the SynerGEE map display, click on the section that you want to disconnect or connect. A valid
section will turn red when you click on it.
Click on one of the nodes for the section and then drag it to a new location in the map display.
Release the mouse button to complete the move.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
5
261
Splitting a section
You can split an existing section into two separate sections by inserting a node in the middle. The original
section will be located on the source end, and existing devices located on the original section will remain with
the original section. SynerGEE will recalculate the line lengths of both the existing section and the newly
created section.
The new node will be named according to the preferences that you set up in the SynerGEE tab of the
Preferences editor, as described in Setting SynerGEE preferences on page 163.
If the Add Node button is disabled, zoom in to your model until the button becomes
enabled.
Move the cursor over any section in your model. The cursor will change to a cross symbol when you
are over a section. Use this change in cursor type to locate where in the section you want to insert
the node.
In the Enter section ID dialog box, click OK to accept the default name for the new section that is
being created by SynerGEE as a result or your node insert action, or type a new name for the new
section and then click OK.
User Guide
262
Modeling Sections
In the SynerGEE map display, locate the section that you want to work with.
In the Rephase and Reconductor Sections editor, select the Reconductor check box.
Under Downstream Sections, select from one of the following options to indicate which sections you
want to edit:
-
All
Under New Conductors, select a conductor from your warehouse to apply as the new Phase
conductor and also the new Neutral conductor. Clear the appropriate check box if you do not want
to apply a change to one of the conductor categories.
Click Finish to apply your changes to the model and close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display, locate the section that you want to work with.
In the Rephase and Reconductor Sections editor, select the Add Phase check box and then select
the phase you want to add (A, B, or C). Note that the phase that you select will be applied to the
current section and all downstream sections, as applicable.
Click Finish to apply your changes to the model and close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display, locate the section that you want to work with.
In the Rephase and Reconductor Sections editor, select the Rephase check box.
Under the Rephase check box, change the section phasing as appropriate for the A, B, and C
phases. Note that the phase that you select will be applied to the current section and all downstream
sections, as applicable.
Click Finish to apply your changes to the model and close the editor.
Changing a section ID
Perform the following procedure to change the ID for a section.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
263
TO CHANGE A SECTION ID
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the section whose ID you want to edit.
In the ID Changing Utility editor, type the new ID for the section.
Deleting a section
Perform one of the following procedures to delete a section from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the section that you want to delete.
In the SynerGEE map display, click on the section that you want to delete.
Force-unfed sections are regarded as unfed until the source problem is fixed. SynerGEE analyses do not
attempt any temporary fixes for the purposes of completing analysis, because such actions would encourage
unreliable results due to inaccurate models.
The model cleanup application has a special command for fixing force-unfed situations in a model, 4012. For
more information, see Model Cleanup Scripts on page 718.
User Guide
264
Modeling Sections
Node symbols, along with most other display symbols, are hidden when you select to hide details in
the SynerGEE map display. You can hide map display symbols by clicking the Details button in the
DISPLAY tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar. (The Details button is the same option as the Hide
Details check box in the Style tab of the Map Settings editor.)
Nodes can also be hidden as an individual symbol category. You can toggle the node symbols by
clicking the Nodes button in the DISPLAY tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, or by right-clicking in the
map display and selecting Toggle Nodes. You can also edit your map display symbol settings, as
described in Configuring map display symbols on page 213.
Take note that this option will be disabled, and thus nodes will be hidden, automatically each time
you start SynerGEE.
Nodes can be hidden based on your current zoom level. Zoom settings are often configured to hide
symbols when you are viewing your map display at a relatively high zoom level, thus reducing
clutter that may appear in the map display. Display symbols, including node symbols, will become
visible as you zoom in closer to the map display. For more information on this feature, see
Configuring visibility levels for map display symbols on page 214.
Take note that these options may sometimes override each other, particularly in the case of the Toggle
Nodes button. For example, if your map display is zoomed out to a level where node symbols are not
displayed, then clicking on the Toggle Nodes button will have no effect the nodes will be hidden regardless
of the status of the Toggle Nodes button. The same point is true when the map details are hidden (by clicking
User Guide
Modeling Sections
265
the Details button, as described above). If the Details button is disabled, then the nodes will remain hidden
even when the Nodes button is enabled.
Creating a node
In most cases, nodes are created automatically as you add sections to your SynerGEE model, as described
in Adding a section on page 259. If a section is created in isolation, then two nodes are created. If a line is
created between two existing nodes, then no nodes are created.
You can also create a node by inserting a node into an existing section in your model, essentially splitting the
existing section into two sections. This feature is described in Splitting a section on page 261.
Editing a node
Perform the following procedure to edit a node in your model. Before you can begin this procedure, you must
be sure that node symbols are visible in your SynerGEE map display. Node symbols could be hidden for a
number of different reasons, as described in Working with Nodes on page 264.
TO EDIT A NODE
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the node that you want to edit.
In the Node editor, select the Node tab. The following table describes the different options that you
can set.
Description
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Incident Sections
Lists the names of all sections that are connected to the node. This
list is for informational purposes only and cannot be edited.
Select the Results tab. The Results tab lists pertinent analysis results for the node. The Results tab
can be very helpful if you are running multiple analyses and focusing on a particular node. Since the
settings update automatically with each analysis, you can run an analysis and watch the results
change in real time.
For more information, see Viewing results in the SynerGEE editor on page 156.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Changing a node ID
Node IDs are created automatically by SynerGEE when each node is created, based in part on preferences
that you have set in the SynerGEE tab of the Preferences editor (as described in Setting SynerGEE
preferences on page 163). You can change the node ID by right-clicking on the node in the model explorer
or the SynerGEE map display. However, each node ID must be unique, and SynerGEE will prevent you from
creating duplicate ID names.
User Guide
266
Modeling Sections
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO CHANGE A NODE ID
1
In the model explorer or the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the node that you want to edit.
In the ID Changing Utility editor, type the new ID for the section.
Moving a node
Perform the following procedure to move a node in your model.
TO MOVE A NODE
1
If the Move Node button is disabled, zoom in to your model until the button becomes
enabled.
In the SynerGEE map display, click on the node that you want to move and then drag it to a new
location in the map. Repeat this step to move additional nodes, if desired.
Feeder. For more information, see Converting a node into a feeder or a substation node on
page 246.
Substation Node. For more information, see Converting a node into a feeder or a substation node
on page 246.
Pad Mount Gear. For more information, see Pad-mounted switch gear on page 408.
Deleting a node
SynerGEE does not allow you to delete nodes as an individual component of a SynerGEE model. In many
cases, the deletion of a node will result in the combination of two sections, which involves a serious
consideration of data issues. For example, loading levels and locations must be reconsidered, and any
associated equipment must be relocated and reconfigured.
To delete a node, you must delete an incident section and reconnect the remaining section, if required.
Before doing so, be sure that you configure the remaining section properly to prevent data loss.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
267
As an option for general optimization, SynerGEE provides a node reduction tool that can scan your model
and eliminate unnecessary nodes. The tool operates on a strict rule-base to prevent data loss such as that
mentioned above. For more information on this tool, see Reducing the number of nodes on page 267.
Data clutter
Slow analysis
Unwieldy reports
SynerGEEs node reduction tool can reduce the number of nodes, vertices, and laterals in a model. The node
reduction options are highly flexible, allowing you to decide how closely the reduced model will match the
original. For example, you can reduce nodes only and set very tight constraints, resulting in a model that is
geo-spatially identical to the original full model with power flow, voltage, and fault values that nearly match the
values in the original model. Or, you can loosen the constraints if warranted by data issues, although perhaps
resulting in a model that is slightly different than the original.
Node reduction provides the following major features. Each of these features is either optional or flexible
according to your node reduction options:
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on node reduction.
User Guide
268
Modeling Sections
Perform the following steps to open the Node Reduction Options editor:
a
In the Model Forge group, click the text label Node Reduction and then select Settings.
Use the Node Reduction Options editor to set the following options:
General Operation
User Guide
Select this check box to reduce the model to only the sections that
are along the paths from transfer switches back to the feeders.
Vertex Options
Modeling Sections
Lateral Roll-Up
Options
269
The Lateral Roll-up Options are enabled when you select the Rollup
Laterals check box. Select from one of the following:
This option is enabled when you select the Rollup Laterals check box.
Select this option to require that laterals have upstream fuses. When
selected, only paths downstream from a fuse can be rolled up with the
lateral rollup option.
Reporting
User Guide
270
Modeling Sections
Node Reduction
Settings
The following options are enabled when you select the Reduce
Nodes check box:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have selected the Rollup Laterals option in the Node Reduction Settings editor, as described
in Setting up a node reduction on page 267, then you will be prompted to reduce laterals before
you continue with the analysis. These changes will be permanent, regardless of whether you select
to make the rest of the node reduction permanent, and must be committed before you can perform
other node reduction tasks. Select Yes to commit the lateral reduction changes and continue with
the analysis, or click No to cancel the analysis.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
4
271
If you have selected the Ask Before Reducing Model option in the Node Reduction Settings editor,
as described in Setting up a node reduction on page 267, then you will be prompted to make the
node reduction changes permanent. Click Yes to commit the changes to the model, or click No to
simply report on the analysis findings.
When the node reduction is complete, the Model Reduction report displays, summarizing the node
reduction results. The report includes a section titled Rule Summary, which explains why nodes
were not reduced in the model. A more detailed description of each rule that is listed in the Rule
Summary is provided in Node reduction rules on page 273.
Removing nodes
When a node is removed, the two adjoining sections are combined. When this occurs, SynerGEE can do one
of two things, according to how your analysis options are set (as described in Setting up a node reduction
on page 267).
If your options are set to:
Then SynerGEE:
Reduce vertices
Eliminates the node completely and redraws the section between the
two nearest incident nodes and/or vertices. For more information, see
Eliminating a node completely on page 272.
User Guide
272
Modeling Sections
Section 2
Section 1
Assume that no other vertices are eliminated from the model during the reduction. If the node separating the
sections is eliminated, the combined section appears as follows:
Node
Vertex
Section 1
Section 2
Section 1
If the node separating the sections is replaced with a vertex, the combined section appears as follows:
Node
Vertex
Section 1
The result is one section with the same shape as the original two.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
273
Detailed operation
When reducing nodes, node reduction performs the following steps.
1
Run load-flow.
If node can be reduced, combine sections and loads, eliminate the node.
This algorithm is very simple and effective. The existing rule base is set up to be conservative in the
reduction, and reductions of 10% to 60% are normal. If you experience a reduction of more than 60%, you
may consider making your constraints more restrictive.
Description
Notes
NRR_01
Miscellaneous reduction
constraint.
NRR_02
NRR_03
NRR_04
Configuration change.
NRR_05
NRR_06
NRR_07
User Guide
274
Modeling Sections
Rule
Description
Notes
NRR_08
NRR_09
NRR_10
Topology error.
NRR_11
NRR_12
NRR_13
NRR_14
NRR_15
NRR_16
NRR_17
NRR_18
NRR_19
NRR_20
NRR_21
User Guide
Modeling Sections
275
Rule
Description
Notes
NRR_22
Prevents the deletion of nodes that are tied to an amprated section. For more information, see Editing
additional general settings for a section on page 283.
NRR_90
NRR_99
Unknown problem.
Figure 6-9 shows the model after node reduction eliminated 35% of the nodes. Assume that the analysis was
set not to reduce vertices.
User Guide
276
Modeling Sections
Notice that the shape or spatial topology of the feeder is identical between the full and reduced model. In fact,
if node display is turned off, the reduced model lays precisely over the full model, as they are
indistinguishable. Naturally, if vertices are also reduced, this may not be the case.
Removing vertices
SynerGEE removes vertices based on a length percentage specified in your analysis options. This
percentage represents the following ratio:
Eq 61
If the specified percentage is greater than this ratio for any given vertex, the vertex is removed. To determine
the numerator, Length of segment created by vertex, SynerGEE first performs a length trace from the vertex
towards the from-node end of the section. When it encounters the from-node or another vertex, the trace
stops and this length value is used in the calculations. In the following example, in a trace towards the fromnode, the length created by vertex A is 150 feet, and the length created by vertex B is 40 feet:
Total section length: 450 ft
Node
Vertex
A
D
20 ft
150 ft
40 ft
Therefore, if the total section length were 450 feet, you would need to specify a percentage of 34 or higher in
order for SynerGEE to eliminate vertex A. A percentage of 9 would be sufficient to eliminate vertex B, but
not A. Consider the following equation for vertex B:
Eq 62
After the from-node trace and removal of any qualifying vertices, the same process is repeated using a trace
towards the to-node. Note that any vertices removed during the from-node trace are no longer considered. As
an example, assume that vertices B and C were eliminated from the previous example during the fromnode trace. In this case, a percentage of 5 or higher would be sufficient to eliminate vertex D during the tonode trace:
User Guide
Modeling Sections
277
Node
Vertex
A
D
20 ft
150 ft
Figure 6-11 Section with vertices B and C eliminated during the first trace
Eq 63
Note that regardless of whether or not vertices are eliminated, total section length is never recalculated.
Load handling
When a section is eliminated in the process of reducing a node, the load, length, and other data for that
section is added to the combined section.
Figure 6-12 shows a group of sections with load values indicated:
20 kW
15 kW
10 kW
25 kW
If the three center nodes are eliminated, the combined section yields:
70 kW
Distributed loads are modeled in the center of the section. Therefore, reduction can cause minor changes to
the model due to the combination of load and shifting of location. Nonetheless, extensive testing has shown
that loading and losses are nearly identical between the full and reduced models. The minimum and
maximum voltages on the feeder are also nearly identical between the full and reduced models.
Ideal models with evenly distributed constant current loads tend to have higher loss values in the reduced
model. However, the voltage drop to the end of the last line is the same after the reduction. The issue
becomes more complex when I, Z, PQ load models are introduced and when detailed by-phase analysis is
User Guide
278
Modeling Sections
performed with coupling. If you use SynerGEE in this manner, you should do further research before using
node reduction.
Move the cursor over any section in your model, in the location where you want to add the graphic
point. (The cursor will change to a crosshair symbol when you are over a section.)
Click the left mouse button to create a graphic point. Or, click and hold the left mouse button to add
a graphic point and also move the point to a new location in the map, thus reshaping the section
line. Repeat this step to add additional graphic points, as needed.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
279
Move the cursor over any graphic point in your model. (The cursor will change to a crosshair symbol
when you are over a graphic point.)
Click and hold the left mouse button to select the graphic point, and then drag it to a new location
and release the mouse button. Repeat this step to move additional graphic points, as needed.
Move the cursor over the graphic point that you want to delete. (The cursor will change to a
crosshair symbol when you are over a graphic point.)
Click the left mouse button to delete the graphic point. Repeat this step to delete additional graphic
points, as needed.
ADDING SECTIONS
For information on adding sections, see Modeling Sections on page 258.
EDITING SECTIONS
Use the Section editor to edit an existing section in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A SECTION
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the section that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Section editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the section. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
-
User Guide
280
Modeling Sections
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Section tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
User Guide
Description
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Loc. Link
AMS Link
Phasing
Section phasing.
Conductor Length
Specifies the section length used for analyses. It does not have to
match the calculated length based on map coordinates, so it does not
have to be to scale with the map. You can also use the Multiple Editor
to assign calculated conductor lengths for queried sections.
If selected, results for the section will not appear on the map.
Broadcast
Select this check box to include the section in the list of Marked
Facilities in SynerGEEs Broadcaster window. For more information
on the Broadcaster window, see Using the Broadcaster on
page 451.
Monitor Harmonic
Modeling Sections
Critical
281
Select this check box to mark the section as a critical section that can
be analyzed during a contingency analysis. To perform a contingency
analysis on critical sections, do the following:
a
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Construction tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Construction Model
Conductor Types
Grounded
User Guide
282
Modeling Sections
Equivalent Spacing
and Height
Detailed Spacing
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Model group, click the Copy Construction button (Figure 6-14).
In the SynerGEE map display, click on the section that you want to copy construction data from. The
selected section will turn red.
Click on the section that you want to copy construction data to.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
283
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Properties tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Amp Rating for
Loading Calculations
% Growth Rate/Year
The section growth rate. For more information on growth rates, see
Load Growth on page 801.
Connection
User Guide
284
Modeling Sections
Load Category
Load categories are an optional SynerGEE setting that you can use
to group common sections for reporting and mapping (color-by)
purposes. Load categories have no effect on analysis and do not
have any other impact on your model.
The available categories are defined in your SynerGEE preferences.
For more information on load categories and how to create them, see
Managing load categories on page 170.
Link to facilities
attached to this
section
If any facilities are placed on the section you are editing, click on the
Go To buttons located in this area to open the appropriate facility
editor. Any facility types that are not present on the current section will
be disabled.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Load - Dist tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Description
User Guide
Specify an optional description for the distributed load. This field has
no effect on any SynerGEE analysis. You can use it to store any
pertinent data you may want to reference later.
Modeling Sections
Distributed Load/
Phase Values
285
SynerGEE provides several other methods that you can use to edit
load values. For example, you can:
Click the Load Graph button (Figure 6-16) to edit load values
using a graphical display. Click the Year button at the top of
the display to select a specific year to edit; select All to edit
load values for all years at once. Click anywhere outside of
the Load Graph editor to close the window.
User Guide
286
Modeling Sections
KW
kvar
Specify the distributed kvar load on the section. The kvar demand
does not include the sections capacitors or cable capacitance.
Conn kVA
Specify the total kVA capacity of the transformers on each phase for
the section, excluding spot load connected kVA. This information is
required for load allocation analysis if you are allocating loads based
on connected kVA. If you do not have by-phase load information,
apply the load equally among the phases.
Conn kWh
Customers
Specify the total number of customers per phase for the section. A
single three-phase customer is represented by 0.3 in each phase.
Customer information is required if you are allocating loads based on
the RUS method with load allocation analysis. If you do not have byphase customer totals, apply the customers equally among the
phases.
Capacity Factor
Select this check box to assign customer zone load curves to the
distributed load. Then, use the Customer Zone option list to select the
name of the customer zone that you want to apply.
Additional information on customer zones and load curves is provided
in Customer Load Curves/Time-of-Day Analysis on page 808.
Spot Constant
Percent Load
Use the %I, %Z, and %PQ text boxes to specify the percentage of the
distributed load that is constant current, constant impedance, and
constant power, as appropriate. Since loads are never truly 100%
constant power, you can use these check boxes to more accurately
define the characteristics of the load, thus leading to more accurate
analysis results.
Optionally, you can select the Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from
customer classes check box to use the I, Z, and PQ values that are
defined in a selected customer zone. If you select this check box, the
text boxes to edit the I, Z, and PQ values for the distributed load will
be disabled.
For more information on I, Z, PQ, see Load %I, %Z, %PQ on
page 496.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
3
287
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Load - Spot tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can edit.
Spot Load Status
Specifies the location of the spot load relative to the section. Available
choices are From Node, Center, and To Node.
Description
Specify an optional description for the spot load. This field has no
effect on any SynerGEE analysis. You can use it to store any
pertinent data you may want to reference later.
User Guide
288
Modeling Sections
Spot Load/Phase
Values
SynerGEE provides several other methods that you can use to edit
load values. For example, you can:
Click the Load Graph button (Figure 6-18) to edit load values
using a graphical display. Click the Year button at the top of
the display to select a specific year to edit; select All to edit
load values for all years at once. Click anywhere outside of
the Load Graph editor to close the window.
User Guide
Use the SynerGEE Bulk Editor to edit spot loads for all
sections at once. For more information, see Using the Bulk
Editor on page 192.
Modeling Sections
289
KW
Specify the total metered kW per phase for the spot load. If you do not
have by-phase load information, apply the load equally among the
phases.
kvar
Specify the total kvar per phase for the spot load.
Customers
Specify the total customer load per phase in the spot load.
Capacity Factor
Select this check box to assign customer zone load curves to the spot
load. Then, use the Customer Zone option list to select the name of
the customer zone that you want to apply.
Additional information on customer zones and load curves is provided
in Customer Load Curves/Time-of-Day Analysis on page 808.
Spot Constant
Percent Load
Use the %I, %Z, and %PQ text boxes to specify the percentage of the
spot load that is constant current, constant impedance, and constant
power, as appropriate. Since loads are never truly 100% constant
power, you can use these check boxes to more accurately define the
characteristics of the load, thus leading to more accurate analysis
results.
Optionally, you can select the Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from
customer classes check box to use the I, Z, and PQ values that are
defined in a selected customer zone. If you select this check box, the
text boxes to edit the I, Z, and PQ values for the spot load will be
disabled.
For more information on I, Z, PQ, see Load %I, %Z, %PQ on
page 496.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
290
Modeling Sections
You can use the Load - Proj tab in the Section editor to add, edit, and delete projects for individual sections.
You can also use the Project worksheet to add, edit, and delete projects for all sections in your model at one
time.
The following table describes the fields that you can edit for each project. These fields are available from both
the Load - Proj tab in the Section editor and the Project worksheet.
Field Name
Description
Name
Multiplier
Description
KW/kvar
Total project load value, for all phases. This value is always the total
load applied, whether to a single phase, or balanced between multiple
phases.
A, B, and C
Phases over which the total load is distributed. The total project load
is divided equally among all selected phases that are configured for
the respective section.
Code
Energize and retire years for multi-year analysis. Each project can
have individual settings. For more information, see Multi-Year
Analysis on page 579.
Refer to the sections listed below for information on setting up project loads for a section. More detailed
information on projects is provided in Projects (Load) on page 511.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
291
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Load - Proj tab. The following table describes the different tasks that
you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Add a project
Edit a project
Enable a project
Disable a project
Copy a project
Delete a project
Use the fields in the lower half of the Load - Proj tab
to edit the settings for the project. The individual
fields are described in Setting up projects for a
section on page 289.
Click Delete.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
292
Modeling Sections
Edit a project
Enable a project
User Guide
Do This ...
a
Click Add.
In the list of projects, select the project that you want to edit.
Modeling Sections
To ...
Disable a project
Copy a project
Delete a project
293
Do This ...
a
In the list of projects, select the project that you want to copy.
Click Delete.
In the list of projects, select the project that you want to work
with.
Right-click on the Project Worksheet tab and select Delete to close the worksheet.
User Guide
294
Modeling Sections
To move a project from one section to another, you would to use the Projects Manager to identify the project
that you want to move, and then move that project to the project buffer. Then, you would select the section
that you want to move the project to; this section appears in the upper-right corner of the Projects Manager.
When you click the Apply button, the selected project in the buffer area will be transferred from the original
section to the selected target section.
The Projects Manager includes several toolbar buttons that you can use to interact with your sections. For
example, you can zoom to a selected section, and also open the Section editor. Refer to the following
procedure for more information on working in the Projects Manager. For other methods of editing projects,
see Editing projects using the Section editor on page 290 and Editing projects using the Project worksheet
on page 292.
Edit a project
User Guide
Do This ...
a
Click Buffer. The project name will move from the All
Projects area of the Projects Manager to the Buffer area.
In the Buffer area, select the name of the project that you
want to move, and then click Apply. The project will be
removed from its original section and added to the section
that is listed in the Section area.
Click Edit. This will open the Section editor for the section
that is associated with the project.
Use the Load - Proj tab of the Section editor to edit the
settings for the project. For information on the fields you can
edit, see Setting up projects for a section on page 289.
Modeling Sections
To ...
Zoom to the location of
a project
295
Do This ...
a
Description
TranID
Description
A, B, and C
Demand kVA
Connected kVA
Connected Cust
Connected kWh
Impedance %Z
Impedance X/R
User Guide
296
Modeling Sections
Field Name
Description
Coordinates
Refer to the following procedures for information on setting up distribution transformers loads for a section.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Load - DTran tab. The following table describes the different tasks
that you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
User Guide
Click Delete.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Modeling Sections
297
Use the options in the DTrans worksheet to perform the following tasks.
To ...
Add a distribution transformer
Do This ...
a
Click Add.
Click Delete.
User Guide
298
Modeling Sections
To ...
Work with sections for a
distribution transformer
Do This ...
a
Right-click on the DTrans Worksheet tab and select Delete to close the worksheet.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Gen - Dist tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Generation Is On
Description
Type
User Guide
Modeling Sections
Location
299
From Node
Center
To Node.
User Guide
300
Modeling Sections
Select this check box and then use the A, B, and C columns to specify
the following rated output values for the distributed generator. The
values that you enter for each phase will be summed in the Totals
column. If you enter a value in the Totals column instead, that value
will be distributed proportionally among the three phases based on
the current values for each phase.
SynerGEE provides several other methods that you can use to edit
load values. For example, you can:
Click the Load Graph button (Figure 6-20) to edit load values
using a graphical display. Click the Year button at the top of
the display to select a specific year to edit; select All to edit
load values for all years at once. Click anywhere outside of
the Load Graph editor to close the window.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
Generator Output
Specify pf
301
Rated kW output.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Zones tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
Field
Description
Exposure Zone
User Guide
302
Modeling Sections
Field
Description
Mitigation Zone
Exposure Factors
Permanent failures
Repair times
Growth Curve
Cost Zone
Specifies the name of a cost zone that is associated with the section.
Cost zones provide valuable information relevant to the Economic
analysis module. The cost zone editor includes maintenance cost
information for feeders and substations as well as cost multipliers for
fuses, equipment, distribution transformers, and customers. These
values are combined with performance metrics such as load factor,
utilization, and efficiency to determine the cost per MW or MWHr.
For more information on cost zones, see Managing Cost Zones on
page 851.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
303
Field
Description
Weather Zone
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
In the Section editor, select the Coordinates tab. The following table describes the different tasks
that you can perform.
To ...
Add a graphic point
Do This ...
a
Click Delete.
User Guide
304
Modeling Sections
3
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
CONDUCTORS
SynerGEE provides a detailed conductor model. In SynerGEE, conductor type records are stored in your
equipment data source and treated much like equipment types.
The conductor table in the equipment data source (DevConductors, in Access) contains the required data for
standard conductors and cables. One record in the conductor file contains all the required data for one type
of conductor used in the system. These records are then referenced by section instances in the model.
Therefore, before you create a model, your equipment data source should be set up with the conductors that
you need. For more information on adding items to the equipment data source, see Creating a device type
on page 319.
The sample equipment database provided with your copy of SynerGEE contains a conductor table with many
of the commonly used conductors. Most values were taken from the Transmission and Distribution Reference
Book. You may use the information in the table or customize your own conductor models.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
305
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click OK.
Use the Conductor Type editor to edit the settings for the conductor type. For more information on
the options you can set, see Editing a conductor type on page 305.
Expand Conductor (Base) or Conductors (Cable) and then double-click the name of the
conductor type that you want to edit.
In the Conductor Type editor, select the Ratings tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Description
Conductor Model
Specifies the type of conductor. The option that you select here will
enable and disable other options in the Conductor editor.
The available conductor model types are described in Types of cable
conductors on page 787.
Use specified
impedance
Calculate impedance
User Guide
306
Modeling Sections
Damage Factor
Color
Impedance: Ohms/MI
or uS/MI
Continuous Amp
Rating
Emergency Amp
Rating
Emergency current rating. This value is used in balanced and byphase analysis and capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections
and to display regulator overload exceptions. The value can be set for
summer and winter, which is then used in weather modeling.
For more information on conductors and weather modeling, see
Setting up conductors to use seasonal ratings on page 832.
Select the Cable tab. This information applies to cables only and the options will be enabled only if
you have not selected a cable-type conductor in the Ratings tab. In addition, much of the data in this
tab only applies to ampacity studies, and will be enabled only if you have selected the Use in
ampacity studies check box.
Refer to the following table for more information on the different options that you can set. For
diagrams that display many of the parameters you can set in this tab, see Concentric neutral cable
model on page 787 and Tape shield conductor model on page 788.
User Guide
Use in ampacity
studies
Allows you to enable the conductor for ampacity studies. This option
must be selected to enable the other options in the tab, including the
conductor material, insulation type, and jacket material.
Cable Material
Conductor Material
Insulation Type
Jacket Material
Modeling Sections
307
Cable is three-core
type
Cable data
Use the options in the Cable data area to specify the following:
Conductor diameter.
Insulation diameter.
Outside diameter.
User Guide
308
Modeling Sections
Concentric Neutral
Types
The following options only apply when you have selected Concentric
Neutral as your conductor model.
Expand Conductors (Bare) or Conductors (Cable) and then select the name of the conductor that
you want to delete.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
3
309
Data
Description
Simple Z
Bare
Cond.
R1 + jX1
R1 + jX1
Diameter
(conductor)
Diameter
(insulation)
Diameter
(outside)
Diameter
(strand)
Core R
Core GMR
Strand R
Strand GMR
R0 + jX0
Sep.
Neut.
Con.
Neut.
Tape
Shield
jB0
jB1
User Guide
310
Modeling Sections
Equivalent spacing. SynerGEE uses a simple spacing model based on phase-to-phase and
phase-to-neutral distances specified below in the editor. All phases are assumed to have the same
conductor type, unless a detailed construction is setup in the base year.
Detailed spacing. Using configuration types, SynerGEE can perform complex analyses on detailed
conductor configurations. To use detailed spacing, you must have configurations defined in your
equipment data source. For more information on detailed spacing and configuration types, see
Conductor Configuration and Positions on page 310.
Duct Bank. Assigns a duct bank to the section and sets SynerGEE to use those conductor types for
impedance calculations. You should also specify a duct bank instance by entering text into the
Instance box, or remove an instance by deleting the text. SynerGEE sets the instance of the
sections duct bank using this text. Be sure to select a specific circuit from the bank and a
transposition value, at the bottom of the editor.
The first two rely on solely on settings within the section and conductor type records. The third requires one
or more configuration type records, which are stored in the DevConfig table (in Access) in your equipment
data source, and referenced in the Section editor. For more information on configuration types, see
Configuration types (detailed spacing) on page 311.
Simple impedance
To use the simple impedance method on a section, you should first specify a conductor type as a simple
impedance conductor and then apply that conductor to a section. The simple impedance setting is found in
the Conductor Type editor. For more information on editing a conductor, see Editing a conductor type on
page 305.
For a simple impedance conductor, SynerGEE uses specified impedance values and does not perform
impedance calculations. In the Conductor Type editor, you can set positive and zero sequence values in perlength units for a simple impedance conductor. Afterward, appropriate rows and columns of the three-bythree impedance and admittance matrices are eliminated, as applicable.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
311
If you are using a simple impedance conductor on a section, you should have the equivalent spacing option
selected in the Section editor. Detailed spacing and configuration methods are inherently part of a calculated
impedance, which makes them incompatible with a simple impedance conductor model. If you inadvertently
combine a simple impedance conductor with a detailed spacing method, SynerGEE will produce an error on
analysis reports and use the specified simple impedance. For more information on editing a section, see
Editing Sections on page 279.
Conductor/equivalent spacing
This method uses conductor information from the conductor table (DevConductors) and the equivalent
spacing values of an individual section to calculate the section impedance and admittance. You can specify
both the conductor type and the spacing by editing a sections characteristics. This method is most applicable
to overhead lines.
For more information on line impedance calculations, see the SynerGEE Technical Reference. For more
information on cable impedance calculations, see the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
User Guide
312
Modeling Sections
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click OK.
Use the Configuration Type editor to edit the settings for the configuration type. For more
information on the options you can set, see Editing a configuration type on page 312.
Expand Configurations and then double-click the name of the configuration type that you want to
edit.
Use the Configuration Type editor to enter X and Y cross-sectional coordinates for conductor
positions. The unit value of the coordinates is either feet or meters, based on the measurement
system specified in the Units tab of the Preferences editor. An illustration in the dialog shows you the
general positions of the conductors as you adjust the coordinates.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
7 ft
N
2 ft
2 ft
User Guide
Modeling Sections
313
To form a set of coordinates for this cross-section of conductors, you first need a reference point, or 0,0.
Since SynerGEE models self and mutual impedance and admittance values of lines, the horizontal reference
point can be arbitrary. However, the distance between conductors and the ground is important, so the vertical
reference point requires more consideration.
To maintain the proper conductor-to-ground distance for calculations, SynerGEE uses an additional heightto-reference setting in conjunction with configurations. Essentially, this height-to-reference value is added to
the vertical reference point that you choose, thereby establishing the proper heights for all the positions in the
configuration. Therefore, you can choose an arbitrary vertical reference point as well, provided that you set
the proper height-to-reference value so SynerGEE knows the exact distance between the conductors and the
ground.
Returning to the previous example, this configuration assumes that you chose your 0,0 reference point as
follows:
6 ft
9 ft
1
7 ft
2 ft
N
2 ft
0,0
This reference point is horizontally two feet below the neutral conductor, and vertically in line with position 1.
Using basic coordinates, the positions in the configuration are as follows.
Sample configuration
X (feet)
Y (feet)
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Neutral
You would type these coordinates into the Configuration Type editor (Figure 6-23) when defining the
configuration. For more information on using the editor, see Editing a configuration type on page 312.
User Guide
314
Modeling Sections
Usage of configurations
Applying a configuration to a section is as simple as selecting it in the Section editor, once you have defined
it in the configurations table. However, remember that for SynerGEE to use a configuration, it must also
know:
These two items are also specified in the Section editor, in the Construction tab.
Sample
Height-to-reference
20 feet
Phase positions
BAC
Applying these settings, the section would look like the following.
User Guide
Modeling Sections
315
N
27 ft
0,0
20 ft
As another example, assume you had another two-phase section (B and C only), and set it up as follows.
Section 2 data
Configuration
Sample
Height-to-reference
35 feet
Phase positions
BCA
N
42 ft
0,0
35 ft
Note that the last position is simply ignored, since it is mapped to phase A, which does not exist. With the
capability to change phase positions and height-to-reference values, a small set of configurations should be
sufficient for a variety of constructions.
User Guide
316
Modeling Sections
User Guide
CHAPTER
7
Modeling Devices
CREATING AND EDITING DEVICES
You can add devices to your SynerGEE model by dragging equipment types from the Warehouse tab of the
model explorer and dropping them onto sections in your model. Many equipment types include the initial
settings for the devices in your model, and the model devices also reference back to the equipment type.
Once a device has been placed, you can move, edit, copy, and delete it as needed.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Adding a device
Perform the following procedure to add a device to your model.
TO ADD A DEVICE
1
From the Warehouse tab in the SynerGEE model explorer, locate the device type that you want to
add to the model.
Drag the device from the model explorer and drop it onto the desired section, noting the following:
-
As you drag the device, the cursor symbol changes to indicate where you can or cannot
drop the device.
In some cases, if you drop the device on a section already containing that type of device,
the new device replaces the old one.
Your map display settings will determine what symbol is used once the device has been
placed in the model. For more information on equipment display settings, see Configuring
map display symbols on page 213.
User Guide
318
Modeling Devices
Editing a device
Devices can be edited using the device editor, as described in Using the SynerGEE Editor on page 151.
Multiple devices can be edited at one time by using the Multiple Editor, as described in Using the Multiple
Editor on page 177.
Moving a device
Perform the following procedure to move a device in your model. In some cases, you can move a device from
one location on a section to another. You can also move a device from one section to another, if such an
action is permitted by SynerGEE. For example, you cannot move a device from one section to another if a
device of that type already exists on the target section. You must first delete the device on the existing
section before you can move another device of the same type to that section.
TO MOVE A DEVICE
1
Move the cursor over any existing device to change the cursor to a cross symbol.
Click and drag the device to a new location, either on the other end of the current section or to
another section altogether.
Copying a device
Perform the following procedure to copy a device from one section and place it on another section. An exact
copy of the original device will be created on the new section, while the original device will not edited or
modified in any way.
On the map, move the cursor over any existing device. The cursor will change to a cross symbol
when it is over a valid device.
Click and hold the mouse button and then drag the mouse to another section. Release the mouse
button to add a copy of the device to the new section.
Click Yes to confirm the creation of a new device. An exact copy of the device is created on the new
section, while the original device is not edited or modified in any way.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
319
Deleting a device
Perform the following procedure to delete a device from the model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the device that you want to delete.
You can also delete a device in Move Device mode by dragging and dropping the device
somewhere in empty space.
User Guide
320
Modeling Devices
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type, and then click OK.
Use the device type editor to edit the settings for the device type. Press F1 from the editor to view
online help for the device type you are editing.
In the Warehouse tab of the model explorer, double-click on the device type name that you want to
edit.
Select the name of the device type that you want to copy.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device and click OK.
Select the name of the device type that you want to delete.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
321
BREAKERS
SynerGEE provides a sophisticated breaker/relay model which supports mechanical and multi-stage electromechanical relays. The breaker device itself is similar to any device type, which has a map symbol, ID, and
parent section. The device itself, however, can contain a virtually unlimited number of individual actuating
relays, all of which are fully integrated into SynerGEEs TCC and protection coordination tools.
Adding a breaker
Breakers are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a breaker type from
the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map
display. Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with
warehouse equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Breaker Types and then select the breaker type that you want to add to your model. Drag it
onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a breaker
Use the Breaker editor to edit an existing breaker in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A BREAKER
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the breaker that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Breaker editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the breaker. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
322
Modeling Devices
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the breaker that you want to edit.
In the Breaker editor, select the Breaker tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
User Guide
Name
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Disable Relay(s)
(phase or ground)
For the respective relay type, disables all relays, including all stages
of all groups. This setting is applicable to coordination studies only
and does not affect load-flow-based analysis.
Mech. Resp.
The time required for breaker contacts to open in a currentinterrupting capacity following a trip signal from one of its relays.
Check coordination analysis normally considers this factor,
depending on the type of coordination being considered and the
coordination direction. The TCC only considers this factor if your TCC
display options are set to display response curves, versus control
curves. For more information, see Changing TCC view display
properties on page 606.
Breaker rating
Interrupt rating
Value that fault analysis compares to the maximum fault level seen by
the breaker.
Status
Group
Modeling Devices
323
Bypass
Rates
Location Link
AMS Link
Year
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the breaker that you want to edit.
In the Breaker editor, select the Relays tab. The following table describes the different tasks that
you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Add a relay
Delete a relay
In the list of relays, select the relay that you want to delete.
User Guide
324
Modeling Devices
To ...
Do This ...
Select the relay that you want to work with and then edit any of the
following fields:
Assign a relay to a
group
User Guide
Under Relays Group, select the relay group to which the selected
relay belongs. This setting does not affect which group is currently
active within the breaker. Note that if the relay list above is filtered by
group, and you change a selected relays group, it will disappear from
the current list. Therefore, it is recommended that you remove all
filtering before changing this setting.
a
In the list of relays, select the relay that you want to work
with.
Modeling Devices
325
To ...
Do This ...
Select the check box next to the appropriate Stage number and then
edit the following fields as appropriate:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
326
Modeling Devices
you can also show and hide entire result categories, such as Fault results, Capacity results, and Reliability
results. In addition, you can select which power units are used to display the results. The Output Options
editor is described in more detail in Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab on page 445.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on viewing analysis results for a breaker.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the breaker that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a breaker
Perform the following procedure to delete a breaker from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the breaker that you want to delete.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
327
Relay groups
Within a breaker model, you can organize relays in groups, with up to six groups permitted. These groups
operate similarly to an actual relay group, which can be switched in and out as needed. In SynerGEE, a
single group is active at any given time, and the other three are completely removed from the operation of the
breaker.
The use of groups is optional. If you have no need for multiple groups, you can define all your relays within
the first group and keep that group active at all times.
Phase
Ground
For example, a non-reclosing phase relay (or set of relays) would generate a curve independently of a
reclosing phase relay. Likewise, when you plot a breaker on the TCC, you only see curves applicable to the
configured relays, not necessarily six curves every time. For example, if you have no emergency relays
configured, no emergency curves appear on the TCC.
In the case of multiple relays and/or stages, a TCC relay curve actually represents the composite of all
applicable curve data, with non-applicable sections automatically hidden. In essence, each point on the
plotted curve represents the lowest point at which one relay stage will operate. If any stage would operate
above that point, the curve data is not shown, because it is largely non-applicable. Therefore, a relay curve
on the TCC represents the overall behavior of the device as seen by the load current, but for any given point,
you may not know the precise stage that would operate.
Because of this flexibility, TCC work with breakers may require more consideration than other protective
devices. If you have multiple relays configured, your breaker curves could potentially be a complex mix of
different device behaviors, perhaps from different manufacturers. Always pay close attention to the active
relay group and the different relays and stages you may have modeled, and keep in mind that your curves
may represent the composite behavior of many different devices.
User Guide
328
Modeling Devices
Enabling and configuration of stages based on existing data, including consideration of inverse time
and optional instantaneous settings.
After the breaker is converted, you may add and edit relays like any other newer breaker.
CAPACITORS
Capacitors are widely used in distribution systems for voltage regulation and power factor correction.
Capacitor banks are usually placed near a load to provide reactive power locally so the current for the
reactive load does not have to be sent through the distribution system. The reduced amount of reactive
power flowing on the distribution lines between the source and capacitor bank allows a lower current flow and
improves the power factor. Line losses are smaller and thus the voltage becomes higher at the load.
Capacitor compensation is useful for fixed loads. Switched capacitors can be used to meet the demand of
time-varying loads. The switching of banks may cause considerable system transients. The level and
duration of these transients depends on the time constant associated with the line and capacitor. It should
also be noted that an operating capacitor bank makes a power system more sensitive to transients since a
large di/dt through the capacitor causes a large voltage spike.
SynerGEE supports section capacitor installations that consist of fixed units and up to three switched
modules. The installations can be connected in Wye, Delta, or Wye-Gnd configurations. The capacitors are
modeled as fixed impedance devices in the middle of sections. They are specified by their nominal kvar value
per phase. You can turn capacitors on or off using various operations in SynerGEE. You can place switched
units into manual or automatic modes.
Unlike most other equipment models in SynerGEE, specifications for capacitor installations are made entirely
within the Capacitor editor and stored in the model data. No equipment types exist in the equipment data
source for capacitors.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with capacitors in SynerGEE.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
329
Capacitor installations can be connected in Wye, Delta, or Wye-Gnd configurations. The diagram above
shows a Wye-Gnd configuration.
A module refers to a by-phase bank of capacitor units. The kvar values for the fixed module are specified per
phase. For the switched modules, you can specify an overall kvar value for a set of selected phases. You can
also activate or deactivate the individual switched modules as needed. Therefore, to model a fixed capacitor
only, you can simply leave the three switched modules deactivated, essentially making them non-existent.
The three switched modules are composed of identically rated capacitors, connected to each phase you
specify. Switches connect and disconnect the switched modules from the line section (close and trip,
respectively). You can control the switching yourself if the installation is in manual mode. Or you can choose
automatic mode, in which SynerGEE controls the switching based on the results of balanced or by-phase
analysis, or time of day. For analysis results, automatic mode can consider a variety of different criteria, such
as current, voltage, and kvar limits.
In summary:
The fixed kvar module is always connected to all of the phases of a section. If you want a particular
phase to have no fixed kvar applied, specify zero (0) for that phase.
When a switched module is closed, all applicable phases are connected. These phases are set in
the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. The applicable phases set in the Settings tab apply to all
active switched modules.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information. For more information on configuring the switched and
fixed modules, see Editing a capacitor on page 335.
User Guide
330
Modeling Devices
Fixed capacitor
Switched unit
a
b
c
n
A
B
C
N
KA
K1
K1
KB
KC
K1
Notice that three distinct kvar values can be specified for the fixed portion of the installation. On the other
hand, each of the switched modules is made up of identical capacitor units. Open connections can be
achieved by specifying zero values for the fixed module or by deselecting switched phases for the switched
modules.
Switched and fixed units are defined in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor. For more information, see
Editing general data for a capacitor on page 336.
Point A
Point B
Load end
Spot load
Spot load
Capacitor
Spot
load
Dist.
load
Note that this figure shows three spot loads, for demonstration purposes only. SynerGEE allows only one
spot load per section, at the source end, load end, or center of a section.
The capacitor kvar injection occurs at the same location as the distributed load and a spot load placed at the
center of the section. Capacitor metering is always at the center of the section. However, for flows metered
with the CT, metering is either right before or right after the capacitor and load terminals.
Type of control
Metering location
Kvar
Amp
Pf
Voltage
Time
User Guide
Modeling Devices
331
Capacitor kV rating
You can specify the rated kV of a capacitor in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor. If this value is not
zero, then before an analysis, SynerGEE will compare it to the section nominal voltage according to the
voltage mismatch tolerance, which is set in the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor, as
described in Setting up general analysis options on page 441. If the voltage mismatch tolerance is violated,
the analysis will not proceed.
If the specified value is zero, SynerGEE uses the section nominal voltage as the rated kV instead. As such, if
you are applying a capacitor that is rated at a voltage other than the section voltage, you can either:
Specify the appropriate kV in the Capacitor editor to override the use of the section voltage
or
Allow SynerGEE to still use the section voltage, if you derate the kvar value of the capacitor as
follows:
kvarSynerGEE
kVRated
= kvarRated
kVCap Rated
Eq 71
For more information on setting the rated kV for a capacitor, see Editing general data for a capacitor on
page 336.
Metering phase
A, C
Primary control
Voltage, Automatic
Module 1 (on)
PT Ratio
208.0
As such, the following values represent the capacitor kvar layout for the section, between 118 and 125 volts:
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
150 kvar
User Guide
332
Modeling Devices
Phase B does not get the 75 kvar of switched capacitance because the B is not checked in the Active Switch
Phase area. The Active Switch Phase check boxes affect all switched modules in the same way. The value of
fixed kvar is always applied regardless of the Active Switch Phase settings. A value of zero can be specified
into the fixed kvar field for those phases not having fixed capacitors.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
The Control option is set to Var or Current, and the metered value of kvar or current exceeds the
close setting.
The Control option is set to Voltage or Power Factor, and the metered value of voltage or power
factor is less than the close setting.
The Control option is set to Temperature, and the temperature in SynerGEE rises above the close
setting in the Capacitor editor. The temperature values must be set in the Weather tab of the Time
and Weather Options editor. For more information, see Defining Weather Conditions on page 824.
A module is turned off (trip setting is satisfied) by balanced or by-phase analysis if the following criteria have
been met:
The Control option is set to Var or Current, and the metered value of kvar or current is less than the
trip setting.
The Control option is set to Voltage or Power Factor, and the metered value of voltage or power
factor exceeds trip setting.
The Control option is set to Temperature and the temperature in SynerGEE falls below the trip
setting in the Capacitor editor. The temperature values must be set in the Weather tab of the Time
and Weather Options editor. For more information, see Defining Weather Conditions on page 824.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
333
The following table summarizes the rules and operation ranges for a switched unit.
Switched capacitor operation rules
(g = metered value; ts = trip setting; cs = close setting)
Control
Metering
Verify
Close
No operation
Trip
kvar
g = kvar
cs > ts
g > cs
cs > g > ts
g < ts
amp
g = amps
cs > ts
g > cs
cs > g > ts
g < ts
voltage
g = volts
cs < ts
g < cs
cs < g < ts
g > ts
power factor
g = pf
cs < ts
g < cs
cs < g < ts
g > ts
Time
g = time
cs > ts
g > cs
cs > g
g > ts
Voltage control
Current control
PF or kvar control
Delta or Wye
A, B, or C
Wye-Gnd
A, B, or C
A, B, or C
A, B, or C
The metering phase is specified in the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. For more information on editing a
capacitor, see Setting up switch controls, location links, and energize and retire years for a capacitor on
page 339.
VCont =
( RLDC + jX LDC )
PT
CT
Eq 72
where:
PT
CT
R, XLDC
=
=
=
PT Ratio
CT Rating
User-specified LDC drop values
User Guide
334
Modeling Devices
kVLine
Line voltage
ILine
Line current
VCont
Controller voltage
LDC information is specified in the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. For more information, see Setting up
switch controls, location links, and energize and retire years for a capacitor on page 339.
VTerm
VSet + 1 BW
2
PTRatio
Eq 73
If the installation is outside of its bandwidth, modules are tripped, one at a time, in the order of module 3 to
module 1.
Note that the voltage override switches modules on or off. If an installations voltage is below bandwidth,
modules are switched on by the voltage override mechanism (if the installation is in automatic mode). It
should also be noted that the line-drop compensations R and X are not contained in the voltage override
mechanism.
Voltage override information is specified in the Settings tab of the Capacitor editor. For more information on
editing a capacitor, see Setting up switch controls, location links, and energize and retire years for a
capacitor on page 339.
These options are set in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor. For more information, see Editing general
data for a capacitor on page 336.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
335
Adding a capacitor
Capacitors are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a capacitor type
from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map
display. The Warehouse tab contains a list of capacitor types, according to kvar. However, unlike other
device types, capacitor equipment types are not actually stored in your equipment data source, since
capacitors are represented entirely by model (instance) data. The equipment types in the Warehouse tab
simply represent shortcuts to add a capacitor when you drag the device from the warehouse. For example, if
you drag a 150 kvar capacitor from your Warehouse tab and drop it onto a section in the model, the resulting
capacitor is specified for 150 kvar, divided among applicable phases.
Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with warehouse
equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Capacitor Types and then select the capacitor type that you want to add to your model.
Drag it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a capacitor
Use the Capacitor editor to edit an existing capacitor in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A CAPACITOR
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the capacitor that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Capacitor editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the capacitor. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Setting up switch controls, location links, and energize and retire years for a capacitor on
page 339
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
336
Modeling Devices
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the capacitor that you want to edit.
In the Capacitor editor, select the Capacitor tab. The settings in the Capacitor tab allow you to
define general settings for the capacitor, and also to set up values for the fixed capacitor and up to
three switched capacitor modules. Use the options described in the following table to set up the
general settings for the capacitor. (Options for setting up fixed capacitors and switched capacitors
are described later in this procedure.)
To ...
Do This ...
Next to Rated kV, specify the Capacitors rated kV value. If this value
is 0, SynerGEE uses the section nominal voltage as the rated kV. If
this value is not zero, then before an analysis, SynerGEE will
compare the capacitor rated kV to the section nominal voltage
according to the voltage mismatch tolerance, which is set in the
Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor (as described in
Setting up general analysis options on page 441). If the voltage
mismatch tolerance is violated, the analysis will not proceed.
For more information on capacitor rated kV, see Capacitor kV rating
on page 331.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
3
337
Use the options described in the following table to set up the fixed capacitor.
To ...
Do This ...
Use the A, B, and C columns in the Fixed kvar area to specify the
following. The values that you enter for each phase will be summed in
the Totals column. If you enter a value in the Totals column instead,
that value will be distributed proportionally among the three phases
based on the current values for each phase.
The capacitance of these fields will be supplied to a section
regardless of the state of the switched modules. Valid values are
between 0 and 10,000. The Operation option (Automatic or Manual)
does not affect the Fixed kvar values.
You can also use the SynerGEE Bulk Editor to edit the fixed kvar
values for all capacitors at once. For more information, see Using the
Bulk Editor on page 192.
You can disable the fixed capacitor installation by entering 0.0 in the
Fixed kvar text boxes. This allows you to use the three switched
capacitor modules, if desired, while not using the fixed capacitor.
Use the options described in the following table to configure up to the three switched capacitors.
The options are described here in the order that you would generally configure them. They are not
described in the order they are presented in the Capacitor editor.
Mod
In the Settings area, next to Mod, select the check box for each
switched capacitor that you want to configure. You must select at
least one Mod check box to enable the rest of the settings that are
described in this table, as well as most of the settings in the Settings
tab of the Capacitor editor (as described in Setting up switch
controls, location links, and energize and retire years for a capacitor
on page 339). If none of the Mod check boxes are selected, then
switched capacitors will not be used for this capacitor installation.
You can also use the SynerGEE Bulk Editor to edit the Mod values for
all capacitors at once. For more information, see Using the Bulk
Editor on page 192.
On
Select the On check box for each capacitor that you want to turn on
for the analysis. You can still edit settings for switched capacitor
modules that are not turned on, but they will not be considered during
any analysis. If none of the On check boxes are selected, then
switched capacitors will not be used for this capacitor installation.
User Guide
338
Modeling Devices
Operation
Control
Use the Control option to indicate the type of metering used in the
capacitor installation. The same type of metering is used for all
switched modules for the capacitor. The capacitors Operation type
must be set to Automatic for the Control option to be enabled.
The following control options are available.
Current (Amps)
kvar
Sub kvar
Sub pf (%)
Temperature (C)
Time of Day
Voltage (120V)
Off on Weekends
If you have selected Time of day as the Control option, select the
Off on Weekends check box to turn off the switched capacitors over
the weekends. Clear the check box to allow the switched capacitors
to operate during the weekends as well as during weekdays.
Seq
kvar/ph
For each switched capacitor, use the kvar/ph text box to specify the
nominal kvar rating per phase. Each phase selected in the Active
Switch Phase area (which is located in the Settings tab of the
Capacitor editor) is connected to the kvar specified in this field.
For more information on the Active Switch Phase option, see Setting
up switch controls, location links, and energize and retire years for a
capacitor on page 339.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
Close
339
For each switched capacitor, use the Close text box to specify a
value that determines when the module automatically closes, or
switches on. This value must be a six-digit decimal number. With the
exception of Time of Day control, the units that you will use amps,
volts (120V base), kvar, or percent power factor are based on the
option that you selected as the Control type, as described previously
in this table. This Close value will be compared against a metered
value to determine if the respective switched capacitor module is to
be switched on.
If the capacitor switching is based on time (Time of Day control), this
field refers to the time when the capacitor closes and enters the
system. Enter the time in 24-hour decimal format (for example, 1:00
p.m. = 13.000).
The capacitors Operation type must be set to Automatic for this text
box to be enabled.
Trip
For each switched capacitor, use the Trip text box to specify a value
that determines when the module automatically trips, or switches off.
This value must be a six-digit decimal number. With the exception of
Time of Day control, the units that you will use amps, volts (120V
base), kvar, or percent power factor are based on the option that
you selected as the Control type, as described previously in this table.
This Trip value will be compared against a metered value to
determine if the respective switched capacitor module is to be
switched off.
If the capacitor switching is based on time (Time of Day control), this
field refers to the time when the capacitor trips and isolates from the
system. Enter the time in 24-hour decimal format (for example, 1:00
p.m. = 13.000).
The capacitors Operation type must be set to Automatic for this text
box to be enabled.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Setting up switch controls, location links, and energize and retire years
for a capacitor
The Settings tab in the Capacitor editor allows you to establish further settings for switched capacitors. The
switched capacitor options may or may not be enabled, based on how you have configured the switched
capacitor modules in the Capacitor tab of the Capacitor editor, as described in Editing general data for a
capacitor on page 336. Additional information on controlling switched modules is provided in Controlling
Switched Capacitor Modules on page 331.
The Settings tab can also be used to add a note for the capacitor, define a location link, and set the energize/
retire years. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
User Guide
340
Modeling Devices
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the capacitor that you want to edit.
In the Capacitor editor, select the Settings tab. The following table describes the basic options that
you can set from this tab.
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Location Link
AMS Link
Use the options described in the following table to configure settings for the switched capacitor
modules.
Metering Phase
Use this option to select the phase used for primary control of the
switched capacitor modules. The Metering Phase option is enabled
when the capacitors Operation type is set to Automatic.
Use the three Active Switch Phase check boxes (A, B, and C) to
select the phase connection of switched modules. Fixed units are not
affected by these settings.
LDC
For more information on line-drop compensators, see Capacitor linedrop compensator on page 333.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
Voltage Override
341
Select the Voltage Override check box to specify that voltage override
should be used. This option allows modules to be switched on or off if
the capacitor installation terminal voltage is too high or low.
After selecting the Voltage Override check box, specify the following
values:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the capacitor that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
User Guide
342
Modeling Devices
Deleting a capacitor
Perform the following procedure to delete a capacitor from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the capacitor that you want to delete.
Placement Analysis
SynerGEEs Capacitor Placement application is a comprehensive tool that helps you find locations for new
capacitor installations. The application can operate under a variety of placement objectives and provide
results on a feeder-by-feeder basis in a clear and concise manner.
For information on capacitor placement, see Capacitor Placement Analysis on page 562.
FUSES
SynerGEE supports a wide range of fuse types. Fuses are specified by manufacturer, model, and amp rating.
Current limiting fuses also require a voltage rating value. This information allows SynerGEE to find the
minimum-melt and the maximum-clear curves from the protection database. These curves are used for TCC
graphs and for coordination checking.
Adding a fuse
Fuses are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a fuse type from the
Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map display.
Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with warehouse
equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
343
Expand Fuse Types and then select the fuse type that you want to add to your model. Drag it onto
the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a fuse
Use the Fuse editor to edit an existing fuse in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A FUSE
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the fuse that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Fuse editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the fuse. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a fuse on
page 345
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the fuse that you want to edit.
In the Fuse editor, select the Fuse tab. The following table describes the different options that you
can set.
Name
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Manufacturer and
Model
Fuse ratings.
User Guide
344
Modeling Devices
Phasing
Fuse phasing.
Status
Add to TCC
Adds the fuse to the TCC. For more information on the TCC, see
Time Versus Current Coordination (TCC) Graph on page 604.
TCC color
Color of the fuse curve if plotted on the TCC. For more information on
the TCC, see Time Versus Current Coordination (TCC) Graph on
page 604.
Protecting
Click to open the editor for the protecting device for the fuse.
Cutoff amps.
When the Fuse saving scheme check box is selected and your
reliability analysis options have been configured to use individual fuse
settings for fuse/recloser coordination, then an event downstream
from the fuse will result in the operation of the nearest upstream
recloser. If a recloser or reclosing breaker or feeder does not exist
upstream, then the fuse will blow.
When the Fuse saving scheme check box is cleared, then the fuse
will always blow for an event directly downstream despite any
upstream reclosing capabilities.
The Fuse saving scheme check box will be ignored when your
reliability analysis options have been configured to use either Global
fuse saving or Global fuse blowing. For more information on the
reliability analysis settings and the Fuse/Recloser Coordination
option, see Setting up additional reliability analysis options on
page 665.
User Guide
Bypass
Select this check box to ignore the operational capability of the fuse
during check coordination analysis, reliability analysis, and other
applications.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Modeling Devices
345
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire
years for a fuse
The Rates tab in the Fuse editor specifies failure rate data for the fuse. You can specify a sustained failure
rate and temporary failure rate, as well as the failure repair time and cost. The Rates tab also contains
options to set a location link and an AMS link, and also to set the energize and retire years.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO SET FAILURE RATES, LOCATION LINKS, AND THE ENERGIZE AND RETIRE YEARS FOR A FUSE
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the fuse that you want to edit.
In the Fuse editor, select the Rates tab. The following table describes the different tasks that you
can perform.
To...
Do This...
Crew Oper./Reset
Generally, the numbers that you enter will represent averages and
estimates, because it is unlikely that you will have exact figures for
each individual device.
Next to Location Link, type the correct syntax to link the device to an
external source, such as a file, website, or location in an Internet
mapping software application. SynerGEEs location link feature, as
well as the syntax required to set up location links, is described in
Location Links on page 223.
Set up an Asset
Management System
(AMS) link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
346
Modeling Devices
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the fuse that you want to work with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a fuse
Perform the following procedure to delete a fuse from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the fuse that you want to delete.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
347
The multiplier factor is multiplied against the normal time factor of a fuse curve. For example, a factor of 0.9
would reduce the time axis to 90% of the original on the graph. Likewise, 0.25 would indicate that at any
given amperage, the fuse would blow at only 25% of the normal time requirement.
GENERATORS
SynerGEE supports detailed by-phase models of generators. The following model types are available:
Synchronous. Series winding impedances and a back EMF are used to represent the machines
behavior. The machine responds to the voltage and output power settings in percent. For more
information on synchronous machines, see the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Induction. The machine is modeled with passive components. A variable resistance represents the
electro-mechanical coupling through the notion of slip. The output power in kW can be specified. For
more information on induction machines, see the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Photovoltaic (Inverter) PQ. The Inverter PQ model behaves just like a negative constant power load
and does not generate fault current contributions. For more information on PQ models, see the
SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Constant PQ. The Constant PQ model behaves just like a negative constant power load and does
not generate fault current contributions. For more information on PQ models, see the SynerGEE
Technical Reference.
The synchronous and induction models are referred to as active models because they respond to the byphase conditions of the distribution system as seen through their terminals. Depending on the distribution
system and other active devices, they may or may not be able to achieve the output values you specified.
Because the generator models were designed with real machines in mind, attention should be paid to the
operated or planned machine in cases when the SynerGEE model does not meet your kW or voltage
settings.
User Guide
348
Modeling Devices
PQ models do not actively respond to distribution system conditions. Their output power value will be the
user-specified value following a successful load-flow run.
Generators are always placed at the center of a section. Their terminals are driven from the voltage at the
center of the line and they inject current into the center of the line. For more information on the SynerGEE
section model, see The SynerGEE Section Model on page 258.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with generators in SynerGEE.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
349
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click OK.
Use the Generator Type editor to edit the settings for the generator type. For more information on
the options you can set, see Editing a generator type on page 349.
Expand Generator Types and then double-click the name of the generator type that you want to
edit.
In the Generator Type editor, select the Ratings tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Description
Type
Conventional Synchronous
Conventional Induction
Wind Induction
Photovoltaic (Inverter) PQ
Constant PQ
Battery
Specify the rated kW, kV, and %pf nameplate values for the generator
type. The rated pf is the power factor output of the machine at rated
kW and kV. Generators require a power factor range between 20%
and 100%.
Construction
User Guide
350
Modeling Devices
Generator Instances
Large Customers
For example, if you select the check boxes for Generator Instances
and Large Customers, the generator type can be selected for use
with generators (as specified on the Generator tab of the Generator
editor) and large customers (as specified on the Generation tab of the
Large Customer editor). It could not, however, be selected for use
with a section (as specified on the Gen - Dist tab of the Section
editor).
Impedance
Specify the winding impedances that are used in unbalanced loadflow calculations specified in percent, based on the machines rating.
Xd" and X" are the subtransient reactances of synchronous and
induction machines respectively. These are the impedances seen
looking into the machine at the instance of a fault.
Exciter
Select the Wind/PV tab. Use the Wind/PV tab to add additional wind performance values and PV
performance values. These options become enabled when you select the Wind Induction or
Photovoltaic (Inverter) PQ generator types, respectively, on the Ratings tab of the Generator Type
editor.
Wind Performance
User Guide
The Wind Performance fields are enabled when you select Wind
Induction as the Generator Type. The following values may be
entered:
Modeling Devices
PV Performance
Induction Generators
351
Battery
Fault factor.
The Battery fields are enabled when you select Battery as the
Generator Type. The following values may be entered:
Select the Synch kvar tab. The Synch kvar tab includes two graphs that allow you to set the
minimum and maximum kvar output from the generator. This defines the amount of power that a
generator can deliver. You can set values in the range of 0 to 60% for the maximum kvar output, and
0 to -60% for the minimum. To set a value, simply click in the chart area for the value you want to
set. The precise values will appear as pop-up text as you hover your mouse over the graphs.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Generator Types and then select the name of the generator type that you want to delete.
User Guide
352
Modeling Devices
Adding a generator
Generators are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a generator type
from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map
display. Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with
warehouse equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Generator Types and then select the generator type that you want to add to your model.
Drag it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a generator
Use the Generator editor to edit an existing generator in your model. Refer to the following procedure for
more information.
TO EDIT A GENERATOR
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the generator that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Generator editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the generator. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Editing machine data and energize/retire years for a generator on page 355
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the generator that you want to edit.
In the Generator editor, select the Generator tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Name
User Guide
Modeling Devices
Turn On
353
Type
Synchronous
Generator Settings
User Guide
354
Modeling Devices
Generator Output
User Guide
Negative PQ Load
For the PQ (constant power) load model only, this is the percent
power factor that will be implemented when the user selects to use
the PQ load model. The power factor can be set to -60 to -99 or 60 to
100. The default value is 100.
Use PQ Model
Select this check box to assign the PQ (constant power) load model
to the generator.
Specify pf
Single Ph Connect
Select the phase to use for connection (metering). This option is only
available when the generator type is single-phase construction, as
specified on the Ratings tab of the Generator Type editor.
Grounding Ohms
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Modeling Devices
355
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the generator that you want to edit.
In the Generator editor, select the Machine tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Loc. Link
AMS Link
Energize/Retire years
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the generator that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
User Guide
356
Modeling Devices
Deleting a generator
Perform the following procedure to delete a generator from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the generator that you want to delete.
Multiple generators
SynerGEE is a steady-state simulation tool. Because of this, there are no limits to the number of active
generators that can be modeled, with the exception that only one generator can be placed on a section. Keep
in mind that SynerGEE does not support frequency controls and complex exciter models.
Delta-connected generators
Although it is theoretically possible to build a generator with Delta-connected windings, it is not practical. This
type of generator would promote a high level of circulating current. Also, the windings would have to be
insulated to a much higher level with respect to the Wye-connected equivalent. This insulation would lead to
cooling problems.
SynerGEE does support ungrounded Wye connections.
METERS
Meter devices are simple data points that you can place anywhere in your model to represent demands or
metered values. From a modeling perspective, you interact with meters in the same way that you interact with
any other device. Their analytical effect, however, is somewhat different, in that they serve primarily as points
of data for load allocation analysis. They do not contribute to load flow-based system parameters, such as
voltage and losses.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
357
Because meters are modeled as section devices, it is possible to put metered values on every section.
However, too many meters will likely cause non-convergence of load allocation due to the granular load
groups between them. For best allocation results, you should use a limited number of metering points that
accurately represent demand data at strategic points, such as feeder sources. For more information on how
load allocation handles meters throughout a model, versus source demand meters, see About load
allocation demands and meters on page 550.
Meter data is multi-year compliant. Data can be specified on a yearly basis, according to the current year to
which the interface is set. Because section loads are also multi-year compliant, meters can facilitate multiple
annual load setups all within the same model, including independent load allocation by year. For more
information on multi-year modeling, see Multi-Year Analysis on page 579.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with meters in SynerGEE.
Adding a meter
Meters are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a meter type from the
Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map display.
Unlike other device types, meter equipment types are not actually stored in your equipment data source,
since meters are represented entirely by model (instance) data. The single meter equipment type in the
Warehouse tab, General Meter, simply represents a shortcut to add a meter when you drag the device from
the warehouse.
Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with warehouse
equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Meters and then select the meter type that you want to add to your model. Drag it onto the
map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a meter
Use the Meter editor to edit an existing meter in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
User Guide
358
Modeling Devices
TO EDIT A METER
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the meter that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Meter editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the meter. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the meter that you want to edit.
In the Meter editor, select the Meter tab. The following table describes the different options that you
can set.
Name
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Loc. Link
AMS Link
When the map displays Color By option has been set to Meters, you
can select this check box to color all downstream sections with the
specified color. The color will be applied to all downstream sections
until another meter is encountered with this same option enabled, at
which point the section coloring will change to the new meters
designated color.
Color by options are set up in the Style tab of the Map Settings editor.
For more information, see Selecting a Coloring Scheme for Sections
on page 216.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
Current Rating
359
Status
If you set the meters status as Open, select this check box to have
the meter represent downstream load when the meter is at the
outward end of a section.
Energize/Retire years
Specifies the energize and retire years for multi-year analysis. For
more information, see Multi-Year Analysis on page 579.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the meter that you want to edit.
In the Meter editor, select the Demands tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
Do not use demands
Select this check box if you will not be using demands on this meter.
Many demand-related options in the Demands tab will be disabled
when this check box is selected.
Lock downstream
loads
Type
Units
User Guide
360
Modeling Devices
Overridden by
upstream meters
Select this check box to ignore the specified meter demands if there
is an active meter upstream from this one.
This option may be useful if you plan to allocate load by subtran
demands but still want to model feeder demands and perhaps use
them at other times. It also allows you to reset the specified demands
by using calculated demands from upstream meters. For more
information on how load allocation handles this setting in
consideration of subtran versus feeder demands, see About load
allocation demands and meters on page 550.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
Metered Values
361
If the meter Type is Amp, then the fourth column will show
the average of the Amp and % pf values from the A, B, and
C columns. If you enter a value in the Average column, the
value will be distributed proportionally among the first three
phases, based on the current values for each phase.
If the meter Type is kVA and the Units is kw kvar, then the
fourth column will show the total of the kw and kvar values
from the A, B, and C columns. If you enter a value in the
Total column, the value will be distributed proportionally
among the first three phases, based on the current values
for each phase.
If the meter Type is kVA and the Units is kva %pf, then the
fourth column will show the total of the kVA values and the
average of the % pf values from the A, B, and C columns. If
you enter a value in the Total & Average column, the value
will be distributed proportionally among the first three
phases, based on the current values for each phase.
User Guide
362
Modeling Devices
Click this button to balance the specified demands across all phases.
After running a load allocation analysis, click this button to replace the
current demand values with the demand results from the analysis.
Allocation scaling
Use the two text boxes in the Allocation scaling area to specify a
minimum and maximum percentage for the demand at the meter.
These values specify the range of demands that you would expect to
see at the meter. Later, when you are setting up a Load Allocation
analysis, you can use an option in the Load Allocation Options editor
to adjust the demands toward these minimum or maximum values.
For more information on setting up a Load Allocation analysis, see
Setting up a load allocation analysis on page 552.
Growth Curve
Select this check box to specify a growth curve for the meter. Growth
curves are used to perform forecasting analyses, as described in
Forecasting Analysis on page 556.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the meter that you want to edit.
Select the Active Targets check box to enable the reliability targets for the meter.
User Guide
SAIFI
Modeling Devices
363
SAIDI
MAIFI
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the meter that you want to edit.
Select the Default for distributed loads and/or Default for spot loads check boxes, as
appropriate, to enable default customer zones for the meter. For each option, select a zone name
from the related options list.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the meter that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
User Guide
364
Modeling Devices
Deleting a meter
Perform the following procedure to delete a meter from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the meter that you want to delete.
Metering points are considered by load allocation only if you have your load allocation options set to
consider them. For more information, see To set load allocation options on page 552.
MOTORS
SynerGEE supports a detailed motor model, which is fully considered by analyses such as load-flow and any
load-flow based applications. In addition, if you have motors modeled, SynerGEE provides two motor-specific
analyses: locked rotor analysis (LRA) and motor start analysis (MSA).
Like all model equipment, motors are attached to sections. Once modeled, the motor and motor service loads
are considered to be at the center of a section, similar to an equivalent constant impedance spot load. Only
one motor may be placed per section, and the section ID serves as the unique identifier. Motors can be
modeled on substation buses.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
365
For detailed information on motor start analysis, see Motor start analysis on page 377. For detailed
information on locked rotor analysis, see Locked rotor analysis on page 375.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with motors in SynerGEE.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click OK.
Use the Motor Type editor to edit the settings for the motor type. For more information on the
options you can set, see Editing a motor type on page 366.
User Guide
366
Modeling Devices
Expand Motor Types and then double-click the name of the motor type that you want to edit.
In the Motor Type editor, select the Ratings tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
User Guide
Description
Rated horsepower
Maximum horsepower for the motor type. For more information, see
the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Rated voltage
Maximum voltage for the motor type. For more information, see the
SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Maximum efficiency for the motor type. For more information, see the
SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Type
Characteristics
Motor power factor at full speed, rated load, and rated voltage. This
option is enabled when you have selected Nameplate Data as the
Characteristic type.
Modeling Devices
Motor Pf Curve
367
Select the Starting tab. Use the Starting tab to edit the starting attributes for the motor. The
following table describes the different options that you can set.
Synchronous Speed
Motor Inertia
Motor inertia is the weight of the motor and has a direct bearing on
the starting time calculated within a motor start analysis. It is the
machine inertia constant which includes the Wk2 of the motor with the
Wk2 of the mechanical coupling or any gearing included. If total Wk2
values are not available, the motor Wk2 value can be used by itself.
Motor inertia is combined with the load inertia (which is specified in
the motor editor) during a motor start analysis. A non-zero value is
required.
Motor inertia can be entered directly or calculated by SynerGEE, as
follows:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
368
Modeling Devices
Expand Motor Types and then select the name of the motor type that you want to delete.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click OK.
Use the Motor Curve Type editor to edit the settings for the motor curve type. For more information
on the options you can set, see Editing a motor curve type on page 368.
Expand Motor Curve Types and then double-click the name of the motor curve type that you want
to edit.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
3
369
Use the Motor Curve Type editor to set up the curve type, data points, and optional description. The
following table provides more information on each of these options.
Description
Curve Type
Select the type of curve you are editing. Available choices are
Torque, Amp, Pf, and Load. For more information on these options,
see the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Data Points
Specify the data points for the motor curve. Double-click an existing
value in the Point column to enter a new value. Curve information
should generally be available in your manufacturer data sheets.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Motor Curve Types and then select the name of the motor curve type that you want to
delete.
Adding a motor
Motors are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a motor type from the
Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map display.
Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with warehouse
equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
User Guide
370
Modeling Devices
Expand Motor Types and then select the motor type that you want to add to your model. Drag it
onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a motor
Use the Motor editor to edit an existing motor in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A MOTOR
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the motor that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Motor editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the motor. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the motor that you want to edit.
In the Motor editor, select the Motor tab. The following table describes the different options that you
can set.
Name
Type
Connection
User Guide
Modeling Devices
371
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Loc. Link
AMS Link
Status
Specifies the motor state. Available choices are Off, Starting, and
Running. For more information on motor states and analysis, see the
SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Phases associated with the tie points. This setting is used for
optimization studies.
Energize/Retire years
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the motor that you want to edit.
In the Motor editor, select the Service tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
Line from Section to
Transformer
Use the following options to set up a conductor that spans from the
section to the optional distribution transformer serving the motor.
User Guide
372
Modeling Devices
Use Transformer
Line from
Transformer to Starter
High Side Near Section. Select this check box to orient the
high-side winding near the section, meaning that the lowside winding feeds the motor. If this option is not selected,
then the low-side winding is near the section, meaning that
the high-side feeds the motor. Note that this setting is not
related to the physical location of the transformer.
Use the following options to set up a conductor that spans from the
optional distribution transformer to the motor.
User Guide
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Modeling Devices
373
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the motor that you want to edit.
In the Motor editor, select the Starter tab. The following table describes the different options that you
can set.
Starting Method
Select a starting method for the motor. The following choices are
available. Each option is described in the SynerGEE Technical
Reference.
Full voltage
Autotransfer
Capacitor
Series Resistance
Series Reactance
Partial Winding
Wye/Delta
Settings
Start Delay
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
374
Modeling Devices
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the motor that you want to edit.
In the Motor editor, select the Load tab. The following table describes the different options that you
can set.
Load Inertia
Load Inertia. Use the load inertia text box to directly specify
the load inertia for the motor.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
375
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the motor that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a motor
Perform the following procedure to delete a motor from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the motor that you want to delete.
Motor analyses
SynerGEE allows you to perform two different motor analysis types: Locked rotor analysis (LRA) and motor
start analysis (MSA). LRA is typically used to determine starting or worst-case effects of a starting motor on
the entire feeder. MSA is designed to study a specific motor or motors in detail. You can use MSA to set up a
motors starter or to set up the minimum delay time between the sequenced starting of two motors.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
376
Modeling Devices
analysis lets you evaluate the feeders response at various sections. This is a tremendous advantage for
design, reliability, and system integrity. Using LRA, the kW and kvar contribution of all the motors can be seen
along with the impact to their respective feeder or feeders, and substation. When loops are present, each
feeder will generate a before/during/after report to show voltage variations during the analysis.
LRA is available for substation analysis and can examine the voltage drop at each substation bus and the
connected feeders. Motors can be placed on substation buses; however, this would be unusual. You can see
the effect of motors placed on feeders by running LRA with a substation model displayed. If LRA is run from a
substation model, the feeders associated with the appropriate substation transformer that feeds the starting
motor are listed in the output. The drop through the substation transformers and the substation source
impedance is accounted for.
S Motor =
HP ( 0.746 )
1
1 (kVA)
1 + j
2
Efficiency
pf
Eq 74
In this fashion, you could apply a spot load to the applicable section and remove the motor instance
altogether. For more information on applying a spot load to a section, see Editing Sections on page 279.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
377
The speed-torque/accelerating time study can help to verify that starting times are within acceptable limits. It
can also help determine the best sequence for starting motors and the minimum delay required between the
successive starting of multiple motors.
RECLOSERS
SynerGEE distinguishes between hydraulic and electronic reclosers. Hydraulic reclosers are defined by
manufacturer, model, and coil rating. Electronic reclosers are defined by manufacturer, model, and pickup.
Electronic reclosers typically have a phase and ground unit, whereas hydraulic reclosers have a phase or
ground unit.
Phase and ground units each have two available response curves.
Fast
The operation count or number of shots for each response curve can be specified. The sum of the fast and
time delay shots must be four or less.
Adders and multipliers can be used to independently modify the fast and time delay response curves for
electronic reclosers. These values should come from settings on your recloser controller. Mechanical recloser
response curves cannot be modified with adders and multipliers.
User Guide
378
Modeling Devices
Adding a recloser
Reclosers are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a recloser type
from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map
display. Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with
warehouse equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Recloser Types and then select the recloser type that you want to add to your model. Drag
it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a recloser
Use the Recloser editor to edit an existing recloser in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A RECLOSER
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the recloser that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Recloser editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the recloser. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a recloser on
page 381
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the recloser that you want to edit.
In the Recloser editor, select the Recloser tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Name
User Guide
Modeling Devices
379
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Manufacturer, Model,
and Amp Rating
Add to TCC
Click this button to add the recloser to the TCC. For more information
on the TCC, see Time Versus Current Coordination (TCC) Graph on
page 604.
Protecting
Click to open the editor for the protecting device for the recloser.
Interrupt Rating
Bypass
Status
Phasing
Recloser phasing.
Operation
Operation Time
Sets the operation time for mechanical reclosers. This option allows
downstream devices to be coordinated with the control curve of the
upstream recloser. This curve is calculated from the published
response curve using the new operation time.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
380
Modeling Devices
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the recloser that you want to edit.
In the Recloser editor, select the Setup tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
Settings
Transfer Scheme
Primary
Alternate
Non-Transfer
Sectionalizing
Mid-Point
Tie
If you select the Mid-Point or Tie transfer schemes, you also have the
option of specifying a Switching Group ID. This ID is used to identify
switches and reclosers that work together during an automatic feeder
switching (AFS) analysis. Once you specify an ID for one switch type
or recloser type, that ID will become an available selection for other
switch types and recloser types. Each switch type and recloser type
may only belong to one switching group at a time.
For more information on the automatic feeder switching (AFS)
analysis, see Automatic Feeder Switching (AFS) Analysis on
page 534.
User Guide
Color
Color of the phase curve if plotted on the TCC. For more information
on the TCC, see Time Versus Current Coordination (TCC) Graph on
page 604.
Safety/Hot Work
Specify the Safety Interrupt and Safety Pickup for both Phase and
Ground.
K Factors
Modeling Devices
3
381
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the recloser that you want to edit.
In the Recloser editor, select either the Primary tab or the Alternate tab. The following table
describes the different options that you can set.
Curve
Specifies the curve type for phase or ground. See your manufacturer
documentation for more information.
Shot
Electronic Recloser
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire
years for a recloser
The Rates tab in the Recloser editor specifies failure rate data for the recloser. You can specify a sustained
failure rate and temporary failure rate, as well as the failure repair time and cost. The Rates tab also contains
options to set a location link and an AMS link, and also to set the energize and retire years.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
User Guide
382
Modeling Devices
TO SET FAILURE RATES, LOCATION LINKS, AND THE ENERGIZE AND RETIRE YEARS FOR A
RECLOSER
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the recloser that you want to edit.
In the Recloser editor, select the Rates tab. The following table describes the different tasks that you
can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Crew Oper./Reset
Generally, the numbers that you enter will represent averages and
estimates, because it is unlikely that you will have exact figures for
each individual device.
Next to Location Link, type the correct syntax to link the device to an
external source, such as a file, website, or location in an Internet
mapping software application. SynerGEEs location link feature, as
well as the syntax required to set up location links, is described in
Location Links on page 223.
Set up an Asset
Management System
(AMS) link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
383
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the recloser that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a recloser
Perform the following procedure to delete a recloser from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the recloser that you want to delete.
REGULATORS
Regulators are used to step-up or step-down the voltage at or downstream of the voltage regulator so that the
customer voltage levels are within limits. They are designed to raise or lower the voltage magnitude at and
beyond some remote location. Regulators are very common and useful devices within power distribution
systems.
To help you determine regulator settings, SynerGEE provides a special analysis tool called the regulator
setting tool. Use of the tool is optional. For more information on this tool, see Regulator Setting power tool
on page 745.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with regulators in SynerGEE. More detailed
information on regulators is provided in the SynerGEE Technical Reference. The Technical Reference
includes a discussion of the basic regulator model and the more detailed model with shunt and series
impedance values. The Technical Reference also describes how regulator tap positions are analytically
changed and how voltage drop and losses are determined following the load-flow convergence.
User Guide
384
Modeling Devices
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type, and then click OK.
Use the Regulator Type editor to edit the settings for the regulator type. For more information on the
options you can set, see Editing a regulator type on page 384.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
385
Expand Regulator Types and then double-click the name of the regulator type that you want to edit.
Rated Voltage
Z on Reg. Base
X/R Ratio
No-load losses
Losses that are used along with the regulators ratings to determine
the value of shunt conductance which simulate core loss. The loss is
for either a three-phase unit or a single-phase regulator depending on
the factory connection setting. Zero is acceptable.
Range
Total # Steps
Factory Unit
Connection
Type A or Type B
User Guide
386
Modeling Devices
Summer Rating
(Amps) and Winter
Rating (Amps)
Continuous and emergency values can be set for typical summer and
winter conditions and then used in the model with the Weather
feature, which models based on seasonal changes, as described in
Configuring Seasonal Weather Modeling on page 831. SynerGEE
uses the summer ratings as the default values.
PT Ratio
CT Rating
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Regulator Types and then select the name of the regulator type that you want to delete.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
387
Adding a regulator
Regulators are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a regulator type
from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map
display. Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with
warehouse equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Regulator Types and then select the regulator type that you want to add to your model.
Drag it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a regulator
Use the Regulator editor to edit an existing regulator in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A REGULATOR
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the regulator that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Regulator editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the regulator. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Editing reverse mode, first-house, and tap limiter data for a regulator on page 390
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a regulator on
page 392
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the regulator that you want to edit.
In the Regulator editor, select the Regulator tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Name
User Guide
388
Modeling Devices
Turn Off
Select this check box to disable the regulators effect on the model. If
the regulator is disabled, you can still edit the available settings but it
will not have any impact on the model or any analysis.
You can also disable regulators directly from the model explorer or
SynerGEE map display. Right-click on the regulator or regulator name
and select Turn On or Turn Off, as appropriate. When you perform
this action, the Turn Off check box will be selected or cleared to
reflect the current status.
Type
Connection
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Phasing
Regulator phasing.
Tap Positions
Tap position for each phase of the regulator bank or unit. Values can
be positive, negative, or zero. The numerical absolute value of the tap
position cannot be greater than half the number of taps specified in
the regulators table record.
Tap Operation
Direction - (Taps
are ...)
Location of the regulator taps, either near the section source or load
end (or from-node or to-node in network models).
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
389
Refer to the following procedure for more information on editing LDC settings for a regulator. Additional
information on line-drop compensation is provided in the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the regulator that you want to edit.
Under Forward Set Point and LDC Settings and under Reverse Set Point and LDC Settings,
specify the following values. The specific forward and reverse settings that are available for edit are
based on you selections for the Reverse Mode option and the Gang Metering Phase option, as
described in Editing reverse mode, first-house, and tap limiter data for a regulator on page 390.
-
B.W. Dial. Specifies the bandwidth of the voltage set point. For example, if you have set
the voltage set point to 124 and a bandwidth of 2, then voltage range will be from 123 to
125.
The voltage base (100V or 120V) for the forward and reverse set points and LDC settings is set as
the PT Secondary option on the Units tab of the Preferences editor. For more information, see
Setting units of measurement on page 165.
4
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
390
Modeling Devices
Editing reverse mode, first-house, and tap limiter data for a regulator
TO EDIT REVERSE MODE, FIRST-HOUSE, AND TAP LIMITER DATA
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the regulator that you want to edit.
In the Regulator editor, select the Settings tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Reverse Mode
User Guide
Modeling Devices
First House
391
Select the Active check box to enable First House protection for the
regulator. Once enabled, you can edit the following settings:
Select the Active check box to enable tap movement limits for the
regulator. Once enabled, you can edit the following settings:
Nominal Voltage
Multiplier
Time delay
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
392
Modeling Devices
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years
for a regulator
Use the Rates tab in the Regulator editor to specify failure rate data for the regulator. You can specify a
sustained failure rate and temporary failure rate, as well as the failure repair time and cost. The Rates tab
also contains options to set a location link and an AMS link, and also to set the energize and retire years.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO SET FAILURE RATES, LOCATION LINKS, AND THE ENERGIZE AND RETIRE YEARS FOR A
REGULATOR
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the regulator that you want to edit.
In the Regulator editor, select the Rates tab. The following table describes the different tasks that
you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Generally, the numbers that you enter will represent averages and
estimates, because it is unlikely that you will have exact figures for
each individual device.
Next to Location Link, type the correct syntax to link the device to an
external source, such as a file, website, or location in an Internet
mapping software application. SynerGEEs location link feature, as
well as the syntax required to set up location links, is described in
Location Links on page 223.
Set up an Asset
Management System
(AMS) link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
393
Note that you can configure which results are shown in the editor by using the Editor Results tab in the
Output Options editor. You can show and hide individual result types, such as Amps Into and Volts Out, and
you can also show and hide entire result categories, such as Fault results, Capacity results, and Reliability
results. In addition, you can select which power units are used to display the results. The Output Options
editor is described in more detail in Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab on page 445.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on viewing analysis results for a regulator.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the regulator that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a regulator
Perform the following procedure to delete a regulator from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the regulator that you want to delete.
SECTIONALIZERS
A sectionalizer is specified through an actuating current and a count number, mimicking the operation of a
real device. Typically, the sectionalizer should have at least one recloser upstream (SynerGEE does not yet
support reclosing relays). Also, the minimum fault current through the sectionalizer should exceed the
actuating current. The amp rating of a sectionalizer is used to calculate a value for percent loading and to
find overload exceptions.
Sectionalizers have no curves in the protection database. As such, coordination analysis checks their
settings against reclosers paired to the sectionalizer.
Adding a sectionalizer
Sectionalizers are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a sectionalizer
type from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE
map display. Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with
warehouse equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
User Guide
394
Modeling Devices
Expand Sectionalizer Types and then select the sectionalizer type that you want to add to your
model. Drag it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a sectionalizer
Use the Sectionalizer editor to edit an existing sectionalizer in your model. Refer to the following procedure
for more information.
TO EDIT A SECTIONALIZER
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the sectionalizer that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Sectionalizer editor, select from the different tab names to access the
available settings for the sectionalizer. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can
perform:
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a sectionalizer on
page 395
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the sectionalizer that you want to
edit.
In the Sectionalizer editor, select the Sectionalizer tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
User Guide
Name
Model
Modeling Devices
395
Actuating Current/
Number Counts
Amp Rating
Phasing
Sectionalizer phasing.
Status
Add to TCC
Adds the sectionalizer to the TCC. For more information on the TCC,
see Time Versus Current Coordination (TCC) Graph on page 604.
TCC color
Protecting
Click to open the editor for the protecting device for the sectionalizer.
Bypass
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire
years for a sectionalizer
The Rates tab in the Sectionalizer editor specifies failure rate data for the sectionalizer. You can specify a
sustained failure rate and temporary failure rate, as well as the failure repair time and cost. The Rates tab
also contains options to set a location link and an AMS link, and also to set the energize and retire years.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
User Guide
396
Modeling Devices
TO SET FAILURE RATES, LOCATION LINKS, AND THE ENERGIZE AND RETIRE YEARS FOR A
SECTIONALIZER
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the sectionalizer that you want to
edit.
In the Sectionalizer editor, select the Rates tab. The following table describes the different tasks that
you can perform.
To...
Do This...
Crew Oper./Reset
Generally, the numbers that you enter will represent averages and
estimates, because it is unlikely that you will have exact figures for
each individual device.
Next to Location Link, type the correct syntax to link the device to an
external source, such as a file, website, or location in an Internet
mapping software application. SynerGEEs location link feature, as
well as the syntax required to set up location links, is described in
Location Links on page 223.
Set up an Asset
Management System
(AMS) link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
397
Refer to the following procedure for more information on viewing analysis results for a sectionalizer.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the sectionalizer that you want to
work with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a sectionalizer
Perform the following procedure to delete a sectionalizer from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the sectionalizer that you want to delete.
SWITCHES
SynerGEE allows you to model switches within your feeder models. These switches can be used to
reconfigure your feeder connectivity.
The following rules apply when you are modeling switches in SynerGEE:
Switches are located on line sections. There can be only one switch per section.
Switches are always located closest to the node, before any other loads or equipment. They can be
located at either the source end or the load end of the section.
With the exception of network models, a switch cannot be closed to form a loop. You must use a tie
switch, which is an open switch with tie calculation capability.
Switches only connect those phases that are present on both sides of the switch. This is the case for
balanced and by-phase looped analyses.
During balanced or by-phase analysis, the current through a switch is compared with the amp rating
listed in the equipment data for that switch. If the current is too high, an exception will be indicated in
the Results tab in the Section editor. For more information on the Results tab, see Viewing results
in the SynerGEE editor on page 156.
In SynerGEE, network topology is governed solely with nodes and sections. Topology as well as the position
and status of switches govern connectivity, or electrical flow.
User Guide
398
Modeling Devices
Protective devices are also switchable. For more information on switching protective devices, see
Switchable protective devices on page 600.
Current (in amps) through switches is displayed on reports, along with the name of the switch type. Sections
with switches have a special area in the Results tab in the Section editor that displays either the balanced or
by-phase current flow. The color of the switch numbers in the listing may reflect an overloaded switch. For
more information on the Results tab, see Viewing results in the SynerGEE editor on page 156.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with switches in SynerGEE.
Section 1
Section 3
Example 1 Open switch on outward end of section
User Guide
Modeling Devices
399
Section 2
Section 1
Section 3
Example 2 Open switch on inward end of a section
Sections 1, 2, and 3 would all be fed if the outward end of Section 3 or Section 2 were connected to a fed
section. This is shown below as Section 4.
Section 2
Section 1
Section 3
Section 4
In this case, all sections are fed. However, device feed directions and the load-flow reference directions on
Sections 1 and Section 3 are reversed. Other than voltage level changes, devices on Section 2 would see no
change in the modified feed direction.
Section 1
Section 3
Example 3 Inward switch isolating a branch
Section 1
Section 3
Example 4 Inward switch isolating an outward end
User Guide
400
Modeling Devices
Basic switch. The basic switch is the normal switch. Opening the switch creates an island, and
closing the switch restores connectivity and typically picks up load.
Loop tie switch. The loop tie switch can be used to model loops in a radial network. It resides on the
model as an open switch, but SynerGEE considers it closed during analysis. Loop tie switches are
optional and SynerGEE can consider loops without them. For more information, see Loops and
Wandering Laterals on page 253.
Wandering lateral tie switch. The wandering lateral tie switch can be used to reconnect branching
single-phase lines back to a three-phase trunk, serving three-phase loads downstream. It resides on
the model as an open switch, but SynerGEE considers it closed during analysis. Wandering lateral
tie switches are optional and SynerGEE can consider wandering laterals without them. For more
information, see Loops and Wandering Laterals on page 253.
Automatic switch. The automatic switch simulates real devices that automatically close to pick up
load in the event of an outage or a drop in voltage. You can set your contingency analysis options to
Prefer Auto Switches, in which case automatic switches are operated first, regardless of the
switching objective. Also, automatic switches may have a reduced operation time in reliability
analysis. For more information on contingency analysis options, see Setting up a contingency
analysis on page 537. For more information on reliability analysis options, see Setting up a
Reliability Analysis on page 662.
Auto-transfer switch. Auto-transfer switches simulate real devices that automatically transfer a
critical load to an alternate feed path in the event of an outage. In SynerGEE, these switches are
modeled as a pair of regular switches located on either side of the node that serves a critical load.
Both switches are set as Auto-Transfer switches in the Switch editor. For more information on
modeling an auto-transfer switch pair, see Modeling auto-transfer switches on page 407.
Pad-mounted switch gear and elbows. SynerGEE supports the modeling of elbows and padmounted switch gear. For more information on these items, see Pad-mounted gear and elbows on
page 408.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
401
the Switch tab in the Switch editor. You should be aware that some options in the Switch editor may enable
and disable automatically based on the options you have selected in the referenced switch type.
The topics listed below provide more information on working with switch types. For more information on
working with the equipment warehouse in general, see Equipment data on page 64.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click OK.
Use the Switch Type editor to edit the settings for the switch type. For more information on the
options you can set, see Editing a switch type on page 401.
Expand Switch Types and then double-click the name of the switch type that you want to edit.
Emergency Current
Rating
Emergency current rating. This value is used in balanced and byphase analysis and capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections
and to display switch overload exceptions.
Voltage Rating
Operation
Select the appropriate check box to set up the switch type as a gangoperated or load break switch. Note that these two fields are not
currently used by any SynerGEE analysis.
User Guide
402
Modeling Devices
4
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Switch Types and then select the name of the switch type that you want to delete.
Adding a switch
Switches are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a switch type from
the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE map
display. For more information, see Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Switch Types and then select the switch type that you want to add to your model. Drag it
onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section and in the desired location in relation to the
sections nodes.
Editing a switch
Use the Switch editor to edit an existing switch in your model. Refer to the following procedure for more
information.
TO EDIT A SWITCH
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the switch that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Switch editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the switch. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
-
User Guide
Modeling Devices
403
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a switch on
page 406
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the switch that you want to edit.
In the Switch editor, select the Switch tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
Name
Type
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
User Guide
404
Modeling Devices
Status
Specifies the Open or Closed status of the switch. If Open, you can
also specify whether the switch is a Loop Tie switch or Wandering
Lateral Tie.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
Switching Model
405
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
406
Modeling Devices
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years
for a switch
The Rates tab in the Switch editor specifies failure rate data for the switch. You can specify a sustained
failure rate and temporary failure rate, as well as the failure repair time and cost. The Rates tab also contains
options to set a location link and an AMS link, and also to set the energize and retire years.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO SET FAILURE RATES, LOCATION LINKS, AND THE ENERGIZE AND RETIRE YEARS FOR A
SWITCH
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the switch that you want to edit.
In the Switch editor, select the Rates tab. The following table describes the different tasks that you
can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Crew Oper./Reset
Generally, the numbers that you enter will represent averages and
estimates, because it is unlikely that you will have exact figures for
each individual device.
User Guide
Next to Location Link, type the correct syntax to link the device to an
external source, such as a file, website, or location in an Internet
mapping software application. SynerGEEs location link feature, as
well as the syntax required to set up location links, is described in
Location Links on page 223.
Set up an Asset
Management System
(AMS) link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Modeling Devices
407
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the switch that you want to work
with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a switch
Perform the following procedure to delete a switch from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the switch that you want to delete.
User Guide
408
Modeling Devices
To be valid, both auto-transfer switches must be placed on fed sections. In addition, they cannot be
separated by a feeder source.
Elbows
Elbows are modeled through the Section editor. There is not a specific equipment type for elbows in your
model, nor is there an elbow symbol that appears on the map. An elbow remains assigned to a particular
section due to the fact that it is created as a part of the section.
Topologically in SynerGEE, elbows act just like switches. They are considered to be modeled at the end of a
section. When opened, they isolate the parent section from all downstream sections. In a radial model, all
loop creation rules that apply to switches also apply to elbows.
TO MODEL AN ELBOW
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the section that you want to edit.
Under Elbows/Switchgear, select an elbow status for both the to-node end and the from-node end
of the section. Available status options are No Elbow, Open, and Closed.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
409
each adjoining section is assigned a bay that can be independently opened or closed. In a radial model, all
loop creation rules that apply to switches also apply to pad-mounted gear.
At the data level, SynerGEE sees pad-mounted gear as a collection of elbows. Consider the following
example, where a node has been converted to a pad-mounted switch gear:
When you open and close bays within the switch gear editor, you are actually opening and closing elbows on
the respective sections. If you open the bay to a particular section in the PM Gear editor, you can open the
Section editor for that section and see that the appropriate elbow has been marked as Open. Likewise, if you
change an elbow setting within a Section editor, an identical change will be reflected in any attached padmounted gear.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on creating and editing pad-mounted switch gear.
In the SynerGEE map display, locate the node you would like to convert to pad-mounted switch
gear.
User Guide
410
Modeling Devices
a
Hover the mouse over the node that you want to convert. If the node is eligible to be
converted, the cursor symbol will change from a crosshair to a target symbol. Click the
mouse to complete the action.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the pad-mounted switch gear that
you want to edit.
In the PM Gear editor, select the PMG tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
User Guide
Description
Bay
Identifies the Section ID for each section that is attached to the padmounted gear. You cannot edit this field.
Status
Status for the elbow at each section. Set the status to Open or
Closed, as desired. Any changes that you make here will be updated
automatically in the Properties tab of the Section editor, and viceversa.
Amp Rating
Amp rating for the elbow at each section. Any changes that you make
here will be updated automatically in the Properties tab of the Section
editor, and vice-versa.
Select the Node tab. The following table describes the different options that you can set.
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Incident Sections
Lists the names of all sections that are connected to the pad-mounted
switch gear. This list is for informational purposes only and cannot be
edited.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Modeling Devices
411
Switch plans
A switch plan is a SynerGEE tool that systematically opens and closes switches in a specific order and then
analyzes the plan with a load flow analysis. You can create and save numerous plans and then recall and
load them at any time. Changes to the model can be made permanent or unapplied.
Switch plans are controlled by the Switch Plan editor. The editor allows you to create a switch plan by
recording your actions of opening and closing switches in the model. You can then rearrange the switching
order, change the type of plan, open a Switch editor, and apply changes.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on a section where you wish to create a switch plan.
Use the Switch Plan editor to configure the switch plan. For more information on using this editor,
see Editing a switch plan on page 411.
Expand Locations/Groups and select Switch Plans. Double-click on the name of the switch plan
that you want to edit.
Use the Switch Plan editor to record the sequence of switch control actions and to set other options
related to the plan. Refer to the following table for more information on the specific tasks that you
can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Next to Description, type the name of the switch plan. By default, the
switch plan name uses the name of the feeder where the switch plan
was created.
User Guide
412
Modeling Devices
To ...
Do This ...
Click Record.
Select the action that you want to edit and then do any of the
following:
User Guide
Modeling Devices
413
To ...
Do This ...
Process Forward/
Process Reverse
Works in conjunction with the status field to indicate how the switch
plan can be processed. If the plan is inconsistent, you can set the
system to the initial or final state of the plan. Consistent plans can be
processed forward or in reverse.
or
Set to Initial State/Set
to Final State
Must be consistent to
operate
If a switch plan is inconsistent, then this check box will determine how
the plan can be applied.
Analyze
Click the Analyze button to run a load-flow on your model using the
proposed switch plan. When the analysis is complete, SynerGEE will
display a Switch Plan Summary report, which shows more detailed
information on the impact the switch plan will have on your model.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Locations/Groups and select Switch Plans. Select the name of the switch plan that you
want to delete.
User Guide
414
Modeling Devices
The Switch Plan Manager can also be opened automatically following a contingency analysis. For
more information, see Contingency Analysis on page 535.
2
In the Source area of the Switch Plan Manager, select the source of the switch plans that you want
to work with. For example, a source of Model indicates that the switch plans were created
manually for a model following the instructions provided in Creating a switch plan on page 411.
Cntgcy indicates switch plans that were created as a result of a contingency analysis, as described
in Contingency Analysis on page 535.
In the Plan area, select the specific switch plan that you want to work with, and then perform any of
the following tasks:
To ...
Do This ...
Select the switch plan that you want to edit, and then click Edit.
For more information on editing a switch plan, see Editing a
switch plan on page 411.
User Guide
Select the switch plan that you want to analyze, and then click
Analyze. SynerGEE will run a load-flow analysis based on the
proposed switch plan and then display a Switch Plan Summary
report, showing more detailed information on the impact the
selected switch plan will have on your model.
Select the switch plan that you want to delete, and then click
Delete.
In the Switch Steps area, select the step that includes the switch
that you want to view, and then click Zoom.
Select the switch plan that you want to save to the model, and
then click -> Model.
Modeling Devices
415
TRANSFORMERS
Primary transformers are modeled in SynerGEE to be an accurate representation of real transformer banks
and units operating in a three-phase unbalanced distribution system.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with transformers in SynerGEE.
Transformer model
Transformers can be modeled in detail within an unbalanced load-flow package by considering the windingto-winding relationships between those transformer windings on the primary and secondary sides of the bank
or unit. The method used in this modeling schema breaks up the transformer bank into three parts, as shown
below.
Inward winding
Connection
Outward winding
Connection
The center portion of the model consists of three ideal transformer models. The relationship between the
voltage and current across these windings is academic:
I In , j =
I Out , j
aww
VOut , j =
VIn , j
Eq 75
aww
where:
IIn, IOut, VIn, and VOut
aww
The point of using this type of modeling is to modularize the very complicated behavior of transformers
associated with the various transformer connections. The effects of transformer impedance, grounding, and
no-load losses upon the unbalanced voltages and currents of the bank are modeled. These effects, as well
User Guide
416
Modeling Devices
as the essential effects of the transformer connection, are included in the inward winding connection and
outward winding connection portion of the model. The method for handling these transformer connections is
described in detail in the topics listed below.
Create or edit a transformer equipment type that has the tertiary winding feature enabled. This
setting is specified in the Taps/Tertiary tab of the Transformer Type editor, as described in Editing a
transformer type on page 422.
Add a transformer to the model using the transformer type that was enabled for tertiary winding. For
more information, see Adding a transformer on page 425.
Specify where the secondary and tertiary windings should be connected. These options are set on
the Tertiary tab of the Transformer editor, as described in Setting up tertiary windings for a
transformer on page 429.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
417
The transformer is closest to the node with incident sections Sect_02, Sect_03, and Sect_04. Therefore,
these three sections will be available for secondary and/or tertiary connections in the Transformer editor. In
the Tertiary tab of the editor for this transformer, you might see the following:
Each section connected to the closest node is listed, along with its specified connection type. To change
between secondary and tertiary, click the down arrow; the connection type will change automatically. Once
this option has been set, the entire section is considered to be attached to the specified transformer
connection. In the example shown above, Sect_04 is specified as the tertiary connection, while Sect_02 and
Sect_03 are secondary connections. By default, all connections are set as secondary until manually
changed.
While modeling tertiaries, be aware of the following:
Tertiary connections must be enabled in the applicable transformer equipment type before the
options in the Tertiary tab shown above will become enabled. In addition, all nameplate data
associated with tertiary windings is specified in the equipment type. Transformer equipment types
are discussed in Managing transformer types in the equipment warehouse on page 422.
The parent section of a transformer is always considered the primary connection and cannot be
specified otherwise.
On the model, a tertiary connection must always be facing out of the section. That is, you must
specify that the high side is away from the node where the tertiary connections will be made. In the
example shown above, if the junction node were the to-node, the transformer must be specified
with the high-side near the from-node.
User Guide
418
Modeling Devices
Iout
a:1
Zs
Vout
Gc
Single-winding transformer
The model has a series or winding impedance and a conductance representing the core losses. In
SynerGEE, the transformer impedance values are actually spread across on the source and load side
windings. The source side can be connected into one of the four general schemes shown below.
B
A
Zw
1
IN
Zn
I w2
2
Vw
Y -
Gw3
Zw3
IC
Zw
+ Vw3 -
Gw1
+ V
w
Gw2
Zw
1
Gw2
Gw1
Vw
1
Zw3
IC
V w2
+ Vw3 -
Y -
Gw3
Zw
I w2
User Guide
Modeling Devices
419
I
A A
1
Zw
Gw1
C
B
Zw
3
Gw3
IC
Zw2
Gw2
IB
I
A A
3
+ V
w
Zw
3
IC
1
Vw
1
Zw
Gw1
Gw3
IB
A number of other connections are related to these. Open-Delta AB and CA connections are available. OpenWye connections can also be formed by eliminating windings from the Wye-Gnd connection.
These same connections are available for the load side of transformer banks.
a
Z tn
b
1
I w2
w2
-V
+ Vw3 -
+ V
w
Ic
+ Vw3 -
+ V
w
I w2
V w2
Ic
User Guide
420
Modeling Devices
+ V
w
1
Vw
b
- Vw2 +
c
Delta load side connection
+ V
w
1
Vw
b
c
Open-Delta BC
The source and load side connections are used together to form the high- and low-side connections of the
transformer bank or three-phase unit. For example, choosing a Wye-Gnd connection for the source side and
a Delta connection for the load side of a transformer bank or unit would result in the following model.
B
A
IC
+ Vw3 -
2
Vw
Y -
I w2
IN
+ V
w
Currents and voltages within the windings and at the transformer terminals are consistent with the
transformer model presented above and Kirchhoffs laws. These banks can be built using the equipment
tables and the section records.
Network protectors
Network protectors are an essential part of the secondary network systems. They open and isolate the
primary feeder from the network in the event of a fault, avoiding a service outage for the load at the
secondary network. In addition, if the primary feeder is de-energized when the feeder breaker opens, the
network protector will also open to protect the load.
A short circuit on any one of the primary feeders will cause all the network protectors on that feeder to open
on reverse energy, provided the total power on the three-phase feeder is in the reverse direction. The other
User Guide
Modeling Devices
421
primary feeders carry the load until the faulted cable is repaired and returned to service. When the feeder is
clear of all faults and the transformer voltage is greater than that of the network, the network protectors close.
In a secondary network system, the system is looped or meshed and is supplied by several primary feeders.
These systems are often used in metropolitan areas or other areas with high load density and provide a
better continuity of service as compared to a radial distribution system. Other advantages include less
voltage sagging (since each load is supplied from at least two directions) and a possible reduction in
transformer capacity because the demand is diversified across large number of circuits.
The network protector trips automatically if the net three-phase power flow goes from the
transformer to the network.
The network protector will close automatically if the net three-phase watt flows into the network from
the transformer and remains the same after the network protector closes.
Sample model
All the primary sections are shown as red (using Color by Results and selecting nominal kV) and the
distribution network sections are shown as blue. All the transformers have network protectors that are
enabled and automatic. SynerGEE determines and sets the appropriate status of the network protectors
when network load flow is run.
User Guide
422
Modeling Devices
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type and then click OK.
Use the Transformer Type editor to edit the settings for the transformer type. For more information
on the options you can set, see Editing a transformer type on page 422.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
423
Expand Transformer Types and then double-click the name of the transformer type that you want
to edit.
In the Transformer Type editor, select the Ratings tab. Use the Ratings tab to edit rating data for the
transformer. The following table describes the different options that you can set.
Description
Name plate ratings for the transformer type. Specify the following
values:
High-Side Settings
and Low-Side Settings
Rated KVA. Operating rating of the transformer. For singlephase transformers, specify the transformer single-phase
nameplate rating. For three-phase transformers, specify the
total three-phase nameplate rating.
No Load Losses.
User Guide
424
Modeling Devices
Factory Unit
Select the Taps/Tertiary tab. Use the Taps/Tertiary tab to enable load-tap changer and tertiary
windings for the transformer type. Enabling these features for the transformer type will enable the
corresponding features for any transformer instance that references the transformer type.
To ...
Enable load-tap
changer (LTC)
Do This ...
a
Enter LTC nameplate data for the following values: Tap size,
Min tap, Neutral tap, Max tap, PT Ratio, and CT Rating.
Next to Connection, select a connection type for threephase units. This option will be disabled if you have set the
transformer type to Single Phase in the Ratings tab of the
editor. (The connection for single-phase units is specified in
the Tertiary tab of the Transformer editor.)
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Modeling Devices
425
Expand Transformer Types and then select the name of the transformer type that you want to
delete.
Adding a transformer
Transformers are added to a model in the same manner as any other equipment, by dragging a transformer
type from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer and dropping it onto an existing section in the SynerGEE
map display. Refer to the following procedure for more information. Additional information on working with
warehouse equipment types is provided in Modeling Devices on page 317.
Expand Transformer Types and then select the transformer type that you want to add to your
model. Drag it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
Editing a transformer
Use the Transformer editor to edit an existing transformer in your model. Refer to the following procedure for
more information.
TO EDIT A TRANSFORMER
1
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the transformer that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Transformer editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the transformer. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
-
User Guide
426
Modeling Devices
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years for a transformer on
page 430
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the transformer that you want to
edit.
In the Transformer editor, select the Transformer tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Name
Value that allows for transformers set on fixed taps above or below
the rated voltage. SynerGEE multiplies this value by the rated high
voltage when calculating transformer turns ratios. If transformer taps
are not used, enter 1.0, which indicates that the transformer is
operating at nameplate value.
Type
Note
User Guide
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Modeling Devices
Impedance from
warehouse type
427
Connection. Transformer connection type. For singlephase transformers, the connection type is specified here, in
the Transformer editor. For three-phase transformers, the
type is specified in the referenced transformer type.
Low-Side Nominal
Voltage
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
428
Modeling Devices
Refer to the following procedure for more information on setting up an LTC for a transformer.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the transformer that you want to
edit.
In the Transformer editor, select the LTC tab. The following table describes the different options that
you can set.
Voltage and LDC
Settings
The voltage base (100V or 120V) for the voltage and LDC settings is
set as the PT Secondary option on the Units tab of the Preferences
editor. For more information, see Setting units of measurement on
page 165.
Tap Control
User Guide
First House
If enabled, first house protection for upper and lower voltage limits at
the regulator output terminals.
Tap limits
High and low limits of tap movement during regulation. This option is
only applicable if the Tap Control is set to Automatic. The value can
be positive, negative, or zero. The numerical absolute value cannot
be greater than half the number of taps specified in the transformer
equipment type. For more information on transformer types, see
Editing a transformer type on page 422.
Modeling Devices
429
Time delay
Tapping delay
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the transformer that you want to
edit.
Select the Has Network Protector check box to enable the network protector.
Under Operation Mode, specify whether the network protector operates automatically or manually.
-
Manual. Under Manual operation, the network protector will open and close like a normal
switch. The network protector will not react to reverse power flow conditions.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
430
Modeling Devices
Setting failure rates, location links, and the energize and retire years
for a transformer
The Rates tab in the Transformer editor specifies failure rate data for the transformer. You can specify a
sustained failure rate and temporary failure rate, as well as the failure repair time and cost. The Rates tab
also contains options to set a location link and an AMS link, and also to set the energize and retire years.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO SET FAILURE RATES, LOCATION LINKS, AND THE ENERGIZE AND RETIRE YEARS FOR A
TRANSFORMER
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the transformer that you want to
edit.
In the Transformer editor, select the Rates tab. The following table describes the different tasks that
you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Generally, the numbers that you enter will represent averages and
estimates, because it is unlikely that you will have exact figures for
each individual device.
User Guide
Next to Location Link, type the correct syntax to link the device to an
external source, such as a file, website, or location in an Internet
mapping software application. SynerGEEs location link feature, as
well as the syntax required to set up location links, is described in
Location Links on page 223.
Set up an Asset
Management System
(AMS) link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Modeling Devices
431
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the transformer that you want to
work with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
Deleting a transformer
Perform the following procedure to delete a transformer from your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the transformer that you want to delete.
User Guide
432
User Guide
Modeling Devices
CHAPTER
8
SynerGEE Analyses
SynerGEE supports a wide range of powerful analyses that you can use to evaluate and optimize your
system with accuracy and precision. With a variety of options and settings available, you can customize
SynerGEE to analyze in a manner that best suits your needs.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
SETTING UP AN ANALYSIS
Before you perform an analysis, make sure you have properly configured SynerGEEs many analysis
options. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
434
SynerGEE Analyses
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the section that you want to set for analysis.
You can also locate the analysis section in the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the
section, and select Unset for Analysis.
User Guide
Perform the following steps to open the Time and Weather Options editor:
a
SynerGEE Analyses
2
435
In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Hour/Day tab. The following table describes the
different tasks that you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Under Year for Analysis, select the year you want to analyze.
Tip:
User Guide
436
SynerGEE Analyses
To ...
Do This ...
If you select Peak load or Minimum load as one of the Time of day
adjustment options, use the Peak/Minimum area to select the time
period that will be considered for determining the peak or minimum
load. The following options are available:
If you select Peak load or Minimum load as one of the Time of day
adjustment options, use the Peak Calculation area to select the
how peak or minimum loads will be calculated by SynerGEE. The
following options are available:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
437
It is critically important that you set your model and analysis options correctly, since they can have a
significant effect on analysis results. SynerGEE remembers these settings from session to session. Once
they are set, they will not change unless you change them yourself.
Model and analysis options are included in application settings when you load or save an application settings
file. For more information, see Settings Groups and Settings Files on page 189.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
On the left side of the Model and Analysis Options editor, select from the different tab names to
access the available model and analysis options. The following sections describe the different tasks
that you can perform:
-
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
User Guide
438
SynerGEE Analyses
2
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Exceptions tab. The following table describes
the different options that you can set.
Exception Loading
Limits
Sets the continuous and emergency loading limits that will trigger an
exception.
Voltage exceptions
Seasonal ratings
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
SynerGEE Analyses
2
439
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Model tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
General Options
Switched Capacitor
Options
User Guide
440
SynerGEE Analyses
Switched Capacitor
Start Options
Overhead conductor
resistance
Regulator Options
User Guide
Select one of the following options to set the temperature setting for
overhead conductor resistance:
Select one of the following options. Note that these options apply to
regulator devices only, and not the active LTC components of
transformers.
SynerGEE Analyses
441
Regulator Start
Options
Select one of the following options. Note that these options apply to
regulator devices only, and not the active LTC components of
transformers.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Analysis tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Iteration Limit
Convergence
Tolerance
Voltage Mismatch
Tolerance
User Guide
442
SynerGEE Analyses
Earth Resistivity
Specifies after how many iterations you want the regulators to lock.
Lock Switched
Capacitors After
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Fixes tab.
Select the check box for each automatic correction that you want to enable during your analysis
runs. The automatic corrections that you can enable include the following:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Multi-Year tab. The following table describes
the different options that you can set.
Current Year Only
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
443
Copy Forward
Changes are applied to the current year and copied ahead to all
future years.
Increment Forward
Changes are applied to the current year and the delta between the
new value and the old is applied to each successive year. For
example, if the current year has a value of 1 and you change it to 2,
the current years value will be set to 2, the next year will be set to 3,
and so on.
Proportion Forward
Changes are applied to the current year. The new value is divided by
the old and that result is multiplied to each successive year. For
example, if the current year has a value of 2 and it is changed to 4,
the next year becomes 8, the year after that becomes 16, and so on.
All Years
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Costs tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Detailed cost list
Utility kWh Cost. Cost to the utility per kWh delivered. This
value is ultimately used to determine the cost of losses.
User Guide
444
SynerGEE Analyses
Factors for
Calculating Energy
Preferred Approach
for Energy & Min Load
Each utility uses its own method to perform economic analyses. Daily
load curves are also known as customer zones. For more information,
see Customer zones on page 815.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
On the left side of the Output Options editor, select from the different tab names to access the
available analysis output options. The following procedures describe the different tasks that you can
perform:
-
Selecting which attributes are available in the Results Viewer on page 445
Selecting which attributes are available in the Results tab on page 445
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
SynerGEE Analyses
445
In the Output Options editor, select the Results Viewer tab. Use the check boxes to select which
items you want to include and exclude from the Results Viewer. Selected (checked) attributes will be
visible in the viewer, and cleared attributes will be hidden.
The following table describes additional ways that you can select and clear check boxes.
To ...
Do This ...
Click the Select All button, or use the Ctrl and Shift keys on
the keyboard to select ranges of item names.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
446
SynerGEE Analyses
The Output Options editor is described in more detail in Selecting which attributes are available in the
Results tab on page 445.
For more information on the Results tab, see Viewing results in the SynerGEE editor on page 156.
In the Output Options editor, select the Editor Results tab. Use the check boxes to specify which
attributes will be displayed in the Results tab of the section, node, and device editors. Selected
(checked) result types and result categories will be visible in the Results tab, and cleared
(unchecked) result types and result categories will be hidden.
The following table describes additional ways that you can select and clear check boxes.
To ...
Do This ...
In the result types list, select the check box for each result
type that you want to show. Clear the check box for each
result type that you want to hide. You can also use the
toolbar buttons at the top of the editor to select (highlight) all
result types, select (check) and clear (uncheck) selected
result types, and reverse the status of selected result types.
Note that even though you select a result type to show,
result types may still be hidden in the Results tab if you have
hidden the result category to which the result type belongs.
Under Power Units, select the power unit type that you want
to use in the Results tab.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
447
configured with the correct cost data. For more information on setting cost options, see Setting up model
costs on page 443.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Cost files
Some cost data is specified directly in SynerGEE, through the Costs tab of the Model and Analysis Options
editor. Other cost data, however, is specified through external MiddleLink-formatted text files, known as cost
files. These text files are necessary for the detailed, item-by-item cost parameters required by certain
applications, such as facility selection.
The topics listed below contain information specifically on cost files. For more information on specifying other
cost data, see Global costs on page 449.
In the MiddleLink schema, you can see that a 7001 record specifies the costs associated with a new line of a
certain conductor type. The sample record above indicates that the installation of a 1/0 ACSR three-phase
line costs $300,000 per mile for materials, and $60,000 per mile for installation costs, assuming English units.
No data is specified for recovery or maintenance costs.
Note that the monetary figures are in kilodollars-per-length units. The length component is represented by a
SynerGEE long unit of length (LUL), which is a mile in English units, and a kilometer in metric. Therefore, if
your interface is set to metric units, your cost data should also reflect metric units. Although dollar amount will
always be labeled as dollars in the interface, you could use any currency that fits your needs, provided that
it is used consistently throughout all of your cost data.
In the Tools group, click Schemas and then select Supporting Data > Cost.
User Guide
448
SynerGEE Analyses
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Costs tab.
Under Detailed cost list, type a name for the cost file that you want to create.
Click Edit.
Click Yes to confirm that you want to create a new cost file. The new cost file is saved in your
Settings file directory, and opened in the SynerGEE Script Editor.
For information on locating and editing your Settings file directory, see Defining file paths on
page 167.
Use the SynerGEE Script Editor to modify the sample cost file that was created by SynerGEE. For
more information on using the Script Editor, see Using the Script Editor on page 725.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Costs tab.
Under Detailed cost list, if the cost file that you want to edit is not already shown, click the Browse
button to locate the file.
When the correct cost file is listed in the Detailed cost list, click Edit.
Use the SynerGEE Script Editor to modify the sample cost file that was created by SynerGEE. For
more information on using the Script Editor, see Using the Script Editor on page 725.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
449
Global costs
Some costs, such as utility power and energy costs, are global in the model and do not require detailed itemby-item specifications. These costs are specified in the Costs tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor,
and should use units that are consistent with any applied detailed cost file. For more information, see Setting
up model costs on page 443.
PERFORMING AN ANALYSIS
In general, when SynerGEE performs an analysis, it performs the following steps:
1
Evaluates the model for data integrity and compliance. If there are data problems that might affect
the accuracy of analysis results, SynerGEE issues warnings as appropriate. If the problems are
severe enough, the analysis may be terminated altogether.
Performs the analysis. Depending on the complexity of the analysis, the size of your model, and the
speed of your computer, an analysis may take a few minutes, or it might only be a few seconds.
Produces analysis results. Analysis results are produced depending on how you have configured
your output options. For example, they might be presented in a report, or they may simply appear on
the map as annotations. For more information on analysis output options, see Setting analysis
output options on page 444.
In many cases, an analysis runs on selected feeders only. However, there are some exceptions, such as
contingency analysis which may look to adjacent, non-selected feeders for switching options. In addition, if a
subtran is selected, all connected feeders are included for analysis.
Re-running an analysis
SynerGEE allows you to re-run a previous analysis. The subsequent analysis run uses the current feeder/
section selection and analysis options and generates a new report, if enabled. Only the analysis type and
certain limited variations are remembered from the previous analysis.
TO RE-RUN AN ANALYSIS
1
User Guide
450
SynerGEE Analyses
Results import/export. SynerGEE provides a comprehensive results import/export feature. For more
information, see Importing and exporting analysis results on page 452.
Results tab. Most device editors include a Results tab, which provides a tabular view of current
analysis results for that device. For more information on the Results tab, see Viewing results in the
SynerGEE editor on page 156.
Map annotation. You can place results as annotation directly in the map display, allowing a more
topological view of results. For more information on configuring map annotation, see Adding section
and device annotation to the map display on page 207.
Map coloring. You can color sections in the map display based on ranges of analysis results. Map
coloring can be especially convenient for seeing a quick, overall view of model conditions. It can
also help you present technical results to a non-technical audience. For more information on
coloring the map, see Selecting a Coloring Scheme for Sections on page 216.
Results Viewer. You can view results for any analysis and for any facility with the Results Viewer.
The Results Viewer is a separate window that displays the results fields of your choice. For more
information on the Results Viewer, see Using the Results Viewer on page 451.
Broadcaster. The Broadcaster is a stand-alone SynerGEE window that shows results for a selected
category type such as Feeders, Large Customers, or Meters and a selected results type such
as Volts Into, Volts Out, or Pct Pf. For more information on the Broadcaster window, see Using the
Broadcaster on page 451.
Suggestion
Turn on the reporting option in your output options, and print analysis
reports after they are generated. If the report type is HTML, it may
help to generate it without frames. For even greater accountability,
consider saving the report electronically in some archive. For more
information on managing report files, see SynerGEE Reports on
page 456.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
451
Situation
Suggestion
Turn off the reporting option in your output options and set your
display settings to color the map by the desired index. As you run the
analysis, you will be able to see the colors update on the map, and
using the legend you will be able to determine what they mean. For
more information on coloring the map by results, see Selecting a
Coloring Scheme for Sections on page 216.
Turn off the reporting option in your output options and open the
editor for the regulator. Select the Results tab and you can watch the
regulator results update with each analysis run, such as tap positions.
For more information on the Results tab, see Viewing results in the
SynerGEE editor on page 156.
Turn off reporting in your output options and set your map to display
annotations of the applicable load-flow results parameters that
interest you. If your model is large, you can improve performance by
having annotations appear on queried sections only. For more
information on results annotations, see Adding section and device
annotation to the map display on page 207. For more information on
using the query set, see Using the Query Set on page 173.
You can also press F4 on the keyboard to open the Results Viewer.
User Guide
452
SynerGEE Analyses
Do This ...
Select Just items in map view. The list of facilities will update
automatically as you zoom and pan in the SynerGEE map
display.
Select the facility that you want to edit, and then click Edit.
Select the facility that you want to zoom to, and then click Zoom.
If desired, you can select the Auto check box to automatically
zoom to each facility as you select it in the list.
Transport analysis results to another application, such as drafting software, for viewing.
Import results from another application or source into SynerGEE, perhaps to leverage SynerGEEs
flexible coloring and annotation features for viewing.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
453
In older versions of SynerGEE, you could have certain analyses automatically generate a results database.
This functionality has been retired and replaced with the newer import/export feature. The import/export
feature provides greater flexibility, a wider range of available results, and an architecture that is better
prepared for future expansion.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
454
SynerGEE Analyses
1
Set up DSAs for the export and/or import. For more information, see Setting up DSAs for results
import and export on page 454.
Run an analysis to produce some results. If you do not run at least one analysis, the applicable
results will not be available. For example, if you have not run any fault analyses, no fault results will
be available for export.
Export results. For more information, see Exporting results on page 455.
Manipulate, store, or otherwise manage the results outside of SynerGEE, however suits your needs.
Import results. For more information, see Importing results on page 455.
Produce a results report to verify the import. For more information, see Reporting on results on
page 456.
Annotate and/or color the map with the new results. For more information, see Adding annotation
based on analysis results on page 208.
Export. To export results, you should have a Results type DSA. During DSA creation, you should
specify a DSA name, a database format as the provider, and Results as the contents.
Import. To import results, you must have a Custom type DSA. A custom data source is any
database that has a table with a SectionId column. During DSA creation, you should specify a DSA
name, database format as the provider, Custom as the contents, and the specific table from which
you plan to import results.
Tip:
The database table name is important. When you import results with the DSA, you cannot
select a different table from the database. All results must come from this table, for this
particular DSA.
The reason for these two different DSAs for the same type of data is flexibility. The custom DSA for importing
allows you to import results generated from any source, not just SynerGEE. The only requirement is that the
source table has a SectionId column. For more information on creating DSAs to use custom content, see
Creating DSAs with custom content on page 80.
Tip:
User Guide
A DSA can have multiple content types. For example, you could create a single DSA to a certain
database called MyResults.mdb and specify its contents as both Results and Custom.
SynerGEE Analyses
455
Exporting results
TO EXPORT RESULTS
1
The specific set of results to export. If you do not see the desired set
in the list, you may need to run the applicable analysis first to produce
some results.
Tip:
The items in this list reflect the BRF files found in your
Output folder. For more information on BRF files, see
Important information on results handling on page 453.
The DSA of the target file where the results should be written. For
more information, see Setting up DSAs for results import and export
on page 454.
Target table
The database table to receive the results, within the target file.
Writing options
Select from one of the following options to specify how to handle the
results table:
Importing results
TO IMPORT RESULTS
1
User Guide
456
SynerGEE Analyses
2
The DSA of the source file that contains the results. For more
information, see Setting up DSAs for results import and export on
page 454.
The target results set. Upon import, SynerGEE will create a BRF file
in your Output folder that reflects this name, and the results contained
therein will be available for coloring and annotation.
It is important to understand that these results are moving to a binary
results file, not SynerGEEs memory. For a discussion on this
concept, see Important information on results handling on page 453.
Reporting on results
The results manager includes a reporting mechanism to display the current results sets in memory. The
report contains all the results sets in memory, current with any imports you performed.
TO REPORT ON RESULTS
1
Use the Report Results editor to select the result set that you want to view in the report.
SYNERGEE REPORTS
SynerGEEs analysis reports are generally provided in two formats: a static HTML report style and a more
interactive grid-style report. The Output Options editor in SynerGEE provides you with several options to
control how the reports are generated.
User Guide
Grid-style reports. Grid-style reports provide a variety of options to customize the appearance and
content of the report. Most notably, you can control where in SynerGEE the report will appear
either docked on a specific side of the SynerGEE display, or free-floating in a window independent
SynerGEE Analyses
457
of SynerGEE, or in a tabbed window in the SynerGEE environment. You can select which data
columns are shown in the report, and you can use filtering tools to control what data is shown in the
report. Grid-style reports can be saved to HTML, CSV, or Excel, or database formats, where further
data manipulation can be done for a truly powerful reporting package.
HTML reports. HTML reports can only be displayed in a tabbed SynerGEE window. HTML reports
can also be generated with or without frames. Frame reports are generally better for online
navigation, while non-frame reports are better for printing and archiving. Although these reports are
static and cannot be modified from within SynerGEE, they can be viewed in any web browser and
can easily be copied to other file locations without the need to perform a specific save as or export
operation.
Many SynerGEE analysis reports include charts embedded in the chapters of the report. For example,
SynerGEEs time-based analyses, including the Summer and Winter Ratings analysis and the Single-Year
analysis, use charts instead of tables to show the results of the analysis. These report-based charts use the
same charting software as the stand-alone chart types that are discussed in SynerGEE Charts on
page 479.
As each report is generated, the report data is saved in your Output folder, which by default is a subfolder in
your SynerGEE documents folder. It is important to note that all existing files are automatically deleted from
the Output folder each time you start SynerGEE. If you want to save a report of any type, use the Save and
Export options that are available in SynerGEE when you are viewing the report. As long as you do not save
the report in the Output folder, the report will be available for future use outside of SynerGEE.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with SynerGEE reports.
User Guide
458
SynerGEE Analyses
Take note that some SynerGEE analyses and tools will always generate a report, even if you have disabled
the reporting option.
You can also use the Output tab of the Output Options editor to select whether to automatically update
annotation and coloring in the map display after an analysis is complete.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
In the Output Options editor, select the Output tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Generate Report
Select this option to have SynerGEE generate a report for all analysis
types. If this option is not selected, SynerGEE produces no analysis
reports at all. Take note that, because some analyses such as
contingency analysis have no value without the report, you should
take care when disabling the Generate report option.
Tip:
If you select the Generate report option, you must also select the type
of report that SynerGEE will generate. The report types are described
in the table rows that follow.
For more information on SynerGEE reports, see SynerGEE Reports
on page 456.
User Guide
Select this option to generate analysis reports in an interactive, gridstyle format. This format, which is available for most report types, is
described in detail in Grid-style reports on page 467. If you select
this option and a grid-style report is not available for a generated
report type, an HTML With Frames report will be generated.
Dockable Report
Window
SynerGEE Analyses
459
Select this option to generate reports in an HTML format that does not
use framed windows. This format is described in detail in HTML
reports on page 477.
Select this option to have SynerGEE update the map display after an
analysis is complete. You should leave this option selected under
most circumstances.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Output Options editor, select the Options tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Repeat table heading
every rows
For HTML tables, SynerGEE will reinsert the heading after the
number of rows specified here. Repeating the table heading row
allows you to scroll through long tables without losing track of what
data is contained in each column.
This option does not apply to grid-style reports.
Select this option to only show records in analysis reports that include
exceptions.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
460
SynerGEE Analyses
In the Output Options editor, select the Notes tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
To ...
Do This ...
Use the text area to type the note that you want to include
with each analysis report.
Click the Show Notes check box and also click the Prompt
For Notes Before Each Analysis check box.
If desired, use the text area to type default text for your
analysis report notes. You will be given the opportunity to
modify this text when you start an analysis.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Printing reports
Reports can be printed in the same way as any other SynerGEE view. To print a report or to configure your
printing options for tabbed-window reports, click on the Pole icon at the left end of the ribbon bar and select
the Print option. To print a report or to configure your printing options for dockable reports, click the Printer
icon in the report toolbar and select the appropriate option.
Printed reports may not always appear exactly as they do on the screen or as they do during a print preview.
This may occur for several reasons, including the differences between printers and configurations.
For more information on printing in SynerGEE, see Printing on page 178.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
461
This information can be useful for tracking down problems. It can also help you remember the conditions
under which an analysis was performed, especially if you are viewing the report again at a later date.
Use the Warnings tab in the Model and Analysis Options editor to suppress selected warning types from your
analysis reports. Refer to the following procedure for more information.
Perform the following steps to open the Model and Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Warnings tab.
Select the check box for each warning type that you want to disable in your analysis reports. The
warnings that you can disable include the following:
Section length
Section height
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
462
SynerGEE Analyses
Dockable reports
SynerGEEs dockable reports allow you to anchor grid-style reports inside the SynerGEE environment in any
location that you prefer -- at the top of the application window, or the bottom, or the left side or the right side,
or in any combination of these positions when you are viewing multiple reports. Figure 8-2 shows a typical
dockable report configuration, where two reports have been docked on the right-side of the SynerGEE
window and the SynerGEE map display is shown on the left. Unlike traditional reports, the dockable report
feature allows you to see both report content and the map display at the same time. You can move the
borders of the docked windows to resize and reposition the report areas and the map display area to best suit
your personal preferences.
Only grid-style reports can be viewed in the dockable report environment, and the full functionality of gridstyle reports, as described in Grid-style reports on page 467, is available in the dockable format. The
following sections describe several topics that are specific to working with dockable reports.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
463
Select Generate Report, and then Prefer Grid Style, and then Dockable Report Windows.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Click and hold the title bar of the report, or the reports tab name if you have multiple reports
generated and you only want to move one report. Anchor position symbols will appear in the
SynerGEE application, indicating the various positions where you can dock the report. This is shown
in Figure 8-3.
User Guide
464
SynerGEE Analyses
3
Drag the report on top of one of the anchor positions and release the mouse button.
Any additional reports are generated in the same area where you last docked a report, with each
report separated by tabs. You can move any report at any time to any docking position, or move the
report to a free floating window. Figure 8-4, for example, shows the anchor positions when one
report has already been docked in the right-side of SynerGEE and a second report is being dragged
to a new location.
Note in Figure 8-4 that there are four external anchoring positions located around the edges of the
screen, as well as a single anchor control in the middle of the existing report area. The four external
positions are used to anchor the report relative to the entire SynerGEE window. Figure 8-5 shows
the result when the second report is docked using the single anchor control at the bottom of the
screen, where the report spans the entire bottom of the entire application.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
465
By comparison, Figure 8-6 shows the result when the second report is anchored using the bottom
position in the center anchor control. In this case, the second report is docked immediately below
the first report, but not below the map window.
User Guide
466
SynerGEE Analyses
On the right end of the title bar for a docked report, click the pin icon, as shown in Figure 8-7.
When in pin mode, the report will automatically collapse against the appropriate side of the
SynerGEE window, as shown in Figure 8-8. To expand the report, move the mouse cursor over top
of the report name. Once expanded, you can work in the report as you normally would. The report
will collapse when you click anywhere outside of the report area.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
467
To exit auto-hide mode, expand the report and click the pin icon.
Grid-style reports
Grid-style reports provide a number of interactive features that you can use to customize the report. They are
designed to appear similar to the HTML reports, but unlike HTML reports, you have significant control over
the appearance and content of a grid-style report, and you can use the customization features to configure
each individual report chapter as necessary to best suit your needs. For example, you can:
Customize the physical appearance of the report by editing colors and fonts, and saving those
settings to chapter-based template files.
Arrange, sort, filter, and show and hide individual data columns in many reports.
Use right-click menu shortcuts to edit, zoom to, and highlight devices and sections included in the
report.
Use right-click menu shortcuts to open and close switches directly from the report view.
Save the reports as HTML, CSV, and XLS (Microsoft Excel) formats.
Export specific chapters from the report to a database for further manipulation or sharing.
User Guide
468
SynerGEE Analyses
Working with sections and devices included in grid-style reports on page 476
Master template. If you apply the master template to a report and then edit settings for that report,
the new settings are applied to the current report. But they are not saved automatically to the master
template, nor are they applied automatically to other report chapters that also reference the master
template. You must specifically save the settings to the master template file and then regenerate the
report window before you see your changes take effect. If you do not save the master template, the
modified settings will be lost when you close the report window.
The master template is saved by default as an XML file in your Settings file directory. The name of
the master template file is Default_ReportSet.xml.
For information on locating and editing your Settings file directory, see Defining file paths on
page 167.
Chapter template. If you apply the chapter template to a report and then edit settings for that report,
the new settings are applied to the current report only. The modified settings are saved to the
chapter template file as soon as you close the report window, and they are reapplied to that report
chapter as long as the Use Chapter Template option is selected in the Chapter Properties editor.
The chapter template is saved by default as an XML file in your Settings file directory. Each report
chapter has a 5-digit number that is associated with the report; that number can be seen in the
upper-right corner of the report that you are viewing. The name of the chapter template file is
12345_ReportSet.xml, where 12345 is the 5-digit number that is associated with each report
chapter.
For information on locating and editing your Settings file directory, see Defining file paths on
page 167.
You should note that some chapter reports have subchapters, and that subchapters do not have their own
template files. For example, the load-flow report includes a Balanced Results chapter, and the Balanced
Results chapter includes different subchapters for each analyzed feeder. In this case, all subchapters use the
same report settings as the main chapter template. You can see this because each subchapter has the same
5-digit number associated with it 42000. Thus, if you modify the settings for one subchapter, you are
actually modifying the settings for all subchapters. However, keep in mind that the chapter template is not
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
469
saved until you close the report window. Therefore, even though you may edit the settings for one of these
subchapters, you will not see those changes take effect for the other subchapters until you close and
regenerate the report window.
Refer to the procedures listed below for more information.
To restore a chapter report template to the master template defaults on page 470
To restore the master report template to the original SynerGEE defaults on page 470
Display the report and report section that you want to edit.
Use the Fonts, Colors, and Miscellaneous tabs in the Chapter Properties editor to edit the color
properties, font properties, and line settings for the report chapter that you are viewing. The options
that you can edit are self-explanatory and thus not repeated here. The preview display in the
Chapter Properties editor shows the change that each edit will make to the report.
Close the report window. Note that the changes you made to the report chapter will not be saved to
the template until you close the report window.
Display the report and report section that you want to edit.
Use the Fonts, Colors, and Miscellaneous tabs in the Chapter Properties editor to edit the color
properties, font properties, and line settings for the report chapter that you are viewing. The options
that you can edit are self-explanatory and thus not repeated here. The preview display in the
Chapter Properties editor shows the change that each edit will make to the report.
You can also right-click in the report window of the desired report chapter and select Save
to Master Template.
Note that the changes will not be reflected in other report chapters until you close and regenerate
the report window. Only those chapters that are assigned to use the master template (in the Chapter
Properties editor) will be updated to use the new master template edits. Reports that are assigned to
use the chapter report template will still use the chapter-specific settings.
User Guide
470
SynerGEE Analyses
Display the report and report section that you want to edit.
Run the analysis that generates the grid-style report that you want to view, and then select the name
of the report chapter that you want to edit.
User Guide
Do This ...
a
SynerGEE Analyses
471
To ...
Do This ...
Filter data
Click in the filter area and type the text to filter for, and then click
the Filter button. Delete the text you typed and click the Filter
button again to remove the filter. The filter field is not casesensitive.
Sort data
< or > will filter for items greater or less than the given
value.
!= will filter for items that do not equal the given value.
User Guide
472
SynerGEE Analyses
To ...
Do This ...
You can also use the Output Options editor to generate reports
that show exception data only. The phrase Showing chapters
with exceptions will appear above the reports table of contents
when this global option is selected. Take note that when you
generate a report in this manner, toggling the Only Show
Exceptions option described here in this table row will have no
effect on the report. In other words, it will not toggle the report to
show all data, since only exception data was generated in the
first place.
For more information on setting the global Only Show Items with
Exceptions option, see Configuring report options on
page 459.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
473
Run the analysis that generates the grid-style report that you want to view, and then select the name
of the report chapter that you want to view.
From the report window, use the mouse to highlight the data cells that you want to view in the map
display.
Run the analysis that generates the grid-style report that you want to view, and then select the name
of the report chapter that you want to view.
From the report window, use the mouse to highlight the data cells that you want to graph.
User Guide
474
SynerGEE Analyses
a
Select Export.
In the Report Export editor, use the list area to select the report chapters that you want to export.
The report chapter that you were viewing when you clicked the Export button will be automatically
selected.
You can save the report to HTML format, CSV format, or both HTML and CSV formats at the same
time. Refer to the following table for more information.
To ...
Save the report to HTML
Format
Do This ...
a
Use the Path text box to specify the location and file
name of the saved HTML file.
Use the Path text box to specify the location and file
name of the saved CSV file.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
475
to rename the file and move it to a new folder location. Only the active report chapter can be exported to
Excel in this manner.
For information on locating and editing your Output file directory, see Defining file paths on page 167.
TO EXPORT TO A DATABASE
1
User Guide
476
SynerGEE Analyses
b
In the Export Report editor, select the DSA that you want to use to export the data. If desired, you
can click the ... button to specify a new database file. SynerGEE will prompt you to create a DSA if
you select this option.
Append to table. Select this option to append new data to the end of an existing table in
the database.
Empty table. Select this option to add the new data into an empty table if there is one
available.
Replace table. Select this option to replace an existing table with the new data.
Use the Target Table text box to specify the name of the database table that you want to append,
create, or replace.
Open the editor for an overloaded fuse on a report, perhaps to check the rating.
Quickly step through a suggested recovery plan produced by contingency analysis to evaluate its
feasibility.
Quickly zoom to a section or device listing in an error or warning to find and correct the problem.
The following list provides some of the options that are available from the right-click menu of a grid-style
report.
Find. Use this option to search for other occurrences in the report of the selected text (that is, the
text where you right-clicked). Take note that this option does not provide access to the SynerGEE
search tool.
Copy. Use this option to copy the selected text in a report and add it to the clipboard.
Edit. Use this option to open the editor for the selected section or device.
Zoom. Use this option to automatically switch to the map display window and zoom to the location
of the selected section or the parent section of the selected device.
Add to Query. Use this option to add the selected section to the query list.
Zoom Feeder. Select this option to automatically switch to the map display window and zoom to the
boundary of the feeder that contains the selected section or device.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
477
Add {section or device} to TCC. Select this option to add the conductor damage curve (or device
protective curve) to the TCC window. If the TCC window is not currently open, SynerGEE will create
a new one.
HTML reports
HTML reports are area always generated for some SynerGEE reports, and can optionally be generated for all
SynerGEE reports. When HTML reports are generated, they are stored automatically in your Output folder,
which by default is a subfolder of your SynerGEE documents folder. The HTML files can easily be copied to
other file locations and can be viewed in any web browser, independent of SynerGEE.
You can use the Output tab of the Output Options editor to specify whether SynerGEE will generate HTML
reports with or without frames. Frames are an HTML feature that allow multiple windows within a particular
frameset, with individual contents in each frame. SynerGEE HTML reports typically have a frame on the left
side of the screen that provides links to the report content, which is displayed in a frame on the right side of
the screen. Frame reports are generally better for online navigation, but non-frame reports are better for
printing and archiving.
Whether you view the HTML report with or without frames, keep in mind you are viewing a static HTML
window, no different than if you are viewing an HTML page in a web browser. Therefore, the HTML reports do
not offer any of the customization options that are available with the grid-style reports.
Non-analysis reports
SynerGEE includes a collection of miscellaneous reports designed to help you manage your model and its
associated data. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
478
SynerGEE Analyses
Digest report
The SynerGEE Digest report is a comprehensive reporting mechanism for topology, construction, and data
issues in your model. The report is divided into a number of subreports, which in turn are divided into a
number of chapters. You can view the subreports and chapters by clicking on the names on the left side of
the report window. The Digest report includes the following subreports:
Inventory. The Inventory subreport provides a complete inventory of your facilities, including certain
key data items about them.
Topology. The Topology subreport provides a comprehensive look at your model from a topology
and connectivity standpoint. You can see node information, equipment locations, section
orientation, and much more.
Check Data. The Check Data subreport provides a detailed sweep of your model for data issues.
This report is your best resource for locating and fixing data problems that may be causing analyses
to fail or under perform. For more information on the check data report, see Check Data report on
page 137.
Loads. The Loads subreport provides a summary of loads in the model, including distributed, spot,
large customers, and projects load.
Results. The Results subreport provides a summary of analytical results for sections and
equipment. These reports require that you run the applicable analysis first, normally a load-flow and/
or fault analysis. They present much of the same information as a normal analysis report, except in
a more summarized format.
Multi-Year. The Multi-Year subreport displays brief comparative summaries of multi-year data
results. Useful in comparing overall construction and performance over the course of the modeled
years.
Feeder Details. The Feeder Details subreport displays feeder and subtran information, such as
amp rating, positive sequence rating, and more in one centralized location.
Prot. Curve Defs. The Protection Curve Definitions subreport provides a detailed tabular view of all
the curves contained in the SynerGEE protection database. Organized by device type, the report
includes items such as model numbers, ratings, and curve types for each item in the database.
Since the protection database includes over 10,000 curves, this report can be quite large.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
479
Zones report
The Zones report provides a detailed look at zone characteristics and implementation in your model. The
report includes the following items:
SYNERGEE CHARTS
SynerGEEs custom chart feature can be used to create charts showing data from any results set or any
results type that is available in the SynerGEE editor. You can customize a wide variety of chart features, from
the title name to the font sizes to the use of color and axis lines.
Take note that in addition to the custom reports described in this section, many SynerGEE analysis reports
also include charts embedded in the chapters of the report. For example, SynerGEEs time-based analyses,
including the Summer and Winter Ratings analysis and the Single-Year analysis, use charts to show the
results of the analysis. These report-based charts use the same charting software as the stand-alone chart
User Guide
480
SynerGEE Analyses
types and can be modified, exported, and printed following the same instructions discussed in the topics
listed below.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the chart window:
a
SynerGEE Analyses
481
If you are editing an existing chart, use the Groups and Charts fields in the upper-left corner of the
chart window to select and load the chart you want to edit. For more information, see To load a
custom chart on page 482.
Use the fields on the left side of the Chart window to configure the custom chart. The following table
describes the process for setting up each custom chart type.
Bar Chart
Pie Chart
Line Chart
Scatter Chart
Under Data, select the data type that you want to view
in the custom chart.
Under Data, select the data type that you want to view
in the custom chart.
Under X Axis and Y Axis, select the data type that you
want to view on the X-axis and Y-axis of the custom
chart.
Under X Axis and Y Axis, select the data type that you
want to view on the X-axis and Y-axis of the custom
chart.
If you are creating a new chart, click New. A new chart window will open showing the edits you have
made.
User Guide
482
SynerGEE Analyses
or
If you are updating an existing chart, click Update. The current chart window will be updated to
reflect the edits you have made.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the chart window:
a
Use the fields on the left side of the chart window to create a custom chart. See Creating custom
charts on page 480 for more information.
In the upper-left corner of the chart window, next to Groups, select the name of an existing group if
you want to save the custom chart to that group, or type the name of a new group if you want to
save the custom chart to a new group. (The group is a simple way to help you organize your saved
charts.)
Next to Charts, type the name of the chart you want to save, or select an existing saved chart if you
want to replace that chart.
Click Save. If you are replacing a saved chart, click Yes to confirm the action.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the chart window:
a
In the upper-left corner of the chart window, next to Groups, select the name of the group that
includes the saved chart that you want to load. (The group is a simple way to help you organize your
saved charts.)
Next to Charts, select the name of the chart that you want to load.
Click Load. The saved chart will load in a new chart window, identified by the tab name on the right
side of the chart.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the chart window:
a
In the upper-left corner of the chart window, next to Groups, select the name of the group that
includes the saved chart that you want to delete.
Next to Charts, select the name of the chart that you want to delete.
Click Delete, and then click Yes to confirm the deletion. If you delete the last chart in a group, the
group will be deleted as well.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
483
Modifying a chart
SynerGEEs charting windows allows for a variety of ways that you can modify a chart. Some of these options
are available from the CONTROLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, while a larger number of options are
accessible through the right-click menu on the Chart window, or the chart Properties editor.
This User Guide does not attempt to document all of the options that are available, nor all of the ways you
can set them. Most of the options are self-explanatory. For example, the Font Size option can be used to
change the size of all fonts in the current Chart view. The Font Size option is available in the CONTROLS tab
of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the in the chart window right-click menu, and in the General tab of the chart
Properties editor. Other charting options allow you to modify the charts title, colors, and axis settings.
In the Export editor, under Export Destination, select either Clipboard or File. If you select File, click
the Browse button to specify the name and location of the file you want to save.
Under Export Size, specify the size of the file that you are exporting. You can specify measurement
units in Millimeters, Inches, or Points.
Click Export.
Printing a chart
Perform the following procedure to print the current SynerGEE chart.
On the right-side of the SynerGEE chart window, select the tab for the chart that you want to print.
Under Export Size, specify the size of the file that you are exporting. You can specify measurement
units in Millimeters, Inches, or Points.
User Guide
484
SynerGEE Analyses
5
Click Print.
In the Print editor, select the printer where you want to send the chart. You can also edit the Printing
Style and the DPI setting from this editor. If desired, you can also click Setup to access your printer
settings editor.
When your printer settings are ready, click OK. SynerGEE sends the chart to the selected printer.
On the right-side of the SynerGEE chart window, select the tab for the chart that you want to close.
In the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click Remove Tab.
Underneath the SynerGEE ribbon bar, locate the tab for the chart window.
WHAT-IF ANALYSIS
The what-if analysis is a script-based tool that allows you to propose changes to the model and then view the
outcome of these changes without actually applying them. This can be immensely helpful to planners and
engineers for evaluating alternative load values, switching plans, regulator settings, and model changes in
order to weigh the benefits and costs of a proposed change to your system.
The what-if scripts rely on the MiddleLink format and operate in the same way as most other script-building
modules. Scripts can be written for load data, outage events, equipment data, cost records, and countless
other scenarios.
Most analysis types in SynerGEE can be run with what-if scenarios, including load-flow, check coordination,
reliability, and motor studies. SynerGEE will initiate and invoke the changes when an analysis is run, and then
undo them when the analysis is finished. This is a non-committal way of testing out new plans for your model.
Unlike partials or subsets, which cannot be undone, what-ifs give you the ability to modify your model for
analysis without making a permanent change.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
485
On the What-Ifs tab of the What-If Options editor, select What-Ifs Are On. You must select this
check box to edit any other settings in the What-If Options editor. Selecting the What-Ifs Are On
check box will also enable the What-Ifs feature for any analyses that you perform. However, you can
use the editor to individually enable and disable what-if scripts, as described later in this procedure.
When you are done editing the scripts, you can also clear the What-Ifs Are On check box to
disable the running of What-If scripts. Although disabled, the edits that you make will be retained for
future use.
Use the What-If Options editor to create and edit scripts, enable scripts, and delete scripts. Refer to
the following table for more information on the tasks that you can perform.
To ...
Create a new what-if script
Do This ...
a
Click New.
Click OK.
User Guide
486
SynerGEE Analyses
To ...
Edit a what-if script
User Guide
Do This ...
a
Click Rename.
Click OK.
Click Delete.
SynerGEE Analyses
487
UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS
The uncertainty analysis can be used to test several different components of a system by placing percentage
variations on key parameters. Percentage variations can be based on your own estimations and hunches, or
on arbitrary numbers that you want to test on your model. There are no recommended levels of uncertainty;
all test numbers are chosen based on your needs. The analysis can be run as many times as you like.
The uncertainty analysis uses load-flow to generate the results, which are confidence intervals broken into
the following chapters:
Summary
Amps
Volts
kW
kvar
Z1
Z0
The uncertainty analysis can be run at any time and for several different reasons. The end goal is to
determine the confidence intervals, or values or variance, for several different key components in your model:
Distributed load kVA, spot load kVA, distributed load I, Z, PQ (captures the impact of a load with voltage
change), line length, line height, and conductor spacing. Based on the results, you may decide to make
changes to your plans and/or structure.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
488
SynerGEE Analyses
Perform the following steps to open the Uncertainty Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Uncertainty and then select Settings.
In the Parameter Variation section of the Uncertainty Analysis Options editor, enter percentage
values in as many or as few of the parameter variation fields as you choose. Each parameter
variation will affect the percentage variation of its proper components.
In the Number of Analysis Runs section, select a small, medium, or large sample size. The analysis
will run 50, 100, or 200 load-flows, respectively.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
489
If you have not already done so, use the Uncertainty Analysis Options editor to configure options
related to the analysis. For more information, see Setting up an uncertainty analysis on page 488.
R&D ANALYSIS
The R&D analysis is an area where special research and development efforts are developed and tested by
GL Noble Denton. These tools, when available, are launched through R&D scripts, which generally are not
provided as a part the SynerGEE Electric installation. GL Noble Dentons Technical Support team will provide
you with further instructions if you need to use this area of SynerGEE.
User Guide
490
SynerGEE Analyses
CONCEPTS VIEW
The Concepts View provides support for the demonstration of fundamental SynerGEE modeling calculations.
It acts as a window into the analysis engine so that engineers are better able to understand how SynerGEE
determines analysis results. This tool is not connected in any way to your SynerGEE model or database.
Therefore, any experimental calculations or adjustments to the components of the Concepts View will not
affect the model or any other function of SynerGEE.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
On the left side of the Concepts View window, select from the available tab names to view the
different Concepts View applications. Refer to the following topics for more information:
-
Length
Adjusting the cable length will cause a change in the voltage values on the
phases in the pole diagram as well as in the impedance and admittance
calculations.
Volts
Allows a specific value, based on a 120 volt base. This value affects the
voltage values on the phases in the pole diagram.
Amps
Adjusting the slides on the amp values affects the voltage values on the
phases in the pole diagram.
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
491
Conductors
You can select the conductor type for each phase which (most likely) yields a
change in the voltage values, as well as the impedance and admittance
calculations.
Impedance
Shows the calculations used by SynerGEE to arrive at the impedance value for
each phase. These calculations are affected by changes made elsewhere in
the Concepts View.
Admittance
Shows the calculations used by SynerGEE to arrive at the admittance value for
each phase. These calculations are affected by changes made elsewhere in
the Concepts View.
User Guide
492
User Guide
SynerGEE Analyses
CHAPTER
9
Loads and Load
Analyses
SynerGEE provides a detailed load model that can be configured in a variety of different ways, with a variety
of different options. In addition, SynerGEE can apply distributed loads throughout your model automatically,
using metered data such as feeder and/or subtran demands and load allocation analysis.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
SETTING UP LOADS
Loads in SynerGEE are represented by the standard real and reactive components, kW and kvar, at the
section level. Once properly set up, load handling is generally straightforward and intuitive.
However, setting up loads can be a detailed process, especially depending on how accurate and complex
you wish to be. There is no single method or solution for all models. Setting up loads can be a multi-step and
ongoing process, one that requires careful thought and good engineering decisions.
SynerGEE provides a detailed load model that can be configured in a variety of different ways, with a variety
of different options. In addition, SynerGEE can apply distributed loads throughout your model automatically,
using metered data such as feeder and/or subtran demands and load allocation analysis.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
494
Load types
In general, SynerGEE identifies five types of load models. In many cases, these different models have a
strong overlap in analytical effect and are distinguished largely by how you create and interact with them.
Distributed loads. Distributed load is the normal, non-itemized load on your system. Distributed
load data is normally calculated for you by load allocation analysis, often using transformer
connected kVA. Usually, distributed load in a model represents a good averaging of system loading,
but the accuracy may vary according to your allocation method and supporting data.
Spot loads. Spot loads are special, stable loads that you assign in addition to distributed load. A
spot load often represents a predictable and substantial large load, such as an industrial customer,
that you have accurate information about and would not be properly represented by distributed load.
Spot loads can be assigned and turned on and off individually, by section.
Projects. Projects are a means of placing multiple, itemized spot loads on a single section.
Analytically, they behave similarly to spot loads, but they provide a variety of features for more
comprehensive management. For more information, see Projects (Load) on page 511.
Large customers. Large customers are also similar to spot loads, except that they can also model
a scheduled, distributed load component. Unlike most other load models, large customers are
handled similar to devices, with map symbols and independent editors. As such, you can leverage
SynerGEEs search, zoom, and explorer features to manage them. For more information, see
Large Customers and Distributed Generation on page 503.
Areas of interest. An area of interest provides a means of applying a simple, spatial load to the
model and assign it to a section. Analytically, areas of interest load behaves identically to a spot
load. For more information, see Areas of Interest on page 217.
In summary, all loads generally have a similar, if not identical, analytical effect, with respect to their locations
on sections. The differences primarily involve how the loads are applied to the model and how the data is
managed afterward.
Feeder and subtran demands, by means of meter devices modeled downstream from the sources
With this information, load allocation can produce a functional model, capable of reliable analysis. In many
cases, the resulting model may be sufficient for your needs. However, load allocation is limited to certain
User Guide
495
basic assumptions and while the model can produce useful results, there are many more ways to improve the
accuracy of your model. These include the following:
Load I,Z,PQ. One of the easier means of improving load accuracy is to adjust your load constant
%I, %Z, and %PQ. No load is ever truly 100% of any component, and SynerGEE provides a variety
of tools for determining and settings these values within your model. For more information, see
Load %I, %Z, %PQ on page 496.
Customer load curves. In SynerGEE, you can implement 24-hour daily load curves to conduct
very precise, off-peak analyses. For more information, see Customer Load Curves/Time-of-Day
Analysis on page 808.
Load growth and growth curves. To simulate a future increase (or decrease) in load, you can use
growth factors as simple multipliers against current load. For more information, see Load Growth
on page 801.
Capacity factors. Capacity factors can be specified at the section level to indicate the percent
effect of the specified load. Capacity factors can be useful for compensating for oversized/underutilized transformers, which caused load allocation to allocate an excessive amount of load,
compared to the real values that are known to you. For more information, see Capacity Factors on
page 502.
In general, all load modeling methods and tools can be combined in a variety of ways to achieve your desired
result. It is up to you to evaluate your needs, versus the data available to you, to determine a workflow
appropriate for your situation.
Placing loads in the center of the section avoids ambiguity during switching. SynerGEE allows
extensive switching actions. Because switches are placed at the ends of sections, load modeling at
nodes would make it difficult to determine how loads would be fed during switching operations. The
assignment of loads is clear with the loads in the center and the switches at the ends of sections.
User Guide
496
It can be shown that the modeling of a load in the center of the section more accurately simulates a
distributed load with respect to voltage drop. Losses are also closely modeled in this manner.
Studies and simulations show that the SynerGEE approach to load placement and modeling is very
well-suited for distribution system simulation.
Each section may contain a by-phase spot and by-phase distributed load. Distributed load is generally
calculated through load allocation analysis and does not necessarily represent the exact real-world load on
each section. Spot loads, on the other hand, are considered to be known loads with metered demands. As
such, they are not altered by SynerGEE load allocation. In the end, all distributed and spot loads combined
should match the demands specified by applicable upstream meter devices, a process handled by load
allocation analysis. For more information on load allocation analysis, see Load Allocation Analysis on
page 549.
Loads can only be entered into valid phases of a line section. Consider a line section containing conductors
A, B, and a neutral. Loads can be entered for phase A and phase B. If the load were connected line-line, only
the phase AB field could contain load. Both kW and kvar values must be entered for loads. Entering only kW
implies that the load has a power factor of 100%.
Only the load values for kW and kvar are used during load-flow analysis. Values for kWh, kVA, and
customers are not utilized during load-flow calculations. For more information on load-flow analysis, see
Load-Flow Analysis on page 512.
User Guide
Sections. In the Section editor, you can assign percentages directly in the Load - Dist and Load Spot tabs. Percentages assigned to sections only apply to those respective sections. For more
information, see Adding distributed loads to a section on page 284 and Adding spot loads to a
section on page 287.
497
Section editor, specifying SynerGEE to use %I, %Z, %PQ from the assigned customer class
Customer classes. In the Customer Class editor, you can assign I, Z, PQ values to the class. A
section uses these values instead of its own if the section uses that customer class, via its customer
zone, and the option to use values from the customer class is checked in the Section editor, in the
Load - Dist tab and/or Load - Spot tab.
To assign I, Z, PQ values to customer classes, you must use the Customer Class editor. However, with
sections, you have the option of using the Multiple Editor to assign values to large areas at once. For more
information on using the Multiple Editor, see Using the Multiple Editor on page 177.
For more information on editing a customer class, see Editing a customer class on page 811.
Each of these three general load models is used frequently. For each model, the fundamental concept is the
determination of a function that relates current to voltage in terms of the nominal value of power and the
nominal voltage of the load. For example, assume that the following is given:
SNom
kVNom
User Guide
498
S LT = f ( kV , S Nom , kVNom )
I=
Eq 91
*
S LT
kV *
where:
LT
I
=
=
Load type
Load current with applied kV
The sections listed below outline the determination of SLT for constant I, Z, and PQ loads.
S PQ = S Nom
Eq 92
I Nom =
User Guide
*
S Nom
kVNom
Eq 93
499
As the load voltage changes, the load power needed to maintain this value of current is:
*
S I = kV I Nom
= kV
kV
S Nom
= S Nom
kVNom
kVNom
Eq 94
Equation 95
The expression of SI based on the loads applied and nominal voltage is sufficient to represent the constant
current load model.
Z Nom =
2
103 kVNom 103 kVNom
=
*
I Nom
S Nom
Eq 96
As the load voltage changes, the current consumed by the constant impedance model is:
IZ =
*
103 kV kV S Nom
=
2
Z Nom
kVNom
Eq 97
And, the value of load power needed to maintain this load impedance as the load voltage changes is:
kV
kV 2 S Nom
S Z = kV I =
= S Nom
2
kVNom
kVNom
*
Z
Eq 98
Once again, a factor is derived based on load voltage that modifies the nominal load to a corresponding
value, so the constant impedance load model is maintained.
User Guide
500
Co
nst
a
nt P
Q
typ
Current
s ta
on
nt
im
an c
pe d
e ty
pe
Voltage
The curves have been normalized and the scale of the independent axis represents a 20% variation in
voltage. Although all of the curves appear linear, the constant PQ load curve is actually hyperbolic. It is nearly
linear over the practical voltage range used here. Notice how all of the curves intersect at the nominal voltage
point. This shows that the nominal voltage and nominal current correspond to the nominal load power that
has been specified as the same for all three loads in this plot. This intersection is also important to the
creation of the combination model.
Power
Constant PQ type
type
rrent
u
c
t
tan
Cons
pe
e ty
c
n
a
ped
im
t
n
a
ns t
Co
Voltage
User Guide
501
SCM
kV
kV
= S Nom % PQ + % I
+ %Z
0.01
kVNom
kVNom
where:% PQ + % I + % Z = 100%
Eq 99
The factors %PQ, %I, and %Z represent the portion of load that is treated as each of the basic types. The
equation requires that the sum of the three factors be 100%. For more information on load I,Z,PQ and
assigning percentages, see Load %I, %Z, %PQ on page 496.
This equation shows how the effective load is determined from the sections nominal spot or distributed loads,
the sections center voltage, the sections center nominal voltage, and the load weighting factors. The load
becomes a quadratic function of section voltage. The three load types are directly observable in the following
equation:
I Spot =
kV *
Eq 910
I Dist =
The load current for spot and distributed loads is determined during each iteration of the SynerGEE loadflows. Spot and distributed loads are averaged in balanced analysis and applied per-phase in by-phase
analysis. Both types of analysis acknowledge the line-line or line-ground connectivity of the load.
Amps
kVA Demand
Loss
Min. Volts
Max. Ld
100% PQ
367
8115
2.6%
118.3
69%
100% Z
356
7877
2.5%
119.1
67%
100% I
361
7988
2.5%
118.6
68%
40%,40%,20%
360
7965
2.5%
118.7
68%
It can be seen that the impact on losses and loading for this particular feeder is not heavily dependent on the
load models used. The minimum voltage on the feeder does vary by nearly a volt over the load models
User Guide
502
Sample I, Z, PQ values
Listed below are sample values for load I, Z, PQ based on the type of load. These values represent typical
percentages, and a section load may be a complex mix of loads like these and others.
Load Type
PF%
%PQ
%Z
%I
100
50
50
80
15-35
20-40
45
Clothes dryers
99
100
Televisions
77
100
Incandescent lighting
100
45
35
20
Fluorescent lighting
90
50
50
87
40
40
20
Arc furnace
72
30
70
90
60
40
85
75
25
80
40
40
20
CAPACITY FACTORS
For distributed loads and spot loads, you can specify a capacity factor, which allows you to simulate underutilized transformers in your system. The factor, which can be from 0 (0%) to 1 (100%) or greater, is applied
as a flat multiplier to connected kVA on all phases during load allocation. If you know that certain
transformers are consistently under-utilized, capacity factors can help you achieve a more accurate
representation of actual load following allocation.
The basic by-phase equation used during load allocation is as follows, where kcapacity is the capacity factor:
: ph
kVAallocation
= kVA: ph kcapacity
Eq 911
Capacity factors are intended to alleviate the manual process of adjusting connected kVA before load
allocation, especially if your connected kVA information is imported and periodically overwritten from another
data source. You could also establish a process that imports capacity factors themselves, perhaps through a
MiddleLink data import. For more information on MiddleLink data import, see Importing GIS Data Using
MiddleLink on page 100.
User Guide
503
Capacity factors apply to load allocation by connected kVA only. All other analyses use the allocated kW and
kvar load components as specified. In addition, the global usage of capacity factors during load allocation is
optional, as controlled in your load allocation options. For more information on setting load allocation options,
see Setting up a load allocation analysis on page 552.
Identifiable map entity with a symbol. At its simplest level, a large customer may be functionally
identical to a spot load. However, the large customer provides a symbol on the map, a listing in the
SynerGEE model explorer, and easier management through tools such as reports.
Combined generation/load. With a large customer, you can combine the generation and load
aspects of a customer into a single entity. In addition, you can apply the simple negative PQ
generation component without the overhead of a normal generator device, with its required
equipment type.
Better integration of load curves. A large customer can incorporate 24-hour load curves into its load
component, similar to a normal spot load. However, a large customer can extend the curve
functionality to the generation side as well, allowing two independent curve sets for each. In this
manner, you can set up precise 24-hour scheduling for the load and generation components, at a
granular percentage level.
SynerGEE provides a detailed load model that can be configured in a variety of different ways, with a variety
of different options. In addition, SynerGEE can apply distributed loads throughout your model automatically,
using metered data such as feeder and/or subtran demands and load allocation analysis.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
504
Expand Large Customers and then select the large customer type that you want to add to your
model. Drag it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the large customer that you want to
edit.
On the left side of the Large Customer editor, select from the different tab names to access the
available settings for the large customer. The following topics describe the different tasks that you
can perform:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Facilities and then select Large Customers. Double click on the name of the large
customer that you want to edit.
In the Large Customer editor, select the Large Cust tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Name
User Guide
Turn Off
505
Select this check box to disable the large customers effect on the
model. If the large customer is disabled, you can still edit the available
settings but it will not have any impact on the model or any analysis.
You can also disable large customers directly from the model explorer
or SynerGEE map display. Right-click on the large customer or large
customer name and select Turn On or Turn Off, as appropriate. When
you perform this action, the Turn Off check box will be selected or
cleared to reflect the current status.
Note
Optional note that includes any additional information that you want to
provide. Notes can be shown on the map display as annotated text.
For more information, see Adding section and device annotation to
the map display on page 207.
Location
Category
Location Link
AMS Link
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
506
Expand Facilities and then select Large Customers. Double click on the name of the large
customer that you want to edit.
In the Large Customer editor, select the Load tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
On/Off/Scheduled
User Guide
507
Actual load data, generally representing peak loads for the large
customer. Use the A, B, and C columns in the loads area to specify
the load values for phases A, B, and C. The values that you enter for
each phase will be summed in the Totals column. If you enter a value
in the Totals column instead, that value will be distributed
proportionally among the first three phases based on the current
values for each phase.
These values can be specified over multiple years for a multi-year
analysis. To specify a value for a specific year, select the desired year
in SynerGEE and then set the load values, as appropriate. As you
change the modeling year, the values will change in the dialog box
according to the loads you have already set.
SynerGEE provides several other methods that you can use to edit
load values. For example:
You can use the SynerGEE Bulk Editor to edit spot loads for
all sections at once. For more information, see Using the
Bulk Editor on page 192.
Capacity Factor
User Guide
508
When load data is entered into any of the fields, click the Balance the
loads button to distribute the data evenly across the A, B, and C
columns.
Harmonic Profile
Contains all of your harmonic profiles which you can associate with a
large customer. Click the Edit button to open the Harmonic Curve
editor.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Facilities and then select Large Customers. Double click on the name of the large
customer that you want to edit.
In the Large Customer editor, select the Generation tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Generation On
User Guide
Select this check box to enable the distributed generator on the large
customer.
Type
509
Voltage Setting
User Guide
510
Generator Output
Specify pf
Rated kW output.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Facilities and then select Large Customers. Double click on the name of the large
customer that you want to work with.
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
User Guide
511
PROJECTS (LOAD)
Projects are a means of itemizing multiple spot loads on a single section, versus the traditional method of a
single by-phase spot load. Projects include the following features:
Separate yearly energizing and retiring of individual loads, for multi-year modeling
A special view of all projects in the model for overview, management, and calculations
Projects can be an important tool for load projection and planning. Their use is optional, and they can be used
in conjunction with traditional spot loads.
SynerGEE provides a detailed load model that can be configured in a variety of different ways, with a variety
of different options. In addition, SynerGEE can apply distributed loads throughout your model automatically,
using metered data such as feeder and/or subtran demands and load allocation analysis.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
512
On/off status
I,Z,PQ
For example, if you turn off a sections spot load, you also turn off any projects assigned to the section. Or, if
you change a spot loads I,Z,PQ values, you are also affecting project I,Z,PQ, because they are using the
same setting.
Projects worksheet. The Project worksheet allows you to view and edit all projects in the currently
selected feeders.
Section editor. The Load - Proj tab in the Section editor allows you to view and edit projects for a
specific section.
Model explorer. The model explorer contains a list of projects for viewing and navigation purposes.
Normally, the Projects View is used to add and edit projects, because it provides an overall view of the entire
model. However, you can use the Section editor to perform the same tasks if you want to work on a sectionby-section basis.
For more information on editing projects using the Projects worksheet and the Section editor, see Setting up
projects for a section on page 289.
LOAD-FLOW ANALYSIS
Balanced and by-phase load-flow analyses calculate current flows, voltage drops, losses, and loading of
lines, equipment, switches, and protective devices. You can perform either type of load-flow analysis for a
substation or selected feeders. If a substation is selected, all feeders of the substation are analyzed, as well
as the substation transformers, buses, equipment, and switches.
There are no limits on the number of sections that can be included in a load-flow analysis. The calculated
results for each section or substation bus can be exported to a database, or a detailed report can be
produced.
SynerGEE can perform four types of load-flow analysis, as described in the following sections:
User Guide
513
User Guide
514
User Guide
515
SynerGEE allows a coupled three-, two-, or one-phase representation of power lines and power
equipment. Unbalanced loading, long single-phase laterals, ungrounded systems, non-symmetrical
transformer banks, mutual coupling, earth return, and device controller actions can all be modeled in
a manner consistent with the actual construction and physical behavior of these devices.
These advantages make SynerGEE a powerful tool for the simulation and analysis of power distribution
systems. In the past, there had been two prohibitive aspects of the radial load-flow described above,
including the handling of loops and generators. Fortunately, GL Noble Dentons research has produced new
mathematical theory, algorithms, and software. For example:
SynerGEE contains a robust algorithm for modeling looped distribution systems. This algorithm is
built directly on top of the radial load-flow engine of SynerGEE so that all of the modeling detail
associated with radial analysis is maintained. In the looped analysis, current flows are determined
through switches that form loops. These flows are determined using a driving point admittance
matrix as seen at the terminals of the loop tie switches. The matrix is used to determine the amount
of current needed to inject into one side and extract from the other side of each switch so that the
voltage drop across the switch is zero. At this point, the state of the looped distribution system can
be determined from the state of the radial system imposed with these switch flows.
SynerGEE can accurately model both synchronous and induction generators. The synchronous
generators have excitor limits and a balanced three-phase back EMF. Induction generators are
modeled with a variable resistive element representing slip. Both of these models are based on
carefully designed models and are powerful tools for representing the behavior of these machines in
unbalanced distribution systems. It can be important for you to simulate cases in which synchronous
cogeneration facilities may aggravate the pre-existing imbalance of their distribution system.
For more information on radial load-flow with loops, see Radial load-flow with loops on page 517. For more
information on generators, see Generators on page 347.
The incorporation of coupled by-phase models so that lines, laterals, unbalanced loads, transformer
windings, and other devices can be properly modeled.
Analysis with no limit to the number of sections, devices, or loop tie switches that can be analyzed.
The attention to detail, ease-of-use, and reliable results represented by the SynerGEE load-flow engine are
characteristic of GL Noble Dentons effort to provide the best modeling and analysis software available.
User Guide
516
Radial load-flow
The SynerGEE radial load-flow engine is detailed and completely by-phase.
By-phase load-flow
SynerGEE includes a very detailed by-phase analysis engine. During by-phase load-flow, the engine
accounts for the following:
Unbalanced loading
Active generators
Balanced load-flow
Balanced analysis is designed to produce useful information for the occasions when by-phase loading and
phasing information is unknown, or for the occasions when you are not interested in seeing by-phase results.
The analysis uses the same by-phase engine and detailed by-phase models as by-phase analysis.
Therefore, to run a balanced analysis, SynerGEE makes internal modifications to the data going into the
engine and the results coming out. In most situations, balanced analysis produces results representing a
single-line model of the distribution system. Loads are averaged over the phases of the associated line
section. Currents are averaged at section intersections.
To achieve the balanced analysis, SynerGEE uses the following steps.
User Guide
The resulting flows and voltages are vectorially averaged over valid phases.
517
This approach allows SynerGEE to have a single, sophisticated analysis engine and one set of models. The
models account for coupling and line admittance for a three-, two- or single-phase grounded or ungrounded
lines, as well as the effects of long laterals.
If no tie switch is modeled, SynerGEE attempts to choose the most suitable location. To help you
determine the appropriateness of this location, versus whether you may want to model a tie switch,
SynerGEE provides a special map coloring scheme. For more information, see Coloring by path
type on page 216.
After the radial solution, the algorithm then closes the tie switches and/or breaks and determines the
appropriate current flow through each switch/former break that results in the exact same voltage on each
side. Once the voltage drops across the switches/breaks are zero, the solution of the set of radial systems is
the same as the solution of the looped system or network. The benefit of this type of analysis is that all of the
detailed by-phase models supported by SynerGEEs radial analysis are supported in the looped analysis. For
example, the self- and mutual-electric and magnetic fields of one-, two-, and three-phase lines are evaluated.
Controllers for individual regulators connected in Open-Delta banks are handled. By-phase loads with various
connections and V/I curves are analyzed. And, the controller for switched capacitor banks connected to a
single phase can be tripped or closed.
User Guide
518
Example system
The example system demonstrates advantages to SynerGEEs by-phase looped analysis that cannot be
found in any other distribution analysis software. The system has loop tie switches forming loops between
two feeders. Each 12.47kV feeder contains a Wye-Gnd/Delta transformer bank that produces a 24.9 kV
ungrounded secondary voltage. A switch ties the two feeders forming a loop through the 12.47 kV grounded
and 24.9kV ungrounded systems. A second switch ties the feeders at a second location in the 12.47 kV
portion. Finally, a third switch forms a loop between single-phase laterals of the second feeder.
B
A
a
+ Vw3 -
2
Vw
Y -
I w2
IC
IN
+ V
w
b
c
C
Wye-Gnd-Delta transformer
The analysis of these two feeders and tie switches is complex for a number of reasons. First, the system
contains a three-phase trunk and many one-, two-, and three-phase laterals, some of which are ungrounded.
Second, there are many complex devices in these feeders such as an Open-Delta voltage regulator bank,
switched capacitors connected in Delta, and two transformer banks. Finally, the load-flow solution is found
with the tie switches placed simultaneously within three distinct areas.
User Guide
519
The first switch, SW1, connects two grounded line sections. The algorithm must determine current flow
through the switch and also neutral or earth return flows through the sections forming the loop. The second
switch ties two ungrounded sections. Even though there are three blades to the switch connecting three
conductors, there are only two independent phases. (The voltages are measured line-line on ungrounded
systems and any voltage can be found from the other two.) Finally, the last switch connects a fairly long
single-phase lateral.
SynerGEE uses a unique approach to form a non-singular electrical equivalent that can be seen by looking
into the tie switches. This allows the powerful by-phase load-flow and the looped analysis to form a modular
and complete method for solving looped systems.
The following table summarizes the voltages on each side of the switch following a SynerGEE by-phase loadflow analysis without analyzing loops.
Voltages on each side of a switch with SynerGEE by-phase radial load-flow
SW1
SW2
SW3
One side
Other side
118.3
120.7
116.9
118.7
116.4
122.9
A/B
117.3
124.3
B/C
117.6
124.7
C/A
115.4
124.8
122.3
120.9
These numbers indicate a significant voltage difference across each phase of each tie switch.
You can now analyze the system with looped analysis to account for the loops formed by the tie switches.
The following table summarizes the voltages on each side of the switches after this analysis.
Voltages on each side of a switch with SynerGEE by-phase looped analysis
SW1
SW2
SW3
One side
Other side
122.0
122.0
122.2
122.2
121.9
121.9
A/B
120.9
120.9
B/C
119.5
119.5
C/A
122.2
122.2
121.5
121.5
User Guide
520
The connected sections have no phases in common (for example, switching from a section with
phasing AB to a section with phasing C).
As would be expected, only those phases common to the connected sections will be tied during by-phase
looped analysis.
B
ABC
B
AC
ABC
Wandering lateral
In a radial model, wandering laterals are modeled indirectly using wandering lateral tie switches, or directly by
allowing loop creation (in the SynerGEE tab of the Preferences editor). If you have any wandering laterals
created by either method, they will be automatically considered by load-flow analysis. For more information
on wandering lateral creation, see Loops and Wandering Laterals on page 253.
User Guide
521
Under standard radial system modeling this loop is prohibited, so the wandering lateral must be modeled by
allowing loop creation (in the SynerGEE tab of the Preferences editor) or by using a tie switch. During loadflow analysis, wandering laterals are handled similarly to other loops. For more information on the process of
solving a system with loops, see About load-flow with loops on page 517.
If no tie switch is used and the phasing is correct, the topology engine will resolve the loop, form an internal
break, and conduct the analysis properly. The internal break should generally occur on the last section of the
lateral. Therefore, if a tie switch is used, it is generally placed on the last section of the lateral, where it
reconnects with the trunk, as follows:
Wandering lateral
tie switch
Wandering lateral tie switches should always be placed at the outward connecting section of the wandering
lateral. If a tie switch is not placed on a wandering lateral, loop errors may result in SynerGEE. Also, if the tie
switch is improperly placed, phasing errors show up when running load-flow or fault analysis with wandering
laterals.
500.1
500.1
1000.7
500.2
500.0
500.0
500.2
500.0
500.1
500.0
500.1
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
Notice the 1000kW on the center phase. It flows from the source, along the wandering lateral to serve the
500kW load there. The remaining 500kW flows around and back to the trunk where it serves the three-phase
load. The 500kW on the outside phases flows right from the feeder to the three-phase load.
To further demonstrate the capabilities of SynerGEE and the placement of wandering lateral tie switches, you
could add a second wandering lateral.
User Guide
522
1000.6
1000.3
1000.2
500.2
1000.9
500.1
1000.7
500.1
500.1
500.1
500.1
500.0
500.1
500.1
500.2
500.1
500.1
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.1
No load was added to the model. Notice the power flow into the first wandering lateral. The second
wandering lateral takes another single-phase flow. The center of the diagram shows power flow on three
single-phase lines. The flows join back up to serve the three-phase load.
Analysis using wandering laterals uses the fully detailed by-phase load-flow model and engine.
Network analysis
The network analysis application contains three powerful methods for analyzing and fixing power
transmission, faults, and outages. Network load-flow, network fault, and network outage analysis comprise a
series of reports that simulate network events.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
523
The network load-flow report details lines, power flow, bus flows (except when a single-phase equivalent is
selected), buses, loads, voltage drop, regulators, and transformers. It also contains summary and topology
chapters. Feeder amps and voltage are updated on the distribution model following a network load-flow
analysis.
User Guide
524
Perform the following steps to open the Network Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Network group, click the text label Network Load-Flow and then select Settings.
Use the Network Analysis Options editor to set up the network analysis. Refer to the following table
for more information on the options that you can set.
Type of Network
Analysis
Load-Flow
Fault
Outage Analysis
Single-Phase
Equivalent Network
Analysis
This option is enabled only when the Analysis Type is set to LoadFlow.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Network Analysis Options editor to select the analysis type
and configure other analysis-related options as desired. For more information, see Setting up a
network analysis on page 523.
User Guide
525
User Guide
526
Perform the following steps to open the Network Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Network group, click the text label Network Load-Flow and then select Settings.
Use the Network Analysis Options editor to set up the network analysis. Refer to the following table
for more information on the options that you can set.
Analysis Type
Load-Flow
Fault
Outage Analysis
User Guide
Single-Phase
Equivalent Network
Analysis
This option is enabled only when the Analysis Type is set to LoadFlow.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
527
If you have not already done so, use the Network Analysis Options editor to select the analysis type
and configure other analysis-related options as desired. For more information, see Setting up a
network analysis on page 523.
SCALE MANAGER
The Scale Manager is a SynerGEE tool that you can use to make temporary global changes to loads and
generation. The Scale Manager includes a number of slider bars for load categories such as distributed
loads, spot loads, large customers, and generators. Adjust a slider bar to the right to increase the loads for
the selected category; adjust the slider bar to the left to decrease the loads for the selected category.
The temporary load changes will be in effect as long as the Scale Manager is open. Once you close the Scale
Manager, the loads will revert to their original values. No permanent model changes are made at any time.
The purpose of the Scale Manager is to allow you to quickly and easily see the effect of increased and
decreased loads in your model. For example, models that will not convert typically will converge if the load is
drastically reduced. With a reduced load, you can explore voltage drops and overloads to try and find
bottlenecks. The Scale Manager makes this type of work extremely easy. You simply reduce the sliders and
then run or re-run your analysis as appropriate.
Another use of the Scale Manager is for photovoltaics intermittence. The Irradiance slider can be used to
increase or decrease the irradiance. This will help you find overvoltage problems and also see where
overloads might occur with the sudden loss of substantial PV.
Refer to the following topic for more information on using the Scale Manager.
In the Scale Manager, adjust a slider bar to the right to increase the loads for the selected category.
Adjust the slider bar to the left to decrease the loads for the selected category. The temporary load
changes will be in effect as long as the Scale Manager is open.
If desired, click the Re-run button to repeat the most recent analysis. You can use this button to see
the impact that adjusted loads will have on your model.
User Guide
528
User Guide
CHAPTER
10
Capacity
SynerGEE provides a variety of analysis tools to help optimize your system and make sound engineering
decisions. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
530
Capacity
The SynerGEE approach, called local optimization, reaches a solution through successively realizable
states. SynerGEE avoids a second approach, known as global optimization, in which the objective may be
found by initially opening all switches and then reconnecting the system. Global optimization tends to lead to
theoretical results that are not very practical, for the following reasons:
Getting from the base state to a global optimum state may require cumbersome switching plans and
contingency studies.
A clear benefit of the local method used by optimal switching is the ease of actual implementation of the
results. You can apply results in the model or in the actual system in a step-by-step fashion, without losing
any loads or customers. You may implement as many recommendations as desired. For instance, if a report
lists eight switching operations, you may look at the various items within the report and decide to apply only
the first three operations. Keep in mind that the results are generated in a cumulative manner according to
performance, and should be implemented in order. If you had eight recommended operations, you could
choose to implement operations 1, 2, and 3. But implementing 1, 3, and 7, for instance, would produce
unpredictable results, irrelevant to the analysis you performed.
Optimal switching does not make changes to the model; it simply reports recommendations. All switching
operations involve all phases of the relative sections. The analysis includes all selected feeders. The program
ignores switches tied to feeders that are not selected in the current view.
A feeder owns all sections to which it is electrically tied. Therefore, a sections feeder may change many
times during an analysis.
Convergence Tolerance
User Guide
In the Switching group, click the text label Optimal and then select Settings.
Capacity
531
2
Use the Switching Options editor to select an objective for the analysis and specify analysis
constraints. The following table describes the different options that you can set.
Objective
Take note that the analysis results table lists values for all of
these options, regardless of which objective was selected for
optimization.
User Guide
532
Capacity
Constraints
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Switching Options editor to select the contingency analysis
method and set other options related to the analysis. For more information, see Setting up an
optimal switching analysis on page 530.
User Guide
Capacity
533
THROW-OVER ANALYSIS
The throw-over analysis analyzes the effects of feeder outages and the resulting pickup in capacity of
adjacent feeders. The analysis only evaluates feeders with an auto-transfer switch that connects the feeder
to an adjacent feeder.
During the analysis, each applicable feeder is taken out of service one at a time. The throw-over switches will
transfer load to the adjacent feeders, and the resulting transfers and loading levels are summarized in the
throw-over analysis report.
The State Master window will also appear after the throw-over analysis is complete. The State Master allows
you to temporarily apply the results of each feeder outage to the model, where the results are displayed in the
SynerGEE map display and elsewhere in SynerGEE. You must restore the model to its original condition
before you can close the State Master. For more information on using the State Master, see State Master on
page 768.
The second section in the report lists each auto-transfer switch pair. The load, low voltage, and maximum
loading on the feeders associated with each switch are given for the normal switch positions and the toggled
switch positions.
User Guide
534
Capacity
These two report sections provide a feeder level and switch level review of the impact of auto-transfer
switches on feeder loading.
The auto-transfer analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For more information
on feeder selection, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
During the analysis, SynerGEE will find all of the automatic switches and reclosers for each feeder and
transfer their load to adjoining feeders. The goal of the analysis is to determine if there is adequate capacity
on the surrounding feeders to pick up all automatic transfers.
For more detailed information on the AFS analysis, see the SynerGEE Electric Engineering Handbook.
User Guide
Capacity
535
CONTINGENCY ANALYSIS
Contingency analysis simulates the loss or fault of a section(s) or a bus and then searches for a switching
recovery plan. Recovery plans are presented with comprehensive reports, which include step-by-step
switching recommendations and often present graphic snapshots of the original model, outaged model, and
recovered model.
Contingency analysis offers several different methods of operation. These are as follows:
Fast Pickup method. The fast pickup method uses a switch path reduced model for picking up
outage. If desired, the resulting output can be sent to the Switch Plan Manager. For more
information, see Fast pickup method on page 536.
Optimized Pickup method. The Optimized Pickup method is a detailed, objective-based process
of determining an optimal recovery plan for outage situations. It has a variety of different options that
allow you to create contingency plans for different types of outages that suit your particular system
and protocol. Compared with the Load Transfer method, it is more of a planning tool, whereas the
Load Transfer method focuses more on current performance and safety. For more information, see
Optimized pickup method on page 536.
Load Transfer method. The primary goal of the Load Transfer method is to switch large portions of
load from the outage area to adjacent feeders, while also isolating the outage area. During the
process, it operates mainly by toggling switch pairs, with a strong focus on system performance.
Therefore, it is most useful for determining whether adjacent circuits will be able to handle
contingency situations, and determining where problems may exist. For more information, see
Load Transfer method on page 537.
The results of contingency analysis can vary significantly depending on the method and options you select.
Therefore, you should be sure that you have it configured correctly for your situation, and that you understand
the process behind the results before incorporating them into a real-world workflow.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
536
Capacity
solutions to the same problem, you should keep in mind that they are solving for different purposes and the
results should be used accordingly. Any given distribution system may have numerous solutions to a
particular problem, and SynerGEE is simply attempting to find the best one according to the settings and data
provided. Regardless of methodology, though, you should always use sound engineering judgment while
evaluating SynerGEE results, with consideration of the unique characteristics of the actual system under
study.
You can select the approach type in the Contingency Analysis Options editor, as described in Selecting the
contingency analysis method on page 537.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Create an outage with a contingency or multiple contingencies, according to the analysis options.
The newly outaged sections are referred to as the outage set.
Isolate the contingency, if it specified in the analysis options. This simulates a fault type outage, in
which the original conditions that produced the outage are considered to still exist.
Open all closed switches in the outage set. This action allows smaller increments of load to be
picked up when switch closing is begun. Without this action, many switch closings to pick up unfed
sections would result in overloading, and possibly models with infeasible load-flow solutions.
Close switches to pick up the outage, according to the specified objective. The objective has a
significant impact on the recommended switching sequence.
The application only considers contingencies within the selected feeders, but uses adjacent non-selected
feeders in the analysis for a switching recovery plan. Any switch in an adjacent feeder may be used to pick up
unfed sections.
One of the notable aspects of the Optimized Pickup method is that it opens all switches in the outage area
first and then begins to form the most optimal switching plan for maximum pickup. This approach allows the
User Guide
Capacity
537
analysis to find recovery solutions in an incremental fashion that helps prevent overload disqualifications
early in the process.
Perform the following steps to open the Contingency Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Contingency and then select Settings.
On the left side of the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select from the different tab names to
access the available contingency analysis options. The following sections describe the different
tasks that you can perform:
-
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
538
Capacity
Perform the following steps to open the Contingency Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Contingency and then select Settings.
In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab. Use the options in the
Approach tab to edit the following settings:
Analysis Approach
Use the Analysis Approach area to select the analysis approach that
you want to use. Available choices are as follows:
Transfer method
Click the Exception limits button to open the Exceptions tab in the
Model and Analysis Options editor, where you can define exception
loading limits.
Contingency
Use the Contingency area to select the type of analysis that you
want to run. Available choices are as follows:
If you select the subsection (Sub) check box for either the Batch run
or Single run option, the Disable Field Switching check box is
enabled. Select this check box to disable the operation of all switches
during the analysis. This option is equivalent to selecting the Dont
allow operation from analysis check box on all switches.
Recommended Plans
Use this option to specify the maximum number of transfer pairs that
will be studied per switching plan during the analysis.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Capacity
539
Perform the following steps to open the Contingency Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Contingency and then select Settings.
In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab, and under Analysis Approach,
make sure that Fast Pickup method is selected. For more information on this and other options on
the Approach tab, see Selecting the contingency analysis method on page 537.
Select the Fast tab. Use the options in the Fast tab to edit the following settings:
Generate switch plans
Select this check box if you want to generate switch plans as a part of
the Fast Pickup contingency analysis.
Select this check box if you want to open the Switch Plan Manager at
the completion of the Fast Pickup contingency analysis. For more
information on the Switch Plan Manager, see Using the Switch Plan
Manager on page 413.
Select this check box have to send any poor plans from the
Contingency Analysis to the Switch Plan manager. Doing so will make
it easier to implement the switch plan, run a load-flow analysis, and
review the details.
Poor plans are defined later in this table, with the Plans that are
close option.
Limit Results
Select this check box to limit the results of the Fast Pickup
contingency analysis to a specified number of plans. The analysis will
stop when the first limit is reached, but report all plans that were
calculated up until that point. For example, if you specify limits of 10
good plans, 10 close plans, and 100 poor plans, the results could be
5 good plans and 10 close plans, or 10 good plans and 5 close plans,
simply depending on which plan limit SynerGEE reaches first.
User Guide
540
Capacity
Allow reclosers to be
used for switching
Use non-selected
feeders and subs to
pickup
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Contingency Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Contingency and then select Settings.
In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab, and under Analysis Approach,
make sure that Transfer method is selected. For more information on this and other options on the
Approach tab, see Selecting the contingency analysis method on page 537.
Select the Transfer tab. Use the options in the Transfer tab to edit the following settings:
Constraints
User Guide
Emer low volts. Use this option to set the analysis to use a
low voltage setting instead of the value set in the exceptions
limits.
Capacity
541
Switching
Output Options
Constraints for
Considering a
Transfer
Use the Output Options section to set the options that are related to
the reports that are produced at the end of the analysis. The following
options are available:
Use the Constraints for Considering a Transfer section to set the ratio
of load through a closed switch over the reserve amps for an open
switch.
User Guide
542
Capacity
Recommended Plans
Use the Analysis Time Tuning area to set the following options:
Time limit. Use this option to set the amount of time that
should be spent in finding a solution for a single event. The
evaluation of an event will be terminated when this time limit
is reached.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Contingency Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Contingency and then select Settings.
In the Contingency Analysis Options editor, select the Approach tab, and under Analysis Approach,
make sure that Optimized Pickup method is selected. For more information on this and other
options on the Approach tab, see Selecting the contingency analysis method on page 537.
User Guide
Capacity
543
3
Select the Optimize tab. Use the options in the Optimize tab to edit the following settings:
Contingency
Select the type of contingency situation that you want to analyze. The
following options are available:
Select the type of outage you want to result when the contingency
section(s) is taken out. Available choices are as follows:
User Guide
544
Capacity
Constraints
User Guide
Capacity
545
Select this check box to have SynerGEE try to find the solutions that
have the fewest switch state changes from the base case.
Isolate Outage
Switch Limit
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
546
Capacity
If you have not already done so, use the Contingency Analysis Options editor to select the
contingency analysis method and set other options related to the analysis. For more information,
see Setting up a contingency analysis on page 537.
Isolating sections
Within contingency, you can isolate the section with the nearest upstream switchable device and transfer load
downstream from the selected section to neighboring areas. This gives you the ability to evaluate switching
options in SynerGEE.
TO ISOLATE A SECTION
Right click on a section and select Isolate. Use Undo to remove the isolation.
User Guide
Capacity
547
15
A (NO)
2
3
5
14
4
6
B (NC)
C (NC)
13
8
11
10
9
E (NO)
D (NO)
12
Example model
The following would be the analysis results for the different outage types.
Branch contingency Dont isolate. Section 4 is taken out, but the source node is still fed. Sections
4, 6, 8, 10, and 11 are in the outage. Switch E or switch D could be used to pick up the outage
sections. Sections 4, 6, and 8 will be picked up with switch C if possible.
Branch contingency Isolate as a fault. Section 4 is considered faulted, and the area is isolated by
opening switches B and C, and locking open switch A. The only section that can be recovered is
section 9, by closing switches E and D.
Node contingency Dont isolate. The source node of section 4 is taken out, and sections 3, 4, 2,
and all downstream sections are outaged. Switches A, B, and C can be used to pick up the outage.
Bus contingency Isolate as a fault. A fault is assumed at the source node of section 4, and the
area is isolated by opening switches B and C, and locking open switch A. The only section that can
be recovered is section 9, by closing switches E and D.
User Guide
548
User Guide
Capacity
CHAPTER
11
Planning
LOAD ALLOCATION ANALYSIS
Load allocation is used to distribute load throughout a model, based on demands specified in meter devices
throughout your model, often at your feeder or subtransformer sources. Optionally, spot loads and loads at
large customers can be updated as well. To accomplish this, SynerGEE adjusts all distributed loads so that
the total load into sections (downstream from a meter) after a balanced or by-phase analysis matches the
specified demands. The value of these distributed loads is determined by running a load-flow analysis and
then looking at the differences between the specified demand values and the actual power into the sections,
with the resulting mismatch divided among sections and phases as appropriate.
The following items should be noted:
By default, load allocation applies to section distributed loads only. Unless specifically enabled, spot
loads and large customer loads are not affected, since they are known loads at specific points and
typically do not need allocation.
Sections without kVA values (or kWh, if you select allocation based on kWh) do not receive portions
of the allocated loads.
Losses are included in the allocation since load-flow analysis is used during each iteration of the
allocation.
Capacitors and generators increase the amount of load that is allocated, since they supply real and
reactive values of power to the feeder.
Following convergence and allocation completion, you have the option of making the loads
permanent. If you choose not to, a report is still generated, but no changes are made to the model. If
you choose to make loads permanent, all kW and kvar information in the selected feeders will be
replaced.
User Guide
550
Planning
User Guide
Planning
551
Recommendation
Amps/pf
kVA/pf
Regulators:
-
Maximum tap
Minimum tap
Neutral tap
Capacitors:
-
Trip modules
User Guide
552
Planning
-
Close modules
Only regulators in automatic mode and switched portions of capacitor installations in automatic mode are
affected by these selections. SynerGEE never adjusts manual mode regulators or capacitors.
Regulator and capacitor start options are specified in the Model tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor.
For more information, see Setting model and analysis options on page 436.
Substation transformers. When allocating with subtrans, the specified demands are recognized as
occurring on the primary of the transformer. If you do not have these values, you should place a
metering point on the section directly following the transformer, using the known secondary
demands.
Load I,Z,PQ. Section I,Z,PQ values are used during load allocation and can have a noticeable
impact on the results. For more information on I,Z,PQ, see Load %I, %Z, %PQ on page 496.
Load growth. Load allocation does not consider any kind of load growth, including growth curves.
Loops. Load allocation only handles radial models. If tie switches are modeled, they are treated as
open switches during allocation. For more information on loops and loop tie switches, see Loops
and Wandering Laterals on page 253.
Generators. Synchronous and induction generators are reverted to their corresponding constant
power (PQ) model during allocation. They produce their specified output power (scheduled percent
times rated power) at rated power factor.
User Guide
Perform the following steps to open the Load Allocation Options editor:
a
In the Loading group, click the text label Load Allocation and then select Settings.
Planning
553
2
Use the Load Allocation Options editor to set the following options:
Assignment
Load Allocation
Method
User Guide
554
Planning
Select this check box to have SynerGEE use capacity factors during
load allocation. For more information, see Capacity Factors on
page 502.
Select this option to allocate kW and kvar load values for spot loads
during a load allocation analysis. The spot load needs to have values
for kVA, kWh, or customers, or existing kW and kvar values. During
load allocation, load is distributed to the spot loads based on the
proportion of these allocation factors to the factors for distributed
loads and large customer loads, if enabled.
Update large
customer loads
Select this option to allocate kW and kvar load values for large
customers during a load allocation analysis. The large customer load
needs to have values for kVA, kWh, or customers, or existing kW and
kvar values. During load allocation, load is distributed to large
customers based on the proportion of these allocation factors to the
factors for distributed loads and spot loads, if enabled.
Scale Demands
Select the Warn if limits violated check box to have the load
allocation analysis generate a warning if the power factor of a
distributed load is outside the specified range. After the warning is
displayed, you will have the option of making the newly allocated
loads permanent, or canceling the results. A report will be generated
regardless of which option you choose.
User Guide
Planning
555
Type of Allocation
By-phase allocation using total demands. Using a byphase load-flow, by-phase loads are determined from the
ratio of by-phase information to by-phase upstream
demands. Upstream demands are shifted to be proportional
to the total by-phase allocation parameters such as KWH or
kVA.
Close switch
capacitors at startup
Select this option to close (turn on) any switched capacitors before
the load allocation analysis begins.
Select this check box to disable meters operating within loops. Meters
within loops might cause unexpected allocation results. These meters
will govern some, but possibly not all, of the load allocation within the
group.
Zero Distributed
Loads
Click to set the distributed load kW and kvar to zero for the current
year. This may be a useful way to focus on loads from other load
types.
Model Options
Click the Model Options button to open the Model and Analysis
Options editor.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Calculate
i
Add S to distributed loads.
If
S i > Tolerance
, repeat to step 2.
User Guide
556
Planning
If balanced allocation is selected, balanced analysis is used. Otherwise, by-phase analysis is used. The
i
distribution of S among sections is dependent on allocation factors for each section.
If you have not already done so, use the Load Allocation Options editor to select the configure
options related to the analysis. For more information, see Setting up a load allocation analysis on
page 552.
FORECASTING ANALYSIS
Forecasting is a SynerGEE analysis tool that can help you determine if your system includes the capacity
required to deliver anticipated future customer loads. Distribution forecasting also has an impact on
transmission planning, since transmission infrastructure must be built to support future distribution demands.
Contracts need to be put into place for future bulk load transfers, and regulating bodies need to be informed
about your plans to support your customers in upcoming years.
Forecasting is important to help evaluate future revenue, to ensure the solvency of your company and
financial performance to your stake or stock holders. For example, an investor-owned utility may look for
ways to attract load, and if the forecast looks bad, then the utility may need to act more aggressively in
looking for new load. A non-profit utility can use forecasting to effectively plan its system layout in order to
keep electric rates stable.
In addition, planning engineers must ensure that the distribution infrastructure can support future load. For
them, the loading along critical paths during the upcoming years is important. Forecasting individual load
growth within an engineering model is important to doing this. Engineering analysis is needed to evaluate the
ability of the distribution system to deal with future loads.
To set up your model for forecasting analysis, you must do the following:
1
Create areas of interest for your model. Areas of interest are two-dimensional geographic entities
that you can draw on the SynerGEE map display to specify anticipated future distribution load and
spot load for your system. For more information, see Areas of Interest on page 217.
Configure the forecasting analysis options. The Forecast Options editor allows you to configure a
number of settings for the forecasting analysis, including the type of forecasting agents that you
want to run. For more information on setting these options, see Setting up a forecasting analysis
on page 557 and Selecting a forecasting agent on page 560.
Once these tasks have been performed, you are ready to perform a forecasting analysis on your model. For
more information, see Performing a forecasting analysis on page 561.
Additional information on SynerGEE forecasting is provided in the Forecasting chapter of the SynerGEE
Technical Reference.
User Guide
Planning
557
In the Loading group, click the text label Forecasting and then select Settings.
In the Forecast Options editor, select the Settings tab. The following table describes the different
tasks that you can perform.
To ...
Select a forecast period
Do This ...
a
Growth areas
Section curves
Feeder growth
Meter growth
Customer zone
Substation growth
Regional total
Regional distrib
Regional spot
User Guide
558
Planning
To ...
Do This ...
Distributed Loads
Spot Loads
Large Customers
Projects
Areas of Interest
User Guide
Planning
559
To ...
Do This ...
Select the Options tab. The following table describes the different tasks that you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
Under Loads are, select one of the following options. All loads
are represented at the same point in the year.
Beginning of year
Mid-year
End-of-year
Evenly
Connected kVA
Connected kWh
Connected customers
User Guide
560
Planning
4
Select the Script tab. Use the options on the Script tab to create Forecasting scripts that can be run
during the analysis. The following table describes the different tasks that you can perform.
To ...
Do This ...
In the text box located above the New button, type the
name of the script that you want to create.
Click New.
Click Edit.
Click Delete.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Growth areas. The Growth areas agent manages sections lying within a polygon region on the map.
The agent focuses on growth for everything in the area, based on the growth settings in the Area of
User Guide
Planning
561
Interest editor. The area of interest type (in the Area of Interest tab of the Area of Interest editor)
must be set to Growth Area.
Section curves. The Section curves agent manages section load growth curve. The agent uses the
growth curve that is specified in the Zone tab of the Section editor.
Feeder growth. The Feeder growth agent manages feeder load growth. The agent uses the growth
curve that is specified in the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor.
Meter growth. The Meter growth agent manages meter load growth. The agent uses the growth
curve that is managed in the Demands tab of the Meter editor.
Customer zone. The Customer zone agent manages customer zone growth. A section can be
assigned to a customer zone, which is typically assigned spatially or logically downstream from
certain points. The customer zone contains weighted references to up to three customer class daily
load curves. The zone itself can also have growth information. The agent uses the growth curve set
in the customer zone and customer class editors.
Substation growth. The Substation growth agent manages substation load growth. The agent uses
the growth curve set in the substation editor.
Regional total. The Regional total agent manages load according to a selected growth curve for the
entire region (all five load types). The growth curve is selected in the Settings tab of the Forecast
Options editor.
Regional distrib. The Regional distribution agent manages load according to a selected growth
curve for distributed load across the region. The growth curve is selected in the Settings tab of the
Forecast Options editor, and the distributed loads are set in the Dist. Growth tab of the Area of
Interest editor.
Regional spot. The Regional spot agent manages the load according to a selected growth curve for
spot loads across the region. The growth curve is selected in the Settings tab of the Forecast
Options editor, and the spot loads are set in the Spot Growth tab of the Area of Interest editor.
When the Forecasting analysis is complete, the Forecast Complete dialog box appears. Click Yes to
make the new loads and demands permanent in the model, or click No to simply generate a report
of the results, without committing the analysis results to the model.
User Guide
562
Planning
The application has placed the maximum number of capacitors, based on your capacitor placement
analysis settings.
Capacitor Placement always tries to place the largest-size capacitor first, based on the sizes you selected for
the analysis. The application then moves sequentially through the sizes until it reaches the smallest one, or
until the maximum number of capacitors have been placed.
Capacitor Placement only places capacitors that have fixed kvar values. If the application places a new
capacitor on a section that already has a capacitor, then the kvar values of the new capacitor are simply
added to the fixed kvar values of the existing capacitor. Adding kvar in this manner is necessary because
SynerGEE only allows one capacitor per line section.
Once finished, the list of recommendations is presented in the SynerGEE Placement Tool editor, in order of
increasing performance, as they were found by SynerGEE. At this point, Capacitor Placement has made no
changes to your model. SynerGEE is simply presenting its recommendations, and you may choose to
implement them as desired.
The cumulative process results in a form of optimization known as local optimization. It does not find a
theoretical global optimum by considering all capacitor sizes and all locations simultaneously. Instead, it
operates by moving from the base case to the next best state, and then to the next best state, and so on. This
approach provides results that are more realistic and useful than a global optimization method.
The analysis places capacitors on a feeder-by-feeder basis. If multiple feeders are selected, it completely
analyzes one feeder before moving to the next.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
Planning
563
Perform the following steps to open the Capacitor Placement Settings editor:
a
Use the Capacitor Placement Settings editor to edit the following options:
Sizes
Select the capacitor sizes that you want the Capacitor Placement
analysis to consider. The analysis begins with the largest enabled
size and works in a cumulative fashion towards the smallest,
improving the base case further with each placement.
Placement sections
Select the phase line type that you want the Capacitor Placement
analysis to consider. Available choices are Only single-phase lines,
Only three-phase lines, and Single or three-phase lines.
You can also select the Allow placement on cables check box to
consider cables during the Capacitor Placement analysis.
Maximum Device
Power Factor
Maximum Feeder/
SubTran Power Factor
User Guide
564
Planning
Take note that the Capacitor Placement application by itself never makes permanent changes to a model. It
only makes recommendations, and it is up to you whether to make these recommendations a permanent
change in your model. In your actual system, it will often be infeasible or impractical to implement all the
suggestions that SynerGEE will make. As such, the recommendations are provided so that you can make an
educated judgment about how many of the changes should be made.
The Capacitor Placement analysis runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For more
information on feeder selection, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
Perform the following steps to open the SynerGEE Placement Tool editor:
a
If you have not already done so, click Settings to edit the Capacitor Placement analysis settings.
For more information on these settings, see Setting up a Capacitor Placement analysis on
page 562.
In the options list at the top of the SynerGEE Placement Tool editor, select the feeder that you want
to analyze. The feeder that is associated with the section that is currently set for analysis is listed by
default. Any capacitors that already exist in the selected feeder will be shown in the In Place list.
If desired, you can also click the Only place downstream from check box to only recommend
capacitor locations that are downstream from the section that is currently set for analysis. If you
select this check box, the feeder selection options list will be disabled and SynerGEE will
automatically select the feeder that is associated with the section that is set for analysis.
For information on setting a section for analysis, see Setting a section for analysis on page 434.
Click Update Recommended List. SynerGEE will provide a list of suggested sections where a
capacitor may be useful. From the Recommended list, you can do any of the following:
-
Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
Click the Circles button to toggle the display of circles that identify recommended capacitor
locations in the SynerGEE map display. Recommended capacitor locations are circled in
red, while the capacitor location that is currently selected in the Recommendations list is
circled in green.
You can also use the Percentage text box to specify the percentage of recommended
capacitor locations that you want to show using circles. The Percentage is based on the
sort order in the Recommendations list. For example, if you specify 25% as the
percentage, only the top 25% of recommended capacitor locations will be shown in the
map display using circles, based on the sort order of the Recommendations list. The
capacitor locations that are identified using circles in the map display will update
automatically each time you re-sort the list.
Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of suggested capacitors.
In the Recommended list, select the name of a section whose capacitor you want to temporarily add
to the model. Click Place.
User Guide
Planning
565
6
Next to the In Place list, click Refresh to recalculate load flow results based on the temporary
inclusion of the new capacitors. From the In Place list, you can also do any of the following:
-
Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
Click On/Off to turn the capacitor for the selected section on and off.
Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of placed capacitors.
Next to the Recommendations list, click Update Recommended List. SynerGEE will provide a new
list of suggested sections where a capacitor may be useful, taking into account the temporary and
permanent capacitors that are included in the In Place list.
Repeat the steps in this procedure to add additional recommended capacitors to the model, either
temporarily or permanently, as required.
Take note that SynerGEE retains the temporary capacitors even when the Placement analysis is not
running. However, they will not be included in the model when a non-Placement application is run,
such as load flow. You can make a temporary capacitor permanent to evaluate it with a SynerGEE
application, and then easily remove it again with the Placement analysis.
Phase Balancing. Phase Balancing looks for single- and two-phase laterals which can be rephased
to improve feeder balance.
Load Balancing. Load Balancing looks for spot and/or distributed loads that can be reconnected to
improve feeder balance.
With each successive step during a balance improvement, SynerGEE focuses on the change that results in
the greatest benefit. Like optimal switching and contingency analysis, balance improvement relies on an
optimization routine that results in a local optimum. The application only suggests changes that improve the
performance of the feeder with respect to the selected objective.
Refer to the topics listed below for information.
User Guide
566
Planning
Two-phase laterals
Laterals to Consider
When balance improvement is run, a report is generated with the suggested phase changes. The following is
an example of a phase balancing report.
This analysis was run to improve the lowest voltage. The first change improved the lowest voltage
significantly, from 104.2 volts to 107.6 volts. The second change made a small, additional improvement, from
107.6 volts to 107.8 volts. As you can see, you might consider implementing the first change, but the second
is probably not worth the time or cost.
Looking at the report, you should notice that the first change indicates a phase change C->A. To implement
this change, section NC3 and all sections fed by it would need to be rephased. In the real system, the
change may be as simple as moving some jumpers. On your model, however, this change must include
switching all loads and equipment from phase C to phase A, on all sections fed by NC3. In the modeling
environment, the phase changing effort must be applied to all sections, since each section holds independent
phase data.
The SynerGEE Multiple Editor is useful for rephasing large parts of your model quickly. For more information
on the Multiple Editor, see Using the Multiple Editor on page 177.
Refer to the topics listed below for information.
User Guide
Planning
567
Perform the following steps to open the Phase Balancing Settings editor:
a
Use the Phase Balancing Settings editor to edit the following options:
Minimum Amps
Laterals
Select this check box to have the analysis keep single-phase laterals
separate when considering balancing options. This option only
applies to sections that feed multiple single-phase laterals of distinct
phases.
Perform the following steps to open the SynerGEE Placement Tool editor:
a
If you have not already done so, click Settings to edit the Phase Balance analysis settings. For
more information on these options, see Setting up a Phase Balancing Improvement analysis on
page 566.
User Guide
568
Planning
3
In the options list at the top of the SynerGEE Placement Tool editor, select the feeder that you want
to analyze. The feeder that is associated with the section that is currently set for analysis is listed by
default.
If desired, you can also click the Only balance downstream from check box to only perform the
phase balancing improvement for locations that are downstream from the section that is currently
set for analysis. If you select this check box, the feeder selection options list will be disabled and
SynerGEE will automatically select the feeder that is associated with the section that is set for
analysis.
For information on setting a section for analysis, see Setting a section for analysis on page 434.
Click Update Recommended List. SynerGEE will provide a list of suggested sections where a
phasing improvement may be useful. The recommended phasing change is provided in the first
column of the list.
From the Recommended list, you can do any of the following:
-
Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of recommended sections.
Click the Circle button to toggle the display of circles that identify recommended sections
in the SynerGEE map display. Recommended sections are circled in red, while the section
that is currently selected in the Recommendations list is circled in green.
You can also use the Percentage text box to specify the percentage of recommended
sections that you want to show using circles. The Percentage is based on the sort order in
the Recommendations list. For example, if you specify 25% as the percentage, only the top
25% of recommended sections will be shown using circles, based on the sort order of the
Recommendations list. The sections that are identified using circles in the map display will
update automatically each time you re-sort the list.
In the Recommended list, select the name of a section whose phasing you temporarily want to
change. Click Place.
Next to the In Place list, click Refresh to recalculate load flow results based on the temporary
phasing changes that have already been placed. From the In Place list, you can also do any of the
following:
-
Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of sections included in the In
Place list.
Next to the Recommendations list, click Update Recommended List. SynerGEE will provide a new
list of suggested sections where a phasing improvement may be useful, taking into account the
temporary and permanent changes that are already included in the In Place list.
User Guide
Planning
569
8
Repeat the steps in this procedure to add additional phasing changes to the model, either
temporarily or permanently, as required.
The objective in this case was to improve the lowest voltage on the feeder. If all the changes were
implemented, the system low voltage would improve by 2.6 volts. However, the first two changes would
accomplish 1.8 volts alone, so you might choose to implement only those two. Also, you may notice that while
voltage continues to rise, so does the number of exceptions, but only after the third suggestion.
On the report, you can see that the first change is listed as B->C, C->B. This indicates that the load on B
should be shifted to C and the load that was on C should be shifted to B.
Loads are never combined by balance improvement, only shifted.
Refer to the topics listed below for information.
Perform the following steps to open the Load Balancing Settings editor:
a
User Guide
570
Planning
c
2
Use the Load Balancing Settings editor to edit the following options:
Minimum kVA
Load Types
Select the type of loads that you want to balance. Available choices
are Spot Loads Only, Distributed Loads Only, or Spot and
Distributed Loads.
Load Phasing
Select the load phase for which you want to perform the balancing
improvement. Available choices are Single Phase Only, Three
Phase Only, or All Loads.
Perform the following steps to open the SynerGEE Placement Tool editor:
a
If you have not already done so, click Settings to edit the Load Balance analysis settings. For more
information on these options, see Setting up a Load Balancing Improvement analysis on page 569.
In the options list at the top of the SynerGEE Placement Tool editor, select the feeder that you want
to analyze. The feeder that is associated with the section that is currently set for analysis is listed by
default.
If desired, you can also click the Only balance downstream from check box to only perform the
load balancing improvement for locations that are downstream from the section that is currently set
for analysis. If you select this check box, the feeder selection options list will be disabled and
User Guide
Planning
571
SynerGEE will automatically select the feeder that is associated with the section that is set for
analysis.
For information on setting a section for analysis, see Setting a section for analysis on page 434.
4
Click Update Recommended List. SynerGEE will provide a list of suggested sections where a load
improvement may be useful. From the Recommended list, you can do any of the following:
-
Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of recommended sections.
Click the Circle button to toggle the display of circles that identify recommended sections
in the SynerGEE map display. Recommended sections are circled in red, while the section
that is currently selected in the Recommendations list is circled in green.
You can also use the Percentage text box to specify the percentage of recommended
sections that you want to show using circles. The Percentage is based on the sort order in
the Recommendations list. For example, if you specify 25% as the percentage, only the top
25% of recommended sections will be shown using circles, based on the sort order of the
Recommendations list. The sections that are identified using circles in the map display will
update automatically each time you re-sort the list.
In the Recommended list, select the name of a section whose loading you temporarily want to
change. Click Place.
Next to the In Place list, click Refresh to recalculate load flow results based on the temporary
changes in section loading. From the In Place list, you can also do any of the following:
-
Click a column heading to sort the list based on the data in that column.
Click Report to generate a report window that includes the list of sections included in the In
Place list.
Next to the Recommendations list, click Update Recommended List. SynerGEE will provide a new
list of suggested sections where a load improvement may be useful, taking into account the
temporary and permanent changes that are already included in the In Place list.
Repeat the steps in this procedure to add additional load changes to the model, either temporarily or
permanently, as required.
User Guide
572
Planning
DESIGN EVALUATION
SynerGEEs design evaluation analysis provide specialized optimization functions that focus on a particular
type of equipment or device. Some of these applications include financial considerations during the
optimization process, as well as system performance parameters.
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the design evaluation options that are provided with
SynerGEE.
Conductor change
For each group, SynerGEE steps through the conductors in the active cost file one at a time, simulating
reconductoring and running load-flow/fault studies. Of the conductors it evaluates, it chooses a single optimal
conductor for the whole group and then moves to the next group. In areas of lighter loading, SynerGEE
attempts to find a smaller conductor as applicable that satisfies your constraints. A conductor is only
evaluated if it matches the overhead/underground status of the original conductor.
The most upstream groups are considered first, and no group is analyzed until all applicable feeding groups
have been completed. In this manner, results are cumulative and must be regarded as a cohesive answer,
rather than recommendations for individual groups and sections.
User Guide
Planning
573
The method by which you form the query set for evaluation can significantly affect how efficiently the
analysis works. For example, if you want to evaluate the reconductoring of a specific conductor type
throughout the selected feeders, you can use the query wizard to very quickly form a query set of
applicable sections only.
The Gallery is a useful tool for viewing detailed comparisons of before-and-after models. For
example, you can put the base model into the gallery prior to analysis, and then access if afterward
the conductor selection evaluation for further study. For more information, see Gallery on
page 129.
The proper setup of the active cost file is critically important for the application to behave as
expected. For more information on cost files, see Cost files on page 447.
Place the sections that you want to analyze into the query set. For more information, see Using the
Query Set on page 173.
Perform the following steps to verify cost data, including the specified costs file, using the Model and
Analysis Options editor.
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Costs tab and then verify the cost
data, including the specified costs file. For more information on cost data, see Setting
analysis cost options on page 446.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Design group, click the text label Design Evaluation and then select Settings.
In the Design Evaluation editor, select Conductor selection for queried sections and then edit the
following settings as appropriate:
-
Fault Amps
Cumulative ZS
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
574
Planning
If you have not already done so, use the Design Evaluation editor to configure options related to the
analysis. For more information, see Setting up a conductor selection evaluation on page 573.
User Guide
Planning
575
Make sure that you have selected the feeder that contains the regulator to be evaluated. For more
information, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
If the current feeder selection set has more than one active regulator, locate the section that holds
the desired regulator. Right-click on the section and select Set for Analysis.
In the Design group, click the text label Design Evaluation and then select Settings.
In the Design Evaluation editor, select Regulator positioning along current path.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Design Evaluation editor to configure options related to the
analysis. For more information, see Setting up a regulator position evaluation on page 575.
User Guide
576
Planning
Regulator position chart, showing amps handled by the regulator as it gets farther from the source
MULTI-MODEL ANALYSIS
An analysis can be run on an entire database at once, one substation at a time. Multiple DSAs can be
selected for analysis, as well. The analysis types that are available for multi-model comparisons are loadflow, load allocation, and reliability. In addition, multi-model analysis can also analyze the models for multiple
years.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
In the Design group, click the text label Multi-Model and then select Settings.
On the left side of the Multi-Model Analysis editor, select from the different tab names to access the
available multi-model analysis settings. The following procedures describe the different tasks that
you can perform:
-
Selecting analysis types and years for a multi-model analysis on page 577
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Planning
577
In the Design group, click the text label Multi-Model and then select Settings.
In the Multi-Model Analysis editor, select the Data Sources tab. The Data sources to be analyzed
section lists the DSAs that have been added to the analysis, and the Available data sources
section lists additional DSAs that can also be added to the analysis.
-
To add a DSA to the multi-model analysis: In the Available data sources section, select
the name of the DSA that you want to add then click the up-arrow button. The DSA name
moves to the Data sources to be analyzed section.
To remove a DSA from the multi-model analysis: In the Data sources to be analyzed
section, select the name of the DSA that you want to remove, and then click the downarrow button. The DSA name moves to the Available data sources section.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Design group, click the text label Multi-Model and then select Settings.
In the Multi-Model Analysis editor, select the Analysis tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Applications to Run
Select the check box for each analysis type that you want to run
during the multi-model analysis. The following applications are
available:
Check Coordination
Check Data
Contingency
Fault
Load Allocation
Load-Flow
Reliability
Throw-Over
User Guide
578
Planning
Years to Analyze
Select the check box for each model year that you want to analyze in
the multi-model analysis.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Design group, click the text label Multi-Model and then select Settings.
In the Multi-Model Analysis editor, select the Pre-process tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Node Reduction
Select this check box to run node reduction after the model(s) is
loaded, but before the multi-model analysis is performed.
For more information on node reduction, see Reducing the number
of nodes on page 267.
Model Cleanup
Select this check box to run a model cleanup script after the model(s)
is loaded, but before the multi-model analysis is performed. Use the
list box to select (highlight) the specific model cleanup script that you
want to run.
For more information on model cleanup scripts, see Model Cleanup
Scripts on page 718.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Planning
579
In the Design group, click the text label Multi-Model and then select Settings.
In the Multi-Model Analysis editor, select the Post-process tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Save Model
Select (highlight) the target DSA where you want to save the model.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Multi-Model Analysis editor to select the data sources for
the multi-model analysis, specify which SynerGEE analysis types you want to run and the years you
want to analyze, and select pre- and post-processing options. For more information, see Setting up
a multi-model analysis on page 576.
MULTI-YEAR ANALYSIS
A SynerGEE model can contain up to eleven different yearly versions, including the base year, and analyze
and compare these different years independently. This capability allows you to model and analyze projected
changes in the future, while maintaining your current base model and avoiding the need for additional models
or versions.
Multi-year modeling and analysis is optional. If you do not specifically activate multi-year features, by default
your work will be solely within your base model, and multi-year features will be non-applicable and largely
invisible.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on multi-year modeling in SynerGEE.
User Guide
580
Planning
Allowing SynerGEE to populate future years automatically. By default, when you load a model
from a previous version of SynerGEE, the current data set becomes Year 0 (base year). In other
words, all years are identical.
Using tools such as subsets to transfer data. When you save a subset, it saves data from the
currently specified year. When you load a subset, it loads data into the currently specified year.
Therefore, you could save a subset, change the year, and then reload the subset to complete the
transfer.
Manually edit data using the SynerGEE editors. More than likely, much of your multi-year
modeling will be done by specifying energize/retire years and other yearly data in the SynerGEE
editors.
After your model is set up, using multi-year features is largely identical to using any SynerGEE feature,
except that you must always remain aware of the current year setting. For more information on multi-year
data, see Data applicable to multi-year features on page 580. For more information on the interface year
setting, see Changing years for multi-year modeling on page 581.
Tip:
To fully enable all multi-year features, make sure you have selected the Enable multi-year
modeling option in the Units tab of the Preferences editor. For more information, see Setting units
of measurement on page 165.
Interaction with customer load curves and load growth on page 581
Energize and retire years. For all sections and devices, you can select an energize year a retire
year. When you run an analysis on a year when a section or device has not yet been energized or
has already been retired, SynerGEE regards those sections and devices as completely absent from
the model.
User Guide
Planning
581
Loads and demands. At the individual section level, you can specify different loading for each year
in the model. This is coupled with the ability to run load allocation on a yearly basis, using
customizable demands for each year. Multi-year load data includes capacity factors.
Multi-year demands are specified using meter devices, which also allow multi-year values for
continuous and emergency amp ratings.
Switchable device configuration. The Open and Closed status of switches and protective devices
can be configured independently each year. Elbows and pad-mounted switch gear are not included.
Large customer load and generation parameters. The by-phase load data and kVA/pf generation
data for large customers can be specified on a yearly basis.
In the database, multi-year data is sometimes part of existing instance tables and sometimes requires its own
table. For example, the energize/retire year for a section can be found in its InstSection table record, but its
multi-year load data is stored in a separate table. In some cases, multi-year data may overlap traditional
data, and in this situation, the multi-year data always takes precedence.
User Guide
582
Planning
The map and editors update dynamically as you switch years, making it easy to see the differences between
them. For more information on modeling in this environment, see Modeling for multiple years on page 582.
Specifying a year in the editors. Energize and retire years for sections and devices can be specified
directly in the section and device editors. You do not need to reset the interface to the actual year
that you are currently viewing.
Specifying data in the specific year. Other settings, such as loading and switching configuration,
must be done directly in the year that you want the settings to take effect. For example, if you want a
certain load to take effect in Year 1, you must switch the view to Year 1 and then specify the load.
For more information, see Specifying year-specific data for multi-year modeling on page 583.
Specifying energize and retire years for multi-year modeling on page 583
User Guide
Planning
583
does not necessarily include/exclude all multi-year features. For more information, see Setting units of
measurement on page 165.
To specify this data for any particular year, you must first switch the interface to the year you want to edit and
then make the appropriate edits. For example, if you want to specify distributed load on a particular section
for Year 3, switch the model interface to year 3 and then make the changes directly in the Section editor. For
more information on switching between years, see Changing years for multi-year modeling on page 581.
Section configuration, pole-top construction, spacings, and other line construction-based parameters cannot
be set up as multi-year. This is to preserve simplicity and reduce the volume of data.
User Guide
584
Planning
Sections: Load values, phasing, conductor types, configurations, and exposure factors
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
Under Year Descriptions, enter a new name for each year, as required.
User Guide
Planning
585
On the first page of the Multi-Year Editor, select Copy from one year to other years, and then click
Next.
Under Copy From, select the year that you want to copy data from.
Under Copy To, select the check boxes for each year that you want to copy data to.
Under Categories, select the data categories that you want to copy to the specified years.
The final page of the Multi-Year Editor shows the results of the multi-year copy. Click Finish to close
the editor.
Next to Model Data Source, select a data source for your model.
On the second page of the wizard, the model years for your model are shown. If desired, you can
type in any of the text boxes to change the model year, or click the Up and Down arrow buttons to
shift the model year labels in the desired direction.
Click Next to continue.
On the third page of the wizard, select the model options you wish to roll over for example, you
can roll over the energize year, retire year, feeder demands, distributed loads, and spot loads. You
can do any of the following to select which options you want to roll over:
User Guide
586
Planning
Select and clear individual check boxes to include or exclude the related option from the
Rollover script.
Select a range of options by using the Ctrl or Shift keys on the keyboard or by clicking the
Select All button. Then, click the Select Options button to select the highlighted check
boxes, or click the Clear Options button to clear the check boxes.
Select options as described above and click the Toggle Report button to change the report
status for each highlighted option. The report status, if enabled, will generate a line item in
the Model Rollover report relating to the enabled option.
Click Finish to accept your changes, and then click Yes to confirm that you want to create the
Rollover script.
Multi-year analyses
SynerGEE supports the following types of multi-year analyses:
Load-flow
Fault
Load allocation
Reliability
Contingency
Check data
Generate maps
Cleanup script
When run as a part of a multi-year analysis, these analyses perform many of the same functions as their
single-year counterparts, except that you can specify which years they should analyze. Because of the sheer
volume of data produced during even a single-year analysis, the multi-year versions produce briefer
summarized displays of the multi-year results. As such, multi-year analysis reports can be extremely helpful
in comparing overall construction and performance over the modeled years. Both the check data and cleanup
scripts are targeted at loop identification and correction in future years.
For detailed analysis results on any particular modeled year, you should switch the interface to that year and
run the single-year analysis counterpart. For more information on switching years, see Changing years for
multi-year modeling on page 581.
Multi-year analyses run on all model data in memory, not just selected feeders. This is because multi-year
data, especially when it involves energized/retired sections, can present a complex topological situation in
which feeder ownership cannot be reliably determined at the outset.
User Guide
Planning
587
In the Time group, click the text label Multi-Year and then select Settings.
Select the check box for each analysis type that you want to run
during the multi-model analysis.
Years to Analyze
Select the check box for each year that you want to analyze
during the multi-year analysis.
Cleanup Scripts
Select the check box for each cleanup script that you want to run
at the end of the multi-year analysis. For more information on
model cleanup scripts, see Model Cleanup Scripts on
page 718.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Multi-Year Analysis editor to set up options related to the
multi-year analysis, including selecting the applications you want to run, the years you want to
analyze, and any cleanup scripts that you want to run. For more information, see Setting up a multiyear analysis on page 586.
Separate tables. Some multi-year load data is stored in separate tables for each year. This
approach simplifies the schema for loads, and makes it easier to swap out tables with external
database management tools.
Additional fields on existing tables. Some multi-year data is represented as additional fields on
traditional SynerGEE tables. For example, the InstSwitches table in Access has six columns
User Guide
588
Planning
dedicated to the open/close status for each of the six future years, and a column each for the
energize and retire years.
If you are loading a model data source from a previous version of SynerGEE that did not support multi-year
modeling, you should note the following:
SynerGEE uses the current data to build the base year in the new, multi-year environment.
Afterwards, if you choose not to use multi-year features, or change the year of the interface, your
model should behave exactly as it always did.
When a model is imported that is missing data for future years, SynerGEE supplements future data
as follows:
-
Energize/retire years. Any missing energize years become the base year. In other words,
the facility is always energized.
Future year switch positions, meter demands, and loads. For missing switch position,
meter demand, or load data, SynerGEE supplements the data from the base year. For
example, if a switch is open in the base year, and it has no future year data, it is assumed
to be open for all future years.
The same basic rules hold true if you create a new model and do not specify multi-year data. When you save
and reopen the model, the data will be supplemented as described above.
Remember that unique ID and topology rules are always in effect, despite the energized/retired state of
facilities. For example, you cannot have two sections with the same ID, even if they are never energized at
the same time.
Total demand
The analysis report charts currently plot 1/4th of the data points. However, all 8760 data points are generated
by SynerGEE and can be exported to a text file or Excel for further evaluation. Export options are available
from the context (right-click) menu for each chart.
User Guide
Planning
589
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON
Model performance comparison presents operational and cost comparisons of various modeling alternatives
by comparing the model in memory to variations of that model stored in the gallery. When run, performance
comparison generates a report listing the following comparisons:
Losses at peak
Performance comparison assumes that model loads are allocated at peak demand. To facilitate these
comparisons, it runs two different load-flow analyses:
A load-flow after applying a light run factor to model loads, simulating a time of minimum system
demands. The light run factor is essentially a multiplier value that you can assign in the Performance
Comparison options editor, as described in Setting up a performance comparison analysis on
page 589.
During the light run, all loads are multiplied by the same factor to determine minimum loading
conditions. This approach is a very simple means of simulating light-load modeling, but it should
give useful numbers within the context of other assumptions.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on performance comparison. For more information on
working with the gallery, see Gallery on page 129.
In the Performance group, click the text label Performance Comparison and then select
Settings.
User Guide
590
Planning
2
On the left side of the Performance Comparison editor, select from the different tab names to access
the available performance comparison settings. Refer to the topics listed below for more
information.
-
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Performance group, click the text label Performance Comparison and then select
Settings.
The lower half of the Performance Comparison editor, under Models in Gallery, lists models in the
gallery that are available for analysis. The upper half of the editor, under Compare Model in
Memory to, lists models that will be included in the performance comparison analysis.
To add a model to the analysis: Select the model that you want to add in the Models in
Gallery area and then click the Up arrow button.
To remove a model from the analysis: Select the model that you want to remove in the
Compare Model in Memory to area and click the Down arrow button.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Planning
591
In the Performance group, click the text label Performance Comparison and then select
Settings.
The Costs table lists different cost categories for different types of equipment. To edit s value, simply
double-click the current cell and then type the new value.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Performance group, click the text label Performance Comparison and then select
Settings.
In the Performance Comparison editor, select the Analysis tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Light Run Factor
Multiplier used for the peak load to simulate a minimum load condition
for the light load-flow run. For more information on this factor, see
Performance Comparison on page 589.
Cost to the utility per kWh delivered. This value is ultimately used to
determine the cost of losses.
Peak Charge
User Guide
592
Planning
Secondary Loss
Factor
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Installation cost
Salvage value
Move cost
Instead of a complex array of phase change cost values for each conductor group, SynerGEE uses two
general multipliers the add phase factor and the change phase factor for all conductor types. When a
new phase is added or a line is rephased, these factors are multiplied against the original line costs to derive
the phase change costs. For example, if a phase is added to a single-phase line and the add phase factor is
1.5, this operation will cost 1.5 times as much as adding the original single-phase line, as specified in your
cost data.
These factors are set in your analysis options. For more information, see Setting up a performance
comparison analysis on page 589.
User Guide
Planning
593
Eq 111
Eq 112
Secondary losses
SynerGEE is a typically used for primary system analysis. However, secondary losses may be 50% or more
of distribution losses. These secondary losses may need to be considered if planning decisions are to be
made based on loss improvement. See the SynerGEE Technical Reference for secondary loss calculations.
During secondary loss calculations, SynerGEE makes the following assumptions:
The relationship between secondary losses and total secondary load is linear and independent of
voltage.
Clearly, these assumptions and this derivation indicate that the expression for secondary losses is not valid
on a per-load basis. In other words, secondary losses at a particular load in a system should not be evaluated
with these calculations. Rather, the intention of the secondary losses expression is to provide a system-wide
representation of the trend for secondary losses.
The k1 factor (or secondary loss factor) can be set in your analysis options. A typical value might be 3%,
which indicates that a typical primary distributed load would have a secondary kW loss component of 3% at
nominal load voltage. If half of distribution losses can be attributed to secondary losses then you might expect
total feeder losses to be around 6%. For more information on setting this factor, see Setting up a
User Guide
594
Planning
performance comparison analysis on page 589.
Performance comparison is the only SynerGEE analysis that evaluates secondary losses. Note that
secondary losses are ignored for spot load since the split of losses between the customer and the utility may
be complex. Also note that the cost for secondary losses is determined by multiplying secondary kW losses
by the utility cost per kW lost.
See the SynerGEE Technical Reference for the overall cost of loss calculations, as well as for equipment
data and calculations.
Equipment data. When you run performance comparison analysis, SynerGEE uses the equipment
data that is currently in memory. It does not load or analyze any equipment data that may be
contained in the gallery model files. This setup allows you to make controlled comparisons between
different configurations of equipment data as well as model data. For example, you could make
changes to regulator type ratings and run different comparisons, to see the effect.
Multi-year modeling. Performance comparison considers the year to which the SynerGEE interface
is set, much like any analysis. It uses this year to determine the year of the model in memory and
any models in the gallery to which it is compared. For example, if you have the interface set to Year
2 and you run performance comparison, it will operate on Year 2 data in both the memory and
gallery models, as applicable.
If you do not use multi-year modeling, you do not need to be concerned about the year setting when
running performance comparison. For more information on multi-year modeling, see Multi-Year
Analysis on page 579.
If you have not already done so, use the Performance Comparison editor to configure options
related to the analysis. For more information, see Setting up a performance comparison analysis
on page 589.
User Guide
Planning
595
Perform the following steps to open the Voltage Optimization Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Performance group, click the text label Voltage Optimization and then select
Settings.
Use the Voltage Optimization Analysis Options editor to set up the voltage range for the Voltage
Optimization analysis and also to set the interval that will be used for stepping through the analysis.
Refer to the following table for more information on the options that you can set in this editor.
Minimum Downstream
Volts
The LTC starting voltage setting represents a user-input high that will
be progressively lowered to a setting that will keep the downstream
voltages above a certain value.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Voltage Optimization Analysis Options editor to configure
analysis-related options as desired. For more information, see Setting up a Voltage Optimization
analysis on page 595.
User Guide
596
Planning
Feeder volts. The range specified when the application was launched. Values are listed in volts.
Drop. The largest drop in the feeder is listed in the report. The voltage drop is calculated by
comparing the feeder voltage to a section voltage, as follows.
1
1
VDrop = VFdr
VSect
Eq 113
Low volts. The lowest voltage in the feeder. The drop value and the low volts value should add up to
match the feeder voltage value.
VLT exceptions. Instances where one or more voltage exceptions exist at the specified feeder
voltage.
OLD exceptions. Instances where one or more overloaded lines or devices exist.
CTL exceptions. Instances where at least one regulator is sitting at its minimum or maximum tap.
User Guide
Planning
597
You can see the improvement in low voltage due to regulation. You can also see the effect of voltage settings
on the regulator and the drop from the regulator to the end of the feeder at higher feeder voltages.
The following plot addresses high-voltage problems.
Again, the effect of the regulator voltage settings is apparent. This study may be useful to justify the
installation of one regulator, while demonstrating that the benefits of a second regulator would not be worth
the cost.
ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
The economic analysis uses information from the values determined in cost zones (optional), customer
classes, and customer zones indicated in Section editors, as well as the secondary loss factor in the
economic analysis options. These components work in conjunction to generate the results of the analysis.
When the economic analysis is complete, the analysis results will display. The analysis results contain factors
calculated for each feeder and substation. Each one will contain monthly determinations of peak demand,
utilization, energy loss, load factor, and efficiency. It also contains hourly determinations for losses, utilization,
and load factors. These results can be interpreted and studied to guide the decision-making process for
equipment replacement or maintenance.
User Guide
598
User Guide
Planning
CHAPTER
12
Protection
SynerGEE Protection provides a comprehensive environment for managing protection studies in a
distribution environment. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SynerGEE protective device models are detailed and integrate at a fundamental level, like all devices.
Whether you are performing detailed coordination studies or other load-flow based analyses, they provide a
reliable simulation of real-world devices.
User Guide
600
Protection
Transformer curves
For more information on transformer curves and curve shifting through transformers, see Transformers and
Transformer Curves on page 643.
Managing classic protective device types in the equipment warehouse on page 601
User Guide
Protection
601
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new device type, and then click OK.
Use the Protective Device Type editor to edit the settings for the protective device type. For more
information on the options you can set, see Editing a classic protective device type on page 601.
Expand Protective Device Types and then double-click the name of the protective device type that
you want to edit.
Use the Protective Device Type editor to edit the following settings.
Device Kind
Type of device.
Voltage Rating
Phasing
Device phasing.
Current Rating
Minimum Pickup
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
602
Protection
Expand Protective Device Types and then select the name of the protective device type that you
want to delete.
Expand Protective Device Types and then select the protective device type that you want to add to
your model. Drag it onto the map display and drop it onto the desired section.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click the protective device that you want to
edit.
On the left side of the Protective Device editor, select from the different tab names to access the
available settings for the protective device. The following topics describe the different tasks that you
can perform:
User Guide
Protection
603
3
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the classic protective device that
you want to edit.
In the Protective Device editor, select the Prot. Dev. tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Name
Phasing
Device phasing.
Protective Device
Device type. The list contains all protective device types found in your
equipment data source, managed using the Warehouse tab of the
model explorer. For more information on the relationship between
model data and equipment data, see References to equipment data
on page 63.
Setting
Location Description
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the protective device that you want
to work with.
User Guide
604
Protection
3
At the top of the Results tab, click the R button to display a list of the available results categories.
Select the check box for each results category that you want to view, and clear the check box for
each results category that you want to hide. Note that when you edit the category selections here,
you will also edit the category selections for all Results tabs, as well as the list of category selections
in the Editor Results tab of the Output Options editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, locate the protective device that you want to
delete.
User Guide
You can also create a new TCC by right-clicking on a protective device in the map view
and selecting Add to TCC. If a TCC is already open, however, that device is added to that
graph instead of creating a new one.
Protection
605
Device List. The Device List tab contains a list of all protective devices within the selected feeders.
Note that feeder selection is global between the map and TCC views. You cannot have a different
selection set in a TCC view than the map.
Pair List. The Pair List tab lists pairs of protected and protecting devices, based on the topology of
the selected feeders.
Protection Tree. The Protection Tree tab lists protection devices for the selected feeders in a
topological tree relationship.
Sets List. The Sets List tab lists any TCC sets that are loaded into memory. For more information on
TCC sets, see Saving and loading TCC views as TCC sets on page 612.
From any tab in the TCC explorer, you can do any of the following:
Double-click on the device name to open the SynerGEE editor for that device.
Right-click on a device name to open a context menu with a number of useful shortcuts, such as
adding and removing devices from the TCC display.
You can also drag any device or device pair onto the graph to plot the curve(s). For more
information on plotting curves, see Plotting curves on the TCC on page 605.
You must have the protection database loaded in memory for curves to appear. For more
information on loading the protection database, see Protection data on page 67.
In the Device List and Pair List tabs, devices with plotted curves appear with an asterisk (*). In the
Protection Tree tab, they appear with a three-colored-circle icon.
Curves are colored according to settings in the individual device editors. To change a curve color,
open the device editor for the associated device. You can open device editors directly from the TCC
view by double-clicking on the respective curve.
The TCC explorer only displays devices in the selected feeders/subtrans. For information on
selecting feeders, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
You can also plot a curve by right-clicking on the device in the map view or a report and selecting Add to
TCC.
User Guide
606
Protection
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the TCC window.
a
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Properties. You can
also double-click in any empty space in the TCC window.
Use the TCC Properties editor to edit the display settings for the TCC. The following topics describe
the different tasks that you can perform.
User Guide
Protection
607
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the TCC window.
a
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Properties.
In the TCC Properties editor, select the Curves tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Curves to Display
Transformer Damage
Curves
User Guide
608
Protection
Cutoff Amps
Note that when applying cutoff values, SynerGEE uses average load
current (vector average) through a protective device. Current on a
particular phase may exceed this value. If desired, you may select the
Show Cutoff or Show Load Current check boxes to display tick
marks or lines to make these values easier to visualize. Note that the
color of a tick mark or line matches its parent curve.
This option can also be set from the CONTROLS tab of the
SynerGEE ribbon bar.
Transformer Colors
and Conductor Colors
User Guide
Recloser Curves
Save As Defaults
Select this check box if you want to save the current settings as the
default choices for future TCC views. If this check box is not selected,
any changes you make to the display properties will only apply to the
current TCC view.
Protection
609
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the TCC window.
a
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Properties.
In the TCC Properties editor, select the Graph tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Display Notes Labels
Select this check box to display notes labels in the TCC display. You
can also click the Font button to specify the font type, style, and size.
This option can also be set from the CONTROLS tab of the
SynerGEE ribbon bar.
Axis Labels
Click the Font button to specify the font type, style, and size for x- and
y-axis labels.
Save As Defaults
Select this check box if you want to save the current settings as the
default choices for future TCC views. If this check box is not selected,
any changes you make to the display properties will only apply to the
current TCC view.
User Guide
610
Protection
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the TCC window.
a
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Add Note.
In the TCC Notes Label editor, select the Notes tab. Select the check box for each line of the note
that you want to enable, and type the desired text in the appropriate text boxes.
User Guide
Protection
611
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the TCC window.
a
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Add Note.
In the TCC Notes Label editor, select the Line tab. Select the check box for each line type that you
want to enable, and configure the available options as appropriately.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the TCC window.
a
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Add Note.
In the TCC Notes Label editor, select the Arc Flash tab.
Type appropriate values in the Energy, Distance, Bus Gap, Distance Factor, and KVLL text
boxes.
If desired, select the Grounded, Enclosed, or Use Lee Method check boxes to enable the
associated feature.
Use the Style and Color options to select a line style and color for the arc flashover line.
User Guide
612
Protection
Left-click on the graph at a starting point and draw a vertical or horizontal line. The line snaps to
the closest curve.
Observe the measurements in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
After plotting the desired devices, right-click on the TCC graph and select Create TCC Set.
User Guide
Protection
613
3
Select the TCC set that you want to delete, and then right-click and select Delete.
User Guide
614
Protection
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the File group, click Save As.
In the TCC to Save editor, next to Save as type, select either JPEG Files (*.jpg) or Bitmap files
(*.bmp).
Next to File Name, type the name for the file you want to save.
Click Save.
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Copy.
Paste the view in the application where you want to use it, such as Microsoft Word, Excel, or Paint.
Map Zoom. Zooms an open map view to the devices parent section
Map Pan. Pans an open map view to the devices parent section
Map Feeder Zoom. Zooms an open map view to the devices parent feeder
Device Settings. Produces a settings report for all devices on the graph. The report is essentially a
collection of rap sheets. For more information on rap sheets, see Rap Sheets on page 179.
Link. Allows you to open a file or location link associated with the device, if one exists. For more
information on file and location links, see Location Links on page 223.
Add Note. Produces the TCC Notes Label editor with which you can apply a note and/or amp/time
lines. For more information on notes and amp/time lines, see Adding notes, time lines, amp lines,
User Guide
Protection
615
and arc flashover to the TCC on page 610.
You can also right-click on the device ID in the model explorer or on the device number in the TCC
explorer.
On the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon. Hover the mouse over Print and
then select Page Setup.
In the Page Setup dialog box, expand Views and then select TCC.
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, in the TCC group, click Remove Tab.
In Full Screen mode, click the X button to return to the SynerGEE window.
PROTECTION LAB
SynerGEEs Protection Lab (formerly called the Protective Device Viewer) provides a graphically oriented
view of the curves and coordination sets of devices. These devices are not in the model. You can specify the
parameters of each device (such as relay pickup, time-dial, and so on), and the resulting curves are drawn on
the screen along with the corresponding operating times.
The Protection Lab provides a user friendly interface, since there is no electrical network model to build.
Relays, fuses, and reclosers can be easily added to a study and cases (combinations of devices comprising
a particular coordination) may be saved and recalled at any time. Since the Protection Lab is independent
from the TCC, fault analysis and check coordination analysis does not apply.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
616
Protection
On the left side of the Protection Lab window, select the Devices tab. Use the check boxes in the
Devices list to add or remove devices from the Protection Lab display.
In the Protection Lab display, double-click in the shaded area that represents the device that you
added. The device editor will appear. Use the device editor to edit the settings for the device as
appropriate. Click Apply to apply the settings to the Protection Lab display, and then click X to close
the editor.
In the Protection Lab display, double-click in an empty space to access the Protection Lab
Properties editor. Use this editor to edit settings related to curve, graph, grid, and printing options.
Click Apply to apply the settings to the Protection Lab display, and then click X to close the editor.
Note that the settings in the Protection Lab Properties editor are virtually identical to the settings in
the TCC Properties editor. However, not all of the settings apply to Protection Lab displays, including
all of the settings on the Reference tab. These settings will still be enabled but they will not have any
effect on the Protection Lab display that you are viewing.
For more information on these settings, see Changing TCC view display properties on page 606.
On the left side of the Protection Lab window, select the I/O tab. The I/O tab lists any Protection Lab
displays that you have already created and saved.
User Guide
Protection
617
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to access the Protection Lab window:
a
In the Protection Lab window, click the I/O tab. The I/O tab lists the Protection Lab displays
that you have already created and saved.
On the left side of the I/O tab, double-click the name of the Protection Lab display that you want to
copy. The selected Protection Lab display will appear on the right side of the Protection Lab window.
Use the instructions in the following table to edit the Protection Lab display.
To ...
Do This ...
On the left side of the Protection Lab window, select the Devices
tab. Use the check boxes in the Devices list to add or remove
devices from the Protection Lab, as described in Creating a
Protection Lab display on page 616. When you are finished,
return to the I/O tab where you can further edit the Protection Lab
display. Remember that, as described below, you must save your
changes manually, or create a new Protection Lab display with
the new edits, before you close the Protection Lab window, or
else your changes will be lost.
User Guide
618
Protection
4
Click Save to save the changes you have made. If you close the Protection Lab window without
saving the changes, the changes will be lost.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to access the Protection Lab window:
a
In the Protection Lab window, click the I/O tab. The I/O tab lists the Protection Lab displays
that you have already created and saved.
On the left side of the I/O tab, double-click the name of the Protection Lab display that you want to
copy. The selected Protection Lab display will appear on the right side of the Protection Lab window.
Click New. A new copy of the Protection Lab display is created with an automatically generated
name. See Editing a Protection Lab display on page 616 and Renaming a Protection Lab display
on page 618 for information on editing and renaming the new Protection Lab display.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to access the Protection Lab window:
a
In the Protection Lab window, click the I/O tab. The I/O tab lists the Protection Lab displays
that you have already created and saved.
On the left side of the I/O tab, select the Protection Lab display that you want to rename.
Click Rename.
Type the new name for the Protection Lab display and then press Enter.
User Guide
Protection
619
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to access the Protection Lab window:
a
In the Protection Lab window, click the I/O tab. The I/O tab lists the Protection Lab displays
that you have already created and saved.
On the left side of the I/O tab, select the Protection Lab display that you want to delete.
Click Delete.
User Guide
620
Protection
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Protection Curve editor:
a
In the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the Edit Curve Points check box.
or
Right-click in the graph and select Edit. The curve points will appear on each curve.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Protection Curve editor:
a
Double-click the protection curve in the graph. The point editor will appear.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Protection Curve editor:
a
In the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the Edit Curve Points check box.
or
Right-click in the graph and select Edit. The curve points will appear on each curve.
User Guide
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Protection Curve editor:
a
In the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the Edit Curve Points check box.
Protection
621
or
Right-click in the graph and select Edit. The curve points will appear on each curve.
3
Click Save.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Protection Curve editor:
a
Use the tree view to navigate to the point you wish to redraw.
Right click on the curve in the menu and select Redraw. All curves will be removed from the graph.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Protection Curve editor:
a
In the Controls tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click Create New Curve. The Create Protection
Curve wizard appears.
On the first page of the Create Protection Curve editor, select the type of device for which you want
to create a curve. Click Next to continue.
On the second page of the wizard, select the Curve Type and Device Type. Click Next to continue.
On the third page of the wizard, select a Manufacturer or type the name of a new one. Click Next to
continue.
On the fourth page of the wizard, select a Model or type the name of a new one. Click Next to
continue.
On the fifth page of the wizard, select a Rating or type the name of a new one. Click Next to
continue.
On the sixth and final page of the wizard, select a Curve Name or type the name of a new one. Click
Finish.
User Guide
622
Protection
Expulsion fuse
Hydraulic recloser
Electronic recloser
Electromechanical relay
Electronic relay
For more information on protective device models, see Protective Devices on page 599. Please note that
the application does not evaluate classic protective devices since they lack detailed time-current
characteristics. For more information on classic protective devices, see Classic protective devices on
page 600.
This application is designed to provide useful engineering information about coordination problems or
settings problems that may exist among the protective devices in a model. However, a successful, violationfree run of the application is not a guarantee of proper system coordination. Check coordination analysis is
limited to evaluations based on an internal rule-base, and cannot account for nuances which may be unique
to your system. The information provided by the analysis is valuable; however, you should use analysis
results in conjunction with your own engineering experience and knowledge of your particular system.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
Protection
623
Determine all coordination pairs from the set of protective devices to be analyzed. For more
information on how the analysis set is determined, see Protection pairs and check coordinations
on page 639.
You can selectively enable and/or disable individual rules within the rule-base, using your
analysis options. For more information on setting check coordination options, see Setting
up a check coordination analysis on page 623.
Generate a report.
The coordination rule-base is extensive and GL Noble Denton welcomes your ideas for expansion for
upcoming releases. For more information on the current rule-base, see Selecting coordination rules for a
check coordination analysis on page 627.
Perform the following steps to open the Check Coordination Settings editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Check Coordination and then select Settings.
On the left side of the Check Coordination Settings editor, select from the different tab names to
access the available settings. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
-
User Guide
624
Protection
3
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Perform the following steps to open the Check Coordination Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Check Coordination and then select Settings.
Protection
625
2
In the Check Coordination Options editor, select the Settings tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Minimum Fault Values
User Guide
626
Protection
Use User-Defined
Cutoffs
Ignore Load
Calculations
Select this check box to ignore any fuses that are less than a
specified Amp rating.
Coordinate electronic
recloser lockout with
relays
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Check Coordination Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Check Coordination and then select Settings.
Use the table in the Margins tab to set the time and percentage margins for each type of protection
pair. To change a margin value, double-click the number and type a new value.
Tip:
User Guide
Click the column heading for Margin or Value to sort the margin list.
Protection
627
4
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Rule Group
Devices
Percent
Seconds
220%
---
10-
90%
---
10-
75%
---
11-
95%
---
12-
--
0.3 Sec
13-
75%
---
15-
90%
---
21-
75%
---
22-
75%
---
23-
75%
---
25-
50%
0.3 Sec
31-
75%
---
32-
75%
2.0 Sec
33-
75%
---
35-
Transformer inrush/fuse
75%
---
51-
Transformer inrush/recloser
75%
---
52-
Transformer inrush/relay
75%
---
53-
User Guide
628
Protection
Perform the following steps to open the Check Coordination Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Check Coordination and then select Settings.
The Rules list provides the name of each rule and the rules current priority: High, Medium, Low, or
Disabled. To change the priority of a rule, do the following:
Select the rule or rules that you want to edit. Click the Select All button to select all rules in
the list.
Use the options list next to the Set button to select the priority that you want to assign.
Click Set. The selected rules are updated with the new priority setting.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
10-01
Fuse
---
---
10-02
Fuse
---
C% (220%)
10-03
Fuse
---
C% (220%)
10-04
Fuse
---
T% (90%)
10-05
Fuse
---
---
User Guide
Protection
629
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
11-01
Fuse
Fuse
T% (75%)
11-02
Fuse
Fuse
T% (75%)
11-03
Fuse
Fuse
---
12-01
Fuse
Recloser
T% (95%)
12-02
Fuse
Recloser
T% (95%)
12-03
Fuse
Recloser
T% (95%)
12-04
Fuse
Recloser
T% (95%)
13-01
Fuse
Relay
S (0.3 Sec)
13-02
Fuse
Relay
S (0.3 Sec)
13-03
Fuse
Relay
T% (75%)
13-04
Fuse
Relay
T% (75%)
User Guide
630
Protection
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
15-01
Fuse
Tran
T% (75%)
15-02
Fuse
Tran
T% (75%)
20-01
Recloser
---
---
20-02
Recloser
---
---
20-03
Recloser
---
---
20-04
Recloser
---
---
20-05
Recloser
---
---
20-06
Recloser
---
---
20-07
Recloser
---
---
20-08
Recloser
---
---
20-09
Recloser
---
---
20-10
Recloser
---
---
20-11
Recloser
---
---
20-12
Recloser
---
---
20-13
Recloser
---
---
User Guide
Protection
631
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
21-01
Recloser
Fuse
T% (90%)
21-02
Recloser
Fuse
T% (90%)
22-01
Recloser
Recloser
22-02
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
22-03
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
22-04
Recloser
Recloser
S (0.3 Sec)
22-05
Recloser
Recloser
S (0.3 Sec)
User Guide
632
Protection
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
22-06
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
22-07
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
22-08
Recloser
Recloser
S (0.3 Sec)
22-09
Recloser
Recloser
S (0.3 Sec)
22-10
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
22-11
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
User Guide
Protection
633
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
22-12
Recloser
Recloser
S (0.3 Sec)
22-13
Recloser
Recloser
S (75%)
22-14
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
User Guide
634
Protection
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
22-15
Recloser
Recloser
T% (75%)
23-01
Recloser
Relay
T% (75%)
23-02
Recloser
Relay
T% (75%)
23-03
Recloser
Relay
23-04
Recloser
Relay
23-05
User Guide
Recloser
Relay
Protection
635
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
23-06
Recloser
Relay
23-07
Recloser
Relay
S (0.05 Sec)
23-08
Recloser
Relay
S (0.05 Sec)
23-09
Recloser
Relay
S (0.05 Sec)
25-01
Recloser
Tran
T% (75%)
25-02
Recloser
Tran
T% (75%)
30-01
Relay
30-02
Relay
30-03
Relay
30-04
Relay
User Guide
636
Protection
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
30-05
Relay
30-06
Relay
30-07
Relay
30-08
Relay
30-09
Relay
31-01
Relay
Fuse
T% (50%)
31-02
Relay
Fuse
T% (50%)
User Guide
Protection
637
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
31-03
Relay
Fuse
S (0.3 Sec)
31-04
Relay
Fuse
S (0.3 Sec)
32-01
Relay
Recloser
T% (75%)
32-02
Relay
Recloser
T% (75%)
33-01
Relay
Relay
T% (75%)
33-02
Relay
Relay
T% (75%)
33-03
Relay
Relay
S (2.0 Sec)
33-04
Relay
Relay
S (2.0 Sec)
35-01
Relay
Tran
T% (75%)
35-02
Relay
Tran
T% (75%)
40-01
Sctnlzr
51-01
Tran
Fuse
T% (75%)
User Guide
638
Protection
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
51-02
Tran
Fuse
T% (75%)
52-01
Tran
Recloser
T% (75%)
52-02
Tran
Recloser
T% (75%)
52-03
Tran
Recloser
T% (75%)
53-01
Tran
Relay
T% (75%)
53-02
Tran
Relay
T% (75%)
60-01
Any
User Guide
Protection
639
Rule
Protecting
Protected
Margin
Discussion
60-02
Any
2 3
6
Pair
Protecting
device
protecting
protecting
protecting
protecting
protecting
protecting
protecting
protecting
protecting
protecting
Protected
device
User Guide
640
Protection
Pair
Protecting
device
Protected
device
protecting
protecting
protecting
All pairs look past sectionalizers when considering the fault zone. Sectionalizers are not interrupting devices
and should not affect the fault zone of an upstream device. The minimum fault current for a protective device
is found from the minimum fault current of all downstream sections (propagated through necessary
transformers) that are not fed by other downstream protective devices, unless those downstream protective
devices are electrically at the given device.
Fuse
Recloser
Relay
Sectionalizer
Transformer
General
For example, rules and margins for a fuse protecting a recloser would use the prefix 12- (1-fuse, 2-recloser).
In general, the numbers in the prefixes are in the order of protecting/protected. If a rule pertains to a particular
isolated device, the protected value would be zero. For example, a rule for an isolated fuse would be
prefixed with 10-.
There are general and specific rules that are applied to the different combination of devices making up a
coordination pair. The coordination pairs recognized by SynerGEE are as follows.
Protecting device
Protected device
All
Fuse
Recloser
Relay
Sctzlr
Trans
None
60-
10-
20-
30-
40-
Fuse
11-
21-
31-
51-
Recloser
12-
22-
32-
52-
Relay
13-
23-
33-
53-
User Guide
Protection
641
Protecting device
Protected device
All
Fuse
Recloser
Relay
Sctzlr
Trans
Sectionalizer
Transformer
15-
25-
35-
Map view. All protective devices on the map are considered. All observable combinations of
protective devices are evaluated.
TCC view with no devices selected. All protective devices belonging to the selected feeders are
considered. All observable combinations of protective devices are evaluated.
TCC view with devices selected. Only combinations of the selected devices are evaluated.
Coordination between selected devices and other devices on the model is not evaluated.
If you have not already done so, use the Check Coordination Settings editor to configure options
related to the analysis. For more information, see Setting up a check coordination analysis on
page 623.
Line-ground minimum fault current. SynerGEE uses the fault impedance specified in the fault
analysis settings or the feeder record to calculate minimum line-ground fault currents. All devices
fed by the protecting device and no other downstream protective devices are evaluated. The fault
current from each device is propagated and possibly reflected through transformers to the protecting
User Guide
642
Protection
device. The smallest calculated line-ground fault current is selected for both the phase and ground
range minimum.
Percentage of bolted fault. Fault analysis is run. Using no fault impedance, phase and ground
faults are evaluated. All devices fed by the protecting device and no other downstream protective
devices are evaluated. The fault current from each device is propagated and possibly reflected
through transformers to the protecting device. The smallest calculated fault current is multiplied by
this percentage to obtain the range minimum. For the ground range minimum, the maximum ground
current is used because of the bolted fault condition. The phase range minimum uses the smallest
phase fault current.
Percentage of load current. The load current through the protecting device is multiplied by this
percentage value to obtain the range minimum. The phase range minimum uses phase current and
the ground range minimum uses the neutral current.
Use fixed current. A user-defined fixed current is used for both the phase and ground range
minimum. The same minimum is used for all protective device pairs regardless of the nominal
voltage level.
User Guide
Protection
643
You can see that there is no overlap in the amp ranges of either curve. SynerGEE treats this as a miscoordination.
ARC FLASHOVER
Arc flashover deals with the energy produced from a fault and its upstream coordination of protecting
equipment. SynerGEEs arc flashover application analyzes the safe working distances, estimated arc fault
amps, incident energy, and recommended PPE for clothing. SynerGEEs will make suggestions for safety
clothing to wear during maintenance, and can also produce printable safety labels with safe working distance
values, to be placed on equipment.
Arc flashover can be run on selected feeders, a query set, or a selected section with a device. Arc flashover
values can also be calculated and drawn on the TCC graph, as described in Adding notes, time lines, amp
lines, and arc flashover to the TCC on page 610.
User Guide
644
Protection
Refer to the topics listed below for more information. Additional information on arc flashover is provided in the
Arc Flashover chapter of the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Disclaimer
The data and the information are believed to be correct in the program and the documentation. However, any
and all liability, for the content and any omissions including any inaccuracies, errors, or misstatements in
data, calculations, or information is expressly disclaimed. GL Noble Denton disclaims any liability for the use
of software, calculations, or other information.
User Guide
Protection
645
Exceptions
IEEE standards do not cover single-phase ac systems, but SynerGEEs arc flashover analysis covers fault on
three-phase lines and sections.
For a three-phase line, only three-phase faults are considered for arc flashover calculations since the severity
of three-phase faults is the highest (according to the IEEE standards).
Model requirements
Arc flashover analysis requires similar model data requirements as the load flow and fault analysis. Source
resistance and reactance should be accurately specified in the source, line impedances and lengths should
be correctly modeled, and protective devices (fuses, reclosers, breakers, and sectionalizers) should be
correctly modeled with the necessary settings. Once this is done, as would normally be done for running load
flow and check coordination analysis, you are ready to configure the arc flashover analysis options and then
run the analysis.
Perform the following steps to open the Arc Flashover Options editor:
a
In the Safety group, click the text label Arc Flashover and then select Settings.
User Guide
646
Protection
2
In the Arc Flashover Options editor, select the Settings tab. The following table describes the
different options that you can set.
Arc-flash analysis
Specifies the goal of the arc flashover analysis. Select from one of the
following options:
Fault clearing
Risk categories
Specifies the PPE grade. Use these fields to manually set the PPE
grade for safety clothing. See Selection of PPE rating for clothing on
page 646 for more information.
Other settings
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Protection
647
important that you choose working distance carefully and consider the equipment you are studying in the arc
flashover analysis.
Refer to the following procedure for more information on editing working distances.
Perform the following steps to open the Arc Flashover Options editor:
a
In the Safety group, click the text label Arc Flashover and then select Settings.
In the Equipment table, select the facility category that you want to edit and then use the settings
below the table to set the following options:
-
Working distance
Distance factor
In addition, select the Report check box if you want to report on the equipment category.
4
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Arc Flashover Options editor:
a
In the Safety group, click the text label Arc Flashover and then select Settings.
Make sure that the Generate label(s) for analysis section check box is selected.
Use the Comment to place on label area to type the custom text that you want to appear on the
label.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
648
Protection
If you have not already done so, use the Arc Flashover Analysis Options editor to configure options
related to the analysis. For more information, see Setting up an arc flashover analysis on
page 645.
FAULT ANALYSIS
SynerGEE fault analysis determines the balanced or by-phase fault currents flowing to and into a fault. It can
also determine the balanced or by-phase fault voltages. SynerGEE supports three types of fault analysis:
basic fault, fault flow, and fault voltage.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Fault analysis
Fault analysis places a fault on each section of the model, one by one, and then computes the fault current in
amps for the load end of each section. The fault values include minimum and maximum line-ground, phasephase, and three-phase faults. The distances from the substation and the positive and zero sequence
User Guide
Protection
649
impedance are accumulated along the feeder. The analysis checks the minimum fault current from the
selected protective device down-line to the next section with a protective device. Fault analysis is available
for substation models and in feeders or substations with looped configurations.
Fault values are calculated using the symmetrical components method of solution. If a system has loops or
active generators, the impedance seen by the fault is calculated in the phase domain and then transformed to
the sequence domain model. For more information on this classical method, see the SynerGEE Technical
Reference.
Eq 121
The values of | I Total | for affected lines are listed in the fault flow analysis report.
Fault flow analysis is used to determine fault current into the fault, any generators, and through tie
switches for each type of fault.
A load-flow analysis is used to calculate load currents and the source voltage behind the feeder or
substation source impedance.
User Guide
650
Protection
3
For each fault type, the fault currents and the load currents are accumulated.
For each fault type, voltage drops are calculated throughout the feeder.
The fault voltage analysis report lists balanced or by-phase voltages and current flows for each section and
for each fault type. The report also lists the percent dip, fault impedance, and percent loading of conductors
and other devices. The kVA flow is also given.
Fault voltage analysis requires that you first set a particular section for analysis, which becomes the fault
location. For more information on setting a section for analysis, see Setting a section for analysis on
page 434.
Perform the following steps open the Fault Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Fault Operations group, click the text label for any of the three fault analysis types
Fault, Flow, or Voltage and then select Settings.
In the Fault Analysis Options editor, use the Shared Settings section to configure options that apply
to all three analysis types. Refer to the following table for more information.
Use Calculated PreFault Voltage
Use maximum
(instead of average)
LLG values
Select this check box to use the maximum LLG values to calculate
fault values.
User Guide
Protection
651
Select this check box to set the minimum L-G fault values to 1/ an
optional denominator between 1 and 9.9. The default value, as shown
in the text box, is 1/3.0.
If you select this option, the Fault resistance for min L-G fault option
will be disabled.
Source Impedance
3
Use the Section by Section Fault Analysis Settings area to configure options that apply to the fault
analysis type only. Refer to the following table for more information.
Fast Wandering
Laterals & Skip Loop
Areas
Asynchronous Fault
Cycle
Specify the number of cycles past the fault instance to establish the
point in time for the analysis.
Current Options
Symmetrical AC component
Asymmetrical DC component
User Guide
652
Protection
4
Use the Fault Flow/Fault Voltage Analysis Settings section to configure options that apply to both
the fault flow and fault voltage analysis types. Refer to the following table for more information.
Add in pre-fault load
current
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Fault Analysis Options editor to select the analysis type
and configure other analysis-related options as desired. For more information, see Setting up a
fault analysis on page 650.
In the Fault Applications group, click the icon that corresponds to the fault analysis type that you
want to run.
-
User Guide
Protection
653
1000.6
1000.3
1000.2
500.2
1000.9
500.1
1000.7
500.1
500.1
500.1
500.1
500.0
500.1
500.0
500.1
500.2
500.1
500.1
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.0
500.1
The feeder serves a 500kW load on the upper wandering lateral and a three-phase 1500kW load at the end
of the feeder. The map shows the kW flows from the feeder and along the laterals and back to the main line
to serve the three-phase load.
Fault, fault flow, and fault voltage can be run on this feeder. If fault analysis is run, fault impedances are found
using looped fault analysis. Fault currents and flows are found from the fault impedances. Fault flow and fault
voltage analysis use their load-flow based engine that is fully compatible with wandering laterals.
Perform the following steps to open the Fault Sequence Analysis editor:
a
In the Fault Operations group, click the text label Fault Sequence and then select
Settings.
Use the Fault Sequence Analysis editor to configure the analysis settings.
User Guide
654
Protection
3
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
When the analysis is complete, the fault sequence analysis report displays. The report contains
three main chapters:
-
Switching. The Switching chapter of the fault sequence analysis report contains
information about the type of device that responded to a fault, and the section on which it
lies. This chapter also contains buttons for you to click to go to any switching state seen in
the analysis.
Section Amp Summary. The Section Amp Summary chapter of the Fault Responses
Analysis report contains information about each sections current levels on each phase
both before and after a fault. This data can be exported to Excel by selecting File > Open in
Excel.
Events. The Events chapter in the fault sequence analysis report can be viewed two
different ways: all at once, or separated out by section. The All chapter is sorted by the
amount of time that passes after a fault occurs, and the events which occurred at those
times, involving specific devices on a section. It also lists the next event after the initial fault
reaction by the device.
The chapters that are separated out by section contain the same information as the All
chapter. The difference is that only one section, and the device on that section that reacted
to the fault, is listed in each chapter.
Phase to phase
User Guide
Protection
655
Three-phase
Fault events
Fault events allow you to import fault data recorded in a SCADA database into SynerGEE, for use with a fault
location analysis. In most cases, you will want to import this data using a messaging script. You can then set
up the fault location analysis to analyze one fault event or all fault events, as described in Setting up a fault
location analysis on page 656. However, SynerGEE also allows you to manually create, edit, and delete fault
events, if desired.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
In the SynerGEE map display, right-click on the section where you want to add the fault event.
Use the Fault Event record to edit details for the fault event. For more information, see Editing a
fault event on page 655.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Model tab of the SynerGEE model explorer, expand Locations/Groups and select Fault
Events.
In the lower-half of the model explorer, double-click the name of the fault event that you want to edit.
User Guide
656
Protection
3
Use the Fault Event editor to edit details for the fault event. The following table describes the
different fields that you can edit.
Fault measured at
Name of the section where the fault has been recorded. This is a
read-only field that cannot be edited.
Description
If the fault level is known for specific phases, select the Fault
values are known by-phase check box. Then, select the check
boxes for the appropriate phase(s) and enter the fault level
value(s).
Protection equipment
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Model tab of the SynerGEE model explorer, expand Locations/Groups and select Fault
Events.
In the lower-half of the model explorer, select the name of the fault event that you want to delete.
User Guide
Protection
657
Perform the following steps to open the Fault Location Analysis editor:
a
In the Fault Operations group, click the text label Fault Location and then select Settings.
Use the Fault Location Analysis editor to configure the fault location analysis settings. Refer to the
following table for more information on the options that you can set.
Fault amps into
section
For more information on fault events, see Fault events on page 655.
Fault level information
If the fault level is known for specific phases, select the Fault values
are known by-phase check box. Then, select the check boxes for
the appropriate phase(s) and enter the fault level value(s).
These options are enabled when you select the Metered fault amps
option, as described above. If you are analyzing a fault event, these
options are set on the fault event itself.
Protection equipment
Options
Faults to consider
Select from the appropriate check boxes to narrow the fault location
by phase. This option can be helpful if you know the phase type
where the fault occurred.
User Guide
658
Protection
Fault R Ohms
Use the appropriate check boxes to specify fault resistance values for
line-gnd faults.
Report up to
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Fault Location Analysis editor to configure analysis-related
options as desired. For more information, see Setting up a fault location analysis on page 656.
Run Summary. The Run Summary section provides a brief overview of the time and conditions that
are being analyzed in the report.
Structure. The Structure section shows the sections that include protective devices for the selected
subtrans and feeders in the model. The section name is provided along with the protective device
type, its amp rating, and its customer count. The report also identifies which zone includes each
protective device.
Exposure. The Exposure section shows the exposure of a protective device directly downstream.,
including miles, configuration, and conductor.
Breaker Zone 1. The Breaker Zone 1 section provides details on any devices that are within the first
zone of a breaker.
Refer to the following procedure for information on viewing the Protection Scheme report.
User Guide
Protection
659
If prompted, click Yes to perform a load-flow analysis and a fault analysis before viewing the report.
Or, click No to view the report without running new analyses. In this case the report will show the
most recently available results.
User Guide
660
User Guide
Protection
CHAPTER
13
Reliability
SynerGEE Reliability is a comprehensive package to aid in the simulation and analysis of distribution system
reliability. Delivered on the SynerGEE platform, it is a powerful tool for investigating root cause and
configuration effects on system-level and customer-level reliability.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
RELIABILITY
About Reliability and SynerGEE
SynerGEE Reliability brings you the following features and characteristics:
Zone-based failure rates, repair times, and repair costs with provisions for single- or three-phase
lines
By-phase analysis
By-cause analysis
Capacity evaluation
User Guide
662
Reliability
Importance of reliability
Reliability metrics indicate how well a utility serves its customers. More specifically, these metrics indicate the
value that customers realize through their current service. Since quality of service is basic to the long-term
health of any utility, reliability metrics are a fundamental concern of engineers, managers, and executives
alike. These metrics often affect financial decisions related to long-range and business planning. In addition,
as movements toward deregulation and open competition continue, issues of distribution system reliability
become even more important.
User Guide
Reliability
663
Perform the following steps to open the Reliability Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Reliability and then select Settings.
On the left side of the Reliability Analysis Options editor, select from the different tab names to
access the available reliability analysis options. The following sections describe the different tasks
that you can perform:
-
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Reliability Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Reliability and then select Settings.
In the Reliability Analysis Options editor, select the Setup tab. Use the options in the Setup tab to
edit the following settings:
Analysis
Pickup Model
User Guide
664
Reliability
Calculations
Feeder Behavior
User Guide
Auto-Transfer
Switches
Automatic Switches
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Reliability
665
Perform the following steps to open the Reliability Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Reliability and then select Settings.
In the Reliability Analysis Options editor, select the Settings tab. Use the options in the Settings tab
to edit the following settings:
SAIDI
Sets the amount of time allowed for outage. If the outage event is
longer than the Disregarded event value, the event is not considered
during Reliability analysis.
If the event duration is less than the Momentary event value but
greater than the Disregarded event value, then the event will only
impact MAIFI results during Reliability analysis.
Uncleared Temporary
Failures
Generate subcategory
results
Suppress Feeder
Breaker Events
User Guide
666
Reliability
Fuse/Recloser
Coordination
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Reliability Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Analysis group, click the text label Reliability and then select Settings.
In the Reliability Analysis Options editor, select the Scalars tab. Perform the following steps to
enable scalars and suppressions for the reliability analysis:
-
User Guide
To apply scalars to the analysis, select the Use Scalars check box. The Multiplier and
Adder fields represent the effects of the weather or time of year. These values can be
Reliability
667
applied to the permanent and temporary failure rates, as well as to the repair time of any
section with an exposure zone that contains the same category and subcategory of event.
-
To set percentages of suppression for the effects of various root causes, select the Use
Suppression check box. The suppression works much like the percentages specified in
mitigation zones, except that the effects are global. Suppression only applies to root
causes found in applied exposure zones. The suppression of a root cause not applied to
the model will have no effect.
For more information on exposure zones, see Setting up additional reliability analysis
options on page 665.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Reliability Analysis Options editor to configure options
related to the analysis. For more information, see Setting up a Reliability Analysis on page 662.
User Guide
668
Reliability
SAIFI =
Eq 131
Equation 132
CAIFI =
Eq 133
SAIDI =
Eq 134
CAIDI =
Eq 135
ASAI =
User Guide
Eq 136
Reliability
669
MAIFI =
Eq 137
This type of chart provides valuable insight, demonstrating the importance of customer- or zone-based index
and standard deviation values.
User Guide
670
Reliability
customers and the operation of automatic switches. Clearly, it is impossible to mimic real world operations
within a simulation for every type of failure. However, SynerGEEs fault location application can be helpful in
determining a close approximation of a fault location. For more information see Fault Location Analysis on
page 654.
Variance is very sensitive to feeder configuration and device placement. For example, a feeder
reconfiguration may change a SAIFI value from 2.5 to 2.3. However, if the SAIFI was originally 2.5 +/- 1.0 and
the reconfiguration resulted in a value of 2.3 +/- 1.5, the original configuration may be considered superior
from a strict metric perspective. The necessity of the variance calculation becomes even more evident when
considering cost functions associated with performance-based rates.
Values of variance can also be referred to as confidence intervals. For more information on setting
SynerGEE to calculate confidence intervals, see Setting up a Reliability Analysis on page 662.
User Guide
Reliability
671
Correlation between root cause exposure, feeder configuration, and protective device placement is high.
Diagrams such as this help evaluate the effectiveness of a particular mitigation effort. Root cause categories
may be extensive and there may be considerable variation between utilities.
For more information on establishing root causes within the SynerGEE environment, see Defining root
causes for a reliability simulation on page 677.
For more information on creating, applying, and managing mitigation zones, see Mitigation zones on
page 683.
User Guide
672
Reliability
Place a meter at the outward end of a section you wish to isolate. Run a load-flow analysis and then click the
Replace with results button in the Demands tab of the Meter editor. Change the meters status to open and
enable the meter to use demands as load out of the meter. This will isolate upstream sections from the meter,
as shown in the following figures.
Full feeder
Isolated meter
Reliability targets can also be set with the Meter editor. This will help you adjust exposure factors so that
SAIDI, SAIFI, and MAIFI targets can be achieved. For more information, see Exposure factors and reliability
User Guide
Reliability
673
Load-flow
Economic analysis
Contingency
Optimal switching
Phase balancing
Harmonic analysis
Capacitor analysis
Coordination checking
The collaboration of these applications enables you to fully evaluate system performance while making
reliability decisions. You do not have to base decisions on any single type of engineering analysis. Also, since
these applications are used in other planning, protection, and operational roles, you can take advantage of
the consistency and compatibility of all SynerGEE modeling and analysis features.
User Guide
674
Reliability
Topology
(GIS or
SynerGEE)
SynerGEE model
Sample years
historical
Historical
(OMS) data
Direct
analysis
Analytical
analysis
Simulated
direct
analysis
SynerGEE handles two of the approaches, analytical analysis and simulated direct analysis. The third
type, direct analysis, involves near-raw outage data and specific utility customs. You should have some
means of conducting direct analysis, since it is an important part of evaluating system reliability performance
as well as expected performance. Often, spreadsheets or database procedures can adequately evaluate
reliability performance.
User Guide
Reliability
675
that the recloser serves 155 customers. Therefore, you should update your outage record to reflect 155
affected customers for reliability analysis. This type of validation should be applied to any applicable
correlations between outage and network information.
Failure rates, repair times, and other information should be adjusted in the model until analysis results are
consistent with historical values.
User Guide
676
Reliability
It may be a challenge to identify and resolve problems with large variance values.
A device either fails or it operates. A regulator, for example, cannot operate at reduced capacity.
The probability that a device will fail remains consistent over time. For example, the probability that
a regulator will fail is the same regardless of the time-of-day.
The reliability evaluation period is constant for each and every device.
The probability of failure for each device is independent. If a regulator fails, the probability of the
downstream line failing is unaffected. The probability of the regulator failing again is unaffected.
See the SynerGEE Technical Reference for reliability calculations and example studies.
Interruption
device
User Guide
Reliability
677
If the interrupting device has reclosing capability, the interruption caused by the tree branch failure will be
momentary. However, if the interrupting device is a fuse or a breaker without a reclosing relay, the interruption
will be permanent.
Some failures cannot be cleared by reclosing equipment. If a tree branch falls on a line and it does not
disintegrate or fall away, reclosing equipment will operate to lockout. Therefore, SynerGEE considers the
following failure rates:
Sustained fault failure rate. Expected yearly rate for failures that remain after reclosing equipment
actions.
Momentary fault failure rate. Expected yearly rate for failures that can be cleared by reclosing
equipment.
If no reclosing equipment exists to protect against a momentary event, a sustained interruption results.
Consider the following situation, which will result in a sustained interruption.
Non-reclosing
feeder
F
Momentary event
Fuse
However, in the following case, only a momentary interruption results because of the upstream reclosing
device.
Non-reclosing
feeder
F
Momentary event
Recloser
Fuse
If a permanent event occurred on the system above, SynerGEE assumes that the recloser and fuse are
coordinated so that the fuse blows.
Non-reclosing
feeder
F
Permanent event
Recloser
Fuse
Even with the assumption, overall performance of the model should be reasonable. Consideration of timecoordination settings of devices and the breadth of available fault levels from a failure would be very complex,
and would not likely be of value to the simulation.
User Guide
678
Reliability
SynerGEEs root cause data is stored in a text file, ReliCauseMeta.txt, that is saved by default in your
Settings file directory. This file is read when SynerGEE starts up and held in memory for the entire session.
Therefore, if you change the file, you must restart SynerGEE to see any changes.
For information on locating and editing your Settings file directory, see Defining file paths on page 167.
The root causes that are saved in the ReliCauseMeta.txt are used to populate the exposure and mitigation
zone editors. For more information on exposure zones, see Exposure zones on page 679. For more
information on mitigation zones, see Mitigation zones on page 683.
To illustrate the architecture of the root cause file, consider the following example:
10,
10,
10,
10,
10,
15,
15,
15,
20,
20,
20,
32,
32,
32,
32,
32,
42,
42,
42,
42,
42,
...
-1, Animals
5, Squirrels
7, Raccoons
8, Snakes
22, Chimps
-1, Trees
5, Deciduous
9, Evergreen
-1, Accident
5, Driver
15, Vandalism
-1, Birds
10, Nesting
18, Pigeon
14, Condor
22, Gull
-1, Weather
16, Rain
18, Ice / Snow
22, Hail
24, Hurricane
The numbers used for categories and subcategories may be arbitrarily chosen. The only significant
subcategory value is -1, which indicates that the entry contains the category name. Otherwise, you can
create subcategories as needed, using a consistent category number, and choosing a subcategory number.
The category number can be any integer, so long as all subcategories are associated with that same number.
You can place any entry anywhere in the file, since it has no ordering requirements. However, you may wish
to keep all entries for a particular category together, for convenience.
The category and subcategory numbers that you assign are referenced by SynerGEE during analysis.
Although the text descriptions appear in SynerGEE editors, the numbers are vital to internal functions.
Therefore, you should use caution if changing or removing items. If inconsistencies arise between different
files used by different users, data problems could result.
User Guide
Reliability
679
Editing ReliCauseMeta.txt
To illustrate the editing of ReliCauseMeta.txt, assume that your feeders are in a politically unstable area, with
frequent intentional damage caused by unruly citizens and foreign insurgents. Anywhere in the
ReliCauseMeta.txt file, you could add the following lines, assuming that category 100 is not already used:
100,
100,
100,
100,
100,
100,
After you restart SynerGEE, the exposure zone editor would appear as follows:
To ensure consistency, you should consider creating one ReliCauseMeta.txt file for your organization and
distributing it to all users. If you make changes afterward, you should:
1
Verify that all users receive and apply the updated file.
Generally, adding new items causes less impact than removing or changing items.
Exposure zones
Exposure zones allow you to apply section failure data to your model. Stored as equipment data, an
exposure zone represents a predefined collection of failure data that can be applied to multiple sections in
your model. All sections that are associated with a particular exposure zone share the common values for
that zone, which means you do not have to configure an individual data set for each applicable section.
User Guide
680
Reliability
The values that you can define for an exposure zone include the following:
The method you choose will depend largely on how you apply your historic outage data to the model.
With this method, you can apply multiple causes to whole regions of your system, and varying degrees of
each. It allows the correlation of lines with similar construction, in like areas, and with common isolation
devices. For example, you may have a region in which squirrels, snakes, and deciduous trees are a problem.
In SynerGEE, you can create an exposure zone that represents these causes, and apply it to sections in your
model as appropriate.
User Guide
Reliability
681
Zone
4334552
Recloser
4334552"
Squirrels
Fuse 1565423
Zone
1565423
Birds
Squirrels
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new exposure zone and then click OK.
Use the Exposure Zone editor to edit the settings for the exposure zone. For more information on
the options you can set, see Editing an exposure zone on page 681.
Expand Zones - Exposure and then double-click the name of the exposure zone that you want to
edit.
User Guide
682
Reliability
3
Use the options in the Exposure Zone editor to perform the following tasks:
To ...
Do This ...
Specify an optional
description for the exposure
zone
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Next to Exposure Zones, select the name of the exposure zone that you want to assign to the
section.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Reliability
683
Expand Zones - Exposure and then select the name of the exposure zone that you want to delete.
Mitigation zones
From a data perspective, mitigation zones are similar to exposure zones. The data is organized by root
cause, and every section can be assigned to a mitigation zone. A mitigation zone is simply a collection of all
the root causes in your system with a percentage of mitigation effectiveness assigned to each. When you
assign a mitigation zone to a section, root causes are considered mitigated according to those percentages,
respectively. Mitigation zones also contain fixed and annual cost data that is used by the analysis for costs
calculations, including those based on initial costs versus cost savings due to effective mitigation.
Keep in mind that root cause failure data is controlled by exposure zones, and mitigation against a particular
root cause is meaningless if that cause was not active to begin with. For example, you may assign a
mitigation zone to a section that specifies a 50% mitigation effectiveness against the root cause of Trees,
perhaps through some sort of tree-trimming. However, if the exposure zone assigned to the same section
does not list failure data for trees, the mitigation data is unused.
For any given mitigation zone, it is likely that mitigation will be zero for most root causes since your mitigation
efforts are probably focused by region. However, keep in mind that some mitigation efforts can affect multiple
causes. For example, squirrels, birds, trees, and other causes may all be partially mitigated through tree
trimming.
In order for reliability analysis to consider mitigation in your model, you must have your analysis options set
up as such. For more information on globally enabling mitigation in your analysis options, see Setting up a
Reliability Analysis on page 662.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new mitigation zone and then click OK.
Use the Mitigation Zone editor to edit the settings for the mitigation zone. For more information on
the options you can set, see Editing a mitigation zone on page 684.
User Guide
684
Reliability
Expand Zones - Mitigation and then double-click the name of the mitigation zone that you want to
edit.
Use the options in the Mitigation Zone editor to perform the following tasks.
To ...
Do This ...
Specify an optional
description for the mitigation
zone
Under Fixed Cost and Yearly Cost, specify the fixed and annual
mitigation costs, respectively. These values are used by the
analysis for costs calculations, including calculations based on
initial costs versus cost savings due to effective mitigation.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
Reliability
685
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Under Reliability Zones, select the desired mitigation zone and click Apply.
Tip:
If you have multiple sections to assign, you may find it much more convenient to use the
Multiple Editor. For more information on the Multiple Editor, see Using the Multiple Editor
on page 177.
Expand Zones - Mitigation and then select the name of the mitigation zone that you want to delete.
Fail device. Device that can fail with a momentary or sustained type of event. Upstream protection
devices are used to interrupt the fault.
Interrupting device. Device that can interrupt fault current. The interruption can be sustained if the
fault is sustained or the device cannot reclose. The interruption can be momentary if the device has
reclosing capabilities.
Isolating device. Device that can isolate the faulted area to allow resetting of an upstream
interrupting device. An isolating device is used to quickly pick up customers between itself and the
upstream interrupting device, while the fail device is being repaired.
Pickup device. Device used to quickly restore service to customers isolated from a failure by
isolating devices.
Motors, capacitors, and generators do not have failure rates. However, these devices may still contribute to
the reliability characteristics of a set of feeders if capacity constraints are an issue.
Devices failure data has similarities to the data contained within exposure zones. However, since it
represents the actual failure data for a particular device, it is not broken up into the single-phase/three-phase
groups. It is also not characterized by category. Switchable devices like switches and protective devices also
have a crew operation time value. This value corresponds to the typical time it takes for a crew to reach and
operate the device.
User Guide
686
Reliability
In reliability reports, indexes resulting from device failures are listed under an Equipment category.
Isolate the faulted/damaged device with the closest feeding switch or protective device.
Pick up customers that were outaged in step 1 and separated from the fault in step 2.
The sections listed below present conceptual and mathematical representations of this process.
H
A
F
D
Fuse
Switch
Simple feeder
Consider a fault at line F. In this case, the analysis process would assume the following sequence.
1
Fault occurs at F.
Fuse at C blows.
After a repair time based on the line type for F, switch E is closed to restore service to customers on
F and G.
Now, consider a fault at D. The process would then assume this sequence.
1
Fault occurs at D.
Fuse at C blows.
User Guide
Reliability
687
3
Feeders and Subtrans. Indices for each feeder are generated. The feeders are analyzed
independently with respect to indices. Switching may be performed between feeders to pick up
customers during the analysis.
Protection Zone. Unique zones can be defined by an interrupting/isolation device pair. Every
customer directly fed by these two devices will share the same outage characteristics. Indices are
generated for these zones.
Customer Zone. If customer classes are assigned to sections, indices are collected for the customer
zones.
Mitigation Zone. Index values are reported for the areas receiving mitigation.
Cause In Zone. Reliability indices calculated using protection zone and only those failures occurring
within the protection zone.
Percent Cause In Zone. Percent of index caused by failures within a sections zone.
Scenarios
User Guide
688
Reliability
Undo/Redo
Contingency analysis
Fault analysis
SynerGEE protection
Reliability analysis isolates all outage devices as if they were faulted. In actuality, some device
failures may just result in loss of service to downstream customers and not require the operation of
upstream protective devices. SynerGEE always isolates an outage with an upstream protective
device.
SynerGEE assumes that a feeder device is capable of interrupting service even if a breaker is not
modeled directly after the feeder. An event on a device having no protective devices along its feeder
path results in an outage of the entire feeder.
No parallel components are considered. A regulator bypass, for example, is not modeled within SynerGEE.
Recloser 2 will operate to interrupt the outage resulting in an outage for all customers fed by the recloser.
Switch 3 will then be opened to isolate the outage. The recloser will be reset. Fuse 4 will be opened and
switch 5 will be closed to pick up those customers. Fuse 6 and switch 7 will be handled in a similar manner.
User Guide
Reliability
689
HARMONIC
Electronic loads are sensitive and susceptible to a number of natural and unnatural disturbances that affect
the quality of a load. Circuit breakers trip for unknown reasons, neutral conductors in balanced circuits
overheat from excessive loads, and transformers with an average load mysteriously overheat. These are
symptoms of power quality disturbances, the cause of which could be any number of problems, including
sags, transients, swells, harmonics, and momentary interruptions.
Power quality disturbances can be broken down into three types:
RMS variations, including faults, improper wiring, equipment failure, sudden removal of a large load,
and weather.
SynerGEEs Harmonic Analysis application is designed to isolate and simulate harmonic power quality
issues. For more information, see Harmonic Analysis on page 689.
Harmonic Analysis
A harmonic is a component of a periodic wave having a frequency that is an integral multiple of the
fundamental power line frequency of 60Hz. In other words, the 1st harmonic exists with 60Hz, the 2nd with
120Hz, the 3rd with 180Hz, and so on. Total harmonic distortion is the combination of all the harmonic
frequency currents to the fundamental. The characteristic harmonics are based on the number of rectifiers
(pulse numbers) used in a circuit. SynerGEE can handle subharmonics, or interharmonics. If a harmonic
based on a whole number does not converge, then SynerGEE will automatically check at h-0.25 or h+0.25
intervals. For example, if a harmonic does not converge at 2.0, it will check 1.75 and 2.25. If it still does not
converge, SynerGEE will expand the check to 1.5 and 2.5.
Harmonics pose a problem because of the loss to customer and utility systems as well as the extra costs that
can be incurred because of damaged equipment, replacements, and repairs. Current harmonics can distort
the voltage waveform and cause voltage harmonics. Voltage distortion affects sensitive electronic loads,
motors, and capacitors. In motors, negative sequence harmonics produce rotating magnetic fields. These
fields rotate in the opposite direction of the fundamental magnetic field and could cause overheating and
mechanical oscillations. Capacitors do not generate harmonics, but the reactance (impedance) of a capacitor
decreases as the frequency increases. This causes the capacitor to act as a trap for higher harmonic currents
and magnify them. High harmonics can overheat the capacitors.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
690
Reliability
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new harmonic curve and then click OK.
Use the Harmonic Curve Type editor to edit the settings for the harmonic curve. For more
information on the options you can set, see Editing a harmonic curve on page 690.
Expand Harmonic Curves and then double-click the name of the harmonic curve that you want to
edit.
Use the options in the Harmonics Curve Type editor to perform the following tasks:
User Guide
To ...
Do This ...
Reliability
691
To ...
Do This ...
Click the Toggle button so that the harmonics chart view displays.
Using the mouse, drag the bar for each harmonic to set the desired
percentage. The chart view can be used to set odd-numbered
harmonics, from 3 to 25, between 0 and 15 percent. To set evennumbered harmonics or to set harmonic percentages from 15 to 100
percent, you must use the table view.
User Guide
692
Reliability
To ...
Do This ...
Click the Toggle button so that the harmonics table view displays.
The table view can be used to set harmonics for both odd- and evennumbered values between 3 and 25, from 0 to 100 percent. Oddnumbered harmonic values can also be set in the chart view between
0 and 15 percent.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Harmonic Curves and then select the name of the harmonic curve that you want to delete.
User Guide
Reliability
693
Expand Facilities and then select Large Customers. Double-click the name of the large customer
that you want to edit.
Next to Harmonic Profile, select the name of the harmonic curve that you want to apply to the large
customer.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Under Attributes, select the Monitor Harmonic check box. Selecting this option will enable the
section for harmonic monitoring.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Harmonic Analysis Options editor:
a
In the Power Quality group, click the text label Harmonic and then select Settings.
User Guide
694
Reliability
2
Use the Harmonic Analysis Options editor to set up the harmonic analysis. Refer to the following
table for more information on the options that you can set.
Harmonic Analysis
Type
Harmonic scan
Select the type of harmonic analysis that you want to perform. The
following options are available:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Run Summary. The Run Summary chapter provides a brief overview of the analysis, including the
devices involved in the scan, the analysis year, spot and distributed load, and warnings and fixes.
THD Distribution. The THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) Distribution chapter shows a pie chart that
represents the miles of line in each percentage category. The example below shows that
User Guide
Reliability
695
approximately 75% of the line in the model contains less than 0.1% THD. About 20% of the line in
the model contains 2-3% THD.
Section-based report chapters. The other chapters of the report are based on the sections that were
configured for harmonic monitoring. Each section will appear as a chapter in the report and may
include any of the following sub-reports:
-
Amp and Volt Values. The Amp and Volt Values bar chart represents the by-phase current
and voltage contribution as a percentage of the fundamental for each harmonic order. This
takes into account the models harmonic curves and load-flow calculations.
Volt Chart. The Volt Chart bar chart represents the by-phase voltage contribution as a
percentage of the fundamental for each harmonic order based on the models harmonic
curves and load-flow calculations.
Amp Chart. The Amp Chart bar chart represents the by-phase current percent contribution
as a percentage of the fundamental for each harmonic order based on the models
harmonic curves and load-flow calculations.
Neutral Chart. The Neutral Chart bar chart represents the neutral current contribution of the
fundamental for each harmonic order based on the models harmonic curves and load-flow
calculations.
Volt Cycle. The Volt Cycle graph represents the non-sinusoidal by-phase current waveform
distortion due to harmonic current.
Amp Cycle. The Amp Cycle graph represents the non-sinusoidal by-phase current
waveform distortion due to harmonic content.
Neutral Curve. The Neutral Curve graph represents the non-sinusoidal neutral current
waveform distortion due to harmonic content.
User Guide
696
Reliability
Positive Sequence Z. This plot represents the positive sequence impedance in ohms as seen at the
load end of the selected section.
Positive Sequence R, X. This plot represents the positive sequence resistance and reactance in
ohms as seen at the load end of the selected section.
Phase Z. This plot represents the per-phase impedance (phase domain) in ohms as seen at the
load end of the selected section.
Phase R. This plot represents the per-phase resistance (phase domain) in ohms as seen at the load
end of the selected section.
Phase X. This plot represents the per-phase reactance (phase domain) in ohms as seen at the load
end of the selected section.
Sequence Domain Z. This plot represents the positive and zero sequence impedance in ohms as
seen at the load end of the selected section.
Sequence Domain R, X. This plot represents the positive and zero sequence resistance and
reactance in ohms as seen at the load end of the selected section.
Impedance values. As an alternative to the plot chapters, this grid-style report contains harmonic
impedance values at increments of 1/4 the fundamental frequency.
User Guide
Reliability
697
To use this tool, the model must have customer count values populated. It should also have failure rates and
repair times entered for transformers, feeders, breakers, and so on.
The report chapters generated by this application can be opened in Excel. At that point, various scatter
charts, pivot tables, and diagrams can be utilized.
Use one of the following methods to open the Reliability Event Management wizard:
-
In the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the FORGE tab. Then, in the Model Forge group, click
Outage Events.
or
In the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select the RELIABILITY tab. Then, in the Tools group, click
Outage Events.
On the first page of the Reliability Event Management wizard, select from one of the following
actions. It is important to note that in order to use the Reliability Event Management wizard, a text
file containing outage data must already exist in MiddleLink format.
Category
Typical actions to load
outage events
Maintenance
Description
Once outage events are loaded and zones are created, you can
perform maintenance operations on your data sets. The following
options are available:
User Guide
698
Reliability
Category
Advanced
User Guide
Description
CHAPTER
14
Scripts
Scripts are customized macros that store a sequence of SynerGEE commands in an externally saved file.
SynerGEEs scripting language uses simple, predefined statements that you can customize with your own
parameters to perform very precise events in SynerGEE. The Startup recipe, for example, can be configured
to automatically perform specific functions each time that SynerGEE starts, such as loading models,
selecting feeders, and performing certain analyses.
You can write SynerGEE scripts directly in a text file using Notepad or any other text editing application, or
you can write scripts directly in SynerGEE using the SynerGEE Script editor. Script schemas are available
from the Support tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar and are also provided as appendices to this User Guide.
Once written, you can run the scripts manually while you are using SynerGEE, or you can set up some scripts
to run on an automated basis.
Scripts can also be written using the Python programming language. Python is an open-source language that
is known for its simple, concise programming language. One advantage of writing Python scripts for use with
SynerGEE is that you have access to the complete Solver object library. This allows you full access to
practically all of the data in your model. By comparison, with the traditional SynerGEE scripts, you are
dependent upon specific commands to be provided with SynerGEE to perform specific tasks. If a command is
not available for the task you want to perform, then you simply cannot perform that task through a script.
Another advantage of writing Python scripts is you can use common programming concepts, including if, for,
and while statements, that are not available in SynerGEEs traditional scripting syntax.
Most script files, including Python scripts, are stored in your Scripts file directory. Recipe script files are stored
in your Macros file directory. You can change the location of either folder in the Preferences editor, as
described in Defining file paths on page 167. For example, you can store script files on a network folder so
they can be used by multiple SynerGEE users.
Scripts can be used any time a specific set of customized commands is needed, especially if they are used
frequently. In addition, you can use scripts to automate the process of importing data, such as from a
MiddleLink data source. For example, you could write a recipe script to import MiddleLink model data, and
then create a command line file to automatically launch SynerGEE and the MiddleLink recipe, perhaps on a
nightly basis. This functionality can help you fully automate a regular GIS-to-SynerGEE data conversion
process to ensure that your models always stay current.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with scripts in SynerGEE.
User Guide
700
Scripts
RECIPE SCRIPTS
A recipe script consists of a sequence of commands stored in a recipe text file. Each line is a separate
command that is performed according to its sequence in the file. Like many other script types in SynerGEE,
you can write recipe scripts directly in the text file or from SynerGEE using the Script editor. Recipes can be
run from the MACROS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, or they can be configured to run automatically after
certain SynerGEE events, such as loading a model or changing the analysis year.
Recipe scripts can be written in two different formats. The original format, referred to in this User Guide as
numerical recipes, used a command numbering sequence based on the MiddleLink format. Recipes that
are written in the numerical format are still supported by SynerGEE, but in general new commands are no
longer being created for this syntax. The newer recipe format is referred to as text-based recipes, where
recipes commands are called using simple text codes. For example, to create a DSA, you would use the
command DSA.Create, and to run a fault location analysis, you would use the command FaultLoc.Run.
Other than the differences in how the recipes are called, the results are the same for both text-based and
number-based scripts. The schemas for both numerical recipes and text-based recipes are available from the
Support tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, and are described in much greater detail in the appendices to this
User Guide.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Recipe syntax
In numerical recipes, all recipe command lines begin with the command number, such as 3100. The
remaining arguments in a command must follow the syntax designated for that command. Any text in a recipe
file that does not follow proper recipe syntax is ignored and no warning is given. Therefore, if your recipe
does not behave as expected, carefully verify that there are no mistakes in the file. For example, if you forget
the comma after the recipe command itself, and the command uses additional parameters, SynerGEE will
ignore the line.
User Guide
Scripts
701
Text-based recipes follow a similar convention, but use text-based commands instead of numerical
commands. For example, to run a load flow analysis in a numerical recipe, you would use the following
command:
3200, Load flow, 1
In numerical recipes, 3200 is the command to run an analysis. The first parameter specifies what analysis to
run, and the second parameter specifies whether to generate the load-flow report (0 = no, 1 = yes). To
perform the same task in text-based recipes, you would use the following command:
LoadFlow.Run, 1
The LoadFlow.Run command specifically runs a load-flow analysis, and the one and only parameter specifies
whether to generate the load-flow report (0 = no, 1 = yes).
This customized recipe applies section coloring as specified to a model. When this recipe file is run, it will do
the following:
1
The 3100 command will place the title My Map Colors in the map legend.
3100, My Map Colors
The 3102 command will apply yellow to all sections with underground conductors. Underground is
added to the map legend.
3102, Underground, Yellow, Under
The 3103 will apply blue to all sections with the 336 ACSR conductor. 336 ACSR is added to the
map legend.
3103, 336 ACSR, Blue, 336 ACSR
The 3104 command will apply red to all sections that have a total connected between 50 and 150.
Target kVA is added to the map legend.
3104, Target kVA, Red, ConnKva, 50, 150
The first line is a comment, designated by the apostrophe ( ' ) that precedes the line. You can add an
apostrophe to any line in the script to comment out that line. For example, if you added an apostrophe before
the 3013 command, that command would not be applied when you run the script. Remove the apostrophe to
re-activate the line.
Take note of the following:
User Guide
702
Scripts
Recipe commands are performed in the order in which they appear in the script. Therefore, it is
possible for one command to override another.
You can use recipes to read from and write to data sources, via DSAs. However:
If an Access database is currently open in Access, a recipe may not be able to transact
with it.
The map-related recipe commands allow you to perform custom map coloring. When one of these
commands is executed, SynerGEE automatically changes the Color by option in your map settings
to Recipe. After the recipe run, you can switch Color by options, and later return to your custom
recipe coloring at any time. However, the colors will be the same as they were following the recipe
run, regardless of what transpired in the interim. For example, if you ran a results-based map
coloring recipe, and a subsequent analysis run changed those results, your colors will not update
until you run the recipe again.
Detailed information of all available recipes and their commands is provided in Numerical Recipe
Commands on page 855 and Text-Based Recipe Commands on page 907. You can also view the recipe
script schema directly in SynerGEE, as described in Viewing a Script Schema on page 733. The
subsections below provide additional guidelines that you will need to keep in mind as you write and edit
recipe scripts.
User Guide
Scripts
703
If more than one engine is available, select one from the list and then follow the prompts.
or
If the feature lock is enabled, then select the data source from page four of the wizard. Click Next to
continue.
On page 6 of the wizard, select the target data source for the model. Click Next to continue.
On page 7 of the wizard, select the zone from the database to process. Click Next to continue.
On the last page of the wizard, select a model build script. Click Finish.
In the Model Forge group, click the text label Forge and then select Schema.
User Guide
704
Scripts
source into the current model. FDR_102, for example, is used to import minimum and maximum source
impedance values for the feeders in the model.
'
'
'
'
**
** Setup queries to be used for data loading
**
** ModelForge.DefineSQL, Query Name, SQL
**
** Specify locations for utility data for Model Forge to attach
** ModelForge.DataMartDSA, Data Mart Name, DSA Name
**
User Guide
Scripts
705
' **
ModelForge.DataMartQuery, 1, Settings Database, FDR_102, GetFeederZ
ModelForge.DataMartQuery, 1, Settings Database, STN_102, GetSubTranZ
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
Database,
Database,
Database,
Database,
Database,
Database,
Database,
REG_105,
REG_106,
REG_107,
REG_108,
REG_109,
REG_110,
REG_111,
GetRegSet1
GetRegSet2
GetRegSet3
GetRegSet4
GetRegSet5
GetRegSet6
GetRegSet7
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
ModelForge.DataMartQuery,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
Database,
Database,
Database,
Database,
Database,
TRN_106,
TRN_107,
TRN_108,
TRN_109,
TRN_110,
GetLTCSet1
GetLTCSet2
GetLTCSet3
GetLTCSet4
GetLTCSet5
ModelForge.Option, 0, GenerateReport
PYTHON SCRIPTS
Python is a free, open-source programming language that is known for its readable and intuitive
programming code. Python support was added to SynerGEE Electric with the 5.0 release, to provide an
alternative to the more traditional script types in SynerGEE, like recipes and Model Forge scripts. The
software required to edit and run Python scripts is installed on your PC as a part of the SynerGEE installation.
Python scripts provide a number of advantages over traditional SynerGEE scripts, including the following:
Access to the Solver library. Python scripts written for use with SynerGEE provide you with full
access to the Solver object model library. This provides you with the ability to perform far more tasks
than you could ever do with the traditional SynerGEE recipe scripts, from editing data to
performing analyses to controlling the SynerGEE map display.
Process automation. Python scripts can be written to perform any number of very specific tasks,
including the tasks you might perform yourself on a day-to-day basis. For example, you may need to
open SynerGEE, open a SynerGEE model, import data from an external data source, perform one
or more analyses using the new data, and then export results or perform other related tasks. You
can write a Python script to perform all of these tasks, and run that script even when SynerGEE is
not open. In addition, the script can be associated with a Windows scheduled task, so that it will run
automatically and repeatedly, without any user intervention at all. This type of full SynerGEE
automation is simply not possible with traditional SynerGEE scripts.
User Guide
706
Scripts
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Take note that you can use the Paths tab in the Preferences editor to change the location of the Scripts
folder. For more information on customizing file paths, see Defining file paths on page 167.
In the Python group, click the text label Edit and then select New.
In the New Script dialog box, type the name of the new script file that you want to create and then
click OK.
In the Python group, click the text label Edit and then select Set Python Editor.
User Guide
Scripts
707
3
In the Python Editor Path dialog box, click the Browse button and then navigate to the application
that you want to use to edit Python scripts. The path for the current Python editor will be listed by
default.
The default paths for PythonWin editor and the Python IDLE editor that is also installed with
SynerGEE are as follows:
PythonWin: C:\Python33\Lib\site-packages\pythonwin\pythonwin.exe
Click OK.
In the Python group, under Script, select the name of the Python script that you want to edit.
Click Edit.
Take note that you can use the Paths tab in the Preferences editor to change the location of the Scripts
folder. For more information on customizing file paths, see Defining file paths on page 167.
User Guide
708
Scripts
# Import the module which creates the Solver
from win32com.client import Dispatch
# Import the module for COM exception handling
import pythoncom
Note that when configured in this manner, the variable s is used to represent the Solver, and all Solver
commands in your Python script will begin with s. For example, the command to clear the current
SynerGEE model from memory is:
s.Model().Clear()
Likewise, the command to count the number of sections in the currently loaded model and assign that value
to a variable named numSections is:
numSections = s.Model().Sections().Count()
Both of these code examples are taken from the Python script examples provided in Python scripts
examples on page 710.
In the Python group, under Script, select the name of the Python script that you want to copy.
In the Python group, click the text label Edit and then select Copy. A duplicate copy of the script file
will be created, following the file copy-and-paste conventions on your operating system. The new
User Guide
Scripts
709
copy of the Python script will now be selected as the active script in the MACROS tab of the
SynerGEE ribbon bar.
In the Python group, under Script, select the name of the Python script that you want to edit.
In the Python group, click the text label Edit and then select Rename.
In the Rename Script dialog box, type the new name of the script file and then click OK.
In the Python group, under Script, select the name of the Python script that you want to delete.
In the Python group, click the text label Edit and then select Delete.
In the Python group, under Script, select the name of the Python script that you want to run.
Click Run.
Open the script you want to run in the Python IDLE application.
From the Python IDLE main menu, select Run > Run Module.
User Guide
710
Scripts
Create and initialize the Solver. These initial steps are required for any Python script that is written
for use with SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
Load feeders from a specified DSA. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
model that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Model).
Read several SynerGEE values and print them to the Python IDLE console window, including the
number of meters, feeders, and loads.
Delete the Solver instance. This step is required for any Python script that is written for use with
SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
User Guide
Scripts
711
# Create new model
s.Model().Clear()
s.Model().Connect()
# Load feeders
# Replace username in the file path below with your Windows user name.
m = s.Settings().DataSources().Add("Access Database (Sample Model)",
SELib.SECDSProvider.seDSPAccessPersonal, SELib.SECDSContents.seDSCModel,
"C:\\Users\\username\\Documents\\Stoner Software\\SynerGEE Electric\\Sample
Data\\SampleModel.mdb","", "", "")
s.Model().LoadFromDataSource(m)
s.Model().Connect()
print('Welcome to the Sample Model!')
print('Total Meter Count is', s.Model().Meters().Count())
print('Total Feeder Count is', s.Model().Feeders().Count())
print('Total Dist Loads is', s.Model().Loads().Count())
# Delete the Solver
del s
Figure 14-1 shows the result of the Reporting Model Data script.
Create and initialize the Solver. These initial steps are required for any Python script that is written
for use with SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
Load feeders from a specified DSA. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
model that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Model).
Load a specified equipment warehouse. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
warehouse that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Warehouse).
User Guide
712
Scripts
5
Load a specified protection database. In this example, the script will load the protection database
that is provided with SynerGEE, named SynProtectionDb.mdb.
Delete the Solver instance. This step is required for any Python script that is written for use with
SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
User Guide
Scripts
713
1
Create and initialize the Solver. These initial steps are required for any Python script that is written
for use with SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
Load feeders from a specified DSA. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
model that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Model).
Load a specified equipment warehouse. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
warehouse that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Warehouse).
Delete the Solver instance. This step is required for any Python script that is written for use with
SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
User Guide
714
Scripts
print('Fault Analysis Complete.')
# Delete the Solver
del s
Create and initialize the Solver. These initial steps are required for any Python script that is written
for use with SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
Load feeders from a specified DSA. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
model that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Model).
Load a specified equipment warehouse. In this example, the script will use the DSA for the sample
warehouse that is provided with SynerGEE, Access Database (Sample Warehouse).
Search the model for any sections where the phase conductor is set to "336 ACSR" and, if found,
set the neutral conductor on those sections to "2/0 CU". Likewise, if the neutral conductor is set to
Concentric, the neutral conductor will be reset to Same as phase.
Delete the Solver instance. This step is required for any Python script that is written for use with
SynerGEE. See Writing a Python script on page 707 for more information.
User Guide
Scripts
715
"C:\\Users\\username\\Documents\\Stoner Software\\SynerGEE Electric\\Sample
Data\\SampleModel.mdb","", "", "")
s.Model().LoadFromDataSource(m)
s.Model().Connect()
# Load equipment
# Replace username in the file path below with your Windows user name.
w = s.Settings().DataSources().Add("Access Database (Sample Warehouse)",
SELib.SECDSProvider.seDSPAccessPersonal, SELib.SECDSContents.seDSCEquipment,
"C:\\Users\\username\\Documents\\Stoner Software\\SynerGEE Electric\\Sample
Data\\SampleEquipment.mdb","", "", "")
s.Warehouse().LoadFromDataSource(w)
numSections = s.Model().Sections().Count()
i = 0
while i < numSections:
if "336 ACSR" in
s.Model().Sections().Item(i).sPhaseConductor(SELib.SEPhase.seA):
s.Model().Sections().Item(i).sNeutralConductor = "2/0 CU"
elif "Concentric" in s.Model().Sections().Item(i).sNeutralConductor:
s.Model().Sections().Item(i).sNeutralConductor =
s.Model().Sections().Item(i).sPhaseConductor(SELib.SEPhase.seA)
i += 1
# Delete the Solver
del s
STARTUP SCRIPTS
A startup script is run automatically when you start SynerGEE. The startup script can be in the SynerGEE
recipe format or in the Python script format. You select which script format is run from the MACROS tab of
the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
By changing this option, you will also change the script type is used with SynerGEEs case models.
See Cases on page 91 for more information.
User Guide
716
Scripts
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
Select Use Python for Startup Script and Case Files to run a Python script whenever you start
SynerGEE.
or
Clear the check box to run a recipe script when you start SynerGEE.
User Guide
Scripts
717
2
On the first page of the Startup Script wizard, select whether you want to create a new startup script
or select an existing script to run at startup.
-
Create New Startup Script. If you choose to create a new startup script, type the name of
the script that you are creating and then click Next. Continue with step 3 of this procedure.
Run Existing Script At Startup. If you choose to select an existing script to run at startup,
use the options list to select the name of the existing script you want to run at startup and
then click Next. Proceed to step 7 of this procedure.
On the second page of the wizard, select the model and the warehouse that you want to open on
startup. Click the Browse button to locate the file names if they are not present in the options list.
Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select an existing display style that will be applied to the map view
after the model is opened, and then click Next.
On the next page of the wizard, click Yes or No to select whether you want to load the Protection
Library at startup, and then click Next.
Select the Load-Flow or Fault check boxes if you want to run the load-flow and fault
applications on startup.
Select the Growth Option check box if you want to configure growth settings. Select the
growth option type that you want to apply on startup, and set values for any additional
options if required.
Click Next.
7
The final page of the wizard displays the new startup script, based on either the options or you
selected in the Startup Script Wizard or the existing script that you selected to use as the startup
script. Review the script and, if required, type any edits or additions to the script directly in the script
window.
Click Finish to close the Startup Script Wizard and save the changes as the new startup script.
In the Tools group, click the text label Startup Script and then select Startup On This Model.
User Guide
718
Scripts
User Guide
Scripts
719
As an example, the following command converts all 100 A Fuse classic fuses to newer Kearney models:
4020, 1, 100 A Fuse, Kearney, T, 100, 14.4
For more information and detailed descriptions of these records, see Model Cleanup Commands on
page 1117.
User Guide
720
Scripts
When run, this record searches the model for any newer fuse that has a Manufacturer specified as 100 A
Fuse. If found, model cleanup supplements the remaining information. For more information on the
parameters of this record and others, see Model Cleanup Commands on page 1117.
Keep in mind that the model data import and the model cleanup run are completely separate processes. The
4024 - 4026 cleanup records are designed specifically for a MiddleLink 3.4 imported model, but you would
run each as a separate, independent process.
AUTOMATION SCRIPTS
Automation scripts can be used to complete actions in SynerGEE, one after another, by running tasks without
actual hands-on in SynerGEE. This script is much more detailed for executing specific actions such as a left
click, select a ribbon bar option, and wait. This means that the script can be customized to execute almost
any action, like running an entire wizard and then selecting new map settings. It can be done in any order.
The automation script is different from the format of other SynerGEE scripts in that the automation script is
not numeric. All automation scripts are based on text commands only.
MESSAGING SCRIPTS
Messaging scripts are used to connect to a PI Historian database through a PI OleDb driver configured on
the current machine. Once connected to the database, SynerGEE retrieves values for the tags specified in
the script. The values are then associated with parameters for various facilities within the SynerGEE model.
The Messaging script can also be configured to have SynerGEE write calculated values into the historian.
This results in tags with calculated values or virtual SCADA points.
User Guide
Scripts
721
Messaging scripts are also used with real-time data stored in a DBMS to update values for meter kW and
kvar, feeder voltage, and substation voltage. This real time data functions much in the same way as the PI
Historian system and pulls its records from the same type of data hub.
For more information, see PI Messaging script on page 125 and DBMS Real-Time Data on page 127.
In this example, record 12002 defines the script as a cable study script. Record 12005 sets the dimensions
and depth of the overall bank, and record 12006 defines parameters for the earth.
After the initial duct bank definition, the remaining lines should define the duct configuration and the circuits
within. You can use records such as 12010 and 12020 to create ducts and circuits, and then use other
records to add more data for the calculations, such as cable size, insulation, and jacket parameters. The
following is an example of some lines from sample cable study script:
' Define two ducts, named "11" and "12"
12010, 11, 0.500, 0.500, 3.0, 0.25, 6.0
12010, 12, 0.500, 1.125, 3.0, 0.25, 6.0
' Define two circuits, for the previously created ducts
12020, 3115-A1, 3115, A, 11, 0.0, 0.0
12020, 3115-B1, 3115, B, 12, 0.0, 0.0
User Guide
722
Scripts
' Add some additional information about the cables used for the circuits
12021, *, 2.8264E-8, 4.03E-3, 1.0, 0.8
12022, *, 750.0, 0.998, 90.0
In this example, note the use of apostrophes to add comments. Also, in the last two lines, note the use of
asterisks (*) to apply the parameters to all cables used in the study script.
Naturally, SynerGEE must create the banks first, and then the circuits within. However, your study script does
not necessarily need to be in this order. SynerGEE will automatically order the records by number when it
runs the script. You may, though, find it easier to organize your written scripts in the same order that
SynerGEE will process them.
The full schema for cable study script commands can be viewed from within SynerGEE. Refer to Viewing a
Script Schema on page 733 for more information.
WRITING SCRIPTS
SynerGEE provides a number of ways to create and edit script files. Refer to the topics listed below for more
information.
User Guide
In the selected tab, locate the group for the script type that you want to create.
-
Scripts
723
-
To create any other script type, use the Other Scripts group. Next to Type, select the type
of script that you want to create, such as Report Script or Study.
In the appropriate group, click the text label Edit and then select New.
In the New Script editor, type the name of the new script that you want to create, and then click OK.
Use the Script editor to edit the script that you created. For more information, see Opening a script
file for editing on page 723.
Copying a script
Perform the following procedure to create a duplicate copy of an existing SynerGEE script.
In the selected tab, locate the group for the script type that you want to copy.
-
To copy any other script type, use the Other Scripts group. Next to Type, select the type
of script that you want to copy, such as Report Script or Study.
Use the list of script names to select the name of the script that you want to edit.
Click the text label Edit and then select Copy. A duplicate copy of the script, with - Copy added to
the end, is created and selected in the list of script names.
Rename the script if desired, according to the directions in Renaming a script on page 724.
Use the Script editor to edit the script that you created. For more information, see Opening a script
file for editing on page 723.
In the selected tab, locate the group for the script type that you want to edit.
User Guide
724
Scripts
-
To edit any other script type, use the Other Scripts group. Next to Type, select the type of
script that you want to edit, such as Report Script or Study.
Use the list of script names to select the name of the script that you want to edit.
Click the Edit button to edit the script using SynerGEEs Script editor. For more information, see
Using the Script Editor on page 725.
or
Click the text label Edit and then select Notepad to edit the script using the Notepad editor.
Renaming a script
Perform the following procedure to rename a script from the SynerGEE ribbon bar. Since scripts are saved as
text files on your PC, you can also rename script files manually using standard Windows controls. By default,
most script files are saved in your Scripts file directory, while most recipe scripts are saved in your Macros file
directory. For information on locating or editing either of these file locations, see Defining file paths on
page 167.
TO RENAME A SCRIPT
1
In the selected tab, locate the group for the script type that you want to rename.
-
To rename any other script type, use the Other Scripts group. Next to Type, select the
type of script that you want to rename, such as Report Script or Study.
Use the list of script names to select the name of the script that you want to rename.
In the Rename Script editor, type the new name for the existing script, and then click OK.
Deleting a script
Perform the following procedure to delete a SynerGEE script. Since scripts are saved as text files on your
PC, you can also delete script files manually using standard Windows controls. By default, most script files
are saved in your Scripts file directory, while most recipe scripts are saved in your Macros file directory. For
information on locating or editing either of these file locations, see Defining file paths on page 167.
User Guide
Scripts
725
In the selected tab, locate the group for the script type that you want to delete.
-
To delete any other script type, use the Other Scripts group. Next to Type, select the type
of script that you want to delete, such as Report Script or Study.
Use the list of script names to select the name of the script that you want to delete.
User Guide
726
Scripts
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Script editor:
a
From the CONTROLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click New. A blank script is created in the
Script editor window.
It is a good idea to save your new script even before you start editing it. From the CONTROLS tab in
the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click Save. Use the Script File to Save editor to select the file name, file
extension, and folder location for the new script file.
When saving a script file, take note of the following:
In the Script File to Save dialog box, be sure to select the proper script file type in the
bottom of the dialog box, next to Save as type. This will apply the proper file extension to
the file that is saved by SynerGEE. The file extension is used by SynerGEE to properly
recognize the script type later when you want to run it and further edit it.
Also, be sure to save the script file in the proper folder location. The default folder that
appears when you save a script for the first time is your Scripts file directory, as specified in
Defining file paths on page 167. This is the default location for many script types, but
recipe scripts must be saved in your Macros file directory. If you are creating a recipe
script, you must manually navigate to the Macros folder.
Refer to Editing a script using the Script editor on page 727 for information on adding and editing
script commands.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Script editor:
a
From the CONTROLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click Open.
In the Script File to Open editor, locate the folder and file name for the script file that you want to
open and then click Open. When opening a script file, take note of the following:
User Guide
Scripts
727
In the Script File to Open dialog box, be sure to select the proper script file type in the
lower-right corner of the dialog box, across from File name. This will allow the Script File
to Open editor to properly recognize script files for the script type that you want to open.
Also, be sure that you navigate to the proper folder location. The default folder that appears
when you open a script is your Scripts file directory, as specified in Defining file paths on
page 167. This is the default location for many script types, but recipe scripts are typically
saved in your Macros file directory. If you are open a recipe script, you must manually
navigate to the Macros folder.
Refer to Editing a script using the Script editor on page 727 for information on adding and editing
script commands.
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Script editor:
a
From the CONTROLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click Open.
In the Script File to Open editor, locate the folder and file name for the script file that you want to
open and then click Open. When opening a script file, take note of the following:
In the Script File to Open dialog box, be sure to select the proper script file type in the
bottom of the dialog box, across from File name. This will allow the Script File to Open
editor to properly recognize script files for the script type that you want to open.
Also, be sure that you navigate to the proper folder location. The default folder that appears
when you open a script is your Scripts file directory, as specified in Defining file paths on
page 167. This is the default location for many script types, but recipe scripts are typically
saved in your Macros file directory. If you are open a recipe script, you must manually
navigate to the Macros folder.
From the CONTROLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, select Open in Notepad.
The specified script is now opened in the Notepad window. Be aware that once it is opened in
Notepad, the script will be closed in the Script editor. (A blank script will be created in its place.) This
will help ensure that you are not editing the same script twice in two different applications. If you
made changes to the script before selecting the Open in Notepad option, SynerGEE will
automatically save those changes to the script file before opening the script file in Notepad.
User Guide
728
Scripts
If you have not already done so, perform the following steps to open the Script editor:
a
If you have not already done so, follow the instructions in Creating a script using the Script editor
on page 726 or Opening a script from the Script editor on page 726 to create a new script file or
open a script file for editing, respectively.
Refer to the following table for typical actions that you will perform when editing a script.
To ...
Add a command to the
script
User Guide
Do This ...
a
Select an empty row in the script editing area. Or, if you want
to insert a new row into an existing script, select the row
immediately below where you want to add the new
command. (If youve selected an existing row that includes
data, SynerGEE will automatically add a new row above the
selected row when you insert a command, as described in
the next step.)
In the tree view on the left-side of the Script editor, locate the
command that you want to add to your script. Double-click
the command to add it to the script.
In the script editing area, select the new row and review the
column headings to determine what additional data you
need to enter. Detailed information on the script command
syntax is provided throughout this User Guide and are also
provided within SynerGEE by viewing the appropriate
Schema file (as described in Viewing a Script Schema on
page 733).
Select the line in the script immediately after where you want
to add the comment.
Scripts
729
To ...
Do This ...
Duplicate commands in
the script
Select or clear the check box associated with the row. If the
check box is cleared, the row will be disabled. (SynerGEE
will disable the row by commenting the line in the completed
script file.)
In the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click Save to save the script. If you try to close
the Script editor without saving your changes, SynerGEE will prompt you to save or discard your
changes, or return to the Script editor to continue working on the script.
User Guide
730
Scripts
In the Other Scripts group, next to Type, select the type of script that you want to work with in the
Script wizard.
Click Wizard. Use the options in the Script wizard to perform the following tasks:
To ...
Do This ...
In text box at the top of the Script wizard, type the name
of the script that you want to create.
Run a script
Click Run.
RUNNING SCRIPTS
SynerGEE provides a number of methods to run scripts. The most common method is to use the controls in
the MACROS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar. You can also run scripts while using the SynerGEE Script
wizard. Recipe scripts can even be configured to run automatically after certain SynerGEE events, such as
loading a model or changing the model year.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
Scripts
731
In the selected tab, locate the group for the script type that you want to run.
-
To run any other script type, use the Other Scripts group. Next to Type, select the type of
script that you want to run, such as Model Cleanup or Python.
Use the list of script names to select the name of the script that you want to run.
Click Run.
In the Other Scripts group, next to Type, select the type of script that you want to run.
Click Wizard.
In the list of scripts in the Script wizard, select the name of the script that you want to run.
Click Run.
User Guide
732
Scripts
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Preferences.
In the Preferences editor, select Triggers. The following table describes the different tasks that you
can perform.
To ...
Run a recipe after a specific
type of event
Do This ...
a
User Guide
Scripts
733
In the Tools group, click Schemas and then Scripts, and then select the specific script type that you
want to view. The selected schema appears in a new SynerGEE window.
Refer to the following sections for detailed information on several of the SynerGEE script schemas:
-
In the Model Forge group, click the text label Forge and then select Schema. Detailed information
on the Model Forge schema is provided in Model Forge Commands on page 947.
PROCESS DIAGRAMS
Process diagrams provide a GUI-based approach to creating SynerGEE scripts. Process diagrams are
created in a flow-charting environment where you can add and connect the individual steps in a process,
such as running an analysis or performing model maintenance tasks. Process diagrams are not associated
with any specific model, so they can be easily run at any time with any model in memory.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
734
Scripts
On the right side of the Process Diagram window, in the Groups area, perform the following tasks to
create, edit, and delete groups.
To ...
Create a new group
Rename a group
Delete a group
Type the name of the new group and then press Enter.
Type a new name for the group and then press Enter.
In the groups area, select the name of the group that you want to work with. Then, in the Diagrams
area, perform the following tasks to create, edit, and delete process diagrams.
To ...
Create a new process
diagram
User Guide
Do This ...
Do This ...
a
Scripts
735
To ...
Do This ...
Use the TOOLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar to add individual steps to your process diagram.
See Adding steps to a process diagram on page 735 for more information.
Use the commands on the bottom of the Process Diagram window to set up commands and
parameters for selected process steps. See Adding commands to a process step on page 736 for
more information.
Use the Properties editor to edit the appearance of selected process steps. See Editing the
appearance of a process diagram step on page 736 for more information.
In the Drawing group of the Tools tab, select the process step that you want to add to your diagram.
In the Process Diagram window, click in the location where you want to add the step.
Once placed, you will likely need to move the process step to align it with other steps. You will also
need to move the arrows in the process diagram to link steps together in the desired order. The
connecting arrows will be solid and bold when they are connected to a step; they will be dotted and
thin when they are not connected to a step.
User Guide
736
Scripts
In the Process Diagram window, select the process step that you want to edit.
In the bottom of the Process Diagram window, in the Command Groups area, select the different
command group names to see which commands are available for that step.
In the Commands area, double-click a command that you want to apply to the process step. The
command will be listed in the Script Commands area. Repeat this step to add additional commands
to the script, if desired.
Select each command in the Script Command area. If additional parameters are associated with the
script command, they will be listed in a grid in the lower-right area of the Process Diagram window.
Use the grid to set the appropriate value for each listed command parameter. Repeat this step to set
additional script command parameters, as applicable.
In the Process Diagram window, double-click on the process step that you want to edit.
User Guide
Symbol
Select a Fill color and Outline color for the process step.
Text Value
Type the text that you want to appear on the process step label.
Box
Select a Fill color and Outline color for the process step label.
Font
Select the Size and Color for the process step label.
Scripts
737
Select the color that you want to apply to the background of the Process Diagram window.
Running a process
Perform the following procedure to run the process that has been created by a process diagram.
TO RUN A PROCESS
1
User Guide
738
User Guide
Scripts
CHAPTER
15
Tools, Calculators,
and Worksheets
SynerGEE provides a variety of specialized tools for performing calculations, evaluating your model, and
conducting focused analyses. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
PUBLISHING EXPORT
The Publishing export provides a means of exporting your model image to a variety of vector image formats,
including the following:
AutoCAD DXF. DXF is a layered vector format developed by Autodesk, Inc. for use with its
AutoCAD drafting software. The DXF format is also supported for viewing by other applications,
including SynerGEE, due to its compatible design and flexibility. For more information on the DXF
format, visit www.autodesk.com.
SVG. The scalable vector graphics (SVG) format is XML-based image format, designed to be
portable across applications. Along with vector image components, it also supports internal scripting
for dynamic effects, such as the labels that automatically appear when you move the mouse over
items in a SynerGEE-generated SVG. The SVG format is maintained as a W3 Consortium
User Guide
740
Model Viewer. This output is a special database designed specifically for use with GL Noble
Dentons Model Viewer application. Model Viewer is an Internet Explorer-based viewing application
for models, intended to allow users to view the maps of models in customizable configurations. It
functions like a simplified version of the SynerGEE map, without the analytical capabilities of
SynerGEE. For more information, please contact GL Noble Denton.
KML. KML files can be imported and viewed in Google Earth. The KML file needs to contain section
IDs and the longitude and latitude coordinates, which the Publisher converts to a script. Google
Earth will read and import the script into its satellite mapping system.
In the Publish group, click the text label Publishing and then select Settings.
The options in the Publishing Options editor will change based on the type of file that you want to
export. Refer to the following table for specific information on setting up an export for each file type.
User Guide
741
Descriptions of each file type are provided in Publishing Export on page 739.
To Set Up ...
DXF
SVG
Model Viewer
Do This ...
a
Next to Path, type the full path and name of the file you want
to export, or click the Browse button and navigate to the
desired directory and file.
Next to Path, type the full path and name of the file you want
to export, or click the Browse button and navigate to the
desired directory and file.
Next to Path, type the full path and name of the file you want
to export, or click the Browse button and navigate to the
desired directory and file.
User Guide
742
To Set Up ...
KML
Do This ...
a
Next to Path, type the full path and name of the file you want
to export, or click the Browse button and navigate to the
desired directory and file.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
If you have not already done so, use the Publishing Options editor to configure options properly
configure the file you want to export. For more information, see Setting Publishing export options
on page 740.
When you use the Publishing wizard to export a map to the DXF format, SynerGEE automatically separates
your model into layers during the export. This layering scheme cannot be altered within SynerGEE.
Nodes
Vertices
Equipment
A separate layer is created for each of the following device types:
User Guide
Switches
Capacitors
Regulators
Fuses
Reclosers
Sectionalizers
Breakers
Motors
Generators
Transformers
743
Each device type gets its own layer, regardless of feeder. In other words, all switches from all feeders will go
on one layer, all regulators on another, and so on. Equipment layers are usually named with the DEV prefix,
followed by the equipment type. For example, the switch layer is named DEV_SWITCHES. Results, labels,
and conductors go on separate layers.
Sections
Sections are placed on different layers according to configuration type. During the export, SynerGEE
recognizes the following six configurations, and creates six layers per feeder for each, as applicable:
Configuration
Abbreviation
Three-phase overhead
O3
Two-phase overhead
O2
Single-phase overhead
O1
Three-phase underground
U3
Two-phase underground
U2
Single-phase underground
U1
Afterwards, these layers are named according to the following convention, using the feeder ID and the
abbreviation as a suffix:
FeederID_ConfigAbbreviation
For example, the following suffix is for overhead two-phase sections for a feeder with the ID Fairfield:
Fairfield_O2
Likewise, the following suffix is for underground single-phase sections for a feeder with the ID FDR_011:
FDR_011_U1
Because AutoCAD allows a maximum of 31 characters for a layer name, your feeder ID will be truncated at
28 characters if necessary, to leave room for the three-character suffix. If you have two feeders with identical
User Guide
744
Non-proprietary. The SVG standard is maintained by the W3 Consortium (www.w3.org) and has no
corporate copyright.
XML-based. Because it is an XML file, it is easily extensible by GL Noble Denton or the end user,
and can be modified or managed through automation technologies such as XSLT. Also, it can be
directly edited in any text editor.
Vector-based. Unlike raster image formats such as BMP, a vector file is normally much smaller in
size, yet the image itself is crisp in detail at any zoom level.
Scripting-enabled. The SVG format supports a certain level of scripting for dynamic effects. For
example, in a SynerGEE-generated SVG, you can hover the mouse over a device or section to see
the ID appear in the lower corner.
Perform the following steps to open the Power Tools Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Power Tools and then select Settings.
In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select the power tool application that you want to run.
If required, set additional options as described in the sections that are listed at the end of this topic.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
745
Perform the following steps to open the Power Tools Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Power Tools and then select Settings.
In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select Regulator Setting.
User Guide
746
Minimum Downstream Voltage. Specify the minimum downstream voltage that you want
the regulator to allow.
Use Customer Load Curves. Select this check box to have SynerGEE consider load
curves as assigned by customer zone. When this option is selected, the peak and
minimum load times are found and used in Regulator Setting analysis. For more
information on customer load curves, see Customer Load Curves/Time-of-Day Analysis
on page 808.
Minimum Load. If you do not select the Use Customer Load Curves check box, feeder
load can be used directly. In this case, specify a factor (such as 20%) that will be used to
multiply the loads to get minimum loading on the feeder.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
The R/X ratio is determined from a weighted average of downstream section impedances, as follows:
R / X =
I j , R j
I j , X j
j = Downstream
j = Downstream
Eq 151
The factor is weighted by the current flow through the downstream line. Long sections are going to be
weighted higher. Sections with a larger current flow are going to be weighted higher.
The R/X ratio is not listed in the report that is produced by the Regulator Setting analysis. However, the ratio
between the R setting and the X setting is the same as the R/X ratio.
The Regulator Setting power tool runs on the feeders in memory that are currently selected. For more
information on feeder selection, see Selecting Feeders on page 157.
Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to perform a Regulator Setting analysis,
as described in Setting up the Regulator Setting power tool on page 745.
User Guide
747
The voltage setting, R and X settings, and bandwidth are listed at the top of the report. The voltage setting is
a reflection of the user input. The bandwidth is always 2V. Keep in mind that the settings are always in volts
on a 120V base.
The next section of the report lists the results for the regulator and feeder under peak load conditions, as
follows.
The expected taps are given. Vrr is the voltage on the regulating relay within the regulators
controller.
Vrr =
Z RX
PT
CT
Eq 152
The voltage of the regulating relay is used to determine if a tap change is needed. If the voltage is
more than one-half the bandwidth away from the voltage setting, a tap change will occur. The
voltage is included on the reports so the effects of the R and X settings can be seen. For more
information on voltage regulators, see Regulators on page 383.
The minimum and maximum downstream volts are determined by looking at all line sections
downstream from the regulator. Sections fed by the regulator under study and a second regulator
are not considered.
The regulator output volts and amps are listed to help with the evaluation of first house settings and
tap limiter values.
The same results are then listed for minimum feeder loading.
User Guide
748
Example 2
In the previous example, the voltage setting was 120V. If the voltage setting were 122V, you would expect
that the tap positions under peak load would not change because the regulator needs to be at the same tap
to meet the minimum voltage constraint. The following is a report from another sample run, with the 122V
setting:
The R and X settings are different because the voltage setting is different. Notice that the peak load tap
settings are the same. The minimum and maximum downstream voltages at peak are also the same.
The minimum load values are very different. The regulator taps are higher and the downstream voltages are
higher with the 122V setting. Comparing the two examples, therefore, you might decide that the low regulator
voltage setting is better. As with this situation, multiple runs of the regulator settings tool may often be needed
to get a good picture of the possible settings.
User Guide
749
kV
kV
S Actual = k PQ S Nom + k I
S Nom + k Z
S Nom
kVNom
kVNom
S Nom = Nominal Voltage
Eq 153
k PQ + k I + k Z = 1
From this equation, you can see that as the feeder voltage drops:
The nominal part of the load modeled as constant PQ does not change. However, since the feeder
voltages are down, line current increases and losses increase somewhat. The net result is that
power into the feeder goes up or remains virtually the same.
The part of the load modeled as constant current goes down proportionally with the voltage. The
load current does not change. The result is that power into the feeder goes down.
The part of the load modeled as constant impedance drops and load current goes down. Power into
the feeder goes down significantly.
Therefore, you can see that a change in voltage has a significant impact on feeder loading. If you have a
feeder with loads modeled as constant power, you can try the following to demonstrate this:
1
The power into the feeder with the reduced voltage should have gone down (you may need to turn off or lock
regulators). Distribution systems with residential and commercial loading should have a demand reduction
with a drop in feeder voltage.
The I,Z,PQ Calculation power tool changes the load model on the feeder loads. Different values for the
percentage constant current, constant impedance, and constant power are used. All loads use the same load
model.
User Guide
750
The graph shows lines for four values of constant PQ. Curves for other PQ values can be found by
interpolating the graph. To use the graph, find the desired %kW / %V value on the Y axis. Move across
until a line is intersected. The line intersected represents the percent constant PQ value. Next, move down
from the intersection point to find the percent constant Z value.
For example, if the %kW / %V value is 1.1, you could use PQ = 0%, Z=15%, I=85%. Or, you could also
use PQ=20%, Z=30%, I=50%. Likewise, PQ=40%, Z=55%, I=5% also works. Smaller values of %PQ are
recommended.
Volts: 12.886 kV
kW: 5760 kW
Volts: 12.782 kV
kW: 5724 kW
If there are downstream voltage regulators, it is important to make the readings quickly after the LTC tap
change. The goal is to see the impact of the voltage change on loads, so the readings need to be made
before downstream voltage regulators can respond.
User Guide
751
5760 5724
100%
5760
= 0.625%
Eq 154
12886 12782
100%
12886
= 0.807%
Eq 155
%kW =
%V =
%kW
%V
0.625
= 0.77
0.807
Eq 156
User Guide
752
PQ = 40%
Z = 15%
Eq 157
PQ = 35%
Z = 8%
Eq 158
Set all load model I,Z,PQ values based on %PQ line and %Z axis value.
The I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool has provisions to ignore spot loads and to ignore customer class-based
I,Z,PQ values. If either of these selections is made, the load model I,Z,PQ values remain as they are set up in
User Guide
753
the spot load or customer class, and are not changed to the values used to generate the chart. Care should
be taken to not replace these load models if the Multiple Editor is used to globally change load model I,Z,PQ
values.
Perform the following steps to open the Power Tools Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Power Tools and then select Settings.
In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select I,Z,PQ Calibration.
Do Not Calibrate Spot Loads. Select this option to calibrate distributed loads only.
Ignore Customer Class I,Z,PQ. Select this option to disregard I,Z,PQ values assigned to
customer classes. For more information on I,Z,PQ and customer classes, see Load %I,
%Z, %PQ on page 496.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to perform an I,Z,PQ Calibration analysis,
as described in Setting up the I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool on page 753.
User Guide
754
The report shows two percentages for each capacitor. The first percentage, Flicker, represents the flicker at
the capacitor. The second percentage, Max Flicker, represents the maximum flicker on any section
throughout selected feeders. The calculation of flicker is a simple percentage based on before/after voltages,
as follows:
% Flicker =
VCapOff VCapOn
VCapOff
100
Eq 159
The analysis calculates the potential flicker for all capacitors in selected feeders. No distinction is made
between switched/fixed or currently on/off capacitors.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Perform the following steps to open the Power Tools Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Power Tools and then select Settings.
In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select Cap. Flicker Report.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
755
Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to generate a Capacitor Flicker Report, as
described in Setting up the Capacitor Flicker Report power tool on page 754.
The Ten-Year Growth Report power tool uses customer zone or section growth rates, as set up in the Growth
Options editor (as described in Enabling load growth rates on page 802).
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Perform the following steps to open the Power Tools Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Power Tools and then select Settings.
In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select Ten-year Growth Report.
User Guide
756
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to generate a Ten-Year Growth Report,
as described in Setting up the Ten-Year Growth Report power tool on page 755.
Removes all tie switches inserted by a previous run of this power tool. These switches are identified
by their TSIA_ prefixes.
Removes all established internal breaks. For more information on the purpose of internal breaks,
see Analysis considerations for loops and wandering laterals on page 256.
Inserts open tie switches to break all loops. Generally, the switches are placed wherever internal
breaks would normally be established, if you analyzed the model without tie switches.
The Insert Tie Switches power tool can be useful for preparing a looped model for non-loop-supporting
analyses. It is important to note, however, that its usefulness may decrease as looped configurations become
more complex. If you attempt to run the tool on a model with detailed, nested loops and/or densely meshed
configurations, the results may be unpredictable and perhaps undesirable. Always be sure to thoroughly test
the revised model before committing it as your production model.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
757
Perform the following steps to open the Power Tools Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Power Tools and then select Settings.
In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select Insert Tie Switches.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to perform an Insert Tie Switches
analysis, as described in Setting up the Insert Tie Switches power tool on page 756.
Node overlap report, showing nodes within five feet of each other
The following is a map image representing the area circled in the previous report:
User Guide
758
In this example, the nodes, which represent cable terminations, are probably correctly placed in the model,
and no connectivity corrections need to be made.
However, here is an example of an area exposed by the report that may represent a connectivity problem.
Two nodes are very close and an open switch is tied to one. Operating the switch has no effect. A single node
should probably replace the two nodes. This would connect the sections and allow proper modeling of the
switch.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
Perform the following steps to open the Power Tools Options editor:
a
In the Applications group, click the text label Power Tools and then select Settings.
In the Power Tools Options editor, under Tool, select Node Overlap Report.
759
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Make sure you have set up the Power Tool Options editor to generate a Node Overlap Report, as
described in Setting up the Ten-Year Growth Report power tool on page 755.
REGRESSION
Regression is a tool for making specific topological and analytical comparisons between two models. You can
compare any two models, and even use recipes to do it automatically.
To use regression, you must first create regression files from the active models that you wish to compare.
Then, the actual comparison is performed on the regression files, producing a report of key differences in
topology and analysis results.
Regression is useful for examining key differences between two different models, especially if a full data
comparison is not warranted. In particular, if you regularly update your models from a GIS or other data
source, regression can help pinpoint differences between updates, including analytical changes.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Load the first model for comparison, and run any applicable analyses necessary to populate results.
Tip:
Regression can compare load-flow, fault, and reliability results. A lack of results prior to
comparison will not prevent you from running regression, but you will not be able to
compare those specific items.
Create a regression file for the first model. For more information, see Creating a regression file on
page 760.
User Guide
760
Compare the two regression files. For more information, see Comparing two regression files on
page 760.
Because regression compares two files, and not data in memory, you can create the regression files at any
time, and likewise compare them at any time in the future. For example, you may want to create one or more
regression files and store them as a baseline representation of your model, to which you can repeatedly
compare newer or updated versions of the model.
In the Regression Create editor, type the name of the regression file that you want to create, and
enter an optional note, if desired.
Click Create to create the regression file and close the editor.
In the Regression Create editor, select the name of the regression file that you want to delete.
Click Delete.
User Guide
761
In the Regression Compare editor, press and hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and select the
names of the two regression files that you want to compare.
Click Compare.
POWERCALC
PowerCalc is a general-purpose engineering calculator built into SynerGEE that can perform a variety of
calculations geared toward electrical theory. In particular, PowerCalc provides the following features:
Basic conversion utilities such as rectangular to polar, and trigonometric functions such as sin and
cos
With its ability to load and save scripts, you may find PowerCalc to be a convenient means of conveying
mathematical information between peers or between your organization and GL Noble Denton.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Starting PowerCalc
Perform the following procedure to start the PowerCalc application.
TO START POWERCALC
1
Understanding PowerCalc
PowerCalc operates with a stack-based concept, where you specify a series of arguments that act
progressively on the active stack at their respective moments. After you specify arguments in the Entries area
of the PowerCalc window, you can move the insertion point up and down your list of arguments and watch the
stack change in the Stack area with each step. In this way, calculations are never a single, absolute action.
Rather, they are like a script that you can step into at any point to see the precise calculations at that moment.
As a simple example, consider the following calculation script, which you can enter in the Entries area of the
PowerCalc window:
User Guide
762
If you place the cursor on the second line in the Entries area (4), the stack would show the following:
3
That is, the first argument was processed, which specified simply to place 3 on the stack. When you place
the cursor on the third line in the Entries area (+), the stack would show the following:
3
4
If you place the cursor after the third line, the stack would show the following:
7
This is because the third argument, +, specifies that the previous two items on the stack should be added
and the result displayed in their place. In this way, you can see that the + argument operated on the stack,
and is not intrinsically related to the first two arguments, other than the fact that they provided numbers for the
stack on which + operated.
The PowerCalc script is color-coded and automatically formatted according to the data entered.
Keywords such as logarithms and exponents will appear in blue and in all caps.
To learn about PowerCalc, you may find it helpful to experiment with the sample calculation script, which is
named Sample power calculation.spc. You can find the sample PowerCalc script in your Calcs file directory.
See Loading and saving calculation scripts on page 763 for information on how to load this script. For
User Guide
763
information on viewing or editing the location of the Calcs file directory, see Defining file paths on page 167.
TOOLBOX
The toolbox provides a group of tools that allow you to focus on specific aspects of your model and their
effect on the model as a whole. For example, one particular tool, the Capacitor manager, provides an overall
view of your capacitors and general model parameters. With this tool, you can make quick changes to the
capacitors and run a load-flow analysis to watch the general effect on the model. Another tool, the Switch
manager, performs a similar function with switches. You can find the toolbox tools in the Toolbox tab of the
model explorer.
The toolbox is designed to allow quick, focused changes to your model with a clear view of the general effect.
It is not designed for detailed studies or complex data edits.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Switch Manager
The Switch Manager allows you to see certain switch pairs in the selected feeders as well as general
information about the feeders, such as connected kVA, power factor, and low volts. Using the Switch
Manager, you can toggle the status of any switch pair and run a quick load-flow analysis to see the results.
Only switches that can transfer load from one selected feeder to another are listed. Therefore, you must have
more than one feeder selected for the tool to have value.
User Guide
764
Switch Pairs. The Switch Pairs table displays a list of all switch pairs in the selected feeders.
The following options are associated with the Switch Pairs table in the Switch Manager. Note that you can
use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple switch pairs, if desired.
Only Show Transfer Switches. Select this check box to only show transfer switches in the Switch
Pairs table.
Load-Flow. Click this button to run a load-flow analysis. No report is generated. However, results
can be seen in the Feeders list or through map annotations.
Toggle. Click this button to toggle the open/closed status of the switch pair that is selected in the
Switch Pair list.
Highlight. Click this button to add the sections between the selected switches to the query set, and
also highlight those sections in the SynerGEE map display.
Clear Highlight. Click this button to clear the query set. You must clear one highlight before you can
enable another.
Zoom. Click this button to zoom the map display to the section that contains the first switch in the
selected switch pair.
You can also double-click any feeder in the Feeders list to produce the Feeder editor.
Feeder Overview
The Feeder Overview provides a tree list that gives general, balanced information about selected feeders,
including minimum and maximum voltages, maximum loading, and some basic equipment information. The
Feeder Overview is designed to give you an overall view of your feeders and provide quick access to some
basic editing functions.
To access the Feeder Overview, select the Toolbox tab on the model explorer and then select Feeder
Overview from the Tool options menu. The following options are available in the Feeder Overview:
Load-Flow. Click this button to run a load-flow analysis. No report is generated. However, results
can be seen in the Feeder Diagnostics list or through map annotations.
Edit. Click this button to open the editor for the item selected in the Feeder Diagnostics list. If the
item selected is a parameter, such as Min. Volts, SynerGEE opens the editor for the section or
device that is producing that parameter. You can also double-click a feeder to open the Feeder
editor.
Zoom. Click this button to zoom the map display to the selected item. If the item selected is a
parameter, such as Min. Volts, SynerGEE zooms to the section or device that is producing that
parameter.
User Guide
765
Capacitor Manager
The Capacitor Manager displays all capacitors in the selected feeders as well as general information about
the feeders, such as connected kVA, power factor, and low volts. Using the Capacitor Manager, you can
toggle the on/off status of any capacitor and run a quick load-flow analysis to see the results.
To access the Capacitor Manager, select the Toolbox tab on the model explorer and then select Capacitor
Manager from the Tool options menu. Two tables will display in the Toolbox tab:
Capacitors. The Capacitors list displays a list of all capacitors in the selected feeders.
Load-Flow. Click this button to run a load-flow analysis. No report is generated. However, results
can be seen in the Feeders list or through map annotations.
Toggle. Click this button to toggle the on/off status of the capacitor that is selected in the Capacitors
list.
Edit. Click this button to open the editor for the selected capacitor. You can also double-click a
capacitor to open the editor, or double-click a feeder in the Feeders list to open the Feeder editor.
Zoom. Click this button to zoom the map display to the section that contains the capacitor.
Feeders. The Feeders table includes all feeder(s) that are featured on the map. If a feeder is
affected by a load center, then the kW, customer, and miles values will change both in the Feeder
window and the Load Center window. Feeder values decrease when sections from that feeder are
included in a load center. If a load center is moved or decreased in radius, then the Feeder window
will reflect these changes, most likely by increasing, according to the action.
Load Centers. The Load Center table displays the name of the load center(s) you created as well
as the kW, customer, and mile values. These values increase or decrease depending on the location
and radius of your load center. This window also contains all of the commands you need to create
and manipulate your load centers.
Substations. The Substations table operates much in the same way as the Feeders table. In this
table, substation values are affected by the placement and size of a load center.
Include these load types. Select the appropriate check boxes to include Spot, Distributed, Large
Customer, and Project loads in the load center. The load types that you include or exclude will affect
the kW and customer values in the Feeder, Load Center, and Substation tables. Note that you may
need to resize the model explorer area to see all of the load type check boxes.
User Guide
766
Save. Click this button to save the details of the load center(s) you have created, including the
name, radius, and shape, as a SynLC file. The Save command will not save the entire scenario with
the feeders and substations that are managed by the load center at the time of the save. These
must be loaded separately.
Load. Click this button to load a saved load center into your model. The name, radius, and shape
will appear as the same size, and in the same location, as they were at the time of the save.
Name. Use the Name text box to specify the name of a load center. More than one load center may
be managed at a time.
Radius. Use the Radius text box to configure the size of a load center, measured in feet.
Add Circle. Click this button to add a new load center to the Load Center table and to the
SynerGEE map display. The load center will be represented by a circle in the map display.
Add square. Click this button to add a new load center to the Load Center table and to the
SynerGEE map display. The load center will be represented by a square in the map display.
Update. Click this button to apply changes that were made to the Name and Radius of an existing
load center.
Re-Center. Use the Re-Center button to change the location of a load center in the SynerGEE map
display. First, select a load center in the Load Center table. Then, click the spot on the map where
you want to relocate the load center, and then click the Re-Center button. The load center will
reposition itself, centered on the location where you clicked the mouse in the map display.
Delete. Click this button to delete a selected load center from the Load Center table and also the
SynerGEE map display.
Clear All. Click this button to delete all load centers from your model.
Re-calculate values. Click this button to reconfigure kW, customers, and miles after changes are
made to a load center. For example, after changing the radius for a load center, click the Update
button and then the Recalculate values button to add or subtract the appropriate amounts from the
kW, customer and miles fields.
If you create more than one load center at a time, they will be shown on the map together. The active load
center (that is, the load center that is selected in the Load Centers list) is always shown in red, and any
inactive (that is, currently unselected) load centers are shown in blue.
It is recommended that you set your monitor to a higher resolution when using this feature. The results will be
more accurate.
From the Tool options menu, select Load Center Manager. The load center tools will appear. If
necessary, adjust the size of the model explorer panel so that you can see all of the tools.
User Guide
767
Next to Name, type the name of the load center you want to create.
Next to Radius, type the radius (in feet) of the load center you want to create.
Click a spot in the map display where you want the load center to be centered.
Click Add Square or Add Circle, as desired. The selected shape will appear at the spot you clicked
in the map display, indicating the location of the new load center. The new load center will also
appear in the Load Centers table in the Toolbox tab.
Click Re-calculate values. Values for kW, customer and miles will be added to the load center in
the Load Centers table.
Now that you have created a load center, there are several ways you can edit it. Some of the typical
actions are as follows:
-
Select a load center from the Load Centers table, and then click a new spot on the map
and click Re-center. The circle or square will relocate to the new point.
Select a load center from the Load Centers table, and then use the Radius text box to
change the radius of the selected load center. Click Update to apply the change to the map
display, and then click Re-calculate values to update the load center data.
Click Save to save any changes you have made to the load center.
Select or clear the Spot, Distributed, Large Customer, or Project check boxes to enable
or disable different load types. Then, click the Re-calculate values button to see the
changes in the feeders.
DATA HAMMER
Data Hammer is a tool that can help you overcome low-level data problems, such as missing warehouse
equipment types. This will allow you to get your model in working order so that you can troubleshoot bigger
problems using other SynerGEE tools. You may want to save the model to a temporary location after running
the Data Hammer.
The Data Hammer can perform the following actions:
Apply descriptions to relays (all relays in model that do not already have a Description will have their
Descriptions named after their Section IDs plus an incremental counter suffix to ensure
uniqueness).
If any conductor types or switch types are created by using the first two options listed above, the description
for the newly created types will include Created by Data Hammer, thus making them easy to identify. For all
other settings, default values will be used when creating new equipment types.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
User Guide
768
In the Data Hammer editor, select the check box for each action that you want to perform. Available
choices are as follows:
-
Click Finish.
A message box will appear, showing you the results of the Data Hammer actions. When you are
finished reviewing the results, click OK to close the message box.
STATE MASTER
The State Master will appear during some SynerGEE analyses, such as the throw-over analysis, allowing you
to temporarily view the results of different model states created by the analysis. You view a state by selecting
it from the list of options in the State Master window. The map display will update to reflect the current state,
and it will update again each time you select a state from the list.
You must restore the model to its original condition before you can close the State Master window. However,
restoring the model in this case will only remove the state that you selected in the State Master. If you made
an edit to the model while an analysis state was being viewed, those edits will remain even after you restore
the model through the State Master.
Perform an analysis that will create the State Master window, such as the throw-over analysis
described in Throw-Over Analysis on page 533. Note that even though you can open the State
Master from the Tools tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, the State Master can only be used after
performing an applicable analysis.
In the State Master window, select from the available states to view that state as applied in the
SynerGEE model, including the SynerGEE map display. Select other states to apply those states to
the model. The following list describes additional tasks that you can perform.
User Guide
Clear. Click the Clear button to clear all states from the State Master. Note that clearing the
State Master will also restore the model to its original state, and that you must repeat the
original analysis run to bring back the states that you cleared.
Restore Model. Click Restore Model to restore the model to its original state. The states in
the State Master window will remain, however, and can be re-applied simply by selecting
them from the list.
769
Restore and Close. Click Restore and Close to restore the model to its original state and
also close the State Master window. This is the only way to close the State Master window.
DEMO MANAGER
The Demo Manager provides the ability to record screen activities for playback. Each demo can be saved
and run from the Demo Manager. The demo file is saved in a MiddleLink file, and MiddleLink records can be
used to add text boxes to the demo.
TO CREATE A DEMO
1
In the Demo Manager editor, in the top text box, type a name for the demo that you want to create,
and then click New.
When you are ready to record all mouse movements and selections, slick Start Recording.
The Demo Manager window will disappear and SynerGEE will record all mouse clicks and
keystrokes. Keystrokes and left-click mouse actions are recorded without delays. However, other
actions, like ribbon bar selections, have a default 1/2 second delay associated with them. This helps
to keep the movement controlled and easy to follow. These delays can be edited in the demo
MiddleLink file. In addition, text captions can be added to the demo via MiddleLink 17011 records.
See the MiddleLink schema for more information.
To stop the recording, re-open the Demo Manager editor (from the VIEWS tab in the
SynerGEE ribbon bar) and click Stop Recording.
TO RUN A DEMO
1
In the Demo Manager editor, select the demo that you want to run from the list of available choices.
Click Run.
The demo will automatically run in SynerGEE.
User Guide
770
TO DELETE A DEMO
1
In the Demo Manager editor, select the demo that you want to delete from the list of available
choices.
Click Delete.
MEDIA VIEWER
The SynerGEE Media Viewer allows you to view documents, images, and videos from within SynerGEE. In
order to be viewed in the Media Viewer, these files must be saved in the Doc folder in your SynerGEE
installation directory. The Doc folder is the default folder where all SynerGEEs help files are installed,
including the SynerGEE User Guide, Technical Reference, and Release Notes.
To use the Media Viewer, simply open it from the SUPPORT tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar and then select
the name of the file you want to view from the list of files on the left side of the application. The Media Viewer
will identify the file type and display it as appropriate in the Media Viewer window.
LIBRARY
Documents can be added to SynerGEE in the Library, making documents such as equipment specs or other
internal documents accessible directly within the SynerGEE application. These documents can be re-named
and also viewed in either in SynerGEEs link viewer dialog or a regular window.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
771
In the Library editor, perform the following steps to identify the document that you want to add to the
library:
a
Next to Name, type the name of the document as you want it to be identified in the
SynerGEE library.
Next to Path, type the path of the document file, or click Browse to search for the file.
Under Open In, select Dialog or Window to specify where the file will be opened.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Library editor, locate the name of the document that you want to view.
Double click on the document name or select the document name and click Open.
In the Library editor, select the document that you want to edit from the list of available choices.
Use the Name, Path, and Open In options to update the document, as appropriate.
Click Update.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
772
In the Library editor, select the document that you want to delete from the list of available choices.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
SQL DASHBOARD
The SQL Dashboard is a general purpose tool in SynerGEE that an engineer can use to run queries directly
against the tables in any database represented with a DSA. Views, joins, updates, and other queries can be
authored and run from the SQL Dashboard. These queries can be written against any data source (model or
dataset independent). The dashboard allows the engineer to work directly with data by writing and managing
queries that can be run against models, customer tables, and other SynerGEE data stored in the database.
Scripts containing one or more queries can be written in the SQL Dashboard. The scripts are stored in the
Scripts folder with a *.SynSQL file extension. You can create multiple queries in a single file, as long as each
query is separated by a semi-colon. These queries will run against any database specified by the selected
DSA. You can write a query once and run it against any databases by selecting the appropriate DSA.
Depending on the type of database you rely on (Access, SQL Server, or Oracle) and the complexity of the
query, the SQL language may vary slightly. It is recommended that you become familiar with the language
most applicable to your needs.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Selecting a data type and data source for use with the SQL Dashboard on page 774
User Guide
773
On the right side of the SQL Dashboard window, select the tab that you want to close.
From the CONTROLS tab of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click Remove. If you try to remove the last
tab, the tab will clear but remain open.
User Guide
774
Detailed procedures for working with the different areas of the SQL Dashboard are provided in the following
sections:
Selecting a data type and data source for use with the SQL Dashboard on page 774
Selecting a data type and data source for use with the
SQL Dashboard
In the SQL Dashboard window, the data type option is where you select the type of SynerGEE data that you
want to query. The following data types are supported:
CMM
Data Mart
Equipment
Events
Historian
Mining
Model
PI
Results
Subsets
User Guide
775
For more information on these supported data types, see SynerGEE Data Types on page 59.
Once a data type is selected, you may select a data source alias (DSA) against which the query will be run.
The SQL Dashboard also supports connections to a PI server.
Refer to the following procedure for more information.
TO SELECT A DATA TYPE AND DATA SOURCE FOR THE SQL DASHBOARD
1
From the SQL Dashboard window, directly under the SynerGEE logo, use the options list to select
one of the supported data types.
Under DSA, use the options list or click the ... button to select a data source against which the query
will be run.
Tips:
If you selected Model or Equipment as the data type, you can also click the Use Model/
Equipment in Memory check box to use the model or equipment data source that is
currently loaded in SynerGEE.
You can also edit the selected DSA by clicking the Edit DSA button.
If you selected an Oracle or SQL Server DSA as the data source, then you may also select a data
set from the Data Set options list.
TO WRITE A QUERY
1
In the data source area of the SQL Dashboard window, select a database to run the query against.
For more information, see Selecting a data type and data source for use with the SQL Dashboard
on page 774.
To create a new query, type a query name in the Name text box and a query group in the Group text
box. Both the Name and the Group are required if you want to save the query.
or
User Guide
776
Write the query text in the in the SQL area, near the top of the SQL Dashboard window.
Tip:
To increase or decrease the font size in the query window for better visibility, hold down
Ctrl and scroll the mouse wheel.
TO SAVE A QUERY
1
Write a query following the instructions provided in To write a query on page 775. Make sure that
you have specified a Name and a Group.
Click Save. The query and the group, if applicable, will be added to the list of saved queries in the
lower-left corner of the SQL Dashboard window.
TO DELETE A QUERY
1
In the lower-left corner of the SQL Dashboard window, select the name of the query that you want to
delete.
Click Delete.
In the data source area of the SQL Dashboard window, select the database that you want to work
with. For more information, see Selecting a data type and data source for use with the SQL
Dashboard on page 774.
On the right-side of the SQL Dashboard window, click the Show Tables check box. A list of tables
within the selected database will appear underneath the check box, and the Show Fields check box
will display.
Select the table whose fields you want to view, and then click the Show Fields check box. A list of
data fields within the selected table will appear underneath the check box.
User Guide
777
If desired, the following table describes additional tasks that you can perform from the Table and
Fields lists.
To ...
Do This ...
In the SQL Dashboard window, write or load the query that you want to run. For more information,
see To write a query on page 775.
Click Run to run the query against the selected database. If you wrote more than one query and
only want to run one of those queries, select the SQL code that you want to run (from the area
where you wrote the query) and click Run Selection. SynerGEE will automatically highlight the
query that is run.
User Guide
778
If desired, the following table describes additional tasks that you can perform in the Results area.
To ...
Save the query results as a
CSV file
Do This ...
a
User Guide
779
Create a DSA that links to the external database. Be sure to check the Mining box during setup. For
more information on creating a DSA, see To create, delete, and manage DSAs on page 77.
Use the Mining tab in the Preferences editor to map the external data source to both the SynerGEE
device and SQL query that controls what is brought over into SynerGEE.
Create a query in the SQL dashboard. This query must include one of the following mining
constants. This is to indicate the type of device to which your mined data will connect:
Constant
Command
f_sectid
Section Id
f_devdesc
Device name
f_regkva
f_sectcond
f_sectneut
Once the query is set up, return to the Mining tab in the Preferences editor. Select the Facility Type
from the list, which will automatically fill in the Name field. Map the rest of the information to the data
and SQL Script.
Click OK to run the query. The dataset will be filled in with the mining constant used in the query.
Right-click on the type of device on the map that was queried. A link to the external database
appears in the context menu. This link will launch the SQL Dashboard, which will retrieve the control
settings that reside on the server containing the database.
User Guide
780
SQL commands
Command
Type
Definition
SELECT
Clause
FROM
Clause
WHERE
Clause
UPDATE
Clause
SET
Clause
ORDER BY
Clause
ALTER
Clause
NOT
Operator
OR
Operator
AND
Operator
IN
Operator
BETWEEN
Operator
UNION
Operator
INTERSECT
Operator
MINUS
Operator
Returns rows from first query that are not present in second
query
Operator
Add
Operator
Subtract
Operator
Divide
Operator
Multiple
Operator
Equal to
<
Operator
Less than
>
Operator
Greater than
!=
Operator
Not equal to
User Guide
781
Command
Type
Definition
<=
Operator
>=
Operator
Operator
Wild card
||
Operator
SQL examples
Example
Syntax
SELECT*
FROM table_name
SELECT column_name(s)
FROM table_name
SELECT column_name(s)
FROM table_name
WHERE condition
SELECT column_name(s)
FROM table_name
ORDER BY column_name [ASC|DESC]
SELECT column_name(s)
FROM table_name
WHERE condition
AND|OR condition
SELECT column_name
FROM table_name
WHERE column_name
BETWEEN value1 AND value2
SELECT column_names(s)
FROM table_name
WHERE column_name
IN (value1, value2...)
User Guide
782
Example
Syntax
UPDATE table_name
SET column_name=new_value
WHERE column_name=some_value
Selecting customers
The following query selects all customers that are fed from the most utilized distribution transformer as
reported in the first example. This time the DSA target will be the CMM Customers table (Oracle).
SELECT CustomerId, LastName, Address, City, CustClassId, DTranId
FROM @CMM@Customer
WHERE DtranId = F;
ORDER BY Last Name ASC:
The following SELECT query displays these results, proving that only the three-phase conductors were
modified. The DSA type for this will be Model (Access), which represents a SynerGEE Model Database.
UPDATE InstSection
SET NeutralConductorId = 1/0 AAC
WHERE PhaseConductorId = 336 ACSR AND SectionPhases = ABCN;
User Guide
783
SELECT *
FROM InstSection
WHERE SectionId IN (@SYN_QUERY_SECTS_ID@);
Comment out the queries above and run the queries below as a process:
ALTER TABLE @MOD@Node ADD lIsUsed long;
UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 0
UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 1 WHERE NodeId IN (SELECT FromNodeId FROM
@MOD@InstSection);
UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 1 WHERE NodeId IN (SELECT ToNodeId FROM
@MOD@InstSection);
UPDATE @MOD@Node SET lIsUsed = 1 WHERE NodeId IN (SELECT FeederId FROM
@MOD@InstSection);
DELETE FROM @MOD@Node WHERE lIsUsed = 0
ALTER TABLE @MOD@Node DROP COLUMN lIsUsed;
User Guide
784
Delete a Solver
instance
User Guide
Do This:
a
Click New.
Click Edit.
Use the New Solver Tool editor to edit the Name and
ProgID, as required. Descriptions for these two fields are
provided in the previous row in this table.
Click Run.
Click Delete.
CHAPTER
16
SynerGEE Cable
Cables should be loaded so that their operating temperature is within the standard or manufacturer stated
limits. As such, SynerGEE includes a cable ampacity tool that you can use to calculate amperage derating
due to burial and duct bank configuration. The tool can be used as a standalone calculator or it can integrate
directly within SynerGEEs modeling and analysis environment. In other words, you can build duct banks just
to find derated values for your duct bank cables, or you can go as far as applying duct banks to your model
for use in exception flagging during analysis.
With the cable ampacity tool, you can model direct buried cables with or without conduit and cables within
encased duct banks. Cable modeling is circuit-based and a maximum amp value can be specified by circuit.
If a circuit has no specified amp value, SynerGEE calculates the maximum current allowed to avoid thermal
overloading of the cable. Other features of SynerGEE cable analysis include:
Realistic duct bank simulation, with a simple graphic editor to help create them.
Consideration of duct size, soil type, spacing, depth, and mutual heating.
Option to apply duct banks to sections, for automatic application of derated values.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on working with cables in SynerGEE.
Define your cable conductors in your equipment data source and enable them for ampacity studies.
If you are an established SynerGEE user, you may already have your conductors defined, but you
may still need to enable them for ampacity studies. For more information on modeling cables, see
User Guide
786
SynerGEE Cable
Modeling Cables on page 786.
2
Create duct banks, using the duct bank editing features and your cable types.
Run the section derating update power tool to apply derated values to those sections.
Run SynerGEE analyses as normal, noting that exceptions are now flagged based on the derated
values.
These steps may vary slightly, depending on the makeup of your data and the depth of your ampacity
studies. If you only wish to calculate basic derated values without integrating them into your model, only steps
1 and 2 apply.
MODELING CABLES
As with any analysis, the results of cable studies depend on the quality of your model data, especially your
cable conductor models. When you work with cable conductors, you should be aware that the associated
data can serve two distinct purposes:
Ampacity studies
Impedance calculations
Ampacity studies refer to SynerGEE Cable, a licensed module that allows you to model cable duct banks and
calculate derated amperage for the associated cables. Impedance calculations, on the other hand, are an
integral part of any load-flow study. Therefore, your impedance-related data must be accurate for all cable
conductors, but ampacity-related data is only applicable if you plan to use SynerGEE Cable.
For more information on SynerGEE Cable, see SynerGEE Cable on page 785.
User Guide
Explanations of the various fields in the Conductor editor, including those applicable to cables, can
be found under Editing a conductor type on page 305.
SynerGEE Cable
787
User Guide
788
SynerGEE Cable
Outside diameter
Insulation diameter
Conductor
diameter
Insulation
Jacket
Sheath
Core strand
diameter
Neutral strand
diameter
Diameter to
strand ring
Concentric neutral components
If you are using a concentric neutral cable for ampacity studies, you may need to contact the respective cable
manufacturer to obtain all the necessary data. In many cases, cable catalogs do not provide all the attributes
that SynerGEE requires.
User Guide
SynerGEE Cable
789
Outside diameter
Insulation diameter
Conductor
diameter
Insulation
Core strand
diameter
Sheath
Shield
Jacket
User Guide
790
SynerGEE Cable
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new duct bank and then click OK.
Use the Duct Bank editor and the Duct Bank view to edit the duct bank. For more information, see
Editing a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view on page 793 and Editing a duct bank using
the Duct Bank editor on page 790.
The standard SynerGEE editor. For more information on the editor, see Using the SynerGEE
Editor on page 151.
The Cable Duct Bank graphic view. For more information on this window, see Editing a duct bank
using the Cable Duct Bank view on page 793.
In most cases, you will probably use both tools together, since each has its own advantages. If you have both
the editor and a Cable Duct Bank view open, the two are fully interactive. That is, any changes you make in
the editor are automatically reflected in the graphic view, and vice-versa. Also, certain settings can only be
configured in the editor, not the graphic view.
A duct bank can include any number of three-phase circuits. Each circuit is configured independently of the
rest, and the mutual effects of all circuits are considered during amperage calculations. You can add new
circuits to a duct bank using the editor or the Cable Duct Bank view. If and when you apply a duct bank to a
section, you apply one specific circuit only.
User Guide
SynerGEE Cable
791
Expand Duct Banks and then double-click the name of the duct bank that you want to edit.
On the left side of the Duct Bank editor, select from the different tab names to access the available
settings for the duct bank. The following topics describe the different tasks that you can perform:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Warehouse tab of the SynerGEE model explorer, expand Duct Banks and double-click on the
duct bank that you want to edit.
In the Duct Bank editor, select the Duct Bank tab. The following table describes the different options
that you can set.
Description
Construction
If you select Direct Buried, the Cable Duct Bank view will still show an
outline of a duct bank, according to the configuration specified below.
For more information on modeling direct buried cables, see A word
on direct buried cables in the duct bank view on page 796.
Dimensions
Enter the Height, Width, and Depth of the duct bank. In the Cable
Duct Bank view, you can change these dimensions by clicking and
dragging the duct bank walls.
User Guide
792
SynerGEE Cable
Ducts
If you selected Duct Bank as the construction type, select the duct
Material and specify the Diameter and Thickness of the material. If
you selected Direct Buried as the construction type, you only need to
specify the Thickness of the duct.
Note that these values cannot be changed in the Cable Duct Bank
view.
Circuit loading
Soil
Select a Soil Type for the duct bank. If you selected Direct Buried as
the construction type, then you can also select the Fill/Backfill type.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Warehouse tab of the SynerGEE model explorer, expand Duct Banks and double-click on the
duct bank that you want to edit.
In the list of circuits at the top of the editor, select the circuit that you want to edit. From this list, you
can also click Add to add a new circuit to the duct bank, and Delete to delete the selected circuit.
Once you have selected a circuit, use the remaining fields in the Duct Bank editor to edit the data for
the circuit. The following table describes the different options that you can set. Select other circuits
and repeat this step to edit additional circuits, as desired.
Nominal KV
Load Factor
User Guide
SynerGEE Cable
793
Select this check box to set a manually applied maximum amp rating
for the circuit. When this option is selected (checked), the specified
Rating value is assigned as the circuits amp rating and no derating
calculations are performed for the circuit. In turn, this value, rather
than a calculated value, is used during derating calculations for other
duct bank circuits, as applicable.
Loading Constant
Cables
Use this area to select the conductor type for the Phase and Neutral
conductors. Cable ampacity does not support different conductors by
phase. For a conductor to appear in the list, it must be present in your
equipment data source and enabled for ampacity studies. For more
information on enabling a conductor, see Editing a conductor type
on page 305.
Color
Phasing
Use this area to enable phasing and specify the location of the
conductors within the bank. The Row and Col fields determine which
duct contains each phase, and the X and Y fields determine precise
positioning within the duct.
You can also edit these values by dragging conductors in the Cable
Duct Bank view.
In a duct bank, the phase positions are represented by numerical
values. When you apply a duct bank to a section, you must also
specify a transposition value that assigns your current phase
designations to these positions. For more information on assigning
duct banks to sections, see Applying Duct Banks to Sections on
page 797.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
794
SynerGEE Cable
When you are making changes to a duct bank using the Cable Duct Bank view, you will notice that the
accompanying values in the bank editor update automatically to reflect the changes you are making.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
A word on direct buried cables in the duct bank view on page 796
Troubleshooting calculation errors shown in the duct bank legend on page 797
User Guide
SynerGEE Cable
795
Do this:
In the Duct Banks tab, drag the desired bank and drop it on the view.
In the Duct Banks tab, under Cables, drag the desired conductor type and
drop it in a duct. The Cables list represents all cable conductors in your
equipment data source that are enabled for ampacity studies. If one of
your cables is not showing up, it may not be properly enabled in the
Conductor editor. For more information on editing a conductor, see
Editing a conductor type on page 305.
Move a conductor to a
different duct
With the mouse, click and drag the conductor to the desired duct. Note
that SynerGEE does not allow accidental overlapping.
Click somewhere in the bank (but not on a duct) and drag it to the desired
depth. Note that horizontal dragging is provided for interface convenience
and has no effect on ampacity calculations.
Click on any duct (except the lower right) and drag the ducts to the desired
position.
Click on the lower right duct and drag it, which alters all spacings
proportionally.
User Guide
796
SynerGEE Cable
Function
In
Puts the mouse in zoom in mode. Click anywhere in the view to zoom in.
Out
Puts the mouse in zoom out mode. Click anywhere in the view to zoom out.
Bounds
If you want any changes to be applied by default to future duct bank views, be sure to check Save As
Defaults before clicking OK.
Clearly, the concept of a duct bank is not applicable to direct buried cables. However, SynerGEE maintains
the framework of the duct bank modeling environment to preserve relationships between the conductors,
thereby facilitating ampacity calculations. If you are modeling direct buried cables using the Cable Duct Bank
view, it is recommended that you place one conductor per duct in a configuration that matches phasing and
burial style. For example, if you want to model a direct buried three-phase cable set, you might use a one-bythree duct bank as shown above.
User Guide
SynerGEE Cable
797
If you wish to model direct buried cable with conduit, you should create duct banks with the bank material
specified as Native Ground, or soil. You should not specify the bank as direct buried, because SynerGEE
will assume that there is no conduit, and will not permit you to select a conduit material or thickness.
Overlapping conductors. If any conductors overlap, SynerGEE cannot perform the calculations.
Check your conductor spacing carefully, noting that it is possible for one conductor to be completely
hidden behind another in the view.
Missing conductor types. If the phase and ground conductors of a circuit are not assigned a valid
conductor type from your equipment data source, SynerGEE cannot perform the calculations. In the
duct bank editor, check each circuit to ensure that conductor types are assigned. For more
information on the duct bank editor, see Editing a duct bank using the Duct Bank editor on
page 790.
User Guide
798
SynerGEE Cable
bank evaluation. Therefore, if you make any changes to your duct bank configurations, you must run the
evaluation if you want to update section derating values in your model.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Next to Duct Bank, select the name of the duct bank that you want to apply to the model.
Tip:
Click the
button if you want to edit the duct bank using the Duct Bank editor.
Next to Ckt, select the number of the circuit that you want to apply to the section. Only one
circuit from the duct bank can be used on a section.
Under Instance, select an existing instance name or type a new name. Instances are used
to tie individual sections together in preparation for the duct bank evaluation. For more
information, see Duct Bank Evaluation on page 798.
Click OK to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
SynerGEE Cable
799
Once a duct bank is applied and all components are set up for evaluation, perform the following procedure to
set up the duct bank evaluation.
In the Fundamentals group, click the text label Duct Bank Studies and then select Settings.
Use the Duct Bank Evaluation editor to set up the following options:
Type of analysis. Select the type of analysis that you want to perform.
Amps on assigned circuits. Select whether to use maximum or average phase amps on
assigned circuits.
Amps on unassigned circuits. Select whether to use duct bank or zero loading on
unspecified circuits.
Neutral loading. Select whether to use neutral loading from the model or from the duct
bank type.
Updating duct banks. Select how the duct bank type will be updated.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Model loading. This report provides a thermal profile of the duct bank when using the loading from
load-flow analysis.
Max loading. This report provides the maximum loading that each circuit can reach without creating
a thermal overload.
Warehouse only. This report provides the ampacity of the duct bank as it exists in the warehouse.
If a section is unfed during a duct bank evaluation, then the thermal rating from the stand alone duct bank is
used for the results.
If you have not already done so, use the Duct Bank Evaluation editor to configure options related to
the analysis. For more information, see Setting up a duct bank evaluation on page 798.
User Guide
800
SynerGEE Cable
The section must have a duct bank applied, as described in Applying Duct Banks to Sections on
page 797.
The section must be set to use the amp rating from the duct bank.
If the section has an applied duct bank but the second condition is not met, then the duct bank evaluation will
produce an error message and a value will not be applied to the amp rating.
User Guide
CHAPTER
17
Time-Related
Features
SynerGEE provides a set of time-related features and tools that have a variety of uses and allow you to move
beyond traditional static, peak-day studies. You can use these tools alone, in combination, or not at all,
depending on your specific needs. As an advanced user of SynerGEE time-related features, you will be able
to perform detailed time-related studies and multi-year planning, all with a single model.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
LOAD GROWTH
The most simple time-related load manipulation tool is load growth. Load growth acts as a simple multiplier
against load, specified at the section level. It is not a dynamic feature that considers the passage of time, like
load curves and multi-year analysis. Rather, it is a simple multiplier that is either applied, or is not.
As an example, you can specify growth rates on sections. If you enable those growth rates, SynerGEE
multiplies them against the specified load, for analysis purposes only. Once you disable those growth rates,
section loading returns to normal for analysis purposes. For example, assume that you have a subdivision
demand that you expect to grow by 150% over the next five years. In SynerGEE, you might:
1
Apply a 1.5 growth rate to all sections in the subdivision. This can be done section-by-section in the
Properties tab of the Section editor. Or, you can edit multiple sections at once using the multiple
editor.
In the Growth Options editor, select No growth rate and then run a load-flow analysis to simulate
present-day conditions.
In the Growth Options editor, select Apply yearly growth rate in section records and then run
another load-flow analysis to simulate conditions 5 years from now.
The Section editor is not the only location where you can specify growth rates. As described in Specifying
growth rates on page 804, you can also specify growth rates in feeders, customer zones, and growth curves,
User Guide
802
Time-Related Features
as well as in the Growth Options editor. Before running an analysis, you can use the Growth Options editor to
choose which growth rates, if any, you would like to use.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
In the Growth Options editor, the Groups list can be used to pre-configure a number of different
Growth Rate combinations. The group that is selected with a check box will be the group that is
applied when you run a SynerGEE analysis. The group that is selected by highlighting the group
name is the current group whose settings you can view and edit in the editor.
The following list describes the tasks that you can perform regarding Growth Rate groups:
To remove a group from the list, select the group (by highlighting the group name) and click
the Delete the selected group button.
To edit the settings for a group, select the group (by highlighting the group name) and then
edit the available settings as described in the rest of this procedure. Click Apply to apply
the changes to the group.
Edit the following settings for the current group (the group that is selected by highlighting the group
name). When you are done, click Apply to apply the changes to the group.
Description
User Guide
Time-Related Features
Growth Options
Affected Loads
Years of Growth
Capacity Factors
803
Choose the types of load you wish to have affected by the growth
rate. Available choices are follows:
Specifies the number of years that growth rates will be applied when
you select one of the three Apply yearly growth options. Available
choices are as follows:
User Guide
804
Time-Related Features
4
Feeders. In the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor, feeder growth rates are specified as the Feeder
Multiplier. When feeder growth rates are enabled in the Growth Options editor, the growth rates are
applied to all sections owned by the respective feeder. For more information on editing a feeder, see
Editing a feeder or subtran node on page 247.
Sections. In the Properties tab of the Section editor, section growth rates are specified as the %
Growth Rate / Year. When section growth rates are enabled in the Growth Options editor, the
growth rates are applied to their respective sections only. Section growth rates are specified as
percentages, and in the Growth Options editor, you must enter the total number of years for
SynerGEE to calculate the actual multiplier. For more information on the actual multiplier
calculations, see the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Customer zones. In the Customer Zone editor, customer zone growth rates are specified as the
Zone Growth Rate. When customer zone growth rates are enabled in the Growth Options editor,
the growth rates are applied to any sections that are within the respective zones. Customer zone
growth rates are specified as percentages, and in the Growth Options editor, you must enter the
total number of years for SynerGEE to calculate the actual multiplier. For more information on the
actual multiplier calculations, see the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Growth curves. Growth curves are a collection of independent, annual growth rates that are mostly
used in the multi-year modeling environment. Growth rates may be negative, to simulate declining
demand. For more information, see Growth curves on page 804.
Growth Options editor. In the Growth Options editor, you may specify different load multipliers for
distributed loads, spot loads, large customers, projects, and speculative loads. Use a value of zero
to simulate the removal of load altogether.
It is important to note that load growth does not facilitate a time range-type of analysis that steps through time
and incrementally increases or decreases load. Rather, it is simply a quick means of simulating load growth
at the outset of analysis. In the case of growth curves, SynerGEE can look to future years to calculate the
final growth factor, but still does not perform any dynamic, time-sensitive analyses, such as those allowed by
customer load curves.
Growth curves
A growth curve is a collection of annual growth rates that you can assign to sections as a zone, rather than
using individual, granular growth rates. Assigning growth rates by means of growth curves has the following
advantages:
User Guide
They are spatial, allowing growth rates to be assigned quickly and geographically.
Time-Related Features
805
They serve as a central management point for growth rate data. Once section assignments are
made, you can edit the data in a single place to make sweeping changes in your model, perhaps to
quickly simulate changing trends.
Each year has an independent growth rate. Therefore, they can enhance growth simulations when
used in a multi-year modeling environment. For example, you can use a growth curve to simulate
trends such as an area that may grow quickly for the next few years and then saturate.
Growth curves have the most value when used in a multi-year modeling environment, but you can still use
them to apply growth spatially to any SynerGEE model. If you do not use multi-year modeling but still want to
apply growth with growth curves, see Using growth curves in a single-year environment on page 808.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new growth curve and then click OK.
Use the Growth Curve editor to edit the settings for the growth curve. For more information on the
options you can set, see Editing a growth curve on page 805.
Expand Growth Curves and then double-click the name of the growth curve that you want to edit.
Color
User Guide
806
Time-Related Features
Growth Rate
Use the growth rate chart to specify a growth rate for each
analysis year. If desired, you can click the Toggle button to
change the graph to a table that you can also use to enter the
yearly growth rates.
Keep in mind that you are specifying percentages, and not flat
multipliers like other growth rates in SynerGEE. For more
information on growth rates as they are used in growth curves,
see Using growth curves in a multi-year environment on
page 807.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Growth Options editor, under Growth Options, select Use growth curves with multi-year
model.
Next to Growth Years, set the number of years over which to apply the growth curve.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Next to Growth Curve, select the name of the growth curve that you want to assign to the section.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Tip:
If you have multiple sections to assign, you may find it more convenient to use the Multiple
Editor. For more information on the Multiple Editor, see Using the Multiple Editor on
page 177.
User Guide
Time-Related Features
807
Expand Growth Curves and then select the name of the growth curve that you want to delete.
Growth rate
2011
5%
2012
10%
2013
15%
2014
10%
2015
5%
2016
2%
2017
1%
To demonstrate how these rates would work, assume that you have this growth curve applied to a section
and the interface is set to 2014. The following examples demonstrate how different growth years could affect
growth rate application:
Number of
years
No growth applied
Growth rate for 2014 and 2015 applied to 2014 load, progressively (rate 10%, then 5%)
Growth rate for 2014, 2015, and 2016 applied to 2014 load, progressively (rate 10%,
then 5%, then 2%)
User Guide
808
Time-Related Features
If multiple years of growth are applied, the rates are applied in progression. For example, if the three rates
10%, 5%, and 2% were applied to a load, the general formula would be:
Eq 171
SynerGEE never looks backwards for load or rate information, nor does it accumulate rates from past years
when analyzing any given year. It always starts with the current years load and the current rate, and may
apply future rates depending on the growth years setting. For instance, in the previous example, growth rates
for any year previous to 2014 would not be used in any case.
For more information on multi-year modeling, see Multi-Year Analysis on page 579.
Define your growth curves with only the first year (base year) rate specified.
Set your growth options to use growth curves, specifying the growth years as 1.
If you do not change the interface year, and you always have the growth years setting at 1, a growth rate in
a growth curve functions like a section-level growth rate. If you use growth curves in this manner, multi-year
features will be mostly invisible and should not be of concern.
User Guide
Time-Related Features
809
Reconfiguration studies can be more complete by looking at loading on- and off-peak.
Load curves are built from historical load data. Their use gives some degree of foresight into feeder
and system demand.
Running an analysis over time allows the consideration of energy delivery and loss.
SynerGEE can find peak and minimum loading times on given months or over the year. It can
present information about loading or voltage trends over that period.
Load curves are a basis for powerful and detailed simulations. It should be noted that the intention of the
feature is not to facilitate exact replication of the distribution system. Rather, the goal is to support a
consistent and predictable model that supports time-of-day and time range simulation. This type of modeling
is essential for making decisions that are most beneficial to customers and the utility throughout daily,
monthly, and yearly operation.
Decide how you are going to create your curves, in regards to a data source. You have a variety of
options, including the following:
-
Use existing curve or usage data. If you have existing data that represents 24-hour usage
trends, you might use this to create your SynerGEE load curves. This data could be input
manually in SynerGEE, or you could construct a method of importing the data directly into
your equipment data source. Your methods would depend on the amount of data you have
and your level of IT support and/or data management resources.
Use traditional or hypothetical load shapes. By making educated judgment of your system
and its demands, you could use SynerGEE to create load curves that follow common
usage trends, perhaps found in other reference material.
Build curves from scratch. If you have a good idea of specific usage trends in your system,
you could build your own customized curves directly in SynerGEE. However, this process
User Guide
810
Time-Related Features
could be time-consuming, depending on how many curves you need to create. SynerGEE
does provide some tools to make the process quicker, including curve copy/paste and
automatic curve extrapolation. You can find these tools in the Customer Class editor, as
described in Editing a customer class on page 811.
2
In SynerGEE, establish your load curves by creating customer classes, which are stored as
equipment data. For more information, see Customer classes on page 810.
With customer classes established, combine them to create customer zones, which are also stored
as equipment data. For more information, see Customer zones on page 815.
Apply customer zones to sections. For more information, see Applying customer zones to sections
in the model on page 817.
Allocate load with consideration of time-of-day. For more information, see Load curves and load
allocation on page 819.
Establish a time-of-day for analysis and run analyses. For more information, see Enabling load
curves on page 818.
Customer classes
A customer class stores your basic load curve data. A customer class consists of at least 36 curves, including
a percent kW curve for a weekday, weekend, and peak day for each of the twelve months in a year. In
addition, you can optionally specify another 36 curves for percent kvar.
SynerGEEs Customer Class editor can help you create, view, copy, and modify curves in a customer class.
Customer classes are stored in your equipment data source and can be managed through the Warehouse
tab of the model explorer.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new customer class and then click OK.
Use the Customer Class editor to edit the settings for the customer class. For more information on
the options you can set, see Editing a customer class on page 811.
Creating a customer class is identical to creating any zone or equipment type. For more information, see
Creating a device type on page 319.
User Guide
Time-Related Features
811
Expand Customer Classes and then double-click the name of the customer class that you want to
edit.
On the left side of the Customer Class editor, select from the different tab names to access the
available settings for the customer class. The following topics describe the different tasks that you
can perform:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Customer Classes and then double-click the name of the customer class that you want to
edit.
Select the Day Type and Month for the first load curve that you want to edit. If enabled, select the
kW or kvar option button to specify whether you are creating a curve or real or reactive power.
(These two option buttons are enabled only when you have selected the Customer load based on
kW and kvar curves option on the Information tab of the editor.)
The graph in the Customer Class editor provides average hourly load percentages for the selected
day type and month. Click any bar in the graph and drag it to a new location to set the new value.
The current value is shown in a text popup that appears next to the mouse cursor.
You can also do any of the following:
User Guide
812
Time-Related Features
-
Use the Pf (%) text box to set the Pf percentage for the selected Day Type and Month.
(This text box is enabled only when you have selected the Customer load based on kW
and pf curves option on the Information tab of the editor.)
Click the Toggle button to change the graph to a table that you can also use to enter the
hourly load percentage values.
Click the Shift Left and Shift Right buttons to shift the hourly load percentage values for
every curve in the customer class by one hour in either direction. Note that these two
buttons affect all curves, and not just the one curve that you are currently viewing.
Click the Copy button to copy the values from the current curve that you are viewing. You
can then select a different Day Type or Month and then click the Paste button to apply the
copied load curve to the newly selected day type and month.
Click the Create Scaled Load Curves button to generate curves for the entire year,
including all months and all day types, based on the curve you are currently viewing. You
can provide multiplier values, if desired, to adjust the curves for each of the remaining 11
months. Or, you can leave the multiplier at 1.0 to create exact duplicates of the current
curve for each day type and month.
Repeat these steps to edit the load curve data for each Day Type and Month in your profile.
Click OK to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Customer Classes and then double-click the name of the customer class that you want to
edit.
User Guide
Time-Related Features
3
813
In the Customer Class editor, select the Information tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Description
Curve Basis
Species the criteria on which the load curves are based. The
following options are available:
Select this check box to have SynerGEE summer and winter peak
values from the load curves defined for the customer curve. If the
check box is cleared, SynerGEE will use the factors that you define
here for summer and winter months.
Use these fields to set kW Load and kvar Load factors based on a
percentage of the peak load. These values are used when time of day
modeling is turned off.
Weather settings
Use these fields to set monthly weather load factors. For more
information on these weather-related options, see Modeling weather
using weather profiles on page 825.
Load model
Use these fields to set the Current, Impedance, and Power values
for the load.
Click OK to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Customer Classes and then double-click the name of the customer class that you want to
edit.
User Guide
814
Time-Related Features
3
In the Customer Class editor, select the Coincidence tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Cold Load Pickup
Coincidence Factors
Per Number of
Customers
Click OK to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Customer Classes and then double-click the name of the customer class that you want to
edit.
In the Customer Class editor, select the Economics tab. The following table describes the different
options that you can set.
Outage costs
User Guide
Use the following fields to set outage costs for when service is
interrupted:
Outage Cost
Time-Related Features
4
815
Click OK to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Customer Classes and then select the name of the customer class that you want to delete.
Customer zones
Once you have set up customer classes, as described in Customer classes on page 810, you are ready to
define customer zones. Customer zones are essentially a mixture of up to three customer classes in
specified proportions that determine how much of a sections spot and distributed load pertain to each class.
Once established, customer zones can be applied to the sections in a model using the Section editor.
Customer zones serve as an intermediary between the raw load curve data and the model. This intermediate
step is necessary to avoid detailed and granular curve data at the section level. It would be burdensome to
apply customer classes and percentages at the section level for an entire model. The concept of customer
zones makes the process much simpler, consolidating load curves into a single data item that can be applied
at the section level. And, because proximal distribution loads tend to have a similar customer makeup,
customer zones make it convenient to populate the same curve data to large regions of your model. Consider
the following diagram, with three hypothetical zones sketched on it.
Ideally, a system should be divided into zones based on the approximate demand or usage of various
customer types. For example, the zone on the left may be a mixture of approximately 30% all-electric
customers and 70% gas heat customers, while the zone on the right may be 100% all-electric customers.
Customer zone assignments are optional and can be assigned independently to sections for spot loads and
distributed loads. If a customer zone is not specified on a section for either or both load types, then nominal
kW and kvar is used, as applicable.
User Guide
816
Time-Related Features
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new customer zone and then click OK.
Use the Customer Zone editor to edit the settings for the customer zone. For more information on
the options you can set, see Editing a customer zone on page 816.
Expand Zones - Customer and then double-click the name of the customer zone that you want to
edit.
Customer Class
User Guide
Time-Related Features
Color
817
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
To apply customer zones to sections using the Section editor on page 817
To apply customer zones to sections using the Multiple Editor on page 817
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Do This ...
a
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Build a query set that includes the sections that you want to edit. For more information, see Using
the Query Set on page 173.
User Guide
818
Time-Related Features
a
Along the top of the Multiple Editor, click the Zones button.
Use the check boxes on the right side of the Multiple Editor to select the actions that you want to
perform for both distributed and spot load modeling. The selected actions will be applied to all
sections in the query set that you created in step 1.
The available actions are as follows:
Change Zone Usage Status. Select this check box to enable, disable, or toggle the status
of the Use Customer Zone check box for the queried sections.
Change Customer Zones. Select this check box to apply a selected customer zone to the
queried sections.
Change I, Z, PQ Status. Select this check box to enable, disable, or toggle the status of
the Use %I, %Z, %PQ values from customer classes check box for the queried sections.
Click OK to apply the changes to the model and close the Multiple Editor.
For additional information on working in the Multiple Editor, see Using the Multiple Editor on
page 177.
Expand Zones - Customer and then select the name of the exposure zone that you want to delete.
User Guide
Time-Related Features
819
When you allocate, SynerGEE uses curve values at that particular time point to calculate peak distributed
load. This distributed load, then, should be appropriate for any other time-of-day as well. For more
information on how these calculations are performed, see Understanding time-sensitive allocation results
on page 820.
If possible, it is generally recommended to select a time of peak loading for allocation, based on your
judgment. That is, you should determine a day and hour of overall peak loading, and specify that time in the
Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor, as described in Selecting the analysis year and time
of day on page 434. You should not use the automatic Peak load time on peak day option, because this
option refers to analyses conducted after allocation and evaluates existing distributed load only.
It is important to understand that no method is absolutely correct for every situation. When you use load
curves, many layers of data and mathematics are working simultaneously and you must employ your best
judgment to use them responsibly. It may take several iterations of allocation and test analyses to ensure that
your setup is appropriate. For example, if you allocate at a self-determined time of peak load, you might run
load-flow analyses afterward to see if SynerGEE agrees with the time you selected and produces reasonable
numbers. To do so, in the Hour/Day tab of the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Peak load time
on peak day option, run a load-flow analysis, and observe the time indicated on the report.
User Guide
820
Time-Related Features
Metered demands at sources and elsewhere accurately reflect the particular time-of-day you
choose for allocation.
Depending on your workflow, you may find demands subsets much more convenient for configuring
demands, rather than manual work in the SynerGEE editors. For more information, see Subsets on
page 82.
User Guide
Time-Related Features
821
The use of load curves is optional. By default, they are not used. For more information on enabling
the use of load curves, see Enabling load curves on page 818.
Loads should be allocated once using known demands at a known time point. After allocating,
applications such as load-flow can be run at different time points. The quality of the load models at
other time points depends on the quality of the customer load curves and the formulation of
customer zones. For more information, see Load curves and load allocation on page 819.
Billing data is important to the formulation of load curves and the formulation of zones. For
advanced users, it is possible to construct load data completely outside of SynerGEE without the
use of load allocation at all. External load data can then be imported into SynerGEE, perhaps by use
of subsets. For more information on subsets, see Subsets on page 82.
CONTROLS
SynerGEE has a script-based controls module that allows complex control systems to be modeled in the time
or frequency domain. A vast number of possibilities may be executed with the controls system. Such projects
include a load-pulse analysis to simulate load pulses over time, or developing a frequency domain model for
an induction motor. Please refer to the SynerGEE Technical Reference for more details regarding types of
control systems, and sample scripts and equations.
In the Applications group, click the text label Controls and then select Settings.
In the text box below the list of control system scripts, type the name of the script that you want to
create.
Click New. Notepad opens in a new window where you can type the script.
When you are finished writing the script, select File > Save from the Notepad main menu.
User Guide
822
Time-Related Features
In the Applications group, click the text label Controls and then select Settings.
In the list of control scripts, select the name of the control system script that you want to run.
Click Apply to accept the selection and then click X to close the editor.
From the ANALYSIS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Controls icon. This will run the script
that you selected in the Control Options editor.
User Guide
CHAPTER
18
Weather
Weather can have a variety of impacts on a distribution model. For example, temperature, wind speed, and
relative humidity can each have an impact on load. Temperature can also impact overhead conductor
resistance, and conductors can have summer and winter rating load limits that need to be considered.
SynerGEEs weather modeling features allow you to realistically model the behavior that occurs in the grid as
weather changes occur over the course of a year. This chapter summarizes the edits that you will need to
make to model the effects of weather on your system. A more detailed discussion on weather modeling in
SynerGEE is provided in the SynerGEE Technical Reference.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information on modeling the impact of weather in SynerGEE.
Weather conditions. Weather conditions are defined using the Weather tab of the Time and Weather
Options editor. Several options are available. For example, you can use a simple set of weather set
points to define constant values for humidity, irradiance, temperature, and wind speed. You can also
select to use more advanced weather profiles, which allow you to vary these four weather conditions
on both an hourly and a monthly basis.
For more information on defining the weather conditions for your model, see Defining Weather
Conditions on page 824.
Weather-based impacts on loads. SynerGEE provides two ways to adjust distributed and spot loads
based on changes in weather conditions. In the Time and Weather Options editor, you can define
global settings for weather factors and latency effects. These global settings can be enabled for spot
loads, distributed loads, or both spot and distributed loads for both summer and winter months. As a
User Guide
824
Weather
second option, instead of the global settings, you can configure SynerGEE to consider these same
inputs but on a more regional basis through the use of customer zones and customer classes.
For more information on configuring a model to simulate the impact of changing weather conditions
on loads, see Adjusting Loads Based on Weather Conditions on page 828.
Seasonal ratings. Conductors, regulators, and transformers can be set up with summer ratings and
winter ratings for continuous amps and emergency amps. The continuous amps ratings are used in
SynerGEE analyses to calculate the percent loading and to display overload exceptions. The
emergency amps rating is used in balanced and by-phase analyses and capacitor placement to flag
overloaded sections and to display regulator overload exceptions. The season that is used by the
SynerGEE model is selected on the Exceptions tab of the Model and Analysis Options editor.
For more information on using seasonal ratings in SynerGEE, see Configuring Seasonal Weather
Modeling on page 831.
Weather profiles. Weather profiles allow you to supply more detailed information about weather
conditions over the course of a year. Weather profiles are often used to model variations for different
weather conditions. For example, you can create weather profiles for a mild summer and also a
severe summer, and then run an analysis on each profile so you can compare the results. Each
weather profile specifies hourly temperature averages for each month of the year, and also average
monthly values for wind speed, relative humidity, and number of latent days.
For more information on using weather profiles in SynerGEE, see Modeling weather using weather
profiles on page 825.
Weather zones. Weather zones are used to model the variation in cloud cover in different parts of a
system. Solar plants in one section of a model, for example, may experience significant differences
in cloud cover from solar plants in another section of the model. This could result in a large MVA
input from one plant and a substantial MVA drop in another, and the resulting power swing will affect
flow and regulator and LTC tapping. Weather zones can be used to help simulate this kind of impact
on your model.
For more information on using weather zones in SynerGEE, see Using Weather Zones to Model
Variations in Cloud Cover on page 834.
Weather set points. The simplest approach to defining weather conditions is to specify a set of fixed
weather conditions, either as set weather values or as maximum weather values. This rather
approach assumes that the same weather conditions exist at all hours of the day and for all months
of the year.
Weather profiles. A more detailed approach to defining weather conditions is to use weather
profiles. Weather profiles allow you to apply a percentage-based adjust to a defined maximum
weather value on an hourly basis for each month in the year. Different weather profiles can be
created to define different weather patterns for example, a cold year for temperatures versus a
User Guide
Weather
825
warmer year for temperatures. By changing which weather profile is applied to the model before you
run an analysis, you can evaluate the impact that these different weather conditions will have on
your model.
In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Weather tab.
In the Weather tab, under Weather Modeling, select Weather Set Points.
Under Set Points, specify values to apply to your model for each of the following categories:
-
Temperature
Wind
Humidity
Irradiance
Next to Cloud Cover, specify a value from 0 to 100 to represent the percentage of cloud cover for
the model.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
826
Weather
the Time and Weather Options editor. If the maximum temperature is 35C, then the profile-adjusted
temperature is 28C. If the maximum temperature is 30C, then the profile-adjust temperature is 24C.
Weather profiles allow you to quickly and easily run different studies on your model to consider the impact of
different weather patterns. For example, you can create a moderate summer temperature profile and also a
severe summer temperature profile, and then run a contingency study using each profile. Weather profiles
eliminate the need to manually edit weather values each time an analysis is run.
Weather modeling based on weather profiles is enabled on the Weather tab of the Time and Weather
Options editor. In addition, all four weather profile types (humidity, irradiance, temperature, and wind) are
created from the Warehouse tab of the model explorer. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
In the Warehouse tab, right-click on Weather profiles and select New Device > Weather Profile.
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type the name of the weather profile, and then click OK.
Use Weather Profile editor to select the weather profile type and to edit the settings for the new
weather profile. For information on the options that you can set, see Editing a weather profile on
page 826.
From the SynerGEE model explorer, select the Warehouse tab and then expand the Climate
category for the weather profile type that you want to edit. Double-click the name of the weather
profile that you want to edit.
In the Weather Profile editor, under Profile Type, select the type of weather profile you are creating
or editing. Available choices are Temperature, Wind speed, Irradiance, and Humidity.
In the list of months, select the month for the weather data that you want to edit.
The graph in the Weather Profile editor provides hourly percentage values for the selected month.
As described in Modeling weather using weather profiles on page 825, these hourly percentages
User Guide
Weather
827
are applied to a defined maximum weather value to determine the actual temperature for a given
hour in a given month. To edit a value, simply click any bar in the graph and drag it to a new
location. The current value is shown in a text popup that appears next to the mouse cursor, and the
average value for the entire month is listed in the upper-right corner of the editor.
You can also do any of the following:
-
Click the Toggle button to change the graph to a table that you can also use to enter the
hourly weather percentages.
Click the Plus and Minus buttons to shift the hourly weather percentages by one percent in
either direction.
Click the Copy button to copy the percentages from the current month to all other months
in the profile.
If you are editing a Temperature profile, use the Rel. Humidity and Latent Days text boxes to enter
the average relative humidity and number of latent days for the selected month.
Repeat these steps to edit the percentages for each month in the profile.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Weather tab.
Weather Profiles: Time of Day. Selecting the time of day option will calculate separate
hourly values for each month based on the values that are defined in the applied weather
profiles.
Weather Profiles: Averages. Selecting the averages option will use calculate a single
value for each month, based on the average of the hourly values that are defined in the
User Guide
828
Weather
profile. (The average value for each month is shown in the upper-right corner of the
Temperature Profile editor.)
5
In the Maximums column, specify the maximum weather value for Temperature (degrees C), Wind
(feet per second), Humidity (percent relative humidity), and Irradiance (watts per square meter).
Note:
Remember that the percentages defined in the weather profiles will be applied to the
maximum weather values you define here to determine the actual weather values that will
be used by the SynerGEE model.)
In the Weather Profiles column, select the profiles that you want to apply for Temperature, Wind,
Humidity, and Irradiance.
Note:
For information on creating and editing weather profiles, see Creating a weather profile
on page 826 and Editing a weather profile on page 826.
Next to Cloud Cover, specify a value from 0 to 100 to represent the percentage of cloud cover.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Select Weather Profiles and then select the name of the weather profile that you want to delete.
User Guide
Weather
829
The six weather factors that you can apply for both summer and winter months (and individually for each of
the 12 months if you are applying the factors based on customer classes) are as follows:
%kW / C
%kvar / C
%kW / ft/s
%kvar / ft/s
%kW / %RH
%kvar / %RH
In addition to these six weather factors, you can also configure latency factors for temperature, wind speed,
and relative humidity. Latency assumes that successive days of unusual weather will result in higher loads
than single days of such weather. The three latency factors are expressed in percent per day. A temperature
latency factor of 1.5% per day, for example, will increase the impact of temperature variation on load by 1.5%
for each latent day. Following this example, if an extended heat wave kept temperatures above normal for 7
days, the temperature impact on load would increase by 10.5% (7 days x 1.5% latency factor = 10.5%). It is
very important to note that this is not a 10.5% increase in load. It is a 10.5% increase in the temperature
factor applied to the load. Additional information on latency and the impact of weather on loads in general is
provided in the SynerGEE Electric Technical Reference.
The following procedures discuss how to configure SynerGEE to adjust loads either globally or on a classbased approach, or to disable weather load modeling, if desired.
Perform the following steps to open the Time and Weather Options editor:
a
In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Weather tab.
In the Weather/Load tab, use the Spot and Distributed check boxes to specify whether the weather
factors and latency effects will be applied to spot loads, distributed loads, or both spot and
distributed loads.
Under Weather factors, specify summer and winter values for the following categories:
-
%kvar / C. Change in kvar loads (as a percentage value) per change in temperature.
%kW / ft/s. Change in kW loads (as a percentage value) per change in wind speed.
User Guide
830
Weather
%kvar / ft/s. Change in kvar loads (as a percentage value) per change in wind speed.
%kW / %RH. Change in kW loads (as a percentage value) per change in relative humidity.
%kvar / %RH. Change in kvar loads (as a percentage value) per change in relative
humidity.
Under Latency effects, specify summer and winter values for the following categories for latent
days:
-
Temp % / day. Change in temperature (as a percentage value) per day (for latent days).
Wind % / day. Change in wind speed (as a percentage value) per day (for latent days).
RH % / day. Change in relative humidity (as a percentage value) per day (for latent days).
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Time and Weather Options editor:
a
In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Weather tab.
Under Loads Normalized At, specify values to apply to your model for each of the following
categories:
-
Temperature
Wind
Humidity
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Configure the sections in your model so that the spot loads and distributed loads, as appropriate,
are linked to customer zones, which in turn are linked to customer classes.
-
Customer classes. A customer class stores basic load curve data. A customer class
consists of at least 36 curves, including a percent kW curve for a weekday, weekend, and
peak day for each of the 12 months in a year. In addition, you can optionally specify
another 36 curves for percent kvar. If you are not using time-of-day modeling, you can also
specify factors for % peak kW and % peak kvar for each customer class. This allows you to
take advantage of weather modeling using customer classes without having to set up or
use the actual load curves.
Some of the customer classes that are included in the sample model that is provided with
SynerGEE include Apartments, Industrial, Municipal, and Residential.
For more information on working with customer classes, see
User Guide
Weather
831
Industrial customers (whose loads are defined in the Industrial customer class described
above) and 20% of up to two other classes. A light industrial zone, however, might be
configured to include only 40% Industrial customers and 60% of up to two other classes.
Customer zones are applied to the sections of your model using the Load - Dist and Load Spot tabs of the Section editor.
Perform the following steps to open the Time and Weather Options editor:
a
In the Time and Weather Options editor, select the Weather tab.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Setting the season (summer or winter) for a SynerGEE model on page 831
User Guide
832
Weather
3
In the Model and Analysis Options editor, select the Exceptions tab.
Under Seasonal Ratings, select either Summer ratings or Winter ratings. You can also select an
option to use winter ratings when the temperature is less than a defined temperature value.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Warehouse tab, expand Conductors (Bare) or Conductors (Cable). Double-click the name
of the conductor that you want to edit.
In the Ratings section, specify Summer and Winter values for the following:
Continuous Amp Rating. The continuous amp rating is used during SynerGEE analyses
to calculate the percent loading and to display overload exceptions.
Emergency Amp Rating. The emergency amp rating is used in balanced and by-phase
analysis and capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to display overload
exceptions.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Warehouse tab, expand Regulator Types. Double-click the name of the regulator type that
you want to edit.
User Guide
Weather
833
4
n the Regulator Type editor, under Summer Ratings (Amps) and Winter Ratings (Amps), specify
summer and winter values for the following:
-
Continuous. The continuous amp rating is used during SynerGEE analyses to calculate
the percent loading and to display overload exceptions.
Emergency. The emergency amp rating is used in balanced and by-phase analysis and
capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to display overload exceptions.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the Warehouse tab, expand Transformer Types. Double-click the name of the transformer type
that you want to edit.
In the Summer KVA Ratings and Winter KVA Ratings sections, specify summer and winter values
for the following:
Continuous. The continuous amp rating is used during SynerGEE analyses to calculate
the percent loading and to display overload exceptions.
Emergency. The emergency amp rating is used in balanced and by-phase analysis and
capacitor placement to flag overloaded sections and to display overload exceptions.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
User Guide
834
Weather
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new weather zone and then click OK.
Use the Weather Zone editor to edit the settings for the weather zone. For more information on the
options you can set, see Editing a weather zone on page 834.
User Guide
Weather
835
Expand Zones - Weather and then double-click the name of the weather zone that you want to edit.
Use the Weather Zone editor to set minimum and maximum limits for the following values:
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Next to Weather Zones, select the name of the weather zone that you want to assign to the section.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Zones - Weather and then select the name of the weather zone that you want to delete.
User Guide
836
User Guide
Weather
CHAPTER
19
Customer
Management Module
SynerGEEs Customer Management Module (CMM) allows you to use your customer information in
SynerGEE models. CMM takes customer information, distribution transformers, poles, monthly billing
records, hourly load records, and factors (diversity, load, and power) from a CSV file, processes the data, and
updates the SynerGEE model. The CSV file contains data taken out of your Customer Information System
(CIS database). SynerGEE can process these CSV files with the CMM wizard, or through a batch process
using a CMM script.
After CMM assigns customers to distribution transformers and sections in the model, calculates transformer
utilization, creates and assigns customer zones and classes, and performs other related tasks, it updates the
model. Using this data in a SynerGEE model allows a variety of functions, including the following:
Testing the feasibility of system changes, based on the number/type of customers affected.
Validating the accuracy of your current load models and load allocation methods.
Keeping track of customers and transformers in the model. Each customer can have its own
connection ID and be tied to the same transformer.
Checking customer phasing against a feeding distribution transformer. Phasing can differ from the
distribution transformer; phasing is set by the customer and retained in the CMM dataset.
Associating multiple projects with the same section. Each customer that is configured to a projecttype load will result in a separate project item on the Section editor.
You should note that customer data is never a permanent part of a model, but load data is updated in the
model. CMM uses tools to generate reports from the customer data and updates load data, as necessary.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
838
Save CSV file(s) containing CMM data to the Scripts folder. This type of data can include billing
records, customer information (name, address, class, and so on), distribution transformers, and
poles. The CSV file must contain data in MiddleLink format, a series of codes and commands that
point to, and gather data from, your Access, Oracle, or other databases. For more information on
the CMM MiddleLink commands, see Viewing CMM script commands on page 843.
Create a Data Source Alias (DSA) for the database target that will store CMM data. Add a CMM
DSA using the DSA wizard. For more information on creating a DSA, see The CMM and the DSA
on page 838.
Use the CMM wizard to import MiddleLink files, process data, and update the model. You can use
either the typical or automated process to accomplish these tasks, although the automatic process
requires more up-front configuration on your part. For more information, see Using the CMM
Wizard on page 839 and Automating the CMM process on page 842.
Use the SQL Dashboard to run queries on the CMM database tables. For more information on the
SQL Dashboard, see CMM and the SQL Dashboard on page 849.
At the left end of the SynerGEE ribbon bar, click the Pole icon and then select Data Sources.
In the Data Sources editor, click Add to create a new DSA. Through the Add Data Sources wizard,
you will create a name for your DSA, specify the path to the file, and specify the contents of the data
source.
Highlight a DSA and click Edit to reconfigure an existing DSA. The Edit DSA wizard allows you to
change the name, path, and contents of the DSA.
User Guide
839
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
The options in the CMM wizard are separated into three categories: Typical CMM Process,
Automation, and Maintenance. Refer to the topics listed below for more information on the options
that are available in each of these categories.
-
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
On the first page of the CMM wizard, under Typical CMM Process, select Import MiddleLink file(s)
into a CMM data set. Click Next to continue.
User Guide
840
On the next page of the wizard, select the Source MiddleLink file (the file you will import data from)
and the Target database (the file you will import the data to). Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select a data set within your target database where the imported
data will be saved. You can also create and delete data sets from this page of the wizard.
-
To create a data set: Type a Name and Description for the new data set, and then click
Add. Click Yes to confirm the addition.
To delete a data set: Select the name of the data set that you want to delete, and then click
Delete. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Once you have selected the data set where you want to save the imported data, click Next to
continue.
5
On the next page of the wizard, confirm that the source database and the target data set are correct.
You can also select from the following options:
-
Click Finish to begin importing the data. When the import is complete, the CMM Operations
Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that were performed. After reviewing
this report, click OK to close the window and return to the CMM wizard.
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
On the first page of the CMM wizard, under Typical CMM Process, select Process CMM data set
bills, loads, etc. Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the Source database and Data set that contains the data
you want to process. Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the Data set that contains the billing records that you want to
process. You may also do the following:
User Guide
841
Select the Process all billing records check box to process all records within the data set.
Or, you can clear the check box and select a specific date range for the records you want
to process.
Select whether you want to process demand bills, usage bills, or both. Available choices
are Prefer demand bills, Prefer usage bills, or Combine bills.
On the next page of the wizard, under Coincidence calculations, select from one of the following
options:
-
No coincidence. SynerGEE will not use curves, but will sum up customer load and ignore
customers of common class.
Coincidence by transformer. SynerGEE will look for customers belonging to the same
class who are attached to the same transformer, and apply the coincidence factor for each
group of customers.
Coincidence by data set. SynerGEE will calculate customer count by class for all
customers in the data set and apply coincidence for the customer totals.
In addition, under Undesignated load types, specify undesignated spot loads and large customer
loads. Click Next to continue.
6
Click Finish to begin processing the data. When the data processing is complete, the CMM
Operations Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that were performed. After
reviewing this report, click OK to close the window and return to the CMM wizard.
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
On the first page of the CMM wizard, under Typical CMM Process, select Update model loads with
a CMM data set. Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the Source database and Data set that contains the data
you want to use to update your model. Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select from a series of options that will instruct SynerGEE on how to
update the model. The following categories are available:
-
Add to model loads. Use this set of options to select which load types will be used to
update the model. Available choices are Distributed loads, Spot loads, Large customers,
and Projects.
User Guide
842
Initialize model loads. Use this set of options to specify which, if any, loads you would like
to zero out or delete. Available choices are Distributed loads, Spot loads, Large customers,
and Projects. Your selections do not need to correspond to the options you selected in the
Add to model loads category.
Values to modify. Use this set of options to specify which, if any, values you would like to
update. Typically, kW, kvar will be among your selections. There are certain situations in
which only connected values need to be updated.
Click Finish to begin updating the data. When the update is complete, the CMM Operations
Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that were performed. After reviewing
this report, click OK to close the window.
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
From the first page of the CMM wizard, under Automation, select Run CMM Script. Click Next to
continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the name of the script you want to run. This page of the
wizard includes several options that allow you to create and edit CMM scripts, as described below.
User Guide
To edit a script in SynerGEE: Select the script name and then click Edit. The SynerGEE
script window opens, where you can add and delete commands from the script. For more
information on working in the script editor, see Using the Script Editor on page 725.
To edit a script in Notepad: Select the script name and then click Notepad. The CMM
script in MiddleLink format will open in the Notepad application. Once you have edited the
script, select File > Save in Notepad to save the modified script.
To create a new script: Type the script name in the text box in the wizard and then click
Edit (to write the script in SynerGEE) or Notepad (to write the script in Notepad).
843
When you are ready to run the script, select the script name and click Next.
4
On the next page of the wizard, confirm that you have selected the script you want to run, and then
click Finish to run the script.
The CMM process does not have to be completely manual or completely based on scripts. It often
makes sense to use a combination of scripts and manual steps with the CMM wizard.
In the Tools group, click the text label Schemas and then select Supporting Data > Customer
(CMM).
The list of CMM commands and field parameters appears in a new SynerGEE window. Use this list
as a reference when you write CMM scripts. The following table summarizes the CMM commands
that are available in SynerGEE:
Command
Purpose
10100
10101
Import a CMM data file into a data set. SynerGEE will create the data set if it
does not already exist.
10102
10103
10104
User Guide
844
User Guide
Command
Purpose
10107
10108
Specify start and end dates for bill processing. If this record is not indicated in
the script, SynerGEE will process all bills in the data set.
10109
Process a coincidence.
10110
10112
10113
10114
10117
10118
Specify whether error records will be generated for customers that have no
bills.
10120
10130
10131
10132
10190
10201
10202
10203
10204
10205
10208
10209
10212
10213
10214
10215
10220
10221
10230
845
Command
Purpose
10231
10232
10233
10301
10302
10303
10304
10306
10312
10314
10315
10317
10318
10501
10505
10507
10510
10515
10517
10518
99832331, Res 2
99832331, Johnson, Fred
99832331, 1602, Brook St., Newville
DT3984621
DT3984621, Cstr_32231
99832331, DT3984621
User Guide
846
Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\CustomerConnectivity.csv
Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\June07.csv
Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\July07.csv
Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\August07.csv
Dist2Sum07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\September07.csv
Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\CustomerConnectivity.csv
Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\October07.csv
Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\November07.csv
Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\December07.csv
Dist2Fall07, D:\BillingData\Dist2\January08.csv
Using the model in memory to update data set connectivity on page 848
User Guide
847
assignments report chapter, customer information does not need to be loaded into the model in order to run
this report.
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
On the first page of the CMM wizard, under Maintenance, select Report on CMM data set. Click
Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the Source database and Data set that contains the data
you want to report. Click Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the report chapters that you want to generate. Available
choices are as follows:
Click Finish to generate the report. The report will be created as a separate SynerGEE window and
include the report chapters that you selected in the wizard.
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
On the first page of the CMM wizard, under Maintenance, select Create / destroy data sets. Click
Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the database that you want to work with. Click Next to
continue.
On the next page of the wizard, perform the following tasks to create or destroy data sets:
-
To create a data set, type a Name and Description for the new data set, and then click
Add. Click Yes to confirm the addition.
To delete a data set, select the name of the data set that you want to delete, and then click
Delete. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
User Guide
848
Click Finish to exit the CMM wizard. A CMM report window will open in SynerGEE, displaying all
available report chapters from the Report on CMM data set option in the CMM wizard.
Tip:
If you do not want to view the report, you can click Back to return to the first page of the
CMM wizard. The edits you made to the data sets will be saved.
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
On the first page of the CMM wizard, under Maintenance, select Merge data sets. Click Next to
continue.
On the next page of the wizard, select the database that you want to work with. Click Next to
continue.
On the upper half of the page, select the data set that you want to merge data into.
On the lower half of the page, select the data set that you want to copy data out of.
On the next page of the wizard, confirm that the database, the target data set, and the source data
set are correct.
Click Finish to merge the data sets. When the merge is complete, the CMM Operations Complete
window will appear, providing details on the actions that were performed. After reviewing this report,
click OK to close the window and return to the CMM wizard.
Perform the following steps to open the Customer Management Module wizard:
a
On the first page of the CMM wizard, under Maintenance, select Use model in memory to update
data set connectivity. Click Next.
User Guide
849
On the next page of the wizard, select the database and data set that you want to work with. Click
Next to continue.
On the next page of the wizard, confirm the options you have selected on the previous page of the
wizard, and then click Finish to perform the update. When the update is complete, the CMM
Operations Complete window will appear, providing details on the actions that were performed. After
reviewing this report, click OK to close the window and return to the CMM wizard.
Queries can be run individually or as a group. If you write multiple queries but wish to run one at a time, place
your cursor on the desired query and click Run Selection. Click Run to run the query as a group. With
multiple SELECT commands, the SQL Dashboard will run the last SELECT statement only. For more
information on SQL commands, see Common SQL commands on page 780.
Results from a query can be opened in Excel for further sorting and editing. From the CONTROLS tab in the
SynerGEE ribbon bar (visible when viewing a SQL Dashboard window), click Open in Excel.
User Guide
850
This query first determines the number of customers in the customer table:
SELECT COUNT (*) FROM @CMM@Customers;
The next query determines the number of customers assigned to spot loads:
SELECT SUM(Ph1Cust+Ph2Cust+Ph3Cust) FROM @CMM@ResSpot;
The last query determines the number of customers assigned to distributed loads:
SELECT SUM(Ph1Cust+Ph2Cust+Ph3Cust) FROM @CMM@ResDist;
This query results in 210,595 customers. The total of spot and distributed load customers is
316,917, the same as the number of customers in the customer table.
Following are more useful queries that apply to the CMM, which can be modified based on your own needs:
The following query lists all customers tied to a particular distribution transformer:
SELECT LastName AS Name, Address, City, CustClassId AS Class ID
DRanId AS Transformer FROM @CMM@Customers WHERE DTranID =
N0027EG4100
ORDER BY LastName ASC;
The following query lists distribution transformers with utilization factors over 70%:
SELECT DTranId, SectionID, UtilFac FROM @CMM@DISTTRANS WHERE UtilFac >
0.7
User Guide
CHAPTER
20
Economics
SynerGEEs Economics module focuses on the economics of engineering. This module provides a venue for
many important tools to study distribution systems in light of Smart Grid, Applied Intelligence, and alternative
energy options.
The Economics module focuses on maintenance costs, as opposed to capital costs. The trend in the electric
utility industry seems to be moving toward the operations side as being responsible for maintenance costs
and issues. The Economics module is designed to determine the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of
maintenance on feeders and substations.
To set up your model for economic analysis, you must create cost zones, and assign them to applicable
sections in your model. Cost zones define maintenance costs for feeders and substations, as well as cost
multipliers for fuses, equipment, distribution transformers, and customers. Cost zones are created as
individual devices in your equipment warehouse and then assigned to the sections in your model. For more
information, see Managing Cost Zones on page 851.
Once these tasks have been performed, you are ready to perform an economic analysis on your model. For
more information, see Economic Analysis on page 597.
User Guide
852
Economics
In the Enter Device ID dialog box, type a name for the new cost zone and then click OK.
Use the Cost Zone editor to edit the settings for the cost zone. For more information on the options
you can set, see Editing a cost zone on page 852.
Expand Zones - Cost and then double-click the name of the cost zone that you want to edit.
Maintenance Cost
Multipliers
Color
Fuses
Equipment
Dist. Trans.
Customers
Specifies a color that will represent any sections where this cost
zone has been applied, when the SynerGEE map displays color
by scheme is set to Cost Zones. The color is also shown in the
list of cost zones in the Model tab of the model explorer.
For more information on applying color by schemes, see
Selecting a Coloring Scheme for Sections on page 216.
User Guide
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Economics
853
In the SynerGEE map display or model explorer, double-click on the section that you want to edit.
Next to Cost Zones, select the name of the cost zone that you want to assign to the section.
Click Apply to accept your changes, and then click X to close the editor.
Expand Zones - Cost and then select the name of the cost zone that you want to delete.
User Guide
854
User Guide
Economics
APPENDIX
A
Numerical Recipe
Commands
The topics listed below provide information on the numerical recipe command format that is available in
SynerGEE. For general information on setting up recipes and recipe files, see Recipe Scripts on page 700.
For information on the text-based recipe command format, see Text-Based Recipe Commands on
page 907.
User Guide
856
Name
Type
Description
Message
string
The following is an example of the 3010 recipe command, as well as the message box that will be displayed
when this command example is run.
3010, Will now run load-flow!
User Guide
857
Name
Type
Description
EXE path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the EXE
file that you want to launch with this command.
If the application is properly registered in your
system, you may be able to omit the full path to the
EXE, and even the EXE extension itself.
Command line
string
Boolean
Launch a second instance of SynerGEE and run the MyRecipe recipe on startup:
3030, "C:\Program Files\SynerGEE Electric 5.0\SynerGEE.exe", -r
MyRecipe, 0
User Guide
858
Name
Type
Description
string
Name of the sound file that you want to run. The file
must be a valid WAV file (*.wav) and must be stored in
your main SynerGEE documents folder.
Name
Type
Description
File path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the HTML file
that you want to open.
Name
Type
Description
File path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the file that
you want to delete.
User Guide
859
User Guide
860
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Data type
double
User Guide
Provider
double
0 Model
1 Equipment
2 Partial
3 Subset
4 Results
5 ML Table
6 Events
7 Version
8 CMM
9 Custom
10 Mining
11 Data Mart
0 Access
1 Oracle
2 SQL Svr
3 Binary
4 MiddleLink
5 MiddleLink 3.4
9 MultiSpeak
Field
4
861
Name
Type
Description
Server/path
string
User name
(optional)
string
Password
(optional)
string
Model ID (optional)
string
Custom table
(optional)
string
The following list provides several examples of the 3050 recipe command.
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
User Guide
862
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Feeder list
(optional)
string
Lock feeders
(optional)
Boolean
User Guide
863
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Keep feeders
locked (optional)
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
User Guide
864
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
Category (optional)
string
config Configurations
gen Generators
motor Motors
reg Regulators
switch Switches
tran Transformers
weather Weather
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Field
2
865
Name
Type
Description
Category (optional)
string
config Configurations
gen Generators
motor Motors
reg Regulators
switch Switches
tran Transformers
weather Weather
Name
Type
Description
Path (optional)
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the protection
database. If you do not specify a value, SynerGEE
searches for the normal SynProtectionDb.mdb file in
your SynerGEE installation folder.
User Guide
866
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Report
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
Path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the regression
file that will be created. Regression files typically use
the suffix SYNREG.
Name
Type
Description
Path 1
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the first
regression file that will be compared. Regression files
typically use the suffix SYNREG.
Path 2
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the second
regression file that will be compared. Regression files
typically use the suffix SYNREG.
User Guide
Field
3
867
Name
Type
Description
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
User Guide
868
Field
Name
Type
Description
Type
double
Name
string
1 Distributed loads
2 Spot loads
4 Switches
5 Elbows
6 Meters
7 Capacitors
8 Large customers
9 Mobile items
10 Query set
11 Regulators
12 Projects
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
869
Field
Name
Type
Description
Type
double
Name
string
1 Distributed loads
2 Spot loads
4 Switches
5 Elbows
6 Meters
7 Capacitors
8 Large customers
9 Mobile items
10 Query set
11 Regulators
12 Projects
User Guide
870
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Table
string
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
File
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
File
string
871
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Report
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Report
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
Name
string
Path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the document
that you want to add to the document library.
User Guide
872
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
Open in dialog
Boolean
0 Window
1 Dialog
Name
Type
Description
Group
string
Name
string
Target DSA
string
Data type
double
User Guide
string
0 CMM
1 Equipment
2 Events
3 Mining
4 Model
5 Pi
6 Subset
7 Results
8 Data Mart
9 Historian
Field
6
873
Name
Type
Description
Export type
(optional)
Boolean
CSV path
(optional)
string
0 Save as CSV
1 Open in Excel
User Guide
874
Name
Type
Description
Title
string
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
Over/Under
string
Over
Under
Field
4
875
Name
Type
Description
double
Line width
(optional)
double
1 None
2 Dashed
3 Dotted
4 Dash-dot
5 Dash-dot-dot
6 Solid
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
Cond type
string
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
User Guide
876
Field
Name
Type
Description
Color
string
Result
string
Min
double
Max
double
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
877
Field
Name
Type
Description
Result1
string
Min
double
Max
double
Result2
string
Min
double
Max
double
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
Result1
string
Result2
string
Min
double
Max
double
User Guide
878
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
Result1
string
Result2
string
Min
double
Max
double
Consider the case where you want to isolate and color sections that fall within a particular connected kVA per
foot range. In this case, you could use the 3108 command, such as in the following example:
3108, Loading density 1, Purple, ConnKva, Length, 0.3, 1.5
This example command takes the connected kVA of each section and divides it by the respective length,
producing a kVA/ft value. If the value falls within the specified range (0.3 to 1.5), the section will be colored
purple.
User Guide
879
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
Prefix
string
Name
Type
Description
Display style
string
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
User Guide
880
Field
Name
Type
Description
Color
string
Name
Type
Description
Geobackground
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Legend text
string
Color
string
Delta/neutral
string
Delta
Neutral
Field
4
881
Name
Type
Description
double
Line width
(optional)
double
1 None
2 Dashed
3 Dotted
4 Dash-dot
5 Dash-dot-dot
6 Solid
3231 Setting a single load multiplier as the growth option on page 887
3232 Setting different load multipliers as the growth option on page 888
3250 Setting fault levels in the fault location application on page 889
User Guide
882
3251 Specifying fault types in the fault location application on page 889
Name
Type
Description
App name
string
Report
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
Script name
string
Report
Boolean
For more information on the model cleanup tool, see Model Cleanup Scripts on page 718.
User Guide
883
Name
Type
Description
Script name
string
Report
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
Path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the SVG file
that you want to export. If you do not specify a fully
qualified path, the file will be created in your SynerGEE
installation directory.
Report
Boolean
User Guide
884
Name
Type
Description
Path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the Model
Viewer file that you want to export. If you do not specify
a fully qualified path, the file will be created in your
SynerGEE installation directory.
Report
Boolean
Title (optional)
string
Name
Type
Description
Script name
string
Report
Boolean
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Recipe name
string
885
The following is an example of the 3207 recipe command. Three recipes are presented here. The first recipe,
Script_Analysis, runs two SynerGEE analyses, while the second recipe, Script_Coloring, applies coloring
schemes to the SynerGEE map display. The third recipe, Scripts_Combined, uses the 3207 recipe command
to run the other two recipes.
Recipe: Script_Analysis
--------------------3200, Load flow, 0
3200, Reliability, 0
Recipe: Script_Coloring
------------------------3100, My Map Colors
3101, No Criteria, White
3104, Target kva, Red, ConnKva, 50, 75
3104, Good Volts, Green, VoltsOut, 120, 122
3104, Mid Length, Purple, Length, 500, 1000
3102, Undgd, Yellow, Under
3102, 336 stuff, Blue, 336 ACSR
3104, 2 < SAIFI < 4, DarkOrange, SAIFI, 2.0, 4.0
3109, My Sects, Purple, 21
Recipe: Scripts_Combined
---------------------3207, Script_Analysis
3207, Script_Coloring
Name
Type
Description
Path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the file that
you want to save. If you do not specify a fully qualified
path, the file will be created in your SynerGEE
installation directory.
Type
string
CSV
HTML
No Frames
No TOC
User Guide
886
Name
Type
Description
Year
string
Analysis year that you want to set for the model. Use 0
for the base year, or 1 through 10 for each subsequent
year.
Name
Type
Description
Script name
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Settings name
string
Load
Boolean
0 Save
1 Load
887
Name
Type
Description
Option
double
0 No growth rate
To select the Load Multiplier option as the growth option, see 3231 Setting a single load multiplier as the
growth option on page 887 and 3232 Setting different load multipliers as the growth option on page 888.
Name
Type
Description
Load multiplier
double
To set individual multiplier values for each load category, see 3232 Setting different load multipliers as the
growth option on page 888. To select other options as the growth option, see 3230 Setting the growth
option on page 887.
User Guide
888
Name
Type
Description
Distributed load
multiplier
double
double
Large customer
load multiplier
double
Project load
multiplier
double
Speculative load
multiplier
double
To select other options as the growth option, see 3230 Setting the growth option on page 887.
Name
Type
Description
Is On
Boolean
User Guide
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Month (optional)
string
Month that you want to set. Enter this value as the full
spelling of the desired month (January, February, etc.).
double
0 Weekend
1 Weekday
2 Peakday
Field
4
889
Name
Type
Description
Hour (optional)
string
6 = 6:00 AM
6PM = 6:00 PM
12 = Noon
12PM = Midnight
Name
Type
Description
Value 0
double
Value 1
double
Value 2
double
Neutral
double
User Guide
890
Name
Type
Description
Line-grnd
Boolean
Line-line
Three-phase
Line-line-grnd
(optional)
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
3300 Setting a custom result for all sections in memory on page 890
3301 Setting a custom result for a single section in the model on page 891
User Guide
891
Use the 3300 recipe command to set the same value for one of the custom results slots for every section in
the model. The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Slot
long
Value
double
Name
Type
Description
Section ID
string
Slot
long
Value
double
Name
Type
Description
Section ID
string
User Guide
892
Field
Name
Type
Description
Device
string
Is Open
Boolean
Sw Switch
Br Breaker
Re Recloser
Se Sectionalizer
Fu Fuse
0 Closed
1 Open
Name
Type
Description
Section ID
string
From / To
string
Is Open
Boolean
0 Closed
1 Open
User Guide
893
Name
Type
Description
Results set
string
Target DSA
string
Replace, Empty,
Append
string
For more information on the results import/export process, see Importing and exporting analysis results on
page 452.
3501 Opening the Section editor for the selected section on page 894
3502 Tracing the selected section to its source and adding the results to the query set on
page 894
3504 Selecting the section with a highest or lowest result on page 895
User Guide
894
3511 Adding sections identified by substring to the query set on page 896
Name
Type
Description
Section ID
string
User Guide
Use the 3503 recipe command if you want to clear the query set before running this command. For
more information, see 3503 Clearing the query set on page 895.
895
Name
Type
Description
Result
string
LT / GT
string
LT Lowest result
GT Highest result
Name
Type
Description
Feeder ID
string
Name
Type
Description
Feeder ID
string
User Guide
896
Name
Type
Description
Min value / ph
double
Use the 3503 recipe command if you want to clear the query set before running this command. For
more information, see 3503 Clearing the query set on page 895.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Substring
string
Field
2
897
Name
Type
Description
Check ID
Boolean
Check location
(optional)
Boolean
User Guide
898
Name
Type
Description
Section ID
string
User Guide
899
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Item name
string
User Guide
900
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Item name
string
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the file you
want to load.
Item name
string
User Guide
901
Name
Type
Description
Module
string
plan Planning
harm Harmonics
motor Motors
switch Switching
pub Publishing
prot Protection
reli Reliability
mid MiddleLink
cable Cable
cmm CMM
User Guide
902
Name
Type
Description
Module
string
plan Planning
harm Harmonics
motor Motors
switch Switching
pub Publishing
prot Protection
reli Reliability
mid MiddleLink
cable Cable
cmm CMM
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Script name
string
903
Name
Type
Description
Script name
string
AntiqueWhite
Aquamarine
Azure
Beige
Bisque
Black
BlanchedAlmond
Blue
BlueViolet
Brown
Burlywood
CadetBlue
Chartreuse
Chocolate
Coral
CornflowerBlue
Cornsilk
Cyan
DarkGoldenrod
DarkGreen
DarkKhaki
DarkOliveGreen
DarkOrange
DarkOrchid
DarkSalmon
DarkSeaGreen
DarkSlateBlue
DarkSlateGray
DarkTurquoise
DarkViolet
DeepPink
DeepSkyBlue
DodgerBlue
Firebrick
FloralWhite
ForestGreen
Gainsboro
GhostWhite
Gold
Goldenrod
Gray
Gray0
Gray1
Gray2
Gray3
Gray4
Gray5
Gray6
Gray7
Gray8
Gray9
Gray10-Gray99
Green
GreenYellow
Honeydew
User Guide
904
HotPink
IndianRed
Ivory
Khaki
Lavender
LavenderBlush
LawnGreen
LemonChiffon
LightBlue
LightCoral
LightCyan
LightGoldenrod
LightGoldenrodYellow
LightGray
LightPink
LightSalmon
LightSeaGreen
LightSkyBlue
LightSlateBlue
LightSlateGray
LightSteelBlue
LightYellow
LimeGreen
Linen
Magenta
Maroon
MediumAquamarine
MediumBlue
MediumOrchid
MediumPurple
MediumSeaGreen
MediumSlateBlue
MediumSpringGreen
MediumTurquoise
MediumVioletRed
MidnightBlue
MintCream
MistyRose
Moccasin
NavajoWhite
NavyBlue
OldLace
OliveDrab
Orange
OrangeRed
Orchid
PaleGoldenrod
PaleGreen
PaleTurquoise
PaleVioletRed
PapayaWhip
PeachPuff
Peru
Pink
Plum
PowderBlue
Purple
Red
RosyBrown
RoyalBlue
SaddleBrown
Salmon
SandyBrown
SeaGreen
Seashell
Sienna
SkyBlue
SlateBlue
SlateGray
Snow
SpringGreen
SteelBlue
Tan
Thistle
Tomato
Turquoise
Violet
VioletRed
Wheat
White
Yellow
YellowGreen
accvolts
ampsin
ampsinto
conncust
connkva
connkvathr
connkwh
custthr
distance
kvarin
kvarinto
kvarloss
kvarlossinto
kwin
kwinto
kwloss
kwlossinto
length
maifi
milesthr
neutralamps
nomvolts
pctloading
pctpfinto
phgmax
phgmin
phph
User Guide
905
saidi
saifi
slot1 *
slot2 *
slot3 *
slot4 *
spotkvar
spotkw
symfault
symground
voltdrop
voltsout
*The slots are customizable values that you control with 3300 and 3301 records and then call from other
recipe commands like the normal SynerGEE-generated results.
fault
check coord
reliability
allocation
locked rotor
multiyear
facility sel
motor start
network loadflow
network fault
design cond
design reg
node reduction
contingency
harmonic
fault location
arc flashover
time range
User Guide
906
User Guide
APPENDIX
B
Text-Based Recipe
Commands
The topics listed below provide information on the text-based recipe commands that are available in
SynerGEE. For general information on setting up recipes and recipe files, see Recipe Scripts on page 700.
For information on the older numerical style recipe commands, see Numerical Recipe Commands on
page 855.
User Guide
908
ANALYSIS COMMANDS
The Analysis recipe commands include commands that you can use to run a cleanup script, view the Check
Data and Topology reports, and close report windows. Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
Analysis.RunCleanupScript
Use the Analysis.RunCleanupScript recipe command to run a Model Cleanup script on the model in memory.
It is important to note that this recipe command will automatically commit any changes to the model. This
differs from running a Model Cleanup script manually, where you are given the option to accept the changes
or just view a report of the changes.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the model
cleanup script that you want to run.
Report
Boolean
Analysis.CloseAllReports
Use the Analysis.CloseAllReports recipe command to close all open report windows in SynerGEE. This
command performs the same task as pressing the F10 button in your SynerGEE session, or clicking the
Close All Reports button from the CONTROLS tab of any Report view window.
This command does not require any inputs.
User Guide
909
Analysis.CheckData
Use the Analysis.CheckData recipe command to generate a Check Data report. The Check Data report,
which is a part of the Digest report, presents the findings of a full evaluation of the model data in memory,
including checks for topological errors and data mismatches.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
string
For more information on the Check Data report, see Check Data report on page 137.
Analysis.Topology
Use the Analysis.Topology recipe command to generate a Topology report. The Topology report, which is a
part of the Digest report, provides a comprehensive look at your model from a topology and connectivity
standpoint, including data such as node information, equipment locations, and section orientation.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
string
CMM COMMANDS
The CMM recipe commands include commands that you can use to run a CMM script. Refer to the topics
listed below for more information.
User Guide
910
Cmm.RunScript
Use the Cmm.RunScript recipe command to run a CMM script on the model in memory. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the CMM
script that you want to run.
Report
Boolean
CONTINGENCY COMMANDS
Use the Contingency recipe commands to run a Contingency analysis. Refer to the topics listed below for
more information.
Contingency.Run
Use the Contingency.Run recipe command to run a Contingency analysis on the model in memory. The
inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Show Report
Boolean
User Guide
911
FaultLoc.FaultsToConsider
Use the FaultLoc.FaultsToConsider recipe command to select which fault types will be analyzed in the Fault
Location analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the corresponding check
boxes in the Faults to consider section of the Fault Location Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
LG
Boolean
LL
3Ph
LLG
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
FaultLoc.Run
Use the FaultLoc.Run recipe command to run a Fault Location analysis on the model in memory. Note that
before you run a Fault Location analysis, it is recommended that you do the following:
Set a section in your model for analysis. Although you can set a section for analysis manually before
starting your recipe script, you can also use one of several recipe commands to set the section to
analyze. For more information, see Model.SetAnalysisSection on page 930,
Model.SetAnalysisSectionByFirstBreaker on page 931, or Model.AnalysisSection on page 933.
User Guide
912
Select which fault types will be considered by the analysis. Again, while this can be set manually
before the script is run, you can also use a recipe command to select the fault types that will be
considered. For more information, see FaultLoc.FaultsToConsider on page 911.
Set fault amps for each phase for the analysis, either manually or by using a recipe command. For
more information, see FaultLoc.SetFaultAmps on page 912.
Other analysis settings are used as configured in the Fault Location Analysis editor. For more information,
see Setting up a fault location analysis on page 656.
The inputs for the FaultLoc.Run command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Show Report
Boolean
FaultLoc.SetFaultAmps
Use the FaultLoc.SetFaultAmps recipe command to set the known fault levels for each phase for the Fault
Location analysis. This command performs the same task as setting the corresponding values in the Fault
level information section of the Fault Location Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Amps Phase 1
double
Amps Phase 2
double
Amps Phase 3
double
Amps Neutral
double
FILE COMMANDS
Use the File recipe commands to write text to a specified file. Refer to the topics listed below for more
information.
User Guide
913
File.WriteLine
Use the File.WriteLine recipe command to write a specified text string to a specified file. This command can
be used on a number of different file formats, including TXT files and DOC files. To prevent the loss of data,
the script will not write the text string to the designated file when a lock file is detected. As an option, you can
configure this command to wait for a designated time period for the lock file to close. After the time period has
expired, if the lock file is still present, the script will continue without writing the text string to the file.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
File path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the file that
you want to write to.
Text
string
Boolean
Wait time in
seconds (optional)
long
User Guide
914
Recipe.Start
Use the Recipe.Start recipe command to indicate the beginning of a new style recipe with text-based recipe
commands. A script with text-based recipe commands will not work if the Recipe.Start command is not
included.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Title (optional)
string
Recipe.StartAutomated
Use the Recipe.StartAutomated recipe command to indicate the beginning of an automated recipe script. A
script with text-based and automated recipe commands will not work if the Recipe.StartAutomated command
is not included.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Title (optional)
string
Recipe.End
Use the Recipe.End recipe command to indicate the end of a new style recipe with text-based recipe
commands. This command does not require any inputs.
User Guide
915
LoadAlloc.Run
Use the LoadAlloc.Run recipe command to run a Load Allocation analysis. The inputs for this command are
described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Show Report
Boolean
LoadFlow.Run
Use the LoadFlow.Run recipe command to run a Load Flow analysis. The inputs for this command are
described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Show Report
Boolean
LIST COMMANDS
The list-related recipe commands are used to form lists for other recipe commands. Refer to the topics listed
below for more information.
User Guide
916
ScriptList.Create
Use the ScriptList.Create recipe command to create a list for use in your recipe script. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
ScriptList.Destroy
Use the ScriptList.Destroy recipe command to destroy, or deallocate, a list. If you use long lists or multiple
lists, this command is recommended to release memory after you are finished with the list.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
ScriptList.Empty
Use the ScriptList.Empty recipe command to clear all items from a list. Unlike the ScriptList.Destroy
command, which completely destroys the list, the ScriptList.Empty command leaves the empty list intact in
case you want to continue using it.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
917
ScriptList.AddItem
Use the ScriptList.AddItem recipe command to add an item to a list. The inputs for this command are
described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Item name
string
ScriptList.RemoveItem
Use the ScriptList.RemoveItem recipe command to remove an item from a list. The inputs for this command
are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Item name
string
ScriptList.LoadFromFile
Use the ScriptList.LoadFromFile recipe command to load items into a list from a specified file. The inputs for
this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
List name
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the file you
want to load.
Item name
string
MAP COMMANDS
Use the Map recipe commands to perform tasks related to the SynerGEE map display. Refer to the topics
listed below for more information.
For additional map commands, see Model I/O Commands on page 918.
Map.ZoomNetwork
Use the Map.ZoomNetwork recipe command to zoom the SynerGEE map display to the network bounds of
the selected feeders. This command does not require any inputs.
User Guide
918
ModelForge.RunProcess
Use the ModelForge.RunProcess recipe command to run a specified Model Forge script. This command will
run the entire script. An optional Boolean parameter can be used to run the script directly in the model in
memory, or run the script in a temporary model that is then merged with the model in memory.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for Model Forge
script file you want to run.
Immediately merge
(optional)
string
DataHammer.SigedMidway
The DataHammer.SigedMidway recipe command is not intended for general use, and thus it is not
documented here.
User Guide
919
DSA.Create
Use the DSA.Create recipe command to create a data source alias (DSA). If the DSA already exists (by
name), this command has differing effects depending on which parameters you select. For example, if the
DSA exists as a link to an Access database and you use the DSA.Create command to link the DSA as an
Oracle database, then the DSA will be linked to an Access database. However, if the DSA is already
configured for Model data and you use the DSA.Create command to configure the DSA for Equipment data,
then the DSA will be configured for both Model data and Equipment data.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table. For more information on DSAs, see Data
Source Aliases (DSAs) on page 75.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
User Guide
920
Field
Name
Type
Description
Type
string
Provider
Server/path
string
string
0 Model
1 Equipment
2 Partial
3 Subset
4 Results
5 ML Table
6 Events
7 Version
8 CMM
9 Custom
10 Mining
11 Data Mart
0 Access
1 Oracle
2 SQL Server
3 Binary
4 MiddleLink
5 MiddleLink 3.4
6 MultiSpeak
User Guide
Model ID (optional)
string
Field
921
Name
Type
Description
User Name
(optional)
string
Password
(optional)
string
Custom table
(optional)
string
DSA.Delete
Use the DSA.Delete recipe command to delete a specified DSA. The inputs for this command are described
in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
DSA.DropModel
Use the DSA.DropModel recipe command to initialize an Oracle or SQL database by deleting all of the
model data (feeders, sections, devices, and so on) from it. This command may be useful, for example, when
you are running Model Forge and you want to delete the existing data from a specified database before you
save the Model Forge data to it.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Drop Tables
Boolean
User Guide
922
Field
Name
Type
Description
Prompt
Boolean
DSA.DropSubstation
Use the DSA.DropSubstation recipe command to delete a substation and all associated model data (feeders,
sections, devices, and so on) from a specified Oracle or SQL Server DSA. An optional suffix can be provided
to delete multiple substations that all start with the same sequence of characters.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Substation name
string
Suffix (optional)
string
DSA.DeleteFeeder
Use the DSA.DeleteFeeder recipe command to delete a specified feeder from a specified DSA. The inputs
for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Feeder
string
DSA.DeleteFeederList
Use the DSA.DeleteFeederList recipe command to delete multiple feeders, as identified by a script list. The
inputs for this command are described in the following table. For more information on script lists, see List
User Guide
923
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
List name
string
DSA.ExecStoredProc
Use the DSA.ExecStoredProc recipe command to call a stored procedure from an Oracle or SQL Server
database. You can optionally specify up to three parameters with this recipe command.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Stored procedure
name
string
Parameter 1 type
(optional)
double
0 text
1 integer
2 float
Parameter 1
(optional)
string
Parameter 2 type
(optional)
double
Parameter 2
(optional)
string
0 text
1 integer
2 float
User Guide
924
Field
7
Name
Type
Description
Parameter 3 type
(optional)
double
Parameter 3
(optional)
string
0 text
1 integer
2 float
DSA.LoadFeeders
Use the DSA.LoadFeeders recipe command to load multiple feeders, as identified by an optional script list. If
you do not provide a script list name, then the default feeders for the specified DSA will be loaded.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table. For more information on script lists, see
List Commands on page 915.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Feeder list
(optional)
string
Lock feeders
(optional)
Boolean
User Guide
925
DSA.LoadSubBySection
Use the DSA.LoadSubBySection recipe command to load the substation that is associated with a specified
section name in a specified DSA. The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Section ID
string
Lock feeders
(optional)
Boolean
DSA.LoadModelBySub
Use the DSA.LoadModelBySub recipe command to load feeders and subtrans from a specified DSA that are
associated with a specified substation name. The inputs for this command are described in the following
table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Subsection ID
string
Lock feeders
(optional)
Boolean
User Guide
926
DSA.LoadWarehouse
Use the DSA.LoadWarehouse recipe command to load equipment data. The inputs for this command are
described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
DSA.ResultsSetSave
Use the DSA.ResultsSetSave recipe command to export a results set to a database. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Table to Create
string
string
Name of the results set file that contains the data you
want to save to the specified table in the target data
source. Results set files are saved in your Output file
directory after an analysis is run. For this parameter,
specify the name of the results set file only for
example, LFlow_Balanced. Do not specify the path to
the results set file or the file extension for the file (which
is *.BRF).
For information on locating and editing your Output file
directory, see Defining file paths on page 167.
Field to Export
(optional)
string
DSA.SaveFeeders
Use the DSA.SaveFeeders recipe command to save all feeders in memory to the specified DSA. The current
feeder selection does not affect this command.
User Guide
927
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Keep locked
(optional)
Boolean
DSA.TestConnection
Use the DSA.TestConnection recipe command to test the connection to the data source defined within a
specified DSA. This performs the same task as clicking the Test Connection button on the second page of
the Edit Data Source wizard.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
DSA.ExportLastReport
Use the DSA.ExportLastReport recipe command to export the most recent report to a database file. This is
equivalent to clicking the Export to database button on the CONTROLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
Name of the DSA that you want to export the data to. In
the SynerGEE DSA editor, this is the value entered in
the Description field.
User Guide
928
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
Export type
string
Tag (optional)
string
Detailed chapters
Boolean
0 Exclude
1 Include
Include year
column (optional)
Boolean
0 Excluded
1 Include
DSA.ExportLastReport2
Use the DSA.ExportLastReport2 recipe command to export the most recent report to either CSV or HTML
format. This is equivalent to clicking the Export button on the CONTROLS tab in the SynerGEE ribbon bar.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Export path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the file you
want to save.
929
Field
Name
Type
Description
Type
string
Detailed chapters
(optional)
Boolean
1 CSV
2 HTML
3 No Frames
4 No TOC
0 Exclude
1 Include
DSA.LoadProtectionDb
Use the DSA.LoadProtectionDb recipe command to load a protection curve library. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Db path (optional)
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the protection
database. If you do not specify a value, SynerGEE
searches for the normal SynProtectionDb.mdb file in
your SynerGEE installation folder.
DSA.SaveWarehouse
Use the DSA.SaveWarehouse recipe command to save the current equipment data to a specified data
source. The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
DSA name
string
User Guide
930
Model.DropAllFeeders
Use the Model.DropAllFeeders recipe command to delete all feeders from the current model. This command
does not require any inputs.
Model.SetAnalysisSection
Use the Model.SetAnalysisSection recipe command to set the analysis section for the model in memory. The
inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
string
Model.ZoomToSelectedFeeders
Use the Model.ZoomToSelectedFeeders recipe command to zoom the SynerGEE map display to the
network bounds of the selected feeders. This command does not require any inputs.
User Guide
931
Model.SetAnalysisSectionByFirstBreaker
Use the Model.SetAnalysisSectionByFirstBreaker recipe command to set the analysis section based on the
first breaker that is on a specified feeder. The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Feeder
string
Model.SetMeterAmps
Use the Model.SetMeterAmps recipe command to set the phase 1, 2, and 3 amps for a specified meter. If the
meter is currently set up to define demands in kVA instead of amps, this command will switch the option to
amps and then set the specified values.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Meter ID
string
Amps phase 1
double
Amps phase 2
double
Amps phase 3
double
Model.SetSwitchableDeviceStatusUsingSubstring
Use the Model.SetSwitchableDeviceStatusUsingSubstring recipe command to set the open/closed status of
a specified switchable device in the current model in memory. The inputs for this command are described in
the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Device name
string
Device type
string
Breaker
Fuse
Recloser
Sectionalizer
User Guide
932
Field
Name
Type
Description
Open
Boolean
0 Closed
1 Open
Model.SetRegulatorsManualMode
Use the Model.SetRegulatorsManualMode recipe command to set all regulators in the model in memory to
either manual mode or automatic mode. The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Manual mode
Boolean
0 Automatic
1 Manual
Model.SelectFeeder
Use the Model.SelectFeeder recipe command to select a feeder in the current model. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Feeder
string
Model.DeselectAllFeeders
Use the Model.DeselectAllFeeders recipe command to deselect all feeders in the current model. This
command does not require any inputs.
User Guide
933
Model.SetMeterDataType
Use the Model.SetMeterDataType recipe command to set the data type for all meters to either kw, kvar or
kva, %pf. The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Data type
double
0 kW, kvar
1 kva, % pf
Model.Dtran_PlaceWithXY
Use the Model.Dtran_PlaceWithXY recipe command to move distribution transformers within the model
based on their XY coordinates. If the XY coordinates for a distribution transformer are closer to a section
(within 50 feet) that is different than the section the distribution transformer is currently assigned to, then this
recipe command will move the distribution transformer to the closer section.
This command does not require any inputs.
Model.AnalysisSection
Use the Model.AnalysisSection recipe command to set or unset a specified section for analysis. The inputs
for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Section ID
string
Boolean
Model.AnalysisYear
Use the Model.AnalysisYear recipe command to set the analysis year for the model. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Year
long
Analysis year that you want to set for the model. Use 0
for the base year, or 1 through 10 for each
subsequent year.
User Guide
934
MULTI-MODEL COMMANDS
Use the MultiModel recipe commands to set up and run a multi-model analysis. With these commands, you
can add and remove data sources to the analysis, set up with applications you want to run (Check
Coordination, Check Data. etc.), and configure which model years you want to analyze.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
MultiModel.AddDataSource
Use the MultiModel.AddDataSource recipe command to add a DSA to the multi-model analysis. This
command performs the same task as selecting a data source to analyze in the Data Sources tab of the MultiModel Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Data source
string
Name of the DSA that you want to add to the multimodel analysis. In the SynerGEE DSA editor, this is the
value entered in the Description field.
MultiModel.CheckCoordination
Use the MultiModel.CheckCoordination recipe command to specify whether the Check Coordination
application will be included in the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting
or clearing the corresponding check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
User Guide
935
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
MultiModel.CheckData
Use the MultiModel.CheckData recipe command to specify whether the Check Data application will be
included in the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the
corresponding check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
MultiModel.Contingency
Use the MultiModel.Contingency recipe command to specify whether the Contingency application will be
included in the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the
corresponding check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
User Guide
936
MultiModel.CreateZonesAndProcessEvents
Use the MultiModel.CreateZonesAndProcessEvents recipe command to add a DSA and a data set to the
multi-model analysis. This command is designed for use with running a Reliability analysis through the MultiModel analysis. To use this command, you would also have to use the MultiModel.Reliability command to
enable a Reliability analysis as part of the multi-model analysis, plus the MultiModel.Run command to run the
multi-model analysis.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Data source
string
Name of the DSA that you want to add to the multimodel analysis. In the SynerGEE DSA editor, this is the
value entered in the Description field.
Data set
string
MultiModel.Fault
Use the MultiModel.Fault recipe command to specify whether the Fault application will be included in the
Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the corresponding
check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
MultiModel.LoadAllocation
Use the MultiModel.LoadAllocation recipe command to specify whether the Load Allocation application will be
included in the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the
corresponding check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
User Guide
937
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
MultiModel.LoadFlow
Use the MultiModel.LoadFlow recipe command to specify whether the Load Flow application will be included
in the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the
corresponding check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
MultiModel.Reliability
Use the MultiModel.Reliability recipe command to specify whether the Reliability application will be included
in the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the
corresponding check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
User Guide
938
MultiModel.RemoveAllDataSources
Use the MultiModel.RemoveAllDataSources recipe command to remove all DSAs from the Multi-Model
analysis. This command does not require any inputs.
After using this command, you can use the MultiModel.AddDataSource command to add DSAs back into the
analysis. For more information, see MultiModel.AddDataSource on page 934.
MultiModel.Run
Use the MultiModel.Run recipe command to run the Multi-Model analysis. The inputs for this command are
described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Boolean
MultiModel.ThrowOver
Use the MultiModel.ThrowOver recipe command to specify whether the Throw-Over application will be
included in the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting or clearing the
corresponding check box on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Run
Boolean
MultiModel.Years1
Use the MultiModel.Years1 recipe command to specify whether the models base year and years 1 through 5
will be analyzed by the Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting and
clearing the corresponding Years to analyze check boxes on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis
editor.
User Guide
939
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Base year
Boolean
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
Year 5
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
MultiModel.Years2
Use the MultiModel.Years2 recipe command to specify whether years 6 through 10 will be analyzed by the
Multi-Model analysis. This command performs the same task as selecting and clearing the corresponding
Years to analyze check boxes on the Analysis tab of the Multi-Model Analysis editor.
User Guide
940
Name
Type
Description
Year 6
Boolean
Year 7
Year 8
Year 9
Year 10
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
PhaseBalancing.Run
Use the PhaseBalancing.Run recipe command to run a Load Allocation analysis. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
1
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Feeder/subtran
string
Field
2
941
Name
Type
Description
Rephase past
analysis section
Boolean
QA COMMANDS
Use the QA recipe commands to generate an outage script file for your model. Refer to the topics listed below
for more information.
SynQA.GenRemDataFile
Use the SynQA.GenRemDataFile recipe command to generate an outage script file. The inputs for this
command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Full path
string
Full path, file name, and file extension for the outage
script that is generated by this command.
RELIABILITY COMMANDS
Use the Reliability recipe commands to run the Reliability Event Management wizard with the Create model
exposure zones and process reports option. The Reliability Event Management wizard is described in more
detail in Reliability Event Management Wizard on page 697.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
942
Reliability.CreateZonesAndProcessEvents
Use the Reliability.CreateZonesAndProcessEvents recipe command to run a specified data set through the
Reliability Event Management wizard. This recipe command performs the same task that you would perform
manually by selecting the Create model exposure zones and process events option in the Reliability Event
Management wizard.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Data source
string
Data set
string
Show results
Boolean
Reliability.CreateDataSet
Use the Reliability.CreateDataSet recipe command to create a reliability data set on a specified data source.
This recipe command performs the same task that you would perform manually by selecting the Create/
Destroy reliability data sets option in the Reliability Event Management wizard.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
Data source
string
Data set
string
Description
(optional)
string
943
Reliability.DeleteDataSet
Use the Reliability.DeleteDataSet recipe command to delete a reliability data set from a specified data
source. This recipe command performs the same task that you would perform manually by selecting the
Create/Destroy reliability data sets option in the Reliability Event Management wizard.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Data source
string
Data set
string
SETTINGS COMMANDS
Use the Settings recipe commands to interact with SynerGEE application settings files. Refer to the topics
listed below for more information.
Settings.LoadXML
Use the Settings.LoadXML recipe command to load an applications settings group. You specify the settings
group that you want to load by providing the full path and file name for the XML file where the Settings group
is saved. Settings files are described in more detail in Settings Groups and Settings Files on page 189.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Full Path to
Settings File
string
SQL COMMANDS
Use the SQL recipe commands to interact with the SynerGEE SQL Dashboard. Refer to the topics listed
below for more information.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
User Guide
944
SQL.RunFromFile
Use the SQL.RunFromFile recipe command to open the SQL Dashboard and run a specific recipe. The
inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
Group
string
Name
string
Target DSA
string
Data Type
double
0 CMM
1 Equipment
2 Events
3 Mining
4 Model
5 Pi
6 Subset
7 Results
8 Data Mart
9 Historian
string
Export Type
(optional)
Boolean
Export Path
(optional)
string
0 Save as CSV
1 Open in Excel
THROW-OVER COMMANDS
Use the ThrowOver recipe commands to run a Throw-Over analysis. Refer to the topics listed below for more
information.
User Guide
945
ThrowOver.Run
Use the ThrowOver.Run recipe command to run a Throw-Over analysis. The inputs for this command are
described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
Show Report
Boolean
WAREHOUSE COMMANDS
Use the Warehouse recipe commands to perform tasks related to the SynerGEE equipment warehouse.
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
For additional warehouse commands, see Model I/O Commands on page 918.
Warehouse.Drop
Use the Warehouse.Drop recipe command to remove the current equipment warehouse from memory. This
command is useful to prepare for loading a new DSA into SynerGEE.
This command does not require any inputs.
User Guide
946
User Guide
APPENDIX
C
Model Forge
Commands
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are available for use in
SynerGEE.
User Guide
948
AREAS OF INTEREST
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit areas of interest.
AOI_102 Editing the X,Y coordinates for an area of interest on page 949
AOI_104 Editing the X,Y coordinates for an area of interest on page 951
AOI_106 Editing the X,Y coordinates for an area of interest on page 953
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
949
Name
Type
Description
SynDescription
string
SynHatchPatterNum
long
SynRGB
string
SynType
string
SP Speculative load
SynAOIIsOn
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynXCoord
double
User Guide
950
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynYCoord
double
Name
Type
Description
SynDtranID
string
SynDescription
string
SynHatchPatterNum
long
SynRGB
string
SynType
string
SP Speculative load
User Guide
Field
6
951
Name
Type
Description
SynAOIIsOn
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
Name
Type
Description
SynDtranID
string
SynXCoord
double
SynYCoord
double
User Guide
952
Name
Type
Description
SynLCAMSLink
string
SynDescription
string
SynHatchPatterNum
long
SynRGB
string
SynType
string
SP Speculative load
SynAOIIsOn
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
User Guide
953
Name
Type
Description
SynLCAMSLink
string
SynXCoord
double
SynYCoord
double
BREAKERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit breakers.
BKR_103 Editing the breaker rating and interrupt rating for a breaker on page 955
BKR_104 Editing the mechanical response type for a breaker on page 955
BKR_107 Editing the operation type, curve family, and instantaneous curve for a breaker relay
stage on page 957
BKR_108 Editing the pickup type for a breaker relay stage on page 958
BKR_109 Editing primary and secondary amp ratings for a breaker relay stage on page 959
BKR_110 Editing the CT turns ratio for a breaker relay stage on page 959
BKR_111 Editing the tap and time dial value for a breaker relay stage on page 960
BKR_112 Editing multipliers and adders for a breaker relay stage on page 961
BKR_114 Editing the reclosing status for a breaker relay stage on page 962
User Guide
954
BKR_115 Editing the mechanical response type for a breaker on page 963
BKR_116 Editing the breaker rating and interrupt rating for a breaker on page 964
BKR_120 Editing the primary amps for a breaker relay stage on page 966
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynStatus
Boolean
0 Closed
1 Open
User Guide
955
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynRating
double
SynInterrupt
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynMechResponse
string
User Guide
956
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynDescription
string
SynType
string
SynManufacturer
string
SynModel
string
SynGroup
string
957
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynIsActive
Boolean
0 Inactive
1 Active
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
958
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynOperationType
string
IT Inv Time
IN Inst
IC Inst Curve
DT Dist Time
SynCurveFamily
string
SynInstCurve
string
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynPickupType
string
959
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynPriCTAmp
double
SynSecCTAmp
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
960
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynCTRatio
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynTap
double
SynTimeDial
double
961
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynTimeMultiplier
double
SynAmpMultiplier
double
SynTimeAdder
double
SynAmpAdder
double
SynMinResponse
double
User Guide
962
Name
Type
Description
SectionID
string
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
Field
4
963
Name
Type
Description
SynIsReclosing
Boolean
0 Not reclosing
1 Reclosing
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynMechResponse
string
User Guide
964
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynRating
double
SynInterrupt
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynNote
string
965
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynDescription
string
SynIsRelayEnabled
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPhasing
string
User Guide
966
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynDescription
string
SynStage
long
SynPrimaryAmps
double
CAPACITORS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit capacitors.
CAP_104 Editing the fixed kvar, operating status, and operating type for a capacitor on page 968
CAP_105 Editing the operating type and metering phase for a capacitor on page 969
CAP_107 Editing the PT ratio and CT rating for a capacitor on page 971
CAP_110 Editing the Module 1 kvar per phase value for a capacitor on page 973
CAP_111 Editing the Module 1 close value for a capacitor on page 973
CAP_112 Editing the Module 1 trip value for a capacitor on page 974
User Guide
967
CAP_115 Editing the operating status and metering phase for a capacitor on page 975
CAP_116 Editing the PT ratio and CT rating for a capacitor on page 976
CAP_119 Setting the energize year and retire year for a capacitor on page 978
CAP_121 Editing the Module 2 and Module 3 kvar per phase value for a capacitor on page 979
CAP_122 Editing the Module 2 close and trip values for a capacitor on page 979
CAP_123 Editing the Module 3 close and trip values for a capacitor on page 980
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
User Guide
968
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynPhase
string
SynConnection
string
Y Wye
YG Wye-Gnd
D Delta
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFixedKvar
double
SynStatus
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
User Guide
Field
4
969
Name
Type
Description
SynManualOp
Boolean
0 Automatic
1 Manual
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynIsOn
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
SynMeteringPhase
string
A Phase A
B Phase B
C Phase C
User Guide
970
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynVoltOverrideActive
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
User Guide
SynVoltOverrideSet
double
SynVoltOverrideBW
double
971
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynPTRatio
double
SynCTRating
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynM1KvarPerPhase
double
SynM1CloseValue
double
User Guide
972
Field
4
Name
Type
Description
SynM1TripValue
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynControlMode
string
Text string that identifies the control mode that you want
to set for the capacitor. Specify one of the following
values:
KVAR kvar
TEMP Temperature
VO Voltage (120V)
973
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynM1KvarPerPhase
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynM1CloseValue
double
To edit the close value for module 2 on a capacitor, see CAP_122 Editing the Module 2 close and trip
values for a capacitor on page 979.
To edit the close value for module 3 on a capacitor, see CAP_123 Editing the Module 3 close and trip
values for a capacitor on page 980.
User Guide
974
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynM1TripValue
double
To edit the trip value for module 2 on a capacitor, see CAP_122 Editing the Module 2 close and trip values
for a capacitor on page 979.
To edit the trip value for module 3 on a capacitor, see CAP_123 Editing the Module 3 close and trip values
for a capacitor on page 980.
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynVoltRating
double
975
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynMeteringPhase
string
A Phase A
B Phase B
C Phase C
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynIsOn
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
User Guide
976
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynMeteringPhase
string
A Phase A
B Phase B
C Phase C
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPTRatio
double
SynCTRating
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
977
Name
Type
Description
SynM1KvarPerPhase
double
SynM1CloseValue
double
SynM1TripValue
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynControlMode
string
Text string that identifies the control mode that you want
to set for the capacitor. Specify one of the following
values:
KVAR kvar
TEMP Temperature
VO Voltage (120V)
User Guide
978
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynEnergizeYr
long
SynRetireYr
long
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynIsOn
Boolean
979
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynM2KvarPerPhase
double
SynM3KvarPerPhase
double
To edit the kvar per phase for module 1 on a capacitor, see CAP_110 Editing the Module 1 kvar per phase
value for a capacitor on page 973.
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynM2CloseValue
double
User Guide
980
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynM2TripValue
double
To edit the close and trip values for module 1 on a capacitor, see CAP_111 Editing the Module 1 close
value for a capacitor on page 973 and CAP_112 Editing the Module 1 trip value for a capacitor on
page 974.
To edit the close and trip values for module 3 on a capacitor, see CAP_123 Editing the Module 3 close and
trip values for a capacitor on page 980.
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynM3CloseValue
double
SynM3TripValue
double
To edit the close and trip values for module 1 on a capacitor, see CAP_111 Editing the Module 1 close
value for a capacitor on page 973 and CAP_112 Editing the Module 1 trip value for a capacitor on
page 974.
To edit the close and trip values for module 2 on a capacitor, see CAP_122 Editing the Module 2 close and
trip values for a capacitor on page 979.
User Guide
981
CMM
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit customers, distribution transformers, and customer billing records for use with SynerGEEs CMM
functionality.
CMM_131 Adding a customer demand billing record with kvar on page 985
CMM_132 Adding a customer demand billing record with PctPf on page 985
CMM_164 Setting the coincidence factor for a customer class on page 986
CMM_212 Creating a customer class curve and matching customer zone curve on page 987
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
Last_Name
string
First_Name
string
Address
string
Phase
string
User Guide
982
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
LoadType
string
D Distributed load
P Project load
S Spot load
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
ClassID
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
TransformerID
string
kVA_Rating
double
Phase
string
983
Name
Type
Description
TransformerID
string
kVA_Rating
double
Phase
string
Name
Type
Description
TransformerID
string
Name
Type
Description
TransformerID
string
X_MUL
double
Y_MUL
double
User Guide
984
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
TransformerID
string
Name
Type
Description
TransformerID
string
SectionID
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
Read_Date
date
kW
double
985
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
Read_Date
date
kvar
double
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
Read_Date
date
PctPf
double
Name
Type
Description
CustomerID
string
Read_Date
date
kWh
double
Billing_Days
double
User Guide
986
Name
Type
Description
ClassID
string
PctPF
double
PctLF
double
Name
Type
Description
ClassID
string
NumCust
long
CoinFac
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
CurveId
string
987
Name
Type
Description
CurveId
string
Name
Type
Description
CurveId
string
kW
double
kvar
double
SynMonth
long
SynWeekDay
long
SynHour
long
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit distribution transformers.
DTR_103 Editing the X,Y coordinates for a distribution transformer on page 989
User Guide
988
DTR_104 Editing the demand kVA for a distribution transformer on page 989
DTR_105 Editing the number of customers for a distribution transformer on page 990
DTR_106 Editing the connection phase for a distribution transformer on page 990
DTR_107 Editing the demand kVA, number of customers, and connection phase for a distribution
transformer on page 991
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynDescription
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
989
Name
Type
Description
SynName
string
SynLoadkVAT
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynX
double
SynY
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynDemandkVAT
double
User Guide
990
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynConCustomers
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynPhasing
string
991
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynDemandKVAT
double
SynConCustomers
double
SynPhasing
string
FACILITIES
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to edit facilities.
FAC_110 Editing the location link, AMS link, and note text for a facility on page 992
User Guide
992
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFacType
string
SynLocLink
string
SynAmsLink
string
SynNote
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFacType
string
SynLocLink
string
993
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFacType
string
SynAmsLink
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFacType
string
SynNote
string
FEEDERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit feeders.
FDR_102 Editing minimum and maximum source impedance values for a feeder on page 994
FDR_103 Editing the balanced voltage level for a feeder on page 995
FDR_104 Editing positive sequence and zero sequence values for a feeder on page 996
User Guide
994
FDR_106 Editing the continuous amp rating and emergency amp rating for a feeder on page 997
FDR_108 Setting the voltage and angle for phase 1 of a feeder on page 998
FDR_109 Setting the voltage and angle for phase 2 of a feeder on page 998
FDR_110 Setting the voltage and angle for phase 3 of a feeder on page 998
FDR_112 Editing maximum source impedance values for a feeder on page 999
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynNomKv
double
SynSubId
string
SynConnection
string
Wye
Wye-Gnd
Delta
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
Field
995
Name
Type
Description
SynPosSeqR
double
SynPosSeqX
double
SynZeroSeqR
double
SynZeroSeqX
double
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynBusVolts
double
User Guide
996
Name
Type
Description
SynSrc
string
SynR1
double
SynX1
double
SynR0
double
SynX0
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynNote
string
997
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynContAmpRating
double
SynEmergAmpRating
double
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynRGB
string
User Guide
998
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynPh1Volts
double
SynPh1Angle
double
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynPh1Volts
double
SynPh1Angle
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynPh1Volts
double
SynPh1Angle
double
999
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynRegionID
string
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynPosSeqRMax
double
SynPosSeqXMax
double
SynZeroSeqRMax
double
SynZeroSeqXMax
double
User Guide
1000
FUSES
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit fuses.
FUS_102 Editing the manufacturer, model, and amp and volt ratings for a fuse on page 1001
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynStatus
Boolean
0 Closed
1 Open
User Guide
1001
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynManuf
string
SynModel
string
SynAmp
string
SynVolt
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1002
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPhasing
string
GENERATORS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit generators.
User Guide
1003
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynType
string
SynPhase
string
User Guide
1004
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynIsOn
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPctOutput
double
LARGE CUSTOMERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit large customers.
User Guide
1005
LGC_105 Editing current and impedance values for a large customer on page 1007
LGC_106 Editing customer load values for a large customer on page 1008
LGC_107 Editing connected kVA load values for a large customer on page 1008
LGC_108 Editing kW values and the power factor percentage for a large customer on page 1009
LGC_110 Setting the rated kVA and Pf values for a larger customer on page 1011
LGC_113 Editing customer load values for a large customer on page 1012
LGC_114 Editing connected kVA load values for a large customer on page 1012
LGC_115 Editing kW and kvar values for a large customer for each phase for a specific year on
page 1013
LGC_116 Editing the load status for a large customer on page 1014
LGC_117 Enabling and disabling the distributed generator on a large customer on page 1015
LGC_118 Editing the generator type for a large customer on page 1015
LGC_119 Setting the rated kVA and Pf values for a large customer on page 1015
LGC_120 Editing the capacity factor for a large customer on page 1016
User Guide
1006
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynLoadkW_A
double
SynLoadkW_B
double
SynLoadkW_C
double
1007
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynLoadkvar_A
double
SynLoadkvar_B
double
SynLoadkvar_C
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynCustI
double
User Guide
1008
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynCustZ
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynLoadCust_A
double
SynLoadCust_B
double
SynLoadCust_C
double
User Guide
1009
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
1
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynLoadCKva_A
double
SynLoadCKva_B
double
SynLoadCKva_C
double
Name
Type
Description
SynMeterAmsLink
string
SynOffSet
long
SynDefPctPf
double
User Guide
1010
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynYear1
double
SynYear2
double
SynYear3
double
SynYear4
double
SynYear5
double
SynYear6
double
10
SynYear7
double
11
SynYear8
double
12
SynYear9
double
13
SynYear10
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynType
string
0 Off
1 On
User Guide
1011
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynGenKVA
double
SynGenPF
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadkW_A
double
SynLoadkW_B
double
SynLoadkW_C
double
User Guide
1012
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadkvar_A
double
SynLoadkvar_B
double
SynLoadkvar_C
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadCust_A
double
SynLoadCust_B
double
SynLoadCust_C
double
User Guide
1013
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadckVA_A
double
SynLoadckVA_B
double
SynLoadckVA_C
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynYearNum
long
Year number that the edit will be applied to. Use 0 for
the base year for your model, or 1 through 10 for
each subsequent year.
SynLoadkW_A
double
SynLoadkW_B
double
SynLoadkW_C
double
User Guide
1014
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynLoadkvar_A
double
SynLoadkvar_B
double
SynLoadkvar_C
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadStatus
string
o Off
c Scheduled
User Guide
1015
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynGenerationIsO
n
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynGenType
string
User Guide
1016
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynGenKVA_A
double
SynGenKVA_B
double
SynGenKVA_C
double
SynGenPF
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynCapacityFactor
double
LOADS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to edit loads.
User Guide
1017
LOD_105 Setting the override option for a meters load on page 1019
LOA_120 Editing connected kVA load values for a sections distributed load on page 1020
LOA_121 Editing kWh values for a sections distributed load on page 1020
LOA_122 Editing the number of customers for a sections distributed load on page 1021
LOA_124 Editing kvar values for a sections distributed load on page 1022
LOA_130 Editing connected kVA load values for a sections spot load on page 1023
LOA_131 Editing the number of customers for a sections spot load on page 1023
LOA_132 Editing the description for a sections spot load on page 1024
LOA_141 Editing kvar values for a sections spot load on page 1025
LOA_142 Editing the capacity factor for a sections spot load on page 1026
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
1018
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynPh1Kva
double
SynPh2Kva
double
SynPh3Kva
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynPh1Pf
double
SynPh2Pf
double
SynPh3Pf
double
1019
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynOverridden
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynPh1Amp
double
SynPh2Amp
double
User Guide
1020
Field
4
Name
Type
Description
SynPh3Amp
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadKva1
double
SynLoadKva2
double
SynLoadKva3
double
User Guide
1021
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadKwh1
double
SynLoadKwh2
double
SynLoadKwh3
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadCust1
double
SynLoadCust2
double
SynLoadCust3
double
User Guide
1022
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadKW1
double
SynLoadKW2
double
SynLoadKW3
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadKvar1
double
SynLoadKvar2
double
Field
4
1023
Name
Type
Description
SynLoadKvar3
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadKva1
double
SynLoadKva2
double
SynLoadKva3
double
User Guide
1024
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLoadCust1
double
SynLoadCust2
double
SynLoadCust3
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynDesc
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
2
1025
Name
Type
Description
SynIsSpot
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Name
Type
Description
SynDesc
string
SynLoadkW1
double
SynLoadkW2
double
SynLoadkW3
double
User Guide
1026
Name
Type
Description
SynDesc
string
SynLoadkvar1
double
Total kvar for phase A for the sections spot load. This is
equivalent to editing the kvar value for phase A on the
Load - Spot tab of the Section editor.
SynLoadkvar2
double
Total kvar for phase B for the sections spot load. This is
equivalent to editing the kvar value for phase B on the
Load - Spot tab of the Section editor.
SynLoadkvar3
double
Total kvar for phase B for the sections spot load. This is
equivalent to editing the kvar value for phase B on the
Load - Spot tab of the Section editor.
Name
Type
Description
SynDesc
string
User Guide
SynCapacityFactor
double
1027
METERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit meters.
MET_108 Editing continuous and emergency current ratings for a meter on page 1029
MET_113 Enabling or disabling the Use with Color By Meter feature on page 1033
MET_114 Enabling or disabling the Use with Color By Meter feature and selecting the feature
color on page 1033
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1028
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynName
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynIsOn
Boolean
User Guide
1029
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynYearNumber
long
SynContCurrentRating
double
SynEmergCurrentRating
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
1030
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynYearNumber
long
Year number that the edit will be applied to. Use 0 for
the base year for your model, or 1 through 10 for
each subsequent year.
Only the specified year will be updated. Previous and
subsequent years will retain their original values.
SynMeterPhAkW
double
SynMeterPhBkW
double
SynMeterPhCkW
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynYearNumber
long
User Guide
Field
1031
Name
Type
Description
SynMeterPhAkvar
double
SynMeterPhBkvar
double
SynMeterPhCkvar
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynYearNumber
long
SynMeterPhAAmps
double
SynMeterPhBAmps
double
User Guide
1032
Field
5
Name
Type
Description
SynMeterPhCAmps
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynYearNumber
long
Year number that the edit will be applied to. Use 0 for
the base year for your model, or 1 through 10 for
each subsequent year.
Only the specified year will be updated. Previous and
subsequent years will retain their original values.
SynMeterPhAPf
double
SynMeterPhBPf
double
SynMeterPhCPf
double
User Guide
1033
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynUseColorBy
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1034
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynUseColorBy
Boolean
SynRGB
string
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynNote
string
1035
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynStatus
Boolean
0 Closed
1 Open
NODES
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to edit nodes.
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynX
double
SynY
double
User Guide
1036
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynDescription
string
PROJECTS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to edit projects.
PRO_102 Editing the energize and retire years for a project on page 1037
PRO_103 Editing the total KW and kvar for a project on page 1038
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynProjName
string
SynDescription
string
SynConPhases
string
Field
1037
Name
Type
Description
SynCode
string
SynEnabled
Boolean
SynLoadMult
double
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynProjName
string
SynEnergizeYr
long
SynRetireYr
long
User Guide
1038
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynProjName
string
SynTotalkW
double
SynTotalKvar
double
Total kvar value that will be applied to the project for the
designated year. Note that the edit will be made to the
specified year only. Previous and subsequent years will
not be modified.
SynYearNum
long
Year number that the edit will be applied to. Use 0 for
the base year for your model, or 1 through 10 for
each subsequent year.
Only the specified year will be updated; previous and
subsequent years will retain their original values.
RECLOSERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit reclosers.
REC_103 Specifying the manufacturer name and model name for a recloser on page 1041
REC_104 Editing the amp rating and interrupt rating for a recloser on page 1041
REC_105 Editing the mechanical response type for a recloser on page 1042
REC_106 Editing the single phase operation status for a recloser on page 1042
User Guide
1039
REC_109 Editing the fast phase pickup amps for a recloser on page 1045
REC_110 Editing the fast phase minimum response value for a recloser on page 1045
REC_111 Editing the phase source side fuse K factor and phase load side fuse K factor for a
recloser on page 1046
REC_112 Editing the disable ground status for a recloser on page 1046
REC_115 Editing the fast ground pickup amps for a recloser on page 1049
REC_116 Editing the fast ground minimum response for a recloser on page 1049
REC_117 Editing the ground source side fuse K factor and load side fuse K factor for a recloser
on page 1050
REC_119 Specifying a manufacturer name, model name, and mechanical response type for a
recloser on page 1051
REC_121 Editing the fast phase cutoff and fast ground cutoff for a recloser on page 1052
REC_122 Editing the slow phase cutoff and slow ground cutoff for a recloser on page 1053
REC_123 Editing the slow phase and slow ground pickup amps for a recloser on page 1053
REC_126 Editing the fast phase and slow phase pickup amps for a recloser on page 1055
REC_129 Editing the fast ground and slow ground pickup amps for a recloser on page 1057
REC_132 Editing the fast phase pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a recloser on
page 1059
REC_134 Editing the slow phase pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a recloser
on page 1061
REC_136 Editing the fast ground pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a recloser
on page 1063
User Guide
1040
REC_138 Editing the slow ground pickup amps, minimum response, and def time for a recloser
on page 1065
REC_140 Setting the transfer scheme and operating mode for a recloser on page 1067
REC_141 Editing the disabled ground option for a recloser on page 1068
REC_142 Editing the fast phase cutoff and fast ground cutoff for a recloser on page 1068
REC_143 Editing the slow phase cutoff and slow ground cutoff for a recloser on page 1069
REC_144 Editing the transfer scheme type, transfer scheme delay, and operating mode for a
recloser on page 1069
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
Field
3
1041
Name
Type
Description
SynStatus
Boolean
0 Closed
1 Open
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynManufacturer
string
SynModel
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynRating
double
SynInterrupt
double
User Guide
1042
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynMechResponse
string
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
Syn1PhaseOp
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
User Guide
1043
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFastPhaseCurve
string
SynFastPhaseCount
long
SynFastPhaseMultiplier
double
SynFastPhaseAdder
double
User Guide
1044
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynSlowPhaseCurve
string
SynSlowPhaseCount
long
SynSlowPhaseMultiplier
double
SynSlowPhaseAdder
double
1045
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynPhasePickupAmps
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynPhaseMinResponse
double
User Guide
1046
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynPhaseSourceKFactor
double
SynPhaseLoadKFactor
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
Field
2
1047
Name
Type
Description
SynGroundDisabled
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFastGroundCurve
string
SynFastGroundCount
long
SynFastGroundMultiplier
double
User Guide
1048
Field
5
Name
Type
Description
SynFastGroundAdder
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynSlowGroundCurve
string
SynSlowGroundCount
long
SynSlowGroundMultiplier
double
SynSlowGroundAdder
double
1049
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynGroundPickupAmps
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynGroundMinResponse
double
User Guide
1050
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynGroundSourceKFactor
double
SynGroundLoadKFactor
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
2
1051
Name
Type
Description
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynManufacturer
string
SynModel
string
SynMechResponse
string
User Guide
1052
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynInterrupt
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynFastPhCutOff
double
SynFastGrCutOff
double
1053
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynSlowPhCutOff
double
SynSlowGrCutOff
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
1054
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynSlowPhPickupAmps
double
SynSlowGrPickupAmps
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFastPhaseCurve
string
SynFastPhaseCount
long
SynFastPhaseMultiplier
double
SynFastPhaseAdder
double
1055
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynSlowPhaseCurve
string
SynSlowPhaseCount
long
SynSlowPhaseMultiplier
double
SynSlowPhaseAdder
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1056
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynPhasePickupAmps
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFastGroundCurve
string
SynFastGroundCount
long
SynFastGroundMultiplier
double
SynFastGroundAdder
double
1057
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynSlowGroundCurve
string
SynSlowGroundCount
long
SynSlowGroundMultiplier
double
SynSlowGroundAdder
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1058
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynGroundPickupAmps
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPhasing
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynIsBypassed
Boolean
0 Not bypassed
1 Bypassed
User Guide
1059
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFastPhasePickupAmps
double
SynFastPhaseMinResponse
double
SynFastPhaseDefTime
double
User Guide
1060
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFastPhaseActiveInst
Boolean
0 Inactive
1 Active
User Guide
SynFastPhaseInst
double
SynFastPhaseInstAmps
double
SynFastPhaseMinResponse
double
SynFastPhaseDefTime
double
1061
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynSlowPhasePickupAmps
double
SynSlowPhaseMinResponse
double
SynSlowPhaseDefTime
double
User Guide
1062
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynSlowPhaseActiveInst
Boolean
0 Active
1 Inactive
User Guide
SynSlowPhaseInst
double
SynSlowPhaseInstAmps
double
SynSlowPhaseMinResponse
double
SynSlowPhaseDefTime
double
1063
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFastGroundPickupAmps
double
SynFastGroundMinResponse
double
SynFastGroundDefTime
double
User Guide
1064
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFastGroundActiveInst
Boolean
0 Active
1 Inactive
User Guide
SynFastGroundInst
double
SynFastGroundInstAmps
double
SynFastGroundMinResponse
double
SynFastGroundDefTime
double
1065
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynSlowGroundPickupAmps
double
SynSlowGroundMinResponse
double
SynSlowGroundDefTime
double
User Guide
1066
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynSlowGroundActiveInst
Boolean
0 Active
1 Inactive
User Guide
SynSlowGroundInst
double
SynSlowGroundInstAmps
double
SynSlowGroundMinResponse
double
SynSlowGroundDefTime
double
1067
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynTranSchemeType
string
NON Non-transfer
SCZ Sectionalizing
MID Mid-Point
TIE Tie
SynTranSchemeDelaySec
double
SynOperMode
string
Pri Primary
Alt Alternate
User Guide
1068
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynGroundDisabled
Boolean
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFastPhCutOff
double
SynFastGrCutOff
double
1069
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynSlowPhCutOff
double
SynSlowGrCutOff
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynTranSchemeType
string
SynTranSchemeDelaySec
double
NON Non-transfer
SCZ Sectionalizing
MID Mid-Point
TIE Tie
User Guide
1070
Field
4
Name
Type
Description
SynOperMode
string
Pri Primary
Alt Alternate
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynAmpRating
string
REGULATORS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit regulators.
REG_104 Editing the reverse mode and reverse threshold for a regulator on page 1073
REG_105 Editing the connection type, gang operated status, and gang metering phase for a
regulator on page 1074
User Guide
1071
REG_107 Editing the reverse mode and reverse threshold for a regulator on page 1076
REG_111 Editing the tap direction and tap operation for a regulator on page 1079
REG_114 Editing the gang metering phase for a regulator on page 1080
REG_116 Setting the energize year and retire year for a regulator on page 1082
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
User Guide
1072
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynType
string
SynConnection
string
SynPhase
string
Y Wye
YG Wye-Gnd
D Delta
OD12 Open-Delta AB
OD23 Open-Delta BC
OD34 Open-Delta CA
OY1 Open-Wye A
OY2 Open-Wye B
OY3 Open-Wye C
User Guide
1073
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynReverseMode
string
NR No Reverse Mode
LF Locked Forward
LR Locked Reverse
RI Reverse Idle
BD Bi-Directional
NI Neutral Idle
CG Co-Generation
SynThresholdPct
double
User Guide
1074
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynConfiguration
string
SynGangOp
Boolean
Y Wye
YG Wye-Gnd
D Delta
OD12 Open-Delta AB
OD23 Open-Delta BC
OD34 Open-Delta CA
OY1 Open-Wye A
OY2 Open-Wye B
OY3 Open-Wye C
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
User Guide
Field
4
1075
Name
Type
Description
SynGangPhase
string
A Phase A
B Phase B
C Phase C
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynForwardVoltSet
double
SynForwardRDialSet
double
SynForwardXDialSet
double
User Guide
1076
Field
5
Name
Type
Description
SynForwardBWDialSet
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynReverseMode
string
User Guide
SynReverseThreshold
double
NR No Reverse Mode
LF Locked Forward
LR Locked Reverse
RI Reverse Idle
BD Bi-Directional
NI Neutral Idle
CG Co-Generation
1077
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynReverseVoltSet
double
SynReverseRDialSet
double
SynReverseXDialSet
double
SynReverseBWDialSet
double
User Guide
1078
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFirstHouseActive
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
SynFirstHouseHighV
double
SynFirstHouseLowV
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
double
User Guide
SynTapLimActive
SynTapLimHighSet
Boolean
long
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Field
4
1079
Name
Type
Description
SynTapLimLowSet
long
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynTapDirection
SynTapOperation
Boolean
Boolean
0 Automatic
1 Manual
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1080
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynStatus
Boolean
0 Off
1 On
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
2
1081
Name
Type
Description
SynGangPhase
string
A Phase A
B Phase B
C Phase C
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynForwardVoltSet
double
SynForwardRDialSet
double
SynForwardXDialSet
double
SynForwardBWDialSet
double
User Guide
1082
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynEnergizeYr
long
SynRetireYr
long
REM
Refer to the topics listed below for more information.
REM_201
Field
Name
Type
EventId
string
SectionID
string
DevType
string
Category
string
Subcategory
string
OutHours
double
OutDate
date
User Guide
Description
1083
SECTIONALIZERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit sectionalizers.
SZR_103 Editing the actuating current, number of counts, and location for a sectionalizer on
page 1084
SZR_105 Editing the amp rating, actuating current, and number of counts for a sectionalizer on
page 1085
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
User Guide
1084
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynStatus
Boolean
0 Closed
1 Open
SynRating
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynActuating
double
SynCounts
long
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
1085
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynRating
double
SynActuating
double
User Guide
1086
Field
4
Name
Type
Description
SynCounts
long
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPhasing
string
SECTIONS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit sections.
SEC_104 Editing the phasing, connection type, and length (in feet) for a section on page 1087
SEC_111 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections
distributed load on page 1090
SEC_112 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections spot
load on page 1090
SEC_115 Editing equivalent spacing and height values for a section on page 1091
SEC_116 Editing the detailed spacing configuration type for a section on page 1092
User Guide
1087
SEC_117 Setting the transposition phasing order for a section on page 1092
SEC_119 Editing the phasing, connection type, and length (in meters) for a section on
page 1094
SEC_123 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections
distributed load on page 1096
SEC_124 Editing the constant current (%I) and constant impedance (%Z) for a sections spot
load on page 1096
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFromNode
string
SynToNode
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1088
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynPhasing
string
SynLength_Ft
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynX
double
SynY
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
1089
Name
Type
Description
SynPhsCond
string
SynNeuCond
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynDescription
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynCondType
string
SynCondPhase
string
User Guide
1090
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynDistI
double
SynDistZ
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynSpotI
double
Field
3
1091
Name
Type
Description
SynSpotZ
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynConstruct
long
0 Equivalent Spacing
3 Duct Bank
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPhtoPh
double
User Guide
1092
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynPhtoNe
double
SynHeight
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynConfig
string
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
2
1093
Name
Type
Description
SynTransp
long
0 ABC
1 ACB
2 BAC
3 CAB
4 BCA
5 CBA
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynElbStatFrom
string
O Open
C Closed
N No Elbow
SynElbStatTo
string
O Open
C Closed
N No Elbow
User Guide
1094
Field
4
Name
Type
Description
SynElbRating
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynPhasing
string
SynLength_Mt
long
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
2
1095
Name
Type
Description
SynMitZone
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynIsContingency
Boolean
1 Is a contingency section
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynExpZone
string
User Guide
1096
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynDistI
double
SynDistZ
double
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynSpotI
double
SynSpotZ
double
SOURCES
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit sources.
User Guide
1097
SRC_102 Editing the location link and note text for a source on page 1097
Name
Type
Description
SourceId
string
PosSeqROhms
double
PosSeqXOhms
double
ZeroSeqROhms
double
ZeroSeqXOhms
double
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynLocLink
string
SynNote
string
SWITCHES
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit switches.
SWT_104 Setting the operation from analysis status for a switch on page 1099
SWT_105 Setting the energize year and retire year for a switch on page 1100
User Guide
1098
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynStatus
Boolean
SynType
string
0 Closed
1 Open
User Guide
SynModel
string
Manual
Automatic
Auto-transfer
1099
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
1100
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynOperAnalysis
Boolean
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynEnergizeYr
long
SynRetireYr
long
SUBSTATIONS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit substations.
STN_102 Editing minimum and maximum source impedance values for a substation on
page 1101
User Guide
1101
STN_107 Editing maximum source impedance values for a substation on page 1103
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynNomKv
double
SynConnection
string
SynSubId
string
Wye
Wye-Gnd
Delta
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynPosSeqR
double
SynPosSeqX
double
User Guide
1102
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynZeroSeqR
double
SynZeroSeqX
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynPosSeqR
double
SynPosSeqX
double
SynZeroSeqR
double
SynZeroSeqX
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynNote
string
1103
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynAMSLink
string
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynRegionID
string
Name
Type
Description
SynNode
string
SynPosSeqRMax
double
SynPosSeqXMax
double
User Guide
1104
Field
Name
Type
Description
SynZeroSeqRMax
double
SynZeroSeqXMax
double
TRANSFORMERS
Refer to the topics listed below for information on the Model Forge commands that are used to create and
edit transformers.
TRN_103 Editing the high-side and low-side connection types for a transformer on page 1105
TRN_106 Editing the gang operated status, gang metering phase, and tap control for a
transformer on page 1109
TRN_111 Editing high-side and low-side connection types for a transformer on page 1112
TRN_112 Editing the low-side ground reactance for a transformer on page 1114
TRN_113 Overriding impedance and reactance values for a transformer on page 1115
User Guide
1105
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
SynType
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
User Guide
1106
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynTranHigh
string
User Guide
Y Wye
YG Wye-Gnd
D Delta
ODAB Open-Delta AB
ODBC Open-Delta BC
ODCA Open-Delta CA
YGA Open-Wye A
YGB Open-Wye B
YGC Open-Wye C
Field
3
1107
Name
Type
Description
SynTranLow
string
Y Wye
YG Wye-Gnd
D Delta
ODAB Open-Delta AB
ODBC Open-Delta BC
ODCA Open-Delta CA
YGA Open-Wye A
YGB Open-Wye B
YGC Open-Wye C
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynName
string
User Guide
1108
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynType
string
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynFromNode
Boolean
0 To-node end
1 From-node end
User Guide
1109
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynGangOp
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
SynGangPh
string
A Phase A
B Phase B
C Phase C
SynManualTapControl
Boolean
0 Automatic
1 Manual
User Guide
1110
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
SynForwardVoltSet
double
SynForwardRDialSet
double
SynForwardXDialSet
double
SynForwardBWDialSet
double
1111
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynFirstHouseActive
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
SynFirstHouseHighV
double
SynFirstHouseLowV
double
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
User Guide
1112
Field
2
Name
Type
Description
SynTapLimActive
Boolean
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
SynTapLimHigh
long
SynTapLimLow
long
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
SynTapSetting
double
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
Field
2
1113
Name
Type
Description
SynHighConn
string
Y Wye
YG Wye-Gnd
D Delta
ODAB Open-Delta AB
ODBC Open-Delta BC
ODCA Open-Delta CA
YGA Open-Wye A
YGB Open-Wye B
YGC Open-Wye C
User Guide
1114
Field
3
Name
Type
Description
SynLowConn
string
Y Wye
YG Wye-Gnd
D Delta
ODAB Open-Delta AB
ODBC Open-Delta BC
ODCA Open-Delta CA
YGA Open-Wye A
YGB Open-Wye B
YGC Open-Wye C
User Guide
Name
Type
Description
SynSect
string
SynLowGndReact
double
1115
Name
Type
Description
SynAMSLink
string
OverrideImpedance
Boolean
Impedance
double
Resistance
double
User Guide
1116
User Guide
APPENDIX
D
Model Cleanup
Commands
The topics listed below describe the commands that are supported in model cleanup scripts. Additional
information on the model cleanup scripts is provided Model Cleanup Scripts on page 718.
4004 Setting the load connection to line-line for any section without a neutral on page 1122
4005 Adjusting the phasing of a section to match the adjacent sections on page 1122
4010 Copying switch statuses from one year to another on page 1124
4011 Growing meter demands using the feeder multiplier on page 1125
4013 Copying the switchable device status from one year to other years on page 1127
4014 Copying meter device demands from one year to other years on page 1128
4016 Moving load from unfed phases to fed phases on page 1129
4018 Growing a meters demands using a percent growth rate on page 1131
User Guide
1118
4033 Eliminating zero-length sections that do not have open devices on page 1138
4037 Using wandering laterals to feed forced unfed areas on page 1140
4051 Setting the value of a field if its current value matches a specified value on page 1143
4052 Setting the value of a field if its current value is less than a specified amount on page 1143
4053 Setting the value of a field if its current value is greater than a specified amount on
page 1144
4054 Setting the value of a field if its current value is missing or zero on page 1145
4055 Setting the value of a warehouse ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse on
page 1146
4056 Setting the value of a zone ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse on page 1147
4057 Setting the value of a protection database field if the current value is not in the protection
database on page 1148
4058 Setting the value of a field if its current value matches another field on page 1149
4059 Setting the value of a field if its current value includes a specified value on page 1150
4060 Settings the value of a field if its current value matches a specified value, and a second field
matches a second specified value on page 1150
4062 Replacing invalid conductors with the next valid upstream conductor on page 1153
4070 Growing loads across multiple years using a specified growth rate on page 1153
4071 Growing loads across multiple years using the section growth rates on page 1155
User Guide
1119
4072 Growing loads across multiple years using the section growth curves on page 1156
4073 Growing loads across multiple years using the feeder multiplier on page 1157
4078 Copying phasing and conductor settings across multiple years on page 1162
4081 Deleting kVA for distributed loads for the current year on page 1163
4082 Deleting kWh for distributed loads for the current year on page 1164
4083 Deleting the customer count for distributed loads for the current year on page 1164
4084 Deleting kW and kVAR for spot loads for the current year on page 1165
4106 Applying the script to the query set only on page 1166
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1120
Name
Description
Report
Find conductor
Replace conductor
Note that the model cleanup scripts provide numerous other commands that can be used to replace
conductor types. For example:
Use the 4003 model cleanup command to search and replace neutral conductors. For more
information, see 4003 Replacing neutral conductors on page 1121.
Use the 4017 model cleanup command to replace invalid conductors (conductors that do not exist in
the current warehouse) with valid conductors that are found on other phases on the same section.
For more information, see 4017 Replacing invalid conductors on page 1130.
Use the 4055 model cleanup command to replace the value for the specified equipment type field, if
the existing value is not found in the current equipment data. For more information, see 4055
Setting the value of a warehouse ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse on page 1146.
Use the 4061 model cleanup command to set the neutral conductor for sections in the model to the
same as phase option. For more information, see 4061 Setting the neutral conductor to same as
phase on page 1151.
Use the 4062 model cleanup command to replace unknown conductor types in your model with the
next available upstream valid conductor type. For more information, see 4062 Replacing invalid
conductors with the next valid upstream conductor on page 1153.
User Guide
1121
Name
Description
Report
Find conductor
Replace conductor
Note that the model cleanup scripts provide numerous other commands that can be used to replace
conductor types. For example:
Use the 4002 model cleanup command to search for a specified conductor type in all phases of all
sections and then replace those conductors with a different conductor type. For more information,
see 4002 Replacing phase conductors on page 1119.
Use the 4017 model cleanup command to replace invalid conductors (conductors that do not exist in
the current warehouse) with valid conductors that are found on other phases on the same section.
For more information, see 4017 Replacing invalid conductors on page 1130.
Use the 4055 model cleanup command to replace the value for the specified equipment type field, if
the existing value is not found in the current equipment data. For more information, see 4055
Setting the value of a warehouse ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse on page 1146.
Use the 4061 model cleanup command to set the neutral conductor for sections in the model to the
same as phase option. For more information, see 4061 Setting the neutral conductor to same as
phase on page 1151.
Use the 4062 model cleanup command to replace unknown conductor types in your model with the
next available upstream valid conductor type. For more information, see 4062 Replacing invalid
conductors with the next valid upstream conductor on page 1153.
User Guide
1122
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1123
This command replaces the functionality of the section spacing lookup table in standalone
MiddleLink 3.4 and earlier versions of SynerGEE that used the validator. For more information, see
Importing GIS Data Using MiddleLink on page 100.
Pay attention to the units of measurement when using this command. The spacing values in your
Section editors may not be displayed in the same units of measurement that are used by this
command (feet).
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
# Ph Wires
If PP (FEET).LT.
New PP (FEET)
New PN (FEET)
Name
Description
Report
For more information on loops, see Loops and Wandering Laterals on page 253.
User Guide
1124
Name
Description
Report
For more information on wandering laterals, see Loops and Wandering Laterals on page 253.
Name
Description
Report
For more information on classic devices, see Classic protective devices on page 600.
User Guide
1125
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
From year
To year
Model year that the switch statuses will be copied to. Acceptable
values are 1 through 10. Do not use the custom year labels that
you have configured in your preferences (for example, 2012,
2013, etc.).
Note that any years in between the From year and To year will
not be updated. For example, if you copy switch statuses from
year 0 to year 4, the statuses for years 1 through 3 will not be
edited.
The feeder multiplier is specified on the Feeder tab of the Feeder editor. For more information, see
Editing general data for a feeder or subtran node on page 248.
Demands are stored in meter devices. Feeder demands are considered to be those held by meters
directly downstream from feeder sources.
The 4011 model cleanup command affects subtran demands as well, using the same criteria.
User Guide
1126
Name
Description
Report
Base year
Start year for the growth of the meter demands. The demands for
this year will be multiplied by the feeder multiplier, and the result
will be applied to the following year. That years updated
demands will again be multiplied by the feeder multiplier, with the
result applied to the next year. This process will repeat until the
Grow to year has been updated.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where 0 represents the actual
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the base year demands will be
applied to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the
custom year labels that you have configured in your preferences
(for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
The 4012 model cleanup command operates on all force-unfed areas in memory.
The 4012 command causes phase changes only. It does not cause the elimination of sections.
All phase changes affect the section and any applicable equipment, such as protective devices.
If an eliminated phase contains load, that load is effectively eliminated as well. However, the original
load values remain a part of the section record and can be restored by re-energizing the affected
phase.
User Guide
1127
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
Allow rephase
By Ph Cond (optional)
For more information on force-unfed sections, see About force-unfed sections on page 263.
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1128
Field
Name
Description
Base year
Final year
Final model year that the device statuses will be copied to.
Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the custom year
labels that you have configured in your preferences (for example,
2012, 2013, etc.).
Note that any years between the Base year and Final year will be
updated as well. For example, if you copy switch statuses from
year 0 to year 4, the statuses for years 1 through 3 will also be
updated.
Only in query
0 Entire model
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
Base year
Field
3
1129
Name
Description
Final year
Final model year that the meter demands will be copied to.
Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the custom year
labels that you have configured in your preferences (for example,
2012, 2013, etc.).
Note that any years between the Base year and Final year will be
updated as well. For example, if you copy meter demands from
year 0 to year 4, the demands for years 1 through 3 will also be
edited.
Only in query
0 Entire model
Name
Description
Report
Fed phases are determined through propagation, and not necessarily by the phasing specified in
the respective Section editor.
Both spot loads and distributed loads are considered by this command.
All load-related values are considered, including kW, kvar, kVA, kWh, and customers.
User Guide
1130
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
Default conductor
(optional)
Note that the model cleanup scripts provide numerous other commands that can be used to replace
conductor types. For example:
Use the 4002 model cleanup command to search for a specified conductor type in all phases of all
sections and then replace those conductors with a different conductor type. For more information,
see 4002 Replacing phase conductors on page 1119.
Use the 4003 model cleanup command to search and replace neutral conductors. For more
information, see 4003 Replacing neutral conductors on page 1121.
Use the 4055 model cleanup command to replace the value for the specified equipment type field, if
the existing value is not found in the current equipment data. For more information, see 4055
Setting the value of a warehouse ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse on page 1146.
Use the 4061 model cleanup command to set the neutral conductor for sections in the model to the
same as phase option. For more information, see 4061 Setting the neutral conductor to same as
User Guide
1131
Use the 4062 model cleanup command to replace unknown conductor types in your model with the
next available upstream valid conductor type. For more information, see 4062 Replacing invalid
conductors with the next valid upstream conductor on page 1153.
Demands are stored in meter devices. Feeder demands are considered to be those held by meters
directly downstream from feeder sources.
The 4018 model cleanup command affects subtran demands as well, using the same criteria.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
Base year
Start year for the growth of the meter demands. The demands for
this year will be multiplied by the percentage growth rate, and the
result will be applied to the following year. That years updated
demands will again be multiplied by the growth rate, with the
result applied to the next year. This process will repeat until the
Grow to year has been updated.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where 0 represents the actual
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
User Guide
1132
Field
Name
Description
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the base year demands will be
applied to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the
custom year labels that you have configured in your preferences
(for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
Old type
Name of the classic fuse type that you want to find and replace.
Classic fuses by any other type are not affected.
Use an asterisk ( * ) to find and replace all classic fuse types.
User Guide
New manuf
Field
1133
Name
Description
New model
Name
Description
Report
Old type
Name of the classic recloser type that you want to find and
replace. Classic reclosers by any other type are not affected.
Use an asterisk ( * ) to find and replace all classic recloser types.
New manuf
New model
User Guide
1134
Name
Description
Report
Old type
Name of the classic breaker type that you want to find and
replace. Classic breakers by any other type are not affected.
Use an asterisk ( * ) to find and replace all classic breaker types.
New manuf
New model
New ph curve
New tap
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1135
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
Old manuf
Manufacturer name for the fuses that you want to replace. Fuses
by any other manufacturer name are not affected.
Use an asterisk ( * ) to find and replace all fuses in the model.
New manuf
New model
New volt rating to be applied to the fuses that are being replaced.
The 4024 model cleanup command applies to the completion of a MiddleLink 3.4-initiated conversion only. To
convert an original classic fuse from scratch, use the 4020 command. For more information, see 4020
Converting classic fuses on page 1132.
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1136
Field
2
Name
Description
Old manuf
New manuf
New model
The 4025 model cleanup command applies to the completion of a MiddleLink 3.4-initiated conversion only. To
convert an original classic recloser from scratch, use the 4021 command. For more information, see 4021
Converting classic reclosers on page 1133.
Name
Description
Report
Old type
User Guide
New manuf
New model
New family
New pickup
1137
The 4026 model cleanup command applies to the completion of a MiddleLink 3.4-initiated conversion only. To
convert an original classic breaker from scratch, use the 4022 command. For more information, see 4022
Converting classic breakers on page 1133.
Name
Description
Report
Maximum distance between nodes (in feet) in order for the nodes
to be combined through this command.
Allow loops
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1138
Both switchable devices are the same type (that is, a breaker and a breaker, or a switch and a
switch).
The common node for both switchable devices has an incidence of exactly two.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1139
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1140
Both switchable devices are the same type (that is, a breaker and a breaker, or a switch and a
switch).
The common node for both switchable devices has an incidence of exactly two.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1141
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
By Ph Cond (optional)
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1142
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
Note that the 4050 model cleanup command is the only 4050-series command that is valid for Boolean data
types.
User Guide
1143
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
Match value
User Guide
1144
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
Compare value
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
Table
1145
Field
Name
Description
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
Compare value
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
User Guide
1146
This command is only applicable to fields that reference an equipment type in your equipment data.
These fields show up in various places where a reference to equipment data is made, such as the
UniqueDeviceId for devices such as regulators and generators, or the PhaseConductorId and
ConfigurationId fields for sections.
If you specify a non-equipment type field, the command will still function, but will likely never find a
match in the equipment types, and likewise always replace the data. For example, if you specify the
Description field of the InstSection table, all section descriptions will likely be replaced, unless by
some chance they match equipment types in the equipment data. Therefore, you should be careful
to specify only fields that reference equipment types.
Although usually considered equipment data, this command does not work for zones. To validate
zone IDs, use model cleanup command 4056, as described in 4056 Setting the value of a zone ID
field if its current value is not in the warehouse on page 1147.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
Note that the model cleanup scripts provide numerous other commands that can be used to replace
conductor types. For example:
User Guide
1147
Use the 4002 model cleanup command to search for a specified conductor type in all phases of all
sections and then replace those conductors with a different conductor type. For more information,
see 4002 Replacing phase conductors on page 1119.
Use the 4003 model cleanup command to search and replace neutral conductors. For more
information, see 4003 Replacing neutral conductors on page 1121.
Use the 4017 model cleanup command to replace invalid conductors (conductors that do not exist in
the current warehouse) with valid conductors that are found on other phases on the same section.
For more information, see 4017 Replacing invalid conductors on page 1130.
Use the 4061 model cleanup command to set the neutral conductor for sections in the model to the
same as phase option. For more information, see 4061 Setting the neutral conductor to same as
phase on page 1151.
Use the 4062 model cleanup command to replace unknown conductor types in your model with the
next available upstream valid conductor type. For more information, see 4062 Replacing invalid
conductors with the next valid upstream conductor on page 1153.
This command is only applicable to fields that reference a zone type in your equipment data, such
as the SpotLoadCustZone and DistLoadCustZone fields contained in the InstSection table in
Access. If you specify any other field, the command will still function, but will probably always
replace the data, because it is not likely to find a match in the zone types. For example, if you
specify the Description field of the InstSection table, all section descriptions will likely be replaced,
unless by some chance they match zone types in the equipment data. Therefore, you should be
careful to specify only fields that reference zone types.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1148
Field
Name
Description
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
This command is only applicable to fields that reference a protective device manufacturer or model.
For example, you can use it on the Manufacturer and Model fields of the InstFuses and
InstReclosers tables. Any other usage may produce unpredictable results.
This command may be part of a protective device conversion process, perhaps following a
MiddleLink 3.4 model data import. Often, though, the 4024, 4025, and 4026 commands are more
appropriate for this purpose. For more information, see Model cleanup and classic protective
device conversion on page 719.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
Table
1149
Field
Name
Description
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Set value
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value.
Match Value
Field
Set Value
User Guide
1150
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value. The field will be replaced if the current value matches
the value specified in parameter 5 (Contains value).
Set value
Contains value
User Guide
1151
specified value. In other words, this command sets a field based on an evaluation of both its current value
and the value of a second field, on a record-by-record basis.
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
Table
Field A
Name of the field in the specified table where you want to replace
the value. The value will be replaced if two conditions are met:
that this field (Field A) matches the value specified in parameter
4 (Match Value A), and that Field B matches the value
specified in parameter 6 (Match Value B).
Match Value A
Field B
Match Value B
Set Value
User Guide
1152
Name
Description
Report
Is underground
1 Underground only
Note that the model cleanup scripts provide numerous other commands that can be used to replace
conductor types. For example:
Use the 4002 model cleanup command to search for a specified conductor type in all phases of all
sections and then replace those conductors with a different conductor type. For more information,
see 4002 Replacing phase conductors on page 1119.
Use the 4003 model cleanup command to search and replace neutral conductors. For more
information, see 4003 Replacing neutral conductors on page 1121.
Use the 4017 model cleanup command to replace invalid conductors (conductors that do not exist in
the current warehouse) with valid conductors that are found on other phases on the same section.
For more information, see 4017 Replacing invalid conductors on page 1130.
Use the 4055 model cleanup command to replace the value for the specified equipment type field, if
the existing value is not found in the current equipment data. For more information, see 4055
Setting the value of a warehouse ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse on page 1146.
Use the 4062 model cleanup command to replace unknown conductor types in your model with the
next available upstream valid conductor type. For more information, see 4062 Replacing invalid
conductors with the next valid upstream conductor on page 1153.
User Guide
1153
Name
Description
Report
Note that the model cleanup scripts provide numerous other commands that can be used to replace
conductor types. For example:
Use the 4002 model cleanup command to search for a specified conductor type in all phases of all
sections and then replace those conductors with a different conductor type. For more information,
see 4002 Replacing phase conductors on page 1119.
Use the 4003 model cleanup command to search and replace neutral conductors. For more
information, see 4003 Replacing neutral conductors on page 1121.
Use the 4017 model cleanup command to replace invalid conductors (conductors that do not exist in
the current warehouse) with valid conductors that are found on other phases on the same section.
For more information, see 4017 Replacing invalid conductors on page 1130.
Use the 4055 model cleanup command to replace the value for the specified equipment type field, if
the existing value is not found in the current equipment data. For more information, see 4055
Setting the value of a warehouse ID field if its current value is not in the warehouse on page 1146.
Use the 4061 model cleanup command to set the neutral conductor for sections in the model to the
same as phase option. For more information, see 4061 Setting the neutral conductor to same as
phase on page 1151.
User Guide
1154
Name
Description
Report
Base year
Start year for the growth of the section loads. The loads for this
year will be multiplied by the percentage growth rate, and the
result will be applied to the following year. That years updated
loads will again be multiplied by the growth rate, with the result
applied to the next year. This process will repeat until the Grow
to year has been updated.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where 0 represents the actual
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the base year demands will be
applied to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the
custom year labels that you have configured in your preferences
(for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Load type
Text value that represents the type of load that will be copied.
Acceptable values are as follows:
User Guide
D Distributed load
S Spot load
P Project load
A Speculative load
1155
Name
Description
Report
Base year
Start year for the growth of the section loads. The loads for this
year will be multiplied by the section growth rate, and the result
will be applied to the following year. That years updated loads
will again be multiplied by the growth rate, with the result applied
to the next year. This process will repeat until the Grow to year
has been updated.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where 0 represents the actual
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the base year demands will be
applied to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the
custom year labels that you have configured in your preferences
(for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
User Guide
1156
Field
4
Name
Description
Load type
Text value that represents the type of load that will be copied.
Acceptable values are as follows:
D Distributed load
S Spot load
P Project load
A Speculative load
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
Field
2
1157
Name
Description
Base year
Start year for the growth of the section loads. The loads for this
year will be multiplied by the corresponding growth rate specified
in the section growth curve, and the result will be applied to the
following year. That years updated loads will again be multiplied
by the corresponding growth rate from the section growth curve,
with the result applied to the next year. This process will repeat
until the Grow to year has been updated.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where 0 represents the actual
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the base year demands will be
applied to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the
custom year labels that you have configured in your preferences
(for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Load type
Text value that represents the type of load that will be copied.
Acceptable values are as follows:
D Distributed load
S Spot load
P Project load
A Speculative load
User Guide
1158
Name
Description
Report
Base year
Start year for the growth of the section loads. The loads for this
year will be multiplied by the feeder multiplier, and the result will
be applied to the following year. That years updated loads will
again be multiplied by the feeder multiplier, with the result applied
to the next year. This process will repeat until the Grow to year
has been updated.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where 0 represents the actual
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
User Guide
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the base year demands will be
applied to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the
custom year labels that you have configured in your preferences
(for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Load type
Text value that represents the type of load that will be copied.
Acceptable values are as follows:
D Distributed load
S Spot load
P Project load
A Speculative load
1159
Name
Description
Report
Base year
Model year that the loads will be copied from. Acceptable values
are 0 through 9, where year 0 represents the base year of your
model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent model years. Do
not use the custom year labels that you have configured in your
preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the original loads will be applied
to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the custom
year labels that you have configured in your preferences (for
example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Note that any years between the Base year and Grow to year will
be updated as well. For example, if you copy meter demands
from year 0 to year 4, the demands for years 1 through 3 will also
be edited.
Only in query
0 Entire model
User Guide
1160
Name
Description
Report
Load type
Text value that represents the type of load that will be copied.
Acceptable values are as follows:
D Distributed load
S Spot load
P Project load
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
First year
Model year that the loads will first be edited. Acceptable values
are 0 through 9, where year 0 represents the base year of your
model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent model years. Do
not use the custom year labels that you have configured in your
preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Field
3
1161
Name
Description
Grow to year
Final model year that loads will be edited. Acceptable values are
1 through 10. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Note that any years between the First year and Grow to year will
be updated as well. For example, if you copy meter demands
from year 0 to year 4, the demands for years 1 through 3 will also
be edited.
Load type
Multiplier
D Distributed load
S Spot load
P Project load
A Speculative load
Demands are stored in meter devices. Feeder demands are considered to be those held by meters
directly downstream from feeder sources.
The 4077 model cleanup command affects subtran demands as well, using the same criteria.
User Guide
1162
Name
Description
Report
Base year
Start year for the growth of the meter demands. The demands for
this year will be multiplied by the feeder multiplier, and the result
will be applied to the following year. That years updated
demands will again be multiplied by the feeder multiplier, with the
result applied to the next year. This process will repeat until the
Grow to year has been updated.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where 0 represents the actual
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Grow to year
Final model year that growth of the base year demands will be
applied to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the
custom year labels that you have configured in your preferences
(for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
Field
1163
Name
Description
Base year
Model year that the phasing and conductors will be copied from.
Acceptable values are 0 through 9, where year 0 represents the
base year of your model and 1 through 9 represent subsequent
model years. Do not use the custom year labels that you have
configured in your preferences (for example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Final year
Final model year that the phasing and conductors will be copied
to. Acceptable values are 1 through 10. Do not use the custom
year labels that you have configured in your preferences (for
example, 2012, 2013, etc.).
Note that any years between the Base year and Final year will be
updated as well. For example, if you copy phasing and
conductors from year 0 to year 4, the statuses for years 1
through 3 will also be updated.
Only in query
0 Entire model
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1164
Name
Description
Report
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1165
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
1166
Name
Description
Message (optional)
The inputs for this command are described in the following table.
Field
Name
Description
Report
User Guide
APPENDIX
E
SynerGEE File
Summary
SynerGEE uses a wide variety of files for a host of different purposes. Some files store data and settings,
while others are used to import data. The following table lists several SynerGEE-related files and their
descriptions. If a file you are looking for does not appear on this list, it may be an application file that should
not be moved or otherwise altered.
Common name
Ext.
File name
Description
Access database
MDB
(varies)
or
ACCDB
Extensible markup
language file
XML
(varies)
SynerGEE binary
file
EDM
(varies)
SynerGEE main
application file
EXE
SynerGEE.exe
User Guide
1168
Common name
Ext.
File name
Description
TXT
ReliCauseMeta.txt
Defaults file
XML
SynDefaults.xml
Backup file
EDM
SynBackup.edm
Help file
CHM
Syne.chm
User Guide
SynEUserGuide.pdf
Technical
Reference
SynETechRef.pdf
Release Notes
SynEReleaseNotes.pdf
License file
DAT
License.dat
Recipe
SRF
(varies)
User Guide
1169
Common name
Ext.
File name
Description
Startup recipe
SRF
Startup.srf
Log file
SLF
{pref}SynLog.slf
TCC file
SPV
(varies)
Sample radial
model, in Access
MDB
SampleModel.mdb
Sample radial
model, in XML
XML
SampleDb.xml
Sample network
model
MDB
NetworkDb.mdb
MDB
SynDataSources.mdb
PowerCalc script
SPC
(varies)
Model cleanup
script
MODCLEAN
(varies)
User Guide
1170
Common name
Ext.
File name
Description
Report template
XML
(varies)
Application settings
group file
APPSET
(varies)
DISPSET
(varies)
Background image
settings group file
GBTILESET
(varies)
Interface settings
file
INTERSET
(varies)
Model explorer
settings file
EXPSET
(varies)
STATE
SynerGEE.state.xml
General SynerGEE
settings file
SYNSET
(varies)
Feature lock
settings file
FEATURELOC
K
(varies)
CMM data in
MiddleLink format
CMM
(varies)
PI Server
messaging script
MESS
(varies)
User Guide
1171
Common name
Ext.
File name
Description
SQL dashboard
script
SYNSQL
(varies)
User Guide
1172
User Guide
APPENDIX
F
Background Image
Support
SynerGEE supports a variety of image types as background images.
1-, 4-, 8-, and 24-bit images in Windows or OS/2 format supported. Run
length encoded files not supported.
Joint Photographics
Experts Group (JPG)
User Guide
1174
World File
JPG
JGW
TIF
TFW
BMP
WLD
For example, the world file for the image MyPicture.jpg would be MyPicture.jgw.
A world file contains six numbers in a specific order, as follows:
x-scale
The width of a single pixel in map units. For example, if your map units are in
feet, and the x-scale is 1.5, each pixel of the image will horizontally occupy 1.5
feet. In other words, this number controls the width of the displayed image.
rotation term 1
rotation term 2
y-scale
The height of a single pixel in map units. For example, if your map units are in
feet, and the y-scale is -1.5, each pixel of the image will vertically occupy 1.5
feet. In other words, this number controls the width of the displayed image.
The y-scale is always negative, because map coordinates are projected
upwards from a 0,0 point. The functionality is identical to the x-scale,
however. Normally, the y-scale is the negative value of the x-scale, unless
stretching of the image is desired.
X coordinate
The X coordinate for the upper left pixel of the image, in map units.
Tip:
Y coordinate
When you move the mouse pointer across the map, you can see the
current coordinates displayed in the status bar.
The Y coordinate for the upper left pixel of the image, in map units.
The following is an example of the actual world file ortho1.jgw, found in the Sample Data\Backgrounds folder
in your SynerGEE install area:
1.34718265515579
0.00000000000000
0.00000000000000
-1.34718265515579
439130.54764475720000
89805.63249184121000
The precise numbers allow the image to align and scale perfectly with the New - Springfield feeder in the
sample model database.
User Guide
1175
SynerGEE looks for the supplemental file in the same folder as the image file. These files are normally
generated by the originating application, such as a GIS product.
For AutoCAD files, you may need to perform the following steps to ensure that all text is preserved during the
import.
1
From the AutoCAD main menu, select Express > Block > Explode Attribute to Text.
Save the file in AutoCAD and proceed with the import to SynerGEE.
User Guide
1176
User Guide
Index
1177
Index
Numerics
3010 recipe command 856
3013 recipe command 856
3014 recipe command 856
3030 recipe command 857
3031 recipe command 858
3032 recipe command 858
3034 recipe command 858
3035 recipe command 858
3050 recipe command 859
3051 recipe command 861
3052 recipe command 862
3053 recipe command 862
3054 recipe command 862
3055 recipe command 863
3056 recipe command 864
3057 recipe command 865
3058 recipe command 866
3059 recipe command 866
3060 recipe command 866
3061 recipe command 867
3062 recipe command 868
3063 recipe command 869
3064 recipe command 869
3065 recipe command 869
3066 recipe command 870
3071 recipe command 870
3072 recipe command 870
3073 recipe command 870
3080 recipe command 871
3081 recipe command 871
3090 recipe command 871
3091 recipe command 872
3100 recipe command 874
3101 recipe command 874
3102 recipe command 874
User Guide
1178
3503 recipe command 895
3504 recipe command 895
3505 recipe command 895
3506 recipe command 895
3507 recipe command 896
3508 recipe command 896
3509 recipe command 896
3510 recipe command 896
3511 recipe command 896
3512 recipe command 898
3550 recipe command 899
3551 recipe command 899
3552 recipe command 899
3553 recipe command 899
3554 recipe command 900
3555 recipe command 900
3600 recipe command 901
3601 recipe command 902
3650 recipe command 902
3651 recipe command 903
4001 model cleanup command 1119
4002 model cleanup command 1119
4003 model cleanup command 1121
4004 model cleanup command 1122
4005 model cleanup command 1122
4006 model cleanup command 1122
4007 model cleanup command 1123
4008 model cleanup command 1124
4009 model cleanup command 1124
4010 model cleanup command 1124
4011 model cleanup command 1125
4012 model cleanup command 1126
4013 model cleanup command 1127
4014 model cleanup command 1128
4015 model cleanup command 1129
4016 model cleanup command 1129
4017 model cleanup command 1130
4018 model cleanup command 1131
4019 model cleanup command 1132
4020 model cleanup command 1132
User Guide
Index
4021 model cleanup command 1133
4022 model cleanup command 1133
4023 model cleanup command 1134
4024 model cleanup command 1134
4025 model cleanup command 1135
4026 model cleanup command 1136
4030 model cleanup command 1137
4031 model cleanup command 1137
4032 model cleanup command 1138
4033 model cleanup command 1138
4034 model cleanup command 1139
4035 model cleanup command 1139
4036 model cleanup command 1140
4037 model cleanup command 1140
4038 model cleanup command 1141
4039 model cleanup command 1141
4040 model cleanup command 1142
4050 model cleanup command 1142
4051 model cleanup command 1143
4052 model cleanup command 1143
4053 model cleanup command 1144
4054 model cleanup command 1145
4055 model cleanup command 1146
4056 model cleanup command 1147
4057 model cleanup command 1148
4058 model cleanup command 1149
4059 model cleanup command 1150
4060 model cleanup command 1150
4061 model cleanup command 1151
4062 model cleanup command 1153
4070 model cleanup command 1153
4071 model cleanup command 1155
4072 model cleanup command 1156
4073 model cleanup command 1157
4074 model cleanup command 1159
4075 model cleanup command 1160
4076 model cleanup command 1160
4077 model cleanup command 1161
4078 model cleanup command 1162
4081 model cleanup command 1163
Index
4082 model cleanup command 1164
4083 model cleanup command 1164
4084 model cleanup command 1165
4099 model cleanup command 1165
4101 model cleanup command 1165
4104 model cleanup command 1165
4105 model cleanup command 1165
4106 model cleanup command 1166
4110 model cleanup command 1166
8760 Analysis 588
A
Access (personal)
about 71
data truncation during saving 71
Access (server) data format 72
AFS analysis 534
amp multiplier, fuses 346
analyses
automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis 534
R&D analysis 489
substation bus transformer analysis 534
analysis 433
adding notes to reports 460
analysis results 449
analysis year, selecting 434
auto-transfer switch analysis 533
balance improvement 565
Capacitor Flicker Report power tool 753
capacitor placement 562
charts 479
check coordination 622
configuring report options 459
contingency 535
cost files 447
cost settings 446
customer load curves/time-of-day 808
customizing device colors and sizes based on
analysis results 211
customizing section colors and sizes based on
1179
analysis results 210
design evaluation 572
economic 597, 851
fault 648
forecasting 556
global costs 449
harmonic 689
I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool 748
Insert Tie Switches power tool 756
load allocation 549
load balancing improvement 569
load-flow 512
locked rotor analysis 375
model and analysis options 436
motor analysis 375
motor start analysis 377
multi-model analysis 576
multi-year modeling 579, 586
network 522, 524
Node Overlap Report power tool 757
node reduction 267
optimal switching 529
output options 444
performing 449
phase balancing improvement 566
power tools 744
Regulator Setting power tool 745
reliability 661
reports 456
re-running 449
results 449
results annotation, adding 208
setting a section for analysis 434
setting up 433
System Status analysis 489
Ten-Year Growth Report power tool 755
throw-over analysis 533
time of day, selecting 434
uncertainty analysis 487
Unfused Tap analysis 696
User Guide
1180
Voltage Optimization 594
what-ifs 484
analysis results 449
Broadcaster 451
enterprise databases and results import/export 456
exporting 455
getting started with results import/export 453
import/export DSAs 454
importing 455
importing and exporting 452
reporting 456
results handling 453
Results Viewer 451
Results Viewer, selecting attributes 445
selecting attributes for the Results tab 445
selecting whether to generate 457
suggestions for viewing 450
Analysis.CheckData recipe command 909
Analysis.CloseAllReports recipe command 908
Analysis.RunCleanupScript recipe command 908
Analysis.Topology recipe command 909
annotation
adding to the map display 207
results annotation, adding 208
AOI_101 model forge command 948
AOI_102 model forge command 949
AOI_103 model forge command 950
AOI_104 model forge command 951
AOI_105 model forge command 952
AOI_106 model forge command 953
application setting codes 149
Arc Flashover
Analysis Settings 645
Disclaimer 644
Exceptions 645
Overview 644
rap sheet 181
Settings tab 645
Working Distance tab 646
areas of interest 217
User Guide
Index
associating with a section 223
creating 218
deleting 223
editing 220
Model Forge commands 948
moving 219
redrawing 219
reshaping 219
ASAI 668
AutoCAD DXF files
Publishing export 739
automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis 534
automation scripts 720
auto-transfer switch analysis 533
auto-transfer switches 407
toggling 408
B
background images 232, 1173
backups 131
balance improvement analysis 565
load balancing 569
phase balancing 566
basemap layer
basemap layer files 239
changing 242
binary (EDM) data format 72
BKR_101 model forge command 954
BKR_102 model forge command 954
BKR_103 model forge command 955
BKR_104 model forge command 955
BKR_105 model forge command 956
BKR_106 model forge command 957
BKR_107 model forge command 957
BKR_108 model forge command 958
BKR_109 model forge command 959
BKR_110 model forge command 959
BKR_111 model forge command 960
BKR_112 model forge command 961
BKR_113 model forge command 962
Index
BKR_114 model forge command 962
BKR_115 model forge command 963
BKR_116 model forge command 964
BKR_117 model forge command 964
BKR_118 model forge command 965
BKR_119 model forge command 965
BKR_120 model forge command 966
Breaker Zone 1 report 477
breakers 321
Breaker editor 321
Breaker tab 322
Relays tab 323
Results tab 325
breaker flexibility 327
breaker model 326
curves 327
deleting 326
editing 321
Model Forge commands 953
modeling 321
relay groups 327
relays 326
stages 327
transitioning from older breaker models 328
Broadcaster 451
Bulk Editor 192
C
cable ampacity
about 785
general steps 785
cable conductors
overview 786
cable study scripts 721
cables
cable conductors 787
applying to sections 789
concentric neutral model 787
separate neutral model 787
simple impedance model 787
1181
tape shield model 788
three-core cable model 789
Cable Duct Bank view 793
direct buried cables 796
display properties 796
opening 794
report 797
troubleshooting 797
using 795
zooming 796
duct bank, creating 790
duct banks
applying to sections 797
Duct Bank editor 790
Duct Bank evaluation 798
editing 790
modeling overview 786
study scripts 800
CAIDI 668
CAIFI 668
calculators 739
CAP_101 model forge command 967
CAP_102 model forge command 967
CAP_103 model forge command 967
CAP_104 model forge command 968
CAP_105 model forge command 969
CAP_106 model forge command 970
CAP_107 model forge command 971
CAP_108 model forge command 971
CAP_109 model forge command 972
CAP_110 model forge command 973
CAP_111 model forge command 973
CAP_112 model forge command 974
CAP_113 model forge command 974
CAP_114 model forge command 975
CAP_115 model forge command 975
CAP_116 model forge command 976
CAP_117 model forge command 976
CAP_118 model forge command 977
CAP_119 model forge command 978
User Guide
1182
CAP_120 model forge command 978
CAP_121 model forge command 979
CAP_122 model forge command 979
CAP_123 model forge command 980
Capacitor Flicker Report power tool 753
running 754
settings 754
Capacitor Manager toolbox tool 765
capacitor placement analysis 562
running 563
setting up 562
capacitors 328
adding 335
Capacitor editor 335
Capacitor tab 336
Results tab 341
Settings tab 339
Capacitor Flicker Report power tool 753
Capacitor Manager toolbox tool 765
controlling switched modules 331
deleting 342
editing 335
editing loads using the Bulk Editor 192
fixed and switched units 329
kV rating 331
line-drop compensator 333
managing 334
manually turning on a capacitor switched module
334
metering phase 333
Model Forge commands 966
motor analysis 342
placement analysis 342
positioning 330
SynerGEE capacitor model 329
tripping and closing rules 332
voltage override 334
capacity 529
capacity factors 502
chapter report template
User Guide
Index
editing 469
restoring 470
chapters
printing selected chapters of a report 179
charts 479
chart window, closing 484
chart window, opening 480
closing 484
custom 480
creating 480
deleting 482
loading 482
saving 482
exporting 483
modifying 483
printing 483
check coordination analysis
about 622
cases not checked 642
coordination range 641
default margins 627
general operation 623
protection pairs 639
rule-base 627
running 641
selecting rules 627
setting margins 626
setting options 623
check data report 137
classic protective device types 601
classic protective devices
about 600
converting 719
clearing the SynerGEE registry 193
CMM 837
automating the CMM process 842
CMM wizard 839
data sets 846
creating and destroying 847
merging 848
Index
reporting 846
using the model in memory to update
connectivity 848
DSAs 838
importing MiddleLink files into a CMM data set 839
Model Forge commands 981
overview 838
processing CMM data set bills and loads 840
running a script using the CMM wizard 842
schema, viewing 843
script examples 845
security and support via a Lock ID 850
SQL Dashboard 849
controls 849
queries 850
updating a model with customer data 839
updating model loads with a CMM data set 841
writing scripts 843
CMM_110 model forge command 981
CMM_113 model forge command 982
CMM_114 model forge command 982
CMM_120 model forge command 982
CMM_121 model forge command 983
CMM_123 model forge command 983
CMM_124 model forge command 983
CMM_127 model forge command 984
CMM_128 model forge command 984
CMM_130 model forge command 984
CMM_131 model forge command 985
CMM_132 model forge command 985
CMM_140 model forge command 985
CMM_162 model forge command 986
CMM_164 model forge command 986
CMM_211 model forge command 986
CMM_212 model forge command 987
CMM_214 model forge command 987
Cmm.RunScript recipe command 910
codes
application setting codes 149
model characteristic codes 148
1183
Color By
defining colors 212
sections 216
columns
editing data in columns 150
command line
opening SynerGEE from the command line 184
concentric neutral cable conductor model 787
Concepts view 490
Harmonics view 491
Impedance view 490
opening 490
conductor damage curves
on the TCC 612
conductor spacing
setting spacing preferences 169
conductors 304
cable 786
cable conductors 787
applying to sections 789
changing on a section 262
conductor types, creating 305
conductor types, deleting 308
conductor types, editing 305
conductor types, sorting 308
configurations 311
damage curves 316
equivalent spacing 311
how conductor data is used in calculations 309
optimal conductor selection analysis 572
seasonal ratings 832
simple impedance method 310
spacing and configuration options 310
spacing options 310
configuration types
about 311
creating 311
determining coordinates 312
editing 312
examples 314
User Guide
1184
usage 314
constant current load model 498
constant impedance load model 499
constant power load model 498
context menus 150
contingency
automatic feeder switching (AFS) analysis 534
substation bus transformer analysis 534
contingency analysis
about 535
Contingency Analysis Options editor 537
examples of outage types 546
fast pickup method 536
setting up 538
isolating sections 546
load transfer method 537
setting up 540
method, selecting 537
methods 535
optimized pickup method 536
setting up 542
running 546
Contingency.Run recipe command 910
contour points
see graphic points
controls script 821
creating 821, 822
cost files 447
creating 448
editing 448
format 447
selecting for analysis 448
cost zones 851
assigning to a section 853
creating 851
deleting 853
editing 852
costs
cost settings for analysis 446
model costs, setting 443
User Guide
Index
creating 822
curves
growth 804
load 808
plotting on TCC 605
transformer 643
custom charts 480
creating 480
deleting 482
loading 482
saving 482
custom keyboard shortcuts 149
customer classes 810
class information, editing 812
coincidence settings, editing 813
creating 810
deleting 815
economic data, editing 814
editing 811
load curves, editing 811
customer load curves/time-of-day analysis 808
Customer Management Module
see CMM
customer zones 815
applying to sections 817
creating 816
deleting 818
editing 816
customers
see CMM
D
data 57
comparing 63
data source aliases 75
editing data in columns 150
loading models 156
network intelligence 58
overview 58
repairing schemas 134
Index
data formats
about 70
Access (personal) 71
Access (server) 72
binary (EDM) 72
MiddleLink 72
Oracle 74
SQL Server 74
XML 75
Data Hammer 767
data mining
setting preferences 169
data source alias
see DSA
data types
about 59
equipment data 64
gallery 129
model 61
partials 89
protection 67
subsets 82
versions 86
database
setting preferences 167
DataHammer.SigedMidway recipe command 918
DataPrep
see MiddleLink-GIS model builds
defaults file 136
Demo Manager 769
design evaluation analysis 572
optimal conductor selection 572
processing 572
running 574
setting up 573
optimal regulator position 574
processing 574
running 575
setting up 575
viewing results 575
1185
tips 573
details
toggling in the map display 199
Details rap sheet 179
Device Risk Ranking 696
devices 317
adding to a model 317
annotation, adding 207
breakers 321
capacitors 328
coloring based on analysis results 211
copying 318
creating 317
deleting 319
editing 317, 318
failure rates 685
fuses 342
generators 347
meters 356
motors 364
moving 318
protective devices 599
reclosers 377
regulators 383
sectionalizers 393
switches 397
transformers 415
Digest report 478
display settings 200
adding annotation based on analysis results 208,
210
adding section and device annotation 207
coloring by path type 216
configuring map display symbols 213
configuring the map display style 201
configuring visibility levels for map display symbols
214
customizing device colors and sizes based on
analysis results 211
customizing section colors and sizes abased on
analysis results 210
User Guide
1186
defining Color By colors 212
selecting a coloring scheme for sections 216
showing the map display grid 215
distances, measuring in the map 198
distributed generation
see large customers
distribution transformers
editing using the DTran worksheet 297
editing using the Section editor 296
Model Forge commands 987
dockable reports 462
docking 463
enabling 462
hiding 466
documentation 52
documents
Library 770
DSA
creating 76, 79
creating with custom content 80
editing 77
purpose 76
saving 81
sharing with other users 81
validating 80
DSA.Create recipe command 919
DSA.Delete recipe command 921
DSA.DeleteFeeder recipe command 922
DSA.DeleteFeederList recipe command 922
DSA.DropModel recipe command 921
DSA.DropSubstation recipe command 922
DSA.ExecStoredProc recipe command 923
DSA.ExportLastReport recipe command 927
DSA.ExportLastReport2 recipe command 928
DSA.LoadFeeders recipe command 924
DSA.LoadModelBySub recipe command 925
DSA.LoadProtectionDb recipe command 929
DSA.LoadSubBySection recipe command 925
DSA.LoadWarehouse recipe command 926
DSA.ResultsSetSave recipe command 926
User Guide
Index
DSA.SaveFeeders recipe command 926
DSA.SaveWarehouse recipe command 929
DSA.TestConnection recipe command 927
DSAs
about 75
analysis results importing and exporting 454
deleting 81
DTR_101 model forge command 988
DTR_102 model forge command 988
DTR_103 model forge command 989
DTR_104 model forge command 989
DTR_105 model forge command 990
DTR_106 model forge command 990
DTR_107 model forge command 991
duct banks
applying to sections 797
Cable Duct Bank view 793
direct buried cables 796
display properties 796
opening 794
report 797
troubleshooting 797
using 795
zooming 796
creating 790
Duct Bank editor 790
Circuits tab 792
Duct Bank tab 791
Duct Bank evaluation 798
running 799
section derating 800
setting up 798
editing 790
DXF export
layer creation 742
running 742
settings 740
DXF files
Publishing export 739
E
Index
economic analysis 597, 851
cost zones 851
editor
opening 155
using 151
viewing results 156
editors
multi-year modeling 583
elbows 408
energize years
multi-year modeling 583
enterprise databases
about 114
advantages 115
analysis results import/export 456
connecting to the server 116
creating a new model 119
deleting models and feeders 121
getting started 115
loading feeders 120
locks 121
model locks 122
saving feeders 120
schema 123
using 116
with analysis 123
environment 142
model explorer 143
ribbon bar 146
status bar 148
SynerGEE editor 151
equipment
see devices
equipment data
about 64
clearing from memory 66
loading 65
merging 66
sample database 67
saving 65
1187
zones and curves 66
equipment types
about 319
copying 320
creating 319
deleting 320
editing 320
equipment warehouse
generator types 348
motor curve types 368
motor types 365
regulator types 384
switch types 400
transformer types 422
equivalent spacing, conductors 311
ESRI
Geography view 239
Excel
exporting data from a grid-style report 474
exception load limits 437
explorer
TCC 605
exposure zones 679
assigning to sections 682
creating 681
deleting 682
editing 681
setup methods 680
F
FAC_110 model forge command 992
FAC_111 model forge command 992
FAC_112 model forge command 993
FAC_113 model forge command 993
facilities
Model Forge commands 991
see devices
tagging 172
Facilities tab (model explorer) 144
failure rates for devices 685
User Guide
1188
fast pickup method (contingency analysis) 536
setting up 538
fault analysis 648
about 648
fault flow analysis 649
fault voltage analysis 649
generators 650
running 652
setting up 650
types 648
wandering laterals 652
fault events
adding 655
deleting 656
editing 655
fault location analysis 655
fault location analysis 654
fault events 655
running 658
setting up 656
Fault rap sheet 182
FaultLoc.FaultsToConsider recipe command 911
FaultLoc.Run recipe command 911
FaultLoc.SetFaultAmps recipe command 912
FDR_101 model forge command 994
FDR_102 model forge command 994
FDR_103 model forge command 995
FDR_104 model forge command 996
FDR_105 model forge command 996
FDR_106 model forge command 997
FDR_107 model forge command 997
FDR_108 model forge command 998
FDR_109 model forge command 998
FDR_110 model forge command 998
FDR_111 model forge command 999
FDR_112 model forge command 999
feature locks
setting preferences 171
SQL Dashboard 779
Feeder Overview toolbox tool 764
User Guide
Index
feeder sets 161
creating 161, 162
deleting 162
selecting 162
Feeder Tie Path report 478
feeders
converting nodes into feeders 246
demands 252
de-selecting a single feeder 160
editing 247
Feeder editor 247
Feeder tab 248
Node tab 250
Rates tab 251
Results tab 251
Volts/Ohms tab 249
Feeder Overview toolbox tool 764
Model Forge commands 993
modeling 245
repeating the last feeder selection 160
selecting 157
selecting a single feeder 160
selecting automatically when you load a model 161
selecting multiple feeders 157, 159
Feeders tab (model explorer) 145
file paths
setting preferences 167
file types 1167
File.WriteLine recipe command 913
files
cost files 447
filtering data columns 151
find model data 171
force unfed sections 263
forecasting analysis 556
performing 561
selecting a forecasting agent 560
setting up 557
Full-Year Analysis 588
function keys 149
Index
FUS_101 model forge command 1000
FUS_102 model forge command 1001
FUS_103 model forge command 1001
FUS_104 model forge command 1002
fuses 342
amp multiplier factor 347
amp multipliers 346
defaults and uprating 347
deleting 346
editing 343
Fuse editor 343
Fuse tab 343
Rates tab 345
Results tab 346
Model Forge commands 1000
modeling 342
time multiplier factor 346
time multipliers 346
G
gallery
about 129
deleting a model 131
loading a model 130
renaming a model 131
saving a model 130
Garage
see Organizer
GEN_101 model forge command 1002
GEN_102 model forge command 1003
GEN_103 model forge command 1003
GEN_104 model forge command 1004
GEN_105 model forge command 1004
generator types 348
creating 348
deleting 351
editing 349
generators 347
adding 352
deleting 356
1189
Delta-connected 356
distributed generation 503
editing 352
fault analysis 356, 650
Generator editor 352
Generator tab 352
Machine tab 355
Results tab 355
generator types 348
managing 351
Model Forge commands 1002
multiple generators 356
scheduled, distributed generation 356
Geography view 239
changing the basemap layer 242
setting up 239
synchronizing with the Map view 241
using the Geography view window 241
viewing a model 241
GIS extraction
see MiddleLink-GIS model builds
global costs 449
graphic nodes
see graphic points
graphic points
about 278
adding 278
deleting 279
moving 278
removing using node reduction 276
graphs
generating from a grid-style report 473
grid
showing 215
grid-style reports 467
appearance, editing 468
applying color to the map display 472
exporting to a database 475
exporting to Excel 474
generating graphs 473
User Guide
1190
managing content 470
saving 473
shortcuts 476
growth curves 804
applying to a section 806
applying to sections 806
creating 805
deleting 806
editing 805
multi-year modeling 807
single-year environment 808
using 806
H
harmonic analysis 689
designating sections for harmonic monitoring 693
harmonic curves 690
harmonic load-flow report 694
harmonics 689
impedance frequency scan report 695
options 693
running 694
setting up 689
harmonic curves 690
assigning to a large customer 692
creating 690
deleting 692
editing 690
harmonic load-flow report 694
Harmonics concepts view 491
height above ground
setting spacing preferences 169
HTML reports 477
I
I,Z,PQ - see load I,Z,PQ
I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool 748
calculating Delta % kW / Delta %V 750
operation 752
power mathematics 749
User Guide
Index
running 753
settings 753
using 749
using the calculated Delta % kW / Delta %V 751
images
background images 1173
supported image types 1173
vector images 1175
world files for raster images 1173
Impedance concepts view 490
impedance frequency scan report 695
Insert Tie Switches power tool 756
running 757
settings 756
intermediate points
see graphic points
isolating sections 546
K
keyboard shortcuts
custom 149
function keys 149
panning the map using the arrow keys 198
KML files
Publishing export 739
L
labels 225
adding 226
deleting 229
editing 227
moving 229
large customers
about 503
adding 503
analysis results, viewing 510
assigning harmonic curves 692
editing 504
editing loads using the Bulk Editor 192
load curves 821
Index
Model Forge commands 1004
scheduling 511
with load curves 511
layers
creation during Publishing export 742
legend 231
Legend tab (model explorer) 145
LGC_101 model forge command 1005
LGC_102 model forge command 1006
LGC_103 model forge command 1006
LGC_104 model forge command 1007
LGC_105 model forge command 1007
LGC_106 model forge command 1008
LGC_107 model forge command 1008
LGC_108 model forge command 1009
LGC_109 model forge command 1010
LGC_110 model forge command 1011
LGC_111 model forge command 1011
LGC_112 model forge command 1011
LGC_113 model forge command 1012
LGC_114 model forge command 1012
LGC_115 model forge command 1013
LGC_116 model forge command 1014
LGC_117 model forge command 1015
LGC_118 model forge command 1015
LGC_119 model forge command 1015
LGC_120 model forge command 1016
Library 770
adding documents 770
deleting documents 772
updating documents 771
viewing documents 771
licensing 54
line construction report 479
line-drop compensator
capacitors 333
lines
see section
links
see location links
1191
LOA_120 model forge command 1020
LOA_121 model forge command 1020
LOA_122 model forge command 1021
LOA_123 model forge command 1022
LOA_124 model forge command 1022
LOA_130 model forge command 1023
LOA_131 model forge command 1023
LOA_132 model forge command 1024
LOA_133 model forge command 1024
LOA_140 model forge command 1025
LOA_141 model forge command 1025
LOA_142 model forge command 1026
load allocation 552
about 549
calculations with customer load curves 552
capacitor options 551
choosing time to allocate load 819
demands and meters 550
handling the model afterward 820
load I,Z,PQ 552
loops 552
metering points 364
preparing the model for 819
regulator options 551
running 555
setting options 552
substation transformers 552
suggested approaches 551
understanding results 820
use of demands 551
when to run 550
with customer load curves 819
load balancing improvement analysis 569
running 570
setting up 569
load categories
setting preferences 170
Load Center Manager toolbox tool 765
creating and editing load centers 766
load centers
User Guide
1192
creating 766
editing 766
load curves 808
benefits 809
customer classes 810
customer zones 815
enabling 818
getting started 809
interaction with multi-year modeling 581
large customers 821
summary 821
with load allocation 819
load growth 552, 801
enabling 802
growth curves 804
interaction with multi-year modeling 581
rates, specifying 804
load I,Z,PQ
about 496
assigning percentages to loads 496
model details 497
sample values 502
load modeling, getting started 494
load transfer method (contingency analysis) 537
setting up 540
LoadAlloc.Run recipe command 915
load-flow analysis 512
advantages of 515
benefits of 515
by-phase versus balanced 516
invalid tie switches and load flow 520
network analysis 522, 524
overview 513
radial 516
radial load-flow engine 514
radial load-flow with loops 517
radial load-flow with loops example 517
radial load-flow with loops, about 517
radial load-flow with wandering laterals 520
radial low-flow foundation 513
User Guide
Index
running 516
sample wandering lateral calculations 521
wandering laterals and tie switches 520
LoadFlow.Run recipe command 915
loading
model data 61
TCC files 613
loading models 156
loads
adjusting for weather 828
constant current 498
constant impedance 499
constant power 498
editing using the Bulk Editor 192
exception load limits, defining 437
I,Z,PQ - see load I,Z,PQ
Load Center Manager toolbox tool 765
Model Forge commands 1016
modeling 253
network 496
radial 495
setting up 493
types 494
location links 223
creating 224
launching 225
locked rotor analysis (LRA) 375
motor model details 376
running 376
locks
enterprise databases 121
LOD_101 model forge command 1017
LOD_103 model forge command 1017
LOD_104 model forge command 1018
LOD_105 model forge command 1019
LOD_106 model forge command 1019
long units of length 188
loop tie switch
about 253
modeling 255
Index
loop tie switches 255
loops
about 253
analysis considerations 256
modeling 254
modeling with a loop tie switch 255
modeling with a wandering lateral tie switch 256
LUL (units) 188
LYR files 239
M
MAIFI 669
Maintenance Wizard 193
manholes
see large customers
map 195
annotation based on analysis results 208
background images 232, 1173
changing the zoom direction of the map scroll wheel
200
Color By colors, defining 212
coloring by path type 216
coloring sections 216
customizing device colors and sizes based on
analysis results 211
customizing section colors and sizes based on
analysis results 210
display settings 200
display style, configuring 201
Geography view 239
grid, showing 215
labels 225
legend 231
measuring distances 198
nodes, viewing 264
panning 197
refreshing 199
rotating 198
section and device annotation, adding 207
Show Manager 242
symbol visibility levels, configuring 214
1193
symbols, configuring 213
synchronizing with the Geography view 241
toggling details 199
using 196
views 231
zooming 196
map centering mode 198
map settings editor 200
margins, in check coordination analysis 627
master report template, editing 469
master report template, restoring 470
measuring distances in the map display 198
measuring the TCC 611
Media Viewer 770
medium units of length 188
menus
context (right-click) menus 150
messaging scripts 720
MET_104 model forge command 1027
MET_105 model forge command 1027
MET_106 model forge command 1028
MET_107 model forge command 1028
MET_108 model forge command 1029
MET_109 model forge command 1029
MET_110 model forge command 1030
MET_111 model forge command 1031
MET_112 model forge command 1032
MET_113 model forge command 1033
MET_114 model forge command 1033
MET_115 model forge command 1034
MET_116 model forge command 1035
meters 356
adding 357
deleting 364
editing 357
managing 357
Meter editor 357
Demands tab 359
Meter tab 358
Reliability tab 362
User Guide
1194
Results tab 363
Zones tab 363
metering points and load application 364
Model Forge commands 1027
reliability studies 364
MiddleLink
importing MiddleLink files into a CMM data set 839
MiddleLink data format
about 72
architecture 73
MiddleLink data type
automating model builds 112
import options 106
node identification 107
protective device conversion 109
source details (3.4) 103
source details (new ML) 104
MiddleLink-GIS model builds 100
benefits 101
general steps 102
note to ML 3.4 users 101
running 103
mining
setting data mining preferences 169
SQL Dashboard 779
mitigation zones 683
assigning to a section 684
creating 683
deleting 685
editing 684
mobile items
adding to the map display 230
deleting 230
editing 230
model
building a model 245
setting as the Startup script 717
model and analysis options 436
automatic fixes 442
exception load limits 437
User Guide
Index
general analysis options 441
general model options 438
model costs 443
multi-year analysis options 442
report warnings 460
model characteristic codes 148
model cleanup
commands 1117
model cleanup scripts 718
example 718
protective device conversion 719
supplementing spacing data 719
model costs
setting 443
model data
about 61
comparing 63
in Access 63
loading 61
merging 62
sample database 64
saving 61
model explorer 143
Facilities tab 144
Feeders tab 145
Legend tab 145, 231
Model tab 143
Query tab 145
toolbox 763
Toolbox tab 145
Warehouse tab 144
model forge 702
Model Forge schema, viewing 703
Model Forge script example 703
Model Forge wizard, running 703
Model Forge commands 947
areas of interest 948
breakers 953
capacitors 966
CMM 981
Index
distribution transformers 987
facilities 991
feeders 993
fuses 1000
generators 1002
large customers 1004
loads 1016
meters 1027
nodes 1035
projects 1036
reclosers 1038
regulators 1070
REM 1082
sectionalizers 1083
sections 1086
sources 1096
substations 1100
switches 1097
transformers 1104
model reduction 267
Model Rollover wizard 585
Model tab (model explorer) 143
Model Viewer files
Publishing export 739
Model.AnalysisSection recipe command 933
Model.AnalysisYear recipe command 933
Model.DeselectAllFeeders recipe command 932
Model.DropAllFeeders recipe command 930
Model.Dtran_PlaceWithXY recipe command 933
Model.SelectFeeder recipe command 932
Model.SetAnalysisSection recipe command 930
Model.SetAnalysisSectionByFirstBreaker recipe
command 931
Model.SetMeterAmps recipe command 931
Model.SetMeterDataType recipe command 933
Model.SetRegulatorsManualMode recipe command 932
Model.SetSwitchableDeviceStatusUsingSubstring recipe
command 931
Model.ZoomToSelectedFeeders recipe command 930
ModelForge.RunProcess recipe command 918
1195
modeling
breakers 321
fuses 342
reclosers 378
sectionalizers 393
model-in-memory
SQL Dashboard 778
Modelpedia
see Organizer
models
loading 156
model and analysis options 436
multi-model analysis 576
node reduction 267
performance comparison 589
regression 759
setting preferences 163
motor curve types 368
creating 368
deleting 369
editing 368
motor start analysis 377
running 377
motor types 365
creating 365
deleting 367
editing 366
motors 364
adding 369
deleting 375
editing 370
locked rotor analysis 375
managing 369
motor analysis types 375
motor curve types 368
Motor editor 370
Load tab 374
Motor tab 370
Results tab 374
Service tab 371
User Guide
1196
Starter tab 373
motor start analysis 377
motor types 365
mouse
changing the zoom direction of the scroll wheel 200
panning the map display 197
moving 147
moving data columns 151
MUL (units) 188
multi-model analysis 576
identifying data sources 577
performing 579
selecting analysis types and years 577
selecting post-processing options 578
selecting pre-processing options 578
setting up 576
MultiModel.AddDataSource recipe command 934
MultiModel.CheckCoordination recipe command 934
MultiModel.CheckData recipe command 935
MultiModel.Contingency recipe command 935
MultiModel.CreateZonesAndProcessEvents recipe
command 936
MultiModel.Fault recipe command 936
MultiModel.LoadAllocation recipe command 936
MultiModel.LoadFlow recipe command 937
MultiModel.Reliability recipe command 937
MultiModel.RemoveAllDataSources recipe command
938
MultiModel.Run recipe command 938
MultiModel.ThrowOver recipe command 938
MultiModel.Years1 recipe command 938
MultiModel.Years2 recipe command 939
multiple editor 177
applying customer zones to sections 817
multiple sessions 55
multi-year analysis
options 442
multi-year modeling 579
applicable data 580
challenges 582
User Guide
Index
changing years 581
copying data 584
data characteristics 587
differences with versions 581
enabling 582
energize and retire year 583
general information 580
getting started 580
growth curves 807
interaction with customer load curves and load
growth 581
Model Rollover wizard 585
modeling information 582
multi-year analysis 586
running 587
setting up 586
SynerGEE editors 583
time spans 584
year names 584
year specific data 583
N
network analysis 522, 524
analysis 522, 525
network fault analysis 523, 526
network load-flow analysis 522, 525
network outage analysis 523, 526
running 524, 527
setting up 523, 526
network installation
multiple sessions 55
network model loads 496
network protectors 420
sample model 421
tripping and closing 421
NOD_101 model forge command 1035
NOD_102 model forge command 1036
Node Overlap Report power tool 757
running 759
settings 758
Index
node reduction 267, 276
breaking loops with elbows 277
detailed operation 273
eliminating a node completely 272
example 275
load handling 277
methodology 271
node elimination rules 273
performing 270
removing nodes 271
replacing a node with a vertex 272
settings 267
nodes
about 264
converting into feeders and subtrans 246
converting to other device types 266
converting to pad-mounted switch gear 409
creating 261, 265
deleting 266
disabling node editing 199
editing 265
Model Forge commands 1035
moving 266
Node Overlap Report power tool 757
renaming 265
viewing in the map display 264
Notepad
opening scripts from the script editor 727
notes
adding to reports 460
numerical recipes
analysis commands 881
commands 855
data I/O commands 858
graphical user interface commands 855
licensing commands 900
list commands 898
map coloring commands 873
messaging script commands 902
model modification commands 890
1197
parameter reference 903
analysis types 905
colors 903
results 904
program operation commands 856
results handing commands 892
selection commands 893
selection commands example 898
O
opening
models 156
optimal switching analysis 529
application operation 529
application speed 530
running 532
setting options 530
optimized pickup method (contingency analysis) 536
setting up 542
Oracle data format 74
Organizer 183
output options 444
adding notes to reports 460
configuring report options 459
editing 444
generating reports 457
P
pad-mounted switch gear 408
converting from node 409
editing 410
page setup options 178
panning 197
using map centering mode 198
using the arrow keys 198
using the mouse 197
using the scroll wheel 197
partials
about 89
cautionary note 90
User Guide
1198
how they work 90
loading 89
paths
coloring the map by path type 216
setting file path preferences 167
performance comparison 589
add phase/change phase factors 592
calculating model costs 592
running 594
secondary losses 593
selecting models 590
setting analysis options 591
setting costs 590
settings 589
phase balancing improvement analysis 566
running 567
setting up 566
PhaseBalancing.Run recipe command 940
phases
adding to a section 262
changing on a section 262
planning 549
Full-Year (8760) Analysis 588
power tools 744
Capacitor Flicker Report power tool 753
I,Z,PQ Calibration power tool 748
Insert Tie Switches power tool 756
Node Overlap Report power tool 757
Regulator Setting power tool 745
Ten-Year Growth Report power tool 755
PowerCalc 761
available functions 763
scripts 763
starting 761
understanding 761
preferences 162
changing the zoom direction of the mouse scroll
wheel 200
data mining 169
database 167
User Guide
Index
feature locks 171
file paths 167
load categories 170
model 163
spacing options 169
units of measurement 165
printing 178
charts 483
page setup options 178
printing report chapters 179
reports 460
PRJ files 239
PRO_101 model forge command 1036
PRO_102 model forge command 1037
PRO_103 model forge command 1038
profiles
weather 825
projection files 239
projects
editing using the Projects Manager 293
editing using the Projects worksheet 292
editing using the Section editor 290
Model Forge commands 1036
protection 599
protection coordination analysis
see check coordination analysis
protection data
about 67
general information 67
interaction with TCC 69
mechanical response times 70
Protection Lab 615
protection pairs, in check coordination analysis 639
protective device types 601
creating 601
deleting 602
editing 601
protective devices 599
adding 602
analysis results, viewing 603
Index
breakers 321
classic 600
data management 599
deleting 604
fuses 342
general data, editing 603
reclosers 377
sectionalizers 393
switchable devices 600
Publishing export 739
layer creation 742
running 742
SVG output information 744
Python scripts 705
creating 706, 708, 709
editing 706
examples 710
performing a fault analysis 712
reporting model data 710
Startup script 711
updating neutrals 714
running 709
running at startup 715
writing 707
Q
queries
CMM SQL Dashboard 850
running a SQL query in the SQL Dashboard 777
sample SQL queries in the SQL Dashboard 782
writing a SQL query in the SQL Dashboard 775
Query Path tool 175
query sets
adding sections 174
adding sections using spatial query mode 174
clearing 176
creating 173
creating from the map display 174
creating using the Query Wizard 176
modifying sections using the Query Path tool 175
1199
removing sections 176
Query tab (model explorer) 145
Query Wizard 176
quick access toolbar 146, 147
editing 147
R
R&D analysis 489
radial model loads 495
rap sheets 179
Arc Flashover rap sheet 181
Details rap sheet 179
Fault rap sheet 182
Voltage Plot rap sheet 180
raster images 1173
ratings, seasonal 831
REC_101 model forge command 1040
REC_102 model forge command 1040
REC_103 model forge command 1041
REC_104 model forge command 1041
REC_105 model forge command 1042
REC_106 model forge command 1042
REC_107 model forge command 1043
REC_108 model forge command 1044
REC_109 model forge command 1045
REC_110 model forge command 1045
REC_111 model forge command 1046
REC_112 model forge command 1046
REC_113 model forge command 1047
REC_114 model forge command 1048
REC_115 model forge command 1049
REC_116 model forge command 1049
REC_117 model forge command 1050
REC_118 model forge command 1050
REC_119 model forge command 1051
REC_120 model forge command 1052
REC_121 model forge command 1052
REC_122 model forge command 1053
REC_123 model forge command 1053
REC_124 model forge command 1054
User Guide
1200
REC_125 model forge command 1055
REC_126 model forge command 1055
REC_127 model forge command 1056
REC_128 model forge command 1057
REC_129 model forge command 1057
REC_130 model forge command 1058
REC_131 model forge command 1058
REC_132 model forge command 1059
REC_133 model forge command 1060
REC_134 model forge command 1061
REC_135 model forge command 1062
REC_136 model forge command 1063
REC_137 model forge command 1064
REC_138 model forge command 1065
REC_139 model forge command 1066
REC_140 model forge command 1067
REC_141 model forge command 1068
REC_142 model forge command 1068
REC_143 model forge command 1069
REC_144 model forge command 1069
REC_145 model forge command 1070
recipe scripts
running at startup 715
Startup recipe script 716
Recipe.End recipe command 914
Recipe.Start recipe command 914
Recipe.StartAutomated recipe command 914
recipes 700
analysis commands (numerical) 881
analysis commands (text-based) 908
CMM commands (text-based) 909
contingency commands (text-based) 910
data I/O commands (numerical) 858
deleting 725
fault location commands (text-based) 910
file commands (text-based) 912
graphical user interface commands (numerical) 855
licensing commands (numerical) 900
list commands (numerical) 898
list commands (text-based) 915
User Guide
Index
load allocation commands (text-based) 914
load flow commands (text-based) 915
map coloring commands (numerical) 873
map commands (text-based) 917
messaging script commands (numerical) 902
model forge commands (text-based) 918
model I/O commands (text-based) 918
model management commands (text-based) 930
model modification commands (numerical) 890
multi-model commands (text-based) 934
numerical recipe commands 855
parameter reference (numerical) 903
analysis types 905
colors 903
results 904
phase balancing commands (text-based) 940
program operation commands (numerical) 856
QA commands (text-based) 941
recipe control commands (text-based) 913
reliability commands (text-based) 941
renaming 724
repeating the most recent script 732
results handling commands (numerical) 892
running automatically 731
script example 701
selection commands (numerical) 893
selection commands example (numerical) 898
settings commands (text-based) 943
SQL commands (text-based) 943
startup 715
Startup script wizard 716
Startup script, setting 717
syntax 700
text-based recipe commands 907
throw-over commands (text-based) 944
warehouse commands (text-based) 945
reclosers 377
deleting 383
editing 378
mechanical response times 383
Index
Model Forge commands 1038
modeling 378
Recloser editor 378
Alternate tab 381
Primary tab 381
Rates tab 381
Recloser tab 378
Results tab 382
Setup tab 380
redo 172
refreshing the map display 199
REG_101 model forge command 1071
REG_102 model forge command 1071
REG_103 model forge command 1071
REG_104 model forge command 1073
REG_105 model forge command 1074
REG_106 model forge command 1075
REG_107 model forge command 1076
REG_108 model forge command 1077
REG_109 model forge command 1078
REG_110 model forge command 1078
REG_111 model forge command 1079
REG_112 model forge command 1079
REG_113 model forge command 1080
REG_114 model forge command 1080
REG_115 model forge command 1081
REG_116 model forge command 1082
Register
see Organizer
registry
clearing 193
regression 759
general steps 759
regression files, comparing 760
regression files, creating 760
regression files, deleting 760
Regulator Setting power tool 745
examples 747
running 746
settings 745
1201
regulator Setting power tool
examples 747
regulator types 384
creating 384
deleting 386
editing 384
regulators 383, 384
adding 387
deleting 393
editing 387
managing 386
Model Forge commands 1070
optimal regulator position evaluation 574
Regulator editor 387
LDC tab 388
Rates tab 392
Regulator tab 387
Results tab 392
Settings tab 390
seasonal ratings 832
reliability 661
reliability analysis 661
about 661
additional options, setting 665
analytical model calibration 675
aspects of 667
assumptions 688
basic options, setting 663
capacity considerations 670
challenges 662
data calibration 674
data management 674
device failure rates 685
exposure factors 673
exposure zones 679
failures 676
historical outage data management 674
importance of 662
interruptions 676
isolating/switching/pickup example 688
User Guide
1202
meters 671
metric variance 670
mitigation zones 683
performing 667
process 686
processing examples 686
publishable results 669
Reliability Event Management wizard 697
ReliCauseMeta.txt file 677
results 687
results presentation 687
root causes 670
root causes, defining 677
scalars, settings up 666
setting up 662
spatial mitigation 671
supported indices 667
supporting applications 673
switching plan models 669
SynerGEE approach 662
trial and study 687
variation analysis 675
version comparison 669
Reliability Event Management wizard 697
Reliability.CreateDataSet recipe command 942
Reliability.CreateZonesAndProcessEvents recipe
command 942
Reliability.DeleteDataSet recipe command 943
ReliCauseMeta.txt 677
editing 679
file format 678
REM
Model Forge commands 1082
REM_201 model forge command 1082
repeating the last feeder selection 160
reports 456
Breaker Zone 1 report 477
Capacitor Flicker Report power tool 753
chapter report template, editing 469
chapter report template, restoring 470
User Guide
Index
check data 137
configuring output options 459
Digest 478
dockable 462
errors 460
Feeder Tie Path report 478
generating after an analysis 457
grid-style 467
harmonic load-flow report 694
HTML reports 477
impedance frequency scan report 695
including notes 460
line construction 479
master report template, editing 469
master report template, restoring 470
Node Overlap Report power tool 757
non-analysis reports 477
options affecting analysis 460
printing 460
printing selected report chapters 179
Ten-Year Growth Report power tool 755
Version 55
Voltage Optimization analysis report 595
warnings 460
warnings, suppressing 460
zones 479
resizing data columns 151
results
Broadcaster 451
viewing in the SynerGEE editor 156
Results tab
selecting attributes 445
Results Viewer 451
selecting attributes for 445
retire year
multi-year modeling 583
ribbon bar 146
right-click menus 150
rotating the map 198
rule-base, check coordination 627
Index
S
SAIDI 668
SAIFI 668
sample equipment database 67
sample model database 64
saving
model data 61
TCC as JPEG 613
TCC files 613
scalars
reliability analysis 666
scatter-plot graphs
generating from a grid-style report 473
scenario
see versions
schemas
CMM
viewing 843
model cleanup 1117
Model Forge 947
numerical recipes 855
script 733
text-based recipes 907
schemas, repairing 134
schematics 233
creating 237
editing device and section data 238
grid properties 239
opening 238
templates 234
deleting 236
templates, copying 236
templates, creating 234
templates, editing 235
templates, renaming 236
working in 238
Script editor 725
creating scripts 726
deleting scripts 729
editing scripts 727
1203
opening scripts 726
opening scripts in Notepad 727
ScriptList.AddItem recipe command 917
ScriptList.Create recipe command 916
ScriptList.Destroy recipe command 916
ScriptList.Empty recipe command 916
ScriptList.LoadFromFile recipe command 917
ScriptList.RemoveItem recipe command 917
scripts 699
automation 720
cable study scripts 721
CMM
examples 845
running using the CMM wizard 842
schema, viewing 843
writing 843
controls script 821, 822
creating 821
copying 723
creating 722
creating from the Script editor 726
deleting 724
deleting from the Script editor 729
editing 723
editing from the Script editor 727
messaging 720
model cleanup commands 1117
model cleanup script 718
model cleanup script example 718
model forge 702
Model Forge commands 947
numerical recipe commands 855
opening from the Script editor 726
opening in Notepad from the Script editor 727
PowerCalc 763
Python 705
recipes 700
renaming 724
repeating the most recent recipe 732
running 730
User Guide
1204
automatically 731
from Script wizard 731
from the ribbon bar 731
schema 733
Script editor 725
Script Wizard 729
setting the current model as the Startup script 717
startup recipe 715
Startup script wizard 716
text-based recipe commands 907
what-if analysis 484
writing 722
scripts, example 487
scripts, managing 485
scroll wheel
changing the zoom direction 200
panning the map display 197
searching 171
seasonal ratings 831
conductors 832
regulators 832
selecting 831
Summer/Winter analysis 833
transformers 833
SEC_101 model forge command 1087
SEC_104 model forge command 1087
SEC_105 model forge command 1088
SEC_108 model forge command 1088
SEC_109 model forge command 1089
SEC_110 model forge command 1089
SEC_111 model forge command 1090
SEC_112 model forge command 1090
SEC_114 model forge command 1091
SEC_115 model forge command 1091
SEC_116 model forge command 1092
SEC_117 model forge command 1092
SEC_118 model forge command 1093
SEC_119 model forge command 1094
SEC_120 model forge command 1094
SEC_121 model forge command 1095
User Guide
Index
SEC_122 model forge command 1095
SEC_123 model forge command 1096
SEC_124 model forge command 1096
sectionalizers 393
deleting 397
editing 394
Model Forge commands 1083
modeling 393
Sectionalizer editor 394
Rates tab 395
Results tab 396
Sectionalizer tab 394
sections 257
adding 259, 279
analysis results, viewing 304
annotation, adding 207
applying customer zones 817
applying growth curves 806
associating with an area of interest 223
cable conductors, applying 789
coloring based on analysis results 210
coloring by path type 216
conductors, changing 262
connecting 260
cost zones, assigning 853
customer zones, applying 817
deleting 263
designating for harmonic monitoring 693
diagram 258
disconnecting 260
distribution transformers, editing using the DTran
worksheet 297
distribution transformers, editing using the Section
editor 296
duct banks, applying 797
editing 279
exposure zones, assigning 682
force unfed 263
isolating 546
mitigation zones, assigning 684
Index
Model Forge commands 1086
modeling 258
moving 260
phase, adding 262
phase, changing 262
projects, editing using the Projects Manager 293
projects, editing using the Projects worksheet 292
projects, editing using the Section editor 290
reconductoring 261
renaming 262
rephasing 261
Section editor
Construction tab 281
Coordinates tab 303
Gen - Dist tab 298
Load - Dist tab 284
Load - DTrans tab 295
Load - Proj tab 289
Load - Spot tab 287
Properties tab 283
Section tab 280
Zones tab 301
setting coloring scheme 216
setting for analysis 434
splitting 261
tagging 172
weather zones, assigning 835
selecting
feeders 157
feeders automatically when you load a model 161
multiple feeders 157, 159
single feeder 160
substations 157
separate neutral cable conductor model 787
set points for weather modeling 825
settings
restoring defaults 191
settings file 189
details 191
settings groups 189
1205
creating 190
managing 190
Settings.LoadXML recipe command 943
short units of length 188
shortcuts
custom keyboard shortcuts 149
function keys 149
panning the map using the arrow keys 198
Show Manager 242
simple impedance cable conductor model 787
simple impedance method, conductors 310
Software Version 55
Solver
running from within SynerGEE 783
sorting data columns 151
sources
editing 247
Model Forge commands 1096
spacing
setting spacing preferences 169
spatial query mode 174
SPV files 613
SQL Dashboard 772
CMM 849
controls 849
queries 850
deleting a SQL query 776
feature locks 779
mining 779
model-in-memory feature 778
opening 773
running a SQL query 777
sample SQL queries 782
saving a SQL query 776
selecting a data type and data source 774
showing tables and fields 776
SQL commands 780
SQL queries 775
using 773
writing a SQL query 775
User Guide
1206
SQL Server data format 74
SQL.RunFromFile recipe command 944
SRC_101 model forge command 1097
SRC_102 model forge command 1097
startup defaults
restoring to factory settings 191
Startup script 715
setting the current model as the Startup script 717
specifying script type to run 715
Startup recipe script 716
wizard 716
State Master 768
status bar 148, 149
STN_101 model forge command 1101
STN_102 model forge command 1101
STN_103 model forge command 1102
STN_104 model forge command 1102
STN_105 model forge command 1103
STN_106 model forge command 1103
STN_107 model forge command 1103
subsets
about 82
getting started 82
manual creation/editing 85
types 83
with multi-year modeling 85
substation bus transformer analysis 534
substations
Model Forge commands 1100
selecting 157
subtrans 157
configuration 252
converting nodes into subtrans 246
demands 252
editing 247
modeling 245
selecting 157
Subtran editor 247
Node tab 250
Rates tab 251
User Guide
Index
Results tab 251
Subtran tab 248
Volts/Ohms tab 249
SUL (units) 188
summer ratings 831
conductors 832
enabling 831
regulators 832
Summer/Winter analysis 833
transformers 833
Summer/Winter analysis 833
SVG files
Publishing export 739
Publishing export information 744
Switch Manager toolbox tool 763
switch plans 411
creating 411
deleting 413
editing 411
Switch Plan Manager 413
switch types 400
creating 401
deleting 402
editing 401
switchable protective devices 600
switched capacitor modules, controlling 331
switches 397
adding 402
auto-transfer switch analysis 533
auto-transfer switches 407
connectivity rules 398
contingency and optimal switching analysis 415
converting a node to pad-mounted switch gear 409
deleting 407
editing 402
elbows 408
invalid tie switches and load flow 520
loop tie 253
managing 402
Model Forge commands 1097
Index
pad-mounted switch gear 408
pad-mounted switch gear, editing 410
special types 400
Switch editor 402
Rates tab 406
Results tab 407
Switch tab 403
Switch Manager toolbox tool 763
switch plans 411
switch types 400
wandering lateral tie 253
SWT_101 model forge command 1098
SWT_102 model forge command 1098
SWT_103 model forge command 1099
SWT_104 model forge command 1099
SWT_105 model forge command 1100
symbols
configuring 213
configuring map display symbols 213
configuring visibility levels 214
synchronizing the Geography view and the Map view 241
SynerGEE
environment 142
launching from the command line 184
using SynerGEE 141
windows 142
SynerGEE documentation 52
SynerGEE editor 151
multi-year modeling 583
opening 155
selecting attributes for the Results tab 445
viewing results 156
SynerGEE-MiddleLink, detailed processing 106
SynQA.GenRemDataFile recipe command 941
System Status analysis 489
SZR_101 model forge command 1083
SZR_102 model forge command 1083
SZR_103 model forge command 1084
SZR_104 model forge command 1085
SZR_105 model forge command 1085
1207
SZR_106 model forge command 1086
T
tagging sections and facilities 172
tape shield cable conductor model 788
TCC
about 604
conductor damage curves 612
copy 614
creating a new view 604
delete whole graph 615
display properties 606
explorer 605
grid properties 610
labels 610
legend display 609
lines, amp and time 610
loading files 613
measuring tools 611
moving 606
notes display 609
plotting curves 605
refreshing 615
remove curve from graph 615
saving as JPEG 613
saving files 613
setting curve visibility 606
TCC sets 612
title on printouts 615
transformer curves 606, 643
zooming 606
TCC sets 612
Technical Support 56
templates
chapter report template, editing 469
chapter report template, restoring 470
master report template, editing 469
master report template, restoring 470
schematics 234
Ten-Year Growth Report power tool 755
User Guide
1208
running 756
settings 755
terminology 53
tertiary windings 416
basic steps for modeling 416
secondary versus tertiary connections 416
setting up for a transformer 429
text-based recipes
CMM commands 909
commands 907
contingency commands 910
fault location commands 910
file commands 912
list commands 915
load allocation commands 914
load flow commands 915
map commands 917
model forge commands 918
model I/O commands 918
model management commands 930
multi-model commands 934
phase balancing commands 940
QA commands 941
recipe control commands 913
reliability commands 941
selection commands 908
settings commands 943
SQL commands 943
throw-over commands 944
warehouse commands 945
three-core cable conductor model 789
throw-over analysis 533
ThrowOver.Run recipe command 945
tie switches
Insert Tie Switches power tool 756
invalid tie switches and load flow 520
with wandering laterals 520
time
controls script 821
creating 821, 822
User Guide
Index
customer load curves/time-of-day analysis 808
features and tools 801
multi-year modeling 579
time spans in multi-year modeling 584
time multiplier, fuses 346
time of day, selecting 434
time versus current coordination
see TCC
toggling details in the map display 199
toolbars
quick access toolbar 146
toolbox 763
Capacitor Manager 765
Feeder Overview 764
Load Center Manager 765
Switch Manager 763
Toolbox tab (model explorer) 145
tools 739
transformer types 422
creating 422
deleting 424
editing 422
transformers 415
adding 425
connection models 418
curve shifting in the TCC 609
deleting 431
editing 425
managing 425
Model Forge commands 1104
network protectors 420
seasonal ratings 833
simulating underutilized 502
tertiary windings 416, 429
Transformer editor 425
LTC tab 427
Net Protector tab 429
Rates tab 430
Results tab 431
Transformer tab 426
Index
transformer model 415
transformer types 422
TRN_101 model forge command 1104
TRN_102 model forge command 1105
TRN_103 model forge command 1105
TRN_104 model forge command 1107
TRN_105 model forge command 1108
TRN_106 model forge command 1109
TRN_107 model forge command 1110
TRN_108 model forge command 1111
TRN_109 model forge command 1111
TRN_110 model forge command 1112
TRN_111 model forge command 1112
TRN_112 model forge command 1114
TRN_113 model forge command 1115
U
uncertainty analysis 487
performing 488
setting up 488
undo 172
Unfused Tap analysis 696
Unit test 99
units 185
automatic conversion 186
concepts 186
control tables 187
conversion 187
conversion rules when saving 188
generic names for length increments 188
internal units 186
setting preferences 165
tips 189
using SynerGEE 141
using the SynerGEE editor 151
V
vaults
see large customers
vector images 1175
1209
Version 55
Device Risk Ranking 696
versions
about 86
deleting 86
differences with multi-year modeling 581
loading 86
managing 86
processing details 87
sample workflow 87
saving 86
vertex reduction 267
vertices
see graphic points
views 231
Concepts view 490
creating 231
deleting 232
replacing 232
viewing 231
visibility
configuring visibility levels for map display symbols
214
Voltage Optimization analysis 594
example 596
reporting 595
running 595
setting up 595
Voltage Plot rap sheet 180
W
wandering laterals
about 253
analysis considerations 256
modeling 256
sample wandering lateral calculations 521
with fault analysis 652
with radial load-flow 520
with tie switches 520
warehouse
User Guide
1210
see equipment types
Warehouse tab (model explorer) 144
Warehouse.Drop recipe command 917, 945
warnings
report warnings, suppressing 460
weather
adjusting loads 828
weather modeling 823
defining weather conditions 824
overview 823
profiles 825
selecting seasonal rating 831
set points 825
weather profiles 825
applying to a model 827
creating 826
deleting 828
editing 826
weather zones 834
assigning to a section 835
creating 834
deleting 835
editing 834
what-if analysis 484, 485, 487
windows 142
winter ratings 831
conductors 832
enabling 831
regulators 832
Summer/Winter analysis 833
transformers 833
worksheets 739
world files for raster images 1173
Index
changing for multi-year modeling 581
year names in multi-year modeling 584
Z
zones
customer 815
exposure 679
mitigation 683
weather 834
zones report 479
zooming 196
TCC 606
X
XML data format 75
Y
year, selecting for analysis 434
years
User Guide
Index
1211
User Guide
1212
User Guide
Index
www.gl-group.com/electric